u- '  ^^  '  ' 


r,;.;^'' '<^^;v"  ^^^^\,  ^  ^  ^*    .^ 


IN  MEMJOmAJA 
J.   Henry  Senger 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/firstbpokingermaOObranrich 


FIRST  BOOK  IN  GERMAN 

CONTAINING 

THE  ACCIDENCE  AND  SYNTAX  OF  THE  AUTHOR'S 

GERMAN    GRAMMAR,   NEW   INDICES,   AND 

LODEMAN'S    EXERCISES 


By  If.  C;-^!  BRANDT^ 

HAMILTON  COLLEGE,  CLINTON,  N.Y. 


Sagton 

ALLYN    AND    BACON 


!N  MEMORfAM 


Copyright^  1884,  by  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons, 


*       »     ,'»     -3 


Coi>yright^  1888,  by  AUyn  &>  Bacon. 


PREFACE. 


AT  the  suggestion  made  by  several  teachers,  Part  I. 
of  the  Grammar  and  Lodeman's  Exercises  with  the 
complete  English-German  Vocabulary  have  been  here 
bound  together  for  use  in  secondary  schools,  whose 
younger  pupils  had  been  first  put  into  one  of  the  many 
short  grammars.  I  should  have  liked  to  include  the 
chapters  on  Accent  and  on  Word-Formation  from  Part  II.; 
but  there  are  practical  objections  to  this.  The  indices 
of  the  Grammar  are  added  to  this  unchanged. 


PREFACE   TO   THE   FOURTH   EDITION 
OF   THE   GRAMMAR. 

npHIS  is  the  first  thoroughly  revised  edition.  Of  the  criti- 
-^  cisms  of  this  work,  I  have  been  able  to  accept  and  embod}^ 
especially  those  of  Prof.  A.  L.  Ripley,  of  Yale  College,  and 
of  Prof.  George  O.  Curme,  of  Cornell  College  (Iowa),  to  both 
of  whom  I  express  my  sincere  thanks.  The  strictures  made 
upon  my  classification  of  nouns  and  upon  the  standard  of 
pronunciation  I  do  not  think  well  founded.  The  classification 
of  nouns  is  historical  and  scientific.  If  the  standard  pronunci- 
ation should  finally  settle  upon  M,  jh  (§  375)  for  g  and  not 
upon  h  (surd  stop),  nothing  would  please  me  better.  "  Hard  " 
g,  except  after  n,  is  a  bitter  pill  for  a  North  German.     To  the 


IV  PREFACE. 

objection  that  the  work  is  too  concise,  let  me  sa}^  that  I  have 
worked  hard  to  make  it  concise.  The  Accidence  and  Part  II. 
were  once  as  large  again  as  they  are  now.  The  first  contained 
too  much  syntax,  until,  following  the  excellent  method  of  the 
French  grammarians,  I  resolved  to  separate  entirely  inflection 
and  syntax.  I  have  in  this  edition  transferred  several  para- 
graphs from  Part  I.  to  Part  II.  Part  II.  is  a  historical  founda- 
tion broad  enough  for  Part  I.  to  rest  upon.  It  is  not  intended 
to  be  a  minute  historical  reference-grammar  for  teachers  and 
specialists  onl}^ 

The  word-index  has  been  very  much  enlarged.  With  the 
demand  for  the  traditional  list  of  irregular  verbs,  "which  no 
grammar  should  be  without,"  I  have  complied  so  far  as  to 
include  all  the  irregular  verbs  in  the  word-index  (see  introduc- 
tory remarks  on  page  271).  I  wanted  to  make  the  German- 
English  vocabulary  cover  all  the  sentences  and  words,  but 
found  that  it  would  swell  the  book  too  much.  It  is  complete 
only  for  Part  I.  (see  page  271). 

The  list  of  reference-books  has  been  omitted  at  the  sugges- 
tion of  Professor  Ripley. 

It  ma}'  not  be  out  of  place  to  enumerate  the  distinguishing 
features  of  the  grammar:  (1)  the  complete  separation  of  in- 
flection and  syntax ;  (2)  the  historical  treatment  of  the  latter, 
which  should  make  it  a  welcome  aid  in  the  reading  of  16th,  17th, 
and  18th  century  Literature ;  (3)  the  attempt  to  treat  German 
grammar  with  regard  to  the  present  stage  of  Germanic  philol- 
ogy ;  (4)  the  scientific  analysis  of  German  sounds  and  accent. 

The  Author. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


PAET  I.    SECTION  1. 

PAGE 

ACCIDENCE 1-47 

Pronunciation  with  Alphabets 1-5  . 

The  Articles 6-7 

Declension  of  Nouns 7-17 

Declension  and  Comparison  of  the  Adjective 17-21 

Numerals 21-23 

Pronouns 23-30 

Conjugation 30-47 

Weak  Verbs 35-37 

Strong  Verbs 37-43 

Anomalous  Verbs 44-47 


SECTION  2. 

SYNTAX. 

SPECIAL  SYNTAX 51-130 

Articles 51-55 

Nouns 56-74 

Gender 56-62 

Singular  and  Plural 62-64 

Cases 64-74 

Adjectives 74^80 

Numerals 80-82 

Pronouns 82-96 

Personal  Pronouns „ 82-85 

Reflexive  and  Reciprocal  Pronouns QQ 


vi  TABLE   OF    CONTENTS, 

PAGE 

Possessive  Pronouns ., 86-88 

Demonstrative  Pronouns 88-91 

Interrogative  Pronouns 91-93 

Relative  Pronouns 93-95 

Indefinite  Pronouns 95-96 

Verbs 97-118 

Classification  of  Verbs 97 

Auxiliary  Verbs 97-99 

Modal  Auxiliaries , 99-102 

Voice 102-104 

Tenses 104-110 

Moods 110-112 

Infinitive 113-116 

Participles 116-118 

Gerundive 118 

Adveeb 119 

Pbeposition 119-130 

Conjunction 130 


GENERAL  SYNTAX 131-154 

The  Simple  Sentence 131-135 

The  Compound  Sentence 135-147 

Coordinate  Sentences 135-137 

Subordinate  Sentences 137-147 

Substantive  Clauses 137-138 

Adjective  Clauses 139 

Adverbial  Clauses 140-147 

Word-order 147-154 


Abbreviations  and  Symbols 265 

Subject-Index 266-270 

Word-Index  and  German-English  Vocabulary 271-286 


Exercises  for  Translating  into  German,  prepared  and 

arranged  to  accompany  the  Grammar  by  A.  Lodeman       1-87 


FIRST     PART. 


FIRST    SECTION. 


ACCIDENCE. 


THE    GERMAN   ALPHABET. 
1-2. 

German  type.      German  script.         Name.     German  type.      Gennan  script.       Kame. 


^  a      ^  -^ 

S  c        ^-^ 

®  b      ^yli^y 

(g  e 

^  f 

@  g 

3^  t 

^  ! 

S  \ 


all 

bay 

tsay 

day 

(b)ay 

ef 

gay 

hah 

e 

yot 

kah 

el 


'..' .  c*  V . 


dt  X 

X   t 
U    u 

5'  /^ 


c/ 


oh 

pay 

koo 


tay 

(t)oo 

fou(l) 

vay 

Ix 

ipsilon 

tset 


Ue  uU 
iu 


ah-umlaut 
(h)ai(r) 

oh-umlaut 

oo-umlaut 


^  „    ^  au-umlaut 
(-oi) 


cX 


C 


tsay-hah 
tsay-kah 
es-tsay-hah 

(::.8h) 


PEOJSrUNCIATION^.  [3- 


PRONUNCIATION. 

The  German  sounds  are  here  only  very  inaccurately  represented  by 
English  words  and  letters.  A  fall  analysis  is  found  in  the  second  part, 
p.  160.  The  following  description,  with  a  few  key- words,  will  suffice  for 
the  beginner ;  biit  it  is  lacjint  to  be  only  a  popular  description.  As  soon 
as  tlie  ^udent  beg^ns>  ^  read,  be  ought  to  study  Part  II.,  p.  160-174. 

*  3.  ,fi\es'.m':Mn^.  father:  ^(dtx,^al,  S^i}U    a,  not  in  Eng., 
bttt  SiEiilai^  to  SOotcii  a  as  in  Sc  hand,  land:   'Slann,  £ant>, 

4.  6  =  Eng.  b,  but  surd  (  =^)  at  the  end  of  words:  Sube, 

§aube,  Sieb,  Saub* 

5.  0  if  =  Eng.  k :  Sari,  Sade,  Siicfer* 

6.  ^^  not  in  Eng.,  but  in  Scotch  as  in  loch,  A  single  guttural 
sound.  Two  kinds  :  1.  Palatal  (forward)  after  palatal  vowels, 
viz. :  e,  x,  o,  u,  a,  ti,  m,  and  in  the  suffix  ^(^en,  e.  g,,  i^,  SCac^ter, 
33lec^,  mod)te,  tuij,  ©eriic^t,  melc^,  SBatd^en,  SKamad^en*  2.  Back- 
guttural  after  the  other  vowels,  a,  0,  u,  m,  e.  g.,  ac^,  ^a&j,  Soc^, 
Suc^,  Saud^  (betrog  in  N.  G.).  In  S::^arfrei'tag  and  in  foreign 
words  =  k:  E^ara'fter,  S^or;  also  like  f^  in  foreign  words: 
e^ampa'gner,  (^angie'ren,  finance* 

7.  b  =  Eng.  d,  but  surd  (=  t)  finally:  bu,  boc^,  35at>,  lub. 

8.  c,  long,  similar  to  Eng.  a,  ay,  as  in  pay,  pate,  rate  ;  short, 
like  Eng.  e,  as  in  met,  e:  gel^n,  33eet,  ttJert;  e:  rec^t,  SBette* 

9.  f  =  Eng./:  l&offen,  ipafen,  fii^ren,  gtagge. 

10.  g  =  Eng.  g,  but  surd  (=^)  finally:  glauben,  ^^lagen, 
graben;  but  2:ag,  3ug,  fragte,  trug,  23alg. 

IL     ]^  =  Eng.  /i  if  it  stands  initially  :   iputtt),  ipofe,  ipafe* 
After  a  vowel  and  after  a  t  it  is  silent :  ^e^n,  fe^(e)n,  fa^,  t^un, 
a^ot,  S^al     See  the  dropping  of  ^,  p.  159. 
12.    i  similar  to  Eng.  i :  bin,  flnbe,  brtnge, 
I  or  ie  =  Eng.  ee  uifeet :  'oitx,  ftegen,  mir,  'tit,  3gel,  Siber* 


24]  PRONUISrCIATION.  3 

13.  I  similar  to  Eng.  y:  {ung,  Jagen,  S^gi** 

14.  f ,  if  =  Eng.  k:  ^a^e,  Sacfe,  ipalen. 

15.  I  similar  to  Eng.  I :  Sage,  kc^ett,  too^,  ©aal,  kit)* 

16.  m  =  Eng.  m ;  SUJolc^,  @aum,  f(^n?tmmen. 

17.  n  =  Eng.  n.  1.  Initially,  finally,  and  before  a  den- 
tal: ?lagel,  nun,  fein,  feni^en,  gant,  gunb*  2.  In  the  stem-syllable 
before  t,  and  combined  with  g  like  Eng.  ng  in  sm^,  smgrer  ; 
3lnfattg,  ©anger,  ginger,  33anf,  fenfen,  6linlen;  but  an^ge^fommen, 
ttn^jge^euer* 

18.  B  =  Eng.  o,  oa,  in  hold,  foal :  Sole,  Soot,  tot,  rot,  Soo^, 
lo^,  ^l^on  (clay),  o  not  in  Eng.,  but  short  Sc.  o;  e,  g.:  SBo(^e, 
So(^,  (Btod,  9lo(l  (not  at  all  like  Eng.  stocky  rock,  but  see  p.  164). 

19.  ^  =  like  Eng.p;  ))Iagen,  ^appt,  2:rapper,  ©alo'p))* 

|jf  =  p  +/;  5)funt),  9la))f,  ®um))f,  tapfer*    In  Eng.  only  in 
accidental  juxtaposition,  e.  g.,  "  a  cap  for  him,"  "  stop  for  me." 
p^  in  foreign  words  only  =/;  ^^^ilologie',  Xtk^xa'p)^. 

20.  q  always  followed  by  n,  similar  to  Eng.  qu:  quer, 
Dnafl,  Duart,  fcequem* 

21.  X  unlike  Eng.  r.  1.  Trilled:  Slegen,  Slac^e,  fern,  f5urt, 
treu*  This  is  the  standard  r.  2.  Uvular  or  guttural  in  K  G.^ 
very  much  like  the  guttural  (^,  but  sonant. 

22.  f,  ff,  §,  §  =  Eng.  surd  s:  ipaug,  ^aufe,  Staffer,  glu§, 
SJZn^e,  fein ;  but  initially  and  after  a  vowel  it  begins  surd  and 
ends  sonant,  as  in  N.  and  M.  G.  Standard  unsettled.  But 
see  p.  175. 

23.  f c^  =  Eng.  sh  (surd) :  fc^iden,  f(!^en!en,  l^afc^en,  ©(i^tange. 

24.  f},  f)j  =  fc^t,  fc^^i  initially  in  the  standard  pronuncia- 
tion and  in  S.  and  M.  G.  But  in  the  middle  and  at  the  end 
of  words,  in  N.  G.  also  at  the  beginning  of  words  =  Eng.  st, 
sp;  \6^t,  f^p:  ©tein,  ©trage,  ©tu^l,  ©pag,  fprtefen;  st,  sp:  ^a% 
toiifte,  berften,  SBurft,  SSefpe,  ^afpeln.    N.  G.:  ©))ie^,  ©toct. 


4  PEONtJNCIATION.  [25- 

25.  i,  «)  =  Eng.  t :  ^t,  ^atte,  Zi^at,  Sfla^t. 

26.  it  =  Eng.  00  in  too :  iput,  SCut,  Slume,  Suc^,  S3u^le, 
u  =  Eng.  u  in  j9w^ ;  Sutter,  (lu^en,  ©utoen* 

27.  t)  =  Eng./ in  German  words:  SSater,  grei^el,  ijteU  ti  = 
German  It)  in  foreign  words:  ^ita'x,  i^inbijie'ren,  SSafa'n^* 

28.  HI  like  Eng.  v  dento-labial :  SBettcr,  SBaffer,  marnen. 
After  f ^  labio-labial  like  u  after  c|,  but  not  quite  like  Eng.  w  : 
(B6^m\kx,  (S(imeig,  (B6^mUt.    But  see  p.  170. 

29.  y  in  foreign  words  and  ^§,  ^f  =  Eng.  x :  2llexant)ev, 
2Ba4^,  guc^^,  giic^pn,  fe^^* 

^  =  ii^  which  see. 

30.  J,  ^  =  Eng.  ts,  as  in  ca/s,  ra^5 :   3««9^  S^^^flr  SBarac, 

c  in  foreign  words  before  e,  if'f^/azzz  ts :  cerebral,  Safu'r,  Sifa'be, 
S^Ho'p;  but  the  spelling  is  unsettled:  3^9^'^^^/ 3^^^^^^/  2t^ti\VL'x^ 

31.  Modified  Vowels  (TTmlauts). 

tt  long  =  Eng.  ai  in  fair:  SSater,  0lat)er,  jla^Iem* 

a  short  =  Eng.  and  Ger.  c  :  ^ant>e,  2Cant>e,  fatten. 

B  not  in  Eng.  It  has  the  lip-position  of  o,  the  tongue- 
position  of  c:  long  in  Vo]t,  lofert,  ^er^bge;  short  in  Setter,  ^Mc, 
(Serotte. 

ii  not  in  Eng.  It  has  the  lip-position  of  n,  the  tongue- 
position  of  i:  long  in  SWii^le,  Sutler,  ^ii^teln;  short  in  SJZiitter, 
Siinbe,  Siittel. 

^  =  ii^  as  in  S^a'tt,  S^pre'jfe,  only  in  foreign  words. 

32.  Diphthongs. 

ai  (rare)  and  ci  =  Eng.  i  in  find:  ^ai\tx,  ^ai,  (eife,  mi^, 
Weiben*      an  =  Eng.  ou  in  house :  blau,  ipau^,  'Man^. 

au  and  ctt  similar  to  Eng.  oi  in  exploit :  Wd\x\t,  lauten,  S3eute, 
leute* 


37J  PEOKUNCIATIOIT.  5 

ftuantity  of  Vowels. 

33.  Vowels  are  long  in  an  open  syllable,  e»  g.y  2;a^ge^, 
jo^gen,  33u^4cr.  They  are  also  indicated:  1.  By  doubling,  but 
only  in  the  case  of  a,  e,  o:  ®aal,  ©eele,  50^oo^»  2.  By  I)  after 
the  Yowel  and  after  t :  ipa^n,  ^%m,  i|n,  3;l)ran,  Z^^x.  3.  By  c 
after  i:  Uefc,  ZiiXf  ^ieL  4.  a  and  e  are  generally  long  before 
r,  rt,  rt) :  t»ar,  rar,  l)er,  njert,  tverDen,  jart,  5>fert),  Short  in  fertig 
(<  Sci^rt),  aSarte,  (S^arte,  §era,  ©(^mera. 

34.  The  vowels  are  short  before  more  than  one  consonant: 

35.  6  counts  as  a  single  consonant ;  it  becomes  ff  medially  (see 
'*  Rules,"  §  12),  6.  g.,  ^lug  —  gluffe^,  gluffe ;  flief en  —  flo§,  gefloffen.  The 
vowel  remains  long  before  inflectional  endings,  e.g.y  lokn,  hl^,  gelobt 
(but  ge'^abtf  gentoc^t);  also  in  a  closed  syllable,  when  the  stem- vowel  stands 
in  an  open  syllable  under  inflection,  e.  g.,  Xag,  J^a^^ge^;  B«9'  Bu^ge^*  But 
see  p.  175. 

Since  ^  cannot  be  doubled,  there  is  no  telling  the  quantity  of  the  pre- 
ceding vowel  from  the  mere  looks  of  the  word:  6.^.,  long  in  S3uc^  — 
S3u(^e<3;  Xuc^  —  3:u($c^ ;  brac^  — hac^en;  but  short  in  23ad)  —  S3a(^e5 ;  lac^em 
wac^en.    As  a  rule,  shortness  may  be  expected. 

36.  The  division  into  syllables  differs  somewhat  from  the  English 
custom.  The  "  Rules  "  §  26  show  how  words  are  divided  at  the  end  of  a 
line.  The  following  examples  will  illustrate  sufficiently;  ^^^Betl^  fuc^^te, 
be^^c^rettf  S3ee^re»  ijer^lrrett,  ge^irrt,  SSafsfer,  (Stra^fe,  lo^fc^en,  roster,  ^tn^gcr  (but 
see  17),  ^e^xe,  SBci^jen;  ^it^je,  ^ar^))fen,  :6e=^o5^ac^tcn,  nati^fa^gen,  be^glau^ 
I>i^gen» 

37.  German  orthography  is  now  regulated  by  the  government,  and  the  student 
who  is  to  write  German  should  provide  himself  with  the  official,  9JcgeIn  unb  SBorterwers 
aeic^ni§  fur  Me  beutfd)e  9Jec^tf^relBung  tn  ben  preu^ifji^cn  ©(^ulen.  33erltn.  It  is  a  small 
convenient  guide  of  46  pages,  with  a  quite  full  word-list    See  361,  2. 


THE   AKTICLES. 


[38- 


THE  ARTICLES. 

38.     The  definite  article  is  ter,  Me,  tia^  +  the  ;  the  indefinite, 
cin,  eine,  tin  +  one,  an,  a. 

The  definite  article  declines: 


maec. 

fern. 

neuter. 

common  gender. 

Sing,  N.  Ux 

tie 

ta^ 

Plu, 

tie 

G.  te^ 

ter 

beij 

ter 

D.  ^em 

feer 

tent 

ten 

A.  ten 

Me 

U^ 

tie 

e  indefinite  article  declines: 

Sing,  N.  etn 

eine 

em 

G.  etne^ 

einer 

etne^ 

D.  einem 

einer 

einem 

A.  einen 

eine 

ein 

39.  The  articles  are  unaccented. 

The  definite  article  is  the  weakened  demonstrative  pronoun,  which 
has  chief  stress.  It  retains  the  short  original  forms  of  the  same.  The 
indefinite  article  is  the  weakened  numeral  ein^  which  also  has  chief  stress. 
To  mark  the  demonstrative  pronoun  and  the  numeral,  they  are  some- 
times printed  spaced  or  with  a  capital  letter  :  ^ux  Slnen  ©d^ritt;  fo  bifl  t)U 
fret,  F.  4563  ;  but  ©^  ttjar  einmal  ein  ^onig,  F.  2212.  ^er  Wla^x  !ann  ge'^n 
(Sch.).  (£<5  t^ut  mh  Un'  fc^ott  m^i  bag  \^  tid^  in  b  e  r  ©efeHf^aft  \i\)\  F. 
3470-1. 

40.  Owing  to  their  lack  of  accent  both  articles  suffer  aphseresis  and 
apocope,  and  contraction  with  the  preceding  word,  most  frequently  with  a 
preposition :  bent  andba^  are,  according  to  good  usage,  combined  with  the 
following  prepositions :  an,  auf^  ki,  bur(^f  fiir,  l^inter,  in,  uOer,  urn,  nnter,  ijon^ 
ijor,  and  ju;  e.  g.,  ant,  an^,  auf^r  in^,  um^,  ^om,  etc.  In  general,  contractions 
with  dissyllabic  prepositions  are  rarer  in  the  classics,  common  in  the 
spoken  language,  which  allows  the  contraction  of  ben  whether  dative  plu- 
ral or  accusative  singular  masculine  with  the  above  and  also  with  other 
prepositions.  Some  such  are  even  in  the  classics  :  in  =  in^n,  F.  2429,  win 
©eJTel/"  Lessing's  Nathan,  „in  'BaCt,"  „m  ^o'pf,"  t,m  S^ag."    Sn,  uin  contain 


43]  DECLEl^SION   OF  NOUl^S.  7 

long  (see  389,5)  consonants  and  the  article  is  not  absent,  as  is  generally 
explained.  In  conversation  is  heard:  um  ^xm,  »Ott  Saunten,  aufn  ^elbern, 
tttit^n  ^anbettf  burc^^tt  2Balb»  The  apostrophe  in  auf^^  iikr^^,  etc.,  is  not  at 
all  indispensable.  2)er,  dative  singular  feminine,  combines  properly  only 
with  ju  into  jur* 

41.  Attractions  of  the  definite  article,  especially  of  the  neuter,  to  pre- 
ceding words  other  than  prepositions  are  common  in  the  spoken  lan- 
guage, e.g.,  M  ttJitt'i3  S3u^  f^oXtn,''  „tx  ^at  ftc^'^  S3ein  gckod^en*"  wSBinbV^ 
g)ferb  ^aug  an"  (G.).    „Unb  ^a^'^  ^ujTen  »erlcrttt«  (F.  4485). 

1.  The  aphaeresis  of  „ein"  common  in  the  spoken  language  is  also 
found  in  the  written,  e.  g.,  «aBarf  auf  ^nen  ^i\x\ji  bie  ^anbf(^u^^"(Uh.).  Bold 
abbreviations  are  these  in  Chamisso's,  ,/^  t»ar  mal  ^ne  ^a^enfontgin*"  The 
dropping  of  ein  before  mai  is  not  unusual :  „%^  war  xaoX  ein  ^aifer ;"  «^U(^ 
tt)ar  mal  ein  5r^t«  (Bii.).  Notice  fo'tte  for  fo  eine.  The  early  N.  H.  Q.  (16th 
century)  etm  for  eittem  (comp.  M.  H.  G.  eime  for  eineme),  einn  or  ein  for 
einen  occur  still  in  some  South  German  dialects.  In  M.  H.  G.  the  aphae- 
resis of  ""ein"  is  unheard  of,  while  the  definite  article  is  much  more 
pliant  than  in  the  present  classical  language.  Apocope  of  the  same  is 
still  allowable  in  certain  S.  G.  dialects. 

DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

42.  There  are  three  systems  of  Declension,  the 
Strong  {Vowel,  Old),  the  Weah  (Consonant,  n-Beclension 
or  Jfew),  and  the  Mixed. 

The  strong  declension  {see  43,  1)  has  (e)g  in  the  geni- 
tive singular ;  the  weah  has  (e)n  in  all  cases,  singular 
and  -plural,  except  in  the  nominative  singular ;  the 
mixed  has  (e)0  in  the  genitive  singular,  (e)tt  in  the 
whole  plural. 

General  Rules. 

43.  1.  Feminine  nouns  never  vary  in  the  singular. 

2.  The  only  case-endings  are  (e)^  for  the  genitive  singular 
and  (e)n  for  the  dative  plural. 

3.  e  in  the  case-suffix  ought  to  stand  in  nouns  ending  in 
\,  ?r  \^,  a,  ^  i,  ii* 


6  DECLEl^SION  OF  NOUNS.  [44- 

e  is  always  dropped  after  el,  en,  em,  er,  c^en,  lein.  In  other 
cases  it  is  optional.  If  tlie  genitive  singular  has  t^,  then  the 
dative  singular  has  e  as  a  rule:  ipaufe^,  ju  §aufe* 

a.  Distribution  of  nouns  among  these  declensions  according 
to  gender: 

1.  The  bulk  of  feminine  nouns  belong  to  the  n-declension. 
No  neuters  at  all. 

2.  To  the  strong  declension  belong  mainly  mascuhne  and 
neuter  nouns,  and  a  few  feminines. 

3.  The  mixed  declension  includes  a  few  masculine  and 
neuter  nouns. 

Strong  Declension, 

44.  We  distinguish  for  practical  reasons  four  classes, 
according  to  the  formation  of  the  plural : 

1.  No  sign  unless  it  be  umlaut:  ba^  SEunter,  Me  SEunter;  Ux 
aSater,  tie  Sdter. 

2.  -t  without  umlaut:  ter  Sag,  tie  Sage;  ta^  So^,  Me  Sofe. 

3.  -e  with  umlaut :  ber  ©o^n,  tie  ©o^ne  ;  tie  ^raft,  tie 
^rafte. 

4.  -er  always  with  umlaut:  ta^  Sat,  tie  Satcr;  ta^  ^au^, 
tie  ipaufer* 

45.  FmsT  Class. — a.  No  sign: 

Sing.  N.  ter  (Spakn  tag  ®ewerk  ter  Sngel 

G.  teg  ©jjateng  teg  ©eujerbeg  teg  gngelg 

Plu.  D.  ten  ©paten  ten  ®emer6en  ten  Sngein 

All  other  cases  singular  and  plural  like  nominative  singular. 

b.  With  umlaut: 

Sing.  N.,  D.,  A.  ter  gaten  ter  Sruter 

G.  teg  %attm  teg  Sruterg 

Plu.  N.,  G.,  A.  tie  Saten  tie  Sriiter 

D.  ten  gat  en  ten  Sriirern 


48]  DECLEJS^SION"   OF   NOUKS.  9 

46.  To  this  class,  which  never  take  e  in  the  G.  and  D. 

sing.,  belong: 

1.  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  in  -el,  -n,  -en,  -d^en,  -lein, 
-fel,  e.  g.,  ter  §eBel,  Der  Mttcx,  t)er  23ot)en,  ter  ipopfen,  tia^  ^punticben, 
Da^  ^tolein,  ra^  3^atfeL 

2.  Neuters  of  the  form  (53e-e,  e.  g,,  ba^  ®etrette,  Oefcbmetbe* 

3.  The  names  of  kindred  in  -er:  SSater,  Sruber,  2;o(^ter,  ^Ulutter, 
©d^mager,  all  with  umlaut.     Also  l:er  ^dfe» 

4.  Certain  nouns,  if  they  take  -n  in  the  nominative  singu- 
lar, as  they  may  according  to  usage:  ter  gelfen,  tier  SSrunnen,  tev 
Zxop\m,  ter  (Sc^reden  (these  so  generally).  The  following  not 
so  frequently  in  the  written  language:  ^er  gun!e(n),  23al!e(n), 
griei?e(n),  ©et)an!e(tt),  ®efaae(n),  (53Iaube(n),  §aufe(n),  5^ame(n), 
(Same(tt),  @d)at)e(tt)- 

47.  1.  5ltem  (Dbem),  SSrobeni/  Stbatrtf  SSrofam  stand  isolated.  The  plural, 
if  it  occurs,  is  the  -e  of  the  next  class.  SBrofamen,  1,  is  more  common 
than  SBrofame.     See  501. 

2.  All  nouns  sub  4,  except  ^riebe,  ©efaEc,  and  ®eban!e,  were  weak  in 
M.  H.  G.,  and  are  not  yet  fully  established  in  the  strong  declension. 
Since  usage  is  unsettled,  they  might  all  be  put  under  the  mixed  or  weak 
declension. 

48.  1.  The  nouns  of  this  class  that  take  umlaut,  besides  the  names 
of  kindred  in  -er,  are  :ber  5lpfel  +  apple,  ^dtx  +  acre,  SBoben  +  bottom, 
soil ;  ^abeitf  thread  (bie  %ahtn  +  fathoms),  ®arten  +  garden,  ^a^n,  harbor, 
+  haven ;  jammer  +  hammer,  JBaben  ( ?),  shutter,  shop  (store)  ^  9JJangel,  . 
want,  S^agel  +  nail,  Dfen  +  oven,  stove ;  ©attcl  +  saddle,  <B^ahm,  harm 
(but  e^  ift  @(^abe,  it  is  too  bad);  ©(^nakl  beak,  S^wager  brother-in-law,^ 
^o^df  bird,  +  fowl.  Two  neuters  take  umlaut :  Mo^tx  +  cloister  <  L. 
damtrum,  and  ^a^tx{?),  camp. 

2.  In  none  of  these  is  there  any  cause  that  could  produce  umlaut  as  in 
i  and  jo  stems  or  before  ~ir.  Umlaut  has  arisen  from  analogy  with  these. 
Skater,  3)lutter,  S3riiber,  Stockier  had  umlaut  already  in  M.  H.  G.  This  way 
of  forming  the  plural  is  on  the  increase,  because  it  is  so  convenient  and 
some  way  of  indicating  the  plural  seems  necessary.  Sagen,  Imager,  etc., 
still  sound  objectionable,  but  have  no  worse  and  no  better  claim  to  cor- 
rectness than  the  above. 


10  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.  [49- 


49.    Second  Class. — Plural 

-e,  no  umlaut. 

Sing,  N.,A.  $unt) 

Me  X;rangfal 

bad  3a^r 

G.  U^  ipunte^ 

^er  Drangfal 

bed  3at)red 

D.  ^em  ipun^e 

ter  Dran^fal 

t)em  3a^rc 

^Zw.  N.,G.,A.  ipunk 

£rancifale 

3a|re 

D.  ipun^en 

'Erangfalen 

3a:^ren 

50.  To  this  class  belong: 

1.  A  small  number  of  feminines  in  -nid  and  -fa(,  e,  g.,  tie 

Drangfal,  ^^riibfal;  tie  ginflernid,  Setriibnid,  pi.  -niffe. 

2.  Many  masculines;  some  caj)able  of  umlaut,  but  without  it. 
These  may  be  considered  exceptions  to  the  third  class:  ber 
5lal+eel,  2lar  eagle,  2lrm  +  arm,  Sefu(^  visit,  2lm6o§  +  anvil, 
£)a(^d  badger,  I^o^t,  wick,  @rab  +  degree,  §a(m,  blade,  +  haulm, 
ipuf  +  hoof,  §unb  dog,  +  hound ;  SadJd  salmon,  Saut  sound, 
Suc^d  +  lynx,  5)fab  +  path,  fun!t  +  point,  @^u^  +  shoe,  Za^  + 
day,  @toff  material,  +  stuff;  Z\^xon  +  throne,  3Serfu(^,  attempt, 
and  a  very  few  others. 

3.  Masculines  in  -ig,  -{i)6^,  -ing,  -ling,  -(e)nb,  -at,  -id,  -id)t, 
e.  gr.,  Uv  greuttb  +  friend,  ©dnferidj  +  gander,  ^aMcbt  +  hawk, 
Bering  +  herring,  3^tid  (pi.  3Itijye)  pole-cat,  SungHng  -{-youth, 
MnxQ  +  king,  50^olA  salamander,  SJionat  +  month, 

4.  Many  neuters,  among  which  monosyllabics ;  those  with 
the  prefix  ®e-;  in  -nid,  -fal :  ba5  3a^r+year,  @ef(^en!  present, 
(13efdngmd  (pi.  -jTe)  prison,  (Sd^idfat  fate. 

51.  The  group  sub  2  is  on  the  decrease,  because  we  cannot  tell  on 
the  surface  whether  a  noun  has  umlaut  or  not.  To  avoid  the  diflSculty, 
several  nouns  form  very  anomalous  plurals :  ber  fdau,  bie  SBauten  instead 
of  S3aue*  Of  Wloxh,  pi.  2JJorbe  is  rare,  rather  9J?orbt|aten;  of  ©c^mutf,  pi. 
<B^mudt  is  rare,  rather  ©c^mucf fac^en ;  ®(^luc!,  pi.  @(^Iu(fe  is  seldom  used, 
since  it  stands  in  the  singular  after  a  number,  e.  g.,  breiv^^lud  Srannt" 
min.    See  173. 


56]  DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS.  11 


52.     Third  Class.— Plural 

-e,  with  umlaut. 

Sing.  N.,  A.  t)er  ©tamrn 

W  ^yx\ 

bie  Sraut 

G-.  De^  (Stammer 

Der  ^u^ 

t)er  Sraut 

D.  l)em  (Stamme 

t>er  ^u^ 

ter  Sraut 

^w.  N..A.,a  (Stammc 

^ii^e 

Sraute 

D.  ©tdmmett 

^ii^eit 

Srauten 

53.     To  this  class  belong : 

1.  The  majority  of  strong  masculine  nouns,  mostly  monosyl- 
labics  :  ter  ©efang  +  song,  ®e6rau(^  use,  SaU  +  ball,  (53aj^  + 
guest,  @o^rt  +  son,  etc. 

2.  A  number  of  feminine  nouns  :  bie  9lttgfi  +  anxiety,  5lxt 
4-  axe,  33an!  +  bench  +  bank,  Srunft,  heat,  lust ;  Sruft  + 
breast,  gauj^  +  fist,  grui^t  +  fruit,  ®an5  +  goose,  ®ruft 
vault,  §attt)  +  hand,  S^dwi  +  hide,  ^luft  +  cleft,  ^!unft  in 
compounds  as  in  Sinfunft  +  income;  iayx^  +  louse,  Suft  air, 
Suft  desire,  ^a^t  +  might,  ^Wagb  +  maid,  servant ;  ^au^ 
+  mouse,  5la(^t  +  night,  5^a^t  seam,  ^lu^  +  nut,  ®au  +  sow 
(Sc^nur  string,  ©tabt  city,  S3ant)  wall  (of  a  room),  SBurfi 
sausage,  Z\xn\t  guild  ;  3lu^fluc^t  evasion,  Slrmkufl  cross-bow, 
®efdjtt?ulfl  +  swelHng. 

54*  Only  two  modern  neuter  nouns  belong  here,  the  last 
of  which  is  of  doubtful  gender,  viz.:  ^a^  glo§  raft  (429,  1); 
ter  or  r^a^  (E^or  +  choir,  chorus. 

55.  No  neuters  belong  here  really  except  0.  H.  Q-.  men,  ba^  9J?eer,  bie 
Mtixt,  now  according  to  2d  Class,  ^er  and  ba^  S|or,  borrowed  from 
church  Latin  '*  chorus,"  has  joined  the  group  sub  2.  %<x^  S3oot,  bie  336tc 
because  it  was  also  ber  S3ootf  a  modern  borrowed  word  <  D.  ®ie  S3oote 
is  more  elegant.  !^a^  9lo^r,  bie  9?o^re  is  not  good.  Besides  there  is  bie 
9io^re,  feminine  singular,  the  pipe,  tube. 


12 


DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS, 


[56- 


56.    Fourth  Class. — ^Plural  -er,  always  with  umlaut: 


Sing.  N.,  A.  tad  3lati 

D.  tern  3flate 

Flu.  N.,  G.,  A.  9lal?er 

D.  Un  9lat'em 


Strtum 
te^  3t*rtumd 
tern  Sfi'tume 

Srrtumer 
ten  Si'J^tiimertt 


57.  To  this  class  belong: 

1.  About  sixty  neuter  monosyllabics :  t)aS  3lag  C^]^^),  ^l(itt, 
^aij,  gad),  etc. 

2.  All  in  -turn,  whether  masculine  or  neuter:  ta^  iperjogtum, 
ter  3f^eic^tum. 

3.  Some  mascuhnes,  viz.:  ter  SbfettJtc^t*,  T)om*,  ©eifl,  @ott, 
Mh,  '^ann,  Drt*,  3^anD,  ©traud)*,  23ormunt,  SBalt),  5Burm. 

4  A  few  neuters,  with  the  prefix  ®e-  :  tae  (S^emat^,  ©emiit, 
®efd)lect)t*,  ®eft*t*,  (^efpenfl,  ®emant*. 

58.  Only  neuters  had  this  plural  -er  at  first.  Of  the  sixty 
sub  1,  some  twenty  form  a  different  plural,  and  usage  is  unset- 
tled; so  do  those  sub  3  and  4  marked  with  a  *.  In  the  fol- 
lowing a  distinction  is  made  in  meaning  between  the  different 
forms  of  the  plural: 


Subl, 

2,4,- 

ta^  Sant), 

33ant)e,  ties, 

Sanger,  ribbons. 

Denfmal, 

-male,  monuments, 

-maltv,  figurative  sense. 

Xing, 

Swinge,  things. 

Dinger,  coll.,  e,  g.,  girls. 

(53eri*t, 

®eftd)te,  visions. 

©eftdlter,  faces. 

®en?ant), 

®eirante  (poetic). 

©emanter  (comnrionly). 

SanD, 

Sante  (poetic). 

Santer  (commonly). 

^i*t, 

gic^te,  candles  (only), 

2id)ter,  lights. 

edji(r), 

masc.  ©diilte,  shields, 

©(j^il^er  (sign-board). 

©tift, 

masc.  (Btifte,  pencils, 

(^lifter,  institutions. 

2:ud), 

Zuijt,  kinds  of  cloth, 

^^ii^er,  cloths,  shawls. 

SBort, 

3Borte,  words  (their  mean- 

^Sorter,  parts  of  speech 

62]  DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS.  13 

Sub  3 — 

ter^Jlanit,    Wlanmn,  retinue,  9Jlanner,  men. 

Drt,  Drten,  D.  pi.  only,  Derter,  places,  towns. 

59.  J^rummer  occurs  in  the  plural  only.  But  a  weak  plural  Strummertt 
occurs  in  the  classics.  Singular  Xrumm  +  thrum.  «^au^ten;"  as  dative 
plural,  is  isolated  in  ,/ju  ben  ^aupten."  SRann  was  originally  a  cor^^-stem, 
^rnann-  (see  Kluge's  Diet.).  The  form  3)^ann  in  fiinfjtg  9)?ann  is  the  real 
nominative  plural  of  the  co/i^-stem.  SJJertfc^  was  originally  neuter,  being 
an  adjective  0.  H.  G.  mennisco.  ^a^  3)lenfd),  bie  WliX[\6)ix,  now  implies  a 
slur,  speaking  of  woman  =  strumpet  (see  Kluge's  Diet.).  3Bic^t  in  S3ofe*' 
tov^i  was  also  once  a  neuter,  +  wight.     See  431. 

60.  In  early  N.  H.  G.  many  of  the  neuters  still  occur  without  -er. 
^inbe^  ^inb  tcerben  beinc  Serf  preifen  (B.).  ^inber  unb  ^inbe^  ^inb  (erjd^len) 
»on  bent  |)olf  no(^  unb  feinen  ®(^aren  (Sch.). 

The  plural  in  -i  is  not  elegant.  (Ba^el^r  Sungen^,  f^rauen^,  i^rautein^ 
are  more  than  colloquial,  tliough  found  in  the  classics.  Tiiis  -^  is  strictly 
Low  German,  and  identical  with  English  s.  The  parts  of  speech  are 
used  with  <3:  bie  ^6)^,  bie  5lber^,  bie  2Benn^. 

Weak  or  u-Declension. 

61.  Characteristics:  (c)tt  in  the  plural  and  also  in  the  sin- 
gular of  mascuhne,  except  the  nominative. 

Masc.  Fern. 

Sing.  N.  ^er  Sote  Whole  sing,  3unge 

G.  te^  SSotett 
All  through  sing,  and  plu.  Whole  plu,  ^nno^tn 

Only  feminine  and  masculine  nouns  belong  to  this  declen- 
sion. 

Like  3wttge  decline  all  feminines,  except :  1.  SiJlutter  and 
2;o(^ter.  2.  The  few  in  -ni^  and  -fal  (see  50.  1).  3.  The 
strong  of  the  3d  class  (see  53,  2). 

62.  Of  the  masculines  belong  here: 

1.  All  of  two  or  more  syllables  ending  in  t,  except  ^afe  and 
the  doubtful  strong  ones  sub  4,  1st  class  (see  46). 


14  DECLEISrSTON   OF  KOUKS.  [63- 

2.  The  following  whicli  generally  do  not  show  the  e,  which 
belongs  to  them:  t)er  SSiir,  Sauer,  Surf^,  giirft,  ginf,  (^td,  ®efet((e), 
®raf,  ^ageftola,  ipelt),  §err,  §irte,  Snfaffe,  ?[Renf(^,  ?!}lo^r,  ^axv,  Dc^fe, 
5)rin3,  9)fau,  (Spa^,  @|)ro§,  ©teinme^,  2:^or  (fool),  SSorfa^r* 

3.  Many  nouns  of  foreign  origin,  which  are  difficult  to  tell 
from  strong  nouns,  many  of  them  names  of  persons  and  ani- 
mals. They  generally  end  in  -t,  -nt,  -ft,  with  the  suffix  -Qxap^, 
-ax&i,  -txat,  -Io9(e),  -nom,  e.  g.,  '^ot't,  Sanl»i't,  3^i^tteli't,  5)citrio't, 
5lr(^lte'ft,  ^ome't,  9)Iane't,  ^onfona'nt,  ©tuDe'nt,  g)^anta'ft,  Selegra^^, 
©eogra'p^,  9)atria'rd),  ^ona'rd^,  3lutofra't,  l^emofra't,  5ljbolo'g(e), 
9)^i(oIo'ge,  2lftrono'm,  Defono'm  (pohte  for  "  farmer ") ;  also 
Zi^xa'nn. 

4.  Some  names  of  nationalities  in  -ax,  and  -er,  e.  g.,  ter 
Wn^ax,  33ulga'r(e),  ^ata'x,  SSaier,  g)ommer,  Gaffer. 

5.  The  adjective  used  as  a  noun  when  preceded  by  the  arti- 
cle (see  220). 

Kemark.— An  isolated  form  is  now  „auf  Grben."  Grbe  was  either  weak  or  strong. 
But  „in  (S^ren,"  „mit  ^^reuben"  are  old  datives  plural  (see  434, 1).  Notice  the  spelling 
^onigin,  pi.  ^oniginnen. 

Mixed  Declension. 

63.     Characteristics  :  G.  sing,  (e), the  whole  plu.  (e)n. 

Only  mascuUne  and  neuter  nouns  belong  to  this  declension, 
and  very  few  have  not  double  forms  for  genitive  singular  and 
for  the  plural.     The  following  generally  belong  here : 

1.  5luge,  Sett,  Sttbc,  ^e^atter,  §em^  ^orbeer,  ^a^  muM,  D^x, 
g)anto'ffeI,  (Bc^mera,  (See,  ©tad^el,  ©taat*  ^a6>h<ix,  Untertt)an,  ^Setter 
sometimes  retain  in  genitive  singular  the  (e)n  of  their  former 
declension.  S3auer,  peasant  sub  62,  2  is  sometimes  classed  here. 

"La^  ipera  inflects  G.  te5  iperaen^,  D.  bem  ^erjen,  A.  ta^  §era; 
allowing  for  its  being  a  neuter,  which  always  has  nominative 
and  accusative  singular  alike,  it  really  comes  under  1st  Class, 
strong,  sub  4  (see  46).  (Si^merj  rarely  has  (SdJmerjen^.  I^er(Sportt, 


64]  DECLEKSION^  OF  NOUKS.  15 

te^  ©porn^,  has  taken  an  -n  in  the  singular,  but  the  old  weak 
plural  (Bpoxtn  is  still  the  rule,  though  (Spornen  occurs,  ^l^ronett, 
borrowed  in  M.  H.  G.  <  Gr.-L.  thronos,  is  very  rare.  The 
plural  of  Dom  is  either  X)ortte  (old)  or  generally  l)ornen ;  also 

The  mixed  declension  is  quite  modern,  and  does  not  exist  in  M.  H.  G, 

2.  Foreign  nouns  in  -or  (o  long  and  accented  in  the  plural, 
short  and  unaccented  in  the  singular),  e.  g,,  X)tx  X)o'ftor,  lit 
Dofto'rcn,  tcr  ^^rofe'jjor,  tie  3)rofeiTo'rett»  Also  3tt|Vft,  Sntere'fle, 
3ume'I,  (Statu't,  and  others. 

Colloquially  one  hears  sometimes  -n  after  nouns  in  -eX  and  -er:  bic  i&umaicrn,  lobsters; 
©ticf  ein,  boots ;  but  they  are  not  to  be  imitated. 

Declension  of  Foreign  Honns. 

64.  Those  which  are  fully  naturalized  come  under  the 
declensions  already  treated  of.  It  remains  to  speak  of  those 
not  at  all  or  partly  naturahzed,  and  their  inflection  is  very 
irregular  and  complicated. 

1.  Those  that  retain  their  foreign  inflection,  €»  g.,  3^fu^ 
(£^riftug,3efu  SWfti;  'Maxi' a, 'Sftame;  9»ot)ug,  pi.  9Robt ;  Safu^,pl. 
€afug ;  €^eru6,  pL  SfceruHm  ;  Sonto,  pi.  Sonti ;  ©aefulum,  pi. 
©aefula;  Sorb,  pL  £orti3;  S^empu^,  pi.  Zempoxa,  Their  number 
is  decreasing. 

2.  Those  which  take  a  German  plural  ending,  -en  for 
instance,  and  do  not  inflect  in  the  singular,  e.  g. :  ta^  T>xama, 
pi.  Dramen  ;  Z^tma,  pi.  ZUmm  ;  3ttbii?i't)uum,  pL  3ttt)iiJtt)uen. 
©lobu^,  ^i^t^mn^*  But  these  are  also  found  with  -^  in  geni- 
tive singular,  and  then  come  under  the  mixed  declension. 

3.  Nouns  whose  foreign  plural  ended  in  -ia  take  -ten; 
<&tiit)ium,  pi.  ©tnMen  ;  ©i^mnaftum,  pi.  ©i^mnaften.  The  ending 
of  the  singular  may  have  been  lost,  and  they  have  -^  in  geni- 
tive singular,  as  2lt)iJc'rB,  3^artici')>,  Semitta'r^  SKinera'I,  Sofftl,  pL 


16  DECLENSION   OF   NOUNS.  [65- 

2l^i)erBien,  goffiUen,  etc.  Notice  5)ri'ma5,  fxima'ttn ;  Wi\a^,  Sltk'n^ 
ten;  ,^rifi^,  ^rifen*  On  the  whole,  there  is  a  great  deal  of  ir- 
regularity, and  therefore  freedom,  in  the  inflection  of  foreign 
words. 

Declension  of  Proper  Nouns. 

65.  1.  The  names  of  nations  and  peoples  are  inflected  both 
in  the  singular  and  plural.  Those  in  -er  (except  Sater  and 
5)ommer,  where  -er  is  not  suffix,  denoting  origin)  go  according 
to  1st  Class  (strong).  All  the  others  go  according  to  the 
jt-dedension  :  Der  hamburger,  ^e^  ^amburger^,  etc.,  D.  pi.  Un 
^amburgem*  But  ter  ^a6^\t,  De^  @adjfen;  Der  fxtn^t,  u^  $)reu^en, 
etc. 

2.  Certain  geographical  names  (see  147),  which  always 
have  the  definite  article,  are  treated  like  any  common  noun, 
e.g.,  t)er  Difeein,  De^  ^^nn^,  laC^  gtc^telgebirge  t)e^  -e^;  ta^  Sp§/  ^^^ 
(JlfaffeS;  tie  ©^n^ei^,  ter  S(^tx>ei3,  etc. 

3.  Names  of  persons  are  uninflected  if  preceded  by  the  arti- 
cle (an  adjective  or  title  between  article  and  name  makes  no 
difference),  e.g.,t)Z^  ^arl,  te5  ^aifer^  ^arl,  tern  grogen  grietrid). 
If  the  title  follows  the  name,  or  if  the  name  in  the  genitive, 
modified  by  an  adjective,  stands  before  the  noun  upon  which 
it  depends,  then  the  name  takes  -^,  e.  g.,  U^  3^etd)  Sut)tt)ig^  te5 
grommen,  U^  gropen  griecrid)^  ^enerale. 

4.  Names  of  persons,  places,  and  countries  without  an  arti- 
cle take  a  genitive  in  -c^x  ®oet^e,  ®oet^e^;  Snglanti,  Snglant'^; 
^Unna,  ^Inna^*  But  names  of  males  ending  in  a  sibilant,  if 
inflected  at  all  and  an  apostrophe  is  not  preferred,  and  femi- 
nine names  in  -e,  form  a  genitive  in  -m^,e.  g.,  Sfflax^n^,  gran^en^, 
Wlaxkn^,  ©op^ien^.  Surnames  in  a  sibilant  certainly  prefer  an 
axx)strophe,  e.g.,  9J^ufau^'  5)oI!^mard^en,  Dpiid'  S5er!e,  (3an^'  3:ot. 
Names  of  places  in  a  sibilant  are  constructed  with  i)on :  tie 
3letc^^frei^eit  ^on  ^o'ltjlanj,  i^ie  Sefefligungen  ^on  ^axi'^. 


69]  DECLENSI0:N^   of   AJDECTIVES.  17 

66.  A  dative  and  an  accusative  in  -en  of  names  of  persons  are  liardly 
in  use  now,  as  e.g.,  (Sc^illcrn,  ©oet^ettf  ^lopfiotfen.  Christian  feminine 
names  retain  them  more  easily  than  masculine,  e.g.,  ^ajl  bu  3)krien 
9efprod)en  ?  See  68,  3.  Such  genitives  as  9)?utter^  2:ob,  2:antett^  ©e^itrt^tag 
are  hardly  proper. 

67.  Plurals  of  names  of  persons  are  formed  in  various 
ways.  The  general  rule  is  :  -e  for  masculine  and  -e(n)  for 
feminine  names,  e.  g,,  ipetttric^e,  ?0^arieu  ;  but  also  Srun^tlte, 
Slifakte*  -5  forms  the  plural  of  masculines  ending  in  a  vowel 
and  of  feminines  in  -a:  5lnna^,  §ugo^. 

68.  1.  Here  also  belongs  the  plural  of  surnames  denoting  the  mem- 
bers of  the  family,  formed  by  -^  if  ending  in  a  consonant  not  a  sibilant ; 
by  -(e)n  if  ending  in  a  vowel  or  a  sibilant  (occurs  only  in  familiar  lan- 
guage however),  e.  g.,  ©teinbruggettf  the  Steinbriigges ;  ©ul)Iing^/  the 
Suhling  family  ;  ^M^*  Other  endings  for  the  plural,  generally  of  for- 
eign names  however,  are  -ne,  -nen  t  Sato,  Satone;  ©cipionen/  Dttone,  and 
Dttonen ;  but  the  first  n  belongs  to  the  stem  of  course.  Compare  L. 
Scipio,  Scipionis,     This  ^  was  perhaps  originally  a  G.  sing. 

2.  Biblical  names  retain  foreign  inflection :  S^angelium  2)lattjaet,  itt  Scftt 
e^rijlOf  lariat  |)eimfuc^un9» 

3.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  rule  in  the  classical  writers 
before  Goethe's  death  is  not  the  rule  now.  Lessing  wrote  be0  Sutf)cr5,  bed 
SJlelanc^t^on^ ;  Goethe,  Seiben  be^  jutiQen  SBert^er^.  The  dative  and  accusa- 
tive in  -en  are  the  rule  in  them,  the  exception  now,  |)al)en  8ie  ^arlcn 
gcfc^riekn,  2Bil^cImen  gefu(^t  ? 


DECLENSION   OF  THE  ADJECTIVE. 

69.  The  adjective  is  inflected  according  to  two  sys- 
tems of  declension,  the  Strong  and  the  Weak.  It  is 
inflected  strong  when  there  is  no  limiting  wordy  before 
it ;  lueah,  when  there  is  an  article  or  demonstrative 
pronoun.     It  is  uninflected  in  the  predicate. 


18 


DECLENSION   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


[70- 


1.  Strong  : 

masc. 

fern. 

neuter. 

common  gender. 

Sing.  N.  guter 

gute 

gute^ 

Plu.  N.  gute 

G.  gute5 

guter 

guted 

G.  guter 

D.  ^utern 

guter 

gutem 

D.  guten 

A.  o;\xitXi 

gute 

gute^ 

A.  gute 

2.  Weak: 

masc. 

fern. 

neuter. 

Sing.  N.  t>er 

gute 

tie  gute 

ta^  gute 

A.  t)ett  gutcn 

bie  gute 

ba^  gute 

All  other  cases,  sing,  and  pZit.,  guten. 

Notice  that  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  of  the 
feminine  and  neuter  forms  are  alike. 

70.  After  ein,  letn,  and  the  possessive  pronouns  the  adjec- 
tive is  strong  in  the  nominative  singular  of  all  genders  and  in 
the  accusative  singular  of  feminine  and  neuter,  since  it  is  like 
the  nominative.     The  whole  pi.  is  weak. 

Sg.'^.  ein  grower  Dic^ter,     eine  rote  ^trfc^e,    tin  l^errltcbe^  (^et)t(^t 
G.  eine^  grofen  !Di(fcter^,  etner  roten  ^irf^e,  eine^  ^errltc^en  ©ebtc^te^ 
D.  einem  grogen  ^ic^ter,  einer  roten  ^irfc^e,  einem  ^errlid^en  ®et)i^te 
<  A.  einen  grogen  2^ic^ter,  eine  rote  ^irfc^e,   tin  ^errli(^e^  (Setic^t. 

71.  Adjectives  ending  in  -cl,  -er,  -en  as  a  rule  drop  the  c  of  these 
suflBxes  when  inflected,  sometimes  however  the  e  of  the  case-ending  -en, 
e.g.y  ebcl,  ebler,  cblc,  eblc^;  magerr  ntagrer,  magre,  magre^;  cigen,  eigner,  eigne, 
cigne^ ;  but  ^eitern  and  ^eitren,  eblen  and  ebeln.  Those  in  -er  like  to  retain 
both  e's:  :^etterer,  l^eitere,  l^eitere^.  Note  therefore:  ©in  magrer  Dc^fe,  cined 
tttagern  or  magren  £)dbfen,  etc. ;  ber  l^eitere  or  '^eitre  |)immet,  bc^  ^etterettr  '^eltreit, 
or  :^eitern  ^immel^,  etc. ;  mein  etgnc^  |)au0,  meine^  eigenen  or  cignen  ^aufea,  etc. 
For  |o(5^,  :^o:^er,  |o|er  ^e^eg  see  490,  3,  h. 

72.  The  genitive  singular  masculine  and  neuter,  -i^,  is  now  so  regu- 
larly replaced  by  -en,  that  this  should  perhaps  appear  in  the  paradigm. 
Though  strictly  according  to  rule,  -e^  has  become  the  exception ;  -en  has 
prevailed  since  the  17th  century.  Voss,  Klopstock,  and  Grimm  opposed 
it.  Goethe  favors  it.  Sinr  fein,  the  possessive  and  the  demonstrative 
pronouns  never  allow  -en  for  -e^;  never  f einen  2)^anne^,  biefen  S3uc^e^. 


75]  COMPARISON^  OF  ADJECTIVES.  19 


COMPARISON   OF   THE   ADJECTIVE 

73.     Adjectives  are  compared  by  means  of  the  inflectional 
suffixes  -er  and  -(e)ft,  e,  g, : 


(ositive. 

comparative. 

superlative. 

iung 

iiinger 

iiingfl 

fdsbrt 

fdjbner 

fc^i3nft 

rei* 

reii^er 

reid)i^ 

Those  in  -el,  -en,  -er  lose  this  e  before  the  comparative  -er ; 
but  retain  it  and  lose  the  e  of  -ejl  in  the  superlative,  e.  g,, 
mager,  magrer,  magerft;  tjunltl,  bunfier,  bunfelft*  e  in  -eft  is  as  a 
rule  retained  after  ti,  t,  ^,  fe,  3,  rc^,  §,  and  ft,  but  not  necessarily, 
e,  g.,  lautefte,  gemiffefte,  fii^ejle*  ©ropte  alone  is  classical,  but  in 
the  spoken  language  fii^te,  ^etpte,  !ur3te,  etc.,  are  heard.  „§od)" 
retains  the  former  ^  in  the  comparative  ^o^er,  and  ^  in  na^e 
becomes  6^x  tidc^ft*     See  490,  3,  b. 

74.  The  umlaut  generally  takes  place,  but  it  is  very  diffi- 
cult to  tell  when  it  does  not.  A  not  small  number  are  doubt- 
ful, e.  g,,  bla^,  gefunt),  fromm,  etc.  No  umlaut  in  :  1.  Those 
with  the  stem- vowel  au,  e.g,,  lau,  Blau,  etc.  2.  Foreign  ones: 
6rai),  noBel,  etc.  3.  Participles:  Befud^t,  genjantt,  etc.  4.  Deriva- 
tives :  flraf6ar,  f(!^atf^aft,  langfam,  unglauBIid),  etc.  5.  Sunt,  Manf, 
t)um))f,  falf(^,  flac^,  fro^,  ^o^l,  ^ol^,  fa^I,  liar,  la^m,  la§,  lo^,  matt, 
morfd^,  platt,  )jlum|),  rafd^,  ro^,  run^,  fanft,  fatt,  fc^laff,  fdjlan!,  fcbrojf, 
(larr,  ftol^,  flraff,  toG,  ^oE,  wa^r,  s^i^m,  gart. 

75.  The  comparative  and  superlative  forms  are  dechned 
just  like  the  positive.     Examples  : 

©rbgerer  ©pag,  cjrogereg  or  gr5geren  ©page^,  etc. ;  ber  gro^ere 
©pag,  ^e^  gro^eren  @pa§e^,  etc. ;  tin  grbgerer  ®|jag 

^larfte^  3Baflfer,  ba^  flarjie  SSaffer,  eitt  Harfte^  ffiaffer. 

©Dlerer  ^O^antt,  ber  eblere  mam,  ein  et)lerer  9Hann;  eitelfter  Surf^, 
ber  eitelfle  Surfcb,  tin  eitelfter  33urfc^. 


COMPARISON   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


[76-^ 


§eifrer  (Banger,  ber  ^eifrere  ©anger,  etn  ^eifrerer  ©anger,  G.  eine^ 
l^eifreren  ©angers,  etc. ;  ter  ^etferfte  ©dnger^ 

76.     1.  Irregular  Comparison. 
By  the  use  of  different  stems : 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

gut  +  good  beffer,  adv.  kg  +  better  beft  +  best 

ijiel  me^r  +  more  meift  +  most 

mel^rer  me^rfl 

gering  or  menig         minter  mintefl 

®ut  and  i)ie(  are  never  compared  regularly.  SRe^rer  and  me'^rji 
are  due  to  double  comparison.  „?!}^e^rft,"  tbougli  occurring  in 
Goethe  and  Schiller,  is  not  classical.  SHefcr  and  mtnber  are  really 
not  adjectives,  but  are  used  adverbially  and  substantively.  „33ag„ 
(me^r,  very,  much)  is  now  archaic.  „To^  k§  ^e^t  it)n  ^er  tinfe 
^ann''  (Bii.).  giirtag  (onward);  „Bag"  also  means  fe^^r,  ftarl:  „X)ad 
mac^t,  er  t^i  ft(^  kg  ^erijor''  (Sch.).  „Urtt)  mart)  nicbt  me:^r  gefel)n" 
(G.).     SJlorgen  ein  me^rere^  =  to-morrow  (I  will  write)  more. 

2.  Defective  and  Redundant  Comparison. 

a.  There  is  a  class  of  adjectives  derived  from  adverbs  and 
prepositions  : 

Adv.  or  prep.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

(auger)  auger  augerft 

(Winter)  Winter  ^interjl 

(inner)  inner  innerjl 

(ntet)er)  nieter  (rare)  niet)erfl 

(ob[er])  ober  okrft 

(unter)  unter  unterjl 

(^or,  fort)  ijorter  Dor^erjl; 

For  the  derivation  of  these  adverbs,  see  551,  3.  The 
superlative  suffix  -ft  is  added  to  the  comparative.  This  is 
due  to  their  former  full  comparison,  as  for  instance,  O.  H.  G. 
pos.  Idntaro,    comp.  hintaroro,    superl.  hintarSst.      The  pres- 


77J 


NUMEEALS. 


21 


ent  comparatives  ^tntere,  oBere  are  not  even  now  felt  as  real 
comparatives  ;  duf  er  has  a  spurious  umlaut ;  „oberfte"  and 
„\oxUx\k"  are  colloquial ;  „^ort)er''  comes  from  „fort/'  O.  H.  G. 
fordar  ;  compare  Eng.  further,  which  has  nothing  to  do  with 
far. 

Comparative. 

mtttler 

(e^er,  adv.)  +  ere 


Positive. 

(mlttel)  +  middle 
(e^e,  conj.) 
(lap  +  late) 
(fiir) 


(ftoer,  adv.) 


Superlative. 

mittelft 

erft  +  erst 

le^t  +  last 

giirft  (subst.)  + first 


The  first  compares  regularly  like  an  adjective  in  -eL  The 
positive  occurs  only  in  compounds  now,  and  the  comparative 
has  the  force  of  the  positive. 


NUMERALS. 


77.  Cardinals. 


eitt^,  +  one 

^xozx,  +  two 

trei,  +  three 

i)ter,  4-  four 

fiittf,  +  five 

fecbd,  +  six 

fteben,  +  seven 

a&i,  +  eight 

neutt,  +  nine 

ge^tt,  +  ten 

elf,  ei(f,  olf,  +  eleven 

gwelf,  gnjolf,  +  twelve 

treije^n,  +  thirteen 

tJter^c^n,  +  fourteen 

fiinfae^n,  +  fifteen 

\t&i{^)lt^xi,  +  sixteen 

awanaig,  +  twenty 

cin  unt)  stpan^ig,  -p  twenty-one 


3met  uttD  smanjig,  +  twenty-two 

Ixtx  unt)  smanjig,  +  twenty-three 

treipig,  -f  thirty 

ein  unb  Iret^tg,  +  thirty-one 

ijteratg,  +  forty 

fiinfaig,  funfatg,  +  fifty 

fed)^aig,  fec^atg,  +  sixty 

fteB(en)aig,  +  seventy 

acbtaig,  +  eighty 

neunaig,  +  ninety 

^untert  (ta^  §unt>ert),  +  a  huD- 
dred 

{ixn)  ^unbert  unt)  etn(^),  +  a  hun- 
dred and  one 

(cin)  ^untert  unt)  imx,  +  a  hun- 
dred and  two 

(tin)  ^unbert  (unb)  yt^n,  +  a 
hundred  and  ten 


22  KUMERALS.  [78- 

(eitt)  ^unt)ert  nn'ti  ^toan^i^,  +  a  hundred  and  twenty 

(etn)  6untert  tin  unt)  atx>an3ig,  +  a  hundred  and  twenty-one 

(ein)  ^un^ert  ac^t  unD  ac^tjig,  +  a  hundred  and  eighty-eight 

gnjei^utttert,  +  two  hundred 

trei^untert  fec^^  unt)  fieBatg,  +  three  hundred  and  seventy-six 

taufent)  (^a^  ^aufent),  +  a  thousand 

(ein)  taufent)  unt)  ein(^),  +  a  thousand  and  one 

(ein)  taufent)  t)xd  unb  ijierjig,  +  a  thousand  and  forty-three 

(ein)  taufent)  ein^untert  or  elf^untiert,  +  a  thousand  and  one 

hundred 
ein  taufent)  ad^tfeunbert  brei  unb  ac^t^ig  or  ac^tge^n  ^unbert  ^rei  unb 

ad^t^ig,  +  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  eighty-three 
brei(mal)  ^unbert  taufenb,  -f  three  hundred  thousand 
tim  ^iUio'n,  +  a  million 
eine  SJlittia'rbe,  a  thousand  millions 
eine  23ilIio'n,  -j-  a  billion 

78.  Inflection. 

Fully  inflected  are  only  tim,  jttjet,  brei,  as  follows  : 


Masc. 

Pern. 

Neuter. 

N.  einer 

eine 

ein(e)^ 

G.  tint^ 

einer 

tim^,  when  used  substantively. 

N.  ein 

eine 

ein,    like   the    indefinite    article 
when  used  attributively. 

„^^  war  etner  bem^^  ju  ^eqen  ging"  (Ch.)  ;  „dn^  »on  beiben/'  one 

of  two  things. 

N.  gwei 

G.  jmeier 

D.  gnjeien         A.  gmei 

N.  brei 

G.  breier 

D.  breien          A.  brei 

79.  Older  inflections  were  masc.  jtr>cen,  fern.  jttJO.  3»ei,  the  neuter, 
has  crowded  out  the  masculine  and  feminine  forms,  which  may  still 
be  found  in  the  older  modern  classics,  and  still  in  use  in  the  S  Q-. 
dialects.  3Ba^  imkn  rec^t  tjl,  ift  breien  ju  enge,  ^urc^  jweier  Beugen  2??unb 
t»irb  attcr»artd  bie  Sa^r^eit  funb  (F.,  I.  3013).    Bwecrtf  bie  mit  mir  iikrfu^ren 


81] 


PRONOUNS. 


23 


♦  ♦  .  .  (Uh.)  3tt)D  ^ofen  eine^  3:u(3^^f  cut  from  the  same  cloth.  «3tt)o 
Sungfern  in  ben  beilen  Sa^ren"  (Gellert).  The  plurals  jwcie  and  breie  are  iu 
analogy  with  the  strong  noun  and  adjective  declensions  From  4-13 
the  e  in  the  plural  represents  O.  H.  G.  i  when  they  were  ^-stems,  fiinfe  < 
fimfi.  The  only  other  case  in  which  these  numbers  are  inflected  is  the 
dative  plural  (in -en):  auf  aHen  S3ieren  friec^enf  aUe  SJiere  ijon  fic^  ftrecfen;  mit 
(Bec^fen  fa|ren;  su  2)reiett«  ^mm,  jtDeien  are  according  to  the  adjective 
inflection. 

80.  Ordinals. 

The  ordinals  are  formed  from  the  cardinals  by  adding  -te 
to  the  numbers  from  2-19,  and  -fte  from  20  on. 

(Der)  erfle,  +  first  feihfte,  +  sixth 

imxit,  +  second  l^^^e^nte,  +  sixteenth 

^ritte,  +  third  S^anatgfle,  +  twentieth 

»ierte,  +  fourth  l^unbertfte,  +  hundredth 

fiinfte,  +  fifth  taufeti^fte,  +  thousandth 
Their  inflection  is  that  of  adjectives ;  jit^eiter,  ter  imik,  eitt 

jweiter;  G.  einee  jn^eiten*  See  438, 1. 


PRONOUNS 

81.  Personal  Pronouns. 

Special  forms  for  gender  in  the 

Common  gender. 

Bingular. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

III. 

Masc.            Fern. 

Neuter. 

Sing,  N.  icfi 

U 

er            fie 

e^ 

G.  meiner 

Reiner 

feiner 

feiner       i^rer 

feiner 

(mein) 

(ijcin) 

(fein) 

(fein) 

(fein,  e^) 

D.  mix 

tir 

ficD 

i^m         i^r 

i^m 

A.  mid^ 

ti(^ 

ft* 

ifett          fie 

e^ 

Plu.  N.  n?ir 

fte 

G.  unfer 

euer 

— 

iferer 

(uitfrer) 

(eurer) 

D.  un^ 

iniij 

ft* 

i^nen 

A.  utt^ 

euc^ 

ft* 

He 

24  PROl^OUNS.  [82- 

The  first  and  second  persons  and  the  plural  of  the  third 
person  are  of  common  gender.  The  singular  of  the  third 
person  has  a  form  for  each  gender. 

82.  In  the  genitive  singular  the  longer  forms  in  -er  are 
common;  the  others  are  now  archaic  and  poetic,  e,  g.,  „2$er^ip^ 
meinnic^t''  (the  flower).  „3c^  UnU  ^Eein/'  etc.  (G.).  The  length- 
ened forms  eurer,  unfrer  are  not  yet  sanctioned,  though  common 
in  the  spoken  language,  and,  especially  eurer,  not  very  rare  in 
the  classics,  e.  g,,  „(2Ci^  ^^)  B^t  Za\d  Surer  felbft  nic^t  ac^tet"  (Sch.). 
,,'^ann  feetiarf  e^  unferer  ntc^t,,  (Sch.).  The  genitive  singular  neu- 
ter „e^"  occurs  still  in  certain  constructions,  generally  called 
an  accusative:  „(5r  i)at  eg  feiiten  $e^(  tag  ♦  .  .  ."  (Sch.).  3c^  Hn 
eg  mtoe*   gg  nimmt  mic^  2Bunter.     (See  183,  199,  2.) 

83.  Reflexive  Pronouns. 

For  the  first  and  second  persons  the  personal  pronouns 
serve  as  such,  e.  g.,  ic^  fiircbte  mtdj,  toix  freuen  ung,  i^r  fc^eut  euc^. 
For  the  third  person  the  forms  are  made  up  of  the  personal 
and  the  old  reflexive  pronouns  : 

Maec.  and  neuter.       Fern.  Common  gender. 

Sing,  G.  feiner      (iker,  pers.  pron.)      Plu,  (ifcver,  pers.  pron. ) 
D.,  A.  ftA         fic^  W 

84.  The  reciprocal  pronoun  has  no  special  form ;  as  such 
are  used  ung,  eu(^,  ftc^,  einantier,  meaning  "each  other,''  "one 
another."    Ex.:  3^r  |Wai]t  cud).     STnr  [(^elten  einant)er  nic^t. 

The  Possessive  Pronouns. 

85.  The  possessive  pronouns  are:  metn  +  my;  letn  +  thy; 
fein,his,  its;  il)r,  her;  unfer  -f  our;  euer  +  your;  t^,  their;  3^^*^ 
your ;  tcr  meine  +  mine  ;  ter  teine  +  thine,  etc. ;  Ux  meiuige  + 
mine;  ter  teinige  +  thine,  etc. 

They  are  inflected  like  adjectives  (see  69);  but  the  first 


87]  PROKOUi^s.  25 

group,  meitt;  Mn,  feiit,  etc.,  like  the  indefinite  article  (see  38), 
in  which  the  nominative  singular  masculine  and  the  nomina- 
tive and  accusative  singular  neuter  are  uninflected.  e  ,g,  : 

Neuter.  Feminine. 

Sing.  N.,  A.  meitt  Zuii  teine  9lid)te 

G.  metne^  Zuift^  Reiner  ^iiiitt 

D.  meinem  Zu6^t  teiner  9lid)te 

Flu.  N.,  A.  mtim  ZMtt  teine  S^t^tett 

G.  meiner  ^u(Ser  teiner  5^id)tett 

D.  meinen  S^ii^ern  teitten  S'iii^ten 

For  the  declension  of  ^er  meine,  ter  mtinxQt,  see  the  weak 
adjective,  69,  2.  The  rest  stand  uninflected  used  prediea- 
tively  and  when  they  follow  the  noun  (now  archaic),  e,  g,, 
3Bae  mdn  ifi,  ta^  ift  Uin  nnr)  tua^  tein  ift,  ta^  ijl  mein  (B.).  Du 
Ibaft  ta^  Jperje  mein  fo  gan^  genommen  ein  (Song). 

86.  Sucr,  (Sure,  ©ctncr,  ©ctnc  are  often  abbreviated  into  @nj.,  ©r.,  ©e. :  ©e,  SDZajeftat, 
©ttj.  SBol^lgeBoren.  3^ro  is  archaic,  e.  g.,  3^vo  ©naben.  It  is  an  imitation  of  the  old 
G.  bcro  (see  89).  It  does  not  occur  before  the  seventeenth  century.  It  stands  for  mas- 
culine and  feminine  singular  and  plural :  ^f}xo  ©naben,  ©mlnenj,  ®ur(i^tau(i^t. 

87.  The  possessive  pronouns  form  certain  compounds  with  m^tn, 
f^alhtxif  tx>itlen/  and  gleic^ett.  Ex. :  metnetwegen,  i'^rettDcgen,  mtmt^alhzn,  \^xt^^ 
gleti^en,  cure^gletc^eti*  The  compounds  with  wegen  and  l^alben  are  really 
D.  plu.  meinen  iDegen,  betnen  ^alben.  After  n  sprang  up  the  excrescent  t  = 
ttteinentwegen,  beinent^alkn,  current  in  the  sixteenth  century.  These  became 
the  now  classical  meinctwegcn,  beinet^alben,  though  the  longest  forms  are 
still  heard ;  also  meintl^alknf  even  ntcint^l^al^en^  occur,  but  they  are  not 
good.  SD^einetwtllen  <  ntementtt)itlen  <  mcinentt)illen  are  original  accusatives, 
e.  g.,  urn  ntetnen  tvtilen  =  for  my  sake. 

The  origin  of  i^re^gleic^en^  etc.,  is  not  so  clear.  ®Iet(^tn  is  vrithout 
doubt  the  adjective  used  as  a  noun  and  governing  a  preceding  genitive, 
which  was  at  first  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pronoun  and  became  later 
the  possessive  pronoun  agreeing  with  gleic&en  (M.  H.  G.  ^ne  gelichen). 
But  whence  d  ?  Is  it  the  genitive  sign  -e^  in  compound  nouns,  Siek^^ 
Brteff  Si)?ittag^jhinbe,  which  was  looked  upon  as  a  mere  connective  ?  (See 
618, 2.)    In  IVL  H.  &.  was  a  Gen.  mines,  dineSy  which  with  miner ,  stood  for 


26 


PRONOUKS, 


188- 


m%n,  almost  exclusively  before  aeUbes.   But  beinc^glcic^cn  is  not  old  enough 
to  connect  with  M.  H.  G.  dines  selbes. 

Other  compounds  with  the  possessive,  like  meine^teiU,  meincrfeit^  (see 
652),  are  clearly  genitives. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

88.  These  are  :  1.  ter,  ^ie,  bag  +  the,  that ;  2.  Vxt\tx,  biefe^ 
Mefe^  +  this ;  jener,  jene,  jetted,  that,  +  yon.  The  first,  when 
used  with  the  noun,  differs  only  in  accent  and  not  in  declen- 
sion from  the  article  (see  39).  When  used  substantively 
(without  the  noun)  it  declines  : 


Masc 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

Common  gender. 

Sing.'^.  Uv 

bie 

tag 

Flu,  tie 

G.  U^m 

beren 

teffen 

teren 

beg 

ber 

teg 

terer  (ter) 

D.  tern 

ter 

tern 

benen 

A.  X)tn 

tie 

tag 

tie 

89.     The  spelling- 

of 

,,be§«  for 

,,bc^' 

'  is  unwarranted. 

It  implies  that 

it  is  an  abbreviation  of  ,M\ftn,"  which  it  is  net, 

^2)ero''  is  the  O.  H.  G.  form  retained  in  certain  phrases,  as  in  bero 
©naben*     T>txtntmo,tn,  ^^Ikn,  etc.,  are  forms  like  meiuetnjegen,  etc. ,  but . 
rarely  lose  the  it  before  t.     For  their  explanation  see  87. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neuter. 

90.         tiefer  tiefe  tiefeg  and  tteg  +  this 

jener  jene  jeneg  -f  yon,  that 

These  are  declined  Hke  strong  adjectives,  and  stand  adjec- 
tively  and  substantively:  tiefe  geter,  tiefeg  Sintenfa^,  jener  Saurn. 
3eiteg  tort  ift  mein  35uc^. 

91  Another  group  of  demonstrative  pronouns,  sometimes 
called  "  determinative,"  consists  of  : 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

terjenige 

tiejenige 

tagjenige,  the,  that 

tierfelbe 

MefelBe 

tagfelbe,  the  same 

terfelMge 

tiefelbige 

tagfelMge,  the  same 

felber,  felbjl  (uninflected),  felbiger 

felbtge 

felMgeg,  the  same 

faldj(er) 

fo^(e) 

fo((^(eg),  +  such 

92]  PRONOUNS.  27 

1.  The  inflection  of  the  first  three  is  that  of  „ter"  and  a 
weak  adjective,  e,  g,,  berjenige,  te^ienigen,  t^emienigen,  etc.  Their 
composition  is  apparent,  -ig  is  the  usual  adjective  suffix  (see 
525,  1). 

In  the  16th  century  bcr  is  still  separated  from  felb-,  \i\\-,  and  earlier 
the  latter  were  even  declined  strong,  ber  jcncr,  bcm  felkm,  but  they  soon 
followed  the  n-declension.  „2)er  icne,"  from  which  wberienige"  developed, 
becomes  obsolete  in  the  17th  century.  wDerfclMge''  <  ,/berfelbe.".  Accent : 
be'rienige,  but  berfe'lk, 

2.  ©elBer  is  a  stereotyped  form  like  iJoHer,  and  felbfl  is  a  geni- 
tive singular  of  felB,  M.  H.  G.  selhes.  The  excrescent  t  appears 
first  in  the  16th  century. 

3.  ©old)  is  inflected  like  any  adjective,  even  with  -en  in  the 
genitive  singular,  e.g,,  foI(^enfali^,  folc^eu  ®IauBen5»  It  may  be 
uninflected.  always  if  followed  by  iin  and  generally  if  followed 
by  another  adjective.  An  apostrophe  after  foI(^  is  uncalled 
for.  (Sold)  ein  W^iaxm,  folc^  f(^one  Slurnen*  ^xnt  folc^e  SSeleiDigung 
!ann  x6)  nic^t  ijergeffen.    2(U  er  folc^e^  fa^  .  ♦  >  .  (B.). 

92.  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

2Ger  -f  who ;  nja^  -f  what ;  tvelc^cr  +  which  ;  todi  fiir  dxif 
what  sort  of. 

1.  2Cer  declines : 

Masc.  and  fern.  Neuter. 

N.  mx  xoa& 

G.  iDcffen,  ttje^  wejfen,  ttjed 

D.  n^em  

A.  mn  tra^ 

Sc§  or  ttjef^:  n)ea  as  befTen  t  bed.  See  89.  The  genitive  lengtheneQ 
by  -en  like  bee  >  beffen  was  not  yet  established  in  the  16th  century, 
2Be^  is  now  archaic,  except  in  compounds,  e.  ^.,  we^l^al^,  t^e^wegen.  For 
weffentl^alBen,  see  beffent-,  berent^alkn,  87,  89. 

2.  S3el(^  4-  which,  what,  declines  strong.     Before  „cin''  it  is 


28  PROisrouKS.  [93- 

always,  and  before  an  adjective  it  is  often  left  uninflectecl, 
also  in  poetry  when  used  adjectively:  SCeld)  ®etummel  ^tragen 
auf !  (Sch.).  aCeld)  eln  ©efii^I  (F.  1011).  ffiei^ev  mann  mx  e^  ? 
3.  2Ca0  fiir,  tua^  fiir  ein,  what,  what  kind  of.  „Sin''  alone  is 
inflected  like  the  indefinite  article  if  used  adjectively;  like  a 
strong  adjective  if  used  substantively:  „3Ca^  fiir  Serge,  roa^  ]\xx 
SBiiften  ♦  .  ♦  .  trennen  un^  ^enn  nod)?'' (Le.).  S3a^  fiir  ein 33aum 
tjl  ta^  ?    2Ba^  fiir  Dinte  ifl  Die5  ? 

93.  Relative  Pronouns. 

1.  !Der,  ^ie,  la^,  which,  +  that,  who,  declines  like  the  demon- 
strative, but  the  genitive  plural  is  never  ^erer  :  Reiner  ftegte  nod). 
ter  nidjt  geftritten  ^at  (Bo.). 

2.  SBelc^er,  trelc^e,  trelc^e^,  +  which,  who,  that,  always  declines 
strong:  "Da^  Su^,  tt?el(^e^  ic^  gelefen  babe. 

3.  SBer,  +  who,  whoever.  The  inflection  is  the  same  as  that 
of  the  interrogative:  2Ber  e5  (auc^)  fei,  whoever  it  be. 

4.  2Ba5,  +  what,  whatsoever.  The  inflection  is  the  same  as 
that  of  the  interrogative  :  2Ba^  er  (au(^)  fagen  ma^,  no  matter 
what  he  says. 

Indefinite  Pronouns  and  Indefinite  Numerals. 

94.  winterer,  ant)ere,  anbere^,  -f  other,  different :  ^er  anbere, 
tic  ant>ere,  ba^  antere,  bte  anberen*  Declined  like  any  adjective, 
used  substantively  and  adjectively. 

95.  Siner,  eine,  eine^,  +  one,  the  numeral  with  its  deriva- 
tives !eitt,  none,  and  einige,  generally  only  plural  "  some." 

Sin-  is  always  strongly  inflected  and  stands  only  substan- 
tively. Standing  adjectively  it  is  declined  like  the  indefinite 
article  (see  39).     With  del  art. :  ber  eine,  Me  einen^ 

,^etn  is  inflected  like  the  indefinite  article,  but  standing 
substantively  is  dechned  feiner,  feine,  tm{t)^  :  Reiner  ttjirl)  aU 
SKeifter  geboren  (Prov.). 


09]  PRONOUNS.  29 

96.  Stiicb-,  some;  etira^,  anything;  mv,  anybody;  toa^,  any- 
thing, something;  mel(^-,  some,  any. 

Stltd)-  and  mi6)j-  are  always  inflected  strong.  The  singular 
of  etli(^is  rare,  having  the  force  of  "tolerable,"  "some":  mit 
etUcfeem  Srfotge,  with  some  success. 

97.  Compounds  with  {e:  iet)er,  every,  each;  {eglicfe,  {et)ti?et)er 
(z=  ie^er)  stand  adjectively  and  substantively;  jetermann,  every- 
body; jemant),  anybody;  niemant),  nobody. 

3et)er,  jeglic^-,  jet)  metier,  each,  every,  are  declined  like  strong 
adjectives.  3 ^9^0^  and  jetittJeDer  are  not  common  now  ;  they 
have  the  same  meaning.  3^^^^ntann  has  only  a  genitive  singu- 
lar in  -^.     S^ntan^  and  niemanD  decHne: 

N.  {emanD 
G.  iemant)(e)^ 
D.  iemantem,  -tieit 
A.  jemanben 

The  accusative  and  dative  are  N.  H.  G.,  taken  from  the 
adjective  inflection.  Though  the  classics  are  full  of  these 
cases,  the  best  usage  for  the  spoken  language  favors  no  case- 
ending  for  accusative  and  dative. 

98.  ^an,  one,  any  one.  It  is  only  nominative.  The  other 
cases  are  made  up  from  ein-  or  voir.  ?Dlan  is  old  spelling  for 
?0^ann,  from  which  in  M.  H.  G.  it  was  not  distinguished.  Its 
corresponding  possessive  is  fein  :  'SHan  QlanU  i^m  ni(^t.  '^an 
lann  feinen  eigenen  ^Ojjf  ni^t  efen  (Prov.). 

99.  ^i&ii^,  nothing,  allows  of  no  further  inflection.  It  is 
itself  the  genitive  of  M.  H.  G.  niht  =  ni-wiht  and  nio-miht 
Compare  Eng.  naught  =  na-wiht.  9li(^t5,  the  genitive, 
stands  for  the  emphatic  combination  nihtes  niht,  "not  a 
thing"  =  gar  ntd)t^. 

3u  ttic^te,  mit  nidJten,  "not  at  all,"  show  still  that  ntcbt  was 
once  a  noun  fully  inflected:  ^Seffer  etwa^5  tenn  nid)t^  (Prov.). 


30  COISTJUGATIOK.  [100- 

100.  As  indefinite  numerals  it  is  customary  to  classify 
atl  +  all;  MU  +  both;  beiDe^  +  each  or  either;  o^an^,  whole; 
lauter,  " nothing  but; "  man^  +  many;  me^r  +  more;  me^rere, 
several;  lit  meiflen  +  most,  the  majority;  Die  me^rften  (=  Die 
meiften) ;  eiit  paax,  a  few,  Ht.  "  a  pair;  '  famtlid^e,  all,  altogether; 
ta^  ubxi^t,  t)te  iiHgen,  the  rest;  "oid,  much,  many;  menig,  Httle, 
few;  eitt  njenig,  a  little. 

Of  these,  aU,  ganj,  mattc^,  ^tel,  njenig  may  stand  uninflected. 
Otherwise  they  are  inflected  like  adjectives:  2?ie(  (Btelne  gab^^ 
lint)  toentg  33rot  (Uh.).  Oanj  ^Deutfd^Iant)  lag  in  @4mac^  unt> 
^d^mer^   (Mosen).    Da^  gan^e  ®entfd)Iant)  foil  e^  fein  (Arndt). 

£auter,  me^r,  ein  paar,  ein  n?enig  are  indeclinable. 


CONJUGATION. 

101.  The  verb  varies  for  person  and  number;  for  tense 
(present  and  preterit)  and  mood  (indicative  and  subjunctive). 
From  the  present  stem  are  formed  the  imperative  and  the 
noun-forms  of  the  verb,  viz. ,  the  infinitive,  present  participle 
with  the  gerundive,  and  the  past  participle  in  -(e)t.  Accord- 
ing to  the  formation  of  the  preterit  we  distinguish  two  great 
systems  of  conjugations,  the  "  strong '  and  the  "  zveak.*'  The 
strong  verbs  form  the  preterit  by  substituting  a  different  stem- 
vowel  from  that  of  the  present,  e,  g.,  geben  —  gab,  tragen  —  trug ; 
the  weak,  by  adding  -(e)te  to  the  stem,  e,  g.,  loben — lobte, 
glauben  —  glaubte* 

102.  The  infinitive,  the  preterit,  and  the  past  participle 
ai*e  generally  given  as  the  "  principal  parts  "  of  a  verb.  The 
infinitive  represents  the  forms  with  the  present  stem.  Know- 
ing the  preterit  or  the  past  participle,  one  can  tell  whether  a 
verb  is  weak  or  strong.  If  the  preterit  ends  in  -(e)te  the  past 
participle  ends  in  ~(e)t ;  if  the  preterit  is  strong,  the  past  par- 
ticiple ends  in  -en,  e.  g.,  fagen,  fagte,  gefagt;  faugen,  fog,  gcfogen. 


105] 


COIfJUGATlOK, 


31 


The  infinitive  and  the  past  participle  help  form  the  compound 
tenses. 

103.    The  following  paradigms  show  the  various  inflections: 


WEAK. 

PRESENT.  PRETEBIT. 


STRONG. 


Ind. 

x&i  lobe 

er  loBt 
xoxx  loben 
i^r  (oBt 
pe  loben 


Ind,  andsvJt^, 

(obe  lobte 

lobefl  lobtefl 

lobe  lobte 

loben  lobten 

lobet  lobtet 

loben  lobten 


PRESENT. 

Ind.  Sub). 

finge  ftnge 

ftngt  fmge 

jingen  ftn^en 

fln^t  ftnget 

^n^txi  (tngen 


2.  sg.    lobe  (tu) 
1.  pZ.    loben  mtr 

1  loben  @ie 


Inf, 
loben 

Geruiidwe. 
lobenD 
Past  part. 
gelobt 


Imp. 
2.  sg.     ftng(e)  (tu) 
1.  pi,    ftngen  ttjir 

2.i9Z.-lP"^(')^(^^') 
( finqen  ®ie 


PRETERIT. 

/we?.         SvJbj. 

fang  fange 

fangjl  fangej^ 

fang  fange 

fangen  fangen 

fangt  fanget 

fangen  fdngen 

Inf. 
fingen* 

Pres.part.t 
Gerundive, 

ftngent 

Past  part. 

gefungen 


104.    The  personal  suffixes  are: 

Sg.  1.  p.  -e,  except  for  strong  preterit. 

2.  p.  -(e) ft  for  both  tenses  and  moods. 

3.  p.  -(e) t  for  the  present  indicative.     In  the  pres.  subj. 

and  in  the  pret.  ind.  and  subj.  the  3.  p.  is  like 
the  first. 
PL  1.  p.  -(e)n  for  both  tenses  and  moods. 

2.  p.  -(e)t  for  both  tenses  and  moods ;  also  for  the  im- 

perative. 

3.  p.  -(e)n  for  both  tenses  and  moods. 

Th^  retention  or  rejection  of  the  thematic  or  connectinjr  voweJ  -e-  is  treated  later. 
See  118, 

105..    Imperative.     The  2.  p.  sg.  ends  in  -e  in  all  verbs 
excepting  those  strong  ones   that  have  the  interchange    of 


82  C0NJFGATI02!f.  [106- 

e — i  or  c — ie  in  the  2.  and  3.  p.  sg.  pres.  ind.,  e.  g,,  Zxant,  j(^aue, 
kte,  Htte,  grabe,  t)ebe,  but  fprtd),  fn§,  nxmm. 

106.  Infinitive.  It  always  ends  in  -en  except  in  those 
weak  verbs  in  which  it  is  preceded  by  -el,  -er  :  it^antieln, 
a>antent ;  also  in  fein,  t^nn,  which  are  non-thematic  verbs. 
See  449,  2. 

107.  Participles.  The  present  pari  and  the  gerundive 
always  end  in  -ent:  ^offeut),  ^elfent),  etn  Siebent)er,  ein  ^u  kmeifenter 
©a^,  a  proposition  to  be  demonstrated.  They  are  declined 
like  adjectives. 

The  past  participle  is  formed  by  the  prefix  ge-,  and  the  suf- 
fix -(e) t  for  weak  verbs,  the  suffix  -en  for  strong  ones:  liekn  — 
gelieBt,  bidttern  —  geHdttert,  tragen  —  getragen,  fingen  —  gejungen* 

108.  (^e-  does  not  stand: 

1.  Before  t)et§en,  laffen,  fe^en,  ^elfen,  lernen  (?),  le^^ren  (?),  ^oren, 
when  an  infinitive  depends  upon  them  in  a  compound  tense: 
3d)  ^abc  i^n  ge|en  ^ei§en,  fommen  lajjen,  fagen  ^i3ren.  For  ternen 
and  lebren,  gelernt  and  gelekt  are  better  usage. 

2.  In  the  preterit-present  verbs  (=  modal  auxiliaries,  see 
134)  which  form  similar  past  participles,  viz.,  fbnnen,  tiirfen, 
mbgen,  miiffen,  follen,  mUm,  SJian  ^at  ta^  tt)Ute  ^ier  nidjt  fangen 
!onnen»    See  113. 

3.  In  the  past  participles  of  verbs  having  inseparable  pre- 
fixes, e.  g.,  ijerlaffen,  entfagt,  ktedt,  getad)t,  except  fveffen  <  ^cx  + 
effen  and  verbs  in  which  h  and  g  are  no  longer  felt  to  be  the 
prefixes  be  and  ge  (see  543),  e.^.,  gefreffen,  geblieben  <  bleiben^ 
geglauM;  geglii^en  <  gleic^en.     See  gegejjen,  128. 

4  In  verbs  with  the  foreign  ending  -i'eren,  e,  g.,  ntar|'d)ieren  — 
marfd)tert  ;  proMeren  —  proHert.  Even  when  these  are  com- 
pounded with  separable  Germanic  prefixes,  they  take  no  ge-  : 
au^marf(^iert,  cinfturicvt. 

5.  2Corren  <  tper^en  never  takes  ge-,  when  it  is  an  auxihary 
in  the  passive  voice,  e,  g.,  gr  ift  geloBt  trorten. 


lllj 


CONJUGATION. 


33 


Compound  Tenses. 

109.  These  are  formed  by  means  of  the  auxiliary  verbs 
ijdbm,  \t\n,  trerten ;  the  last  in  the  future  active  and  the  whole 
passive;  ):)ahm  and  fein  in  the  active  voice.  As  a  matter  of  con- 
venience the  simple  tenses  of  these  auxiharies  are  given  here. 

110. 


PRESENT. 


Ind. 
i(^  ^aBe 

er  %^i 
fie  ^aBett 


Subj. 
l^abe 

^abet 


PRETERIT. 

Ind.       Subj. 


Imperative. 
2.  sg,    %aU  (uu) 
1.  pL    ^aBen  trir 

2 


^atte 

^atteft 

^atte 

fatten 

^attet 

fatten 

Inf. 
l^aBen 


Icitte 

pttefl 

^atte 

fatten 

^attet 

fatten 


PRESENT. 

Ind.    Subj. 


PRETERIT. 


(  5aBen  (5te 

Past  part. 


fei 

feiejl 

fei 

feten 

fetet 

feien 

Imperative, 
%sg,    fei  (tu) 
1.  p?.    feten  mir 

(  feien  @ie 


Bin 
Btft 

jtnt) 
feiD 
ftn^ 


Ind. 

toax 

ttjarjl 

n?ar 

n?aren 

n?aret 

maren 


Subj. 

torn 

n?drefl 

tr>dre 

irdren 

njdret 

tvdren 


PRESENT. 

ic^  mxtt  mxU 

In  n)irfl  merbefl 

er  n?irb  ttjerl^e 

mir  merten  tt^erben 

i^r  ttjerbet  n)ertet 

fie  tverten  n^erben 


ge:^aBt 

PRETERIT. 

Ind. 
taaxX),  murte 
roaxt^,  njurbefl 
njart),  wurte 
tt)urt)en 
twurtet 
tpurten 


Inf. 
fein 

Fres.  part, 
feient 

Fast  part, 

genjefen 


Subj. 
murt)e 
mMefl 
n?iirt)e 
njiirben 
ttJiirlet 
ttjiirt)en 


ive. 

n^ert'e  (tu) 

mert'en  mtr 

( trertet  (i^r) 

1  n?ert)en  ^ie 

iH/.  ii^erten 

Fast  part,     njotten 


2.  sg. 

1.J9/. 


111.  1.  -f)akn  has  contracted  forms  for  the  2.  and  3,  pers.  sing.:  ^a|! 
<  Mst  <  Jiabest ;  !^at  <  M^  <  A«&6^.  The  pret.  has  undergone  the  same 
contractions  :  ^atte  <  Mte  <  habete,  etc.  The  pret.  subj.  has  umlaut  due 
to  the  influence  of  strong  and  pret.-pres.  verbs.    In  dialect  the  old  con- 


34  COKTUGATIOiT.  [112- 

tracted  forms  with  a,  prevailing  through  the  whole  present,  are  still 
heard.  In  M.  H.  G.  hdben  as  auxiliary  has  the  contracted  forms  ;  as  an 
independent  verb,  the  uncontracted. 

2.  SBerben  is  a  regular  strong  verb  of  the  3,  class.  It  is  the  only  verb 
that  has  retained  the  two  pret.  vowels,  generally  the  vowel  of  the  sing, 
prevailing  over  that  of  the  plural.  2Barb  is  more  common  as  independent 
verb  ;  tt)urbe,  as  auxiliary.    In  elevated  style  warb  is  preferable. 

112.  Tlie  Perfect  is  formed  with  the  present  of  ^aben  or  fein 
and  the  past  participle,  e,  g.,  t(^  ^abe  getragen,  I  have  borne;  t(^ 
Un  gefaferen,  subj.  id)  fei  gefa^ren,  I  have  ridden.  Perfect  Infini- 
tive: gctragen  i)ahn,  gefa^ren  fein,  to  have  carried,  ridden. 

The  Pluperfect  is  formed  with  the  preterit  of  l^abm  or  fein:  id) 
^atk  getragen,  subj.  t(^  I)atte  getragen,  I  had  borne;  ic^  irar  gefa^ren, 
subj.  i&j  mxt  gefa^ren,  I  had  ridden. 

113.  The  past  participles  without  ge-  accompanied  by  an  infinitive 
(see  108,  1,  2),  the  modal  auxiliaries  and  weak  verbs  which  followed 
their  analogy,  form  such  tenses  as  these  :  3(^  ^ctk  t|n  ge'^en  f)d^tn,  I  have 
ordered  him  to  leave,  ©te  ^aben  einen  fRdd  mac^en  laffen,  you  have  had  a 
coat  made  or  ordered  a  coat  to  be  made,  ^cr  ^ndht  ^at  bie  Seftton  nic^t 
lernen  fijitneiif  the  boy  has  not  been  able  to  learn  the  lesson.  (£r  ^at  e^  nur 
fagen  I)5reit,  he  has  only  heard  it  said.  !I)cr  9?ad)bar  ^at  ben  S3ettler  arretteren 
laffen  woHen  (or  tt)olfm  arretteren  laffen),  my  neighbor  wanted  to  have  the 
beggar  arrested. 

114.  The  Future  ind.  and  subj.  is  formed  with  the  present 
of  mxUn  and  the  infinitive,  e,  g.,  i(^  merbe  tragen,  ic^  werte  fafcren, 
I  shall  carry,  ride. 

The  Future  Perfect  is  formed  with  the  present  of  merl^en  and 
the  perfect  infinitive,  e.  g.,  ic^  merte  getragen  '\^ahm,  id)  mx'tt 
gcfa^ren  fein,  I  shall  have  carried,  ridden. 

115.  The  first  Conditional  is  formed  with  the  preterit 
subj.  of  mxlm  and  the  infinitive,  e.  g,,  i(^  tt>uri)e  tragen  or 
fal^ren,  I  should  carry  or  ride. 

The  second  or  perfect  Conditional  is  formed  with  the  pre- 
terit subj.  of  ji?erten  and  the  perfect  infinitive  :  id)  timU  getragen 
)>abm  or  gefa^ren  fein,  I  should  have  carried  or  ridden. 


118]  CONJUGATION.  85 

Passive   Voice. 

116.  The  passive  voice  is  formed  by  werben  and  the  past 
participle.  The  tense  of  the  auxiHary  with  the  past  participle 
of  the  verb  forms  the  corresponding  passive  tense.  SBerDcn 
forms  its  compound  tenses  with  feitt  and  tr^erlen. 

Present  :  i(^  mxU  geloBt,  I  am  praised,  am  being  praised. 
Preterit  :  i(^  mv'D  or  rt>mU  geloBt,  I  was  praised. 
Perfect  :  t(!^  Un  geloBt  n?ori:en,  I  have  been  praised. 
Pluperfect  :  ic^  mar  ge(o6t  moreen,  I  had  been  praised. 
Future  :  x&)  merbe  geloBt  werDen,  I  shall  be  praised. 
Future  perfect  :  i6:i  n?erte  gelobt  itJOrtien  feiti,  I  shall  have  been 
praised. 

1.  Conditional  :  id)  tt>urt)e  gelobt  tt?ert)en,I  should  be  praised. 

2.  or  Conditional  perfect  :    i(^  mtoe  ^elobt  mort)en   fein,  I 

should  have  been  praised. 
IiMPERATiVE  :  fet  (t>u)  gelobt,  be  (thou)  praised. 

feten  ©ie  gelobt ) 
Infinitive  :  ^tUU  ti^erDen,  to  be  praised. 

c^elobt  vooxUn  fein,  to  have  been  praised. 

Weak  Conjugation. 

117.  The  weak  conjugation  forms  the  principal  parts  by 
suffixing  -te  or  -ete  in  the  preterit:  loben,  lobk,  rcttcn,  rcttete;  by 
prefixing  ge-  and  suffixing  -t  or  -et  in  the  past  participle: 
^dcUf  gerettet*  For  the  simple  tenses  see  103,  for  the  com- 
pound, 112-115. 

1.  Verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  with  few  exceptions  derivative  verbs,  and  most  of 
them  can  be  recognized  as  such  by  certain  marlcs  of  derivation,  such  as  suffixes  (-cin, 
-em,  -tg€n,  -ieren,  -jcn,  -fc^en)  or  umlaut.  (But  there  are  a  few  strong  verbs  with 
umlaut:  Ifigen..  trugen,  gcbaren,  etc.). 

118.  1.  The  connecting  vowel  always  stands  before  t,  whether  per- 
sonal sufBx  (3.  p.  sg.  and  2.  p.  pi.)  or  in  the  participle  and  preterit,  if  the 
stem  ends  in  b  or  t  (t^)j  if  the  stern  ends  in  m  and  n,  preceded  by  another 


36  CONJUGATION.  [119- 

consonant  which  is  not  m  or  n,  e.g,,  er  rebct,  i^r  melbet,  xoix  walteten*  getrojlet, 
cr  atmete^  i(^  seic^netc. 

Those  in  m  and  n  have  lost  an  c  before  these  consonants.  Compare  them  with  their 
noirna  :  Sttem,  !^tx6i^Xi.  Those  in  n  are  often  treated  like  those  in  el,  er,  to  which  they 
really  belong  (see  sub  3) :  jeic^cnte,  regente.    But  these  forms  are  not  elegant. 

2.  The  connecting  vowel  stands  in  the  2.  p.  sg.  present  ind.  also  after 
stems  in  f,  \6).  f,  \\,  i,  ^,  besides  the  stem-endings  sub  1,  e.g.,  bu  rebejl, 
njaltejlr  fd)mad)tej^,  rec^neft,  reifejl,  ftfc|e|l,  fpa^e)!,  faffefl,  njibmejl,  kijeft,  jlu^efl. 

3.  Verbs  in  -citt  and  -ertt  rarely  show  the  connecting  vowel  e,  e.  g. ,  \6) 
^anbclte,  er  '^anbett,  gelac^elt,  xoxx  iDanberten,  In  the  1.  p.  sg.  present  ind.  and 
subj.,  in  the  imperative  2.  p.  sg.  they  generally  lose  their  own  e,  e,g,,  \^ 
toanble,  tvanbre,  [d^meic^le  (bu)* 

4.  In  solemn  diction  and  in  poetry  any  verb  may  retain  the  connecting 
vowel.  On  the  other  hand,  the  poet  and  the  people  take  many  liberties 
in  the  omission  of  it  (sub  1  and  2).  For  instance,  t)<x^  neiie  ^au^  t|l  aufge^ 
rid^t't  (Uh.).  ©eib  mtr  gegrit^t,  kfreunbHe  ©c^aren !  (Sch.).  O^eb^ftbu  »on  einem 
ber  ba  le&et?  (id.).  ®egru§et  feib  mtr,  eble^errn!  ®egru§t  t|r,  fd^one  ^amen 
(G.).  See  F.  3217,  3557.  In  fact  though  such  full  forms  as  bu  ftfd)e|l, 
rafejl,  fajfejl*  pu^ejl,  etc.,  are  written,  one  generally  hears  bu  fifc^t,  raft,  fa§tf 
pu^t,  etc.     This  applies  also  to  strong  verbs,  e.  g.,  bu  n)af(^t,  j^o§t,  rei^t* 

5.  The  present  subj.  nearly  always  shows  full  forms,  but  the  preterit 
ind.  and  subj.  have  coincided  :  bag  bu  Uek|l,  i|r  Ite^et;  ^a^  x6)  WtWt  rebete* 

Irregular   Weak  Verbs. 

119.  There  are  two  groups  of  these  verbs.  One  has  a  dif- 
ference of  vowel  which  looks  like  ablaut,  the  other  has  besides 
different  vowels  also  a  change  in  consonants. 

1.  The  stems  show  nn  or  nb: 


Inf. 

Pret.  ind. 

Subj. 

Past  participle. 

Brennen 

brannte 

Brennte 

gebrannt 

fenben 

fanbte 

fenbete 

gefanbt 

Here  belong  Brennen,  +  burn  ;  fennen,  to  be  acquainted 
with,  +  ken;  nennen,  +  name;  rennen,  +  run;  fettben,  +  send; 
tventen,  to  turn,  +  wend,  went.  The  last  two  have  also  a  pre- 
terit ind.  fentete,  n^en^ete. 


121J  cokjugatio:n".  37 

2.  The  stems  show  n!,  ng*     Here  belong : 


Inf. 

Pret,  ind. 

Subj. 

Past  participle. 

tenfen 

taiijte 

l^cic^te 

geDad^t 

biinfen 

( t^euc^te  (naudjte) 
( t>un!te 

teu(^te 

geDeuc^t 

^uttfte 

ger>un!t 

bringen 

^xa6:jk 

Brad)te 

gebra(^t 

Strong   Conjugation. 

120.  Strong  verbs  must  have  different  stem- vowels  in  the 
preterit  and  present,  since  in  this  way  difference  of  tense  is 
expressed.  But  the  vowel  of  the  past  participle  may  coincide 
with  that  of  the  present,  as  in  geBen,  Qob,  gegeben  v,  fa^ren,  fu^r, 
gefa^ren  vi,  l)alten,  l)ie(t;  ge^alten  vii;  or  with  that  of  the  preterit, 
as  in  fceigen,  Bi^,  gebiffen  i,  btegen,  bog,  gebogen  n,  glimmen,  glomm, 
geglommen  vin.  The  past  participle  ends  in  -en,  and  has  the 
prefix  ge-,  e.  g.,  geftoMen,  gerufen*    For  simple  tenses  see  103. 

121.  The  personal  suffixes  are  the  same  as  in  weak  verbs. 
Compare  lieBte,  IteBteft,  (tebte,  etc.;  fa^,  fa^fl,  fa^,  etc.  The  imper- 
ative 2.  p.  sg.  has  no  ending  when  the  present  ind.  has  inter- 
change of  e-i,  ie,  e,  g.,  ic^  berge,  tu  birgft,  er  birgt ;  imp.  birg ;  brec^en 
— bridj;  effen — 1§*  This  interchange  of  e-i,  ie  occurs  in  in  3, 
IV,  v;  in  verbs  which  do  not  have  it  there  is  no  difference  of 
stem- vowel  in  the  imperative  and  the  present,  e.  g.,  ^alten — 
^alt ;  fc^njtmmen  —  f(^tt>imm^  But  often  e  is  added  in  analogy 
with  weak  verbs,  always  when  the  verb  is  either  strong  or 
weak,  e.g.,  rufen  —  rufe  vri ;  f4(ai\en  —  f(^Icige  vi ;  always  trebe, 
ben^ege,  ern^cige  viii.  In  the  last  group  there  is  of  course  no 
interchange  of  e-i,  e.  g.,  tu  bett?egft,  er  ben?egt.  When  the  stem 
ends  in  t,  -tet  in  the  3.  p.  sg.  is  contracted  to  single  t,  if  the 
stem-vowel  changes.  M.  H.  G.  giltet  >  gilft  >  gilt*  K  g,, 
getten  —  er  gilt;  feAten —  er  ft(^t;  raten,  rat;  but  rettet,  fc^neitet. 
Special  mention  is  made  of  these  peculiarities  under  each 
class  and  verb.     The  preterit  subj.  always  has  umlaut  and 


38  COl^JUGATIOl^.  [122- 

fhe  1.  and  3.  p.  sg.  end  in  e,  e.  g.,  id)  \oX),  bu  \a^i,  er  fal),  etc. ; 
but  id?  \c\X)t,  tu  fal)eft,  er  fa^e* 

The  verbs  are  best  classified  according  to  the  ablaut- series, 
(See  393.) 

122.    I.  Class.    Ablaut :    ei  i,  ie  i,  ie. 

1.  Division  :    ei  i  u 
The  stem  ends  in  p  (jf),  \,  d),  t,  M* 

Examples:  Bei^en,  Big,  geMffen ;  fc^leifen,  fd)tiff,  ^efc^liffen ;  fdjreiten, 
fc^ritt,  gefd^ritten;  weic^en,  n?ic^,  gen?i(^en;  leiten,  litt,  gelitten* 

The  following  verbs  belong  here  :  Bet^en,  +  bite  ;  Heic^en  (intrans.),  + 
bleach,  but  also  weak,  always  when  trans. ;  fic^  befleigen,  to  apply  one's 
self;  gletc^erif  to  be  +  like,  strong  since  the  ITtli  century,  in  the  sense  of 
+  liken  it  is  still  weak,  a  N.  H.  G.  distinction,  M.  H.  G.  only  weak ; 
filei^eii;  +  glitter,  nothing  to  do  with  the  rare  gleifcn  <  gelihsen,  to 
deceive,  or  entgleifett;  to  run  off  the  track  <  ®eleife,  track  ;  gleiten,  +  glide  ; 
greifenf  to  seize,  +  gripe  ;  greinen,  +  grin,  rare  and  generally  weak,  grinfcn, 
its  derivative,  has  taken  its  place ;  feifen,  to  quarrel,  is  strong  or  weak,  < 
L.  G. ;  !netfen,  to  pinch,  L.  G.  >  N.  H.  G. ;  fretfc^en  and  frei^eu/  to  scream, 
are  related,  both  weak  and  strong,  not  H.  G. ;  leiben,  to  suffer,  +  loathe  ; 
^jfeifeitf  to  whistle,  +  pipe  <  L.  pipare ;  ret^en^  to  tear,  +  write,  draw ; 
rciteitf  +  ride  on  horseback ;  fc^letc^en,  to  sneak  ( ^-  slick  and  sleek) ; 
fd^Ietfen,  to  grind,  +  slip,  weak  in  the  sense  of  **  to  drag,  raze" ;  f(|Iei^en, 
+  slit,  split ;  fc^mei§en,  +  smite,  throw  ;  fc^neibett,  to  cut ;  [c^reiten,  to  stride ; 
fpleifen,  +  split,  L.  and  M.  G. ;  jlreic^en,  to  wipe,  cross,  +  strike,  etc.,  with 
very  varying  meanings ;  jlreiteitf  to  strive  ;  tveid^ettf  to  yield ;  compare 
ttjeid^r  +  weak,  wicker  ;  weak,  it  means  to  soak,  soften. 

2.  Division  :    el  ie  te> 

Examples :  getei^en,  g^t'te^,  gebie^en ;  reiben,  rieB,  gerteBen* 

Here  belong :  Bleiben,  to  remain  ( +  leave) ;  gebcil^ert/  to  thrive,  the  part, 
has  a  doublet,  gebie^eitr  thriven,  gebiegen,  solid,  pure ;  lei^en,  to  borrow,  + 
lend  ;  meiben,  to  avoid  ;  pretfeUr  +  to  praise,  strong  only  since  the  15th  cen- 
tury, <  9)ret^  <  M.  H.  G.  pris  <  O.  Fr.  pf%s  <  L.  pretium,  analogous  to 
Fr.  priser  ;  reiben,  to  rub  (  +  rive) ;  fc^eiben,  to  separate  ;  fd^einen,  +  shine ; 
fc^retben,  to  write  ( +  shrive) ;  fc^reienf  to  scream  (?) ;  f^iDeigeit;.  to  be  silent, 
weak  in  the  sense  of  "to  still  a  child";  fpeien,  to  spit,  +  spew;  jleigen, 
to  climb;  treiben,  +  to  drive;  Jueifen,  to  point  out,  in  the  16th  century 
still  weak  ;  jei^en,  to  accuse  (  +  indict). 


125]  CONJUGATION^.  39 

123.  Notice  the  interchange  of  b-t  in  the  first  division,  e.g.^  fc^neiben,  f(^nitt, 
gefc^nitten  ;  but  not  in  the  second,  viz.,  mciben,  mieb,  gemieben ;  jcl;eiben,  jc^icb,  gefc^teten. 
(See  416.)  When  the  stem  ends  in  ^  or  ^,  the  2.  p.  sg.  present  ind.  is  heard  merely  as 
ending  in  ft,  whether  spelt  so  or  not.  The  full  form  -eft  stands  only  in  elevated  diction, 
e.g..,  bu  f(^mei^t,  Bei^t,  Beflei^t  \}i6) ;  bu  weifeft  and  toeift,  bu  preifeft  and  preift.  (See  118, 
4.)  Notice  also  the  doubling  of  t  and  f  in  fc^reiten,  f^ritt ;  ftreiten,  flritt ;  f^Ieifen,  fc^Iiff, 
etc. 

124.  II.  Class.    Ablaut :    ie  (it,  (k\x)  i,  o  o,  o* 

1.  Division  :    ie  (au)  o  6* 
The  stem  ends  in  p  (ff),  c^,  f. 

Examples :  flte^en,  flof ,  gefloffen ;  trtefen,  troff,  getroffen* 

Here  belong :  ijerbrie^ett,  to  disgust,  vex ;  fitepen,  +  flow  ( +  fleet)  ; 
gief  ettf  to  pour ;  friei^en,  +  to  crouch,  creep  (?) ;  gentef en,  to  enjoy ;  ried^en, 
to  smell,  +  reek ;  fc^iepettf  +  to  shoot ;  fc^liefen,  to  slip,  rare,  supplanted 
by  its  derivative  fc^litpfen;  fc^Ue^ett/  to  close,  lock ;  fprlepen,  +  to  sprout ; 
triefen,  +  to  drip  ;  faufen,  to  drink  (of  animals);  fieben,  see  index. 

2.  Division  :    ie,  it,  au  o  5* 

Examples:  fliegen,  flog,  geflogett ;  tritgen,  trog,  getrogen;  fattgen, 
fog,  gefogen. 

Here  belong- :  1.  In  tc  J  ^icgcn,  to  bend ;  Meten,  to  offer,  +  to  bid  ; 
fliegen,  +  to  fly  ;  flie^en,  +  to  flee ;  frieren,  +  to  freeze  ;  fUekn,  +  to 
cleave,  split ;  f(^ieBen,  +  to  shove  ;  jltekn,  to  scatter  ;  ijerlieren,  +  to  lose; 
jie^en  (jog,  sejogett)),  to  draw. 

2.  In  ii  t  fitren  (fiefen),  +  to  choose ;  litgcit,  +  lie  ;  tritgen,  to  deceive. 

3.  In  an  J  faitgen,  +  to  suck  ;  fc^nau^en  (fc^meBen),  to  snort,  L.  and  M.  G.; 
fd^rauben,  to  screw  (+  ?),  L.  G.  >  late  M.  H.  G. 

2.,  3.  pers.  sg.  pres.  show  archaic  forms  sometimes  Jn  cu  :  fteu^t,  freu(i^t,  jTeugt.  (See 
406.)  Of  those  in  au  only  faufen  has  umlaut,  viz.,  fftuffl,  f&uft.  The  stem  ending  in  ^, 
the  2.  p.  sg.  may  be  bu  f^lc^t,  gcnie^t.  Notice  the  interchange  of  ^-g  in  jie^en,  3pg, 
gejogen,  but  ^  is  silent.  (See  416.)  Notice  also  the  doubling  of  f :  faufen,  foff,  etc. 

125.  m.  Class.    Ablaut:    c,  i  a  fi,  6. 
1.  Division  :    i            ol            VL, 

The  stem  ends  in  n  +  cons,  (t),  g,  f)* 

Examples  :  btnben,  knt,  gebunkn;  fpringen,  frrang,  gefprungen* 


40  COIfJUGATION-.  [127- 

Here  belong  :  binben,  +  to  bind  ;  bingeitf  to  hire,  originally  and  still  at 
times  weak,  the  isolated  weak  past  part,  bebingt  is  a  regular  adjective ; 
bringen,  to  penetrate ;  ftnben,  +  to  find  ;  gclingen,  to  be  successful  ;  flingen, 
to  be  heard,  resound ;  rtngen,  to  struggle,  +  wring ;  fd^tnben,  +  to  skin, 
pret.  fd^unb;  fc^Ungertf  to  twine,  +  sling,  it  also  has  the  force  of  the  now 
lost  fc^Unbettf  to  swallow ;  fd^winbenf  to  disappear ;  fc^tcingen,  +  to  swing  , 
jtngen,  +  to  sing ;  jinfen,  +  to  sink ;  fpringen,  +  to  spring ;  jlinfen,  +  to 
stink ;  trittfen,  +to  drink  ;  winbenf  +  to  wind  ;  jmingen,  to  force. 

2.  Division  :    i  5  o. 

The  stem  ends  in  mm  and  nn* 

Examples:  fpinnen,  fpann,  subj.  fpdnne  and  fpbnne,  gcfponnen; 
fdjn^immen,  f^n^amm,  f(^mdmme  and  f(^momme,  gef(^mommen. 

Here  belong:  begittnett,  +  to  begin;  rinnen,  to  flow,  +  run;  jtnnen,  to 
think ;  [c^tt)immen/  +  to  swim ;  fpinnen,  -i-  to  spin ;  gcn)innen,  +  to  win. 

3.  Division  :    e-i  a  o» 

The  stem  ends  in  I,  r  -f  cons,  except  trefc^en* 

Examples  :  ^elfen  (Silft),  l^alf  (^iilfe,  ^dlfe),  ge^^olfen  ;  n^erfen 
(mtrft),  warf  (miirfe),  getuorfcn* 

Here  belong:  krgett/  to  hide,  +  bury,  burrow;  Berjleit/  +  to  burst; 
brefc^en,  +  to  thrash  ;  gelten/  to  be  worth,  pass  for ;  ^elfen,  +  to  help ;  fd^elten, 
+  to  soold ;  (lerbcn,  to  die  (+  starve) ;  »erberbett/  to  spoil  (intrans.) ;  »cr^ 
berbett  (weak),  to  corrupt ;  mxltn,  to  enlist,  woo ;  wcrbcn,  to  become,  + 
worth  (see  110) ;  ttjerfen,  to  throw  ( +  warp). 

126.  Notice  the  double  preterits  snbj.  (See  464,  3.)  Sub  2,  rtnnen  never  haa 
„r&nne."  The  3.  division  has  generally  and  better  u,  because  you  cannot  tell  „t)alfe" 
from  f/'^ctfe"  by  ear.  <Srcf(^en  and  berften,  once  belonging  to  the  next  class,  have 
brof^e  —  brSfc^e,  birfte  —  Borfte. 

The  2.  and  3.  p.  sg.  present  ind.  have  i  instead  of  e.  (See  403.)  As  to  the  sufllx, 
berjien  has  bu  birft,  birfteft,  er  birft;  getten,  bu  giltft  (pronounced  gilft),  ev  gilt;  toerben,  bu 
trirft,  er  roivb;  fd^clten  like  geltcn. 

127.  lY.  Class.     Ablaut :   a,e,e  —i,k  a  o,  o. 
The  stem  contains  I,  r,  m  after  or  before  the  root-vowel. 

Examples:  Bredben  (Brtdbft),  braft  (bra(^e),  gebroi^en;  fte^len 
(ftie^lft),  flaM  (fta^le,  fto^le),  geftofclen. 


129]  CONJUGATION.  41 

Here  belong  :  ln6:)m,  +  to  break ;  gebcirettf  +  to  bear,  bring  forth ; 
befe^IcHf  to  command  ;  em^fe^len,  to  recommend  ;  erfc^rerfen  (er[c^ra!),  to  be 
frightened;  ne^men,  to  take,  +  nim  ;  fprec^en/  to  speak;  |led)en,  +  to  stick, 
stab  ;  j^e|len,  +  to  steal ;  treffen  (traf ),  to  hit ;  fommen,  !am,  ^efommeu;  +  to 
come.     (See  489,  1.) 

SSefei^Ien  and  empfe^Ien  beloDged  to  the  III.  Class,  and  have  double  subjunctives, 
5ef5^Ie — hi\af)k,  etc.  So  has  fte(}Ien,  ft5l)te  — fta^te.  The  umlaut  in  gebaren  is  only 
graphic  for  e  <  e.  Those  in  -f)l  and  gel3aren  have  ie  in  2.  and  3.  p.  sg.  present  ind. : 
empftel;lt,  geHert.  The  rest  have  i :  triffft,  jprid^ft ;  bu  Jommft,  er  Jouimt  are  quite  common, 
but  not  elegant. 

128.  V.  Class.    Ablaut:   i,   e,  e  —  i,k  a  l,e. 
The  stem  ends  in  any  sound  but  a  liquid. 

1.  Division :  e,e  —  t,  ie  a  ^,  I* 

Example  :  gekn  (gieBjl,  #|l),  gaB  (gaBe),  gegeben* 

Here  belong :  eJTen,  +  eat ;  freffen,  +  eat  (said  of  animals) ;  gekn,  + 
give  ;  genefen,  to  recover ;  gef^e^en,  to  happen  ;  lefen,  to  read  ;  meffen,  +  to 
measure,  +  mete ;  fef)en,  +  to  see ;  treten,  +  to  tread ;  ijergeffen,  +  to  for- 
get ;  (njefen)  war,  QCivefen,  to  be,  +  was. 

2.  Division  :    x,xt  a  t,  h 

Here  belong:  Mtten,  bat,  gekten,  to  ask,  +  bid;  Uegen,  lag,  gelegen,  +  to 
lie ;  fi^en,  faf ,  gefeffen,  +  to  sit. 

The  form  of  the  2.  and  3  persons  sg.  of  the  present  ind.  of  verbs  ending  in  \\  is  -^t; 
of  those  in  S  is  [t  for  both  persons :  bu,  cv  x^t,  wergip,  fri^t ;  bu,  ev  Ue[t.  But  geuefen,  bu, 
er  geneft,  has  no  ie,  probably  because  genieft  would  have  coincided  with  gcnie^t  <  genie^en, 
gcno^,  n. ;  bu  fi^eft  may  be  contracted  >  fi^ft,  pronounced  merely  ,,\\})i."  The  participle 
of  effen,  viz.,  gegeffen,  has  gc-  twice,  because  gecften  was  contracted  into  geHcn  very  early. 
This  is  now  colloquial.    (See  F.  2838, 4415.)    Notice  bu  tvittft,  er  tiitt ;  bu  titteft,  er  bittet. 

129.  VI.  Class.     Ablaut :    a,  a-d  u  ^,0.. 

The  stem-vowel  is  short  before  more  than  one  consonant ; 
also  in  6u!^ 

Example:  ba(!en,(ba(l|l),bu!(bule),  ^il([din. 

Here  belong  :  Ibad en,  +  to  bake,  in  N.  G.  generally  weak ;  fa:j>ven,  to  ride, 
+  fare  ;  graben,  to  dig;  laben,  to  Invite,  and  labcn,  +  load ;  laben  (strong). 


42  CONJUGATIO]^.  [130- 

+  to  ]oad,  and  labcn  (weak),  to  invite,  have  been  confounded  since  early 
N.  H.  G.;  they  are  of  different  origin  ;  [(^affeu  (fc^uf),  to  create  (weak,  "to 
work  ") ;  fc^Iagen,  to  strike,  +  slay  ;  tragen,  to  carry  ;  n)ac§fen,  to  grow,  + 
wax  ;  ttjafc^en,  +  to  wash ;  {flt))tn),  jlunb,  Panb  (jliinbe,  fidnbe),  gepanbcn,  +  to 
stand,  jlunb  is  still  common  in  S.  G. 

Here  belonged  also  formerly  :  ^ekn  (^eBjl),  'i)xib,  Qt'f^oUn,  to  raise,  + 
heave;  fc^Woren  (f(|n)orfl),  \6^tonx—\^\x>ox,  gefc^woren,  +  to  swear,  ^ragen 
(frcigjl),  frug  (but  never  gefragen),  **  to  ask,"  are  frequently  heard  ;  also  jagett 
(jcigft),  jug,  **to  chase."  The  forms  are  still  frowned  upon  by  gram- 
marians because  they  are  "wrong,"  but  the  people  use  them  just  the 
same. 

In  the  2.  and  3.  p.  present  ind.  a  is  the  rule  excepting  f^affen,  f(^affjl,  which  is  under 
the  influence  of  the  weak  verb.  Notice  bu  and  er  trac^ft,  bu  njaj(^ft  (pronounced  wafc^t). 
Isolated  participles :  gema'^Ien,  ground ;  maljlen  is  now  weak,  mal)len,  ma^k,  Qemaf)\t, 
to  grind  ;  ev^al)en,  lofty,  <  er^eBen,  er^oBen. 

130.  VII.  Class.  Characteristic  is  ie  in  the  preterit, 
which  is  no  ablaut,  while  the  past  participle  always  has  the 
vowel  of  the  infinitive. 

For  convenience  we  make  two  groups. 
1.  Division.    The  seeming  ablaut  is  :  a,  a  ie  &,  a* 

a  before  more  than  one  consonant,  ie  =  short  t  before  -ng* 
Examples:  fangen  (fiingft),  ften^,  gefangen;  Braten  (Mtft,  brat), 
briet,  gekaten. 

Here  belong :  Blafen,  +  blow,  +  blare  (?) ;  :6ratett,  to  roast,  fry ;  fallen 
(ftel),  +  to  fall ;  fangen  (rarer  fa'^en),,  to  catch  ;  (ge^en)/  Qteng,  gegangen,  +  go, 
went,  gone  ;  ^alten,  +  to  hold  ;  ^angeitf  +  to  hang ;  laffen,  +  to  let,  cause  ; 
raten,  to  advise ;  fc^Iafcn,  +  to  sleep. 

Umlaut  is  the  rule  in  the  2.  and  3.  p.  present  ind.  Notice  bu  ritjl,  cr  rat ;  bu,  er  Blcijl ; 
bu  ^aitft  (pronounced  „^al[t")/  ^r  pit ;  bu  lifteft  or  bu,  er  lafjt.  The  umlaut  in  this  whole 
class  is  late  ;  in  later  M,  H.  G.  they  have  it  rardy.  The  "  Rules  "  prefer  the  spelling 
i  to  ie,  viz.,  :^ing,  fing,  ging. 

131.  2.  Division  :    au,  ei,  5,  u  ie  an,  d,  o,  u. 

Here  belong :  '^antn,  '^ieb  (6  <  tti),  ge^aucn,  +  to  hew  ;  laufcn,  Hef,  gelaufen, 
to  run,  +  leap;  ^el^en,  ^ic§,  gejeipen,  to  call,  command,  +  hight;  flopen 
(jliep),  to  kick,  thrust ;  ritfen  (ricf)/  to  call. 


133]  C0NJUGATI013".  43 

Only  fio^en  and  generally  taufen  take  the  umlaut:  bu,  er  flop;  bu  ISuffl. 

©(^eiben,  once  of  this  class,  has  gone  into  i;  „ge^ie^en,"  according  to  i,  is  some- 
times heard,  but  must  still  be  rejected  as  incorrect.  Of  this  class  there  are  a  great 
many  isolated  participles  of  verbs  that  have  changed  conjugation,  e.  g.^  fcejc^eiben, 
modest  (but bef<i)ieben,"  ordered  "j ;  cjefcljiotcu,  rough-ground  ;  gefalsen,-f- salt ;  gefpaltcn, 
"  split " ;  gewaljen,  rolled,  etc.    3?ufen,  ruftc,  geruft  is  not  correct. 

132.  VIII.  Class.  Characteristic  is  o  in  the  preterit  and 
past  participle,  long  or  short  according  to  the  following  con- 
sonants. 

The  verhs  belonging  here  are  stragglers  from  all  the  other  ablaut - 
series.  There  must  be  therefore  a  number  that  are  still  afloat ;  that  is, 
according  to  the  usage  of  the  period  in  which  they  are  taken,  they  be- 
long to  their  regular  class  or  to  this.  Present  usage  in  the  spoken  lan- 
guage always  favors  o  —  0,  e.g.,  \^tomxi,  fd)iDor,  gefc^moreu/ vi ;  brefd)en, 
brofc^^  gebrofc^en,  in  ;  l^eben,  l^ob,  ge^oBen,  vi,  which  have  been  assigned  by  us, 
however,  to  their  proper  classes,  li^ugen^  ii,  and  triigcHf  ii,  have  sprung 
from  Uegen  and  tricgen  under  the  influence  of  the  nouns  l^iige,  %x\\^.  They 
might  be  classed  here ;  as  also  fitren,  ii,  for  fiefen  ;  compare  the  noun 
^ur(^furft),  elector. 

133.  The  vowels  of  the  present  may  be  z,  i,  a,  a,  o» 
The  ablaut  is  most  frequently  e  0  o» 

We  count  here :  kUctt  (bellt,  biHt),  to  bark,  in ;  fc(J)tm  (ft($tfl,  ftd)l),  +  to 
fight,  IV,  III;  fled)ten  (flic^tft,  pronounced  [lid)ft,  \[\d)\),  to  braid,  iv,  in; 
Vflcgen,  to  carry  on,  undertake,  v,  iv,  in  the  sense  of  *' to  be  accustomed,^' 
**  to  care  for,"  always  weak  ;  melfen  (melft  and  milft),  +  to  milk  in  ;  qucllen 
(quiflt),  to  swell,  gush,  in  ;  fd)ellen  (f*ittt  archaic),  generally  f^allen  the  weak 
verb,  **to  resound,"  weak  =  to  cause  to  resound,  ring,  in  ;  [(^mcljen 
(fc^miljft,  fc^milst),  +  to  melt,  in ;  fc^^meKen  ([c^wiltt),  +  to  swell,  in ;  n)ebeu 
(raebft),  strong  and  weak,  +  to  weave,  v;  &ett)egen  (bewegjl),  to  induce, 
weak  =  to  move,  v ;  glimmen,  to  glow,  in,  2  ;  fUmmen,  +  to  climb,  in,  2  ; 
garen  (gdrt),  to  ferment,  also  weak,  iv;  ermagen  (crmagft),  to  consider;  trdgen 
or  wiegcn  (if  te,  ii),  n)dg|T,  tt)teg)l,  +  to  weigh  (-n)dgen,  njiegertf  -megeit  are  in 
M.  H.  G^.  the  same  word,  v) ;  rdc^en  (rd^t),  +  to  wreak,  sometimes  has  rod), 
gercc^en,  but  is  generally  weak,  iv;  erlofc^en,  intrans.,  to  die  out  (of  a  flame), 
(erUfd)ejl,  erltfd)t),  but  trans.  lofd)cn,  to  extinguish,  in ;  ^crn?trren,  to  confuse, 
III,  is  generally  weak,  but  has  an  isolated  participle,  i)en»orren  =  intricate, 
complicated;  fc^eren  (fd)ierfl,  [d)iert)  +  shear,  iv,  is  sometimes  weak. 


44  A]SrOMALOUS   VERBS.  [134^ 

ANOMALOUS   VERBS, 

1.  The  Preterit-Present  Verbs. 

134.  To  this  group  belong  the  modal  auxiliaries  and  n^iffett. 
They  are  originally  strong  verbs,  whose  preterits  are  used  as 
presents.  New  preterits,  past  participles,  and  infinitives  were 
formed  weak.  The  infinitives,  the  present  plural,  and  the  new 
strong  participle  have  the  same  vowel,  sometimes  with  an 
irregular  umlaut :  fonnen  (inf.),  n;)ir  Bnnen,  Bnnen  (past  part.). 
The  different  vowels  of  the  present  in  the  sg.  and  pi.  \vd^, 
\vi\\cn ;  the  subjunct.,  with  umlaut,  ma^,  mo^e ;  the  lack  of  t  in 
the  3.  p.  sg.,  er  mag,  are  still  traces  of  their  strong  conjugation. 
The  weak  preterit  was  formed  without  connecting  vowel,  and 
has  umlaut  in  the  subjunctive  :  rno^m,  mo&ik,  mo6)k,  gemoc^t* 
(See  119,  2,  and  454,  3.)  The  strong  participle  in  -en  stands 
in  the  compound  tenses,  when  an  infinitive  depends  upon  the 
auxiliary:  t(^  'hah  fd)rei6en  miiffen,  but  id)  l)ak  gemu^t.  An  im- 
perative, the  meaning  permitting,  is  made  up  from  the 
subjunctive,  e.g.^  n?oIIe,  moge. 

135.  1.  SSijJen,  i,  to  know,  +  to  wit  (wot,  he  wist). 

Inf.  Pret.  ind.  Subj.  Participles. 

«lffe«  m^tc  mlU  {^^^'^^^ 

The  pres.  ind.  inflects:  t(^  a^et§,  tu  tt?ct§t,  er  mi^,  tt?tr  njtffen,  t^r 
mi|f(e)t,  fte  miffen.  Subj. :  i(^  triffc,  n^iffeft,  miffe,  etc.  Imp. :  tcifl'e, 
mijfet,  iinffen  @te. 

2.  J)urfen,  m,  to  be  permitted. 

Inf.  Free.  sg.  Pret.  ind.  Subj.  Past  part. 

tiirfen  tarf  lurfte  burfte  |^?"^^^ 

Pres.  ind. :  barf,  barffi,  tarf,  biirfen,  tiirft,  tiirfen*  Subj. :  biirfef 
tiirfeft,  t'lirfe,  etc. 


136]  ANOMALOUS  VERBS.  45 

3.  ttonnen,  in,  to  be  able,  +  can. 

Inf.  Pres.  eg.      '    Pret.  ind.  Subj.  Past  part. 

Knnen  lantt  fonnte  fbnnte  |^„ 

Pres.  ind. :  fantt,  fannft,  tamt,  lonnen,  etc.    Subj. :  fonne,  fonneft, 
fi3nne,  etc.     Imp. :  Vonnt,  fbnnt,  fbnnett  ®ic* 

4.  Wo^m,  V,  IV,  to  be  able,  +  may. 

Inf.  Pres.  sg.  Pret.  ind.  Subj.  Past  part. 

( qemo(^t 
mogen  ma^  moc^te  moc^te  i  ^ 


.  mogert 


Just  like  fonnen. 

5.  ©oHen,  iv,  +  shall. 


Inf.  Pres.  sg.  Pret.  ind.  and  subj.  Past  part. 

foHen  [on  follte  ^  ^^^"^^^ 


Pres.  ind.:  foil,  foUfl,  foU,  follen,  etc. 


( foEen 


Tills  is  almost  entirely  weak  now.     The  vowel-difference  in  the  pres. 
has  been  levelled  away.     Comp.  Eng.  shall,  should. 

6.  ^Jliiffen,  vi,  +  must. 

Inf.  Pres.  sg.  Pret.  ind.  Subj.  Past  part. 

miiiTen  mug  mu^tt  mu§te  |Sm 

Pres.  ind.:  mu^,  mufft,  mug.     Subj.:  miiffe,  etc. 
This  too  is  almost  entirely  weak. 

7.  SCoHen,  i,  +  will. 

Inf.  Pres.  sg.  Subj.  Ind.  and  subj.  Pret.         Past  part. 

tDoaen         n?ia  mlit  ti^odte  UeiroUt 

(  n?o(Iett 

Pres.  ind. :  luitt,  ttJtttft,  toiU,  tooUm,  miit,  Gotten.     (See  472,  2.) 

n.   The  verbs   ge^u,  +  to  go,  flel^tt,  +  to   stand,  t^un, 
4-  to  do. 


46  ANOMALOUS  VERBS.  [137, 

136.  1.  ®eKe)n. 

Pres.  ind. :  i6:i  ge:^e,  Uu  ge^fl,  er  get)t,  jrir  c^t^n,  %  ge^t,  fte  gelm. 
Subj.:  id^  ge^e,  tu  ge^eft,  er  gel)e,  etc. 
Imp.  sg. :  gel);  pi.,  ge^^t,  gel)en  @ie*    Part.:  ge^ent)* 
Pret.  ind.:  id^  gieng.     Subj.:  i(^  gienge* 
Part.:  gegangen*    According  to  vii ;  from  a  stem  ''gang." 

2.  ®teHO«* 

Pres.  ind. :  i6:i  fte^e,  tu  fte^jl,  er  fle:^t,  n?tr  fte^n,  i^r  j^t%  jte  jle^^n* 
Subj. :  i(^  fte^e,  t)u  fte^^ef^,  er  fte^e,  etc. 
Imp.  sg. :  fte^;  pi.,  fte^t,  fte:^en  <Ste*    Part.:  fle:^ent>* 
Pret.  ind.:  ic^  ftant)  (ftunt))»     Subj.:  ftante  (ftuttbe)^ 
Part.:  geftant)en»     According  to  yi  ;   from  a  stem  ''stand." 

3.  Z^nn. 

Pres.  ind. :  i(^  t1;)m,  t)u  tbuj^,  er  ftut,  n?ir  tfeun,  i^r  t^ut,  fie  t^un* 
Subj. :  i*  t^ue,  t>u  t^uefl,  er  t^ue,  n?ir  t1^m,  i|r  t|ut,  fie  t^uen> 

Imp.  sg.:  t^u;  pi.,  t^ut,  t^un  ®ie*    Part.:  t^uent). 

Pret.  ind. :  i(^  t^at,  t)u  t^atft,  er  t^^at,  n?ir  t^aten,  i^r  t^tet,  fte 
t^aten.    Subj.:  x&)  t|dte,  bu  t^ateft,  er  H^att,  etc. 

Part.:  get^an^ 

The  full  forms  with  c  of  these  three  verbs  are  not  used  in  the  indica- 
tive. The  ^  is  merely  graphic,  and  is  not  pronounced,  e.  g.,  i^  gel^e  is  not 
ge-l^e,  but  ge  or  gc'c. 

137.  The  compound  verbs  are  not  inflected  differently  from 
the  simple  verbs.  Notice  the  position  of  the  separable  prefix, 
and  ge-  in  separable  compound  verbs:  \6^  fdjreibe  art,  f(^rie6  an; 
imp.  fcfereibe  (tu)  an,  id)  Ijak  angefi^riekn,  id)  merbe  anfc^reiBen* 
The  separable  prefix  stands  apart  from  the  verb  in  the  simple 
tenses  (pres.  and  pret.),  but  only  in  main  clauses;  ge-,  gu-  stand 
betvreen  prefix  and  verb,  angefd)rieBett,  ansufi^reiben.  Ex.:  3^ 
fd)reik,  fd)rieb  Den  Srief  ab,  but  mii^renD  id)  ten  Srief  abf(^rteb 
(dependent  clause).     In  inseparable  compounds  notice  the 


138]  ANOMALOUS  VERBS.  47 

participle  has  no  ^e  :  ict^  i^erfte^e,  i?erjlant),  ^aBe  ^erftanbeti,  mxU 
ijerfte^tt.     (See  108,  3.) 

1.  Notice  a  class  of  inseparable  compounds  derived  from  compound 
nouns.  These  have  ge»  They  can  be  easily  recognized  by  the  chief 
stress  falling  on  the  first  element:  ha^  ^^rit'^jlitc!,  verb  fru'l)ftu(fen,  frul)ftucftef 
gefrii^jlucft,  to  breakfast;  ber  9f{a'tf(%la9,  verb  ra'tfc^lagen,  ratWlagte,  geratfc^lagt, 
to  take  council. 

138.   Example  of  a  reflexive  verb,  e,  g.,  ftd)  freuen,to  rejoice: 
Pres.  i(^  frcue  mi(^,  tu  freuft  t)idj,  er  freut  fid),  mv  freuen  un^,  i^r 

freut  eucb,  fte  freueu  ft*;  i6>  freute  mic^,  ^abe  mi^  gefreut,  n?ert)e  mic^ 

freuen,  n^er^e  mi^  (^efreut  i)ahn. 


FIRST     PART 


SECOND    SECTION. 


SYNTAX 


142J  SYiTTAX   OF  THE  AETICLE.  51 


SYNTAX. 

139.  For  practical  reasons  we  divide  the  Syntax  into 
Special  and  General  Syntax. 

The  Special  treats  of  the  function  of  the  word,  inflected  or 
uninflected,  in  a  sentence. 

The  General  treats  of  the  combination  of  words  into  a 
sentence,  of  the  word-order,  and  of  the  combination  of 
clauses  into  a  compoimd  sentence. 

It  is  of  course  difficult  to  keep  these  two  divisions  separate,  as  in  fact  all  the  differ- 
ent branches  of  grammar.  Thus  the  separation  of  inflection  and  function,  of  phonol- 
ogy and  inflection,  of  word-formation  and  syntax  is  a  violent  one.  The  division  into 
special  and  general  syntax  is  the  custom  of  French  grammarians,  who  have  succeeded 
best  in  freeing  their  grammatical  system  from  the  strait-jacket  of  Latin  and  Greek 
grammars. 

SPECIAL     SYNTAX. 

The  parts  of  speech  are  treated  here  in  the  same  order  as  they  are  in  the  Accidence. 

Syntax  of  the  Article. 

140.  The  use  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun  as  definite  article  is 
much  older  than  that  of  the  numeral  „m"  as  indefinite  article,  //©in" 
was  used  where  the  definite  article  could  not  stand  ;  hence  the  plural  of 
cin  ^am  is  still  Scanner.  In  O.  H.  G.  the  article  is  still  lacking  ;  its  use 
spread  in  M.  H.  G. ,  so  that  now  it  is  almost  a  necessity. 

Some  General  Cases  of  Absence  of  the  Article. 

141.  Proper  names,  names  of  materials  always  when  pre- 
ceded by  nouns  expressing  quantity  and  measure,  have  no 
article.  Ex. :  @oet|e  erreic^te  tin  l^o^e^  3llter.  ©chiller  ^axh  'otv^ 
Wtnima^xQ  juttg,    S3(ei  ij^  ttjei(^er  aU  ®oId.    gin  5)futtt)  Budfer. 

142.  No  noun  preceded  by  a  genitive  can  take  an  article: 
Deg  T)en!eng  %ciDtn  ijl  aerriffen  (F.  1748).  £et  alten  ©otter  Bunt 
©ettJtmmel  (G.). 


52  SYKTAX   OF  THE   ARTICLE.  [143- 

143.  There  is  no  article  before  nouns  (connected  by  nnX), 
It^eter,  no(^  or  unconnected)  in  certain  set  and  adverbial  phrases; 
in  an  enumeration  of  objects  belonging  to  the  same  class  or 
genus.  Ex. :  ®e(t  unl)  ®ut»  $au^  mt)  ^oU  ^it  ®ott  fiir  ^onig 
unt)  3SaterIan^»  3n  @au^  nnX>  SSrau^*  (Bxnn  unt)  35erftanr)  i)erlier^ 
id)  fdjier  (F.  2504).  5^1*1  trt)if(^  ij^  te^  J^oren  Siratt!  no*  @peife 
(F.  301).  ©on  ic^  nttt  ©rtp,  ^eipel,  geter  fcbreiBen?  (F.  1732). 
Ura^ne,  ®ro§mutter,  ^ntttx  unD  ,^tnb  in  bumpfer  6tube  beifammen  fint) 
(Schwab).  3^^  ^if*'  3«  S^tte,  ipau^  an  ^an^,  <Btnn  auf  @tetn,  na* 
Djien,  gen  ©ii^en,  »on  5^ort)en  (but  notice  im  Dften,  im  (BixUn,  etc. 

144.  All  pronouns  exclude  the  article^  except  foI(^,  mand), 
njelc^,  ma^  fiir,  which  allow  an  indefinite  article  after  them,  and 
aE(e),  which  allows  the  definite  article  after  it;  e,  g. :  5Ba^  foil 
aU  tier  ©c^rnerj  unb  Sufi  (G.).  SBelc^  etn  gef(^aftig  33ol!  etit  tin  unt) 
au^  (id.).     3Ba^  fiir  ein  Sanb^mann  Bijl  bu,  3&9^^^  (Sch.). 

145.  An  abstract  noun,  and  any  noun  denoting  profession, 
rank,  position  have  no  article  in  the  predicate  after  neuter 
verbs;  e.g.:  5)^ilo!te't,ber  gan^^atur  ift,  feringt  au(^  ben  9leoptoIe'm 
ju  feiner  ^^latur  trieber  juriicf  (Le.).  ^ei^e  ^Wagtfter;  :^etge  S^octor 
gar  (F.  360).  (3c^)  bin  ©olbat,  fomme  niemal^  trieber  (Sch.),. 
Eng.,  I  am  a  soldier. 

146.  1.  In  technical  phrases  some  nouns  and  adjectives  used  as 
such  take  no  article :  (S($retber  biefe^,  the  writer  of  this ;  Md^tx,  plaintiff; 
S3efagter;  ®cbac^ter;  DMge^;  f^olgenbe^,  etc.  In  headings:  Ue^er  Slttmut  unb 
Sitrbe  (Sch.).     (£afu^le{)re,  f^Ienon^le^re. 

2.    In  folk-lore  and  folk-songs :  OJotfappc^ettf  Little  Red  Riding-hood ; 

(B^mtmttdjcn,    ^mU  fprac^:  tc^  breeze  bi(^.    Slo^lein  fprad^t  ic^  jlec^e  btc^  (G.). 
2:pr(^ett  fnarrt,    Wtan^ltin  pfetft. 

Article  with  Proper  Nouns. 

147.  The  rule  is:  no  article  before  proper  nouns  just  as 
in  English. 

1.  Names  of  persons  may  take  an  article  when  the  bearer  is 


149J  ARTICLE   WITH  PROPER  NOUN-S,  53 

well  known  and  his  name  has  become  a  common  noun;  to  ex- 
press familiarity  and  intimacy,  also  contempt;  to  mark  gender 
and  case  more  clearly  (this  applies  also  to  names  of  places 
and  countries) ;  when  tiie  author's  or  artist's  name  is  used  for 
his  work;  before  names  of  planets,  of  ships,  of  the  characters 
of  a  play,  of  titles  of  books  taken  from  a  person.  Ex. :  (£in 
^af^ington,  Ux  SBelfe,  t>ie  Dttoneju  Schiller's  Tell  and  Wallen- 
stein,  Goethe's  Gotz  and  Lassing's  M.  you  Barnhelm  are  full 
of  examples  of  the  second  use  (famiharity,  etc.).  !Die  Sitfte  be^ 
(Bofrateu.  ^ar'i^  tern  gertiinant)  gemefen,  tt>a^  Dcta^io  mix  wax  .  .  . 
(Sch.).  Sagt  ftd)  nennen  ben  ffiallenfieitt  (Sch.)  (contempt). 
I^e^rient  fpielte  ten  '^at^an.  2Jletn  greunt)  1))at  ^en  Sorot  »er!auft 
(painting  by  Corot).     2)er  §erMe^  ift  Befc^aMgt* 

2.  Names  of  countries  and  provinces  which  are  not  neuter 
take  the  definite  article.  Most  of  these  are  feminine  and  a 
few  masculine,  viz.,  compounds  :  ^er  Srei^gau,  3lfeeingau,  ter 
(Suntgau;  also  ber  ipaag  (  +  the  Hague);  ber,  ta^  Slfa^.  Femi- 
nines  in  -ei:  Me  ZMti\  SQaKadjet';  in  -an  x  tie  ^oltau,  W 
SBetterau ;  in  -mar!  :  Me  Wnmaxl,  bie  Dftmarl ;  bie  Sauft^,  Me 
®d)tt)ei§,  Ik  ^rimm,  tie  S!:t'oank,  bte  ^\al^.  Some  neuters  in  -lanb  j 
ta5  Sogtianb,  ba^  S3enbtlanb,  bie  5^ieberlanbe,  pi. 

3.  Names  of  oceans,  lakes,  straits,  rivers,  mountains,  and 
forests  always  have  the  definite  article,  e,  g.^  ba^  SWittelmeer,  bie 
Dftfee,  ber  SoDenfee,  ber  Selt,  ber  (Bum,  ber  0l^etn,  bie  t)om\i,  let 
^ara,  ber  @pejfart,  bie  Sllpen,  ber  ©{^njar^n^alb* 

4.  Names  of  the  seasons,  months,  days  of  the  week,  of  the 
streets  of  a  city:  „T)tx  SBinter  ift  ein  &}xmmann'^  (Clauilius). 
3m  S^ttuar,  U^  ©onntag^,  auf  or  in  ber  ^aiferftra^e,  im  grii^Ung. 

148.  Appellatives  have  an  article  as  in  English :  tie  2:^rane 
quidt,  bie  @rbe  ^at  mi^  mieber  (F.  784).  For  exceptions  see 
141-146. 

149.  Abstract  nouns  have  no  article  when  they  denote  a 
characteristic  or  state  of  mind:    ?i}lut  jeiget  au(^  ber  9}?ameluc! ; 


54  SY2!n?AX  OF  THE  ARTICLE.  [150- 

@e|or|am  ifl  m  S^riften  (Bijmud  (Sch.).  greut>e  war  in  Zxoia'^ 
ipatten  (id.)  ^rieg  ijl  emig  stt)tfd)en  Sift  un^  2lrgwo^n  (id.).  But 
when  they  denote  an  act  or  motion  they  are  treated  as  appel- 
latives. They  may  also  take  the  article  that  has  generahzing 
force,  e.  g,,  Der  Sot)  ift  t)er  eiinben  @oIt>  (B.).  "tk  2BaM  ftet)t  ttr 
uo(^  fret  (Sch.).  Die  ^unft  ift  lang  unt)  furj  ift  unfer  Seben  (F. 
558-9).  \Die  Sctfd)aft  ^orM4  tro^I,  aUeitt  mir  fe:^lt  l)er  ®IauBe 
(F.  765).     T;a5  war  ein  ©^up  !  (Sch.). 

150.  Names  of  materials  have  the  generalizing  article, 
which  denotes  the  whole  kind  or  substance,  or  an  article  that 
singles  out  a  certain  kind  or  quantity,  e,  g.,  ^tx  SBein  erfreut 
te3  mcn]6^m  iperj  (B.).  "La^  ®olt  ift  foftBar.  "Lit  (BtdnhW  ift 
\6^m^v^  out  Braun.  Without  article:  (Si(6er  unt)  ®o(t)  :^a6e  ic^  ni(^t 
(B.).  Stut  ift  gefToifeit  (Sch.).  Sa^  mir  ten  beften  Seeder  ffiein^  in 
purem  ©olfe  reic^en  (G.). 

151.  Collective  nouns  take  an  article  except  when  taken 
in  a  partitive  sense:  3Ba5  rennt  tae  SSol!?  (Sch.).  SBeit  t>a^inten 
war  nod)  la^  gu§i)oI!  (id.).     2Bir  ^akn  gug^ol!  unt)  3fleiterei  (id.). 

152.  All  classes  of  noims  qualified  by  an  adjective,  by  a 
genitive,  by  a  relative  clause,  etc.,  take  an  article  in  the  singu- 
lar, excepting  names  of  materials  and  nouns  in  the  vocative,  in 
the  predicate  or  in  certain  adverbial  phrases.  The  plural  has 
the  definite  article  or  none.  Ex. :  J)er  fleine  ®ott  t)er  SBelt  Heibt 
jlet^  »ott  glei(^em  ©cblat]  (F.  281).  Ter  ®ott,  tcr  Sifen  wa(^fen 
Ue§  .  ♦  ♦  (Amdt).  I^te  §auptftaDt  ^on  gran!rei(^.  But  ((Btc) 
fprad^en  laut  ^od  (^oI)en  @inne  unD  ©efii^Ie^  (G.).  9lacb  alter  ^^eife. 
(£5  gab  fdsbiire  3^iten  a(5  tie  unfern  (Sch.).  J:er  alte  Sarkrojfa 
(Uh.). 

153.  The  genitive  preceding  a  noun  always  has  the  article 
except  a  proper  name  :  3«  te^  'ilD'iarmor^  falte  SBangen  (Sch.). 
3nt)e^  SBalte^  ?IJlitte  (id.).  Schiller's  „an  Ufer'^  S^lant)"  Goethe 
would  have  made  a  compound,  ,,Ufer grant.''  Comp^  „Sergee^ 
Ifeo^le"  and  other  compounds  of  Goethe. 


158]  EEPETITIOK  OF  THE  AKTICLE.  55 

154.  The  definite  article  stands  for  an  Eng.  possessive 
pronoun,  when  the  possessor  cannot  be  mistaken.  There 
may  or  may  not  be  a  personal  pronoun  as  object  in  the  sen- 
tence. Ex.:  Ser  ^opf  t^ut  mix  \o  tot^  (Song),  ^abt  i^r  mtr  Un 
ginger  Blo^  genommen?  (Sch.).  (@te)  xix^xt  xbm  leife  tie  ©d^ulter 
(H.  and  D.  4,  63).     See  243,  3. 

155.  1.  In  S.  Gt.  the  definite  article  is  always  applied  to  members  of 
the  family  instead  of  the  possessive  pronouns.  In  N.  G.,  as  in  Eng.,  no 
article  is  necessary:  ®ru§^  ten  ^akx  unb  SJater^  33ritber  1  (Sch.). 

2.  As  with  proper  names  so  names  of  materials  and  abstract  nouns 
often  have  the  definite  article  in  the  genitive  and  dative  merely  to  show 
the  case :  ber  1Slil6)  Saffer  'oox^k^tn* 

156.  The  definite  article  is  used  in  German  for  the  indefi- 
nite in  English  in  a  distributive  sense  :  Sutter  foftet  anbert^al^ 
Waxt  l^a^  9)funD,  a  pound  ;  Mefe^  Znd)  foftet  90  3)fenttig(e)  Die  SUe; 
fiinfmal  ba^  3^^^  or  im  ^a^xt.  This  "  a  "  in  Eng.  represents  the 
preposition  "  on/'  and  is  not  the  indefinite  article. 

157.  Sin  can  stand  in  German  before  certain  indefinite  pronouns  and 
neuter  adj.  where  it  does  not  stand  in  Eng.:  ein  jeber^  ein  jegltc^er,  ein  fDld}er, 
etn  man(^er  (better  mant^  ciner);  ein  ft^t^,  =  a  fixed  sum ;  ein  me^rere^r  = 
more ;  ein  njenige^,  =:  little.    3^  fc^reibe  na(^|len^  ein  me^reres^. 

Repetition  of  the  Article. 

158.  Before  each  of  several  nouns  of  different  gender  the 
article  must  be  repeated  if  it  stand  at  all:  Der  3?ater,  t)ie  9Jlutter 
bie  gin^eit  ijor  ^e^  ipauptmann^  $au^  (Song).  If  two  nouns,  con- 
nected by  unb,  denote  different  persons  the  article  should  be 
repeated  :  T)er  Dnfel  unt)  fatl^t  be^  ^inbe^  tt^ar  M  ber  2:aufe 
^ugegen  (one  person).  But  ber  Dnfel  unb  ber  ^ai^t  .  ♦  ♦  (two 
persons). 

Both  rules  are  often  offended  against  by  Luther,  Goethe,  and  Lessing, 
and  frequently  in  the  spoken  language  :  2Benn  man  ben  ^akx  unb  Did^ter  mit 
cinanber  ijergleid)en  will  .  .  .  (Le.). 

The  article  before  an  apposition  is  treated  as  in  English. 


56  SYNTAX  OF  THE   GEITDEB.  [159- 


SYNTAX   OF   THE   GENDER, 

159.  The  grammatical  gender  of  nouns  is  threefold,  mas- 
culine, feminine,  neuter.  As  to  living  beings,  the  nouns  de- 
noting males  are  masculine,  and  those  denoting  females  femi- 
nine. Ex. :  ter  gu(^^>,  iom,  Ux  gute  3Kantt,  5^effe,  ^uc(^t,  Dd)^, 
Sod;  Ik  ^u|,  3tege,  Safe,  fc^bne  "SRa^l,  W  (Ban,  (Btnk. 

1.  Exceptions :  nouns  denoting  the  young  of  animals,  diminutives, 
and  ha^  SBeib,  ba^  Mm\^  (see  59),  ba^  ^rauenjtmmer  are  neuter.  Ex. :  ha^ 
%txkl,  %mtn,  ^alb,  mm^n,  ^xauldn. 

2.  Any  grammatical  gender  is  ascribed  to  the  names  of  the  species 
without  regard  to  sex.  Neuter:  ba^  ^^ferb,  ba^  ^^mm,  ta^  ©(^af,  ba^ 
«Rc^.    Fem. :  bie  S^ad^ttgaH,  ^meife,  S3iene,  Wlau^,  0latte.    Masc. :  ber  %i\d), 

160.  Where  the  grammatical  gender  does  not  coincide 
with  the  natural,  the  following  rules  may  be  of  service,  based 
on  the  meanings  of  nouns  and  on  their  derivation.  See  159, 1. 

Gender  AccoRDiNa  to  meaning. 

1.  MascuHne  are  : 

The  names  of  the  points  of  compass,  of  the  winds,  seasons, 
months,  days  of  the  week;  of  mammals  (a  few  small  ones  Hke 
Me  ^an^,  t)ie  3flatte  excepted),  most  of  the  larger  birds,  most 
fish,  and  stones. 

Ex. :  ter  5^ort)  or  ^^lor^en;  ©ommer;  %tixmx,  Slugu'fl;  9Hontag, 
(SonnaBenl);  t>er  Sfel,  Some,  Slefant ;  kr  ©traug,  9lMer,  <Stor(^ ;  ter 
§at,  5lal,  ^arpfen  (all  compounds  with  -fifd);  of  course,  as  ^ev 
3Balftfc^,  ^Uppenfifd)) ;  ^er  ^iefel,  "Liama'nt,  gel^fpat* 

2.  Feminine  are  : 

The  names  of  most  rivers,  trees,  plants,  and  flowers  (in  -e), 
insects,  small  singing  birds,  and  nearly  all  derivative  abstract 
nouns. 


161]  GENDEE  ACCORDING  TO   DEEIVATIOI^.  57 

Ex. :  l?ie  S>efer,  DDer,  Sl6e  ;  tie  gid)e,  :^attne,  Suiie  ;  Me  9lel!e, 
9^ofe,  Mbe,  5^effel,  ^artoffcl;  t)ie  Slmeife,  ffianje,  Siene;  tie  9lad?tigaII, 
@(^mal6e,  Serd^e;  also  tie  ^ra^e,  Sule^  Die  2ie6e,  2:ugent),  Suflent), 
I^emut,  greuntlid)!ett,  etc. 

3.  Neuter  are  : 

The  names  of  places  and  countries  except  those  always  hav- 
ing the  article  (see  147,  2),  collective  nouns  (particularly  those 
with  ®e-) ;  most  names  of  materials  including  metals,  of  the 
letters  of  the  alphabet;  other  parts  of  speech  used  as  nouns, 
particularly  adjectives  not  denoting  persons  (see  169). 

Ex. :  „ta5  fcfeone  ©panten/'  „eitt  fletn  '^axi^/'  ta^  SSolf,  ^eer,  ®e^ 
birge,  ®efcl)ug;  tae  §0(3,  §eu,  ^d)mala,  Dbft;  U^  ^x)tn,  Slei,  ^wpfer, 
3tnn;  ta^  2B,  g);  ta^  Summein,  „i:a^3  S^enn  uuD  ta^s  ^Iber/'ta^ 
®ute,  ta^  SBa^re,  ta^  ©d^one* 

ReiuAEK.— So  many  rivers  are  feminine  because  they  are  compounded  with  -aha 
(  +  Lat.  aqua) :  SGJeicr  and  SBerra  <  Wesera(h),  Werraha;  fcie  ©alja(d)).  But  notice  ber 
Di^ein,  SlRain.  S)ie  ©d^roeij,  SEiirfel  have  the  article  really  on  account  of  their  exceptional 
gender.    American  rivers  are  masculine :  ber  ^ubjon,  ber  'iSflof)av>t. 

161.     Gender  according  to  derivation  and  endings. 

1.  Masculine  are  : 

Most  monosyllables  by  ablaut,  e,  g.,  ter  (Spru(^,  ©prog,  ^ti6!i, 
@d)irm ;  those  in  -tx,  -Ux,  -ner  (denoting  agents) ;  in  -et  (denot- 
ing instrument) ;  all  in  -ling ;  many  in  -en ;  dissyllabics  in  -z 
according  to  the  n-declension  (denoting  living  beings) ;  in  -ic^. 

Ex.:  itx  (Bd)xcikx,  Mn^Ux,  Wt'tner;  tcx  "Detfel,  ^ebel,  ter  ?5remt)^ 
ling,  (S^iinftUng,  @dugling;  t)er  (^ec^en,  £)egen;  corresponding  to 
Eng.  -om,  ^ufen,  Sefen;  ter  ^mU,  i'om,  33ote;  ®anferic^,  SBiite:? 
rid),  gitticb. 

2.  Feminine  are: 

Many  dissyllabics  (by  ablaut,  see  496)  in  -e ;  abstract  nouns 
in  -e,  mainly  from  adjectives  ;  in  -ie,  mostly  foreign;  many  in 


58  SYNTAX  OF  THE  GENDER.  [162- 

-t;  all  in  -ei, -in, -uttg, -l)eit, -feit,  -ft^aft;    some  in  -ni^  and 
-fal;  foreign  ones  in  -age  (see  163,  5). 

Ex.:  Me  ®ro^e,  Jpb^e;  Ik  (Sprac^e,  ®aBe:  tie  ^^^ilofop^ie,  ©alari;? 
terie ;  tie  ipaft,  ^a(^t,  ,^raft;  tie  S^ig^^^i/  Surifterei,  S}telotei;  tie 
greuntin,  2el)rerin  ;  tie  Dultung,  SBitmung;  tie  greifceit,  grbmmig^ 
feit;  greuntfc^aft;  tie  SBiltiti^,  gaulni^;  tie  Slamage,  Sourage. 

3.  Neuter  are: 

All  in  -(^en,  -leiit ;  most  in  -\d,  -fal,  -ni^,  -turn ;  nearly  aU  of 
the  form  ®e-e  or  @e-  without  e;  some  in  -eL 

Ex.:  ta^  ipiintc^en,  ^naHein ;  ta^  3f^atfel,  UberBleibfel;  ta^  ©c^ic!::^ 
fal,  ^abfal;  ta^  ©etac^tnic,  SSerma^tni^;  ta5  ^ouigtum,  S^riftentum 
(only  two  masc,  ter  S^eic^tuitt  and  S^^tum);  tai:  ©efilie,  ©emiilte; 
ta5  (55eHlt,  Q^efc^id ;  ta^  Siintel,  ©efintel,  and  the  S.  G.  diminu- 
tives ta^  3^itttel,  Siibel,  etc. 

On  the  whole  the  gender  of  noans  has  changed  very  little  in  the  history  of  the  lan- 
guage. Ex.  of  changes  are:  bie  <Sitte  <  O.  H.  G.  der  situ,  already  M.  H.  G.  sometimes 
diu  site.  "Die  23Iume  was  O.  H.  G.  both  masc.  and  fern.  ®ie  Z-a\)Vi<i  was  O.  H.  G.  der 
fano. 

162.  The  following  groups  of  nouns  have  varying  genders, 
though  some  are  of  the  same  origin  and  have  the  same  mean- 
ing. They  should  be  fully  treated  in  the  dictionary,  to  which 
the  student  is  referred.  Only  a  few  examples  are  given  in 
each  group. 

1st  group.  The  same  form  and  meaning,  but  double  gender  (m.  and 
n.) ;  ber  and  ba^  9)letcr,  2:^ermome'ter,  S3arome'ter,  SSereic^,  (Bdjxtdtn,  Beug,  etc. 

2d  group.  Double  gender  (m.  and  f.)  witb  varying  forms,  but  the 
same  meaning  and  origin  :  ber  <B6^mi  —  bte  Sd^iirje;  ber  Xrupp  —  bie  Xruppe; 
ber  DueK  —  bte  DueUe ;  ber  ^palt  —  bte  (Spalte. 

Bd  group.  Double  gender,  the  same  form  in  sg.  and  pi.  if  the  plural 
be  formed  of  both  genders,  but  of  different  meaning  and  sometimes  of 
different  origin  (the  latter  with  *). 


163] 


GENDER  OF  FOREIGN   WORDS. 


59 


woman  ;  pi.  iDie  C2)utcn* 

ber  ^eibe,  heathen 

btc  |)elbc,  heath 

pi.  bie  |)eiben 

*ber  SSuKe,  bull 

bie  33uIIe  (document) 

bie  SuHen 

ber  ^xU,  heir 

bas^  dxbc,  inheritance 

bie  ©rben 

ber  ilJerbienj^,  earnings 

ha^  SJerbtenjl,  desert,  merit 

bie  ^erbienjle 

*ber  ©etfel,  hostage 

bie  ©eipel,  scourge 

bie  ®ei§eltt 
-feln 

*ber  differ,  measurer 

H^  s»?effer,  knife 

bie  9)?effcr 

There  are  perhaps  forty  in  all. 

4:th  group.  Double  gender,  double  plural,  but  different  meaning  and 
sometimes  different  origin  (the  latter  marked  *).  Perhaps  a  dozen  or 
more. 

ber  SBanb/  volume  pi.  SSdnbe  ba^  sBanb,  ribbon  pi.  S3anber 

*ber  S^arfc^,  march  SD^arfc^e  bie  Max\^,  marsh  SOiarfc^en 

ber  (B^iih,  shield  Sc^ilbe  ba^  Sd^ilb,  sign-board  (Sd^ilber 

*ber  Xf^ox,  fool  2:^oren  ba^  X^or/  gate 


Gender  of  foreign  words. 

163.  Foreign  words  retain  generally  the  original  gender  : 
bie  ^ein  <  L.  poena,  later  pena  ;  ba^  ^tofter  <  L.  claustrum  ; 
ber  Verier  <  L.  carcer{em). 

Many  have  changed  gender  for  various  reasons.  They  were 
fully  Germanized  and  followed  German  models  according  to 
ending  or  meaning,  or  they  followed  French  (Romance)  rules. 
Some  changes  are  difficult  to  account  for. 

1.  Examples  of  neuter  nouns  that  became  masculine,  masculines  that  be- 
came neuter,  and  f  eminines  that  became  neuter :  ber  ^ala'\t,  <  palatium  ; 
ber  33alfam,  <  halsamum ;  ber  SJjantet,  <  mantellum ;  ber  9)rei^,  <  pre- 
tium  ;  ber  9)unft,  <  punctum.  Neuter  nouns  in  -at :  ba^  ^onfula't,  <  con- 
sulatiis  ;  \>0i^  %oxma't,  formatum  or  -us;  \>a^  fRu^,  <  V.  L.  risma  (f.) ;  ba^ 
^reuj,  <  c/ruc{em)  (f ). 

2.  Examples  of  nouns  that  have  changed  gender  in  analogy  with  Ger- 
man words  similar  in  meaning  and  ending  :  ber  Biegelf  <  tegula ;  ber 


60  SYl^TAX   OF  THE   GENDER.  164- 

5)?armor,  marmor,  n.,  on  account  of  ber  (Stein  (see  160,  1) ;  ber  ^orper,  < 
c&iyus,  n.  ;  ber  ^aba'ijcr,  <  cadaveVy  n.,  on  account  of  ber  Seib,  ber  2eic^^ 
nam,  and  the  many  masculines  in  -er;  bie  3^uinmer,  <  numeruSy  since  bie 
3a^l»    ©uropa,  ©parta,  5lt^en,  Zx^sk,  now  all  neuter  (see  160,  3}. 

3.  Nouns  in  -arium,  -orium,  -erium^  -arCy  became  all  masculine  in 
analogy  with  H.  G.  words  in  -er,  <  cere  <  ari  :  ber  Sllta'r,  <  altare  ;  ber 
teller,  <  cellarium ;  ber  5)faUer,  <  psalterium ;  ber  SSet^er,  <  O.  H.  G. 
wiwdri  <  vivarium  ;  ber  ^iafkx,  <  It.  piasira,  f.,  <  V.  L.  plastrum. 

4.  Neuter  nouns,  whose  plural  ended  in  -a  in  Gr.  or  L.,  became 
feminine  in  German  from  analogy  with  feminines  in  -e,  <  dy  and  also 
through  Romance  influence :  bie  S5iBel,  <  hiblion,  V.  L.  bibUa  ;  bie  Drgel, 
<  orgamim,  -a ;  bie  ^^frunbe,  <  V.  L.  provenda  (pi.)  ;  bie  8tubie,  < 
studium  ;  bie  '^xmxtt  <  prcemivm. 

5.  Words  in  -a'ge,  masculine  and  feminine  in  French,  are  all  feminine 
in  G.,  e.  g.,  bie  SBaga'ge,  bie  SSlama'ge,  bie  Soura'ge,  etc.  ^ie  Sd)rift,  <  scrip- 
turn,  bie  3^ac^t,  <  pactum,  are  due  to  analogy  with  G.  nouns  in  -t,  viz., 
bie  ^va(^t,  <Si(|t,  (B^x6)t,  ^a6^U  etc. 

Gender  of  compound  nouns. 

164.  Compound  nouns  have  the  gender  of  the  last  noun : 
ter  ^Sirnbaum,  t)ie  §auotl)ur,  ra^  ©(^il^er^au^,  t)a^  grauenaimmer 
(lady). 

Exceptions  :  a.  Many  compounds  with  -mut :  bie  S)entut,  bie  3Be^mut, 
bie  (Banftmut;  but  ber  ^oc^mut,  ber  ?5reimut,  etc.  They  are,  however,  only 
seeming  exceptions,  -mut  going  back  to  compounds  with  O.  H.  G.  and 
M  H.  G.  -muoty  m.,  and  -muoti,  f.  This  has  given  rise  to  the  double 
gender  of  the  same  noun :  0.  H.  G.  7i6hmuoti,  f.  only,  but  M.  H.  G. 
hochmuete,  liocJimuoty  f.,  and  liochmuot,  m.  ;  bie  X)emut/  <  M.  H.  G. 
diemuete,  diemuoty  always  feminine:  ber  ^leinntut,  bie  5lnmut,  bie  ©ropmut; 
also  ber  ©ropmut;  always  ber  |)0(^mut»  For  5lrmut,  which  is  no  compound 
with  -mut,  see  511,  2,  a. 

1).  ^tT  5I6f(^eu  seems  an  exception,  because  bie  ©c^eu  is  old  and  more 
common  than  ber  <S(^eu. 

c.  Names  of  cities  and  places  are  neuter  even  if  ending  in  nouns  of 
different  gender  :  '^Oi^  fd^cJne  ^.imBiirg,  ^Giine^urg,  Olnnabcrg,  etc. ;  but  bie  3Bart^ 
l&urg,  ^^errenburg,  because  these  are  castles,  =  SBurgen,  f.,  and  not  towns. 


168]  COKCOED   OF   GEKDEES.  61 

d.  !Der  5D'?ittn)Dc^  (2Bo(^e,  f.)  appears  by  the  side  of  the  legitimate  bie 
WlxXiXOQ^,  already  in  M.  H.  G.  It  lias  followed  the  other  days  of  the 
week,  which  are  all  masculine.     (See  160,  1). 

e.  !I)ie  3litttr)Drt  had  double  gender  in  0.  H.  G.,  but  the  neuter  was 
more  common.    Luther  has  still  bie  and  ba^  3lttttt)ort, 

CONCOKD   OF    GENDERS. 

165.  This  subject  can  be  best  treated  under  the  head  of 
concords  as  between  noun  and  adjective,  noun  and  pronoun, 
subject  and  predicate.  The  general  rule  that  adjectives  and 
pronouns  take  the  grammatical  gender  of  the  noun  to  which 
they  refer  is  only  set  aside  when  the  grammatical  gender  does 
not  coincide  with  the  sex.  In  that  case  the  pronoun  or  adjec- 
tive can  take  the  natural  gender. 

166.  ?!??ab(^en,  9J?agbIetn,  2Bei&,  f^rciulein  admit  of  this  construction  ac- 
cording to  the  sense,  most  commonly ;  not  so,  ^inb,  i^rauenjtmnter,  5)^ann* 
lein,  ©M)nlem,  and  the  other  diminutives  :  Unb  f^neE  tt)ar  i^re  (S^ur  ijerlorenr 
foklb  ba^  3)?abd)en  Slbfc^ieb  na'^m  (Sch.)-  3ene0  5Hab($en  \^^^,  ba^  ijertnekne, 
bie  bu  gema^It  ^ajl  (H.  and  D.,  IV.  210).  !I)u  geknebeiete  unter  ben  2BetBern(B.). 
<Sie  un(^Iu(flic^er»  (Sie  unglucflic^e,  you  unhappy  man,  woman.  The  adjective 
therefore  also  agrees  with  the  sex. 

i^raulein  and  the  diminutives  of  names  of  females  have  «bte"  sometimes 
in  colloquial  language  :  bie  ^rciulctn,  bie  ®op^te'd)en,  bie  3)ortd^en  (Dorothy). 
But  „3^re  ^5raulettt  3:od)ter"  is  quite  common  and  correct :  3^re  f^rciukin 
3;o^ter  .  .  .  ttjar  au^gelaffen  (unrestrained)  (G.). 

167.  Names  in  the  predicate,  not  capable  of  forming  a  feminine  from 
a  masculine,  like  ^el^rerin  <  ;2e^rer,  S5orfle^ertn  <  35orfle^er,  of  course  retain 
the  grammatical  gender,  no  matter  what  the  sex  of  the  subject :  ©ie 
warb  ♦  .  ♦  %\t\6)  nttt  Befonberer  3Id)tuncj  da  ©aft  Be^anbelt  (G.).  But  even  pre- 
dicate nouns  capable  of  forming  a  feminine  by  suffix  if  used  in  the  ab- 
stract sense,  and  not  the  personal,  form  an  exception,  e.  g.,  ^err,  ^ix^tx  fein 
or  merben,  "  to  be  or  become  master  of."  2)entt  ici^  Mtt  euer  ^onig  (Sch.). 
©ie  mar  ber  SJer'brec^er  (id.). 

168.  The  neuter  pronouns  (e^,  {ete^,  ba^,  aHeg,  etc.)  may  refer 
to  a  masc.  or  fem.  noun,  even  to  the  plural  and  to  a  masc.  and 


62  SYNTAX   OF   NUMBER.  [169- 

fern,  noun  together :  (Bie  fommen  ^eri^or  ein  S3eiB  ba,  ein  ^Wann 
.  ♦  ,  fa^  re:lt  nun,e^  mid  ftd)  erge^en  fogleic^,  t)te  ^noi^el  gur  3fluttt'e, 
=  they  stretch  their  bones  for  the  dance,  eager  to  enjoy  them- 
selves (in  Goethe's  „^otentana").  5llle^  rennet,  rettet,  pd)tet  (Sch.). 
X)a  ma^  t)enn  ©d^mer^  nnt  ®enn§,  ®e(tngen  nnt  Sertrng  mit  etnanter 
we(^feln  mie  e^  !ann  (F.  1756-8).  (Stillfcfctreigent)  Morten  fte  (three 
persons)  ju,  innem  jete^  in  ftc^  felbfl  ^uritdfe^^rte  (G.). 

169.  When  adjectives  are  used  substantively,  the  mascu- 
line and  feminine  denote  sex,  the  neuter  an  abstract  noun  or 
thing :  ^er  ®utt,  tie  (Bnk,  the  good  man,  woman;  ta^  ®uk,  the 
good  (abstract),  ^omm^  ^nab,  o  ^olbe  ®(^bne,  unb  'otxla^  bein 
ftolae^  ®^lo§  (Sch.).  5)u  ^a\t  iperrli(^e^  i^oUbrat^t  (id.).  X)ai3  Sofe, 
bag  i(^  nic|t  n?ill,  bag  t^ue  icfe  (B.). 


SYNTAX   OF   SINGULAR   AND   PLURAL. 

170.  Names  of  persons  and  materials  can  take  a  plural 
only  when  they  denote  several  persons,  species,  or  kinds,  viz., 
Die  §einricbe,  Ut  Sert^ag,  bie  Die  (the  various  kinds  of  oil),  bie 
©rafer,  Ht  %tttt,  bie  @alge» 

171.  Abstract  nouns  do  not  as  a  rule  admit  of  a  plural, 
but  as  in  English  the  plurals  of  such  nouns  were  once 
quite  common,  viz.,  ^Ulinne,  ®nat)e,  SSonne,  §ulb,  S^re*  Some 
of  these  plurals  are  left  in  certain  phrases:  in  S^ren,  ^u  (S^ren; 
i)on  (55otteg  (Snaben  ;  px  (Scbulben  lommen  (affen,  to  be  guilty  of; 
®it>.  (13naben  ;  bie  §errfcf)aften»  Compare  Eng.  thanks,  loves  (in 
Shakspere),  favors,  regards. 

172.  To  the  sg.  -mam  in  composition  corresponds  often  -leutc,  pi. 
only,  which,  in  sense  really  corresponds  to  9)Jenf(^,  5j)?enf(^en,  without  regard 
to  sex.  Examples :  (Sbelmann  —  ©beHeute,  gentry  ;  ^Ganbmann,  peasant,  — 
lOanbleute,  country  folk  :  (£^emann,  married  man,  —  (S^elcute,  married  people ; 
but  the  pi  (S^emcinner  means  "  married  men  "  ;  ^u^rmann  —  f^u^rleute,  driv- 
ers, carters  ;  ^aufmann  —  ^aufleute,  merchants,  etc.     But  23iebermann,  hon- 


177]  SYNTAX   OF   SINGULAR  AND   PLURAL.  63 

est  man  ;  (S^renmann,  man  of  honor ;  (Staat^mann,  and  a  lew  more,  form 
only  the  regular  plural  in  -er» 

173.     For  certain  nouns  which  form  no  plural,  plural  compounds  are 
used,  some  of  which  have  also  a  singular. — E.g. : 


\iCi^  %tVitx 

bie  i^euer^Briittflc 

ber  Slob 

bie  Slobeafdttc 

ber  mi 

bie  Olatfd^ldgc 

ber  Dan! 

bie  S)an!raptt9en 

174.  Nouns  only  used  in  the  plural  are  : 
a.  Diseases :  23lattertt;  SJ^aferit,  Oioteln* 

h.  Certain  dates :  Djlerm  ^Jftngjlenr  2Bei^na(^ten,  ^erien,  ^aften,  iit  2Bo(^ett 
=  in  childbed. 

c.  Names  of  relationship  :  ©Item;  ©e^ritber,  brothers, as  ©ebriiber  ©rimittf 
the  brothers  Grimm,  but  generally  only  in  the  names  of  firms ;  ®efd)tt)ifter, 
brothers  and  sisters,  rarely  in  the  sg.  —  brother  and  sister ;  other  nouns 
as  ©eftlbe,  Binfen,  a3rieff(^aften,  ©infitnfte,  etc. 

175.  Masc.  and  neuter  nouns  denoting  quantity,  weight, 
extent,  preceded  by  numerals,  stand  in  the  singular,  but  fern, 
nouns  (except  SKarf)  in  the  plural  as  in  Eng.,  e.g,,  6  ®la^  23ier, 
10  ga§  SCein;  „att  bie  treimal  ^untierttaufent)  ?iKann"  (Song  of  Prince 
Eugene),  5  gu§  tief,  3  ^ar!  70  5)fenntg(e),  70  x  7  =  ftebenaig 
md  fte^en  mal  (B.).  Feminines  :  3  5[ReiIen  breit,  10  §(af(^en  ^^xi^ 
mixi,  12  ©tutt^en^  The  coins,  ba^  3al)r,  ber  ^onat,  ©c^ritt  gener- 
ally stand  in  the  plural,  e,  g,,  50  5)fenntge  ma(^en  5  ®rof(^en, 
3  Dufatett,  20  @^rttte  lang;  yet  also  sing.,  „90  3a^r— geMdft  gum 
Sobe";  7  mmai{t)  alt;  but  gefen  mart 

176.  In  older  German  the  plural  was  used  in  all  genders  just  as  in 
Enor.  That  the  singular  was  ever  used  came  from  the  analogy  of  masc. 
nouns  and  "  diu  mare"  with  the  neuter  nouns,  in  all  of  which  sing,  and 
pi.  would  not  be  distinguished.  See  431,  2.  The  fem.  of  the  n-declen- 
sion  never  followed  this  analogy.  For  ^ann  see  59.  Compare  the  Eng. 
**  a  ten-year-old  boy,"  now  colloquial.  **  Year  "  is  an  old  plural  just  like 
3a^r.     In  the  D.  pi.  the  coins,  etc. ,  in  175  almost  always  have  en» 

177.  Notice  the  use  of  the  singular  in  German  for  English  plural  in 


64  SYNTAX   OF  THE   CASES.  [178- 

such  phrases  as :  unter  bem  ijterten  «nb  fitnften  ©rabe  norblic^er  33reite  (Hu.) ; 
ber  erfle  unb  ber  fiinfte  ^m  tvurbe(n)  gefungen;  ble  brei  (Sd)uler  miiffen  jur  ©trafe 
bte  ^anb  auf  ben  SfWunb  legcn;  'oitU  ^akn  ba^  ^^ekn  ijerloren,  many  lives  were 
lost  or  many  lost  their  lives. 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  CASES. 
Nominative. 

178.  The  nominative  is  the  case  of  the  subject  and  of 
direct  address:  9)letn  greunl),  tie  ^ntm  ter  SSerciangen^eit  ftnD  nn^ 
tin  Suc^  tttit  fteten  Siegeln  (F.  575-6).  ^it  cn&j,  $err  Doctor,  au 
[pa^tereit  ifl  e^^renijoll  unt)  ift  Oeioinn  (F.  941).     Absolute  N.  297. 

179.  Neuter  verbs  and  verbs  in  the  passive  voice  which 
govern  two  accusatives  in  the  active,  are  construed  with  a 
predicate  nominative.     See  270. 

Such  are :  1.  (Seitt,  ti?erben,  Heiben,  biinfen,  fd^etnen,  l^ei^en  (to  be  called), 
gelten,  n?a^fen,  jlerkn,  etc.:  T)t^  ^tmmel^  f^iigungen  ftnb  immer  bie  kjlen  (Le.). 
SlUer  ^ob  mxh  neue^  Seben  (He.),  ©r  mxb  ein  grofer  5^rinj  M^  an  fein  (Snbe 
fc^einen  (Sch.).  2)a^  atlein  mad)t  fc^on  ben  SSeifen,  ber  ftc^  jebcr  biinft  ju  fem(Le.). 
These  verbs  denote  a  state  or  transition.  Preceded  by  aU  the  construc- 
tion may  be  called  an  apposition  :  ^(tein  er  jlarb  al^  (£§ri)l  (F.  2953).  3^ 
fomme  aU  ©efanbter  be^  ©ertd^t^  (Sch.).  Sr  gilt  aU  ein  Teid)er  ?D^ann,  =  He 
passes  for  .  .  . 

2.  Verbs  of  calling,  thinking,  making,  choosing,  scolding,  viz., 
^enannt,  gebac^t,  angefe^en,  o^tma^t,  betrad^tet,  ^miit^lt,  9efcl)Dltcn  tverbcn,  and 
others:  SBil^elm  i)on  Dranien  tt>trb  ber  ©c^melger  genannt,  SStl^elm  ijon*bef 
^iJormanbie,  ber  (Sroberer.  ©r  tDarb  ein  !Dieb  gefi^olten,  aia  ein  3;augemd^t(3 
betra(|tet»    3(^  barf  mi^  nic^t  be^  &lMt^  ;2ieMin9  Welten  (Korner). 

Genitive. 

180.  The  genitive  is  used  chiefly  as  the  complement  of 
nouns  and  adjectives,  bat  also  of  the  verb  (object).  The  gen- 
itive with  nouns  expresses  the  most  varied  relations.  The 
principal  ones  are  briefly  given  and  illustrated  below.  Ger- 
man does  not  differ  from  other  languages. 


181]  SYNTAX   OF  THE   CASES — GENITIVE.  65 

1.  G.  of  origin,  cause,  autliorsliip,  relationsliip  :  ©a^  2Bunbcr  i]!  be^ 
©laubene  Uel))le^  ttnb  (F.  766).    ©oet^e^  %<x\x^.    2)ie  ^riid^te  be^  S3aume^* 

2.  Subjective  G.:  X)te  Stebc  ©otte^r  tt)el($e  p^cr  ifl  benn  aHe  S^ernunft  (B.). 
®er  ©efang  ber  ^ogeU    !l)a«  tjl  bcr  ^amjjf  ber  3?ferbe  itnb  gif(i)e  (Hu.). 

3.  Objective  G.:  I^er  ^Inblid  biefer  ®egenb  (Hu.).  !Dte  Srjtnbung  ber  S3u(^^ 
brucEerfunjl, 

The  personal  pronoun  is  rarely  found  in  this  construction.  Instead  of 
«bie  £tek  feiner"  stands  bie  £ie6e  ju  i^m,  gegen  i^n. 

4  Possessive  G  :  De^  f^atum^  unftc^tbare  ^anb  (Sch.).  Der  Garten  be^ 
tontg^.  "Dod^  beffer  ijl'^,  t^r  faUt  in  ©otteg  ^anb  alC  in  (bie)  ber  S^enfc^en  (Sch.). 
Sometimes  the  possessive  pronoun  is  put  after  the  G.  in  colloquial  lan^ 
guage.  Lessing  has  it  several  times :  !Da^  f(^ien  ber  alten  5lrti)lett  i^i 
®efd)ma(f  nid^t  ju  fetn  (Le.).    See  242,  2. 

5.  G.  of  quality  oT  characteristic:  !Der  SimgHng  eblen  ®efu|Ie^  (H.  and 
D.,  IV.  66). 

This  G.  and  the  preceding  stand  also  in  the  predicate  after  neuter 
verbs  :  8eltg  jtnb,  bie  reined  ^erjen^  ftnb  (B.).  ©tner  SO'Jeinung  fetn;  be^  Slobe^ 
fetn.  Sin  folc^er  Safferjlanb  war  alfo  e  i  n  e  ^  5llterC  mtt  ben  ro^en  2)en!malern 
ntenfc^Iic^en  5t'unftflei§e^  (Hu.). 

6.  Appositive  or  specifying  G.:  Der  i^e^ler  be«3  ^Irgnjo^n^;  ba^  iGajler  ber 
2;runffu(^t;  bie  (Bimbe  ber  Unban!6arfett*     ^ax\  er|ieU  ben  SSeinamen  be^  ®ro§en. 

This  G.  and  that  of  characteristic  are  frequently  supplanted  by  ijon  + 
Dative  :  Sine  (£td)e  ijon  ^o^em  Sllter  »)urbe  »om  S5U|e  getroffen*  ^kh  ijon  (einem) 
SSebienten;  3:eufel  »on  SBeibe  (Le.).    See  Prepositions,  303,  15. 

7.  Partitive  G.,  dependent  upon  nouns  of  quantity,  weight,  measure; 
with  numerals,  various  pronouns ;  comparative  and  superlative.     Ex.  : 

St^ut  nii^to  (=  no  matter).  Sr  (ber  5)?antel)  t)at  ber  Slropfen  nte^r  (Le.).  9?unt)er 
Sefd^etben^eit  genug  (id.).  !Dem  reid^te  fte  ber  ®aben  kfie,  ber  S3tumen  aHerfd^onfle 
bar  (Sch.).  ^itnf  nnfer^  Drben^  njaren  fc^on  .  ♦  ♦  be^  fii^nen  5Wute^  Dpfer 
njorben  (id.).  Safjl  ntir  ben  ^e|!en  SBed^er  3Bein6  in  ))urem  ®olbe  retc^en  (G.).  2)u 
fd^Iugft  bt(^  bur^  mtt  ^unbert  ac^tjtg  Mam  hux^  i^^rer  Slaufenb  (Sch.).  Unfer  etner 
fann  ft(^  ba^  ni^t  teiften,  =  **  One  like  (of)  us  cannot  afford  that." 

181.  In  the  spoken  language  and  also  in  the  classics  (excepting 
poetry)  this  partitive  G.  has  passed  into  mere  apposition  ;  especially 
after  nouns  of  weight,  measure ;  after  numerals  ;  after  nt^t^,  nt^t,  and 
the  indefinite  pronouns.  Ex. :  Sin  9Jfunb  %i)tt ;  brei  (Sc^effel  ^orn»  Stma^ 
<Sd)one^,  ntd)t^  S3ofe^,  'old  ®ute^  are  no  longer  felt  as  genitives.     The  adjec- 


66  SYNTAX   OF   THE   CASES— GENITIVE.  [182- 

tive  used  as  noun  is  governed  independently  of  the  pronoun  or  numeral. 

Ex. :  Beigt  ha^  ijerfdlfd^te  fdiatt  mijt,  man  tuoEe  ju  nid)t$  ®utem  un^  ijer^inben  ? 
(Sch.).  !Daa  fonnte  ju  etwa^  ©d)re(flid^em  fit^ren  (id.).  From  Luther  to  Lessing 
this  G.  is  still  quite  frequent,  and  it  still  remains  in  certain  phrases,  e.  g., 
^ier  ijl  meine^  SSleiOen^  nic^t,  "  I  cannot  stay  here."  fSid  ^uf|et)en^  mad)en, 
"to  make  much  ado."  SBenn  t^  nttt  S^Jenfc^en^  unb  mit  SttgeljuttQcn  rebete  unb 
pttc  ber  2ie6e  ntc^t  *  ♦  ♦  (B.), literally  "and  had  nought  of  charity."  It  is 
supplanted  by  ijott/  (lU^,  itnter  +  D.  See  Prepositions,  303.  SSer  »on  m^, 
unter  un^  ? 

Genitive  Dependent  upon  Adjectives. 

182.  It  stands  after  adjectives  denoting  possession  and 
interest  or  lack  and  want;  fulness  or  emptiness;  knowledge  or 
ignorance;  desire  or  disgust;  guilt  or  innocence;  e.  g.,  fa^tg, 
^a^a}t,  ftc^er,  teil^afttg,  unfa^tg ;  kr,  *Iog ;  *»on,  *fatt,  leer,  quitt, 
^erluftig;  fun^ig,  *getDa^r,  utt!unt)ig;  *mute,  Begterig;  fc^ultig,  Iet)tg, 
etc.  Ex.:  T)e0  (angen  S)alM  mfee  (Bii.).  "De^  SeiBeg  Mft  tu  ler^tg 
(id.).  X!e^  ®ertd)t^  fd^ulttg  (B.).  (^;engfte)  Begterig  be^  ®tallei3  (H. 
and  D.,  VI.  313).  (Bit  fmt)  'ooU  fiigen  5Cein^  (B.).  Du  Bift  e5  t)0(^ 
gufrieten,  diitkx  ?  (Le.). 

183.  The  adjectives  marked  *  and  others  not  given  admit  also  of 
the  accusative.  In  the  last  illustration  „e^"  was  felt  as  A.,  and  therefore 
wba^"  is  much  more  common.  See  Pronouns,  199, 2.  E.  g.,  3d)  Mn  ba^ 
fatt,  miibe,  "I  have  enough  of  it,"  "  am  tired  of  it." 

The  prepositions  ttad^,  ijOH;  etc.,  +  D.  frequently  supplant  the  geni- 
tive, e.g.,  wkgierig  m^  bcm  <StaEe"  would  be  commoner;  »ott,  rein  fein  »on 
ettt)a^. 

Genitive  after  Verbs. 

184.  It  may  stand  as  nearer  object,  as  remoter  object,  and 
adverbially. 

As  direct  object  after  verbs  with  meanings  similar  to  the 
adjectives  in  182;  also  ac^ten,  marten,  barren,  fpotten,  Iad)en,  f(^onen 
gentef  en,  fterBen,  }jflegen,  tenfen,  ijergeffen,  lo^nen,  i?erfe^ten,  Braud^en, 
and  others. 


187]  SYNTAX   OF  THE   CASES — GENITIVE.  67 

Ex.  :  1>ai  IBergtf memtti(^t»  3d)  benfe  betn  (G-.).  iJunger^  jlerBen.  2)a^  lol^nt 
ftd^  ber  Mxi^t  md)t,  =  It  is  not  worth  the  trouble.  S^  ftnb  nii^t  allc  fret  bie 
i^rer  tetten  fpotten  (Le.).   ©ekauc^t  ber  Beit,  [te  ge^t  fo  f(|nett  ijon  ^innen  (F.  1908). 

185.  After  verbs  governing  an  A.  of  the  person  the  G.  of 
the  thing  stands  as  remoter  object,  such  as  judicial  verbs,  those 
with  privative  meaning,  verbs  of  emotion ;  after  many  reflexive 
verbs  with  meanings  similar  to  the  adjectives  in  182,  e,g.,  gei^en, 
ijerllagenj'rcifpre^en,  bef(^u(r?tgen,  berauben,  entlaben,  entlaffen,  entbinten, 
iiber^eben;  i^erfic^ern,  be(el)ren,  ma^nen,  and  others  ;  fid)  freuen,  h^k^ 
nm,  erinnern,  fc^amen,  beflci^en,  erfrec^en,  ft(^  tne^ren* 

Ex. ;  ©ntlafft  tttid^  meiner  Sl^nen^jrobe,  i(^  iriU  eud^  eurer  tt)teberum  entlaffen 
(Le.).  2Ber  fann  mi^  einer  ©iinbe  jeil^en  ?  (B.).  Semanb  be^  Sanbes^  ijermeifen  ; 
eine^  ^txhn^^tn^  anflagen,  iiberful^ren,  etc.  (Sntfc^Iage  bi^  aller  f(^n)arjen  ®ebanfen 
(Le.).  X)u  barfjl  bic^  beiner  SSa^l  ni($t  fd^amen  (Sch.).  But  many  of  these  gen- 
itives are  supplanted  by  anff  iiber  +  A.,  and  by  A.  alone. 

186.  Certain  impersonal  verbs  expressing  feelings,  which 
are  construed  with  the  A.  of  the  person  feeling  and  with  the 
G.  of  the  cause  and  object  of  the  feehng. 

Ex.  :  (£a  e!elt  mt(|,  t^  rent,  erbarmt,  jammert,  ijerbriegt  mt(^  ;  e(3  lo^nt  jt(|* 
^arob  erbarmt  ben  |)trten  be^  alten  ^o^en  ^mn  (Uh.).  Unb  ba  er  ba^  35ol!  fal^e, 
{amnterte  t^n  beffelMgen  (B.).  But  the  nominative  supplants  here  the  A.  of 
the  person,  and  the  A.  the  G.  in  the  spoken  language  as  a  rule;  „e^"  was 
again  felt  as  A.  See  183.  Ex.:  2)a^  ^ereut  mi($,  bauert  mi(§»  2)er  ©erec^te 
erbarmt  ftd^  feinee  SSteJe^  (B.). 

Adverbial  Genitive. 

187.  It  expresses  place,  time,  manner,  and  other  adverbial 
relations. 

Ex.:  Place:  linfer  ^anb,  red^ter  f)anb,  aller  Drten,  "everywhere."     3^ 
moc^te  (it  is  not  likely  that  .  .  .)  biefe^  SBege^  fobalb  ntc^t  n?ieber  fommen  (Le.). 
Time  :  biefer  Za^t,  be^  5lbenbi3,  M^  Wtoxg,tn^  in  ber  ^^rit^e." 
Manner:   trocfnen  i^u^e^,  dry-shod;   |le()enben  ^u§e^r  immediately;  ijer^ 
niinfttger  2Beife,  reasonably.    (Bie  famen  un^errid^teter  <Ba<i)t  lUxM,  they  re- 
turned without  having  accomplished  their  object. 


68  SYNTAX   OF   THE   CASES— DATIVE.  [188- 

A  large  number  of  these  genitives  have  passed  into  adverbs,  e.  g.,  flug^; 
For  genitive  after  Prepositions,  see  302. 

Genitive  in  Exclamations. 

188.  Interjections  are  followed  by  a  genitive  only  when  it 
denotes  the  cause  or  occasion  of  the  exclamation.  5Bol)l  and 
tre^(e)  have  often  a  dative  of  the  person  and  a  genitive  of  cause 
or  origin:  D  t^e^  gran^ofcn,  ter  feinen  Scrftan^,  btefe^  ju  iikrlegen, 
!etn  iperj  tiefe^  ju  fii^Ien  ge^abt  \)OiX  (Le.).  D  t)e^  @lu(llid)en,  t)em  e^ 
ijergonitt  ift,  ei n e  2uft  mit  eucb  3U  atmen  (Sch.). 

Dative. 

189.  It  is  the  case  of  the  indirect  object,  less  remote  than 
the  genitive.  The  nearer  object  can  also  stand  in  the  dative, 
but  is  more  remote  than  the  nearer  object  (the  direct  one)  in 
the  accusative. 

190.  The  dative  stands  as  nearer  object  after  intransitive 
verbs  denoting:  1,  approach  and  removal,  similarity  and  dis- 
similarity; 2,  pleasure  and  displeasure;  3,  advantage  and  dis- 
advantage; 4,  command  and  obedience;  5,  yielding  and  re- 
sistance ;  Q,  belonging  to,  agreement,  trust,  etc.  A  large 
number  of  these  verbs  are  compounds,  viz. ,  those  with  ent-, 
^er-,  oA-,  an-,  auf-,  Bet-,  tin-,  mx^-,  nad^-,  ^or-,  i?oran-,  it>i^er- 
JU-,  and  those  with  noun,  adjective,  or  adverb:  leiD  t^un,  nJO^l^ 
mollen,  fauer  n^ert^cn,  guftatten  !ommen,  mx^  madden,  gu  tetl  n?ert)en,  ba^ 
^^ort  terpen,  "to  defend,'"  etc.  1,  na^en,  nad^ge^^en,  begegnen, 
gleid)ett,  d^neln,  pfel)en,  entfprccfcon,  feWen,  entgekn,  naifte^en;  2, 
gefat(en,tan!en,  geniigen,  Bel)ac|en,  l)uli:igen,  tnigfallen,  fc^metdjeln,  laffen 
(to  look),  i^ro^en,  grollen,  fludjen;  3,  ^elfen,  nii^en,  ^ienen,  betfte^en, 
frommen,  m^jxtn,  fc^aten;  4,  gebieten,  Befe^k«/P^^«/9^^^^^^J^/f'^^3^^; 
5,  treid)en,  triUfa^ren,  miterfte^en,  ttJtterftreBen,  tro^en ;  6,  antmorten, 
ernjiet)em,  gefebren,  etgnen,  kiftimmen,  auret)en,  trauen,  glauben,  ux<^ 
trauen* 


194]  SYNTAX   OF  THE   CASES — -DATIYE.  69 

Ex.  :  ^e^  ;0e6en«  ungemifc^te  greube  waxh  feinem  ©terblic^ett  ju  teil  (Sch.). 
©traflofe  ^rei^eit  fpric^t  ben  ©Uten  ^o^n  (id.).  X)u  rebefl  i^m  ba^  2Bort,  anftatt 
il)n  anjuflagen  (id.).  !Dae  @te|en  n)trb  it^m  \antx,  It  is  hard  work  for  him  to 
stand.  1.  2)u  glet(^|l  bem  ®et|l,  ben  bu  kgretf|l;  ni(^t  mir  (F.  512).  Da^  jn)ing|l 
bu  t^r  (ber  ^ainx)  nic^t  a5  mit  |)ebeln  unb  mit  <S(^rauBen  (F.  675).  2.  (Sinem 
SBirte  ld§t  nid)t^  itbler  aU  9^eugterbe  (Le.),  Nothing  looks  worse  in  a  host  than 
curiosity.  <Bo  flu(^^  id)  aUnn,  toa^  bie  ©eele  mit  ^od^  unb  ©aufeln^cr!  umfpannt 
(F.  1587).  2)er  Sanbijogt  QvoUte  bem  3:eII.  3.  (Sie)  ti)e|ret  ben  ^naben,  she 
restrains  the  boys  (Sch.).  2)er  ^nappe  folgt  bem  9fiitter.  ®ott  ^ilft  benen,  bie 
ft(^  felkr  ^elfen*  4.  (SoE  i(^  ge^ori^en  jenem  2)ran9  ?  (F.  631).  2)u  folgj!  mir 
boc^  Mb  na^  (Sch.).  ©e^orfl  bu  bir  ?  (id.).  5.  Unb  bie  ©ebilbe  ber  5?ad)t  \Dei($en 
bem  tagenben  2xd)t  (id.).  2Bo:^l  mi^i  bu,  ba§  id^  beinem  Born  ntd)t  tro^e  (id.).  6. 
Slraue,  fc^aue  t»em.  S[Bem  eipet  ®ott  (Le.),  To  whom  does  God  belong,  = 
Who  possesses  him  exclusively  ?  Compound  verbs :  3^  |abe  bir  ni(^t 
nac^gejleUt  (F.  1426).  ©e^r  gem  fte^t  ^axh^  bem  gJiini'fter  nac^  (Sch.).  !£)ie 
^onigin  fa^  bem  ^ampfe  ju  (id.). 

191.  After  transitive  verbs  the  indirect  object  stands  in 
the  dative  and  the  direct  in  the  accusative  (see  198):  5)eri)utle 
mir  ta^  iroi]enDe  ©eDraugc  (F.  61).  Da^  9Kenf(^enre(^t,  t)a^  tl}m 
5^atur  ^ergonnt  (F.  136). 

192.  A  dative  still  farther  removed  from  the  verb  is  the 
ethical  dative,  or  dative  of  interest  (on  the  part  of  the  speaker 
or  hearer).     It  is  generally  a  personal  pronoun. 

Ex.:  ®e^t  mir,  ni^t^  tueiter  baijon  (Sch.),  "Go,  I  tell  you,  no  more  of 
that."  Wix  m  ^te6e,  for  love  of  me.  3|m  ju  (S^ren.  (8ie)  jinb  bir  gar 
Icrfere,  leic^te  ©efeKen  (Sch.).    T>k  U^x  fc^lcigt  feinem  ®lucfltd)en  (id.). 

193.  After  impersonal  verbs:  e5  al)nt,  MkU,  ddt,  ^tl)t,  fcMt, 
(;ekid)t,  e^  graut,  graufet,  gelingt,  Itegt  (mir)  an  dwa^,  fommt  (mir  auf 
ttwa^)  an,  fd^au^ert,  f^trin^dt,  traitmt,  ^kmt,  and  many  verbs  in 
190  can  be  counted  here  :  T)em  35ater  ^raufet^^  (G.).  S^  Itegt 
mir  i^iet  taran,  I  care  much  for  it.  X)em  ^aifer  tvarb'^^  fauer  bei 
W  wttb  6ei  ^alte  (Bu.). 

Dative  after  Adjectives. 

194.  These  have  meanings  similar  to  the  verbs  in  190, 

e,  g.,  angencto,  al)nlid),  eigcn,  fcinb,  folgfam,  Henftkr,  gnatig,  t)oIi^, 


70  SYNTAX   OF  THE   CASES — DATIVE.  [195- 

ttad)teilig,  i^erfcun^en,  autra^li^*  Ex.:  I^asJ  f!e|t  i^m  al)nlid^  = 
that's  like  him.  3(u(^  mar  ^er  ^Infang  tl)ren  Siinf^en  l)olD  (Sch.). 
"Lk  meiften  fint)  mix  jugetfcan  (id.),  "devoted." 

195.  Substitution  of  preposition  +  case,  both  after  verbs 
and  adjectives. 

%m,  auff  an,  gegen,  iikr  +  accusative,  ntit  and  ijon  +  dative  may  replace 
the  dative  :  3^  jiirtte  auf  btc^,  i(^  glauOe  an  hi6^,  ijertraue  auf  i^n;  ^in  freunbll(5& 
gegen  bic  Strmen.    2)er  Qlnjug  (suit)  ift  fe^r  palTenb  fiir  bid),  etc. 

196.  Verbs  with  unsettled  constructions. 

With  a  number  of  verbs  usage  is  either  unsettled  or  the  classics  still 
show  two  cases,  while  the  spoken  language  has  settled  upon  one,  e.  g., 
now  only  e^  baud)t  mix,  but  e^  biinft  mic^,  classics  have  D.  or  A.  after  either, 
©laukn  with  D.  only,  or  an  +  A.;  but  F.  3438:  3d)  glaub'  i§n  (®ott)  md)t, 
S^  efelt  mir  and  mi(^.  3)lan  beja'^lt  ben  ^ned)t  (person),  ba^  33rot  (thing),  bem 
SScider  ba^  S3rot.    3(^  rufe  bir,  I  call  out  to  you  ;  ic^  rufe  bid^,  I  call  you,  etc. 

197.  The  few  reflexive  verbs  after  which  the  reflexive  pro- 
noun stands  in  the  dative  are  really  transitive  verbs,  and  the 
pronoun  is  the  indirect  object:  Sr  biltet  fic^  etma^  ein,  "  he  imag- 
ines sometiiing,"  "is  conceited."  3d?  ^^^H  niir  fc^meid)eltt  (Le.); 
but  see  190,  sub  2:  3^^  ^^n!e  mir  bie  ©ac^e  fo. 

ACCUSATDTE. 

198.  The  accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object  after 
transitive  verbs,  including  many  inseparable  compounds  of 
intransitive  verbs  with  6e-,  ent-,  tx-,  ^tx-,  itx-,  Duri^-,  l)inter-; 
liber-,  wnter-  urn-  ijott-  tiJte^er-;  such  as  Befa^ren,  Befol^en,  Be;? 
feu(^ten,  cntfraften,  entfd^ettien,  erfa^ren,  erftnben,  ijerfac^en,  ^ertreiben, 
jerftreuen,  rur(^fe'geln,  Mnterge'^en,  iikrfe'^en,  umge'ben,  ^ollki'ngen, 
mieber^o'Ien. 

Ex.:  %x  fe^t  etnen  ^JJ^ann  n?te  anbere  me^r  (F.  1874).  S^crad^te  mtr  SJernitnft 
unb  3[Bif7enfd)aft  (F.  1851).  t)k  OJitkn  l)af*en  mx^  vertriekn  (Folk-song).  (Soof 
^at  bte  5Belt  umfcgelt.     S3.  Sta^Ior  ^at  ben  f^aitf!  iiBerfe^t. 

199.  Two  accusatives  may  stand,  one  of  the  person  and 
one  of  the  thing,  after  verbs  meaning  to  ask  for,  to  inquire, 


201]  SYl^TAX   OF  THE  CASES— ACCUSATIVE.  71 

teach,  to  cause  to  do  a  thing  or  have  a  thing  done,  and  simi- 
lar ones,  e.g.,  fragen,  le^^ren,  {affen,  Htten*  Ex.:  28er  le^rte  M(^ 
tiefe  gemaltlgen  2Corte  ?  (Le.)  Se:^re  mid)  t^un  na(ft  tieinem  5Bo^(^ 
cjefallen  (B.)  (t^un  =  second  ace).  SSoHen  ®ie  ben  Slrjt  nid)t 
fommen  lajfen  ? 

1.  After  fragen,  Mtten,  uberreben,  kreben,  the  two  accusatives  stand,  as  a 
rule,  only  when  the  accusative  of  the  thing  is  a  neuter  pronoun,  e.  g.,  x^ 
Vim,  frage  bic^  etma^,  xd^X^,  ijieL  If  the  pronoun  is  lacking,  then  fragen 
m^  +  D.,  bitten  urn  +  A.,  itberrcben  ijon  or  ju  +  D.  or  the  G.  without  prep- 
osition is  the  prevailing  construction  :  ^afl  bu  m6)  i|m  gefragt  ?  3c^  ^abe  i^tt 
barum  gebeten» 

Siigen  ftrafen,  SBunber  ne^men  govern  an  A.  of  the  person  :  ^a^  nimmt 
mi(^  SBunber,  "  I  wonder  at  that." 

2.  But  these  pronouns,  baS,  nic^tS,  wiel,  stand  for  old  genitives  which  were  felt  as 
accusatives.  The  construction  was  :  2Bunt>er  nimmt  mic^  be§  or  beffen,  wonder  seizes 
me  on  that  account.  (See  186.)  Sftgen  is  probably  a  G.  of  cause  :  ^emanb  tregen  ber 
Sugen  fti-aten.    Sernen  for  Ier)ven,  though  found  in  Goethe,  is  wrong. 

200.  Notice  a  choice  of  construction  in  certain  cases,  when 
the  personal  object  is  further  defined  by  another  case  or  prep- 
osition and  case.  The  verbs  that  concern  us  here  are  such  as 
fdjlagen,  treffen,  treten,  ftec^en,  and  similar  ones. 

1.  Dative  of  the  person  and  accusative  of  the  affected  part: 
3c^  ii^af^e  mir  tie  S^^imlt  or  meine  ^anbe* 

2.  Dative  of  the  person  and  preposition  +  A. :  3(^  h'ete  t^m 
auf  ben  gu^,  fc^Iagc  i^m  in'g  %t\x6^i. 

3.  Accusative  of  the  person  and  preposition  +  A. :  SSir  fdjlagert 
i^en  geint  auf'^  §au|jt.  SCnr  treten  bie  ©djlange  anf  ben  ^opf.  The 
choice  is  between  2  and  3.  But  2  is  preferable  after  intran- 
sitive verbs;  3  after  transitives. 

201.  These  accusatives  are  both  object-accusatives,  but 
after  verbs  meaning  to  name,  scold,  regarding,  and  others  of 
similar  meaning,  the  second  accusative  is  a  predicate  or  facti- 
tive accusative,  while  the  first  is  direct  object,  e,  g.,  after  nennen, 
fd^elten,  f^lmpfen,  glauben,  taufen,  ^cigen  (trans.). 


72  SYKTAX  OF  THE   CASES — ACCUSATIVE.  [202- 

Ex. :  3n  tiefiler  <Btdt  fc^merjt  m\^  ber  (Spott  ber  ^remblinge,  bie  un^  ben 
Sauernabel  fc^elten,  "  who  call  us  by  the  nickname  of  '  peasant  nobility '  " 
(Sch.).  Die  Zxtm  .  .  ,  i\t  icbcm  SDienfc^en  mt  ber  mdjftt  SBlut^freunb,  al^  U)ren 
9fiac^er  fii^lt  er  fic^  geboren  (id.),  ^o^  fuf)k  ic$  mi(^  benfelben/  ber  i^  toax  (id.). 
3d&  ad^te  i^n  al(^  einen  S^renmann. 

202.  1.  After  laffert  +  fein  and  werben  a  predicate  A.  by  attraction  is 
found  instead  of  the  predicate  nominative,  but  the  latter  is  the  prefera- 
ble construction,  e,  g.,  Sag  ba^  33uc^lein  beinen  i^reunb  feui  (Gr.).  Sa§  biefe  ^atte 
felbft  hiXi  ©c^aupta^  werben  (Sch.). 

2.  For  the  passive  construction,  see  179,  2.  The  verbs  in  199,  1, 
may  retain  the  accusative  (pronoun),  also  le^ren.  This  would  also  admit 
an  accusative  predicate  noun  in  the  passive :  DasJ  (Bc^limmjle,  tt)a$  un^ 
i\)iberfa§rt,  ba^  iverbcit  tDtr  ^om  Slag  (^ele^rt  (Gr.).  3<^  ti^erbe  ben  J^anj  gele|rt. 
But  it  is  best  to  avoid  all  these  predicate  accusatives.  They  sound 
pedantic.  Better  say  :  3i^  l)a6e  2;attjumerrid)t,  S^an^ftunbc.  3ic^  tx)erbe  immer 
tvicbcr  barna(^  Q^fragt,  barum  gektem 

203.  The  inner  or  nearer  object  stands  in  the  accusative 
called  the  "cognate."  The  noun  has  the  same  meaning  as 
the  verb.  Its  idea  is  generally  included  in  the  verb  :  Stnen 
guten  ^ampf  ^abe  x6ii  gefampft  (B.).  (Sine  @d)la(^t  jWagen,  feeige 
2:l)ranen  weinen,  etc. ;  Garten  fptelen,  @c^Itttf(^ul)  laufen*  ®ar  fc^one 
(Sptele  fpieP  id)  mtt  rir  (G.). 

204.  Notice  that  the  noun  is  sometimes  replaced  by  an  indefinite 
pronoun,  wa^,  e^,  ettivv  etc.  Compare  Eng.  "  to  lord  it,"  the  unclassical 
"to  come  it  over  somebody."  ^Ibcr  bie  Siferfu^t  iiber  Spanien  gewann  e^ 
bie^mal  itber  blefc  politifi^e  ©\)mpatT)ie  (5?ch.).  1)ie  hotter  fatten  e^  niit  ben  2;apfer*= 
jlen  (id.) ;  |i<^  wa^  red)te6  (yirec^te)  laufen,  fprtngen,  \axi\zxi,  '*  to  run,  etc.,  a  great 
deal.'*  Siigen  (Ste  ntir  etned  auf  eigene  ^tec^nung  Por  (Le.).  Sd)  fc^ma^e  ein^  mit 
(Le.).     See  also  F.  3416. 

205.  After  many  impersonal  verbs  and  some  other  verbs 
the  logical  subject  stands  in  the  accusative  (see  186).  The 
verbs  denote  states  of  the  body  and  mind  :  e^  tiirftet,  l}ungert, 
f^ldfevt,  wuntert,  !rdn!t,  tieitriegt  mi6^. 

Here  belong  also  e^  gibt,  e^  |at,  e^  fe^t,  e^  gilt :  !DergIetc^ett  (Btimmen  gtbt^^ 
(Sch  ),  "  There  are  such  voices."    ©^  ^at  ®efa^r,tt)enn  n?ir  nid^t  ge^en,  '*  There 


2081  SYNTAX  OF  THE   CASES — ACCUSATIYE.  73 

is  danger  .  .  .  ".   (£s3  fe^t  §tekf  ^dnhd,  Sc^lage,  There  is  a  fight,  a  quarrel 
going  on,  somebody  is  being  whipped.    Comp.  French  U  y  a.  See  236,4. 

206.  After  reflexive  verbs  the  pronoun  generally  stands  in 
the  accusative :  gntf^liege  ^id),  Sefinne  ^id)  n?o  lu  bift  (Sch.). 
But  see  185  and  197. 

Adverbial  Accusative. 

207.  It  denotes  measure  (amount),  time,  and  place. 

1,  It  denotes  measure  after  verbs  like  miegcn,  foften,  gelten; 
after  adjectives  like  lang,  Breit,  l)od),  a(t,  mert,  etc. 

Ex.:  Die  S^u^e  beine^  ^reunbe^  gilt  e^,  "  is  at  stake  "  (Sch.).  !Die  ti|!e 
tDtegt  brei  ^ilogramm,  im\  Bentner,  fitnf  S^tii,  etc.  Die  S3rii(fe  ift  me^rere  2;aufettb 
gu§  lang,  ^unbert  fec^jtg  ^od^  unb  ad^tjig  gug  breit  Da^  Dorf  liegt  eine  ©tunbe  (an 
hour's  walk)  ijott  ber  (Stabt*     ^riebri(^  ip  einett  '^al^en  topf  Qroper  al^  Dietric^. 

The  usage  as  to  the  case  of  the  person  with  „fDflen"  is  unsettled  :  Der 
<S(^erj  foflet  m^  or  mir  m\  ®elb.     Grimm's  Dictionary  favors  the  A. 

2.  It  stands  with  verbs  of  motion  to  express  the  distance 
and  the  way,  the  noun  being  often  followed  by  an  adverb. 

Ex. :  3Bei(^e  feinen  ©d^ritt  prucf-  3wei  SBanberer  fte'^t  er  bie  ©trage  jie|n 
(Sch.).  (£^  jte^t  ein  ^aufe  ba^  ob're  Sl^al  |erab  (Uh.).  Der  ^el^  roEte  ben  S3erg 
^inab.    ?0t;t  leifen  (S^ritten  fc^U(^  er  feinen  bofen  S©eg  (Sch.). 

The  A.  of  measure  and  distance  supplanted  the  G.  of  an  older  period  ; 
that  denoting  the  way  is  old.     The  G.  still  occurs  frequently.     See  181. 

208.  The  accusative  of  time  denotes  the  duration  and  the 
moment  of  an  action.  The  former  is  often  followed  by  an 
adverb,  (ang,  turd),  liber*  Ex. :  ^er  93ote  fann  ten  ^lu^enHicf  ^ier 
fein  (Sch,).  (£r  fc^lift  ten  ganjen  ^Korgett*  2)u  l^afl  eg  3<i^i^^  Icmg 
betai^t* 

1.  Compare  the  G.  of  time  (see  187),  which  denotes  a  repetition  of  the 
action  or  a  custom.  The  A.  denotes  a  definite  point  of  time  or  fixed 
period:  (!£)er)(ie§  S3etftunb^  ^alten  be^  2}lorgen<3  9leid)(Sch.).  Sonnaknbi3  S'^ac^^ 
mittag^  ^aben  t»ir  feine  ©d^ule  (=  custom).  S^Jci^fien  5DZittn)0(|  ^aben  it)ir  feine 
^^vXt.  S^loc^  biefe  5^ac&t  mu§  er  flJlabrib  i)erIa|Ten  (Sch.).  The  G.  denoting 
duration  of  time  is  rarer  now  :  ©in  ®ift  bag  neun  ganjer  3a^re  baucrt  (Le.). 
This  may  be  partitive  G. 


74  SY1S"TAX   OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [209- 

Absolnte  Accusative. 

209.  This  is  generally  accompanied  by  an  adverbial  phrase, 
and  denotes  that  with  which  the  subject  is  provided.  Ex. :  Qn 
I^ion^^,  tern  X^rannen,  fAlicb  Wovo^,  ten  Dolc^  tm  ©emante  (Sch.). 
<Sd^on  ben  ^aU  mthib^t,  tnkV  x6^  auf  meinem  ^Wantel  (Le.). 

SYNTAX   OF   THE   ADJECTIVE. 

210.  The  adjective  may  be  used  attributively,  predica- 
tively,  and  substantively:  ber  reic^e  5^a(^bar;  ter  5^ad}bar  ift  reic^; 
ber  3fteid)e* 

Attributive  Use  of  the  Adjective. 

211.  Some  adjectives  are  only  or  mostly  used  attributively, 
as  :  1,  the  superlatives  and  ordinals;  2,  certain  adjectives  de- 
rived from  adverbs:  ^teft^,  ^ortig,  feitbevig,  In^S^crig,  e,g,,  bie  ^iefige 
3citun9,  but  not  tie  B^-'i^^^^^l  ^f^  WH I  ^j  many  adjectives  in  -tf4, 
-lid)  -en :  norttfcb,  irtifd),  ta^l\6>,  anfangli(^,  enrltd^,  (joffen,  fetben, 
ftlbern,  glcifern;  4,  the  comparatives  and  superlatives  in  76,  2. 

1.  If  they  do  stand  in  the  predicate,  they  must  be  inflected,  and  the 
noun  may  be  understood,  e>  g.,  bie  ;Sicfcrung  ill  eine  fiunbli(^e,  not  ftiinbli(^» 

For  the  adjectives  in  -en  and  -em,  ^on  4-  noun  is  substituted,  e.g.,  etn 
S3e^er  ijon  purem  ®olbc.  But  in  poetry  the  adjective  is  found:  2)er  @tul;l 
i|l  elfenbeinern  (R.). 

212.  The  attributive  adjective  is  inflected  and  agrees  with 
its  noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case  :  W.\i  filler  ^oft  m\^ 
frifdem  (Sd)aum  ^at  er  mid  inol)!  gena^;ret  (XJh.).  It  may  stand 
uninflected,  however:  1.  Before  a  neuter  noun  in  N.  (and  A.) 
(very  rarely  before  a  masc.  or  fem.)  :  '^}unne  ?QZutter  ^ai  mand 
giiltm  (S)emant)  (G.).  S^  ift  eln  putelnarrif(^  3:ier  (F.  1167).  Fre- 
quently in  certain  phrases  like  „bar  ®elt)",  *'  cash "  ;  „anf  gut 
%\M\  Bare  :  (l)ro§  m^i^i  m\^  ml  Sift  (Lu.).  Xa^  2llter  \^  ein 
^ofli(^  ?0^ann  (G.);  ,,freml  nnt  fremter  @toff''  (F.  635.).  2.  When 
it  stands  after  the  noun,  mainly  in  poetry;  commonly  after 
coins,  weights,  and  measures:  Xer  §auptmann  fii^rtim  ©d)ilt)  tin 


214]  SYNTAX   OF  THE   ADJECTIVE.  75 

3fto0lein  rot  ^on  ®oIte  nn)^  einen  Sber  mil^  (TJh.).  Sin  @(^n?arm  ^m 
®a\kn  gro^  um  Mn  (Bii.).  S^t^n  gu^  rbeinifd^,  fiinf  ?>fun^  pmifd)* 
In  prose  also,  when  the  adjective  or  participle  has  adjuncts: 
"tovt  dn  gutarttge^,  gertttete^  §antel^i)ol!,  fd^ii^elgent)  »ott  Un  iippigen 
grud)ten  tint^  gefegneten  gletpe^,  trac^fam  auf  ®efe^e,  tie  feine  3Bot)l::^ 
t^ater  it^aren  (Sch.).  3.  Of  two  adjectives  the  first  stands  unin- 
flected  in  certain  set  phrases;  when  the  two  express  one  idea; 
in  poetry,  very  frequently  in  Schiller  :  "Lit  grop^erjoglidj  kt)ifcbe 
3flegierung;  t)a5  foniglid)  ^reupifd^e  B^^^^^"^^*  SBel?  tern,  t)er  an  ten 
n?toig  alten  §au^rat  i^m  rii^rt  (Sch.).  £:en  falfd)  ^errdterifc^en  '^at 
(id.).  „3tt  He  meit  unt»  Breite  2Belt"  (G.).  Schiller  has  ^tranrig 
pnftrer  ^Irgiro^n";  „iT?eItItd)  ettle  $)o^eit";  „D  ungliidfeltg  jammer^ol^ 
ler  Zag^^' ;  „mit  graufam  tenfeltfc^er  Suft/'  etc. 

1.  Sauter,  and  generally  eitcl,  both  in  the  sense  of  "pure,"  *' nothing 
but,"  also  the  adj.  in  -er,  507,  2,  are  undeclined :  2)a^  ij^  lautcr  Unftnn. 
©ffet  eitel  unQcfciuert  ^rot  (B.).    2)er  Joiner  !Dom» 

213.  The  attributive  adjective  is  inflected  weak  after  cer- 
tain limiting  words,  viz.,  after  the  definite  article  and  pronouns 
declined  like  it;  after  ein,  lein,  and  the  possessives,  excepting 
the  N.  sg.  of  all  genders  and  the  A.  sg.  neut.  and  fern.  Ex. : 
ber  gute  ^Ipfelbaum  (Uh.);  ^ur  gliidli(^en  Stunt e ;  p  {enem  frokn 
%t\k;  eine^  fdjonen  ^aj}e^ ;  an  einem  langen  ^tjle  (Uh.);  fein  griineg 
^am  (id.);  eine  arme  Sauerin  (N.  and  A.  sg.);  ein  feit)ene^  ^(eit) 
(N.  and  A.  sg.). 

214.  The  adjective  is  therefore  declined  strong,  when  not 
uiiinfiected  (see  218)  and  when  not  preceded  by  any  of  the 
above  Umiting  words,  mentioned  in  213,  e.  g,,  §oIte  (Sefenfud^t, 
fii^e^  $offen  (Sch.).  ©tumme  fitter  toter  ©cba^e  (Platen  ?).  Also 
after  the  uninflected  pronouns  n?eld),  foIc6,  i)iel,  menig,  me^r,  tixoa^, 
nic^t^,  and  after  uninflected  numerals.  Ex.:  Sr  o^i^i  ^em  treuen 
^irten  man^  Blanfe^  (Stiid  (piece  of  money)  ba^on  (Uh.).  5l>eld) 
reic^er  §immel  (G.).  ©oli^  treffli^er  ^Jlonard^  (Sch.)  (see  216,  4; 
221). 


76  SYNTAX  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [215- 

215.  The  syntactical  distinction  between  strong  and  weak  inflection  of  the  adjec- 
tive, though  very  old,  is  by  no  means  clearly  drawn  even  now.  The  oldest  inflection 
of  the  adjective  is  the  so-called  "  uninflected,"  identical  with  the  strong  noun  declen- 
sion. When  the  pronominal  endings  spread  over  the  adjective  declension,  forming 
the  present  strong  adjective  declension,  the  adjective  probably  was  still  declined 
strong  even  after  a  pronoun  (ind.  article).  Of  this  there  are  traces  from  O.  H.  G.  down 
to  the  nth  century.  The  u-declension  of  the  adjective  is  a  characteristic  of  the  Ger- 
manic languages.  Having  less  distinctive  and  fewer  endings  than  the  strong,  it  is  natural 
that  the  adjective  should  be  declined  according  to  it,  when  preceded  by  a  word  which 
had  the  strong  endings.  This  has  given  rise  to  the  syntactical  distinction  and  to  the 
feeling  that  two  strong  forms  should  not  stand  side  by  side.  When  an  adjective  be- 
came a  substansive  or  was  used  as  such,  it  was  always  inflected  weak,  with  or  without 
article.  This  explains  221,  1.  In  Gothic  the  present  participle  and  the  comparatives 
were  always  inflected  weak.  In  O.  H,  G.  appear  only  a  few  strong  comparatives  and 
superlatives. 

216.  Unsettled  usage  as  to  strong  and  weak  forms. 

!♦  The  strong  genitive  sg.  m.  and  n.  turned  weak  in  the  17th  cen- 
tury, and  this  is  now  the  prevailing  form  :  w^o^e^  ^)l\it^"  (Bii.);  blut^gert 
9{u^m^  (Uh.).  „2Borte  fii^eu  ^and)^"  (Sch.).  The  pronouns  always  remain 
strong,  except  itntx,  jeber,  of  which  a  weak  form  is  rare,  e.  g.,  jeben  ^olU 
(Uh.) ;  jenen  Xa^^  (Bii.).  This  weakening  is  due  to  the  feeling,  that  two 
strong  forms  should  not  stand  together.     Se3  215,  217. 

2.  After  personal  pronouns  the  rule  is  strictly  the  strong  form,  as  the 
pronoun  is  not  a  limiting  word.  But  as  early  as  M.  H,  G.  weak  forms 
begin  to  appear.  Usage  now  favors  :  after  tc|,  bu,  er  (in  address),  mt^, 
t)i(|  only  the  strong  form,  e.  g.,  «bu  fiarfer  ^oitig^fo^n"  (Uh.) ;  i^  armer  2)?ann; 
after  mir,  bit  mostly  the  strong  form ;  after  wir,  t^r  the  weak  (if  fern, 
always),  e,g.,  2Ber  nie  fein  SBrot  mit  2;i)ranen  ap  ♦  ♦  ♦  ber  fennt  eu(^  nic^t,  i|r 
^immlift^en  !Wac^te  I  (G.).  In  w^cgrit^t  i^x,  fd)cne  1)amen !  (G.),  the  comma 
makes  a  difference.  After  un^  and  zu^  (A.)  strong  and  weak  are  equally 
frequent.  After  itn^  and  eud^  (D.)  strong  and  weak  coincide  of  course  : 
9J?an  foHtc  euc^  fd^Ied)te  terle  ^eijlecfen  (arrest)  laffett.  (£ud^  faulen  S3urf(^en  ift  je^t 
ber  SBrotfor^  fjo^er  ge'^dngt. 

3.  In  the  vocative  the  rule  now  is  strong  form  both  in  sg.  and  pi., 
e.g.,  Un^crfdydmter !  n)ennbt(^  jcmanb  ge^ort  ^dtte  (G.).  t)u,  armer  ®etft  (Sh.). 
The  plural  is  still  found  weak,  but  rarely,  as  :  ;Cieben  ^reunbc,  c^  ^ab  Beffre 
Beitcn  aU  bie  unfern  (Sch.). 

In  O.  H.  G.  the  weak  form  was  the  rule ;  in  M.  H.  G.,  the  strong  in 
the  sg. 

4.  After    certain   pronouns,   pronominal   adjectives,    and    indefinite 


219]  SYNTAX   OF  THE   ADJECTIVE.  77 

numerals,  sucli  as  folc^e,  mX^t,  citttge,  etltc^e,  aUe,  manege,  feine,  and  others, 
there  stands  in  the  N.  and  A.  pi.  very  frequently  the  strong  form  against 
the  rule,  but  rarely  in  the  G.  pi.  This  strong  form  is  the  older.  Even 
after  biefe  and  jene  strong  adjectives  may  he  found  in  the  classics.  Ex. : 
©er  SBlutttenpnbler  ^at  feme  f^one  Oiofen  me^r.  So  ^a^  bu  folc^e  ^db^^^erfaulte 
23irnett  gefauft  ?  After  the  G.  pi.  imkx  and  breier  the  weak  adjective  is  fre- 
quent, hut  in  the  spoken  language  these  genitives  are  very  rare  :  ber 
^nfauf  »on  imi  neuen  ^aufern  or  imi  neuer  ^ciufer,  and  not  jweier  neuen  (or  -er) 
^aufer* 

217.  If  two  or  more  adjectives  hold  the  same  relation  to  the  noun, 
they  have  the  same  inflection.  If  the  second  adjective,  however,  he  more 
closely  related  to  the  noun,  forming  a  joint  idea,  then  it  usually  stands 
in  weak  form  in  G.  and  D.,  not  in  N.  and  A  It  can  often  he  formed  into 
a  compound  noun,  and  has  less  accent  than  the  first  adjective  :  (£r  traftierte 
Utt^  mit  fc^Iec^tem  roten  Seine  (=  9flottt)ein);  bie  ^olgen  ^lutiger  l)itrgerlt(|en  ^riege 
{=  SSurgerfriege). 

1.  After  certain  adjectives  like  folgenber,  oBtger,  ertr»a^nter,  gebac^ter,  etc., 
the  second  adjective,  as  a  rule,  is  inflected  weak  in  all  cases :  ©enannte^ 
unumjlop^e  9)rittjipf  oMger  anerfannte  <Sa^, 

The  Adjective  in  the  Predicate. 

218.  The  predicate  adjective  is  uninflected.  If  it  stand 
inflected  in  the  predicate,  the  noun  is  supplied  and  the  adjec- 
tive is  looked  upon  as  attributive:  Die  ^raft  ift  fc^ti^ad),  aClein  Die 
Suft  ift  gro^  (F.  2203).  T)dn  ®ef(^aft  ift  tin  [(^mierigeS  (supply 
"one");  ,,De^  9>oliaiften  So^  ift  fein  gliitfli^e^." 

The  adjective  (or  participle)  is  also  uninflected  when  it  is 
an  appositional  or  factitive  predicate  :  ffiir  famen  gliicfli(^  an* 
^m,  ta^  ftni?  id)  tumm  (F.  961).    IDer  Olaube  mac^t  felig  (B.). 

219.  Certain  adjectives  are  only  used  predicatively.  Some 
of  these  are  really  nouns,  like  feint),  frennt),  ^eil,  fi^a^e,  not,  nii^e, 
fc^ulD*  Others,  originally  adjectives  or  past  participles,  have 
been  restricted  to  this  use,  like  ^abt^aft,  ab^olt),  getrojl,  anftd)tig, 
^erluftig*  All  of  them  have  not  yet  become  full  adjectives; 
and  many,  if  with  adjective  form,  are  of  late  derivation  : 
abfpenftig,  ab^oli?,  abmentig,  au^fint)ig,  ^anbgemein*     Ex.:    Cttilie 


78  SYNTAX   OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  [220- 

fonnte  Dem  SJ^atc^en  nic^t  feint)  fein  (G.).  Sin  fd^oner  3Wann,  cine 
fd)one  grau!  ift  ^er  X1re!tor  ^ludlid)  genug^i^rer  ^ab^aft  ju  n^erDen, 
fo  .  ♦  ♦  (id.).    S)ie  ^nec^te  mur^en  ^antigemeim 

1.  In  O.  H.  G.  the  adjective  in  the  predicate  is  still  inflected,  though 
not  always.  In  M.  H.  G.  it  is  rarely  inflected.  In  N.  H.  G.  roller  and 
^aibtx  are  stereotyped  strong  forms  used  for  both  numbers  and  all  gen- 
ders :  ^ie  9^a(^t  \\t  ^al6er  l;iu  (coll.) ;  ,,be^  ^ad)t^  urn  ^alkr  3tt>Hf"  (student 
song).    ^oUtx  ©d^merjctt  unb  ^ranf^cit  (B.). 

Substantive  Use  of  the  Adjective. 

220.  The  adjective  when  used  as  a  noun  is  inflected  ac- 
cording to  the  rules  already  given  for  the  adjective  proper : 
^Qlit  ^leinem  fangt  man  an,  mit  ®ro§em  ^oxt  man  auf  (Prov.).  "Ln 
(B6>mxt  an  meiner  2in!en  (Korner).  tit  Srften  merten  ^ie  Se^ten 
fein  (B.).  For  gender  see  160,  3.  No  inflection  is  the  rule  in 
certain  set  phrases:  ®(eid)  un^  (Sleid)  gefedt  fid)  gem  (Prov.). 
3ung  uni)  2llt,  ®ro^  unt  ^lein,  9lei4  unr  5Irm,  Don  ^lein  an,  t>on 
3nng  auf;  also  in  the  names  of  languages  :  Snglifc^,  granjbftfcb ; 
mein  geliebte^^  Xeutf^  (F.  1223).  SBie  feei^t  i^ie^  auf  Stalienifc^  ?  gr 
^at  i)on  .^int)  auf  9lorn?egif^  gefonnt.    Also  of  colors:  ®vm,  33(au. 

221.  Usage  admits  of  many  irregularities. 

1.  The  weak  form  in  the  plural  when  no  article  precedes  as  ©ebtentett, 
SSeamteUf  ©(^onen,  3ungen,  or  rarely  the  strong  form  in  the  singular  like 
any  feminine  noun,  invariable  in  the  sg. :  ber  <Sc^one,  instead  of  ber  ^(^onen 
(G.  sg.).    See  215. 

2.  The  strong  or  weak  plural  after  alle,  ctntgc,  tilx6^t,  etc. ;  aHe  ©ele^rtc, 
eiiiige  ©efanbte. 

3.  After  toa^,  tttoa^,  ijtel,  etc.,  the  weak  form  is  rare.     See  214. 

4  If  an  adjective  precede  an  adjective-substantive  and  is  inflected 
weak,  the  latter  is  of  course  weak  ;  if  the  adjective  is  inflected  strong, 
then  the  substantive  may  be  either  strong  or  weak.  The  latter  form  is 
perhaps  more  common  for  the  neuter,  the  strong  certainly  for  the  mascu- 
line nouns-:  ^m,  fte  (ba^  SBetb)  i\i,  o  ^olbe  ©c^onen,  jur  ©efeUigfeit  gema^t  (Gr.). 
']Dk  armett  S^ewanbten  ftnb  gemo^^nlid)  nlAt  tinafommen.  |)oc^gejleEte  SBeamte  finb 
eutlafTcn.   2)er  neue  23ebiente  ^at  ein  angene^me^  5tu§erc.    See  F.  II.  6842. 


223]  SYNTAX   OF  THE  ADJECTIVE.  79 

a.  Do  not  confound  baa  9Jefbt,  law— ba^  0Jec^te,  the  right  thing ;  ba^  ®ut, 
property  — bae  ®ute,  the  good  (abstract)  ;  (ba^)  (Sc^marj,  black  (the  color) 
—  'ti^^  ^d^marje  (the  bull's  eye  of  a  target),  etc. 

Syntax  of  Comparative  and  Superlative. 

222.  These  may  be  used  just  like  the  positive,  only  that 
the  superlative  is  never  used  predicatively,  i,  e,,  uninflected, 
excepting  aUerlieBft,  e,  g,,  tie  SSIume  ift  allerliebft*  If  it  stands  in 
the  predicate,  it  is  always  weak,  being  preceded  by  the  definite 
article:  !I;iefer  Saum  ift  t)er  ^cd)fte  or  t)icfer  Saurn  ift  am  l)bc^ftett. 
These  two  should  not  be  used  indiscriminately,  however,  as 
they  too  generally  are  in  the  spoken  language.  The  first  is 
the  strictly  relative  comparison;  it  can  be  strengthened  by 
aEer-  e,  g,,  ber  ^od^fte  tjon  alien,  t)er  allerl)b^fte*  The  prepositional 
superlative  should  only  be  used  when  not  so  much  the  objects 
themselves  or  different  objects  are  to  be  compared,  but  the 
same  objects  under  different  circumstances  of  time  and  place. 
This  is  generally  the  "  absolute ''  superlative,  expressed  by  an 
adverbial  phrase:  "Ltx  @tar!e  ift  (im  mat^tigfteti  allein  (Sch.), 
"  The  strong  man  is  most  powerful  standing  alone,  unimpeded 
by  the  weak."  "Die  Spfel  fint)  auf  t)er  fonnigen  @eite  U^  ©attend  am 
reifften.    %U  Soot^  3Hicfcelieu  fpielte,  tvar  bai5  2;^eater  am  ^oBften. 

1.  The  ** relative"  superlative  is  generally  preceded  by  the  definite 
article,  the  *'  absolute  "  has,  as  a  rule,  cin  or  no  article.  Goethe  is  very 
fond  of  such  an  absolute  superlative  :  (£in  aHerUebile^  ^inb,  a  most  lovely 
child.  S)ie^  beutet  auf  ein  fpateflc^  (a  very  late)  S'iaturereigni^  (G.)-  Notice 
also  :  xotxV^  bie  SBenigjlcn  fonnen  (G.),  because  very  few  know  how;  ber 
^itrft,  bie  <£ltern,  bic  ncueren  (Bprad^cit,  and  other  examples.  They  show 
absolute  comparison  with  the  definite  article.  The  absolute  superlative 
is  best  expressed  by  an  adverb  +  adjective  in  the  positive.  The  more 
common  adverbs  used  are  :  fe^r,  rc(^t,  ^0(^|1/  duger)!,  iiberau^r  e.  g.,  eine  ^oc^jl 
aiiQcne^me  Uberrafd^ung,  ein  rec^t  bummer  Sunge. 

223.  Any  adjective  can  be  compared  by  -er,  -efl,  except 
those  that  are  never  used  attributively  (see  219)  and  a  few 
whose  form  seems  awkward,  like  fneifttifd);  krrifd),  but  the  latter 


80  SYNTAX   OF  THE   NUMERALS.  [224- 

are  not  absolutely  excluded.    Mm,  mi^  ®ott,  fie  war  me^r  f(^uto 
ate  ic^  (F.  2960). 

224.  When  two  qualities  belonging  to  the  same  object  are 
compared,  me^r,  meniger,  mtntier  are  now  used,  but  the  classics 
are  still  full  of  the  comparatives  in  -er* 

According  to  Lelimann  (L.  Spraclie,  p.  206)  Leasing  uses  nte^r  only 
once :  2)tefe  ^Tu^rufuttgen  ftnb  r^etortfc^er  aU  griinbli^  (Le.).  Present  usage: 
Der  ©efctte  ijl  weniger  ^eimtiitfifv^  aU  bumm,   ©er  (©olbat  ijl  mtf^x  tapfer  aU  flug* 

225.  Logically  the  superlative  cannot  be  used  of  two  objects,  but  it 
is  so  used  much  more  frequently  in  German  tlian  in  English,  e.  g. ,  3tt)Ci 
(Sol)ne,  tt)Otton  fte  ben  cilteften  *  .  ♦  nut  einem  S^feile  erf(^o§  (Le.). 

1.  For  the  conjunctions  benn,  al^,  after  the  comparative,  see  333. 

2.  Notice  the  bold  comparative  in  H.  and  D.,  IX.  311  :  9'?unf  tjl  ba^ 
SJleine  nteiner  al^  iemal^.  Such  forms  as  ber  ^einigjle,  etc.,  at  the  end  of 
letters  are  rare.  Seiber  is  a  comparative  of  kib  (adj.),  which  became  a 
noun  very  early.     Dfterer  occurs  in  Lessing. 

SYNTAX   OF   THE   NUMERALS. 

226.  The  cardinals,  used  attributively,  are  indeclinable 
now,  except  etn,  tmt,  ein.  The  G.  and  D.  of  3it>et  and  tret  now 
and  then  occur  still :  '^'^zSjix  ^tVi<^tXi  9Runt  m^M  aHe  SBa^rtjett 
futtt»  (Prov.).  (Here  ,,3meier"  shows  the  case;  jmet  3^W3^«  SWunt) 
would  not  be  cleai\)     ^^t  i)on  eln^  Bi^  l)un^ert» 

1.  To  express  the  year  the  cardinal  is  merely  added  to  „tm 
3a:^r(e)''  or  to  ,,itt/'  as  im  3a|re  ^k^ii^n  ^unt ert  txa  Vixi^  cidjtatg,  or 
shorter,  in  1813*  The  cardinal  shows  the  year,  the  ordinal  the 
month :  ®ot^e  ftarb  ten  22ten  SQlarg  1832.  ^anno^er,  ten  (!♦)  erften 
5luguft  1881  ♦     The  ordinals  used  only  attributively,  see  211. 

2.  The  time  is  expressed  in  various  ways.  Answering  to 
such  questions  as:  ©ie^iel  U^r  ifl  e^,  treld^e  '^t\i  ift  e^  or  ^aben 
njtr  ?  mie  ifi  e^  ^Xi  ter  3^tt  ?  we  say  :  ©^  if^  ^molf  t^orbet,  afcer  noc^ 
nic^t  ein^.  (E^  ifl  zvx  SStertel  tret  or  auf  t)ret,or  txn  SStertel  n^^  (iiber) 
3»ei  (all  mean  a  quarter  past  two).    S^  ijl  trei  Siertel  trei  or  auf 


229] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  l^TUMERALS.  81 


txtx  or  tin  35iettel  ijor  Wx,  =  a  quarter  of  three.  SiJ  ij^  ^att  jtrolf, 
=  half  past  eleven,  on  the  same  principle  as  i>ierte1^aI6  (see 
229).  We  can  say:  20  9Hinutett  nac^  i^lxt  (past  ten),  ^mn^iQ 
m  jebtt  (of  ten).  Der  Bug  fii^rt  3  U^r  20  Wlimtm  nai^mittag^  ah. 
SBir  ttJoUen  un^  urn  funf  treffen* 

227.  Used  substantively  the  cardinals  are  more  frequently 
inflected,  having  a  plural  in  -e  (see  429)  and  a  dative  in  -en 
(see  79):  S0  n^aren  i^rer  funf(e),  stvclf(e)* 

1.  Colloquially  tliis  -e  is  very  commonly  used  as  far  as  19  incl.,  even 
when  the  figure  itself  be  meant,  which  stands  in  the  feminine  singular : 
!Dtefe  5l(|t(e)  x]i  m(^t  pt  gemac^t.  !Diefc  5^eun(c)  ftc^t  fc^tef.  ©If  if^  bte  ©unbc. 
(£lfe  u^erf(^reitet  bie  je^n  ®et)ote  (Sch.). 

2.  !Die  9)?iIIio'n,  bie  SBiKio'n,  bie  SDhHiarbe  are  regular  nouns,  and,  unlike 
^unbert  and  taufenb,  stand  in  the  plural  after  the  cardinals,  e.g.,  brei  MiU 
Itonen,  but  fiinf^unbert,  M^  taufenb.  ®a^  ^unbert,  ba^  2:aHfenb  are  common 
nouns,  pL:  ^Uttberte  +  hundreds,  STaufenbe  +  thousands:  e.g.,  ju  |)unber^ 
ten,  a  hundred  at  a  time ;  :6et  ^unberttaufetiben  bie  2)?enf(^en  hxMtn  (Le.). 

228.  ^SSeibe^'  corresponds  to  Eng.  "both "in  form  and 
use:  3P  t>ag  5>fert)  an  bei^en  Slugen  Hto  ?  It  may  have  the  defi- 
nite article  before  it:  Me  6eit)en  M^e,  "both  the  cows." 

1.  The  singular  Beib-  means  "  either,"  "each  "  (of  two).  S3etbe^  la§t 
f!^  "^oren  =  either  statement  is  reasonable  ;  ba^  Slbenbma^l  itnter  ^eiber  ®c=* 
jlalt,  the  communion  in  either  form  ;  but  the  masc.  and  fern,  are  archaic. 
2)eitn  ju  einem  gro^en  ^annc  ge^ort  kibed  :  ^leinigfetten  aU  ^leinigfetten  unb 
iDt^ttQe  Dtnge  aU  iwtt^ttge  2)inge  ;^u  l^eftanbeln  (Le.).  93etbe^  has  supplanted 
kibe,  heidiu  (pl.)»  which  are  still  common  in  the  16th  and  17th  centuries. 

Notice  beibe^  —  unb  =  both  —  and.  Seibe^,  ein  loMtc^er  ^onig  unb  mdc^ttger 
©(^winger  ber  Sanje  (Bii.). 

229.  1.  Peculiar  are  the  compounds  of  the  ordinals  with  ^alB  following 
them  and  felb  preceding  them :  55iert(e)'^atB  (3 J),  neunt(e)'^al^  (8-^),  meaning 
ba^  ijierte  nur  ^alB  or  tueniger  ein  :^aI6,  \)Cl^  neunte  nur  l^al^.  ^reije^ntel^alb  %0i^  = 
12  %(i^  aber  ba^  13te  nur  ^alk  Ags.,  Icelandic,  Danish,  and  L.  Gf.  have  the 
same  forms,  though  in  the  two  latter  "half"  precedes  the  ordinal.  It 
does  not  go  back  to  0.  H.  G.  ©elbanber  =  er(feI6)l)  ber  jnjeite,  two  of  them ; 
felbbretje^^nt,  himself  the  13th,  thirteen  of  them  (G.) ;  felbbritt,  feIBt)iert  gen- 
erally uninflected.    (Selbfl  jwanjigfler  (Le.).    The  cardinal  is  not  common, 


82  SYNTAX   OF  THE   PEESOKAL  PROiq^OUK.  230- 

but  Lessing  has  wfelb  fiinfjigcr/'    This  composition  is  more  common  than 
l^alb-  in  the  modern  dialects. 

3.  Notice  also  the  cardinals  in  -er,  as  in  ben  fiinftiger  3al)ren — either 
"from  1850-60"  or  "  from  50-60  years  old."  It  is  now  classical.  This 
-er  occurs  in  the  names  of  the  unit,  ten,  etc. :  ber  ^intx,  ber  B^^ner,  etc. 
See  507,  1.    3u  itotit,  britt  also  occur  for  ju  jtpeicn,  breien. 

SYNTAX   OF   THE   PRONOUNS. 
Syntax  of  the  Personal  Pronoun. 

230.  1.  Du,  sg.,  i^r,  pi.,  are  used  in  familiar  intercourse 
in  the  family  and  among  intimate  friends,  in  addressing  God, 
in  sermons,  in  solemn  discourses  and  in  poetry.  Ex. :  ^ennft 
in  Da^  Sant),  mo  Die  Sitronen  bliilm  ?  (G.).  Sliuler,  alter  55ater  I  In 
fannft  t^en  3:ag  ter  greil)eit  ntc^t  md)v  f  c^ a u e n  ;  In  foUft i^n^oxcn 
(Sch. ).  (Sr^ab'ner  ®eift,  tu  gaBft  mix,  gabft  mix  attee,  toaxnm  id)  bat 
(F.  3218). 

2.  ^u,  3.  p.  pi.,  is  used  everywhere  else,  even  among  rela- 
tives in  some  families;  also  when  grown  children  address  the 
parents:  S>o  tr>o^tten  @le,  mnn  id)  fragen  tarf  ? 

3.  This  peculiar  use  of  ©te  sprang  up  early  in  the  18th  century.  It  is  due,  no  doubt, 
to  the  use  of  the  singular  Sr  and  ®ie  in  address,  which  were  the  height  of  politeness  in 
the  17th  century.  Gv  and  Sie  are  due  to  the  use  of  §ei"r  and  %xa\x  in  direct  address.  In 
Chamisso's  „^eter  ©c^Ieint^l"  the  gray-coat  always  addresses  Peter  with  „fcer  §err," 
e.g.^  ,/9J2i33C  fcer  ^crr  nieine  3ubnnglid;!eit  cntfc^ulbicjeii  .  .  .  id)  Ijalc  einc  ^itte  an  i:^n." 
§crr,  %xan,  Sl^rc  ©naben,  (Sure  (Sscellens,  ©eine  aKajeftat  were  followed  by  the  "plural  of 
majesty"  (see  311,  2):  §err  'Doftor  wurbcn  ba  fatcd;tftert  (F.  3524).  ^iir§  crjle  wottctt 
©eiiie  9}Zaicftat,  ha^  bie  3trme'e  er)n'  2tufi(^ulj  33cf)incn  rciumc  (Sch.).  §crr  was  reduced 
to  mere  „ev''  as  early  as  M.  H.  G.,  e.  g.,  er  Sigfrid ;  in  the  16th  century,  „2Bertcr  cr 
^Jfarrer.''    This  form  encouraged  the  use  of  the  pronoun  cr  in  direct  address. 

4.  ^^r,  in  addressing  one  person,  was  early  very  respectful  and  has  maintained  itself 
in  the  drama,  except  in  comedy,  to  this  day,  and  might  be  called  the  "  stage-address," 
and  is  due  to  Eng.  and  Fr.  influence.    See  Schiller's  DJtavia  Stuart. 

231.  The  gradation  as  to  politeness  and  etiquette  now  is  about  as 
follows  :  1.  For  princes  and  all  persons  of  high  standing,  3^re  ©naben, 
(Sure  ©rceCenjr  Sure  ?0^aie|lat,  with  the  verb  in  the  pi.  2.  <3te,  addressing 
one  or  more  persons,  verb  always  in  the  pi.,  e.g.,  biirfte  id)  (Sie  Bcgleiten? 
3.  3^r,  pL  of  bu,  and  %x  in  the  drama  addressing  one  or  more  persons, 


234]  SYKTAX   OF  THE   PEESO:t^AL  PROKOUN.  83 

e.g.,  (Spat  fommt  %x,  boc^  %x  fommt  (Scli.).    See  F.  981,  988.     4.  (£r,  Sie, 
addressing  one  person,  now  rare.     5.  X)u,  i^r,  as  in  230,  1. 

232.  The  genitive  of  the  pronouns  of  the  1.  and  2.  persons  stands 
very  rarely  after  nouns.  Goethe  has  it  once,  „mcin,  be$  ©cogno'jlen,"  "  of 
me  the  geognost,"  but  it  is  common  as  the  object  of  verbs,  after  adjec- 
tives and  numerals  :  3(^  Htt'  eu(^,  tte|mt  cu(^  meiner  an  (F.  1875).  The  un- 
inflected  possessive  metn,  betn  are  by  some  interpreted  as  predicate  genitives, 
e.  g.,  ber  33e(^er  ijl  bein  (Sch.).  As  it  is  much  more  probable  that  the  posses- 
sive adjectives  were  used  as  genitives  of  the  personal  pronoun  than  mce 
versa,  this  interpretation  is  hardly  correct.     (See  441,  a.) 

233.  The  personal  pronouns  always  accompany  the  verb. 
In  the  imperative  „(Bk"  always  stands,  but  t)U  and  i^r  only  for 
emphasis:  ^iebet  eure  geinte  (B.).  93leiktt  ©ie  gefiiHt^fl.  See 
F.  1908. 

1.  In  poetry,  colloquially,  and  in  merchants'  letters  the  pronoun  is 
often  not  put :  S3tn  tueber  ^^rdulein,  mhtx  \^m,  tarn  ungelettet  m^  |)aufe  ge'^n 
(F.  2608).  See  F.  3429.  3^r  ©erte(3  (viz.,  ©c^reikn)  ^om  18ten  biefe^  (viz., 
?D?onat^),  ^a^e  empfangen.  Notice  the  set  phrases  bttte,  I  pray  ;  banfe,  thank 
you  ;  gcfd)tt>eige  (conjunction,  "  say  nothing  of  "),  before  which  {(^  has  to 
be  supplied.  X^ut  nlc^t^f  ber  3ubc  tr>irb  ^erbrannt  (Le.),  no  matter,  the 
Jew  .  .  . 

2.  Colloquially  the  subject,  if  a  noun,  may  be  repeated  in  the  shape  of 
a  pronoun,  as  in  Eng. :  ber  ^ird^^of,  er  tiegt  tr>ie  am  Za^t  (G.).     See  244,  3. 

234.  The  pronouns  of  the  third  person  have  demonstra- 
tive and  determinative  force.  (Compare  the  cognate  Latin 
is,  ea,  id.)  Hence  if  they  refer  to  lifeless  objects  or  abstract 
nouns,  they  rarely  stand  in  the  G.  and  D.  cases,  but  they  are 
supplanted  by  the  regular  demonstrative  pronouns  or,  if  gov- 
erned by  prepositions,  by  t)a(r),  l)in,  ^er  +  the  preposition. 
Ex.:  'Bern  2ieBd)en  Mnert  ^xu^l  3^  t^td  ba»on  nite  l)oren  (F. 
2104).  ^aht  tnd)  ^or^er  trol)(  prapartert  (F.  1958).  Mdn  i(^  glauB', 
In  ^alt\t  ntd)t  ^tel  ta^on  (viz.,  'oon  ttx  Steligion)  (F.  3418). 

1.  Also  c^  (A.)  is  thus  supplanted,  when  referring  to  an  individual 
object :  SBo  liegt  ^axi^  ?  .  .  .  2)en  ^^htger  braitf  (not  aiif  esS)  ba^  ne^^men  mir 
(Arndt).  ^m\\'^  ©liicf !  ^er^ !  Sicbe !  ®ott !  id)  |abe  feinen  9kmcn  bafitr  (F. 
3455-6),    ^ennjl  bu  Conbon?    SBefu^e  baffelbe  iebenfatt(3. 


84  CONCOKD  OF   PKOi;rOU]Sr  AKD  NOUIT.  [2-^5- 

Concord  of  Pronoun  and  Noun. 

235.  The  pronoun  of  the  third  person  agrees  with  the 
noun  which  it  represents  in  gender  and  number.  The  con- 
cord of  the  pronoun  with  the  natural  and  grammatical  gender 
has  been  treated,  see  165,  166;  also  the  neuter  sg.  e^  repre- 
senting a  plural  and  any  gender,  see  168. 

On  the  use  of  „e^"» 

236.  1.  S^  is  the  indefinite  subject  of  impersonal  verbs 
denoting  states  of  the  weather  and  other  natural  phenomena, 
e.  g.,  e^  regnet,  ^onnert,  bli^t,  fAneit,  l)agelt,  e^  ^at  gegla'tteift,  e^  iaolif 
eg  tijlntert,  eg  ^unfelt,  ^cimmert,  taut,  etc. 

2.  ©g  is  made  the  indefinite  subject  of  verbs,  not  really  im- 
personal :  Sg  fc^Iagt  elf;  eg  brennt,  eg  flopft,  flingelt,  eg  ge^t  log, 
liiutet;  also  in  the  passive  and  reflexive:  eg  tt)trl)  getatt^t,  gefungen, 
gefpielt ;  compare  rndxi  tan^t,  mcin  x\x\t.  Sg  ge^t,  fpielt  fid)  l)ier  gut 
=:  it  is  good  walking,  playing  here.  S3oMn  foE  eg  nun  ge^tt 
(F.  2051). 

a.  Such  an  eg  is  used  by  poets  to  give  a  vague,  mysterious,  ghostly 
impression.  Schiller's  „Xau(^er,"  Goethe's  „^0(i)5ettUeb"  and  „3^otentanj" 
are  full  of  them :  Unb  alg  er  im  tt)t(ltgen  ©d^lummer  lag,  beivegt  eg  jt(^  unter  bem 
S3ette  (G.).  The  eg  (treated  so  far)  except  in  the  passive  and  reflexive  verb- 
forms  cannot  be  omitted  like,  for  instance,  the  expletive  „eg"  sub  3,  5. 

3.  Sg  is  made  the  grammatical  subject  of  a  verb,  when  the 
logical  subject  follows  later:  gg  ^ogen  tret  SurfAe  tt?oM  iikr  ten 
9l^em  (Uh.).  gg  fc^ritt  il)m  \x\\6>  3ur  (Seite  ter  Hiil^ente  ®enog 
(Uh.).     SeeF.  3490-1;  3674-77. 

The  logical  subject  cannot  be  another  pronoun,  eg.,  eg  war  x^,  eg  ivaren 
(Sie,  as  in  Eng.  "  it  was  T,"  "  it  was  you,"  which  is  a  late  construction. 

a.  In  ballads  and  other  folk-lore  this  c8  is  not  required  and  inversion  is  still  possi- 
ble, as  was  the  rule  in  O.  H.  G.,  without  c§  at  the  head  of  the  sentence.  For  after  all, 
c§  was  here  used  not  merely  to  denote  an  indefinite  subject,  but  to  account  for  an  inver- 
sion which  had  no  apparent  cause.  It  is  an  "  expletive  "  and  superfluous  as  soon  as 
any  other  part  of  the  sentence  stands  at  the  head  bringing  about  the  inversion.  It  is 
©ftenest  translated  by  "there."    German  tales  begin  „(S3  war  einmal  .  .  .  ",  "There 


237]  SYi^^TAX   OF  THE   REFLEXIVE   PROKOUl^.  85 

was  once  .  ,  .  " .  ®al)  ein  ^na6'  eln  9?6§lein  fte:^n  (G.).  <Stettt'  ein  ^na6e  [i(^  tnir  an  bic 
©eitc  (id.).  The  construction  i^  bin  eS,  3^)^  fetb  e§,  "  you  are  it,"  as  in  Ags.  and  as 
English-speaking  children  still  say,  is  already  the  rule  in  O.  H.  G.  Nor  can  we  say 
in  German  ,,id)  I)in  er"  and  „<£ic  finb  er,"  but  i^  Un  e§,  ba§  Bin  tc^,  bev  I)tn  i(^,  i(^  tin 
fcerjenigc,  wel(i)ev  .  .  .  ,  I  am  he  who  .  .  .  • 

4  Peculiar  is  the  impersonal  „e^  gteBt/'  "  there  are  '*  or  "  is/' 
which  is  not  a  very  old  phrase,  but  rare  in  M.  H.  G. ,  in  which 
e^  with  pi.  verb  was  even  possible. 

«@^"  is  here  the  indefinite  subject  and  has  taken  the  place  of  the  more 
definite  „t)a^"  or  a  noun,  which  "gave,"  *'  furnished,"  "  produced"  a  cer- 
tain thing.  Hence  „e^  giebt"  is  always  followed  by  the  accusative  :  ^e^ 
giebt  ©c^ldge,"  '*  Somebody  is  giving  or  will  give  somebody  a  whipping." 
dx,  ha  gab^^  n)eftfdrf(^en  ^c^infen  (Schefifel).  „(£^  giebt"  is  not  well  followed 
by  a  noun  in  the  sg.  denoting  one  object  or  individual,  e.g.,  ©^  giebt  ^tcr 
eiuen  §unb,  but  by  nouns  in  the  pi.,  by  abstract  and  material  nouns :  ©^ 
giebt  feitten  BufaE  (Sch.).    See  F.  1118. 

5.  S^  is  used  as  the  subject  of  impersonal  verbs  followed  by 
an  objective  personal  pronoun  (D.  or  A.),  denoting  states  of 
mind  and  body:  g^  ^iirftet  mi^,  e^  ^ungert  i^n,  e^  rent  mt(^,  e^  i|t 

If  the  objective  pronoun  or  any  other  part  of  speech  precede  the  verb, 
c^  is  not  necessary,  but  it  may  be  retained.  Ex. :  3^  \^Vom  eu(^  ^u,  ntir 
tfl^iS  al^  mie  ein  3:raum  (F.  2040).  2)ir  tvirb  geivi^  einmal  ki  kiner  ®otta^nU($^ 
felt  bange  (F.  2050).     mix  ijl  fc^ledjt  ju  mute,  *'  I  do  not  feel  well." 

6.  g^  stands  further  as  indefinite  predicate  and  as  indefinite 
object.  See  204.  3n  Ucfem  (Binne  fannft  tu^^  magen  (F.  16U). 
See  further,  F.  2012-14  ;  2080.  ©ie  metnt,t)U  feift  entflol)n;  unD 
^alb  unD  l)alb  bijl  Du  e^  fd)on  (F.  3331-2). 

In  the  last  illustration  and  in  similar  ones  e^^  if  translated  at  all,  may 
be  rendered  by  ''so"  :  (Sie  jinb  n)o|l  miibe  ?  D  nein,  aber  id^  Mn  e^  Qtrot\tn, 
=  I  was  (so). 

Syntax  of  the  Reflexive  Pronoun. 

237.     The  reflexive  pronoun  always  refers  to  the  subject: 

S^  ift  ber  So^n  t)er  Tmnt,  tie  ftc^  felbft  be^njungen  (Sch.).  2)ie  ^at 
ft(^  JegUc^e^  erlaubt  (id.). 


86  SYI^TAX   OF  THE  EECIPROCAL  PR0N0U:N^.  [238^ 

1.  The  dative  was  already  lost  in  O.  H.  G.  In  M.  H.  G.  the  use  of 
fid)  as  dative  is  very  rare.  Lather's  Bible  is  still  full  of  the  dative  of  the 
personal  pronoun  for  the  reflexive,  e.  g  ,  Die  ^eiben,  ba  fte  "tiCL^  ®efe^  ntc^t 
laben,  ftnb  (fte)  i^nen  felbfl  ein  ®efe^,  Die  ^ei^^eit  Idffet  i^r  fageit/  =  wisdom 
will  take  advice.  ®ott  f(^uf  ben  ^Kenfc^en  il;m  pm  33ilbe,  Lessing  has:  Ser 
ftc^  ^natt  unb  gaU  i|m  felbfl  ju  lekn  m^i  enlfc^Ue^en  !ann,  ber  lebet  anberer  ©!lai)^ 
auf  immer*  But  this  «tt)m''  stands  also  because  there  is  already  one  ft(^»  It 
is  very  rare  in  the  classics  and  does  not  occur  in  the  spoken  language. 

2.  (Belbjlr  felber  strengthens  the  reflexive  pronoun  and  prevents  its  con- 
founding with  the  reciprocal.  For  examples  sec  above.  But  fel^jl  (felber) 
is  far  from  as  common  as  the  Eng.  self  (selves). 

Syntax  of  the  Reciprocal  Pronoun. 

238.  As  such  are  used  un^,  eud),  ftcb,  both  in  the  accusative 
and  dative  :  UnD  (fte)  nicften  fid)  (D.)  gu  unD  grii^ten  ftd^  (A.) 
freuntlid^  im  ©piegel  (H.  and  D.,  VII.  42).  S3enn  fi(^  tie  giirften 
befetoen,  mujfett  tie  Xiener  jld)  morten  unt)  teteii  (Sch.). 

But  if  any  ambiguity  arises,  as  is  frequently  the  case,  the  unvarying 
form  einattber  or  the  inflected  einer  (ber  eine)  ben  anbevn  referring  to  masc. 
nouns,  bie  eine  bte  anbere  referring  to  fem.  nouns,  bie  einen  bic  anbern  pi.  of 
both,  are  used  instead  of  them  and  even,  though  tautologically,  in  addition 
to  them.    Ex.:  unb  Itebeu  un^  unter  einanber  (B.).    (Sie  fpotten  ber  eine  be^  anbern. 

Syntax  of  the  Possessive  Pronouns. 

239.  The  possessive  pronoun  used  adjectively  agrees  with 
the  noun  like  any  other  adjective.  See  212.  The  uninflected 
forms  mein,  ^cin,  fcin  stand  in  the  predicate  and  can  be  subjects 
only  when  used  as  nouns  with  or  without  the  article,  e.  g.^ 
^TOein  unt)  T;ein  ijl  atlci^  3an!e5  Urfprung  (Prov.). 

1.  Standing  in  the  predicate,  therefore,  it  is  right  to  say  :  ^a^  S3u(^ 
if!  mein,  metne^,  \ia^  meine,  ba<3  meinige.  As  subjects  referring  to  ba<^  S3uc^  : 
9)Zeine§,  bad  mcine,  bad  meinige  ift  verlorenr  =  mine  is  lost. 

3.  Care  should  be  taken  that  the  right  possessive  be  used  when  per- 
sons are  addressed  with  ©ie,  bu,  t'^r  (3^r)»  SBr  refers  to  Sie,  bein  to  bUr 
euer  (Suer)  to  i^r  (3^r),  e.g.y^'u  ^akn  3^re  ^rau  SJ^utter  ijerloren?    SBo^in 


242]  SYJSTTAX   OF  THE  POSSESSIVE   PKONOUN^S.  87 

n)irb  bid)  beinc  a^ermeffeti^cU  nn^  fii^ren  ?    T)\xx^  be^  Wlanm^  UBermut,  bm  3f)x 
burd)  Suer  SBrautgemac^  sum  ST^rone  gefii^rt  (Scli.). 

240.  Of  tcx,  Ik,  ^a^  metne  (ter,  Me,  t)a^  metni.qe),  when  used 
substantively,  ter,  Die  ?Wetne,  pL  tie  ^O^einen  (with  capital  let- 
ters), denote  persons,  viz.,  friends,  relatives,  etc. ;  Da^  ^O'Zeine 
or  ta^  ^Cieinige  denote  my  property,  duty,  share,  deserts. 

Ex. :  2)er  ^err  fennet  bie  ©eiiten  (B.).  ©ie  '^at  ba^  S^rige  crljaltert  (her 
dowry),  ^avbinal !  3(^  ^ak  ba^  5)?eim9e  get^am  %^\xn  ®ie  ba^  3^re  (Sch.). 
^tefen  SJJorgen,  ali3  ic^  ©ie  im  treife  ber  S^rtgen  fanb  .  ♦  .  (id.),  "©anj  ber 
S^rige,"  „bie  Deinige,"  „bie  2)eine"  are  proper  letter-endings. 

241.  The  possessive  pronoun  must  be  repeated  like  the 
article  with  nouns  of  different  gender:  @ein  ^ot)er  (^an^,  feine 
etle  (^eftalt,  feine^  SJtunte^  Sac^eln,  feiner  ^lugen  ©eii^alt  ♦  >  .  (F. 
3395-8). 

242.  1.  As  fein  and  x\)x  are  both  reflexive  (referring to  the  subject  of 
the  sentence)  and  non-reflexive  (referring  to  another  noun)  an  ambiguity 
may  arise,  which  should  be  avoided  by  using  the  demonstrative  pronouns 
instead  ;  either  beffen,  beren  always  preceding,  or  be[felkn>  berfelkn  either 
preceding  or  following  the  noun.  Ex. :  9^olaub  ritt  l;interm  ^ater  ^er  mit 
beffen  <Sd)ilb  unb  ©d)n)erte  (Uh.).  ,Mit  feinem  ®d)ilb"  would  have  meant 
Roland's  shield.  Compare  the  following  lines  of  the  same  poem,  in 
which  it)m  prevents  ambiguity  :  9^.  ritt  ^tntevm  ^ater  ^er  unb  trug  t^m  feinen 
jlarfeit  ©peer  jufamt  bent  fejlen  <S(^tlbe*  Compare  ^rau  91.  9?.  ging  mit  ber 
^au^^Wtx'm  unb  tl^rer  9^ic^te  na(|  bem  ^axh^,  i.  e ,  Mrs.  N.  N/s  niece  ;  but 
ntit  ber  ^au^l^cilterin  unb  beren  5^i(^te,  ^.  e.,  the  housekeeper's  niece,  d^  eifre 
leber  feiner  (the  father's)  unbejlo(^enenr  »on  ^orurteilen  freien  2kht  na6)  (Le.). 

2.  The  possessive  of  the  3.  person  is  in  the  people's  language  often 
repeated  for  emphasis  after  a  genitive  of  possession  and  also  after  a 
dative:  ,Mtmn\  ^Better  fein  ©arten."  Comp.  "John  his  mark."  This  is 
not  to  be  imitated  though  it  occur  now  and  then  in  the  classics  and  quite 
frequently  in  the  18th  century :  STuf  ber  ^oriuna  i^rem  (5d}{ff  (Sch.) ;  be^ 
3IIo  feinem  (StuM  (id.).  3^x  artet  me'^r  nad)  eure«  3?ater^  ®et|l  aU  nac^  ber 
Wlumx  t^rem  (id.).     See  180,  4. 

3.  The  definite  article  cannot  precede  the  attributive  possessive  pro- 
noun. Sener,  btefer  and  such  adjectives  as  cbgebrtc^ter,  ern)flHmter  seemingly 
do,  but  such  constructions  as  btefer  bcin  So^xit  c^ge^ad^ter  mein  (Sd^reiber  are 
rather  appositional. 


88  SY:NrTAX  of  the  demonstrative  PEONOUN.        [243- 

243.  1.  By  a  license  the  possessives  lose  inflectional  endings  in  such 
set  phrases  as  occur  in  Sd)  moc^te  brum  mein  Zao,  nid^t  lieben  (F.  2920). 
SD'Jein  Sebtag  benr  tc^  bran  (Sch.).  ^ah^  ic^  bic^  boc^  mein  Xage  nic^t  gefe^en  (F. 
4440).  These  phrases  are  in  the  transition  stage  to  adverbs  and  the 
apostrophe  may  stand  or  not. 

2.  ©etn  is  in  proverbs  and  in  one  phrase  „feitter  Beit"  =  *'  in  due  time," 
"in  —  time,"  still  used  for  the  feminine  i^r,  a  remnant  of  the  earlier 
periods,  when  i^r  could  not  be  used  as  the  reflexive  possessive:  Sein  Z'i^ox 
fennt  jebe  ^ul;  (Prov.).  Untreue  fc^lagt  feinen  eigenen  ^errn  (Prov.).  «©einer 
Beit"  is  an  adverbial  genitive,  in  which  feiner  has  become  non-reflexive 
so  that  it  apparently  stands  at  times  for  il^rer^  unfere^,  etc.  Reflexive : 
,MUt^  Ding  toa^xt  feine  Beit"  (Hymn) ;  but  non-reflexive :  <Bk  wax  feiner  Beit 
(once)  eine  gro^e  ©angerin* 

Compare  the  relation  of  Eng.  "his"  and  "its."  The  latter  sprang 
up  in  Shakspere's  time.  *'  Its"  is  the  genitive  of  "it."  In  Sh.  "  his" 
stands  frequently  where  later  "its"  is  used. 

3.  The  use  of  the  German  definite  article  where  in  Eng.  the  possessive 
is  used,  is  by  no  means  as  strict  and  as  common  in  the  spoken  language 
as  the  grammarians  would  have  us  believe.  Take  for  instance  :  9)?etn 
armer  ^opf  i\t  mir  ijerrutft,  9Kein  armer  (Sinn  i|l  mir  itxfiMt  (F.,  I.  3383-6). 
(Solang  ic^  mic^  nod)  frif(^  auf  meinen  S3einen  fit'^Ie,  geniigt  mir  biefer  ^notenjlod 
(F.  3838-9).     See  154. 

In  the  17tli  century  „ii^"  was  used  also  for  all  persons.  "  Simplicissimus  "  is  full 
of  this  misuse. 

Syntax  of  the  Demonstrative  Pronoun. 

244.  1)  e  r,  t>  i  e,  t  a  ^,  always  accented,  points  out  without 
reference  to  nearness  in  time  or  space.  It  is  generally  well 
translated  by  "that,"  also  by  "this/'  and  by  a  personal 
pronoun. 

Ex.:  ©  em  Bolfc  l^ter  (tliis)  iDirb  jeber  %a^  ein  %t^  (F.  2162).  5lkr,  xok 
id)  mid)  fe^ne  bic^  jn  fd)anen,  ^aU  ic^  »or  bem  (that)  5)}?enfd)en  (Mephistopheles) 
ein  l^cimlic^  ©ranen  (F.  3480-1).  D  glii^lic^  b  e  r  (lie),  ben  i^r  ^ele^rt !  F.  1981). 
^er  (for  her)  ^a^^  id)  bie  f^reube  ^erMttert  (Bo.).  SBe^^e  b  em,  ber  S5ottair(en)<3 
•S^riften  iiber'^aupt  nic^t  mit  bem  ffe^tif($en  ®ei|l  lk%  in  ml^m  er  einen  Znl  ber< 
felben  gefc^rieben  (Le.). 

1.  The  genitives  be^j  beffen/  beren  sg.  fern.,  berer  and  beren,  pi.,  are  used 
substantively  as  follows : 


245]  STKTAX   OF  THE   DEMOKSTRATIYE   PRONOUi^.  89 

a.  ^i%  is  archaic,  but  occurs  in  compounds  like  i>e^l)all),  be^wegenr  ber^ 
geftalt,  etc.,  e.g.,  De^  freut  fid)  ba^  entmenfc^te  ^aar  (Sch.).  S33ir  jtnb  ber  feine^ 
wert,  ba^  iDtr  t)itten  (Lu.),  We  are  wortliy  of  none  of  those  (things),  etc. 

&.  2)effenr  beren  G.  sg.  fern,  and  Gl.  pi.,  are  used  when  they  have  the 
force  of  possessives  (see  242). 

c.  The  present  usage  favors  berer,  G.  pi. ,  referring  to  persons  and  bercn, 
beffen  referrinor  to  things.  But  the  classics  do  not  agree  with  this.  Gen- 
erally these  forms  are  antecedents  of  relative  pronouns.  Ex. :  3e^0  fag' 
mir  ba^  Snbe  berer,  bie  »on  2:roia  fe^rten  (G.).  |>at  '^o.^  ^inb  f($on  Bci^nc?  (S^ 
l^at  beren  ^ier.  !I)ort  fie^t  man  bie  ©itter  berer  (of  the  gentlemen,  lords)  von 
SBebelo^. 

2.  The  lengthened  forms  in  -en  and  -er  sprang  up  as  early  as  the  15th  century  both 
in  the  article  and  in  the  pronoun,  Luther  has  „beuen,''  D.  pi.,  but  the  short  genitives 
„be§"  and  ,,bcr.''  In  the  18th  century  they  lost  -er  and  -en  again,  owing,  no  doubt,  to 
the  desire  of  distinguishing  between  article  and  demonstrative,  and  between  the  sub- 
stantive and  adjective  uses  of  the  latter.  Goethe  has  still  ,,unb  won  bcnen  9!)ienid)cu  bie 
fie  befottberS  f^a^en."  Present  usage,  however,  requires  the  short  forms  of  the  pro- 
noun, when  used  adjectively. 

3.  Notice  the  frequent  emphatic  force  of  the  pronoun,  e.  g,,  3Scin  9Jec§te,  baS  mit  unS 
geboren  x\i,  won  b  e  ra  ift  leiber  nie  bie  %x<i^i  (F.  1978-9). 

Diefer,  jener* 
245.  liefer  points  out  what  is  near  in  time  and  space,  Jener 
-what  is  remoter.  Diefer  is  "the  latter,"  Jener,  "the  former.'' 
They  are  used  substantively  and  adjectively  :  I^iefe^  iun^e 
grauenjtmmer  :^at  ©efii^l  unD  (Stimme  (Le.).  Diefer  ti^ill''^  trodeit, 
tra^  iener  feuc!^t  Bege^rt*  Die^  Statt  ^ier  —  Diefe^  millft  ^u  geltenb 
mad)ett?  (Sch.). 

1.  ^Da^r  bte0  like  e^,  but  less  frequently,  can  he  the  indefinite  subjects 
of  neuter  verbs.  See  236.  E.  g.,  Da^  ifl  W  SD^agb  be^  9^a(^^ar^*  ©a^  ift 
ein  meifer  i&ater,  ber  fein  etgen  ^tnb  fennt  (Sch.).  ®ie^  ift  bie  ^rt  mit  |>exen  um^ 
^uge^n  (F.  2518). 

2.  T>k^  unb  ba^,  bie^  unb  fene^  have  the  force  of  ^^irgenb  etti,«  e.g.,  3Bir 
fmb  nt(^t  me^r  beim  crjlen  ©lasj,  brum  benfen  n)ir  gem  an  bie^  unb  ba^  (Song). 
Unb  er  firecfte  aU  tnabe  bie  |>anbe  nid^t  <xvi^  na(^  biefem  unb  }enem  (H.  and  D. 
V.  64). 

3.  !£)iefer  is  strengthened  hy  ^ier  ;  ber,  iener  and  ba^  by  \><ii,  e.  g.,  W\i 
bem  ba  J^erben  @ie  nict)t  fertig  (Sch.).    better,  in  the  sense  of  "  the  other  "  and 


90  'syntax  of  the   DEMOI^STRATIYE  PROKOUK".         [246- 

*'  to  come,*'  ;,itt  iener  3eit^  in  jmem  SeBen*    ©^affpere^i^  ©efpenfl  lommt  JwirEic^ 
aii^  icner  2BeU  (Le.). 

246.  When  not  referring  to  persons  ^ter  +  preposition 
may  take  the  place  of  tiefer,  and  l:a  -f  preposition  the  place  of 
ter  and  jener,  e.g.,  2Ber  fonft  ift  \6^\xl\)  taran  al^  i^r  in  S3ien  ?  (Sch.). 
!Dai?ott  fc^meigt  te^  (Sanger^  ^i)flid)!eit  (?).  ^iernai^  (according  to 
this)  mu§  ^ie  ge^art  eine  ganj  ftnl)ere  geiuefctt  fein* 

1.  Notice  the  two  strong  forms  in  Lessing's  5IIIe^  bicfe^,  feine  (Srftnbungeti 
«nt>  bie  ^t|lorifd)ett  SJiaterialiert,  fnetet  er  benn  in  einm  fein  langen,  fein  fc^tt)er  ju  faf^ 
fenben  9fioman  jufammen.  For  an  ba^,  tao,^  .  ♦  .  i  i)on  bent,  wa^  .  .  ♦  no 
baranft)a^  .  ♦  ♦,bai)onn)a$  .  ♦  ♦  should  be  substituted,  tliougli  this  is  done 
colloquially.    »2Bir  ba(|ten  baran,  tx>a^  bu  ie^t  anfan^en  njurbeft"  is  not  elegant, 

247.  ®  e  r-,  ^  i  e-,  t>  a  0  J  e  n  t  g  e  is  generally  used  substan- 
tively followed  by  a  relative  clause  or  a  genitive.  Used  adjec- 
tively  it  stands  for  Der,  lite,  ta^  when  a  relative  clause  follows, 
e.g,y  tiejenigert  ^tn\6!}Zn,  metc^e  ♦  ♦  ♦  The  best  usage  accents 
^er,  tie,  t)a^.     Used  adjectively  it  has  only  medium  stress. 

Ex. :  2)ieient9en  ber  ^na^en,  tpeld^e  t^re  SIufgaBen  nic^t  gemad^t  fatten,  ntngten 
na(f^jt|en  (stay  after  school).    2ie^et  biejenigen,  n)elc^e  eud^  Derfolgen  (B.). 

248.  Der-,  bie-,  baffelBe  denotes  identity.  It  refers 
to  something  known  or  mentioned.  It  is  used  equally  well 
substantively  or  adjectively.  It  can  be  strengthened  by 
,,eben'':  ^it  aller  2;reue  cement)''  tc^  eure  ©aben;  Der  !Durftige  foil  ftd) 
Derfelben  erfreuen  (H.  and  D.  II.,  74-5). 

1.  2)er  ncintlic^e  also  denotes  identity,  but  is  not  written  as  one  word. 
;r2)erfelM9e"  is  rarer  than  berfelk.  2Bar  basS  ntc^t  ber  ©ienjlmann  (porter), ber 
bie  5lu^manberer  l^etrogen  ^at  ?    2)er  namlt(^e. 

2.  ©cll^tg  without  ber  is  rare,  e.g.,  (Selbige^  tt>eig  t^  getotg  (Heyse). 

249.  ©elB,  feUer,  felBft  distinguishes  one  object  from 
another.  It  strengthens  personal  and  reflexive  pronouns.  It 
is  made  einphatic  by  eben,  also  in  the  phrase  ein(er)  unt)  l^erfelbe* 
(Selber  and  felbft  do  not  differ  in  meaning,  but  in  use.    ©elfcer  is 


251]  SYNTAX  OF  THE   I:N^TERR0GATIVE  PROi^OU:^^.  91 

never  made  an  adverb  as  fe(6|l  is.  (BelBer  always  follows  the 
word  it  qualifies,  though  it  need  not  stand  necessarily  directly 
after  it:  3t%  f^I^^^  or  felbft  ^ah  il)n  gefe^en*  SBer  ameifelt  5^atl)an, 
la^  ik  nidJt  (see  309,  2)  i:ie  e^^rltd^feit,  t)ie  ®ro§mut  felber  fein  ? 
(Le.)    2Cer  an^txn  eine  (^ruBe  grabt,  fdllt  \db\t  ^inetn  (Prov.). 

1.  ©elbfl  lias  become  also  an  adverb  with  the  force  of  «fogar»"  and  then 
stands  best  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  unaccented :  <Bdbft  ein  [o 
|immlif(|e^  ^aax  (viz.,  Psyche  and  Amor)  fanb  nad^  ber  S5erMnbung  ftc^  ungleic^ 
(G.). 

2.  Notice  the  compounds  bafel&jl,  ^te(r)felbjl,  in  that  or  this  very  place  ; 
also  the  force  of  „i)on  [elbft"  in  :  T)k  SHii^le  ge^t  nid)t  i)on  felb|l  (of  its  own 
accord). 

For  felb  with  ordinals  see  229.  Alone  it  is  very  rare,  e.  g.,  Xot\\  er  in 
fel6em  (im  ^^ala'fte)  aUe  urn  jt^  i?erfammelt  ^atte  (Le.). 

250.  (Sold)  means  +  "  such."  It  describes  what  is  pointed 
out.  It  is  used  adjectively  and  substantively :  $i(freidje  ^^d^te ! 
einen  [oli^en  (2Ceg)  ^etgt  mir  an,  ten  id)  ^ermag  ^u  gel)en  (Sch.).  2Bo 
tr>ar  tie  UBerle^ung,  aU  n?ir  ♦  ♦  ♦  folc^e  ^Kac^t  gelegt  in  fol4e  ^anD 

(id.). 

1.  The  use  of  folc^  for  the  personal  pronoun  or  ber-,  bte-,  baffelk  is  not 
good  although  found  now  and  then  in  the  classics,  e.  g.,  %l^  fte  hit  SSWoo^^^ 
littte  erreic^ten;  fanben  fie  [ol(^e  auf  ba^  luftigfle  (see  300,  2)  au^gefc^miicft  (G.). 

2.  For  fold^  etn,  fo  ein  is  a  frequent  equivalent.  It  is  more  common  in 
the  spoken  language  than  folc^  ein.  Lessing  and  Goethe  are  very  fond  of 
it,  e.g,y  ©0  ein  ^ic^ter  ift  ®^a!fpere  unb  (S^affpere  faft  ganj  aflein  (Le.).  3c^ 
fann  ntid^  nid^t,  xok  fo  ein  SBort^elb,  fo  ein  2;u9enbfd^wd^er,  an  meinem  SBitten  xoax^ 
mtn  unb  (?3eban!en  (Sch.). 

„<Sd  ettt"  does  not  come  from  ,,\^\^  ein,"  but  from  ein  fo  before  adjective  and  noun : 
„ein  fo  ^t>^x  %\xx\n"—  „fo  ein  ^Dt)er  Sturm,"  then  „jo  etn  ^urm." 

Syntax  of  the  Interrogative  Pronoun. 

251.  2Ber,  +  "who/'  "which/'  and  ma^,  +  "what/'  are 
used  substantively  only:  2Sa^  fiimmert  e^  Me  ^Wm,  ter  man  tie 
3ungen  rauibt,in  tt>effen  2Balte  fie  briiflt  (Le.).     5^un,  n?en  lieBen  imi 


92  SYNTAX   OF  THE   IKTERROGATIVE   PROJ^TOUi^.         [253- 

i?on  m6>  am  meiften  (irL)o    SBa^  ijl  Uv  langen  dim  fuqer  @inn  ? 
(ScL). 

1.  Once  the  genitive  after  mer  and  toa^  was  common.  2Ber  is  almost 
entirely  supplanted  by  welc^er,  and  wa^  by  wao  fiir  ein«  But  xoa^  +  geni- 
tive, which  generally  looks  like  an  accusative,  still  remains  in  phrases 
like  )S$a^  2Bunber(^)  (Le.).  2Ba^  be^  Z^nftU,  2Bae  ^enfer^*  SBa^  i)l  SScibc^ 
bort  am  gritnen  SDalbe  (G.)-    See  181, 188. 

2.  3Bem  only  refers  to  persons.  Wiien  it  refers  to  things  or  whole 
sentences  n)o(r)  +  preposition  is  substituted.  2Boju  ber  ^dxm  ?  (F.  1322). 
SBoran  erfennjl  bu  ben  !Dteb,    2Bor  before  a  vowel,  tt)0  before  a  consonant. 

3.  In  the  spoken  language  „toa^"  is  preceded  by  a  preposition  that 
does  not  govern  the  accusative :  ju  voa^,  mit  tt)a^;  but  womit,  moju  are  pref- 
erable. The  classics  have  it  too.  Even  fur  toa^,  um  toa^,  t>ur(|  toa^  are 
supplanted  by  mofiir,  tvorum,  njoburcb*  3vi  toa^  ble  5^offe  ?  (G.)  5D^tt  iva^ 
!ann  ic^  aufwarten  ? 

4.  SSa^  in  the  sense  of  raarum  and  tr>te  is  originally  an  absolute  accusa- 
tive, e.  g.,  3Ba^  jle^t  t^r  unb  te^t  bie  ^cinbe  in  (=  in  ben)  ©d^op  (Scb.).  2Ba^ 
«?irb  ba^  ^erj  bir  fc^n?er  (P.  2720). 

5.  Mark  the  interrogative  adverbs :  n)0,  +  where ;  toam,  +  when  ; 
tt)te,  +  how ;  n?o(r)-  with  preposition ;  waruntf  +  wherefore,  +  why,  only 
interrogative.     For  their  etymology  see  551. 

252.  S3  e  I  d)  means  -f  "  which  "  and  singles  out  the  indi- 
vidual, though  etymologically  it  inquires  after  the  quality. 
It  stands  adjectively  and  substantively:  Unb  trelc^er  i\V^,  t)m  W 
am  meiflen  Uebft?  (Sch.).     S3e(c^e^  Unge^eure  ftnnet  i6r  mir  an^ 

(id.). 

In  exclamatory  sentences  welc^  is  originally  interrogative,  often  fol- 
lowed by  ein  :  2Be(d)  ein  Subein,  welc^  ein  ©ingen  tvtrb  in  unferm  ^aufe  fcin ! 
(Song).     See  F.  742. 

253.  ^Ba^fitr,  ma^  fitrein  inquires  after  the  nature 
and  qualities  of  a  person  or  thing,  ^a^  fiir  always  stands 
adjectively,  Yoa^  fiir  nn  adjectively  and  substantively.  2Ca^  is 
separable  from  fiir  ein.  Lessing  is  particularly  fond  of  this 
separation.     2Ca^  fiir  stands  before  the  singular  of  a  noun 


256]       SYNTAX  OF  THE  EELATIYE  PKOKOUN^S.        93 

denoting  material  and  before  a  collective  noun;  before  the 
plural  of  any  noun.  2Ba^  fvir  ein  inquires  also  after  an  indi- 
vidual. 

Ex. :  2Ba^  fitr  SBein  ijl  bici^  ?  2Baa  fur  SSerge  ♦  ♦  ♦  trennen  utt^  benn  no(^  ? 
(Le.).    2Ba^  in  ^a^lon  id)  bir  fur  einen  fc^onen  <5toff  gefauft  (id.). 

Syntax  of  the  Relative  Pronouns. 

254.  There  being  no  original  relative  pronouns,  the  other  pronouns  were  used  as 
such  or  conjunctions  like  so,  dar,  da,  unde  (see  below)  connected  coordinate  sentences, 
one  of  which  later  became  subordinate.  The  first  pronoun  used  as  a  relative  was  ber, 
bie,  ba§,  in  O.  H,  G.  aSel^er,  irei",  toaS  developed  into  relative  pronouns  gradually.  First 
they  were  made  indefinite  pronouns  by  means  of  the  particle  so,  O.  H.  G.  so  hwelich{so), 
so  hwer{so)^  so  hwas(so)  >TVl.  H.  G.  swelich^  swer^  swas  —  whosoever,  whatsoever  > 
N.  H.  G.  wcW)er,  wer,  waS,  which  can  be  strengthened  by  nur,  <x^x^,  tmmer  (=  ever).  To 
say  therefore  that  the  interrogative  is  used  as  the  relative  is  hardly  correct,  though,  no 
doubt,  the  indirect  question  had  its  influence  in  the  coincidence  of  the  forms  of  the 
interrogative  and  indefinite  relative  pronouns.  The  demonstrative  bcv,  fctc,  \i(x^  intro- 
duced the  coordinate  clause,  which  afterwards  became  subordinate;  and  clause  and 
pronoun  were  then  called  relative.    aSclcl^er  is  only  of  the  16th  century. 

255.  T)  e  r  and  n?  e  I  cb  e  r  are  equivalent.  After  personal 
pronouns  ^er  is  preferable.  Euphony  should  decide  which  is 
to  be  used.  CEin  grauen^immer,  tao  unit,  ift  ef^en  fo  eM  aU  tin 
SJlaun,  kr  fid)  fd)mtn!t  (Le.).  2l>elc^er  is  preferable  after  tier^ 
jenige.  The  following  sentence  is  bad  :  2:ie,  tie  t)ie  WiUiizx  Der 
^tttt)er  tt?ar;  ift  geftorkn. 

1.  Of  the  four  relatives  ber,  meld)-;  ttjer,  wa^  only  tt)  e  I  d)-  can  also  be 
used  adjectively,  the  other  three  only  substantively.  The  genitive  of 
ber,  bie,  ba^  is  always  beffen,  berett;  sg.  and  pi.,  never  berev.  Ex.:  2Ber  fern 
®efe^  ac^tet,  ift  eben  [o  mac^ttg  aU  xotx  fein  ®efe^  |at  (Le.)  5lm  SJJontag,  an 
njeld^em  2:a9e  Xoxx  aheijlen  .  .  ♦    But  this  is  not  very  elegant. 

256.  S)er  and  irelcber  will  take  any  antecedent  soever. 
But  trer,  ma^,  having  sprung  from  indefinite  and  compounded 
pronouns,  require  none,  ^er  admits  of  no  antecedent  at  all ; 
ira^  may  have  any  other  neuter  pronoun,  an  adjective  (pref- 
erably in  the  superlative),  or  a  whole  clause,  e.  g. ,  %ixv  ttja^ 
trein  ge^t  Uttt>  ni^t  t^rein  (in^  ©e^irn)  ge^t,  dn  priic^ti^  SGort  au 


94  SYKTAX  OF  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUl^S.  [257- 

tienftett  fle^t  (F.  1952-3).  SlEe^  m^  ift,  ift  ternunftig  (Hegel). 
SSa^  tu  erer6t  ijon  tieinen  Satern  6aft,  emirb  e^  urn  e^  3U  Befi^en  (F. 
682-3).  I)em  §errlid^ften,  tt»a^  au(^  Der  ®eifl  empfangen,  t)rdngt 
immer  fremD  un^  Kemper  (Stoff  fid)  an  (F.  634-5). 

1.  dxt  ttjer;  ber  3J?antt  t»er;  ber,  mx  are  impossible.  But  Goethe  has  (in 
the**  Walpurgisnacht'^),  F.  3964:  <Bo  ®|re  bem,  n)em  S^re  gebit^rt.  The 
proverb  says :  „(£^re,bem  S^re  geM^rt,"  the  Bible  „(£^tc,bem  bie  ©:^re  gc^bii^rt." 

2.  SBaO  referring  to  a  substantive  and  n?e((^e^  referring  to  a  whole 
clause  are  not  present  usage,  though  the  classics  use  them  so.  '£)k  Sllten 
fannten  ha^  1>'m^  nic^tr  roa^  mir  ^opc^fett  nennen  (Le.).  SiJon  fritter  Sugenb  an 
^atte  mir  unb  meiner  (Sc^mejler  ber  Skater  felbjl  tm  Slanjcn  Unterri(^t  gegekn,  weld^e^ 
einen  fo  crnjl^aften  3)lann  munberlic^  genug  ^atte  fleiben  foEen  (G.). 

3.  If  mx  has  a  seeming  antecedent  the  latter  stands  after  the  clause. 
The  antecedent  is  nothing  but  the  subject  of  the  main  clause  repeated 
for  emphasis  in  the  shape  of  another  pronoun.  If,  however,  trer  and  its 
seeming  antecedent  do  not  stand  in  the  same  case,  the  latter  is  indis- 
pensable. Ex. :  2Ber  ^ec^  angreift  befubelt  ftd)  (Prov.).  2Ber  iiber  gemiffe  ^inge 
ben  S^erftanb  ni(5^t  uerliert,  ber  ^at  feinen  ju  ijerlieren  (Le.).  233er  ijiele^  hingt,  njirb 
ntanc^em  etwa^  Bringen  (F.  97).  But  2Ber  ein  5D^al  litott,  bem  glauBtntan  ntc^t 
nnb  ivenn  er  an($  bie  SBa'^r^^ett  fpric^t  (Prov.).  2Ber  ha  )^a\,  bem  tvirb  gegeBen  (B.). 
The  same  is  true  of  xt>a§> :  2Ba^  man  nic^t  wei§,  ha^  eBen  brauc^te  man  unb  roa^ 
man  n)ei§r  !ann  man  nic^t  l^rauc^en  (F.  1066-7).  %xn1^  ubt  jtd^r  n^a^  ein  3)?eijler 
hjcrben  toiU  (Sch.).     For  the  gender  in  this  illustration  see  168. 

4.  The  old  short  form  n^e^  is  now  archaic  except  in  tot^'^al'b,  tot^^ 
tt)  e  g  e  n  :  SSe^  S3rot  ic^  t[ft,  be^  Sieb  i^  ftnge  (Prov.). 

257.  If  the  dative  and  accusative,  governed  by  a  preposi- 
tion, do  not  refer  to  a  person,  too,  now  rarely  la,  with  that 
preposition,  are  generally  substituted  :  ^x&it^  ift  B^f^^l;  am 
tt^eni^ften  t)a^,  too^on  bie  3l6ft(^t  fo  Uax  in  ^ie  ^uc^m  leud^tct  (Le.). 

1.  Bo,  the  oldest  relative  conjunction,  has  now  been  crowded  out  from 
the  spoken  language,  though  it  was  very  common  in  the  16th  and  17th 
centuries:  2)ie  Unfe  ^anb,  ha^u  ba^  ^aupt,  fo  er  i^m  a^gei^auen (Uh.).  35 on 
aUen,  fo  t>a  famen  (Bii.). 

258.  The  relative  adverbs  to  o,  "  where  "  and  b  a  (colloqui- 


261]  SYNTAX   OF  THE  Ii^DEFI]S"ITE   PROIS'OUiq^S.  95 

ally);  ^ a,  mann,  rotnrtf  tr)  o,  "when";  tr>ie,  "as"  take  the 
place  of  a  relative  pronoun  governed  by  a  preposition  when 
they  refer  to  nouns  denoting  time,  place,  and  manner. 

Ex. :  ^ennjl  bu  ba^  2anh  too  hk  Sitroneu  Blii^n  ?  (G.).  ^^  9IM  tm  2)ienf^en* 
lekn  ^lugenblicfe,  too  er  bem  SBeltgeijl  nd:^er  ifl  al^  fonj^  (Scli.).  Sn  biefem  Slugen* 
bU(fe,  ba  mir  reben,  Ijl  fern  ^^^ra'un  me^r  in  ber  ©c^tveijer  Sanbe  (id.).  «X)ie  Strt 
unb  2Bctfc  mie,"  *'  the  manner  in  which."  (/rSie"  is  more  forcil)le  than  ^iii 
tt)ct(^cr.'")    D  fc^oner  %a^,  totm  cnbUd^  bcr  ©olbat  in^  Seben  ^eimfc^rt  (Sch.). 

1.  This  construction  is  old  only  with  the  demonstmtive  adverbs  used 
as  relatives,  viz.,  da^  ddr^  danne.     5llltt)0#  aUba/  tt)ofelb}l  are  archaic 

Syntax  of  the  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

259.  S  i  n  and  e  i  n  i  g  e  can  precede  a  numeral  generally  fol- 
lowed by  a  noun.  They  mean  "some,"  "or  so,"  "odd":  tin 
a6t  Sage,  a  week  or  so;  einige  ^lerjig  3^^^/  forty  odd  years. 
The  order  may  also  be:  „ein  3^^^  funf^e^n/' 

1.  Grimm  thinks  this  phrase  has  lost  Moberr"  as  if  it  meant  etnen  %<x^ 
ober  je^n,  eln  Sa^r  ober  fiintV^n.  No  doubt  MCtntge  ^ierjig  3a|r''  has  lost 
„uttb"  and  stands  for  einige  unb  ^terjig  Sa^r,  forty  (and)  odd  years. 

260.  Sin,  etma^,  tva^,  wer,  iemant*,  njelc^e,  etnigc 
can  be  strengthened  by  trgenl?  (compounded  of  io  +  hwar  and 
gin  =  "ever,"  "where,"  "you  please,"  ^m  corresponding  to 
L.  -cun).  For  the  origin  of  tv>a^,  mv,  njel(^,  see  254.  51^,  n?enn 
iit  etma^  auf  I^icft  fonnte!  "  if  I  could  influence  you  at  all  (F. 
3423).  3Ba^  anter^  fuc^e  ju  Beginnen  (F.  1383).  £)te  3^9^  ift  to^ 
immer  wa^  uriD  tint  5lrt  ^on  ^rieg  (G.).  ipier  ftnt)  ,^irfd)en  au  »er;^ 
taufen.  SBillfl  tu  n?el(^e?    §aft  bu  irgent)  ma^  ^erloren? 

1.  They  stand  generally  only  in  the  nominative  and  accusative.  (Sinig 
is  rare  in  the  singular,  and  for  it  ivgenb  cin  is  better  used. 

261.  '21 1  (-.  The  following  examples  show  the  many  vari- 
ous forms  of  aa-  :  att  t)a^  ®elD,  aU  U^  ®efce^,  aM  ta^  ®elb,  m^ 
M  u^  alle^  ? 


96  SYNTAX   OF  THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  [262- 

1.  5J^tte  stood  iu  M.  H.  G.  only  after  prepositions  as  still  dow,  e.  g.,  ^tx 
alle  bem,  "withal."  Mix  ivirb  ijon  aEe  bem  fo  bumm  (F.  1946).  The  form  atte 
before  the  article  aud  not  preceded  by  a  preposition,  though  very  com- 
mon in  the  classics  and  in  the  spoken  language,  is  not  so  good  as  aU  or 
all  with  strong  endings,  e.g.^  Wi  ber  (s5c^merj  (G.).  ^^IH  or  aKe  in  such 
phrases  as  ber  SQein  i)l  oSi,  "  there  is  no  more  wine,"  has  hardly  been  satis- 
factorily explained  yet. 

2.  Notice  the  following  meanings  ;  Side  ^tunben  einen  J^eeloffel  »oII,  "  a 
teaspoon  full  every  hour."  The  singular  in  the  sense  of  ''every  "is 
rarer,  auf  alien  %oM,  in  every  case,  filler  3lnfang  ijl  fd)roer  (Prov.).  SlEe^ 
©ing  n?a^rt  feme  ^z\t,  ®otte^  £tel)  in  (Smigfeit  (Hymn).  The  singular  in 
the  sense  of  Eng.  "  all "  is  archaic,  alien  ©inter  (Logau,  quoted  in  Grimm's 
Diet.),  all  winter.  For  all  day,  all  night,  we  say  best  bie  a^nx^-it  ^o.&jX,  ben 
ganjen  Slag.    Notice  also  in  aller  %x\x^,  "  very  early,"  in  aEer  ©tillCf  in  alle  SBelt 

3.  The  plural  of  jeber,  iebmcber,  jeglic^er  is  rare.  It  is  expressed  by  ,,alle»^ 
Even  the  singular  of  the  last  two  is  now  archaic  and  rare. 

262.  ^  a  n  c^  e  r  does  not  differ  from  the  Eng.  "  many  "  in 
use  and  force.  Compare  txxx  manner;  manc6  einer,  mand)er  gute 
?[Rann,  mant^  tin  guter  SKann,  manege  fd)bne  Slume. 

263.  3?  i  e  I  and  m  e  n  i  9,  denoting  the  individual  and  used 
substantively  denoting  persons,  must  be  inflected  ;  if  they 
denote  an  indefinite  number,  quantity,  mass,  they  are  gener- 
ally uninflected.  T^enn  ^iele  fint)  berufett,  akr  tt^entge  finb  auUx^ 
iVii^Iet  (B.).  5>iel  no^  %a\i  tu  ijon  mtr  ^u  l)oren  (Sch.).  ^va^x  mei^ 
\6ij  X)iel,  tod)  mbd)te  i(^  alle^  n^iffen  (F.  601).  (£^5  ftutiercn  i>iel  toeri;^ 
faner  in  £)eutf*Iant)* 

1.  S5ielerr  -e,  -e$  denotes  "various  sorts,"  e.g.,  vteler  2Bein;  in  composi- 
tion   ijielerlei  SSein,     '*many  kinds  of  wine." 

A  fuller  treatment  of  the  large  number  of  indefinite  pronouns  and  numerals  belongs 
rather  to  the  Dictionary. 


265]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VEEB.  97 

SYNTAX   OF   THE   VERB. 
Classification   of  Verbs. 

264.  According  to  meaning  and  construction  the  verbs 
may  be  variously  divided :  1,  into  independent  verbs;  2,  into 
tlie  small  class  of  tense  auxiliaries  and  the  modal  auxiliaries. 
See  267.  Again:  1,  mio personal  verbs,  which  can  have  any 
person,  the  1.,  2.,  or  S.,  as  subject;  %  into  impersonal  verbs, 
which  have  the  indefinite  subject  z^,  „e^  recjtiet."     See  236. 

The  personal  verbs  again  divide:  1,  into  neuter  or  subjective 
verbs,  as  ^ie  (^onne  fcbeint  (see  179);  2,  transitive  or  objective 
verbs,  the  direct  object  of  which  stands  in  the  accusative 
(transitive  proper,  see  198)  or  in  the  genitive  or  dative 
(called  also  in  trans.,  see  184,  190). 

As  subdivisions  of  transitive  verbs  may  be  regarded:  1,  the 
reflexive  verbs;  2,  the  causative. 

The  reflexives  again:  1,  into  reflexives  proper,  which  occur 
only  as  reflexives,  e.g.,  ft(^  gramen,  to  pine;  fid)  erBarmen,  to  feel 
pity;  2,  into  both  transitive  and  intransitive  verbs  used  re- 
flexively,  e.  g.,  ft(%  it>afcben,  ftcfe  ijereinen,  fid)  tot  laden* 

The  pronoun  is  always  in  the  accusative,  but  see  197. 

1.  Transitive  verbs  have  often  intransitive  or  neuter  force,  but  there 
can  be  no  direct  object  then.  'Da^  3)ferb  jie|t  ben  SBagcn,  but  !Die  3Bolfcn 
jie^en  am  ^immel.  Personal  verbs  can  also  be  used  without  a  logical  sub- 
ject :  ^a$  SBaffer  raufc^t,  but  (£i3  rauf^t  m  9^o|re.  Also  the  modal  auxilia- 
ries occur  still  as  independent  verbs ;  fBa^  foil  ba^  ?  but  SBo^in  foU  ber 
■Die^  gefluc^tet  fein  ?    See  267. 

Syntax  of  the  Auxiliaries. 
I.    §aBen  and  fein. 

265.  S)  a^tn  forms  the  compound  tenses,  active  voice: 

1.  Of  all  transitive  verbs  :  i(^  l)abt  getragen,  i^  ^aU  Bet)edt,  i$ 
^ak  angeflagt. 


98  SYNTAX   OF  THE  VERB — AUXILIARIES.  [266^ 

2.  Of  the  modal  auxiliaries,  of  reflexive  and  impersonal 
verbs  proper.  Sr  ^at  ei3  nic^t  gemoi^t,  ^at  fidj  gemaf^en,  ew  hat 
geregnet,  e^  ^at  mi6:i  gereut 

3.  Of  intransitive  verbs  which  have  no  direct  object,  at  most 
the  object  in  the  G.  or  D.  Sr  l^attt  mm  gefpottet,  er  ^at  nitr 
gefc^ai^et,  er  ^atte  gelad)t,  gemeint,  gefc^Iafen* 

4.  Of  (intransitive)  verbs  of  motion  when  the  mere  action 
within  a  certain  space,  the  effort,  and  its  extent  are  to  be 
emphasized,  without  reference  to  direction,  point  of  depar- 
ture or  destination.  31.  ^on  ipumBoltt  l)at  ^iel  geretft,  =  was  a 
great  traveler.  T)er  (Stallfnedjt  l)at  eine  (Btun^e  ^in  unt)  ^er  gerttten* 
^r  ^atte  in  SBien  je^n  3^^^^  gefa^ren  (Le.).  T)a^  Samm^en  ^at 
geppft,  t)er  gtfc^  l)at  gefd^mommen.  Da^  ^(eine  (the  little  one)  ^at 
Ttoc^  ttie  gegangen  (has  never  walked).  (Sophie  l)at  geflettert  unt) 
fi(^  Die  (S^iir^e  ^erriffen.  Der  ©c^nelllaufer  ^at  fc^on  Idngft  gelaufen 
(finished  running  long  ago).  Good  usage  favors:  Die  Ubr  1:)at 
cinmal  gegangen,  aBer  {e^t  fte^t  fte  ftid.  Tie  5i}tii^(e,  Me  9Jlaf^ine,  Da5 
3flar)  l^at  gegangen,  but  ift  is  frequently  used. 

5.  Of  ft^cn,  fte^en,  liegen,  anfangen,  beginnen,  anf^oren.  But  in 
S.  G.  fcin  is  more  common  and  it  is  also  found  in  the  classics. 
fflSo  ^aU  i^r  gefej^en,  gej^anten  ?     3Cann  i^at  Die  (BMt  angefangen  ? 

266.     S  cin  forms  the  compound  tenses : 

1.  Of  all  verbs  of  motion,  except  some,  which  take  i^aUn, 
when  action  simply  is  denoted.  See  265,  4.  These  take  fein 
when  the  direction,  points  of  departure,  destination  and  ar- 
rival are  mentioned.  These  circumstances  are  often  expressed 
by  inseparable  and  separable  prefixes  in  compound  verbs. 
Ex.  :  „Der  ?0^ai  ift  gefommen."  (Er  n?irD  gefallen  fein,  =  he  proba- 
bly fell.  2Csir  finD  fcfcncd  ^inaBgeftiegen.  £)ie  (Seefa^rer  finD  anf  Der 
3nfel  (B^t  gelanDet.  Xie  (Storc^e  ftnD  na6)i  @iiDen  geaogen.  Xer 
(Btattlnec^t  i^  in  einer  (StnnDe  :^in  unD  ^er  geritten,  ==  he  rode  to  a 
certain  place  (there)  and  back.  "Lit  geinDe  finD  entflo^en,  ent^^ 
laufen,  eingetroffen.    ffiir  finD  fd)on  me^rerc  Tlak  nmgejogen  (moved). 


267]  SYKTAX  OF  THE  VERB — AUXILIARIES.  99 

2.  Of  certain  verbs  denoting  a  springing  into  being  or  pass- 
ing away,  a  transition  and  development,  growth  and  decay, 
often  expressed  by  er-,  ^er-,  jer-,  and  separable  prefixes.  S^ie 
^il&l  ift  gefroren  «  gefrteren,  but  e^  Ut  gefroren  <  frieren,  there 
was  a  frost).  S)a^  ®eit  ift  gerrlffen.  2)er  (B&jim  ift  gefd)moIaen» 
„l:er  SruDer  ware  ni^t  geftorkn.''  "La^  SSaumi^en  ift  geti?ad)fen*  Xie 
rcid^en  SLcntt  fint)  im  ^riege  ^erarmt.  "La^  Sidjt  ift  erlofd^en.  'Die 
6(^a(e  ift  gefprungen  (cracked).  Xer  2eWing  mar  eingefc^lafen  (had 
fallen  asleep).  In  the  compound  verbs  it  is  just  this  prefix 
that  called  for  fein*  Compare  trinten  —  ertrinfen,  fd)einen  —  er^; 
fdjeinen,  toa6:im  —  ern^aien,  |ungern  —  ^erl)ungertt,  frieren  —  erfrieren* 

3.  Of  feitt,  Heiben,  begegtten,  folgen,  gelingen,  gefcbe^en,  gliicfcn,  for 
which  it  is  hard  to  account  by  meaning,  but  see  283,  2.  Ex.: 
(£^  ift  i^m  ttid>t  getungen,  gegliicft*  Da^  ift  fcbon  atle^  tiagetvefen* 
(iin  fiiper  3:roft  ift  ii:)m  geMieben  (Sch.). 

4.  ^aten  has  gained  upon  fciu  in  German,  but  not  so  mucli  as  English  "  to  have  "  upon 
"  to  be."  SoI{5crt  and  Oc^ccjncn  were  once  generally  compounded  with  I^aBcn.  Also  the  ten- 
dency to  use  intransitive  verbs  as  trausitives,  so  strong  in  Eng.,  has  increased  in  Ger- 
man. While  in  Eng.  one  can  "  run  "  a  locomotive,  a  sewing  machine,  a  train,  a  ship, 
in  German  fu:^ren,  leiten,  in  ®anv3  tringen,  gebrauc^en,  or  the  verb  of  motion  +  laften  or 
mad)en,  will  have  to  be  used.  ®er  ^utfi^ev  f)at  un§  fd^nell  gefal^reit.  ®er  ^JoftiUiou  ^at  ben 
SBageu  ijorgefal)reit.    3)2an  fonnte  tie  ^euerfprft^e  nt(J;t  in  ®ang  Bringen. 

5.  The  difficulty  as  to  the  use  of  ^aBen  and  fein  lies  after  all  mainly  in  the  way  in 
which  a  verb  is  used,  transitively  or  intransitively,  and  in  the  meaning.  The  student 
should  attend  particularly  to  these  points  and  not  be  too  timid,  as  in  many  cases  usage 
is  by  no  means  settled. 

As  to  the  omission  of  ^aBen  and  fetn  in  dependent  clauses,  see  346. 

II.    Special  Uses  of  the  Modal  Auxiliaries. 

This  subject  belongs  really  rather  to  the  Dictionary,  but  the  appreciation  and  trans- 
?ation  of  these  verbs  is  so  difficult  that  a  brief  treatment  of  them  is  given  here. 

267.  1.  ^  6  n  n  e  n  denotes  ability  ;  T)cx  i^tfc^  !antt  f(^n)immett.  |>ter  j!e'^^ 
id),  i^  !antt  ni^t  anhtxQ  (Lu.).  Possibihty  :  S'^r  fonntet  i^r  SBerfjeug  fein,  mic^ 
ill  ba^  ®atn  jujte^en  (Sch.).  Knowledge,  '*  to  know  how,"  its  oldest  mean- 
ing: ^am\i  bu  Stalie'nifc^?  Compare  fonnen,  "to  have  learnt,"  then  "to 
be  able"  ;  fennen  (<  kanjan,  causative  of  fann — fonnen),  **to  be  acquainted 
with"  ;  miffen,  "to  know." 

2.  ©  it  r  fen  denotes  :  1.  Permission  and  authorization  :  ^u  barfjl  au^ 


100        SYNTAX   OP  THE  VERB — MODAL  AUXILIARIES.        [267- 

ba  nur  frei  erfc^einen  (F.  336).  D^ne  Sagbfc^ein  barf  nicmanb  aiif  bie  ^agb  ge^n* 
2.  "  To  have  occasion  to,"  "  reason  for,"  "  need  '* :  3)?an  barf  ben  @d)luffel 
nur  jtt)ei  Wlal  umbret)eit  unb  ber  Spiegel  fpringt  juriicf,  "You  need  ..."  X)u 
barffl  l)inau^ge^en,  bie  Suft  ifl  ^ier  feljjr  [c^led)t,  "  You  have  good  reason  to  gc 
out.  .  ."  This  force  is  the  oldest,  but  rather  rare  now.  3.  **  To  trust 
one's  self  to" :  2Bev  barf  tjn  nennen  unb  mx  kfennen:  3c^  glaub  i^n  (®ott)  (F. 
3433-5).  This  force  has  sprung  from  1  and  2  and  from  the  verb  tar  — 
tiirren  +  dare,  whose  meaning  was  embodied  in  barf  —  burfc:u  On  the 
other  hand,  it  has  nearly  given  up  the  original  force  of  "  need,"  '*  want," 
still  apparent  in  2,  to  its  compound  bebiirfen.  In  some  editions  of  the 
Bible  biirfettf  *'  to  want,"  and  lar  —  tiirren,  "  to  dare,"  are  still  the  rule.  In 
later  editions  l^eburfen  and  burfen  have  been  substituted  for  them.  4.  The 
preterit  subjunctive  (potential,  see  284,  3)  bitrfte  is  used  for  a  mild  asser- 
tion :  T)k  5^a(^n?elt  bitrfte  Scbcnfen  tragen,  biefee  Urtcil  ju  untcrfd)rclben  (Sch.), 
*'  Posterity  very  likely  will  ..."  T)(i^  bitrfte  ju  fpat  fein,  "  I  fear  very 
much,  that  is  too  late."  Etiquette  admits  such  redundant  phrases  as  : 
2)urfte  or  barf  id)  mir  eriauben,  etc. 

3.  5)J  D  5  c  n  denotes  :  1.  In  its  oldest,  but  now  rare  sense  except  in  dia^ 
lect,  "  ability  "  and  **  jiower."  This  it  has  given  up  to  „fonncn."  Compare 
its  cognates  "  may"  and  "can"  in  Eng.:  3|r  SfnbM  gibt  ben  Sngein  <Star!ef 
tt>enn  feiner  ftc  ergritnben  mag,  (F.  247-8),  "  although  no  one  is  able  ..." 
2.  Concession,  no  interference  on  the  part  of  the  speaker  :  S)cr  93urf(^e 
ma(i  m^  ^aufe  ge^n  (It  lies  with  him,  I  have  no  objection),  SBer  mix  ben 
Seeder  !ann  njteber  jeigcn,  er  ntag  i:^n  be^alten  (Sch.).  3.  Possibility,  the  action 
does  not  concern  or  influence  the  speaker  ;  fonnen  means  a  possibility  that 
lies  in  the  ability  of  another  person  or  object.  255a^  fitr  ©ritnrocE^  mogen 
baC  fcin  (Sch.).  Sr  mag  bae>  o^i^a^t  ^aben,  er  ntag  ba§  t:^un,  It  is  possible  he 
said  so,  he  may  do  it.  T)a^  Zkx  mag  jie()n  3abre  alt  fein*  With  this  force 
it  supplants  the  potential  and  concessive  subjunctives  ;  if  it  stands  itself 
in  the  subjunctive  of  the  present  or  preterit,  it  supplants  also  the  opta- 
tive subjunctive.  S(^  tt)unfc^e  ha^  bie  ganje  SSelt  un^  ^oren  mag,  ^oxm  moge, 
9)loc^te  and)  bod^  bie  ganje  Sett  un^  ^oren  (Le.).  4.  From  2  springs  the  force 
of  "  inclination,"  "  liking,"  "  wishing."  2Ba^  ftc^  ijcrtragt  mit  nteiner  9)fli(^t/ 
mag  ic^  t^r  gern  gett)a^rcn  (Sch.).  3d}  moc^te,  bap  er  c^  md)t  mieber  erfit^re*  3c^ 
eJTe  tt>a^  id)  ntag  unb  letbe  toa^  id)  mujj  (Prov.). 

4.  9JJitff  en,  +  must,  denotes  :  1.  In  its  oldest  sense,  "  to  have  occa- 
sion, room,"  "to  be  one's  lot,"  *'it  is  the  case."  A  trace  of  this  is  left 
in  the  following  uses  :  5D^cin  §unb  n?ar  c^ne  SD^auIforb  l^inau^gelaufen,  5?un 
ntupte  and)  gerabe  ein  3?oUji'|l  ba^er  fomnten  (as  luck  would  have  it,  a  police- 


267]         SYNTAX   OF  THE  YERB — MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  101 

man  came  along),  ©er  Bufall  mu^te  i§n  grabe  ^in  I^ringen.  Bum  sweiten  Mai 
foil  mir  fcin  ^iaUi}  crfd)allen,  er  mit^te  benn  (unless  it  should)  kfonberu  Sinn 
kgriinben  (G.,  quoted  in  Sanders'  Diet.).  2.  Necessity  of  various  kinds  : 
Me  Si)lenfd)en  muffen  \kxbnu  2)er  Serine  mu§  fd)eiben  (Scli.).  ©in  Dkrl>aupt 
mu§  fein  (id.),  ^a^  muf  ein  fc^led)ter  TOUer  fein^  bem  niemal^  pel  ba^  SBanbern 
ein  (Song).  (£r  mu§  [e^r  !ranf  gewefen  fein;  cr  if!  no(^  fo  fc^n)a(^.  The  force 
of  biirfen  :  3d)  mu§  nic^t  ^crgeffen,  "  I  must  not  forget." 

93raudKi^  +  negative  generally  takes  the  place  of  muffeu  +  negative  when  it  denotes 
moral  necessity.  ©aS  trau^ft  bu  nid}t  ju  tf)un,  wenn  bu  nii^t  luiltft.  SSol^t  bem,  bei*  mit 
ber  neiicn  (3eit)  nicTjt  me^r  brau^t  ju  tc&en  (Sch.). 

5.  ©ollen,  +  shall,  denotes :   1.  Dutj  and  obligafioii.:  '®il  follfl  ^'c^tj^ 
beincn  ^ervn  liekn  ^on  ganjcm  |)crsem  i)on  ganger  ^eeirutfb  ^on  9a^:^e\n  ©cmtile" 
(B.),    1)u  Mtteil  ba  fcin  foHen,  You  ought  to  haVe  b«en»tlior^.y  «2^  Nec^-j  ; 
sity  and  destiny:   !Diefe   %uxd)i  foil  enbtgen!  t^r '^atipr  fdl'  fallen.' ' 'dd)Mlntl'  ' 
^^rieben  f)ab^n  (Sch.).    3^  mi^  nid)t  toa^  foU  e^  kbeuten  (Heine).    2Ba^  foil 
ba^  ?  What  (is  that)  for?     T)axin  foUte  er  ft(^  tanfc^en,  In  that  he  was  bound 
to  be  deceived,  disappointed.     8.  It  denotes  the  statement  and  claim  of 
another,  " is  to,"  " is  said  to"  :  'La^  3)?eter  foK  ac^t  2;^aler  fofien.     ©er  'Bdja^ 
ber  ?^il)elungen  foil  im  SfJ^eine  lic(^en,    (Siekn  Strciflinge  foUen  entfommen  fein.    4. 
(SoUte  approaches  the  force  of  the  conditional,  +  "  should."     ©oKte  er  nod) 
fommenr  fag^  i^m,  id)  ^dtte  nidu  Icinger  n^arten  fonnen*    (Sollte  er  and)  wo^^l  franf 
fein  ?  Is  it  possible  that  he  is  sick  ? 

6.  Swollen,  +  will,  denotes  :  1.  The  will  and  purpose  of  the  sub- 
ject. 2Ba^  njoUtejl  bu  mit  bem  Dolc^e  ?  fprtc^  (Sch.).  3d)  will  e^  n.>icber  ijergef^ 
fen,  voeil  ®ie  bod)  nic^t  tt)Dnen,i)a§  id)  e^  miffen  foil  (Q-.).  SBolle  nur  voa^  bu  fannfl 
nnb  bu  njirjl  fonncn  n?a^  bu  n?illfi,  2.  *'Tobe  about,"  "on  the  point  of." 
(Sin  armer  SBauer  tooUtt  |!erkn  (Mcolai).  (£^  mill  regnen.  Frequent  in  stage- 
directions,  „n)itt  gc^en,"  ,,tr>ill  abge^n."  SCBiE  ft($  |)ector  etrig  »on  mir  n?enben? 
(Sch.).  3.  The  claim  and  statement  of  another,  who  "says"  or  **  claims 
to  "  :  ©er  Beuge  xoiU  ben  STngeflagtcn  gefe^en  ^akn.  ©u  n?illft  i^n  ju  einem  guten 
BweiJe  Betrogen  ^abcn*  Notice  the  ambiguity  of  such  a  sentence  as  ©er  |)err 
toill  e^  get^an  ^akn,  *'  claims  he  did  it,"  or  according  to  1,  "wills  or  wishes 
that  it  be  done." 

SSolIen  is  really  the  most  difficult  to  understand  and  use.  It  occurs  in  a  great  many 
more  idioms  with  ever  varying  shades  of  meaning.  Notice,  e.  g.^  G§  witi  ycvlautcn,  "  it 
is  spread  abroad."  23a§  luitl  ba§  fagcn  ?  =  "What  does  that  amount  to?"  "that  is 
nothing."  3d)  iniU  e3  ni^t  gefeT)cn  ^aben,  I  will  act  as  if  I  had  not  seen  it  or  "nobody 
shall  see  it,"  according  to  1.  SSenn  ber  (Sd)ulcr  bod)  biefe  9JegeI  lerneii  wotlte,  "  if  he  only 
would  .  .  .  =  conditional.  STgoIIte  ©ott  ba^  .  .  .  ,  Avould  to  God  that  .  .  .  ®iefe  ^^ebev 
Witt  nid)t,  this  pen  does  not  write  (well).   But  it  is  impossible  to  give  all  these  meanings. 


102  SYNTAX   OF  THE  VEKB— PASSIVE   VOICE.  268- 

Still  Eng.  "  will  "  is  not  far  behind  the  German,  ©cllen  and  woUen  should  not  be  con- 
founded with  Eng.  "  shall "  and  '*  will "  of  the  future,  see  279,  3. 

7.  !2affen,  sometimes  classed  here,  is  really  a  causative  auxiliary 
and  Bever  used  as  such  without  an  inf.,  which  stands  as  a  further  object. 

^eine  ^lage  la§t  jte  fd^aEen  (Sch.).  Utt^erjuglic^  lie^  er  brei  23attcrien  aufracrfen 
(id.).  See  202,  1.  A  second  force  is  "  to  allow,"  *'  not  to  hinder."  !£)er 
©efangenn^cirter  lie^  ben  ©efangenen  entn)ifd)en»  iBaffen  ®ie  ha^  Meibcn  (=  to 
leave  a  thing  undone.    Saffcn,  to  look,  is  a  neuter  verb. 

For  laffen  +  reflexive,  see  272  ;   in  the  imperative,  see  287,  4. 

Remark.— Verbs  of  motion  can  be  omitted,  particularly  when  an  adverb  expresses 
tlve  (tirectiom  JEdCrfbu  mit  ?  ^(^  niu^  ^in.  ®a§  ^a(Je't  fcUte  fort  (ought  to  be  sent). 
^if  §ut  wu^'  in  Cie  0^aff;tel.  But  all  except  mttffen  and  biirfen  can  be  used  as  inde- 
per^ent  veTt)3r  i,  (?.,  no  ot'.ier  verb  need  be  supplied.  There  is  no  call  for  a  verb  in  2Sa8 
.  icU  ^er  i^ut?  (Scfi.),  "•,  W\i3t  .i3  tMs  hat  (here)  for  ?  Notice  that  fcllen,  mogen,  and  wotten 
are  really  the  only  ones  that  deserve  the  term  modal  auxiliaries,  since  they  assist  in 
expressing  the  mood.    See  287- 

THE   PASSIVE   VOICE. 

268.  The  active  voice  needs  no  comment.  Only  transitive 
verbs  form  a  complete  passive.  But  transitives  whose  mean- 
ing admits  only  of  an  object  of  the  thing,  also  in  transitives 
and  subjective  verbs,  form  only  the  third  person  singular 
with  the  grammatical  subject  e0  or  without  it.  3^nen  tt>irt) 
c|e!^oIfen*  @^  n?irt)  gelac^t  unt»  gefungen.  ©eftern  tt)urt)e  gefpielt» 
Set  un^  jtt  $aufe  (where  I  come  from)  toixl  ^iel  2S^ift  gefpieft* 

269.  In  the  transformation  of  the  active  into  the  passive 
voice,  the  direct  object  in  the  accusative  becomes  subject- 
nominative  and  the  former  subject  is  expressed  by  ijon  + 
dative  denoting  the  agent  and  by  bur(^  +  accusative  denot- 
ing means  and  instrument.  33aumgarten  erfd^Iug  ten  SBoIfen^ 
fc^iegen.  5B.  murbe  ^on  S»  erf(^lagen*  Vtv  23rtef  tr>urbe  t)urd^  einen 
I^ienftmann  beforgt  (through  a  porter).    See  prepositions,  304, 2. 

270.  When  a  verb  governs  two  accusatives  both  accusa- 
tives become  nominatives  with  the  verbs  of  naming,  calling, 
scolding.     Sr  murte  fein  greunb  genannt*    See  179,  2. 


273]  SYNTAX   OF  THE  VERB — PASSIVE  VOICE.  103 

1.  With  le^ren  and  fragen  the  accusative  of  the  thing  may  be  retained, 
particularly  if  that  accusative  he  a  pronoun,  e.  g.,  2)a^  (S(^limmfte,tx)a^  un^ 
iDiberfiSt^rt,  ba^  tuerben  tt)ir  »om  ZoiO,  gele^rt  (G.).  For  etti?a^  gele^rt  tt>erben  it  is 
better  to  use  unterric^tet  werben ;  for  etii>a^  Qcfragt  werben,  better  nad)  etma^ 
gefragt  merben*  The  accusative  of  the  noun  now  sounds  pedantic,  though 
le^ren  in  M.  H.  G.  always  retained  the  accusative  in  the  passive.  See 
202,  2. 

271.  With  a  verb  governing  an  accusative,  a  genitive,  or 
a  dative,  the  accusative  becomes  nominative  in  the  passive,  but 
the  genitive  and  dative  are  retained.  S).  xoux^t  ^e^  ^ot^i^errat^ 
angeflagt.  !Deiner  tt?urt)e  geDac^t  (no  grammatical  subject)  or  e^ 
XQWXU  beiner  getacbt*     5!Htr  tt^urre  gefolgt,  /was  followed. 

1.  The  verbs  fclgen,  l^elfen,  gc^ori^en,  fd)met(^eln,  wibcrjpre^^n,  banfen  often  form  a 
personal  passive  in  the  classics  and  in  the  spoken  language,  but  it  is  very  questionable 
whether  this  use  should  be  imitated  ;  certainly  not  by  foreigners  who  are  accustomed 
to  this  construction  in  their  own  language  and  are  apt  to  make  mistakes  in  the  active 
and  say  „i(^  folge  bid)"  if  they  hear  or  say  „i(^  werbe  gefolgt,  gefc()mci(^ctt."  Those  who 
defend  the  personal  passive  appeal  to  the  older  accusative  after  I)elfen  and  jc^meic^eln. 

272.  The  reflexive,  encouraged  by  French  influence,  and  man,  t^  + 
active  often  replace  the  passive.  For  (£^  mtrb  gefungen,  gepoc^t  stands  ?i}?an 
ftngt,  pod^t*  Da  offnet  jtc^  ba^  S^or,  Then  the  gate  is  opened.  Der  (Sd)Iuffel 
jDtrb  jt(^  ftnben,  The  key  will  be  found.  More  frequent  than  the  reflexive 
alone  is  jtc^  .  .  .  lajTen,  e.  g.,  Sr  iDtrb  ftd^  befttmmen  la^'i^xi  ju  .  .  .  ,  He  will 
let  himself  be  influenced  to  .  .  .  ,  He  can  be  induced  to  .  .  .  Da^  la§t 
ftc^  letc^t  nta($en,  That  is  easily  done.  !Da^  Id^t  ft(^  pren,  That  is  plausible. 
See  290,  3,  h.  It  is  clear  from  this  that  the  German  passive  is  less  fre- 
quent than  the  English.  The  grammars  boast  more  of  the  full  and  long 
compound  tenses  than  actual  usage  justifies. 

273.  Oeigin  of  the  Passive  Voice. 

1.  In  O.  H.  G.  fein  (5*7?,  wesan),  werben  iwerdan)  were  used  to  express  the  passive. 
Gothic  alone  shows  traces  of  anything  like  a  Latin  passive,  but  even  there  the  peri- 
phrastic form  had  to  be  resorted  to.  In  M.  H.  G.  the  present  is  ich  wirde  gelobet  ;  pre- 
terit, ich  wart  gelobet ;  perfect,  ich  bin  gelobet ;  pluperfect,  ich  was  gelobet.  Worden 
was  added  to  the  perfect  from  the  13th  century  downward,  but  was  not  considered 
essential  until  the  17th  century.  The  passive  idea  lies  originally  only  in  the  past  or 
passive  participle  and  not  in  wevbcn,  which  means  only  "  I  enter  into  the  state  of  being 
„geUe6t,"  ,,gej(^tagen,"  etc.  Compare  the  future,  id)  raerbe  lieBen,  "I  enter  into  the  state 
of  loving."  The  M.  H.  G.  ich  bin  geliebet,  ich  was  {war)  geliebet  are  by  no  means  lost. 
Only  they  are  not  called  tenses  now.    3(^  tin  getiefet,  ba§  ^iw^"^^^  ^(^  gefegt  mean  ••'  I  am 


104  SYNTAX   OF  THE  VERB — TENSES,  [274- 

in  the  state;  of  being  loved,"  "  the  room  is  in  a  swept  state,"  "  has  been  cleaned,"  "  is 
clean."  The  participles  are  felt  as  adjectives.  3<^  &in  gclieljt  iDorben,  fcas  ^intmer  ift 
gefegt  worben  mean  *  I  have  passed  into  the  state  of  being  loved,"  "the  room  has 
passed  into  the  state  of  being  swept."  The  transition  into  this  state,  and  not  the 
present  state,  but  the  fact  or  action  are  emphasized,  hence  the  idea  of  tense  is  promi- 
nent. The  fitness  of  the  name  of  perfect  passive  for  this  form  and  not  also  for  x^  biu 
geliebt  is  apparent  because  x^  bin  geliebt  njorben  is  composed  of  t(|  bin  (ge)tt5ort)en  (the 
perfect)  +  geliebt.  In  O.  H.  G.  fein  still  formed  the  present  as  "  to  be  "  now  in  Eng.,  but 
already  in  M.  H.  G.  werden  was  the  prevalent  auxiliary  (see  above),  while  sein  was 
prevalent  in  the  perfect. 

2.  Perhaps  the  following  examples  will  illustrate  the  force  of  the  vari- 
ous forms: 

2)ie  3;o(^ter  if!  V)erIobr,  is  engaged  to  be  married.  S^om  ©ife  befreit  jtnb 
etrom  unb  S3ac^e  (F.  903).  liefer  teffel  ijl  ^on  aSergen  kgrenjt  (Hu.)  These 
three  are  not  passive  tenses.  But  compare :  ^u  bent  !Bac^erli($cn  ivirb  ein 
(£ontra'|l  ijon  S^oIIfommen^eiten  unb  UnijoEfommen^eiten  erforbert  (Le.)  (present 
tense).  !Diefer  9)un!t  ift  i)tel  bej^ritten  n^orben  (perf.  pass.).  The  same  differ- 
ence between  n?urbe  +  participle  {=  imperfect  pass.)  and  h)ar  +  partici- 
ple (no  tense),  e.g.,  |>ome'r  war  i)or  %\itx^  unjlreitig  ficiptger  gelefen  al^  je^t 
(Le.).  Die  ^?>aufer  njaren  fejllic^  gefc^ntiitft  (no  tense).  Der  fRciuber^auptmann 
i))ar  fc^on  gefangen  genommen  iuorben,  al^  feine  Seute  l^erkifamen  (pluperfect 
pass.).  Der  ©pio^n  njurbe  o^ne  n?eitere^  an  einen  ^jl  gefniipft  unb  er^angt  (imper- 
fect pass.). 

Examples  of  the  future  and  conditional  perfects  passive  are  very  rare 
in  the  classics. 

Syntax  of  the  Tenses. 

Simple  Tenses. 
274.    The  Present. 

1.  It  denotes  an  action  as  now  going  on.  SBie  glan^t  tie 
(Sonne,  mie  lac^t  tie  glur  (G.). 

2.  It  is  the  tense  used  in  the  statement  of  a  general  truth 
or  fact  or  custom,  in  which  the  idea  of  time  is  lost  sight  of. 
•IDreimal  trei  ift  neun.  ®^it  i\i  tie  Siebe  (B.)-  Sorgen  m^^t  ©orgen 
(Prov.). 

3.  The  historical  present  is  used  in  vivid  narrative  for  a 
past  tense.  IDag  gu  ^inj  gegeBene  Seifpiel  ftntet  allgemetne  5^ad)^ 
a^mung;  man  ^erWt  tad  2lnten!en  te^  SSerrater^ ;  aEe  3lrme'en  fatten 
»on  i^m  afc  (Sch.). 


275]  SYNTAX   OF  THE  VERB — TEKSES.  105 

4.  For  the  English  perfect  German  (also  French)  uses  the 
present  when  the  action  or  state  continues  in  the  present 
time,  but  there  is  generally  an  adverb  denoting  duration  of 
time  qualifying  it.  Ex.:  ^m  bin  i(^  \khn  Zao^t  feier  (G.).  S^tod 
^age  gektt  n^ir  fc^on  ^ier  ^erum  (id.).  3*  Mn  all^ier  erft  furje  3eit 
(F.  1868). 

This  use  is  by  no  means  new  in  German  or  unknown  in  English,  e.g.,  *'  I 
forget  why."  ''  The  world  by  what  I  learn  is  no  stranger  to  your  generos- 
ity "  (Goldsmith,  quoted  by  Matzner).  It  is  closely  related  to  the  present 
sub  2  and  3,  and  generally  translated  by  "  have  been  "  +  present  participle. 

5.  The  future  present,  that  is,  the  present  with  the  force  of 
the  future,  is  much  more  frequent  in  German  than  in  Enghsh. 
Ex.:  9Zeirt,  mm,  i^  ge^e  na^  Der  (BtaU  auriid  (F.  820).  2Cer  mi^, 
mx  morgen  iiBer  nn^  befte^It  (Sch. ). 

It  is  a  very  old  use  of  the  present,  from  a  time  when  the  periphrastic 
future  was  not  yet  developed. 

6.  The  English  periphrastic  present  in  "  I  am  writing,"  "  I  do  write" 
rarely  has  corresponding  German  phrases.  For  instance,  tl)un  is  dialectic 
and  archaic.  Unb  t[)U^  tttc^t  me^r  in  5Borten  framen  (F.  385).  A  large  num- 
ber of  present  participles  are  looked  upon  as  adjectives  and  stand  in  the 
predicate  after  fcin;  but  they  do  not  form  a  tense  (see  273,  1).  There  is 
a  difference  between  the  simple  present  and  [etn  +  pres.  part.  The  for- 
mer, if  it  occur  at  all,  denotes  an  act  of  the  subject,  the  latter  denotes  a 
quality  of  the  same  or  of  another  subject.  Ex.:  ^<xxi  itimmt  teil  an  etn^a^, 
one  takes  part  in  something.  Scmanb  t)l  teilne'^menbr  one  is  sympathetic. 
©ie  ^arbe  fc^reit  is  hardly  used,  but  tie  ^arbe  t|l  etne  fd^retenbe,  the  color  is 
a  loud  one.  2)te  5lu^jtd^t  rei^t  einen,tmmer  '^o'^er  ivi  j^etgcttr  the  prospect  entices 
one  to  climb  higher  and  higher,  but  bie  5fu^jtd)t  tfl  rei^enb,  the  prospect  is 
charming.     Compare  the  Eug.  *'  charming,"  "  promising,"  etc. 

275.     The  Preterit. 

1.  It  is  strictly  the  "  historical "  tense,  used  in  narration, 
when  one  event  is  related  in  some  connection  vsrith  another 
event,  as  following  it  or  preceding  it.  Ex. :  Scifar  lam,  fa6  unD 
ftegte*    Sr  mart)  geBoren,  er  \tW,  na^m  ein  3Cei6  uniD  \icixb  (Gellert). 

In  the  story  of  the  creation  in  Genesis  only  the  pret.  is  used  until 


106  SYNTAX  OF  THE  VERB—TENSES.  [276- 

chapter  3,  verse  4,  when  the  account  is  summed  up  Sllfo  ijl  ^immel  mh  Srbe 
getDortert/  which  has  the  perfect  as  it  should  have.     See  276. 

2.  Ifc  represents  a  past  action  as  lasting,  customary;  also  as 
contemporaneous  with  another  action.  ®eftern  tarn  t>er  SWe^icu^ 
l)ier  au^  ber  @tal>t  ^inau^  ^\im  3lmtmann  (connect  ,,^inau^"  with 
„^nm/'  not  with  „au^  Uv  'Bta'tt")  unt)  fant  mt(^  an^  Uv  (Erbe  unter 
^otttm  Mr(otvn,  n?ie  elnige  auf  mir  ^erumfrabbelten,  an^ere  mid)  nedten 
(G.).    M^n  war  ta^  SBort,  meil  e^  tie  2:^at  ni(^t  ti?ar  (Sch.). 

Compound  Tenses. 

276.  The  Perfect. 

It  is  used  to  denote  a  past  event  as  a  separate  act  or  inde-* 
pendent  fact.  The  act  is  completed,  but  the  result  of  it  is  felt 
in  the  present  and  may  continue  in  the  present.  Ex. :  3d)  ^abe 
genoffen  M^  trl^ifc^e  (31M  (Sch. ).  ^ott  ^at  ^ie  SCelt  erfd^affen  =  God 
is  the  creator  of  the  world,  but  3m  5lnfang  fdiuf  ®ott  ^immel  unD 
grte  (B.).     Xu  ^aft^^  emi(^t,  Dctai^io  (Sch.).    See  279,  2. 

1.  In  the  best  writers  this  distinction  is  generally  observed,  but  not  in 
the  spoken  language,  in  which  the  perfect  is  crowding  out  the  preterit. 
As  an  illustration  of  the  exact  use  of  the  tenses,  particularly  of  the  pre- 
terit and  perfect,  may  be  recommended  the  introduction  to  Schiller's 

®ef^i(^te  be$  ^hfaM  ber  ijereinigten  S'^ieberlanbe. 

277.  The  Pluperfect. 

It  denotes  a  past  action  which  was  completed  before  another 
past  action  began.  Ex. :  Zili^  I)atte  hum  feinen  Oliidmarfd)  ano,c^ 
txdcn,aU  ter  ^ontg  fein  Sager  ju  ©d)wer)t  auf^o6  un^  gegen  granlfurt 
an  tcr  €)Uv  riidte  (Sch.). 

278.  The  Future. 

1.  It  denotes  an  action  yet  to  take  place.  Ex. :  3Ca6  trtrt) 
(lU^  bem  ^int^Iein  trerten  ?  (B.).    Der  ,^aifer  ti^irt)  morgen  abreifen. 

2.  It  denotes  probability  and  should  then  not  be  translated 
by  an  English  future  as  a  rule.  Ex. :  1)er  §unt)  trtrt?  fec^^  ^a^xt 
alt  fein  (=  ift  \vo^  or  mal}rfd)einUd)),  the  dog  may  be  or  is  prob- 


280J  SYNTAX  OF  THE   VERB — ^TENSES.  107 

ably,  six  years  old.  SBer  flopft?  S^  mtrl)  ein  Settler  fetn,  it  is 
probably  a  beggar. 

3.  In  familiar  language  it  stands  for  the  imperative  implying 
confident  expectation  of  the  result,  ^u  mirft  t)ier  Meiben,  You 
shall  stay  here.    Du  n)irft  t)ici)  t)uten,  Take  good  care  not  to  do  it. 

For  the  present  witli  the  force  of  the  future,  see  274,  5. 

279.  The  Future  Perfect. 

1.  It  is  the  perfect  transferred  to  the  future.  Ser^ekn^ 
mxM  i^x  fiir  euren  gelo^errrt  eu(^  geopfert  ^aBen  (Sch.).  More  fre- 
quently than  the  future,  the  future  perfect  denotes  probability: 
SBo  toiv^  er  l)ie  ^a^^it  jugebra^t  ^ben  ?  (Le.),  Where  can  he  have 
spent  the  night?  g^  tt)irt)  tx>a^  antre^  mbl  betieutet  ^aben  (Sch.), 
It  probably  meant  something  else. 

2.  As  the  present  can  have  future  fcjrce,  so  the  perfect  can 
have  future  perfect  force.  5Ri(^t  e^er  ^en!  i(|  l^iefe^  SSIatt  gu 
brauc^en,  bi^  eine  3:^at  get^an  ift,  ^if  iinwtterfpreAIic^  ten  ipodjijerrat 
be3eugt  (Sch.). 

3.  In  M.  H.  G.,  the  future  perfect  is  unknown  and  its  force  is  expressed 
by  ge  prefixed  to  the  present,  and  by  the  perfect. 

f  a.  Guard  against  confounding  the  modal  auxiliaries  in  German  with 
the  Eng.  future.  Approach  to  a  future  might  be  felt  in  JDoHen  and  foKeiif 
e.g.,  Wa^  njotten  fie  benn  ^erau^ijer^oren,  mnn  ciuer  unf(^ulbtg  ifl?  (G.)  IDer 
?Rei(^^tag  ju  5lug^burg  foE  |offentU(^  unfere  ^xoit'tit  pr  9ieife  bringen  (G.).  See 
283,  4. 

280.  The  Conditionals. 

They  are  future  subjunctives  corresponding  to  the  preterit 
and  pluperfect  subjunctive  as  the  future  corresponds  to  the 
present.  As  in  all  subjunctives,  the  idea  of  tense  is  not  empha- 
sized. Preterit  subjunctive  and  I.  conditional,  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive and  II.  conditional  are  nearly  identical  in  force,  but 
preterit  and  pluperfect  deserve  the  preference,  particularly  in 
the  passive.  In  dependent  conditional  clauses  the  preterit  or 
pluperfect  subjunctive  oidy  can  stand.     In  the  main  sentence 


108  STKTAX   OF  THE  VEEB — ^TENSES.  [281- 

there  is  no  choice  between  them  and  the  conditionals.  Ex. : 
D^ne  ^einen  diat  toixx^t  i&j  e^  ni^t  ^tt^an  feaben  or  t)atte  i&i  e^  nid^t 
get^an.  ^a^  mxu\t  vn  an  meiner  <SteEe  t^nn^*  SCdreft  in  l)icr 
gen^efen,  mein  93ruter  tuare  nic^t  geftorten  (B.). 

281.  The  conditionals  should  be  substituted  for  the  subjunctive  of 
the  preterit  and  of  the  pluperfect :  1.  When  the  force  of  the  future  is 
to  be  emphasized  as  in  :  ^at)mt  bcr  ^ranfe  Me  2)?ebtjiu  rcgelmci^tg  ein,  fo  vouxht 
ba<3  %khtx  ijon  biefer  (Stunbe  an  aHmd^Uc^  verfd^mtnben*  @ie  glaut)ten^  fte  tt)urben 
ftc^  leic^t  al^  ^elben  barjlellen  (Sch.).  2.  When  the  indicative  and  subjunc- 
tive forms  coincide  as  is  the  case  with  certain  persons  in  weak  verbs : 
5luf  einen  (£ib  n)urbe  tc^  i^m  ni(|t  glau^en*  „®laul)te"  might  be  pret.  ind.  3^i 
tDiirbet  bieS  9^dtfel  mix  ixMxtn,  fagte  fie  (Sch.).  „^^x  tuerbet"  could  also  be 
indicative  future. 

The  Tense  of  Indirect  Speech. 

282.  The  rule  is  :  The  indirect  speech  retains  the  tense 
of  the  direct.  Ex.:  tk  Saume  feien  gebannt,  fagt  er,  nnl  mv  fte 
fcbatige,  itm  tt^ad^fe  feine  ^anD  ijtxan^  ^nm  ®xah  (Sch.).  ggmont 
beteuerte,  t)a§  t)a^  ®an^t  ni6>t^  aU  tin  Za\d)&itx^  gen^efen  fei.  Xer 
^nak  Se^auptete,  er  ^citte  e^  nid^t  Qtt^an,  mnn  er  ni&it  ijon  fetnen 
®efa^rten  la]n  ^erleitet  morbeit  tt>are*  Sr  fagte  an6>,  er  troUe  e^  nic^t 
mieter  ti^nn,  mnn  man  i^m  ie^t  ijergebe*  Der  3^W9^  fonnte  nic^t 
fdjiroren,  fca^  er  ^en  ^(ngeflagten  ie  gefe^eit  ftabe* 

1.  But  this  rule  is  not  strictly  observed.  If  the  main  clause  contains, 
for  instance,  a  past  tense,  the  other  clause  may  take  a  preterit  for  the 
present,  a  pluperfect  for  the  perfect,  or  a  conditional  for  the  future :  ®a^ 
xodxtn  bie  ^Jlanetettf  fagte  mtr  ber  ^it^rer,  fte  regierten  ba^  ®ef({)i(f  (Sch.).  Sl)r 
n)urbet  bie^  fRatfel  mtr  erflaren,  fagte  jte  (id.).  W\x  melbet  (pres.  for  perf.)  er,  er 
Icige  franf  (id.).  If  any  ambiguity  arises,  as  is  not  unfrequently  the  case, 
this  license  should  not  be  indulged  in.  If  the  main  verb  is  in  the  pres- 
ent, it  is  not  well  to  substitute  the  preterit  or  pluperfect  in  the  sub- 
ordinate clause,  because  this  license  is  due  to  attraction  of  tenses,  viz., 
preterit  in  one  —  preterit  or  pluperfect  in  the  other.  Compare  :  ®r 
kteuert,  er  fci  bagecnen,  he  asserts,  that  he  is  opposed,  dx  beteitert,  er  njctre 
bagegen  mi^ht  be  construed  as  meaning  er  tDurbe  bagegen  fein,  which  means 
**  he  would  be  opposed."    ©r  beteuert,  er  fei  bagegen  gemefen,  he  had  been 


283]  SYNTAX   OF  THE  VERB  — TE:N^SES.  109 

opposed  ;  er  xodn  bagegen  gewefen  might  moreover  be  understood  as  having 
the  force  of  the  II.  Conditional. 

For  the  mood  of  the  indirect  statement,  see  285.  For  further  remarks  on  the  use 
of  tenses,  see  284,  also  the  General  Syntax. 

283.  Origin  of  the  Compound  Tenses. 

1.  The  compound  tenses  in  all  the  living  languages  are  products  of  the  development 
of  so-called  periphrastic  conjugation,  which  uses  certain  independent  verbs  denoting 
existence,  possession,  transition,  or  the  beginning  of  an  action,  in  connection  with  an 
infinitive,  participle,  or  gerundive.  The  more  the  inflectional  endings  of  the  simple 
tenses  of  the  earlier  periods  weathered,  the  more  favorable  were  the  chances  for  the 
growth  of  analytical  and  circumlocutory  tenses.  Compare  the  Latin  amor^  amatus 
sum  or  fui  ;  excusavi,  excusatam,  -um  habeo  or  teneo  with  French  je  suis  aime,  -ee, 
je  fus  aime,  -4e  ;  je  Vai  excuse,  -ee,  je  I' avals  excuse,  -ee.  The  Germanic  languages 
have  only  two  simple  tenses.  Gothic  shows  still  a  mutilated  passive.  But  the  future 
perfect  and  pluperfect  active  and  passive  sprang  up  within  historic  times  from  a  com- 
bination of  an  independent  verb  with  an  infinitive  or  participle,  which  were  at  first 
felt  only  as  predicate  noun  or  adjective.  The  participle  in  O.  H.  G.  could  be  inflected 
like  any  predicate  adjective. 

2.  At  different  periods  of  High  German  there  were  different  verbs  which  could  be 
thus  employed.  Besides  the  modern  auxiliaries  I)a6en,  fein  and  tcerben,  in  O.  H.  G. 
€igan,+ to  own.  In  Gothic  haban  +  inf.  was  made  to  express  the  future,  in  O.  H.  G. 
»uln  (shall)  and  werdan  +  pres.  part. ;  in  M.  H.  G.  besides  these,  wellen,  muezen.  %^) 
l^aBe  ten  §ut  aBgenommcn  or  aufgefe^t  means  originally  I  have,  possess  the  hat  in  some 
state  or  position,  viz.,  in  my  hand  (taken  off)  or  on  my  head  (put  on).  The  German 
order,  too,  shows  this  early  construction  much  better  than  the  English  "  I  have  taken 
off  my  hat."  Compare  the  Latin  Excusatum  habeas  me  rogo,  "Have  me  excused, 
pray,"  ,,33itte,  l^aBe  (^alte)  mtc^  (fur)  entf(i)ulbigt. "  ^aben  could  only  be  used  with  tran- 
sitive verbs,  but  losing  the  distinctive  meaning  of  possession,  it  could  combine  with 
verbs  having  an  object  in  the  G.  and  D.  and  even  with  no  object,  viz.,  with  intransi- 
tive verbs.  §aben  required  the  past  participle  in  O.  H.  G.  in  the  A.,  but  fein  required 
it  in  the  N.  ©ein  could  not,  from  the  nature  of  its  meaning,  form  the  perf,  or  pluperf. 
active  of  any  transitive  verb,  but  only  of  intransitive?  denoting  a  continuance  of  a  state 
(Meifccn,  fcin)  or  transition  into  another  state,  where  it,  however,  collided  with  trerben, 
used  in  the  future.  But  notice  that  the  idea  of  transition  and  change  is  in  most  verbs, 
here  in  question,  due  to  the  prefix,  ©ein  +  past  participle  could  onl3r  mean  existence 
in  a  certain  state,  at  most  the  beginning  or  ceasing  of  an  existence. 

3.  As  to  verbs  of  motion,  their  relation  to  these  verbs  is  very  intimate.  When  it  is 
not,  l)abcn  becomes  the  rival  of  fein,  as  soon  as  the  activity  of  motion  is  to  be  brought 
out  and  not  the  result.  That  yein  could  be  used  with  a  past  participle  of  a  verb  of  mo- 
tion at  all,  was  partly  brought  about  by  its  use  with  a  present  participle  and  infinitive. 
Such  forms  as  vermutenb,  wermogenb,  nac^gebenb  fein,  wevmuten  fein  are  remnants  of  the 
use  oism  +  pres.  part,  or  inf.  in  M.  H.  G.  We  do  not  feel  the  participle  or  infinitive 
as  such  now.    They  form  no  tense. 

4.  SBevben  +  pres.  part,  was  in  M.  H.  G.  more  common  than  werben  +  inf.,  but  the 


110  sy:ntax  of  the  verb — moods.  284- 

latter  was  the  established  future  in  the  16th  century.    From  "  I  pass  into  the  state  of 
praising  "  to  "  I  shall  praise  "  is  not  a  long  step. 

5.  The  conditionals  formed  with  raurbe  sprang  up  in  the  14th  century  and  were  set- 
tled in  the  16th,  according  to  Grimm.  In  M.  H.  G.  before  the  13th  century  "so^cZe," 
"  wolde  "  were  used  as  in  the  other  Germanic  languages,  but  these  lacked  the  umlaut, 
and  therefore  were  not  easily  distinguishable  as  subjunctives. 


THE   MOODS. 

Subjunctive. 

284.  The  indicative  is  the  mood  of  reality,  the  subjunctive 
is  the  mood  of  unreality,  contingency,  possibility. 

1.  The  imperative  subjunctive  helps  to  fill  out  the  impera- 
tive for  the  third  persons  sg.  and  pi.  and  the  first  person  pi. 
It  is  a  strong  optative,  see  sub  2. 

Ex.:  ^Ui^  f($tt)ei9e,  jeber  neige  ernilen  Sonen  nun  fetn  D^r  (Song).  (Se^e  jeber 
xo'm  er^^  treibe,  fe^e  jeber  mo  er  Wxht  (G.).  (Seten  ©ie  mir  tt)ill!o'mmen.  £aff en 
xoxx  ba$,  let  us  not  do  this.  ®e|en  tt>tr  biefen  ^aragrap^(en)  noc^  mal  bur(^,  let 
us  go  over  this  paragraph  once  more.  ®e^en  ^ie.  Slreten  bie  |)erren  gefal^ 
ligft  ein  (rare). 

2Beite  and  f  ei,  feib  really  subjunctives,  are  used  as  imperatives  in  the  second  person. 
SQBerbe  munter,  mein  ©emiite  (Hymn),    ©ei  rair  gegvii^t,  metn  58erg  (Sch.). 

2.  The  optative  subjunctive  expresses  a  wish  or  request. 
The  present  subjunctive  implies  confidence  of  fulfilment. 
Only  the  third  person  is  used. 

Ex. :  !Did)  fii^re  burc^  ba^  njtlbkttjegte  Ce^en  etn  pcibtge^  ©efd^icf  (Sch.).  ^ein 
S'^ame  fei  »ergeffcn  (Uh.).     Oott  ijernte^re  bie  ®a&e  (G.). 

The  preterit  subjunctive  implies  less  assurance,  and,  like 
the  pluperfect  subjunctive,  even  no  expectation  of  realization. 

Ex. :  D  tr>aren  xo'xx  wetter  I  o  war  \^  ju  ^au^  (G-.).  D  fa'^fl  bu/  ijoller  SOion^ 
benfc^ein  ♦  ,  ♦  (F.  386).  Scire  er  nur  noc^  am  SeBen !  (Implying  „er  ifl  aBer  tot«)» 
f^rcmmer  (Stab,  o  ptt^  tc^  nimmer  mit  bem  (Sc^werte  bi(^  ijertaufc^t  (Sch.).  See 
also  F.  392-7. 

3.  The  potential  subjunctive  expresses  an  opinion  as  such, 
a  possibility,  a  mild  assertion  of  an  undoubted  fact  {dipIomatiG 
subj.);  it  stands  in  questions,  direct  and  indirect;  in  exclama- 


285J  SYNTAX   OF  THE   VERB — MOODS.  Ill 

tions.  The  preterit  and  I.  conditional  are  the  potential  sub- 
junctives of  the  present ;  the  pluperfect  and  II.  conditional, 
of  the  past. 

Ex.:  3(^  reime,  hd^V  i^,  bo^  no(^  fo  jiemlic^ pfammenf  wa^  j^ufammen  geprt 
(Le.).  t)a^  gittge  nod^,  '*that  might  do  yet"  (id.).  2Ber  iDU§te  ba^  nic^t? 
Everybody  knows  that,  ^atte  id)  bo(|  mmmerme^r  gebac^t,  ba§  er  fo  grog  toix^ 
ben  witrbe  (Le.).  2Bie  liege  fic^  aCe^  fd^reiben!  (G.)  (Implying  „t^  ijl  unmoGU(^")- 
%a\t  ^attc  ic^  ba^  S3e|le  ^ergeffen  (id,).  S5eina|e  n^are  ic^  gegen  einen  SBaum  gerannt. 
2)u  ^dttejl  i>a^  Qemugt?  (Implying  „ic^  glaube  esS  nic^t).  9^id)t,  bag  ic^  tt)iigte,  not 
as  far  as  I  know. 

See  also  the  modal  auxiliaries,  267. 

4.  The  concessive  subjunctive  denotes  an  admission,  yield- 
ing, and  supposition.  Generally  only  in  the  third  person  of 
the  present  and  perfect.  It  borders  closely  upon  the  optative 
and  conditional. 

Ex. :  (£^  fojle  m^  e^  tooUt  (Le.).  (£^  fet,  ''(it  is)  granted."  ©efette,  bu 
fei)l  ein  guter  ober  fc^Ummer,  leg^  bic^  auf^  D^r  (Uh.).     See  mogen,  267,  3. 

5.  The  unreal  subjunctive  stands  in  conditional  sentences 
both  in  the  premise  and  the  conclusion,  i.  e,  in  the  dependent 
clause  and  in  the  main  clause,  when  the  premise  is  not  true. 
The  preterit  and  pluperfect  stand  in  the  premise;  the  preterit, 
pluperfect,  and  the  two  conditionals  in  the  conclusion.  The 
preterit  has  present  and  future  force,  the  pluperfect  has  future 
force  only. 

Ex. :  e^  liege  ft(^  alle^  treffltc^  fd^Uc^ten,  fonntc  man  bie  <Ba^tn  im'mal  ux^ 
ric^ten  (G.).  3(^  mare  nic^ts^r  tvenn  i^  bliebe  tt>a^  ic^  Mn  (id.).  2Benn  toix  ®elb 
6ei  un^  ge^abt  fatten,  fo  witrben  ix>tr  ben  airmen  toa^  gegekn  ^akn. 

The  premise  omitted  or  represented  by  an  adverb,  etc. :  3c^  t^ate  ha^ 
nid^t  an  Deiner  'Stelle  =  menn  ic^  an  2)einer  ©telle  mxt,  Sir  voaxtn  be^  2:obe^. 
£)fne  5ll^enftoc!  mxt  ber  SBanberer  in  bie  S:iefe  linabgefallen. 

The  conclusion  omitted :  3a  tt>enn  tt?ir  nic^t  n)drcn,  fagte  bie  Saterne  jum 
Syjonb.   Da  ging  jte  au^  (Folk-lore). 

285.  The  subjunctive  is  the  mood  of  the  indirect  state- 
ment, in  which  the  speaker  expresses  the  ideas  of  another  in 


112  SYNTAX   OF  THE   VERB — MOODS.  [286- 

his  own  words  without  sharing  the  responsibility  for,  and 
belief  in,  the  statement.  For  the  mood  in  the  dependent 
clause  included  in  the  statement  notice  especially  the  3.  and 
4.  sentences  of  282  and  the  last  of  328.  For  examples  and 
tense  see  282. 

Imperative. 

286.  It  expresses  a  command  and  occurs  only  in  the  2.  p. 
sg.  and  pi.  For  the  1.  and  3.  p.  pi.,  see  284, 1.  Sile  mxt  3Beile, 
Make  haste  slowly.  Seke  l)U  mid)  meine  Seute  lennen  (Sch.). 
Sintet  itm  (id.).     S3artet  i^r,  int)em  toiv  ^oran  laufen. 

1.  The  pronoun  is  quite  optional ;  only  when  there  is  a  contrast,  as  in 
the  last  sentence  (i^r  —  tpir),  it  should  stand.  In  the  subjunctive  it  al- 
ways stands. 

The  imperative  is  only  used  in  the  present  and  has  future  force, 
but  by  a  license  also  a  perfect  imperative  occurs  :  23efen!  S3efcn  I  (Beib^d 
getpefen  !  says  the  apprentice  when  he  wants  the  brooms  to  cease  being 
watercarriers  (G.). 

287.  Other  verbal  forms  that  take  imperative  force  and  a 
very  strong  one,  are  : 

1.  The  infinitive  :  SSlaul  (?[J^unl))  ^alten !  Hold  your  tongue. 
5^ic^t  anfajjen !  Do  not  touch. 

2.  The  past  participle  :  T^ie  3;rommel  geriibrt  (G.).  grifc^  auf 
^amerat)en,  aup^  9)fert),  auT^  9)fer^  I  in  t)a^  gelt,  in  Ut  grei^eit 
geaogen  (Sch.). 

3.  The  present  and  future  indicative  :  Oeorg,  bu  Hetbfl  urn 
mic^  (G).  T)u  mx\t  ben  3lpfel  fc^iegen  i?on  tern  .^opfbe^  ^naben 
(Sch.).     See  278,  3. 

4.  The  modal  auxiliaries  denoting  a  necessity,  duty,  can 
express  imperative  force,  also  lajfen.  Du  foHft  nid^t  fte^len  (B.). 
^ein  Mm\6^  mu§  miiffen  (Le.),  no  man  ought  to  be  compelled. 

Since  the  Eng.  "  let "  shows  no  inflection,  notice  the  German  forms : 
fia§  un^  ge^en,  to  a  person  addressed  as  bu;  plural  Saf]!  uit^  ge^en.  2a^tn 
(Bit  un^  ne^eit/  to  a  person  addressed  as  <3ie. 


290]  SYNTAX   OF   THE  VERB — lis^EIi^ITiVE.  113 

Infinitive. 

288.  It  is  a  verbal  noun  and  the  present  infinitive  has 
neither  voice,  tense,  nor  inflection.  The  compound  infinitive 
arose  Hke  the  compound  tenses  (see  283) :  gelobt  tocxlm,  to  be 
praised;  geloBt  morDen  fein,  to  have  been  praised;  gelobt  )^ahtn,  to 
have  praised. 

1.  Notice  the  marked  difference  in  meaning  between  the  present  of  some 
of  the  modal  auxiliaries  +  perfect  infinitive,  and  the  perfect  or  pluper- 
fect +  present  infinitive.  Ex.  :  !l)er  ^utfc^er  toiU  ben  ©efaitgenen  gefejen 
|aben  =  claims  to  have  seen  him,  but  ^at  t^n  fe^en  tuoUen  =  wanted  to  see 
him.  2)er  ^aufirer  mup  i?orbeigegangen  fein  =  must  have  passed  by,  but  ^at 
ijorkige^en  miiffen;  was  forced  to  pass  by,  etc. 

289.  We  distinguish  between  the  infinitive  without  ju  and 
with  ^n. 

The  former  is  the  older  construction.  Being  a  noun,  the  infinitive  always  stood  in 
the  D.  after  ju  in  O.  and  M.  H.  G.  But  in  early  N.  H.  G.,  when  it  was  no  longer  in- 
flected, the  prepositional  infinitive  gained  ground  and  gave  also  rise  to  the  gerundive 
(see  298).  Usage  is  in  many  cases  still  unsettled  as  to  the  use  of  5u.  Its  frequent  use 
is  the  source  of  much  bad  style  (see  Sanders' „t§auptfd}Wicru3feitett"  .  .  .  sub  Inf.).  The 
cases  where  the  infinitive  has  taken  the  place  of  the  present  participle  are  mentioned 
below  under  each  head.  In  the  gerundive  alone  the  participial  form  has  taken  the  place 
of  the  infinitive.    See  298. 

The  Infinitive  without  ^u. 

290.  1.  It  is  dependent  upon  the  modal  auxiharies.  £)er 
33ote  mitt  eg  au^  atter  Seute  "iS^unD  erfa^ren  i:)abm.  "Man  fott  feen  Zclq 
ni6.)t  ijor  Dem  3l6ent)  loBen  (Prov.).  Also  upon  t^un  in  quaint  and 
dialect  style,  e.  g.,  I^a  t^dteit  fte  fi6  trennen  (Uh.).  See  the 
speeches  of  Wartime  and  ?!}?argarete  in  F.,  I.  Upon  1^ahn  in  the 
phrase  gut  i)ahn.  Vn  BafI  gut  reben,  it  is  easy  enough  for  you  to 
talk,     dv  t^ut  ni(^t5  al^  ♦  ♦  .  ,  he  does  nothing  but  .  .  . 

2.  In  certain  phrases  dependent  upon  some  verbs  of  motion; 
also  upon  :^elfen,  ^d^tn  (command),  lajfen,  le^ren,  lernen,  mac^en, 
nennen*  The  verbs  of  motion  are:  fpajieren  reiten,  fa^ren,  ge'^en; 
\6>la\m    Qi^m,  \i&i    ((^lafen  legen,  etc.     ^ei§t    mi(^    ni^t   re^en, 


114  SYKTAX   OF  THE   YERB — li^^FIl^ITIYE.  [291- 

l)ei^t  mii^  [(^tx^eigen ;  tenti  meiit  ©e^^eimni^  ift  mix  ^flic^t  (G.).  Se^re 
mi(^  t^utt  nadj  Deinem  23o^lgefalIen  (B.).   See  Schiller's  Tell,  1549. 

3.  Dependent  upon  certain  verbs  of  rest:  bleiben  (most  fre- 
quently), lie^en,  fte^en  (rarely);  and  upon  verbs  of  perceiving: 
ftni^en,  fii^len  (rarely),  :^oren,  fe:^en;  also  ):)abm.  ^tcdm  Heiben,  to 
stick  fast  (intr.).  (Scblafen  liegen.  Sir  fanten  Un  ^etc^nam  im 
SBalne  liegert*  ^ir  fa^eit  ten  gul)rer  ixbtv  tern  5lbgrunte  f(^it>eBen* 
Der  ^vroler  ^at  gembl)nU(^  get)em  am  §ute  fteden,  ter  Snglanter 
Sanger  l^erunter^angen.  3d)  :^ab^  ei5  ofter^  ru^meu  l)cren,  tin  ^omo^ 
Ma'nt  fijnnf  etnen  9)farrer  lebren  (F.  526-7). 

a.  <Setn  is  still  so  used  in  dialect.  (Sr  tft  ftfc^cn,  jagen,  lie  has  gone  afishing,  ahnnt- 
Ing;  ev  ift  fifc^en  geioefen,  he  has  been  afishing.  With  all  the  verbs  sub  3  antl  several 
sub  2  the  present  participle  was  once  the  rule  in  older  German.  Compare  the  partici- 
ple in  the  predicate,  294,  2. 

b.  After  fitl^Ien,  ^oren,  laffen,  fel^cn  the  infinitive  has  either  passive  or  active  force, 
and  often  an  ambiguity  arises  which  should  be  avoided  by  a  different  construction. 
2Btr  f)aUn  e§  fageit  r)oren,  We  have  heard  it  said.  S)ie  S)Dggc  la^t  fid)  ttii^t  nedcit,  The 
bulldog  will  not  be  teased.  9Bir  ^5ren  ben  ^naben  rufen,  calling  and  called  (generally 
the  first).  ®er  gol^nJutf^er  lie^  un§  ntcf)(  fa:^ren,  the  hackman  did  not  let  us  go,  did  not 
allow  us  to  drive,  did  not  have  us  driven  ®er  SD^eiftcv  tiefi  bie  3;Dd)ter  nt(^t  malen,  did 
not  allow  her  to  paint  and  did  not  have  her  portrait  painted. 

4.  As  subject  or  predicate  with  fein  and  ^ei§en,  to  be,  to 
amount  to  :  5^10^  ei'nmal  etn  SSunlDer  ^offen  ^iege  ®ott  ijerfucben 
(Sch.).     Q,xn  55ergnugett  emarten  ift  and)  tin  ^Ser^nugen  (Le.). 

The  Infinitive  with  ju. 

291.  1.  It  expresses  the  purpose  of  an  action  and  in  gen- 
eral the  indirect  object ;  also  necessity  and  possibility  after 
neuter  verbs,  e.  g,,  fein,  bleiben,  fte^en,  when  it  has  passive  force. 

T}it  ^a6!jt  ift  titdit  ju  dnbern.  g^  MeiBt  nod)  i>ie(  gu  t|un.  "La^  ftcl;t 
noc^  SU  iiSerlegen^  !Da  treibt'^  i^n,  Den  foftUAen  fvd^  ^n  ermerben 
(Sch.). 

This  is  the  old  and  proper  use  of  the  infinitive,  originally  a  noun  in 
the  D.  governed  by  ju.  In  N.  H.  G.  urn  was  added  to  express  purpose, 
but  it  was  really  superfluous,  though  common  in  the  spoken  language. 
Urn  bie  (Stromung  a^suleiten  ^rukn  fte  ein  frifc^e^  Sctte  (Platen).    2Bir  le^en  ni^t 


292]  SYNTAX   OF  THE  YERB — IKFI:N^ITIVE»  115 

wm  ju  effen,fottbern  mir  effen  urn  in  leku.  The  force  of  ju  wasinucli  weakened 
when  urn  could  thus  be  added.  Besides  um,  anftatt  and  o^ne  can  i^recede 
in  :  an^iatt  m^  ju  laufen,  !am  ber  23ar  nd^er  ^eran.  D|ne  jtc^  umpfe^en,Iief  ber 
!I)le6  bai)on.  But  „um"  should  never  be  used  except  to  express  purpose. 
It  is  used  too  frequently.     See  sub  4. 

2.  It  stands  as  direct  object  of  verbs,  often  preceded  by,  or 
in  apposition  to,  a  pronoun  or  pronominal  adverb  +  preposi- 
tion.   Ex. :  %anQ  an  p  ^arfen  unt)  ju  graBen  (F.  2355).    ^Riemant) 

In  older  periods  of  the  language  there  was  no  ju  in  this  case. 

3.  It  stands  as  subject,  in  the  spoken  language,  more  fre- 
quently than  without  gu ;  there  is  no  choice.  ®efal)rlid)  ift^^  tien 
Seu  3U  treden  (Sch.).  Sine  fi^one  SKenfcfeenfeeie  ftnren  ift  ^eminn 
(He.). 

4.  As  adjunct  of  nouns  and  adjectives,  the  latter  often  being 
qualified  by  ^u  and  ^mu^.  „Xie  ^unft  fid)  klteBt^u  ma&icn,"  3^ 
[tola,  I^an!  ein^uernten,  m  ic^  U)tt  ntc^t  fdete  (Le.).  Du  mvt\t  Mint) 
genug,  l^a^  ni4t  ein^ufe^n  ?  ♦  ♦  ♦  Sereit,  ^ir  ^ur  (^^efedfcfeaft  l)ier  3U 
Bleiben  (F.  1431). 

After  adjectives  „um  ju"  is  now  far  more  common  than  ju  alone.  3c^ 
bin  ju  alt,  unt  nur  p  fptelett,  ^u  iuttg,  urn  o'^tte  SBunfd^  ju  [ein  (F.  1546-7).  Quite 
rare  is  aU  p  +  infinitive. 

5.  For  the  independent  use  of  infinitive,  see  imperative,  287,  1. 
With  or  without  ju  in  elliptical  expressions  :  S©a^  t^m,  fpric^t  3eu^  (Sch.). 
2Ba^,  am  fRanh  be^  &xaU  in  litgenl  (F.  2961). 

AcCUSATrVTE   WITH   THE   INFINITIVE. 

292.  In  this  construction  the  logical  subject  of  the  infini- 
tive stands  in  the  accusative.  The  infinitive  stands  with  or 
v^ithout  ju.  Ex.:  §ter  ru^et  Martin  gaulermann,  tt>enn  man  ^ett 
ru^^ett  fagettlann,  ^cr  feinen  ^eUa^  ni(^t5  ^^than  (Wechherlin,  quoted 
by  Blatz).    Su^en,  Me  man  Siigen  ^u  fetn  tuei§  (Le.). 

1.  Accusative  with  infinitive  was  not  rare  in  O.  H.  G.  in  the  translations  from  Latin 
and  Greek.    It  is  largely  due  to  foreign  influence.    In  M.  H.  G.  it  is  very  rare.    In 


116  SYKTAX   OF  THE   VEKB — PARTICIPLES.  [293- 

modern  German  it  is  discouraged  by  the  best  authorities,  though  Lessing  uses  it  quite 
frequently. 

2.  The  corresponding  English  constructions  must  therefore  be  rendered  freely  into 
German.  I  believe  him  to  be  my  friend,  3(^  glaube  ba^  er  mein  greunb  ift  or  3(J)  i)alk  il)n 
fur  meinen  greunb.    German  loses  thus  a  compact  construction. 

The  Infinitive  as  a  Noun. 

293.  Some  infinitives  are  felt  as  nouns  only,  e,  g,,  ta^  SeBen, 
tai  Slnfe^en,  ta^  SeiDen*  The  infinitive  used  as  noun  generally 
has  the  article.  £)a^  S^aud^en  ift  l)ier  ^erboten*  33eim  Uberfe'^en 
mu^  man  bis  an^^  Uniiberfe'^lic^e  ^^erangetn  (Q.).  'Der  Srkn  SBeinen 
ift  ein  ^eimli(^  ^a6:itn  (Prov.). 

Participles. 

294,  The  participles  are  really  adjectives  derived  from 
verbal  stems.  The  present  participle  retains  more  of  the 
verbal  construction  and  force  than  the  pas(^,  in  which  the 
idea  of  tense  only  appears  in  intransitive  verbs. 

The  present  participle  has  active  force  in  all  verbs  and  the 
noun  is  the  subject  of  the  action.  T)er  Iad5elnt)e  (See,  W  auf^ 
get)ente  (Sonne,  ta^  fc^IageniDe  ^Better,  "  fire-damp."  Both  parti- 
ciples can  be  used  as  nouns,  adjectives,  and  adverbs  very 
much  as  in  English.  They  stand  in  apposition,  in  the  predi- 
cate and  as  attributes. 

1.  Participles  in  which  the  noun  is  not  the  subject  of  the  action,  and  those 
in  which  lies  passive  rather  than  active  force,  are  still  current,  but  not  so 
frequent  as  in  early  N.  H.  G.  They  are  not  generally  countenanced,  e.  g. , 
M  fc^lafenber  5^ad)t,  "  at  night  time,"  *'  when  everybody  sleeps  "  ;  cine  ft^enbe 
Sebenaart,  a  sedentary  habit  of  life  ;  ejTenbe  SBaaren,  eatables  (better  (£p^ 
Jvaaren);  cine  ijor^abenbe  fRd\t,  an  intended  journey.  Some  of  these  can  be 
defended:  fa^renbe  ^aU,  movables,  chattels  (intrans.  verb);  erjlauncnbe 
9?ac^ric^t,  astonishing  news  (trans,  verb) ;  eine  ntelfenbe  ^ui^  (intrans.  like 
,,tttild)en");  bte  reitenbe  ^o%  postman  on  horseback.  Poetic  are  ber  fc^tDtn- 
belnbe  %tU,  the  giddy  rock.    fSon  be^  ^aufe^  tt)eitfc^auettbem  ©teBel  (Sch.). 

2.  In  the  predicate  appear  now  only  such  present  participles  as  have  be- 
come regular  adjectives  :  kbeutenb,  important ;  reijenb,  charming  ;  binrei^enb. 
ravishing ;  kibenb,  in  pain,  ill  health  ;  brtngenbf  urgent.    See  274.  6. 


L 


296]  ST]^TAX   OF  THE  VERB — PARTICIPLES.  117 

3.  In  apposition :  ^oc^enb,  tt)te  au^  Dfena  ffta^tn,  glii^n  bte  :2ufte  (Sch.). 
3^  emt)fange  fnieenb  bie^  ®e[^en!  (id.). 

4.  The  participial  clause  with  the  present  participle  is  only  in  very 
restricted  use  in  German  compared  with  English.  It  cannot  express  an 
action  preceding  or  following  another  action,  a  cause,  purpose,  etc.  It 
has  usually  the  value  of  an  adjective  clause  and  can  often  be  explained 
as  in  apposition.  2)er  ^rme,  ftc^  an  mi(^  ipenbenb,  fpra(|j  ^aUn  'Bit  MitUib, 
mein  ^txx. 

295.  The  past  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  has  passive 
force  ;  that  of  a  verb  which  forms  its  compound  tenses  with 
feitt  has  active  force:  ^er  lauBumfrangte  SSec^er  (Sch.);  ta^  ^erge^ 
fii^rte  ^ol!  (id.);  tie  aBgefegelten  @d)tjfe;  tier  turd^gefadene  (unsuc- 
cessful) Santita't* 

1.  But  not  all  verbs  that  have  fein  in  compound  tenses  can  be  thus  used ; 
the  participle  must  denote  the  state  produced  by  the  action  of  the  verb. 
!Dte  gefegelten  (B(^tjfe,  ber  gelaufene  ^ned)t  would  not  do.  !£)er  entlaufenc  'BUa'ot 
means  "the  runaway  slave."  This  force  is  clear  from  the  origin  of  the 
compound  tense  with  fein  (see  273,  283). 

2.  Seemingly  a  large  number  of  past  participles  have  active  force,  but 
they  are  either  quite  wrong  or  they  can  be  explained  as  having  had  origi- 
nally passive  force.  Thus :  „Ungebetet  i§t  man  ntd)t"  (Gerok)  ;  wungegeffen  in 
S3ette  ge^n"  are  as  wrong  as  their  English  equivalents:  One  does  not  eat 
unprayed,  go  to  bed  uneaten.  „S3ebieut"  means  **  in  service,"  ''invested 
with  an  oflace,"  hence  a  servant,  elrt  ^ebienter.  w^erbient,"  one  who  has 
merits,  mil  er  jt(^  unt  etma^  or  jemanb  ijerbient  gemad)t  ^at;  etngcMlbet  means 
conceited,  taken  up  with  one's  self ;  etn  ^erlogener  SD^enfc^,  a  man  given  to 
lying ;  ijerfoffener  SJJenfc^,  given  to  drinking,  and  many  other  compounds 
with  i?er-  :  ijerweinte  5(ugen,  eyes  red  with  weeping. 

a.  That  some  are  now  felt  as  havinj?  active  force  cannot  be  denied,  else  the  wrong 
use  mentioned  could  not  have  sprung  up  :  gott?,  pfltcf)tttergc[feii,  forgetful  of  one's  duty, 
of  God.;  toevfdjlafen,  "  one  who  slept  too  long" ;  wermeffen,  "  presumptuous  "  j  toevlegen, 
embarrassed ;  besides  the  above. 

296.  The  pecuUar  past  participles  of  verbs  of  motion, 
which  seemingly  have  active  force,  stand  in  a  sort  of  apposi- 
tion or  as  predicates  with  fommen,  rarely  with  ge^en,  Ex. : 
Stam  ettt  55ogeI  ^eflogen  (Song).  3)a  fommt  be^  ffiegiJ  geritten  dn 
fd)muc!er  S^elfne^t  (Uh.). 


118  SYKTAX   OF  THE  ADVEEB.  [297- 

1.  This  use  is  by  no  means  modern,  ^omnten  and  ge^n  are  felt  as 
auxiliaries.     Compare  ^crloren  ge^en. 

2»  Special  notice  deserves  the  past  participle  with  t)ei^en,  fein,  and 
ncnnen,  which  has  the  force  of  an  infinitive,  but  belongs  under  this  head. 
Da^  ^ei§t  fc^lec^t  Qtxoox^tn,  That  is  a  bad  throw.  Unter  e^rlic^en  Seuten  nennt 
man  ha^  n^do^m*"    %xi^^  setvagt  i\i  ^al^  getT^onnen  (Prov.). 

297.  The  participle  appears  in  au  absolute  construction. 
The  logical  subject  is  left  indefinite  (Lessing  is  very  fond  of 
this).  The  logical  subject  stands  in  the  accusative  and  with 
a  few,  hke  au^genommen,  eingefc^Ioffen,  abgered)net,  even  in  the 
nominative.  5l(Ie  maren  gugegen,  ter  5>farrer  au^^genommen,  Unt) 
liefer  nun  auf  Saofoon  an^tmnUt,  fo  ift  Me  (Ba&|^  !(ar  (Le.). 

1.  Closely  related  to  this  construction  is  the  absolute  accusative  +  a 
past  participle  (see  209)  and  in  some  cases  there  may  be  doubt  as  to 
which  is  meant.  Unb  fie  jtngt  ^inau^  in  bie  finftcre  ^ad)t,  ba^  ^luge  »Dn  2i3einen 
getriibct  (Sch.). 

The  past  participle  is  in  elliptical  construction  in  the  imperative,  see 

287,  2. 

The  Gterundive. 

298.  It  stands  only  attributively.  In  the  predicate  the  old 
infinitive  stands,  which  it  has  supplanted.  Xer  noc^  ju  t>e.r- 
faufcnte  (9(^ran!,  the  wardrobe  which  is  still  to  be  sold;  but  ^cr 
(Bd)xant  ift  nod)  ^u  ^erfaufen,  the  wardrobe  is  still  to  be  sold. 
See  289,  452. 

Though  the  form  is  rather  that  of  the  gerund  than  of  the  gerundive,  in  construction 
it  closely  resembles  the  Latin  gerundive.    Hence  the  name  in  German. 

SYNTAX   OF   THE   ADVERB. 

299.  The  adverb  qualifies  a  verb,  an  adjective  or  another 
adverb.  Ex. :  Tn  baft  ntt(^  mad^tig  ange^ogen  (F.  483).  Die 
unBegreiflicfe  ^el)en  SBerfe  ftnt)  l)errli(^  mie  am  erften  Za^  (F.  249-50). 
Da^  ift  fe^br  fcfcon  gefd)riekn. 

1.  The  adverbs  of  time  and  place  often  accompany  a  noun  with  the 
force  of  an  attribute :  ^ox  Seuem  brokn  fte^t  geMicft,  ber  (jclfen  le^rt  uub  -^ilfe 
fcl)lc!t  (F.  1009-10).  ©eorg  V.  (ber  giinfte),  einft  ^onig  ijon  ^annoijer,  jlarb  im 
5lu^lanbe. 


3011  SYNTAX   OE  THE  PREPOSITIOK.  119 

2.  The  adverb  stands  as  a  predicate :  !Die  f(^onen  Beitett  »ort  3lraniuc§ 
finb  nun  »orukr  (Scli.).  1)te  Z^ux  ijl  ju  (one  can  supply  „gemac^t")*  2)er  or 
tern  ^JliniTter  ijl  ni^t  wo% 

a.  Do  not  confound  cjut  and  wol^l.  Except  in  a  few  cases,  as  in  wol}!  t^un,  to  do 
good,  wo^l  does  not  qualify  a  transitive  verb.  We  do  not  say  in  German  vdoI^I  f^reifccn, 
ttJD^I  antnjDvten,  rvc^  anfangeu  in  the  sense  of  English  "  well."  ©v  l)at  e§  luo:^!  gefd)rteljen 
means  "  he  wrote  it,  indeed,  (I  assure  you) "  ;  or  it  is  concessive  and  can  mean :  "  to  be 
smre  he  wrote  it,  but  then  — ."    In  the  last  sense  ircl)l  lias  no  stress. 

3.  With  adjectives  or  participles  used  as  nouns  that  are  felt  rather  as 
substantives  than  as  adjectives  or  as  derived  from  a  verb,  the  adverb 
chang^es  to  an  adjective:  ein  m^  fStxtoawWx  >  ein  na^er  il^emanbter;  ein 
intint  SBefannter  >  ein  intimer  23efannter»    But  compare  Goethe's  famous  line : 

300.  An  adverb  ma}^  strengthen  the  force  of  a  preposition 
by  standing  before  or  after  the  preposition  +  case.  This  is 
always  the  case  when  the  adverb  is  the  X3refix  of  a  separable 
compound  verb:  ring^  urn  tie  8tat^t  (^erum),  mitten  t^ur^  im 
2Ba(i?,  in  t>a^  ®orf  ^inein,  am  tern  ®arten  :^erau^»  S^  ritten  l^rei 
Sfteiter  ^um  Z^oxt  ^tnau^  (Uh.). 

1.  Mark  the  adverbs  which  are  only  adverbs  and  not  adjectives  : 

tt)o|l,  fajl,  \^on,  fe^r,  neuUc^f  freilic^,  fru^  (rare),  [pat  (rare),  balb,  and  others. 

2.  The  uninflected  comparative  and  superlative  of  adjectives  serve 
also  as  adverbs.  Notice  the  difference  between  au^  +  A.  and  an  +  D. 
<Bk  fangen  auf  ba^  bej^e  (Uh.),  they  sang  as  best  they  knew  how.  This  is 
absolute  superlative.  ®ie  fangen  am  kften,  they  sang  best  of  all,  any.  This 
is  relative  superlative. 

SYNTAX   OF   THE   PREPOSITION. 

301.  The  prepositions  express  the  relations  of  a  noun  to  a 
verb  or  to  another  noun. 

1.  Prepopitions  are  originally  adverbs,  and  the  distinction  between  prepositions, 
adverbs  and  conjunctions  is  only  syntactical.  'Denn  is,  for  instance,  a  conjunction  = 
for,  and  an  adverb  =  then,  than ;  wa^renb  is  a  conjunction  =  while,  and  a  preposition 
=  during.  Prepositions  could  not  originally  *'  govern  "  cases.  A  certain  case  was 
called  for  independently  of  the  preposition,  then  still  an  adverb.  In  Greek  there  are 
prepositions  governing  three  cases,  which  shows  how  loose  the  connection  between 
case  and  preposition  was.    In  fact  nearly  all  adverbs,  old  and  new,  can  be  traced  back 


120         SYJsrrAx  of  the  peeposition — genitive.         [302- 

to  cases  of  nouns  or  pronouns.  They  are  isolated  or  "petrified"  cases,  and  as  such 
could  only  stand  in  the  loosest  connection  with  the  living  cases,  which  they  gradually 
began  to  "  govern." 

2.  Prepositions  can  govern  difierent  cases  in  different  periods  of  the  language. 
The  preposition  has  been  partly  the  cause  of  the  loss  of  case-endings.  Its  function 
becomes  the  more  important  the  more  uninflectional  (analytical)  a  language  becomes. 
It  is  one  of  the  most  difficult  and  subtle  elements  to  master  in  the  study  of  a  living 
language.  For  another  reason  the  preposition  is  very  important,  viz.,  the  preposition 
-l-case  has  supplanted  and  is  continuing  to  supplant  the  case  alone,  directly  dependent 
upon  a  verb  or  noun.  The  two  together  are  much  more  expressive  and  explicit  than 
a  case  alone.  In  ©ie  Siebe  be3  S3ater6,  the  genitive  may  be  subjective  or  objective,  but 
there  is  no  ambiguity  about  tie  Siebe  jum  SSater,  be§  3Satei§  Stebe  jum  (So^ne. 

Classification  and  Teeatment  of  the  Peepositions  Accoeding 
TO  THE  Cases  they  Goveen. 

302.     Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive: 

Unweit,  mitteU,  fraft  unt)  ma^ren^;  (aut,  t)crmoc(e,  ungeac^tet;  oBer^ 
^alb  unt)  unterl)afb;  inner^alb  unt^  auger^alb;  tie^feit^,  jenfeit^,  fatten, 
tr)e(^en;  ftatt,  au^  (dng^,  ^ufolge,  tro^. 

These  are  all  cases  of  substantives  or  adjectives  (participles)  and  their 
number  might  be  easily  increased,  e.g.,  by  bejitglic^,  with  reference  to  ; 
angejtclta,  in  the  face  of;  feiten^,  on  the  part  of  ;  inmttten,  in  the  midst  of, 
etc. 

(The  order  is  the  one  in  which  they  are  given  in  German  grammars.  The  semicolon 
shows  the  ends  of  the  lines  of  the  doggerel.) 

We  comment  in  alphabetical  order  briefly  upon  those  that  seem  to  require  comment. 
Often  a  mere  translation  will  suffice. 

1.  Slnjlattr  an  — flat t,  flatt,  +  instead  of.  T)xam  (from  which, 
from  whose  breast)  flatt  ber  golbenen  £iebcr  etn  SStutfira^I  ^oc^  auf  fprm9t(Uh.). 
5ln  2:o^ter  jlatt,  in  daughter's  stead.  ®tatt  sometimes  with  the  dative.  It 
also  governs  an  infinitive  like  o^ne,  translated  by  "  without  +  participle." 
See  Infinitive,  291,  1. 

2.  5luper^aU  +  outside  of;  tnner^aU  +  inside  of;  oBer^aU, 
above;  unter^aH,  on  the  lower  side  of,  below.  They  are  all  more 
expressive  than  the  simple  forms.     They  rarely  govern  the  dative. 

3.  !D  i  e  ^  f  e  i  t  (^),  j  e  n  f  e  i  t  ((3),  this  side  of,  on  the  other  side,  beyond. 
Rarely  with  the  dative. 

4  ^  a  n>  e  n,  ^  a  U  e  r,  !^  a  I  b,  on  account  of,  +  in  behalf  of.    Follows 


302]  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITION — GENITIVE.  121 

its  case.    Frequent  in  composition :  ht^f^al^,  therefore  ;  meittet^alBctt^  on  my 
behalf;  ^Iter^  ^albcr,  on  account  of  age.     Comp.  tDcgen  and  toiUm* 

5.  traft,  according  to,  by  virtue  of.  traft  be^  ©efe^e^  ;  fraft  be^ 
^mte«.  Formerljonly  ill  traft,^.^',,  ba§flet^  bcr  aebile(©o^n)  .  ♦  ♦  in  ^raft 
attein  be^  fftin^^f  ba^  ^aupt,  ber  gurjl  be^  |)aufe^  t»erbe  (Le.).    Comp.  laut. 

6.  2aut,  from,  «nac^  2aut,"  laut^  (Lutlierj,  means  ''according  to,' 
"  bj."  Saut  ©efe^l^#  by  command ;  laui  be^  Xeflamentc^,  according  to  the 
last  will  and  testament. 

Plural  nouns  without  articles  in  which  the  genitive  could  not  be  dis- 
tinguished stand  in  the  dative  :  laut  33riefenf  according  to  letters.  Saut 
means  literally  according  to  a  verbal  or  written  statement ;  fraft  gives  a 
moral  reason. 

7.  ^itttl^,  mitteljl  (most  common),  ijetm  it  telftr  by  means  of, 
with.  2)?ittel|^  tim^  ^ammtx^,  etne^  S3o(}rer^.  It  is  more  expressive  than 
mit  or  burc^.     Rarely  with  the  dative. 

8.  D  ^f  rare  and  archaic.  With  genitive  if  causal  (on  account  of) ; 
with  dative  if  local  (above),  and  temporal  (during).  T)a  minttn  sufammen 
bie  ©renabter^  tt)ol)l  ob  ber  flctglidjm  ^unbe  (Heine).  Db  hmx  Salb;  nib  bem 
SBalb  (Sch.,  Tell);  ob  bem  5lltare  (id.), 

9.  2;  r  0  If  with  genitive  and  dative,  in  defiance  of,  in  spite  of  ;  in  the 
sense  of  **in  rivalry  with,"  ''as  well  as,"  always  with  the  dative.  Zxoi^ 
be^  ^cftigen  9iegen^  fu^ren  n)ir  aK  ^ie  ©dngerin  ftngt  tro|  eincr  ^a^tiQaU,  as 
well  as  a  nightingale.  Comp.  the  forms  ju  or  jum  ^iroi^e  preceded  by  a 
dative  :  ?D^tr  jum  2:rc|c  fu:^r  er  fort  ju  lefen,  in  defiance  of  me  or  to  defy  me 
he  continued  reading. 

10.  U n a n g e f  e ^ e n/  setting  aside,  unbefc^abet,  without  detriment  to, 
u  n  g  e  a  d)  t  etf  notwithstanding  (very  frequent).  The  last  two  also  with  a 
preceding  dative;  bemungea(^tet  is  felt  as  an  adverb.  These  are  very 
modern  prepositions.  Unwett,  unfern#  not  far  from,  occur  also  with 
dative. 

11.  2}  ermogCf  in  virtue  of,  through,  in  consequence  of,  by  dint  of. 
Denotes  a  reason  springing  from  a  quality  of  the  subject :  ^ermoge  feiner 
fReblt(^fctt,  through  his  honesty.  We  could  not  say  fraft  feiner  9i*;  ijerntogc 
(and  not  fraft)  grofer  ^Infhrengungett/  by  dint  of  great  efforts.  (Perhaps  from 
r^nac^  35ermogen»") 

12.  Sal^renbr  during.  Sometimes  with  the  dative:  n)a^renbbemf 
meanwhile. 

13.  935  e  g  e  tt,  on  account  of,  both  preceding  and  following  the  noun ; 


122  SYNTAX   OF  THE   PKEPOSITIOJST — DATIVE.  [303- 

also  with  the  dative.     SBegen  denotes  also  a  motive  and  an  impediment. 

(Seiner  ®ro§e  wegen  fonnte  basg  ©ii)iiT  nid^t  burd^  ben  M<xm\.  T)tx  SD^itlter  war 
wegen  [einer  <Btaxk  kru^mt.  SSegen  from  ijon  —  megcn,  still  common  in  „^on 
9iec^t^  ia?egen,"  strictly,  in  justice. 

14.  2B  i  n  e  n,  generally  u  nt  —  w  i  H  e  n,  denotes  the  purpose,  the  ad- 
vantage or  interest  of  a  person.  Urn  meiner  9^u^e  nsillen  erfldren  @ie  ftd^ 
beutUd)er  (Sch.).  Urn  be^  ©o^ne^  ttJiHen,  urn  meinetmillen,  for  the  sake  of  or  in 
the  interest  of  the  son,  for  my  sake.  2Begenr  ^alben,  and  njtCen  all  appear 
with  pronouns,  and  are  used  promiscuously. 

15.  3 u  f 0  I  ge,  as  frequently  with  the  dative,  denotes  the  result,  "  in 
consequence  of,"  Bufolge  be^  5luftrage^,  in  consequence  of  the  commission ; 
ben  SJerabrebungen  pfolse,  in  accordance  with  the  verbal  agreements. 

Prepositions  governing  the  Dative. 

303.  @(^reib:  mit,  nad),  nM)\t,  nebft,  famt;  feit,  "oon,  ju,  ^umi'ter; 
entgegen,  au^er,  au^  — fteto  mit  tern  Xati'o  nie^er* 

1.  ^  ^,  still  nsed  in  the  Alemanic  dialect  (Baden,  Switzerland)  as  a 
preposition.  In  business  style  it  denotes  the  place  from  which  merchan- 
dise is  delivered  or  the  time  after  which  anything  is  to  be  had  :  ab  |)am^ 
HxQ,  ah  ^tnia^x,  ab  =  "all  aboard.'' 

2.  5ru  ^  denotes  the  starting  point  of  a  motion,  the  opposite  of  in  + 
accusative,  =  "out  of,"  "from":  3lu^  ben  Slugen,  au^  bem  Sim,  '*out  of 
sight,  out  of  mind " :  au^  bem  ^enjler  fe^en,  to  look  out  of  the  window. 
Origin  and  descent:  an^  alten  Bciten,  from  olden  times;  au^  ^annoijer, 
from  Hanover.  Material :  au^  Se^m,  of  clay  :  m^  ?KefI,  of  meal.  Motive  : 
au^  5!)?itleib,  ^a^,  from  pity,  hatred.  Origin  also  in  au^  Srfa^runQf  from 
experience ;  au^  S^erfc^en,  by  mistake.  Notice  the  idiom  :  au^  ^iJln  geburtig, 
a  native  of  Cologne,  born  in  C. 

3.  5r  u  §  e  r,  outside  of,  beside,  the  opposite  of  in  +  dative.  Denotes 
also  exception  and  *'  in  addition  to."  More  frequent  in  the  figurative  than 
in  the  local  sense,  because  au§ert)alb  is  more  precise.  S(u§er  bem  ^aufe,  not 
at  home  ;  au^er  ^aufe  fpeifen,  to  dine  out  ;  au§er  ftc^  fetn,  to  be  beside  one's 
self,  ^nx  ber  S^etter  wax  an^er  mir  ba.  Mark  once  the  genitive  au§er  Sanbe^ 
ge^^en,  to  go  to  foreign  parts  ;  also  the  accusative  in  auper  alien  B»)cifel  fe^en» 
^  put  beyond  all  doubt.    (Se^en  being  a  verb  of  motion.) 

4.  S3et.  Original  meaning  is  nearness,  hence  by,  near,  with  :  bet  ber 
€?(^eune,  near  (by)  the  barn ;  bet  ber  Xante,  near  the  aunt  or  at  the  house  of 


303]  SYISTTAX  OF  THE   PREPOSTTIO:^^ — DATIVE.  123 

the  aunt ;  Oeim  ^tu^,  by  Jove  ;  bie  (Sd)la(^t  ki  255ort^,  the  battle  of  W.  ;  bei 
3:ifc^  fein,  to  be  at  dinner  ;  Bet  Xao,  unb  kt  ^a^i,  by  day  and  by  night ;  M 
(einem)  S'iamen  nennenf  to  call  by  name  (but  i^riebric^  m  i  t  Xiamen,  Frederic 
by  name) ;  Ui  (rare)  neunjig  ©efangenen,  about  ninety  prisoners ;  16et  (Strafe 
ijon  idjn  Maxh  ten  marks  fine.  3c^  ^abe  fetn  ®elb  bet  mtr,  I  have  no  money 
about  me.  The  accusative  stands  in  bei  Sette  legen,  bringen,  jleUeit,  to  lay, 
put  aside.  In  M.  H.  G.  after  verbs  of  motion  regularly  the  accusative, 
but  in  the  spoken  language  now  discarded,  though  still  found  in  the 
classics. 

5.  SBinnetif  sometimes  with  genitive,  expresses  now  time  only, 
''within^* :  binnett  bret  3a^rett;  within  three  years.     <  be  —  innen. 

6.  ©ntge'gen  denotes  approach,  both  friendly  and  hostile,  towards 
and  against ;  stands  generally  after  its  case.  Sir  gtitgen  bent  i^reunbe  txA^ 
gegett;  fu'^rett  '^zm  SBtttbe  entgegett.  With  verbs  of  motion  it  frequently  forms 
separable  compotmds  and  is  really  more  adverb  than  preposition. 

7.  ®  e  g  e  tt  u'  b  e  r,  opposite,  facing  ;  generally  after  its  case ;  rarely 
gegett  —  itber.    !£)em  (5(^loffe  gegettiiber* 

8.  ®  e  ttt  d  §,  preceding  and  following  its  case,  according  to,  in  accord- 
ance with  ;  really  an  adjective,  ^ent  35erfpred^ett  gemd^,  according  to  the 
promise ;  gemdf  bem  ©efe^e,  according  to  the  law.  It  is  more  definite 
than  tta(^» 

9.  •B'Jit  means  'Mn  company  with/'  *'with";  denotes  presence,  ac- 
companying circumstances  and  instrument.  %xm  in  5lrm  niit  btr,  fo  forb^'re 
ic^  metn  3a|r^unbert  in  bie  (Sc^ranfen  (Sch.).  ^tt  ^rcuben,  gladly;  ette  mit 
Seile,  hasten  slowly ;  mit  ^ug  unb  SRec^t,  justly  (emphatic) ;  mtt  ber  3eit 
pflitcft  ntan  0tofen,  in  due  time  .  .  .  ;  nttt  %\tx^t  intentionally  ;  mit  bem  ^^fetl, 
bem  «8ogen  (Sch.).    (See  mitteia,  302,  7.) 

10.  S'?  a  c^  denotes  originally  a  "  nearness  to,"  being  an  adjective  (na^e); 
then  *'a  coming  near  to,"  and  generally  corresponds  to  Eng.  "after"  in 
point  of  time,  order.  With  verbs  of  motion  (literal  and  figurative)  "  to  " 
and  "  after/'  9^a(^  etiuct^  flreben,  ftc^  fe^nen,  to  strive  after,  long  for  ;  m6)  '^xi" 
ternac^t  ;  nac^  bir  fomme  ic^,  it  is  my  turn  after  your ;  na(^  S3erlin  retfen*  *'  In 
accordance  with,"  not  so  expressive  as  wgemdp,"  in  this  sense  often  after 
its  case.  S'lac^  ben  ©efefeen  »erbient  er  ben  ^ob ;  \itm  2©ortlaute  na^,  literally. 
Aim:  m6)  ettx>a^  fc^Iagen,  f(^te§en,  to  strike  at,  shoot  at.  9^ac^  ettua^  fd^mecfen, 
rted)en;  etc.,  something  has  the  smell,  taste  of ;  m^  etma^  itrteilen,  to  judge 
by ;  nac^  etwa^  or  jemanb  f^icfen,  to  send  for.    (See  ju  and  gemdf 0 


124  SYNTAX   OF  THE   PREPOSITION" — DATIVE.  [303- 

11.  91  d  (^  ll  is  the  superlative  of  na^e  (nac^),  and  denotes  very  close 
nearness  to  in  place,  order,  =  +  *'  next  to."  Bundcbjl  lias  no  different  force. 
ilnb  nd(^|l  bem  Seben  n?a^  erfle^ft  bu  bir?  (G.). 

12.  ^tl\l  denotes  very  loose  connection  and  connects  also  things 
and  persons  not  necessarily  belonging  together;  famt,  on  the  other  hand, 
only  what  naturally  belongs  together.  5(uf  etner  (Stange  trdgt  jte  etneu  ^ut 
nebjl  einer  Saline  (Sch.)  (a  hat  and  a  banner).     <  nebenf!  <  L.  G.  nevens. 

13.  ©am  tf  mit  famt#  jit  \amt,  "  together  with."  ^id)  famt  ntctncm  gan^en 
^eere  bring^  ic^  bem  |)erjO(]  (Sch.).  See  neb)l.  It  implies  a  close  union,  which 
does  not  lie  even  in  mit* 

14.  ©  e  i  t,  older  jtnt,  =  +  since,  denotes  the  beginning  of  an  action  and 
its  duration  to  the  present  moment,  ©eit  biefem  S^age  fc^metgt  mir  jeber 
9)?unb  (Sch.).  ©r  ift  herein  feit  me:^reren  ©tunben  (id.),  it  is  several  hours  since 
he  came  in  (into  the  city). .  (Sett  einigen  3a^ren  ja^lt  er  feine  Binfen,  For  sev- 
eral years  he  has  paid  no  interest. 

15.  25  0  H/  *'  from,"  denotes  the  starting  point  of  a  motion  or  action  in 
time  and  place.  Its  case  is  often  followed  by  another  preposition  or  by 
Ijer.  S^on  ber  ^anb  in  ben  9)lunb;  ijon  2Borten  fam'^  ju  ©(^Idgen,  from  words 
they  came  to  blows.  23on  Dftern  U&  9?ftng|len  ifl  fiinfjig  2;age.  Origin : 
2Balt{)er  »on  ber  S^ogelmeibe*  %vix\t  »on  SBi^marcf.  ^err  i?on  (B(^uleml)urg» 
Hence  ijon  in  the  names  of  persons  denotes  nobility :  ^err  ijon  <Bo  unb  vSo,- 
S5on  Sugenb  auf;  »on  ®runb  au5,  thoroughly  ;  »on  Djlen  '^er.  Separation  : 
fret,  rein  »on  etma^.  Supplants  the  genitive  :  etn  ^ann  ijon  S^re,  »on  gro§en 
^enntniffen  ;  ber  ^oM  ijon  9)art^.  Denotes  the  personal  agent :  SBaHenjletn 
wurbe  i)Ott  ^Jtccolomtni  ^tntergangen  unb  i?on  »ielen  ©eneralen  im  'Bixd^t  (in  the 
lurch)  gelaffen.  Notice :  <B^nxh  ijon  einem  2Birt  (Le.).  Cause :  na§  »om 
(with)  %au,  ijom  Sffegen* 

16.  Bu  denotes  first  of  all  the  direction  toward  a  person  (but  m^ 
toward  a  thing)  +  "to" :  ju  jemanb  ge^en,  fommen,  |>red)en,  etc.  ©te  fang  ju 
i^m,  fie  fprac^  ju  t^m  (G.).  Bu  ft^  fommcn,  *'corae  to"  ;  etraa^  lu  fic^  jleto,  to 
put  something  in  one's  pocket.  (This  is  its  only  use  in  0.  H.  G.  In 
M.  H.  G.  its  use  spread.)  In  dialect  and  in  poetry  it  stands  before  names 
of  cities  and  towns  (=  at).  2n  ©tra§burg  auf  ber  (Bc()anj  (Folk-song).  3^r 
[etb  mcin  ®afl  ju  <Sd)ii3\)5  (Sch.). 

In  certain  very  numerous  set  phrases  and  proverbs  ju  stands  before 
names  of  things.  Direction:  ijon  Drt  ju  Drt,  from  place  to  place  ;  ju 
Sett(e),  lUx  Rxx^t,  jur  (Sc^ule,  ju  ©runbe,  ju  9iate  ge^en  =  "  take  council " ; 


i 


304]         SYNTAX   OF  THE   PREPOSITION — ACCUSATIVE.  125 

many  loose  compounds  with  fa^ren;  ju  %aUf  jit  (Statten,  ju  ^c^abcn/  p  Snbe, 
ju  (£t)ren  fommen;  lu  ^c^anben,  j«  ^Jtc^te;  jum  <£d)clme  ti^erben. 

Place  where  ? :  „5U  beibeit  ®eiten  bee  di^z'm^"  (Song) ;  ju  ^aufe,  pr  ^anb 
fetn;  ju  i^iipen  Uegen.  Manner  of  motion:  ju  ^an'o,  px  Staffer,  ^u  ^Jferb  (ju 
Sflo§),  jii  2Bagen^  ju  %u^  =  Eng.  ''by"  and  "on."  Transition  or  change : 
sum  ^onig  madden/  wa^leit,  ernenncn  ;  pm  ^Jarren,  jum  fcejlen  l^alm,  to  make  a 
fool  of.  Degree  or  size,  numbers  :  jitm  Zdl,  in  part ;  ju  |)unbertcn/  by  the 
liundred ;  ju  breien  ii?aren  n)ir  im  3iwtmer,  there  were  three  of  us  in  the 
room ;  jum  Xobt  ktriiM  (Gr.),  sad  unto  death.  Combination  of  things  : 
9?e^men  Sie  nie  ^^fejfer,  ©atj  ober  ©enf  ju  (with)  bem  Si?  Dft  |atf  er  faitm 
SBaffer  ju  ©d)tt)arj&rDt  itnb  2Bur|l  (Bii.).  Notice  the  use  of  ju  before  nouns 
followed  by  (^inein^  ^eraui3,  etc.:  jum  Sl^ore  l)inaue;  jitm  i^enfter  ^erau^.  Time 
(rare) :  Unb  fommt  er  ni^t  ju  Djlern,  fo  fommt  er  p  S^rinita't  (Folk-song).  After 
the  noun  =  "in  the  direction  of,"  "  toward"  :  bem  2)Drfe  p,  toward  the 
village  ;  md)  bem  Dorfe,  to  the  village. 

Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative: 

304.    Si^,  turc^,  fiir,  gegert,  o^ne,  foni^er,  urn,  mi^er* 

1.  35  i  ^,  till,  until,  denotes  the  limit  in  time  and  space.  When  denot- 
ing space  it  is  followed  by  other  prepositions,  except  before  names  of 
places.  The  nouns  of  time  rarely  have  an  article  or  pronoun.  35i^  ^aft^ 
nac^t ;  M^  an^  Snbe  aHer  Dinge  ;  M^  ^ierl)cr  unb  tti(^t  ji?eiter  ;  H^  an  ben  l^tUtn 
%Ci^ ;  neunjig  U^  ^unbert  Maxt;  M^  Sraunfc^weig.  (331^  <  hi  -f  a;s,  +  Eng. 
by  +  at.) 

2.  !Durd^r  +  "  through,"  denotes  a  passing  through  :  burc^  ben  SBalb^ 
bur(^^  S'iabelo^r*  Extent  of  time  (the  case  often  followed  by  ^tnbnrc^): 
burc^  Sa^rje^^nte  ^inburc^;  bk  ganje  Beit  (^in)bur(^.  Cause  and  occasion,  very 
much  like  au^  :  burc^  9'Jac^lafftgfeit,  burc^  eigene  (Bd^ulb.  Means:  burc^  einen 
^feil  »ern)unben,  burc^  einen  ^ienflmann  I^eforgen,  attend  to  through  a  porter, 
(X)urc^  more  definite  than  mit*  See  this  and  mittel^.  It  denotes  now  no 
longer  the  personal  agent.) 

3.  S  ii  r,  +  for,  denotes  advantage,  interest,  destination  :  2Ber  nic^t  fitr 
mi(^  i\t,  ijl  wtber  mt(^  (B.).  @r  fammelt  fitr  bie  airmen*  2)ie  (Sc^eere  x]!  fein  ©picl^ 
jeug  fiir  ^inber.  !Dte  3Ba^rI)eit  x\i  i)or()anben  fitr  ben  SBeifen,  bie  ©c^on^eit  fiir  ein 
fit^lenb  ^erj  (Sch.).  Substitution  and  price  :  !l)a  tritt  fetn  anberer  fur  i^n  cin 
(Sch.).  9)?etn  2thin  ij^  fitr  ®oIb  ntd)t  fcil  (Bu.).  Limitation  :  Sc^  fur  meine 
^erfon*  ®enug  fitr  btefe^  ^aL  S^r  jeigtct  einen  fecfen  5D?ut  ,  ♦  ♦  fitr  eure  3a^re 
(Sch.).  (BtM  fitr  <BtM,  point  by  point.  In  its  old  sense  (local)  only  in 
certain  phrases  :  (Bdjxitt  fitr  (by)  (Bd)xxn,  %aQ  fitr  (by)  Xac^,  <Ba^  fitr  (after) 
S'a|^*     (See  ^or.) 


126  SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREP0SITI0I5" — ACCUSATIVE.         [304- 

4.  ®  e  9  e  n  denotes  "  direction  toward,"  but  with  no  idea  of  approach 
that  lies  in  ju  and  nac^.  It  implies  either  friendly  or  hostile  feeling  if 
persons  are  concerned  ='*  towards,'"  "against."  ®egen  bit  SSanb  le^nen; 
gegen  ben  Strom  fc^wimmcn*  SBenn  ic^  Tni(^  gegen  fte  ijerpflic^ten  \oU,  fo  muffen  fie"*^ 
au^  gegen  mic^  (Sch.).  ®ibt  t^  ein  SDlittel  gegen  bte  ©c^|[»tnbfuc^t  ?  ©egen  ^umm*' 
|eit  fdmpfen  ©otter  felbf^  ijerge&en^»  Exchange,  comparison  :  3^  mtit  ^unbert 
gegen  ein^.  SfJoIanb  toar  ein  3n?erg  gegen  ben  Otiefen.  Indefinite  time  and  num- 
ber: "towards."  2)er  ^ranfe  fc^lief  erfl  gegen  ^D^orgen  ein.  !Der  ^5elb^err  |)atte 
gegen  brei^unbert  taufenb  ©olbaten*  ©egen  bret  U^r.  ©egen  once  governed  the 
dative  almost  exclusively  and  traces  of  it  are  still  found  in  Goethe. 

®  e  n  is  still  preserved  in  «gen  ^immel/'  ®en  <  gtn  <  gein  <  gegen, 
+  again.     See  entgegen/  which  implies  a  mutual  advance. 

5.  £)i)n  e,  ''  without,"  the  opposite  of  „mtt,"  «^et."  9)?tt  ober  o^ne  Maufel, 
gilt  mtr  gleic^  (Sch.),  "  With  or  without  reserve,  it  is  all  the  same  to  me." 
Sin  ^flitter  o^ne  ^5ur(^t  unb  S^abel.  In  wO^nebem"  is  a  remnant  of  the  D.  in 
M.  H.  G. ;  jweifel^o^ne  of  the  G.  occurring  after  the  M.  H.  G.  adverb  dne, 
from.  Stmai3  t|l  nic^t  o'^ne,  there  is  something  in  it  (Coll.).  D^ne  m  Com- 
position, see  489,  3  ;  +  infinitive,  see  291,  1. 

6.  ©onber,  ''without,"  is  now  archaic  except  in  set  pnrases  like 
wfonber  ®leid)en,"  wfonber  Btvetfel,"  "  without  compare,"  "  no  doubt,"  +  Eng. 
asunder.     Once  governed  the  accusative  and  genitive. 

7.  Um,  "around,"  "  about."  Unb  bte  <Sonne,  jte  ntacbte  ben  tr>etten  0litt  urn 
bte  2Belt  (Arndt).  Unb  mn  i^n  bte  ®ro§en  ber  .^rcne  (Sch.).  ^er  or  ^erum  often 
follows  the  case :  3n  einem  ^albfret^  jlanben  urn  i^n  ^er  fed^^  ober  jtekn  gro^e 
^onig^Mlber  (Sch.).  It  denotes  inexact  time  or  number:  Um  9J?ttternad)t 
begral^t  ben  ;2ei6  (Bii.).  Urn  brei  ^unbert  ^orer,  an  audience  of  about  three 
hundred.  (®egen  is  rather  "  nearly,"  um  means  more  or  less.)  But  „um 
breiijiertet  fitnf"  means  "at  a  quarter  to  five."  ''At  about"  would  be 
ffiingefd^r  um''  or  ^um  ungefd^r,"  e.  g.,  ungefdBr  um  6  U^r.  It  denotes  further 
exchange,  price,  difference  in  size  and  measure :  ^ug"'  um  5[uger  B^^n  um 
3a^n  (B.).  mt^  ifl  eu^  feil  um  ®elb  (Sch.).  Um  ^ei  BoH  ju  flein.  ©r  ^at 
ji(^  um  jwei  5)fenntge  verrec^net*  Loss  and  deprivation  :  um**^  ;2eBen  Bringen,  to 
kill ;  um^^  ®elb  fommen^  to  lose  one's  money,  ^a  n?ar^^  um  i^n  gefd^e^n  (G.), 
He  was  done  for.  SBer  brad^te  mid)  brum?  (um  beine  Siebe)  (F.  4496),  Who 
robbed  me  of  it?  It  denotes  the  object  striven  for:  um  etnja^  n?erben, 
fptelen,  frageUf  Ibitten,  f^retteUf  beneiben,  etc.  The  object  of  care,  mourning, 
weeping ;  SBein^  um  ben  S3ruber,  boc^  md)t  um  ben  ©eltebten  toeine  (Sch.).  (Bd)abe 
tt)dr^0  ViXSi  eure  ^aare  (id.).     9^tc^t  um  biefe  t^ut^^  mir  leib  (id.). 


308]         THE  PEEPOSITIOK — DATIYE  AKD  ACCUSATIVE.         127 

8.  2B  i  b  e  r,  **  against,"  always  in  the  hostile  sense.  Denotes  resistance 
and  contrast :  2Ba^  ^tlft  un^  ^t1)x  unb  SBaffe  mbtx  ben  ?  (Sch.).  ©^  ge^t  i^m 
tt>iber  bie  S^latur,  It  goes  against  his  grain.    +  Eng.  "  with  "  in  withstand. 


Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  and  Accusative. 

305.  2ln,  anl  ()inter,  in,  mUn,  nUx,  unkx,  vor,  jtuifci^en. 

1.  In  answer  to  the  question  whither  ?  they  require  the 
accusative.  In  answer  to  the  question  where?  the  dative. 
3)flan3C  tie  Siiume  ijor  t)a^  $au^*    tk  SSaume  fte^^en  vor  l^em  ipaufe. 

2.  In  answer  to  the  question  how  long  and  until  when  ? 
they  require  the  accusative.  In  answer  to  the  question  when  ? 
the  dative :  3«t  ^ai^n  1872  murtc  ©trapurg  toituv  aU  Deutfdje 
Uni^erfitat  erojfnet*     Sir  reifert  auf  v^ier^e^n  ^age  in^  Sat)* 

3.  When  an,  auf,  in,  ixln,  unter,  ^or  denote  manner  and  cause, 
then  auf  and  ixbtx  always  require  the  accusative,  but  an,  in,  unter, 
^or  generally  the  dative,  in  answer  to  the  questions  how  and 
why?  2Bir  freuen  un^  ixUv  {=  over)  and  auf  (=  looking  for- 
ward to)  feme  9ln!unfL  2luf  tiefe  SBeife,  but  in  tiefer  ^eife. 
Der  Settler  n?einte  ijor  ^i^euten  iiber  tie  ^errli^e  ®at)e. 

The  above  general  rules,  as  given  in  Kraase's  grammar,  will  be  found  of  much 
practical  value. 

306.  1.  5ln  +  Dative. 

After  nouns  and  adjectives  of  plenty  and  want :  Syjangel  an  ®elb,  nx^  an 
©utern.  After  adjectives  when  the  place  is  mentioned  where  the  quality 
appears :  an  beiben  %}X^tr\  la^m,  an  einem  Sluge  Minb.  After  verbs  of  rest, 
increase  or  decrease,  and  after  those  denoting  an  immediate  contact 
or  a  perception  :  %n  ber  ^mUt  fag  bcr  ^nabe  (Sch.).  (£0  fe^lt  an  33iid)ern. 
!Der  5lu^tx)anberer  lltt  am  2Be*feIfteber»  t)tx  Si^euner  fii^rt  ben  S3dren  an  einer 
.R'ette,  !Den  SJogel  er!ennt  man  an  ben  i^ebern  (Prov.).  It  denotes  an  office 
and  time  of  day  :  am  2:^eater,  an  ber  Uni^erjttat,  am  ^mte  angefiellt  fein,  to 
hold  an  office  at  ...  ;  am  Wlox^tn,  %knt> ;  e^  ijl  an  ber  Beit  .  .  ♦ ,  it  is 
time  .... 


128       THE  PEEPOSITIOK — DATIVE  AI^D  ACCUSATIVE.        [306- 

2.  21  n  +  Accusative. 

After  htnUn,  erinncrn,  m^nen  and  similar  ones,  and  verbs  of  motion, 
2)eufet  an  ben  9^u^m,  nid^t  an  bie  ®efa|r.  (Se^en  (Bit  ft(^  bo(^  an^  %tn^tx  (near 
tlie  window).  Inexact  number :  an  bie  brei  mai  ^unbert  taufcnb  Mann  (as 
many  as).  From  its  English  cognate  "on"  an  differs  very  much  in 
meaning.    *'  On  "  generally  is  auf.     See  also  300,  2. 

3.  2iuf  +  "upon."  For  auf  +  Dative,  see  305,  1,  2,  3. 
It  denotes  rest  or  motion  upon  the  surface, 

3luf  +  Accusative. 

Stands  after  verbs  of  waiting,  hoping,  trusting,  etc.,  e.g.,  auf  ctn)a^ 
tt>arten,  ^ojTen,  fi(^  kftnnen  (recall),  gefapt  fetn,  fic^  frenen  (see  305,  3),  ijerjic^ten^ 
(e$)  auf  etma^  wagenf  ^oren.  Here  it  stands  generally  for  the  old  gen.  with- 
out preposition.  3^  tann  mx6)  auf  bie  genauen  Umftanbe  ni^t  ibeftnnen,  I  cannot 
recall  .  .  .  ©er  |)unb  njartet  auf  fein  ^reffen,  SKerfe  auf  bie  ^cxit  be^  Se:^rerd. 
Zxot^t  ni(^t  auf  euer  9^e(iyt  (Sch.).  After  adjectives  denoting  pride,  envy, 
anger,  malice,  e.g.,  eiferfiic^tigf  neibif(^,  ftolj,  Bijfe,  txlo\t:  eiferfud)ti9  auf  feme 
©i)re  (Sch.) ;  jlol^  auf  feine  Unfc^ulb;  erbofl  auf  ben  ©efangenen  (it^er  would  mean 
cause).  Exact  time,  limit,  and  measure  ;  often  with  ,M^,*'  Here  belongs 
the  superlative,  see  300,  2.  S5t^  auf^g  SBIut,  S3i^  auf  Speif'  unb  2:ranf 
(Le.).  (£^  tfl  ein  2?iertel  auf  brei,  a  quarter  past  two.  ^uf  bie  SD^Jinu'ter 
^efu'nbef  auf  ©c^u§n)ette,  at  shooting  distance.  S3i^  auf  bie  S^Jeige,  to  the 
last  drop.  5(uf  fteben  fc^on  eine^  mieber  (Le.).  (Nathan  had  '*  toward  "  or 
"  as  a  return  for  "  his  seven  dead  sons  one  child  in  Reclia.)  2luf  eine  Maxf 
ge:^en  l^unbert  3>fennige. 

4.  $  t  n  t  e  r  +  "  behind,"  opposite  of  ,fiovJ'    See  305, 1,  2. 

It  denotes  inferiority  :  Die  franjoftfc^e  ^frtitlerie  f!anb  mlt  Winter  ber  beutf(i)en 
IwxM  (ambiguous,  either  stood  far  back  of  the  G.  or  was  much  inferior  to 
the  G.).  Notice  the  following  idioms  :  fid)  Winter  etttja^  madjen,  to  go  at  with 
energy.  3(^  !ann  nid^t  baMnter  fommen,  I  cannot  understand  it.  (S^  Winter 
ben  D^ren  ^aben,  to  be  sly  (coll.) ;  Winter  bie  D:^ren  fd)Iagen,  to  give  a  box  on 
the  ear  ;  ft^  et»a^  l^inter  bie  D^ren  f^reikn,  to  mark  well. 

5.  3^  +  in,  into  (A.). 

The  German  and  English  prepositions  are  more  nearly  identical  than 
any  other  two.     See  305,  1,  2. 


306]        THE  PREPOSITION — DATIVE  AlTD   ACCUSATIVE.  129 

3tt  +  Accusative. 

Denotes  direction,  including  transition,  change,  division  :  SSettn  ber 
2iih  in  @taui)  jerfaEen,  lebt  ber  gro^e  9lame  noc^  (Sch.).  2)eutf^lattb  jenig  auf 
bicfem  0Jei(^^tage  in  stt)ei  Oieligio'nen  unb  imi  ^olitifc^e  5)artei'cn  (id.). 

6.  ^  e  b  e  n,  near,  by  the  side  of.  See  305;  1,  2.  <  eneben, 
lit.  "in  a  line  with." 

7.  Uber  +  over,  above.     See  305,  1,  2,  3. 

iiber  +  Accusative. 

After  verbs  denoting  rule  and  superiority  over,  e.g.,  l^errfi^enf  ftegenf 
vcrfiigen  (dispose) ;  laughter,  astonishment,  disgust,  in  general  an  expres- 
sion of  an  affection  of  the  mind,  e.  g.,  itber  etn)as$  la^en,  erftaunen,  ft(|  ♦  ♦  .  ^e^ 
nagen,rtc^  .  .  ♦  entritjlen,  fic^  argern.  (For  an  older  simple  genit.)  ^arlber^ro^e 
ftcgtc  uber  bte  ©ac^fen.  ^a^  3:e|lament  ^erfiigt  iiber  ein  groped  33ermogen.  2Bie 
fhi^te  ber  9)okl  iiber  bie  neuen  Si^re^en  (G-.).  'Die  ©efangenen  kflagen  ftc^  uber 
i^re  S3e|anblung.  fiber  fein  S3ene^men  haU  id)  nti(^  rec^t  gecirgert.  It  denotes 
time  and  excess  in  time,  number,  measure :  Uber^^  3a^r,  a  year  hence, 
only  in  certain  phrases,  duration  :  iiber  S^ac^t,  bie  S^a^t  uber,  !Den  (Sabbat^ 
iiber  tt)aren  fie  jlille  (B.).  Uber  ein  Sa^r,  more  than  a  year  (ambiguous, 
either  *'more  than  a  year''  or  "  a  year  hence  ").  Uber  brei  taufenb  ^anonen. 
iiber  aUe  33egviffe  [d)on,  beautiful  beyond  comprehension. 

When  it  denotes  duration  or  simultaneousness,  or  when  the  idea  of 
place  is  still  felt,  then  the  dative  follows ;  when  it  denotes  the  reason 
then  the  accusative  follows.  This  is  clear  when  the  same  noun  stands 
in  both  cases,  as  in  3c^  bin  iiber  bem  33u(^e  eingefc^Iafen,  means  "  while  reading 
it  I  fell  asleep."  ^d)  bin  iiber  ba^  33uc^  etngefc^Iafen  means  "it  was  stupid, 
therefore  I  fell  asleep."  Uber  ber  S3efd)reibnn9  ha  ijergefp  id)  ben  ganjen  ^rieg 
(Sch.).  (Sd}abe,  ba^  uber  bem  fd)onen  2Bai)n  be^  Cel)en^  ^efle  |)dlfte  ba^in  ge^t 
(Sch.). 

Notice  »0n  ttwa^  and  iiber  etwa^  fprec^en.  Sc^  ^a^e  batjon  gcfprod^cn/  I  have 
mentioned  it.  3d)  f)CLU  bariiber  gefproc^en,  I  have  treated  of  it,  spoken  at 
length. 

8.  Uttter  +  under.     See  305,  3. 

In  the  abstract  sense  this  rule  holds  good.  It  denotes  protection,  in- 
feriority, lack  in  numbers  (Dative,  opposite  of  iiber),  mingling  with,  con- 
temporaneous circumstance  (D.).  It  stands  for  the  partitive  genit. 
(=  among).  Unter  bem  ©c^u^e.  2)er  i^elbwe^el  fie|t  itnter  bem  Dfftuer.  2©er 
tt)itt  unter  bie  ©obaten,  ber  .  ♦  .  ,  he  who  wants  to  become  a  soldier  (Folk- 


130  SYKTAX  OF  THE  CONJUl^CTIONS.  [308- 

song).  ®r  t|^  brunter  geBUebenr  te  did  not  reach  the  number.  Sambrai 
offnete  fetnem  (BxMi^oft  unter  (amid)  freubigem  3urufc  bie  Sl^ore  tuieber  (Sch.), 
2Ber  unter  (among)  biefen  (D.)  reid^t  an  unfern  i^rteblanb  ?  (Sch.)  (^on  biefen  would 
be  "  of  these  ").  It  denotes  time  when  none  of  the  exacter  modes  of  ex- 
pressing time  is  used  :  2Bir  finb  geboren  unter  gleic^en  (Sternen  (Sch.).  Unter 
ber  Olegterung  ber  ^onigin  S5tctoria  =  in  the  reign  ;  n^ci^renb  implies  not  a  sin- 
gle act,  but  a  commensurate  duration,  =  during,  ^er  ©afrifta'n  f(^Uef 
KDOt^renb  ber  S^rebtgt,  but  gtng  unter  ber  ^^rebigt  ^tnau^*  In  «unterbeffen,"  and 
other  compounds  of  that  class,  inbeffen,  etc.,  the  gen.  is  probably  adverbial 
and  not  called  for  by  the  preposition. 
See  jn)ifcl)en. 

9.  S5  0  r  4-  before,  in  front  of.     See  305,  1,  2,  3. 
SSor  +  Dative. 

Introduces  the  object  of  fear  and  abhorrence  ;  .^etn  ©ifengttter  f(^u^t  »or 
t^rer  Sift  (Sch.).  S5or  9ett)iffen  ©rinnerungen  moc^t^  i6)  mic^  gem  pten  (id.).  Wlix 
grant  ijor  bir.  Time  before  which  anything  is  to  happen  or  has  happened : 
Der  ^onig  if!  gefonnen,  ijor  5(knb  in  9)labrib  nod)  einjutrefen  (Sch.).  25or  brei^ig 
3a^ren,  thirty  years  ago.  S5or  ad)t  Za^tn,  a  week  ago.  Hindrance  and 
cause  :  Die  ®ro§ntutter  mxh  i)or  Summer  jlerkn  (Sch.).  Den  SBalb  »or  lauter 
S3aumcn  nic^t  fet)en  (Prov.).  S3or  hunger,  i)or  Durjl  jler^en.  Preference  :  »or 
aKen  Dingen,  above  all  things ;  :^errli(^  ijor  alien. 

25  or  and  fur  are  doublets  and  come  from  for  a  and  furi  respectively.  In 
M.  H.  G.  fur  +  A.  answered  the  question  whither  ?  wr  +  D.  the  ques- 
tion where  ?  In  N.  H.  G.  they  were  confounded,  even  in  Lessing  very 
frequently,  but  in  the  last  seventy  years  the  present  syntactical  difference 
has  prevailed.    Goethe  and  Schiller  rarely  confound  them 

10.  Qn^ii&jtn. 

"  Between  "  two  objects  in  place,  time,  and  in  the  figurative  sense.  9iein 
mup  e^  Meikn  jn)ifd)en  mir  unb  i^m  (Sch.).  Die  ©olfenfaute  tarn  jtt)ifd)en  ba^  ^eer 
ber  S9t)pter  unb  ba^  |)eer  3^rael^  (B.).  See  305, 1,  2  ;  also  unter  =  among, 
sub  8. 

SYNTAX   OF   THE   CONJUNCTIONS. 

307.  The  conjunctions  are  divided :  1.  Into  the  coordinat- 
ing, like  unb,  lenn,  etc. ;  2.  Into  the  subordinating,  e.  g.,  mil, 
1)a,  aU,  etc.  They  are  treated  in  the  General  Syntax,  where 
see  the  various  clauses. 


309]  GEKERAL  SYNTAX — SIMPLE   SENTENCE.  131 

GENERAL    SYNTAX. 
I.    THE   SIMPLE   SENTENCE. 

308.  Subject  and  verb  make  up  the  simple  sentence.  This 
sentence  may  be  expanded  by  complements  of  the  subject  and 
of  the  verb.  The  subject  may  be  either  a  substantive,  a  sub- 
stantive pronoun,  or  other  words  used  as  substantives.  The 
attributes  of  the  subjects  may  be  adjective,  participle,  adjec- 
tive pronouns,  numerals.  These  are  adjective  attributes. 
Substantives,  substantive  pronouns,  and  the  infinitive  are 
substantive  attributes.  Their  relation  to  the  subject  may  be 
that  of  apposition  and  of  coordination;  or  they  may  be  con- 
nected by  the  genitive,  or  by  preposition  +  case  in  subordi- 
nation. Preposition  +  case  is  more  expressive  than  the 
genitive  alone,  when  the  subject  is  to  be  defined  as  to  time, 
place,  value,  kind,  means,  purpose. 

The  predicate  is  either  a  simple  verb  or  a  copula  +  adjec- 
tive or  substantive  or  pronoun  which  may  be  again  expanded 
like  the  subject.  The  complements  of  the  verb  are  object  and 
adverb.  The  object  is  either  a  noun,  substantive  pronoun,  or 
other  words  used  as  nouns.  It  stands  in  the  accusative,  dative 
or  genitive,  or  is  expressed  by  preposition  +  case.  The 
adverb  qualifies  the  verb,  adjective,  and  other  adverb.  It  is 
either  an  adverb  proper  or  preposition  +  case  of  substan- 
tive or  what  is  used  as  such.  It  may  also  be  a  genitive  or  an 
accusative. 

309.  As  to  form  the  main  sentences  may  be  divided  as 

follows  : 

1.  Declarative  sentences,  which  either  affirm  something  of 
the  subject  or  deny  something  with  regard  to  it.  Affirmative  : 
^ura  tft  Ux  Sd^merj  unt)  mx^  ift  Dit  SreuDe  (Sch.).  Du  haft  'Eta^ 
ma'ntm  unD  5)erlen  (Heine).     Negative  :  Xa^  SeBen  ift  t»er  ©liter 


]32  GEN^ERAL  SYNTAX— SIMPLE   SE;NrTE:N'CE.  [309- 

l)od)fte5  ni&jt  (Sch.).     ©ie  foEen  x^n  nidfet  ^aUn,  ten  freien  teutf^en 
m^tin  (Beck). 

1.  The  double  negative  is  still  freqaent  in  the  classics  and  collo- 
quially, but  it  is  not  in  accordance  with  correct  usage  now  :  ^eine  £uft  S)OU 
feiner  Seite  (G-.,  classical).  Man  fte^tr  t»a^  er  an  nic^t^  feinen  5(nteil  nimmt 
(F.  3489)  (said  by  Margaret,  coll.).  After  the  comparative  it  also  occurs 
in  the  classics  :  ^ir  muiTen  t>a^  sBerf  in  biefen  ndd)tlen  Za^tn  miitx  forbern,  al^ 
e^  in  Sa^ren  ntd)t  gebiel)  (Sch.). 

2.  After  verbs  of  *'liinderiDg,"  -'forbidding/'  " warning,"  like  i)er=* 
pten,  ijeri^inbernf  warnen,  ijerMcten,  etc.,  the  dependent  clause  may  contain 
„m(^U:  5^ur  ptet  euc^,  ba§  i^r  mir  ni(^t^  ^ergiept  (G.).  S'^imm  bic^  in  5lc^t,  bag 
bic^  fHa^t  nii^t  »erberk  (Sch.). 

3.  When  the  negative  does  not  affect  the  predicate,  the  sentence  may 
still  be  affirmative.  S'ii^t  ntir,  ben  eignen  Slugen  mogt  i^r  glauben  (Sch.).  But 
nid^t  mir  stands  for  a  whole  sentence. 

2.  Interrogative  sentences:  $aft  tu  ba^  ©(^log  pefe^en?  (Uli.). 
2Ber  reitet  fo  f))dt  burd^  5^a^t  unt)  2Cmt)  ?  (G.).  Double  question  : 
SBar  ber  Settler  ^erriicft  ober  tt>ar  er  betrunfen?  (Slaubft  bu  tai3  ober 
niftt?    SBillft  ^u  immer  wetter  fcfctt»eifen  ?  (G.).    2l>er  meip  ba^  nid^t  ? 

For  the  potential  subjunctive  in  questions,  see  284,  3. 
For  the  indirect  question,  see  325,  2. 

3.  The  exclamatory  sentence  has  not  an  independent  form. 
Any  other  sentence,  even  a  dependent  clause,  may  become 
exclamatory:  D,  In  S^alb,  o  i^r  Serge  bru6en  mie  feib  i^r  fo  jung 
geBUeben  unb  ic^  Hn  morben  fo  alt!  (Uh.).  I)a^  ijt  ta^  £o^  te^ 
©d)onen  auf  ^er  grbe !  (Sch.).  Sa^  unV  (owe)  t(^  i^m  nidJt  aUt^  I 
(id.).    2Bte  ber  ^nabe  geivac^fen  ift ! 

For  the  imperative  and  optative  sentences,  see  284,  2 ;  280. 

310.  Elliptical  clauses  generally  contain  only  the  predicate 
or  a  part  of  it,  including  the  object  or  adverb,  ©iiten  3}?orgen  ! 
(53elt !  Truly !  ©etroffen  I  You  have  hit  it !  Sauiifam  I  (Sc^neU ! 
etc.    It  is  very  frequent  in  the  imperative,  see  287. 

Proverbs  often  omit  the  verb :  fSul  ©ef^rei  unb  tventg  2BcIIe.  ^leine 
^inbcr,  Heine  8orgen;  gro^e  ^inber/  grcpe  (Borgen.  See  309,  3,  in  which  the 
last  examples  are  really  dependent  questions. 


313]  GENERAL   SYNTAX — SIMPLE   SENTENCE.  133 

Concord  of  Subject  and  Predicate. 

311.  The  predicate  (verb)  agrees  with  the  subject  in  num- 
ber and  person. 

Two  or  more  subjects  (generally  connected  by  unD)  require 
a  verb  in  the  plural :  Unter  Den  3liwejcnten  n^ed^feln  gurd)t  mil 
Srftaunen  (Sch.).  "Lo&i  an  ttm  ^er^en  nagten  mlr  Ux  Unmut  nrit)  tie 
©treitbegier  (id.). 

1.  If  the  subjects  are  conceived  as  a  unit  and  by  a  license  greater  in 
German  than  in  English,  the  verb  may  stand  in  the  singular  ;  also  in  the 
inverted  order  if  the  first  noun  is  in  the  singular.    Ex. :   Wa^  x\t  ba^  fur 

eiu  ^am,  t>a§  i^m  2i5inb  unb  Mm  ge^orfam  ift  (B.).  ©^^  fprcc^e  SBelt  unb  ^a6)^ 
mlt,  etc.  (Sch.).  !Da  fommt  ber  MHer  unb  feine  ^nec^te*  By  license  :  (Ba^m 
unb  Xl^un  ijl  jweicrlel  (Prov.).  ©a^  sjjji^trauen  unb  bie  Siferfuc^t  .  .  ♦  ertt)ac^te 
Mb  tDteber  (Sch.). 

2.  The  plural  verb  stands  after  titles  in  the  singular  in  addressing 
royalty  and  persons  of  high  standing.  In  speaking  of  ruling  princes  the 
plural  also  stands.  Servants  also  use  it  in  speaking  of  their  masters 
when  these  have  a  title.  Ex.:  Sure  ((£tr>.)  9)?aieftdt,  2)urc^lau(^t,  ©xcettenj 
kfe^ten?  (Seine  SJJaiefldt  ber  ^atfer  ^aben  geru^t,  etc.  !Der  |)err  ©e^eime 
|)ofrat  finb  nic^t  ju  |)aufe.    !^ie  ^errfc^aft  jtnb  aus^gegangcn. 

312.  After  a  collective  noun  the  verb  stands  more  regularly 
in  the  singular  than  in  Eng.  Only  when  this  noun  or  an  in- 
definite numeral  is  accompanied  by  a  genitive  pi.,  the  plural 
verb  is  the  rule.  In  earl^^N.  H.  G.  (B.)  this  plural  was  very 
common.  IDie  ^^en^e  flot).  Mt  ffielt  nimmt  Jetl  (G.).  Unb  Ui 
Junge  35oI!  ber  ©(^nttter  ftiegt  jum  Xan^  (Sch.).  3lIIe  SJlenge  ^eine^ 
ipaufe^  follen  fterkn  (B.). 

313.  When  the  subject  is  a  neuter  pronoun,  e^,  Me^,  H^, 
etc.,  the  neuter  verb  agrees  with  the  predicate  noun  or  sub- 
stantive pronoun  in  number:  T)a^  tt?aren  mir  felige  ^age  (Over- 
beck).  S^  finb  tie  ^ruc^te  i^re^  2;^un^  (Sch.).  S^  jogen  trel  3ager 
ti?ot)I  auf  t)ie  Sirf(^  (Uh.).  In  this  case  e^  is  only  expletive.  2Ser 
fmt)  l)iefe  ? 


134  GEKERAL  SYNTAX — SIMPLE   SENTEITCE.  [314- 

314.  When  subjects  are  connected  by  cntn?et)er  —  ot>er,  nid^t 
nur  —  font^ern  au(^,  irer)er  —  no(^,  fotro^l  —  aU  {au6^),  the  verb  has 
the  person  and  number  of  the  first  subject  and  joins  this  one 
if  the  subjects  are  of  different  persons.  The  verb  for  the 
second  subject  is  omitted.  dnimUx  t)U  Qtl)\t  (or  gebft  In)  oDn 
id)*  ZdU  tear  \6:i  f(^ult),  ttiU  er.  Subjects  of  the  same  person 
connected  by  the  above  correlatives  ;  by  ot^er,  nebft,  mit,  famt 
have  as  a  rule  a  singular  verb  and  the  verb  joins  the  second 
subject.  i;)em  3?oI!e  tann  mux  geuer  bet  nodj  2Baffer  (Sch.), 
Neither  fire  nor  water  can  harm  those  people. 

315.  If  the  subjects  are  of  different  persons,  the  first  has 
the  preference  over  the  second,  the  second  over  the  third. 
Moreover,  the  plural  of  the  respective  pronouns  is  often 
added.  Der  la  unt>  idj,  toix  ftnt)  an^  Sger  (Sch.).  X)u  unt>  ter 
Setter,  (t^r)  gel)t  nac^  ipaufe. 

The  adjective  as  a  predicate  or  attribute  has  been  sufficiently  treated 
under  the  adjective,  see  210-225. 

316.  The  noun  as  a  predicate  agrees  with  the  subject  in 
case  ;  if  the  subject  is  a  person,  also  in  number  and  gender, 
but  in  the  latter  only  when  there  are  special  forms  for  mascu- 
line and  feminine.  See  167.  Ex.:  Die  S:>eltgef^id^te  ift  U^ 
SSeItgen*t  (Sch.).  Xie  5Rot  ift  W  Gutter  ter  grfin1)ung  (Prov.). 
£a^  5iKat(^ett  tr>iE  je^t  Sraie^erin  mxUn,^utx\i  woEte  fie  ©c^aufpielerin 
itjerben. 

1.  If  one  person  is  addressed  as  ©te  or  3^r,  the  substantive  stands  of 
course  in  the  singular.  „(Bk  finb  etn  grower  Mn\itx  tm  (Sc^ie^en."  Poetic  and 
emphatic  are  such  turns  as  :  Olegierte  S^lec^t  fo  laget  t^r  i)or  mir  tnt  Staubc  ie|t, 
benn  id)  bin  (Suer  ^onig  (Sch. ,  spoken  by  Maria  Stuart). 

317.  The  substantive  in  apposition  has  the  same  concords 
as  the  substantive  in  the  predicate,  only  the  rule  as  to  case  is 
frequently  found  unobserved  in  the  best  writers.  S3a^  Senu^ 
bant),  t)ie  Sringerin  te^  Q^iM^,  tarn  "SHnx^,  ter  (Bttxn  U^  Ungliirf^ 


320]  GEKERAL  SYNTAX — COMPOUND  SENTENCE.  135 

fcbnea  aerreigen  (Sch.).     3^r  fennet  i^tt,  ben  ®c^b))fer  fu^ner  §eere 
(id.). 

The  apposition  may  be  emphasized  by  namlic^  and  aU  :  S^nen,  a\^  einem 
gereiften  Mamt,  glauben  )»ir. 

II.    THE  COMPOUND  SENTENCE. 

318.  The  compound  sentence  consists  of  two  or  more 
clauses,  which  may  be  coordinate  (of  equal  grammatical 
value)  or  subordinate  (one  dependent  upon  the  other). 

Coordinate  Sentences. 
We  may  distinguish  various  kinds  of  coordinate  sentences, 
which  may  or  may  not  be  connected  by  conjunctions. 

319.  Copulative  Sentences.  The  conjunctions  mit),  au6>, 
t)ei:gleid)en,  gletd^fall^,  ebenfall^,  and  their  compounds,  teegleidjen 
au*,  fo  aud),  eknfo  aud^;  niAt  ttur  —  fonbem  an6:j;  m4t  allein  — 
fon^ern  aud^ ;  fottio^l  —  aU  (auc^)  ;  iceter  —  no^  indicate  mere 
parataxis.  Qvittm,  au§ert)em,  iiberi^te^,  ia,  fogar,  }a  fogar,  ijielme^r 
emphasize  the  second  clauses.  Partitive  conjunctions  are 
teil^  —  tetl^,  |aIB  —  ^alb,  pm  Sell  —  ^um  ZdL  Ordinal  con- 
junctions are  erften^  —  gnjeiten^,  etc.  ;  juerjl  —  tann  —  ferner, 
enl)lici),  3ule|t;  Bait) — Bal^.  Explanatory  are  namltdb,  unt)  jtt)an 
Ex. :  !Die  ^iiV  ifl  Hetn,  t)er  @pa^  tft  gro§  (F.  4049).  §alb  309  fte 
i:^n,  ^alb  fang  er  ^tn  (G.).  3d)  mttl  tretJer  (eugnen  noc^  befc^ontgen, 
M^  i4  fie  Berebete  (id.).  5^id^t  attein  Me  erften  SSliiten  fallen  ab, 
fonbern  anc^  bie  griic^te  (id.). 

1.  Notice  that  the  adverbial  conjunctions  such  as  balb,  lult^t,  battn, 
njcber  —  noc^,  ^alb,  tetl^,  etc.,  always  cause  inversion.  Some  admit  of 
inversion,  but  do  not  require  it,  e.g.,  m^,  erf!en^,  ndmlid^.  The  ordinal 
conjunctions  and  namltc^  are  frequently  separated  by  a  comma,  then  no 
inversion  takes  place,  ©rften^  ifl  e^  fo  bcr  Sraitd^,  jweiten^  Witt  ntan^^  felber 
aii(^  (Busch). 

320.  Adversative  Sentences.  1.  One  excludes  the  other 
(disjunctive-adversative)  :    ober,  or,  enhreber  —  ober,  fonft  (else). 


136  GENERAL  SYNTAX— COMPOUND   SENTENCE.  320- 

an^ernfad^,  otherwise.  Ex.:  Sr  ( SCaHenftein)  mu^te  entn?ehr  gar 
nid^t  befe^len  ol'er  mit  ^odfommener  grei^eit  tjantdn  (Sch.).  One 
contradicts  the  other  (contradictory  -  adversative)  :  fontern, 
X)idmti)x,  fontern  ♦  .  ♦  ijielme^r*  The  first  clause  contains  ni6^t, 
^toaXf  freili^,  atterbing^,  w^L  @o  wa^kn  fie  ftc^  ni6>t  in  Die  5'ldl)e 
ter  geintie,  fonbern  fe^en  unijerrii^teter  (Bacfee  juriid  (Sch.). 

2.  The  second  sentence  concedes  the  statement  of  the  first 
in  part  or  wholly.  The  first  may  contain  nicfct,  etc.,  as  above; 
the  second  has  aUv,  often  in  the  connection  abtx  ^od),  t^ennodj 
aber,  aber  g(eic^tt>o^l ;  allein,  iikigeu^ ;  nur*  Slllein  is  stronger  than 
akx. 

Mark  the  contrast  between  abcr  and  fonbernf  Eng.  but.  ^kr  concedes, 
fonbern  contradicts,  ©r  wax  jn?ar  md)t  franf,  aber  boc^  md)t  baju  aufeele^t,  "but 
he  did  not  feel  like  it."  ®r  mar  nid)t  franf^  fonbern  er  njar  nur  nic^t  baju  anf^ 
gelegt  (he  only  did  not  feel  like  doing  it),  ^kk  ftnb  krufen  abtx  n^enige  finb 
au^ermal)let  (B.).  Den  Unge^euern,  ben  ©igantifd^en  l^citte  man  i^n  (eorneille) 
nennen  foUen,  aber  nic^t  ben  ©rc^en  (Le.).  Staffer  t|ut'^  freilid^  ni(|t  (It  is  not 
the  water  that  is  effective  in  baptism),  fonbern  ba^  2Bort  ®otte^,  fo  (which) 
mit  unb  bei  bem  2Baffer  ift  (Lu.). 

3.  The  second  sentence  states  something  new  or  different 
or  in  contrast  with  the  first  without  contradicting  or  exclud- 
ing or  limiting  the  same.  It  occurs  commonly  in  narrative 
and  may  be  called  "  counexive-  or  contras ting-adversative. " 
Conjunctions:  aber,  ^ingegen,  tagegen,  ubrigene,  tro^Dem,  gleic^ttjo^l, 
in^ejfen,  etc.  ^te  Selei^tgung  ift  grog ;  aber  greyer  ift  feine  ®naU 
(Le.).  (g^  ftot  ein  9latfe(  mt)  to*  ift  t^Mn^  (G.).  @^  ift  Me 
fd^onfte  $offttUttg;  toc^  ift  e^  nur  eine  ^offnung  (Sch.). 

321.  Causal  Sentences.  One  gives  the  reason  or  cause  for 
the  other.  Conjunctions:  t)(a)rum,  te^megett,  ta^er,  benn,  namltdj, 
etc.  The  clause  containing  the  reason  generally  stands 
second,  the  one  beginning  with  „tenn''  always.  Notice  ^mn, 
"for,"  always  calls  for  the  normal  order.  Ex.:  (Soltaten  ttjaren 
tetter,  beitrt  W  ?0^ettge  ge^t  ttac^  t)em  (SIM  (Sch.).  (Sitte  ©urAIaud)^ 
ttgfett  lagt  er  ftc^  nenneit;  brum  muj}  er  (Sotbaten  l^alten  fbnnen  (id.). 


325]        GENERAL   SYOT?AX — SUBORDINATE   SENTENCES.         137 

322.  Illative  Sentences.  One  sentence  is  an  inference  or 
effect  of  the  other.  Closely  related  to  the  causaL  Conjunc- 
tions :  fo,  a'i\o,  ]omi't,  folglid),  mitt)i'tt,  U'mna6)j,  etc.  9Reine  Sftedjte 
(right  hand)  ijl  gegen  ten  "Drud  t)er  8ie6e  uttcm|jftnt)lt(^  ♦  ♦  ♦  fo 
(then)  fetD  i^r  ®o^  x>on  Serlic^ittgen  (G.).  2)ie  ©onnen  dfo  fc^einen 
Utt^  nid)t  me^r  (Sch. ). 

SuBOBDn^ATE   SENTENCES. 

323.  We  shall  distinguish  three  classes  of  dependent 
clauses,  according  to  the  logical  value  of  the  part  of  speech 
they  represent: 

1.  Substantive  clauses,  with  the  value  of  a  noun. 

2.  Adjective  clauses,  with  the  value  of  an  adjective. 

3.  Adverbial  clauses,  with  the  value  of  an  adverb. 

Substantive  Clauses. 

324.  The  clause  is  subject :  Za^  eBen  ift  ter  glucfe  ter  bofen 
Z^at,  tag  fte  fortma^rent)  23o|'e5  mu^  geBdren  (Sch.).  ?iKi(^  reuet,  tag 
ic^'^  t^at  (id.).  Predicate  (N.)  :  Xie  ^TOenfcfoen  pn^  nid^t  immer 
\va^  fie  fc^einen  (Le.).  Object  (A.):  ©lauBfl  tu  ni&jt,  tag  einc 
SSarnung^ftimme  in  Xxaumm  i^orbeteutent  ju  un^  fprtcftt?  (Sch.). 
2Ba5  man  fd)marj  auf  tr>eig  Beft^t,  !ann  man  getroft  na&j  ipaufe  tragen 
(F.  1966-7).  Dative  :  SCo^l  tem,  ter  m  auf  tie  9Zeige  (to  the 
very  end)  rein  getebt  fein  Se6en  ^at  (He.).  Genitive  :  2Beg  ta^ 
$er3  t^ott  ift,  te^  gel)t  ter  WnnX)  liBer  (B.).  Apposition:  T)en  etein 
8tol3,tag  tu  tir  felbft  nii^t  genitgeft,  ^er^eil)^  id)  tir  (G.). 

325.  As  to  their  contents  the  substantive  clauses  may  be 
grouped  as  follows: 

1.  Sag,  or  declarative  clauses,  always  introduced  by  „tag*'' 
(B6^on  ©ofrate^  le^rte,  tag  tie  Seele  te^  Wlm\6>tn  unfterBlicf)  fei,  or  tie 
$^e|re,tag  tie  (Seele  .  .  .  ,  or  wix  glaukn,  tag  tie  @eele  .  .  . 

More  examples  in  324. 


138       GENERAL  SYKTAX — SUBORDINATE  SENTENCES.        [325- 

2.  Clauses  containing  indirect  questions  :  a.  Questions  after 
tlie  predicate  always  introduced  by  oh ;  in  the  main  clause  may 
stand  as  correlatives  e^,  t)a^,  l>effen,  la'oon,  etc.  Sr  ^attt  ni6>t 
gef^rieBen,  ob  er  gefunD  geMieben  (Bii.).  (See  F.  1667-70).  6. 
Questions  after  any  other  part  of  the  sentence,  introduced  by 
an  interrogative  pronoun,  by  an  interrogative  adverb,  simple 
or  compounded  with  a  preposition,  viz.,  mx,  Voa^,  trie,  W,  toann, 
itiomit,  mo^er,  n?o^in,  etc.  Ex. :  graget  nidjt,  tt>arum  i^  traure  (Sch. ). 
See  F.  1971.  Segreifft  t)u,  mie  antcic^tig  fd)tt)armen  ^iel  Ieid)ter  al^ 
gut  ^anteln  ift  ?  (Le.).  5^o(^  fel)lt  un^  ^un^e,  ma^  in  Untemalten 
unt)  ^(^^93  gef(^et}en  (Sch.).  c.  The  question  may  be  disjunc- 
tive, introduced  by  oh  —  ol)er;  ob  —  oter  oB;  ob  —  oK  Ex.: 
3lber  fag^  mir,  o6  mir  fte^eti  o^er  o6  mir  njeiter  ge^en  (E.  3906-7). 
Unt  e^  ter  2:ag  fi(^  neigt,  mu§  ftc^^^  erfliiren,  ob  i^  t)en  greunl),  oh  ic^ 
lien  25ater  foil  entbe^ren  (Sch.). 

Remarks. — 1.  The  mood  in  1  and  2,  according  to  circumstances,  is 
either  the  indicative  or  the  potential  subjunctive.  See  the  examples 
sub  1  and  in  324. 

3.  In  „ba^"-clauses  the  other  two  word-orders  are  also  possible,  but 
without  t»a§:  <Boixau^  le^rte,  tie  (Seele  fei  un^erblic^.  ©^  wurk  be^auptet,  geftcrn 
^abe  man  i^n  no^  auf  ber  (6txa^t  gefe^en. 

3.  When  the  subject  is  the  same  in  both  clauses  or  when  the  subject 
of  the  dependent  clause  is  the  object  of  the  main  clause,  in  short,  when 
no  ambiguity  is  caused,  the  infinitive  clause  can  stand  in  place  of  ba§  + 
dependent  order.  'Man  ^offt,  ba^  untergegangene  ©(^iff  noc^  in  ^eben.  2)ic 
^oUjet  ^at  bem  ^aufmanne  befo^lcn,  fein  (Sc^itb  ^o^er  ju  pngen. 

3.  Clauses  with  indirect  speech — after  verbs  of  saying,  as- 
serting, knowing,  thinking,  wishing,  demanding,  commanding. 
They  either  begin  with  ta§  with  dependent  order  or  they  have 
the  order  of  the  direct  speech.  The  subjunctive  is  the  reigning 
mood.     Eor  examples  and  tense,  see  282. 

4.  Clauses  containing  direct  speech,  a  quotation:  ^a^  3Bort 
ift  fret,  fagt  ^er  General  (Sch.).  ^er  ^onig  riefj  3ft  ter  ©anger 
ta? 


328]         GEKEEAL  SYKTAX— SUBORDINATE   SEiTTEi^CES.       139 

Adjective  Clauses. 

326.  The  clause  is  introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun  or  by 
a  relative  adverb.  Nothing  can  precede  the  pronoun  in  the 
clause  except  a  preposition.  Unless  the  personal  pronoun  is 
repeated  after  the  relative,  the  verb  stands  in  the  third  person. 
Ex.:  ^u  fpric^ft  ijon  3^^^^^^  ^^^  ijergangen  fint  (Sch.).  T)ie  (Btatte, 
tie  eitt  guter  Wtn\&i  betrat,  ift  eingemei^t  (G.).  Der  tu  ^on  tern 
^immel  Mft,  fitter  grieDe  .  .  .  (id.). 

For  use  of  the  pronouns  and  more  examples,  see  255-258. 

327.  1.  The  relative  pronoun  can  never  be  omitted  as  in  English. 
In  several  relative  clauses  referring  to  the  same  word,  the  pronoun  need 
stand  only  once,  if  the  same  case  is  required  ;  if  a  different  case  is  neces- 
sary, the  pronoun  should  be  repeated.  This  is  often  sinned  against,  for 
instance  by  Schiller :  8te^  ba  tie  ^tx\t,  bie  er  [(^riet)  unb  feine  ®lut  geftetjt, 
instead  of  mxin  er  ♦  ♦  ♦  gejle^t. 

2.  The  relative  clauses  beginning  with  mx,  tt)a^  without  antecedents 
are  really  identical  with  substantive  clauses,  e.g.,  T)a  fe^t,  ba^  i^r  tiefftnnig 
fa§t,  n?ai3  in  be^  9)?enfAen  |)irn  md)t  pa§t.  gitr  toa^  brein  ge^t  unb  nic^t  brein  ge^tr 
ein  frciftig  Sort  p  Dienj^en  fte|t  (F.  1950-3). 

3.  Case-attraction  between  relative  and  antecedent  is  now  rare. 

^U  m\6:)ix,  denoting  rather  a  cause  than  a  quality,  is  now  archaic,  but 
still  quite  frequent  in  Lessing's  time,  ^ma^,  aU  mldjix  \id)  an  ben  Mo^en 
(mere)  S'tQuren  erge^et,  =  **^neas,  since  he  delights  ..."  (Le.).  S?on  bcr 
2;ra9obief  aU  iikr  bie  un^  bie  Beit  i^iemltd)  aHe^  barau^  (of  Aristotle's  Poetics) 
gonnen  ..."  about  tragedy,  in  so  far  as  time  has  favored  us  ...  "  (id.). 
„1)a"  in  the  relative  clause  is  no  longer  usage.  2Ber  ba  jle^et,  fe^e  ju,  ba§  er 
nic^t  fatle  (B.). 

328.  The  mood  depends  upon  circumstances.  The  poten- 
tial subjunctive  (of  the  preterit  and  pluperfect)  is  frequent 
after  a  negative  main  clause.  @^  ift  !etne  gro§e  (Btalt  in  X)eutj'd):^ 
lanb,  Die  ber  DnM  uiAt  BefuAt  ^tt^  (=  did  not  visit).  The  sub- 
junctive of  indirect  speech  also  stands.  J)ie  9legterung  ber 
Screinlgten  <Biaatm  befc^werte  fi(^  ixitx  bie  Sanbung  foijieler  %xmm, 
ml&jt  manege  europaifc^e  SRecjierung  fortfc^ide. 


140   GENEKAL  SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE  SEKTEKCES.   [329- 

Adverbial  Clauses. 

329.  They  are  introduced  by  the  subordinating  conjunc- 
tions. The  main  clause  often  iias  an  emphatic  adverb,  e,  g,, 
alfo,  tann,  ta,  ba^in,  je^t,  ^at)er,  rarum,  ©o  does  not,  as  a  rule, 
stand  after  dependent  clauses  expressing  time  and  place,  and 
generally  becomes  superfluous  in  English  after  dependent 
clauses  of  manner. 

330.  Temporal  Clauses.  1.  Contemporaneous  action  imply- 
ing either  dui^ation  or  only  point  of  time.  Conjunctions  : 
ira^renD,  intern,  inte^  (intteffen),  mie,  ta  (all  meaning  "while,'' 
"  as  ") ;  folange  (al^) ;  fo  oft  (al^) ;  fo  bait)  (al^) ;  t)a,  mo  (rare  and 
colloquial)  =  when;  \Mnxi  (wann  is  old)  +  "  when,"  refers  to 
the  future;  ale,  "when,"  refers  always  to  the  past  with  the 
preterit ;  xozxi,  imuil,  lnm\\,  =  +  "  while,"  are  archaic, 
©olange,  fo  oft,  fobab   are  now  much  more  common  without 

Ex.:  5lc^ !  t>icllei$t  inbem  (as)  iinr  ^offen,  ^at  un^  Unveil  fcf)on  Qctroffen  (Sch.). 
5f?ur  ber  ©tavfe  wirb  ba^  8d)ic!fal  jwingeit,  menn  ber  8(^tt)ac^lm9  mtterliegt  (Sch.). 
UnD  mz  (as)  er  jt^t  unb  tr>ie  er  lau[d)t,  teilt  ftd^  bie  %hxi  empor  (G.).  SlU  be"<3 
<Sanctu(3  SBorte  famen,  ba  fc^ellt  er  breimal  bei  bem  Xiamen  0,®anctu^  .  .  ."  is 
part  of  the  mass)  (Sch.).  ©^  irrt  ber  3^enfc^,  folang'  er  jlreBt  (F.  317).  ©otalb 
bie  erflen  Serc^cn  fd)n)irrten  (erfd)icn)  ein  5D?dbc^cn  fc^on  unb  munber^ar  (Sch.).  ^a^ 
©ifen  mu§  gefd^miebet  tuerben,  n?eil  e^  glii^t  (Prov.).  SSiE  mir  bie  ^anb  nod^ 
reic^en,  bern)eil  ic^  eben  lab  (=r  while  I  am  loading  the  musket)  (Uh.). 

2.  Antecedent  action,  i.  e.,  the  action  of  the  dependent  clause 
precedes  that  of  the  main  clause.  Conjunctions  :  nac^tem, 
after ;  ca,  al^,  ircnn,  after,  when  ;  fettt'em,  feit,  feittem  t»a§  (all 
mean  +  since)  ;  fobalt  (al^),  fowie,  mt,  as  soon  as  ;  the  adverb 
!aum  +  inverted  order. 

Ex. :  9?immer  (no  more)  fang  t(^  freubige  Sieber,  feit  t(^  betne  (Stimme  bin 
(Sch.)  3Benn  (after)  ber  Mh  in  <5taub  jerfaCen,  tebt  ber  grofe  ?«ame  nod)  (Sch.). 
Unb  tt)ie  er  winft  mit  Um  %\mx,  auf  t^ut  fic^  ber  weite  Bwinger  (id.),  ^aum  war 
ber  35ater  tot,  fo  fommt  ein  ieber  mit  fcincm  Soling  (Le.).    (Notice  the  inversion.) 


332]        GENERAL  SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE  SENTENCES.         141 

!Der  tonic  uxlu^  9?urnberg,  nad^bem  er  e^  pr  ^urforgc  mit  cincr  ^tnlangHd^cn 
SSefa^uUij  ijerfe^en  ^atte  (Sch.). 

3.  Subsequent  action.  The  action  of  the  dependent  clause 
follows.  Conjunctions:  fifee,  Be^or,  +  "ere",  "before";  m, 
until,  with  or  without  taf . 

Ex. :  9^te  ijerai^te  ben  ^am,  tf  bu  fein  Snn^rc^  erfanttt  '^ap  (He.).  SSeijor 
xoxx'^  taffcti  rinnen,  Betet  einen  frommett  <B^x\x^  (Sch.).  S3t^  bie  ©lo(fe  fw^^  »er^ 
fit^Iet,  lafil  bie  jlrenge  ^r^eit  ru^n  (id.),  ©^e  wir  eig  utt^  »erfa^en  (unexpectedly), 
]6ra(^  ber  Sagett  jufammett. 

a.  The  main  clause  may  be  emphasized  by  bantlr  bamal^f  bann^  barauf, 
and  [o,  if  it  follows  the  dependent  clause. 

In  2  and  3  the  potential  subjunctive  can  stand. 

331.  Local  Clauses.  They  denote  the  place  and  direction 
of  the  action  of  the  main  clause.  They  begin  with  too,  mo^in, 
W^tx,  and  the  main  clause  may  contain  a  corresponding  ba, 

Ex. :  Bo  5D^enf(^en!itnj!  ni^t  preid^t,  |at  ber  ^imtnel  oft  geraten  (Sch.).  !Die 
SBelt  ijl  i)oE!ommen  itkraU,  n)o  ber  Wltn^6^  nic^t  ^infommt  mit  fetner  ^ml  (id.). 
2)ettn  ektt  too  S3e9riffe  fe^Ieti,  ba  fleUt  ein  2Bort  jur  rec^ten  3eit  |t(^  ein  (F.  1995-6). 
tein  SCBaffer  ifl  p  :^akn,  wo^iti  man  ftd^  ait^  wenbe* 

a.  The  demonstratives  ba,  ba'^in,  ba^er  in  the  local  clause  are  now 
archaic.  Do  not  confound  the  relative  clauses  and  indirect  questions  with 
the  local  clauses  which  generally  refer  to  an  adverb. 

The  potential  subjunctive  may  stand  in  them. 

Glauses  of  Manner  and  Cause. 

332.  Modal  clauses  express  an  accompanying  circumstance 
and  are  therefore  related  to  contemporaneous  clauses.  Con- 
junctions: itttem,  tag  ni(^t,  o^ne  t)a§,  without,  intern  ni^t,  ftatt  or 
anftatt  tag,  instead  of.  Ex.:  !l)er  diitkx  gtng  fort,  intern  er  auf  ben 
©egner  einen  ^erac^tlic^en  33li(f  marf*  3^  Hn  nk  in  Sonton,  tag  ic^ 
ni(^t  ba^  '^n\mm  befuc^te  (subj.). 

1.  They  may  have  the  potential  subjunctive.  But  these  clauses  occur 
more  frequently  in  the  form  of  participial  and  infinitive  clauses  With 


142       GENERAL  SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE   SENTENCES.        [333- 

rrO'^ne  ju,"  „anftatt  in"  :  5U^|>aftf  anj^att  ju  empfangcn,  muftc  jal^lcn*    (£r  rttt  fort 

333.  Comparative  clauses  denote  manner,  degree,  and 
measure.  Conjunctions:  tok,  aU,  "  as,"  ''  than  "  with  the  corre- 
sponding fo,  alfo,  ebenfo  (=  so)  in  the  main  clause.  After  the 
comparative  al^,  tenn,  m^tx,  "than."  Other  forms:  gleicfemie  — 
fo ;  fo  vou  —  fo ;  just  as  —  as,  so.  5Bie  denotes  rather  manner 
and  quality,  aU  the  degree  and  quantity.  When  both  clauses 
have  the  same  predicate,  contraction  is  common.  Then  mt 
denotes  likeness,  aU  identity. 

Ex. :  Sc^  jtnge  K)te  ber  S^oget  jingt  (Q-.).  1)an!et  ©ott  fo  toarm  al^  x^  fur  bicfen 
2;run!  eud)  banfe  (id.).  2Bie  bu  mir  („t^u)l"  understood), fo  i^  btr  (Prov.).  2)u 
Mj^  mir  nic^t^  me^r  aU  feitt  (Bo^n  (Sch.).  !Der  trdgc  ®ang  be^  ^riege^  ^at  bent 
^ontg  e^enfo^iel  Sc^aben  get^an  aU  er  ben  OJebeUen  S5orteil  hac^te  (id.),  ^atte  fi(^ 
etn  9ftattjktn  angemdjl't  al^  tote  ber  !Doftor  Sutler  (F.  2129-30)  (al^  toie  is  collo- 
quial). „2Bie  ein  fRimx,"  "  like  a  knight " ;  „aU  (etn)  Otitter,"  "  as  a  knight." 
<Bein  ®IM  voax  grower  al^  man  kre($net  l^atte  (Sch.).  ©ine^  ^aupte^  (by  one 
head)  Idnger  benn  aHe^  S?oIf  (B.).    SBeber  is  very  rare. 

1.  Specially  to  be  noticed  are  the  clauses  with  al^  o^,  aUmm,  gener- 
ally followed  by  the  potential  or  unreal  subjunctive.  For  ftjenn  +  de- 
pendent order  occurs  also  the  inverted  without  n^enn.  Ex.:  3^r  etlet  ja,  aU 
mnn  t^r  %\vi^d  ^ctttet  (Le.).  <Su^t  bie  2Btffenfd)aft,  aU  tourbefl  ewig  bu  ^ier  fetn; 
STugenb;  aU  ^telte  ber  %oh  bt(^  [c^on  am  jlrduknben  ^aax  (He.).  But  the  indica- 
tive is  possible :  Unb  e^  mattet  unb  ftebet  unb  ^raufet  unb  jtf($t  vok  tt>enn  Saffer 
ntit  i^euer  fic^  mengt  (Sch.). 

2.  ^enn  is  preferable  after  a  comparative  when  several  ^al^"  occur. 
2Bie  is  colloquial.  ©^  fragt  ft(^  ob  ^efjtng  grower  aU  Did^ter  benn  aU  2)?en[(^ 
genjefen  fet.  ^idoji  in  the  clause  after  al^  is  no  longer  good  usage,  though 
common  in  the  17th  and  18th  centuries.     Lessing  has  it  very  frequently. 

3f^  lebtc  [o  eingejogen,  ali3  i^  in  2)?ei§en  nic^t  gelebt  ^atte  (Le.). 

a.  '^flidjtS  wenigcr  al§  means  "  anything  but,"  literally  "nothing  less  than  that,"  gen- 
erally felt  by  English  speakers  as  meaning  "  nothing  but,"  e.  g.,  SlCer  ic^  barf  fagen,  ha^ 
biefe  6inri(^tung  ber  gabel  nicf)t3  lueniger  ol^  notwenbig  i[t,  L  e.,  that  this  arrangement  of 
the  plot  is  anything  but  necessary  (Le.).  In  „nt(^t§  aI6"  =  "  nothing  but,"  as  after  all 
negative  pronouns,  ,,niemanb  al^  bu"  =  nobody  but  you,  aU  has  exclusive  force,  = 
"  but.'* 

3.  Other  correlatives  are  fo  einer  —  xok;  ber  namli^e  —  tt)ie;  berfelbe  — 
tt)ie;  fol(^-,  )o  +  positive  adjective  —  tr)ie  (quality)  and  al^  (degree);  after 


336]         GENERAL  SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE   SENTENCES.        143 

ju,  aHju  +  positive  and  after  ein  anberer  stand  aU  +  bag  or  mm,  ali  and 
infinitive,  e.g.,  (£r  benft  ju  ebel,  aU  bag  er  fo  etwa<3  »ott  un^  emarten  fonntc* 
(£r  ijl  ber  namlic^e  n)te  er  immer  tuar*  Sure  S^erfo^nung  tear  ein  wenig  ju  fc^nett^ 
al$  bag  fte  bauer^aft  ^dtte  fein  foUen  (Gl-.). 

Notice  the  potential  subjunctive  after  ^aU  ha^*" 

334.  Under  this  head  comes  really  the  proportional  clause, 
which  expresses  the  proportion  of  the  decrease  or  increase  of 
what  is  asserted  in  the  main  clause.  The  conjunctions  are 
the  following  correlatives  :  }e  —  tefio,  urn  fo  (or  urn  tefto, rarely); 
{c  —  it,  =  the  —  the;  je  nat^bem  (or  nac^tem  or  mie,  rarely), 
according  as.  If  the  main  clause  stand  first,  its  correlative 
is  dispensable. 

Ex. :  3e  tne^r  ber  S^^orrat  fc^molsr  beflo  fc^redlti^er  \ou^^  ber  ^m^tx  (Sch.). 
3e  langer,  je  Uekr  (Pro v.).  3e  me^r  er  ^at,  je  me^r  er  tt>\U.  (3e)  m^hm  einer 
ringt,  nac^bem  \W  gelingt  (G.),  "The  success  depends  upon  the  effort." 

1.  3e  =  ever  ;  beflo,  "  on  that  account,"  "  hence,"  see  442,  a.  Notice 
the  dependent  order  in  the  first,  the  inverted  generally  in  the  second. 

335.  Consecutive  clauses  express  the  result  or  effect  of  the 
predicate  of  the  main  clause.  Conjunctions:  t)a§  (foba§),  that; 
in  the  main  clause,  if  any  correlative^  fo,  fo  fe^r,  bergeflalt,  terart, 
fo((^*  Ex. :  (So  ^eraBfd^eut  ift  t)ie  %\^vanmi\  ^ag  jte  fein  S^erfjeug 
ftnt>et  (Sch.).  Sr  filing,  tia^  laut  l^er  3Ba(t)  erfiang  unb  alle^  gifen  in 
(Biixdtn  fpraitg  (Uh.), 

1  The  result  may  also  be  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  main  clause  or 
of  an  infinitive  clause :  ^o(^  itbernd^m^  {6)  gem  no(^  ei'nmal  aHe  ^(age,  fo  UeB 
njar  mtr  ba^  ^inb  (F.  3123-4).  3(^  Mn  ju  alt,  urn  mx  ju  fpielen,  ju  iung  urn  oi^ne 
SSunfc^  ju  fettt  (F.  1546-7). 

2.  Mark  the  potential  and  unreal  subjunctives  of  the  preterit  and  plu- 
perfect which  may  stand  in  these  clauses  :  35ernteint  ^f)x  ntid^  fo  jung  unb 
fc^jDad^,  ha^  i(^  mit  0iiefen  flritte?  (Uh.).  2)a0  3>ferb  war  fo  la§m,bag  toir  fc^neHer 
ju  ^u§  ^eim  gefommctt  waren* 

336.  Restrictive  clauses  limit  the  value  and  scope  of  the 
statement  of  the  predicate  and  border  closely  upon  the  con- 
ditional and  comparative  clauses.    Conjunctions:  nur  t)a§,  only 


144        GENERAL  SYNTAX— SUBORDIlf ATE   SENTENCES.        [337- 

(that),  auper  t)ap,  except  that,  in  fo  fern  (aU),  mofern,  in  tok  fern, 
in  fo  or  in  mie  ti?eit;  in  as  far  as,  in  as  much  as.  The  negative 
force  is  given  also  by  the  subjunctive  and  the  normal  order 
with  the  adverb  t)enn  or  by  e^  fei  Denn,  e^  ivaxt  "otnn,  tiaf ,  which  is 
now  more  common. 

Ex. :  SSir  tear  en  gar  nic^t  fo  iibel  bran,  nur  ba^  mx  ntc^te  ju  trinfen  f^attm  We 
were  not  at  all  so  badly  oft',  only  ...  3n  fo  fern  nun  biefe  SSefen  ^orper  ftnb, 
fi^ilbert  bte  ^^cefte  auc^  ^orper  (Le.).  Sr  entferntc  ftc^  niemal^  njeit,  er  fagt^  e<3 
i^r  benn  (H.  and  D„  IV.  42-3).  3^  laffe  bic^  nic^t,  bu  fegneft  mic^  benn  (unless 
thou  bless  me)  (B.).  0iu^ig  (gebenfe  ic^  mi^  p  ijer|)alten);  e^  fei  benn,  ba9 
(unless)  er  ftc^  an  meiner  (£§re  ober  nteinen  ©litem  Jjergreife  (Sch.). 

1.  This  is  a  very  old  construction,  quite  common  in  M.  H.  G.  The 
negative  force  lies  not  in  benn,  but  in  the  lost  ne  +  the  potential  or  con- 
cessive subjunctive.  !I)enn  <  M.  H.  G.  danne,  is  unessential.  Compare 
M.  H.  G.  den  lip  wil  ich  mrliesen,  si  en  werde  m%n  io%p  —  my  life  will  I 
lose,  (she  become  not  my  wife)  unless  she,  etc.  8waz  lebete  in  dem  walde 
e^  entrunne  danne  balde,  das  was  zehaiit  tot,  —  2Ba$  im  SSalbe  lebte,  bai3  n?ar 
anf  ber  (Btelte  tot,  e^  fct  benn  ha^  e^  balb  baijon  lief  or  gelaufen  n>dre  (quoted  by 
Paul).  He  disappeared  as  early  as  late  M.  H.  G.,  particularly  after  a 
negative  main  clause.  It  is  left  in  nur  <  ne  waere  =  (e^)  tt?dre  ntc^t  bag. 
See  Paul's  M.  H.  G.  gram.,  §  335-40. 

337.  Causal  clauses  denote  the  cause,  reason,  and  means. 
Conjunctions:  ba,  since,  mil,  because,  intern  =:  by  +  present 
participle  in  Eng.  Correlatives,  if  any:  ba'rum,  t'a'kr,  fo,  U^lalh 
etc,  Da'turc^  ba§,  t^a'mit  ^ap  express  rather  the  instrument. 
2BeiI  expresses  the  material  cause;  ta  the  logical  reason;  „in^ 
tern"  is  a  weak  causal  and  borders  rather  closely  upon  the 
contemporaneous  „inDem.''  T)enn  +  normal  order  expresses  a 
known  or  admitted  reason.     It  is  emphatic.     See  321. 

Ex. :  !Dag  ©c^Iepptau  (hawser)  jerrt§,  Weil  ber  ©d^Ieppbampfer  (tug)  ju  fc^nell 
anjog.  fSlii  bem  bejlen  SBilten  leiften  mx  fo  toenig,  metl  un^  taufenb  SSillen  freujen 
(G,).  Scben  anbern  in  fc^ttfen  x\i  kffer,  ta  id^  fo  flein  Mn  (G.).  2)ir  blit^t  gewip 
ba^  fc^onfle  ®IM  auf  ©rben,  ba  bu  fo  fromm  unb  ^eitig  bijl  (Sch.).  9lid^eUeu  wu^te 
fi$  nur  babur^  ^u  ^elfen,  bo^  er  ben  geinbfeligfeiten  ein  fc^leunigc^  Snbe  mac^te  (Sch.), 

1.  S'^un,  bteweil,  aUbieweil,  magen,  fiutemat,  and  others,  are  rare  and 
archaic. 


339]       GEI^ERAL   SYKTAX — SUBORDIlirATE   SENTEiq^CES.         145 

2.  The  clauses  with  ba'burc^  bag,  ba'mit  bag  border  closely  upon  the 
substantive  clause.  2)a,  says  Becker,  denotes  the  real  and  logical  rea- 
son, tx>eil  the  logical  only  when  the  kind  of  reason  is  not  emphasized. 
SSeil  stands  in  a  clause  that  answers   the  question  as  to  the  reason, 

2S5arum  tuurbe  SSaKenflein  abgefe^t?    SBeil  man  i^n  fitr  cinen  S[^errdter  ^ielt. 

338.  Final  clauses  express  intention  and  object.  Con- 
junctions: X)ami't,  fca^,  "in  order  that."  9luf  tag,  unb  bag  are 
archaic.  In  the  main  clause  rarely  stand  barum,  "^^Uf  in  tcr 
3lbftd)t,  3U  t)em  ^mdt  (both  followed  by  Dag)* 

Ex.:  2)arum  eben  leil^t  er  feinem,  bamit  er  flet^  ju  ^tUn  ^aU  (Le.).  !Daju  ro:r:> 
i^m  ber  SJerjlanb,  baf  er  tm  innern  |)erjen  fpiiret,  n)a^  er  erfi^afft  mit  feincr  ^ano 
(Sch.).  (£§re  Skater  unb  9)lutter,  auf  bag  bir'^  wo^l  ge^e  unb  bu  lange  lekji  auf 
(£rben(B.). 

1.  The  reigning  mood  of  this  clause  is  the  subjunctive.  If  the  object 
is  represented  as  reached,  the  indicative  may  also  stand.  Urn  ju  +  inf. 
forms  a  very  common  final  clause  ;  9)?an  lebt  nic^t  urn  ju  effen,  [onbern  man  i§t 
um  ju  leben. 

339.  Concessive  clauses  make  a  concession  to  the  contra- 
diction existing  between  the  main  clause  and  the  result  ex- 
pected from  it  in  the  dependent  clause.  They  are  called  also 
adversative  causal  clauses.  Conjunctions  :  oBglet'd)  (06  ♦  ♦  ♦ 
glei(!^),  obfc^o'tt  (ob  ♦  >  >  f(^on),  obwo^l  (ob  .  ♦  ♦  n?o()l),  ob  aud),  oB 
jn;)ar,  wenn  and),  mnn  gleic^,  ob,  all  =  "although."  The  main 
clause  may  contain  De'ttnodj,  boc^,  nit^t^beftotveniger,  gleid)tt)O^I,  but 
fo  only  if  it  stands  second. 

Relative  clauses  with  indefinite  relative  pronouns  and 
adverbs,  it>er  .  *  ♦  au^  (immer,nur),  tt)ie  ♦  ♦  ♦  au(^,  fo  ♦  ♦  .  an6) 
(nod)) ;  inverted  clauses  and  those  with  the  normal  order,  con- 
taining the  adverbs  fci^ott,  glei(^,  gwar,  tt)o|I,  freilid),  ttO(^  have  also 
concessive  force. 

Ex. :  3jl  ea  Qleic^  ^a^t,  fo  Ieu(i^tet  unfer  fRt6^t  (Sch.).  (Compare  Dbgletd^  ea 
9?a(^t  tflr  ob  e^  gleic^  ^ad)t  if!  .  .  ♦)  2Ba^  ^^euer^wut  i^m  au^  gcraubt,  ein  fu§er 
S^rofl  ifl  i^m  geblieben  (id.).  ^Jluttg  [prad^  er  ju  SRetnefcn^  beflen  (in  favor  of  R.) 
fo  falfd^  au(i^btefer  bcfannt  war  (G.).  ©in  ®ott  ijl,  ein  l^eiliger  SBttte  lebt,  wtc  aud^ 
ber  mcnfc^Ud^e  tt>an!e  (Sch.).    ©rfiitt^  ba^on  bein  ^erj,  fo  grog  e^  ij^  (F.  345.^). 


146       GENERAL  SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE  SENTENCES.        [340- 

^an  fommt  im  ©crebe,  tt)ic  man  ftd^  tmmer  jlellt  (G.).  2)em  S55fe»)ic^t  tt)trb  allea 
[driver,  er  t|ue  ma<^  er  toiU  (Holty).  3toax  meif  ic^  »iel,  bo(^  miic^t^  ic^  aUt^  tt)iffen 
(F.  601). 

1.  Mark  also  the  form  of  the  imperative  and  unb  +  inversion :  (Bet 
nod^  fo  bumm,  e^  gibt  boc^  jemanb(en),  ber  bic^  fiir  weife  ^cilt.  ^er  SDJenfd^  tjl  frei 
gefd^affen,  i|l  frei,  unb  njurbe  er  in  tetten  geboren  (Sch.). 

2.  Mood :  if  a  fact  is  stated,  the  indicative ;  if  a  supposition,  the  con- 
cessive and  unreal  subjunctive.     See  examples  above. 

3.  When  certain  parts  of  speech  are  common  to  both  clauses,  there 
may  be  contraction.     D^bmo^l  »on  ^o^ern  <Stamm,  litbt  er  ba^  SJolf  (Sch.). 

340.  Conditional  clauses  express  a  supposition  upon  which 
the  statement  of  the  main  clause  will  become  a  fact.  If  the 
supposition  is  real,  the  conditional  clause  has  the  indicative; 
if  only  fancied  or  merely  possible,  the  potential  subjunctive; 
if  it  implies  that  the  contrary  of  the  supposition  is  about  to 
happen  or  has  happened,  .then  it  has  the  unreal  subjunctive 
of  the  imperfect  or  the  pluperfect.  Conjunctions  :  n^entt,  if; 
fall^,  im  gade  bag,  in  case  that;  mnn  anber^,  if  ...  at  all;  also 
trofern,  fofern  (such  often  difficult  to  distinguish  from  a  conces- 
sive clause) ;  tco,  fo  (rare).  The  main  clause  may  have  ba,  tanit, 
in  bem  Satic,  and  if  it  stand  second,  generally  begins  with  fo* 

Ex.:  2Benn  |i(^  bie  SJoIfer  felbfi  ^efretn,  ba  fann  bie  S©o:^Ifa^rt  nic^t  gebei^n 
(Sch.).  SBenn  bu  aia  3J?ann  bie  2BtiTenf($aft  »erme^r|!,  fo  fann  bein  ©ol^n  ju  ^o^'rem 
Biel  gelangen  (F.  1063).  Ser  miebe  nid^t,  wenn  er^^  untge^en  fann,  ta^  5(u§erfie 
(Sch.).    ®o  hvi  fampfefi  ritterlid^,  frcut  bein  alter  fQattx  ftd^  (Stolberg). 

1.  Other  forms  of  the  conditional  clause  are  the  inverted  order,  the 
imperative,  and  the  normal  order  with  benn  +  subjunctive  (=  if .  .  .  not, 
unless ;  see  336, 1).  'Btx  im  S3ejt|e  unb  bu  wo^nfl  im  9ied^t  (Sch.),  Possession 
is  nine  points  of  the  law.  Dem  lieben  ®ottc  tt)eic^^  nic^t  an^,  jtnb'jl  H  i^n  auf 
bem  2Beg  (Sch.). 

2.  SSofern  nid^t,  au^er  mm,  e^  fei  benn  ha^,  if  not,  unless,  denote  an  ex- 
ception to  a  statement  true  in  general.  !Der  SBolf  ijl  ^armlo^,  auper  menn  er 
hunger  f^au    See  336,  1. 

3.  Sometimes  the  preterit  ind.  is  substituted  for  the  unreal  subjunc- 
tive in  the  dependent  or  in  the  main  clause  or  in  both.     Its  force  is 


343]  GEKEKAL  SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER.  147 

assurance,  certainty.  Straf  ettt  ^iir^i^  ntein  ©efK^t,  ac^,  fo  UW  id^  jtd^er  ntc^t 
(Gleim).  3)Jit  btefem  ^feil  burc^Wo§  tc^  dud^,  mm  i^  mein  Uek^  ^inb  getroffen 
j^dtte  (Sch.).  D  tt)drjl  bu  tt>a|r  gewefen  unb  gerabe,  nie  fam  ei3  bal^in,  atte^  jliinbc 
anber^  (Sch.). 

4.  Contracted  and  abbreviated  forms :  (SntttJorfett  BIo^  tjl^^  ettt  gememer 
^reijel;  i)oI(fu§rt  ijl:'^  em  unj^erblic^  Unternefimen  (Sch.).  ©enn  nic^t,  tt)0  nic^t, 
ttjo  tnoglid^  are  very  common.  Sir  »erfu(^ten  il^tt  »)o  moglid^  ju  bcrul^iQen,  ttcnn 
nic^t  ganj  ju  entfernen. 

For  the  tenses  see  also  275-280. 

WORD-ORDER. 

341.  We  distinguisli  three  principal  word-orders  according 
to  the  position  of  subject  and  verb: 

1.  The  normal,  viz.,  subject  —  verb. 

2.  The  inverted,  viz.,  verb  —  subject. 

3.  The  dependent,  viz.,  verb  at  the  end. 

(By  "  verb  "  we  shall  understand  for  the  sake  of  brevity  the  personal  part  and  by 
"predicate"  the  non-personal  part  of  the  verb,  viz.,  participle  and  infinitive.) 

342.  The  normal  occurs  chiefly  in  main  sentences :  "Der 
2Bint)  tot^L  It  is  identical  with  the  dependent  order  if  there 
is  only  subject  and  verb  in  the  dependent  clause.  !Die  SJlit^le 
Qi%  well  Ux  aSittt)  m% 

343.  The  inverted  order  occurs  both  in  main  and  depend- 
ent clauses:  ®e^t  W  9RuMe  ?  m^t  t)er  SSinD,  (fo)  ge^t  bie  mixW. 
It  occurs  : 

a.  In  a  question. 

b.  In  optative  and  imperative  sentences. 

c.  In  dependent  clauses,  mainly  conditional  and  after  aU  + 
subjunctive  when  there  is  no  conjunction  like  mnn,  oh,  etc. 

d.  If  for  any  reason,  generally  a  rhetorical  one,  any  other 
word  but  the  subject,  or  if  a  whole  clause,  head  the  sentence. 

e.  For  impressiveness  the  verb  stands  first. 
Examples  with  adjuncts  (objects,  adverbs,  etc.)  added: 


148  GENERAL   SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER.  [343- 

a.  ©c^reibt  ^er  %vtnnt)  ?  SIei6t  t)er  Diener  ni(^t  lange  au^?  2Ba^ 
[(fereibt  t)ir  Ut  greunt  ? 

But  when  the  inquiry  is  as  to  the  subject  the  normal  order  stands  of 
course.    2Ber  fc^reibt  einen  23rtef?    Sa^  ijl  ber  langen  OJebe  furjer  *5inn?  (Sch.). 

b.  9Jlbge  nit  t)er  2:ag  erfc^etnen,  mnn  beg  raukn  ^rtege^  iporben 
tiefeg  fitlle  3^^al  burd^to^en  (Sch.).  For  more  examples,  see 
284,  1,  2. 

But  the  inverted  order  is  not  required:  !Dte  Bd^  bcr  S^ropfen,  bie  er  ^egt, 
fei  euren  STagen  pgelegt !  (F.  989-990). 

c.  SCidft  tu  genau  erfa^ren  trac^  ftc^  gtemt,  fo  frage  nur  Bet  eblett 
grauen  an  (G.).  2Birt  man  mo  (mtrgen^mo)  gut  aufgenommen, 
mu^  man  nti^t  gleic^  n?ieter!ommen  (Wolff).  (Sr)  (Btrid)  brauf  ein 
(Bpange,  ^etf  un^  ^fling^  aU  maren'^  eben  ?)fifferling' ;  banff  nid^t 
meniger  unb  ni(^t  me^r,  aU  ob'^  ein  ^orb  »ol(  ^liijje  mar'  (F.  2843-6). 

Notice  here  the  inversion  after  aU  alone,  but  dependent  order  after 
aU  ob.     See  340,  1 ;  also  F.  1122-25,  1962-3. 

But  for  emphasis  and  to  add  vividness,  the  normal  is  still  possible  : 
2)u  lle^ejl  jlill,  er  wartet  auf;  bu  fprid^jl  i|n  an,  er  flrebt  an  bir  l^inauf  (F.  1168-9). 
This  is  mere  parataxis. 

d.  Die  Sotfc^aft  Ijjox'  x6^  mot)I,  aUtin  mix  fe^^lt  ber  glaube  (F.  765). 
(Ernjl  ift  tag  Seben,  ^eiter  ift  bie  ^unft  (Sch.).  9Ki(^  Ijat  mein  ^erj 
betrogcn  (id.).  2Bo  aBer  ein  2Iag  ift,  ba  ijerfammein  ft(^  bie  ^Ibler  (B.). 
i:eineg  (3d\k^  ^ab'  i(^  einen  §au(^  ^erfpiirt  (Uh.).  See  also  F.  860- 
1,  1174^5,  1236.  iiberfe'^en  fann  Sa^^Iu^  bie^  ©emalbe  nid)t  ^altn 
(Le.).  ©efd^rieben  fte^t:  „3m  2lnfang  mar  U^  SSort"  (F.  1224). 
See  also  236,  3. 

1.  The  main  clause,  inserted  in  any  statement  or  following  it,  has  in- 
version according  to  this  rule.  2)aa,  fpric^t  er,  ijl  fein  5lufent^alt/  toa^  forbcrt 
^tmmelan  (Sch.).  SSie  feib  ibr  glucflic^/  ebler  ®raf !  l^ub  er  ijoll  5lrgUjl  an  (id.). 
For  emphasis  the  speaker  can  insert  a  clause  uninverted  :  2)enn,  i^  tt)ei§ 
ca,  er  ijlber  ©liter  bie  er  bereinjl  erbt,  n>ert  (H.  and  D.,  III.  53). 

2.  The  coordinating  conjunctions  aber,  alfein,  benn,  mmlx^,  ober#  fonbernr 
unb  standing  generally  at  the  head  of  the  sentence,  any  adverb  with  the 
force  of  an  elliptical  sentence  (jivar,  ja,  etc.,  having  generally  a  comma 


345]  GEI^ERAL  SYiq^TAX— WORD-ORDER.  149 

after  them)  call  for  no  inversion.    After  cntweber  there  is  option.     Ex. : 

^Mtx  tie  ^unjl  ^at  in  ben  neueren  Beiten  ungleic^  tceitere  ©renjen  erl^alten  (Le.). 
3voax  euer  a3art  ijl  frau^,  boc^  ^eM  i^r  nic^t  bte  ^k^d  (F.  671).  ^iirnja^r !  tc^ 
bin  ber  einjige  ©o^n  nur  (H.  and  D.,  IV.  91).  Sa,  mir  '^at  t^  ber  @eijl  gefagt 
(id.,  IV.  95).    ®enn  bte  mUmtx  ftnb  ^eftig  (id.,  IV.  148). 

3.  When  the  dependent  clause  precedes,  the  main  clause  can  for  em- 
phasis and  very  frequently  colloquially  have  the  normal  order.     Ex. : 

^atte  er  bie  Urfaci^en  biefe^  aHgcmetnen  Slkrglaukn^  an  <3^a!fpere^i3  ^c^on^eiten 
audb  gefu(^tr  er  wurbe  fte  balb  gefunben  ^akn  (Le.). 

e,  §at  Me  ^onigin  to(^  ni(St^  ijorau^  »or  tern  gemetnen  Siirc^ermeiBe 
(Sch.).  ©te^en  tt)ie  gelfen  t)0(^  attjei  ^O^dnner  gegen  einattber !  (H.  and 
D.,  IV.  229).     Generally  contains  t)0(^. 

344.  The  dependent  order  occurs  only  in  dependent 
clauses.  The  clause  begins  with  a  relative  or  interrogative 
pronoun  which  may  be  preceded  by  a  preposition  ;  with  a 
relative  or  interrog.  adverb;  or  with  a  subordinating  conjunc- 
tion. Ex. :  SBenn  14  ttiit  %lmn^tv  mdre,  mocbte  i6)  n?o^l  X^iogene^ 
fetn*  3^  ttt^fe^  ^^  6^t,  j;e  me^r  er  will  (Claudius).  (So  flol^  id)  Bin, 
mu^  i(^  mir  fel6ft  gej^el)n  :  bergleic^ett  ^ab'  ic^  nie  gefe^n  (G.).  3Bie 
fol^e  tiefge()rdgte  Silver  ^o^  ^u  ^dkn  in  un5  fdjlafen  fonnen,  U^  tin 
SSort,  eitt  Saut  pe  li^edt  (Le.).     See  also  F.  2015-18,  2062. 

345.  The  dependent  order  does  not  occur  in  main  clauses, 
but  it  is  not  the  only  order  of  the  dependent  clause. 

1.  The  verb  precedes  two  infinitives.  One  may  be  the  past 
participle  of  a  modal  auxiliary.  Ex.:  Rann  icb  t)ergejfen,ttjie^^ 
l)atte  lommert  fonnen?  (Sch.).  X)ap  ein  9Kenfc^  t)o(^  einen  ?D^enfc^en 
fo  ^erlegen  foil  mad)en  fonnen!  (Le.). 

a.  But  in  this  case  and  in  other  compound  tenses  the  '*  verb  "  {i.  e.,  the 
personal  part)  may  also  stand  between  the  participle  and  the  other  aux- 
iliary or  the  infinitive,  e.  g.,  mil  ber  ^aufmann  ba^  ^axi^  fod  gefaitft  f)a1>tn  or 
gefauft  foE  ^akn  (in  poetry).     ®e!auft  f^aUn  foil  is  the  common  order. 

2.  The  normal  order  may  stand: 

1.   In  dependent  clauses  containing  indirect  speech.     Sr 


150  GENERAL   SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER.  [346- 

glaubt,  S^alfpere  ^aU  33rutu0  gum  ipelten  te^  <BtMt^  mac^en  moUeit 
(Le.). 

2.  See  last  sentence  of  358. 

3.  In  certain  clauses  with  negative  force  containing  an 
enclitic  „Denn'':  e^  fei  tenn  tag  +  dependent  order.     See  336. 

4.  In  substantive  clauses :  (^ott  tt?et§,  icfo  bin  nii^t  fcbult>  (Le.). 
This  is  mere  parataxis  without  conjunction. 

346.  The  auxiliaries  ^aben  and  fetn  are  also  frequently 
dropped  in  dependent  clauses  to  avoid  an  accumulation  of 
verbal  forms,  both  in  prose  and  poetry.  Lessing,  Goethe, 
and  Klopstock,  especially  the  first,  drop  the  auxiliary  very 
freely  and  skillfully. 

Ex.:  5Cie  unbe^reiflid)  i(^  ijon  i1^m  Beleitigt  tt>orten  (supply  Mn 
here  or  before  beleitigt)  unt)  no(^  tt>ert>e  (Le.).  ^O^o^UA,  tap  ter 
Sater  tie  ^^^ranneH  te^5  e  t  n  e  n  S^ing^  ni^t  langer  in  feinem  ^aufe 
(supply  ^at)  tulten  troUeu  (id.). 

347.  The  dependent  order  in  main  clauses  is  archaic  and  poetic. 
Ex.  :  (Bicgfrieb  ben  jammer  n?o|l  [djmingen  funnt  (dialect  for  fonnte)  (Uh.). 
Ura^ne,  ©ropmutter,  5D^utter  unb  ^inb  in  bumpfer^tube  kifammen  jtnb  (Schwab).- 

348.  1.  The  inverted  order  in  the  conditional  clause  and  in  a  main  clause  for  the 
sake  of  impressiveness  has  sprung  from  the  order  of  the  question.  Compare,  for 
instance:  1.  3ft  ber  greunb  treu y  (question).  2.  3ft  fcer  greunb  treu  ?  (question).  (Sut, 
fo  wirb  er  mir  &eiftel)en.  3.  3ft  ber  ^yreunb  treu  (conditional  clause),  fo  icirb  er  mtr  6eiftct}en. 
4.    3ft  mir  ber  greunb  boc^  treu  gefiUeben  !  (impressive  inversion). 

2.  The  main  clause  has  inversion  when  the  dependent  clause  precedes,  because  it 
generally  begins  with  an  adverb  like  fc,  bann,  etc.  ©e^ft  bu  ni(^t,  fo  tl^u^  bu  Unrej^t. 
Without  fo,  the  inversion  really  ceases.  Hence  we  say,  the  normal  order  may  still 
stand  for  emphasis.  But  fo,  etc.,  were  so  frequent  that  inversion  became  the  rule. 
Inversion  is  therefore  limited  originally  to  the  question  and  to  the  choice  of  placing 
the  emphatic  part  of  the  sentence  where  it  will  be  most  prominent. 

349.  1.  The  dependent  order  was  in  O.  H.  G.  by  no  means  limited  to  the  dependent 
clause.  Toward  the  10th  century  it  begins  to  become  rarer  in  the  main  clause.  In 
early  M.  H.  G.  it  became  limited  to  the  dependent  clause,  so  that  now  we  may  justly 
call  it  the  •'  dependent -clause  order  ^ 

2.  The  verb  at  the  end  is,  no  doubt,  a  great  blemish  of  German  style— second  only 
to  the  separation  of  the  little  prefix  of  separable  compound  verbs,  which  may  turn  up 
after  many  intervening  parts  at  the  close  of  the  sentence.  According  to  Delbrfick,  the 
dependent  order— subject,  object,  verb — was  the  primitive  one,  still  in  force  in  Latin. 


352]  GEi^ERAL  SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER.  151 

General  Eules  for  the  Order  of  other  Parts  of  the 
Sentence  besides  Subject  and  Verb. 

Position  of  the  Predicate. 

350.  The  predicate,  be  it  an  adjective,  a  substantive,  par- 
ticiple, infinitive,  or  separable  prefix  of  a  compound  verb  or 
the  first  element  of  a  loosely  compounded  verb,  stands  at  the 
end  of  a  main  clause  in  a  simple  tense.  The  adjuncts  of  the 
predicate,  such  as  objects,  adverbs,  stand  between  verb  and 
predicate. 

Ex.:  I)er  ©erine  mup  fcijei^en, t^er  (Sommer  ijl  ^n  (Sch.).  ^1^x  [eiD 
ein  Wdfkx  (id.).  Sr  ^at  ijerlor^ne  S3orte  nur  ^efproc^en  (id.),  ^ein 
©d)i{t)  fing  t)iefen  9rtort)ftreic^  auf  (id.).  (Straflofe  gre(^:^eit  j>rld)t  t)en 
©itten  ipo^n  (id.),    ©eftern  fant)  ciit  ^agner^Sonce'rt  ftatt* 

In  tlie  dependent  clause  only  the  verb  changes  position,  subject  and 
predicate  remain  as  in  the  main  clause,  and  the  adjuncts  stand  between 
them.  For  instance :  ®iavLbt  ba^  nic^t !  3^r  werbet  biefe^  tampfe^  ©nbe  nim^ 
mer  erbUtfen  (Sch.),  becomes  ©laubt  m($t,  bag  i^r  biefe^  ^ampfe<3  ©nbe  je  erblicfen 
njerbet. 

351.  In  the  compound  tense  the  separable  prefix  immedi- 
ately precedes  the  participle,  be  it  in  a  main  or  in  a  dependent 
clause,  ^reigic^  3^^^^  ^ahcn  intr  jufammen  au^gelebt  nni:  au^ge^alteti 
(Sch.).    "Lit  S^olera  toiti  (is  about  to)  u'ber^ant  ne^men*  See  137. 

Order  of  Objects  and  Cases. 

352.  a.  Case  of  a  person  before  a  case  of  the  thing.  2lber 
aud)  nod)  ^ann  ♦  .  ♦  ful)r  ^er  ^aifer  fort,  im  @tdnt)eti  ten  grie^en  au 
aetgen  (Sch.). 

b.  Case  of  a  pronoun  before  a  noun.  'Man  Beftimmte  pe 
(them)  liem  attgemeinen  Unn^illen  jum  Dpfer  (Sch.). 

c.  The  dative  stands  before  the  accusative;  if  both  are  per- 
sons, the  accusative  may  stand  before  the  dative.  Sr  felbft 
^atte  i^em  T:ienfte  ^iefe^  ipaufe^  feine  erften  Selr»3uc(e  genjitmet  (Sch.). 


152  GEN^EKAL   SY]STAX — WORD-ORDER.  [353- 

d.  The  accusative-object  stands  before  remoter  objects,  a 
genitive  or  a  preposition  +  case.  But  see  also  a.  'ilRan  mb(^te 
fagen,  33oltaire  ^a6e  nn  (^efiibl  »on  Der  SBic^tigleit  t)iefer  3>er)'onlid^!eit 
ge^aBt  (H.  Grimm).  Die  (^i^iilerin  f(^rieb  einen  3luffa^  iiber  ten 
©inter. 

e.  As  to  pronouns,  ftd^  stands  generally  before  e^,  and  both 
before  every  other  pronoun.  The  personal  pronoun  stands 
before  the  demonstrative.  The  personal  and  ftcb  may  stand 
before  the  subject,  if  it  be  a  noun,  in  the  inverted  and  depend- 
ent orders.  Sr  ^ai  fic^  e^  angeeicjnet.  ^rummau  (a  proper  name) 
nd^ert  ft(^  i^m  (Sch.).  SSer  ttarf  (tc^  fo  ettt>a5  erlauBen  ?  3enem  ten 
2Beg  ju  tern  Bomifd^en  3:^rone  ju  i?erf(^ltegen,  ergriff  man  Me  SSaffen 
f(^on  unter  ^Ulatt^ta^  (Sch.).  5Ba^  i^m  tie  x>ergroperte  ^Ulac^t  ter 
@tdnt)e  (estates)  <m  @elBfttl)dtig!eU:  no(^  ubrig  lie§,  ^ielten  feine 
Slgnaten  (relatives)  unter  txmm  f^impflic^en  3i^<^^9  (i<i-)-  -^^^  W 
tie  glotte  ergeben  ?    A^aft  tu  e^  x^m  tt?ieter  gegeben  ? 

1.  c  also  includes  the  personal  pronouns :  SSie  fonnt'  id)  ol^ne  Seugett  mtc& 
i^r  ua^n  ?  (Sch.).     The  rules  «,  c,  (?  are  by  no  means  strict. 

353.  For  the  position  of  the  adjective,  see  the  use  of  the 
adjective,  194,  212.  Notice  that  what  depends  upon  an 
adjective,  participle,  or  infinitive  precedes  them.  "Die  Sng^^ 
Idnter  ftnt  xhxtm  ^errfd)er:^aufe  ergeben*  ^\xm  ©e^en  geboren,  gum 
©djauen  beftettt,  tern  ^urme  gefc^troren,  gefallt  mir  tie  SBelt  (G.). 
ffiir  baten  x^n,  ten  33rief  auf  tie  5)oft  gu  ^tHn.  (@^a!|>ere'»  2Ber!e 
ftnt)  feine  2:ugentle^ren,  \xi  ^apitet  gebrac^t  unt  turd)  retente  (Eyempel 
eridutert  (Le.). 

Position  of  Adverbs. 

354.  In  general,  adverbs  stand  before  the  words  they 
qualify.  The  modal  adverbs  nidit,  etma,  gtrar,  fc^on,  n?ol,  etc., 
and  the  adverbs  of  time  immer,  f^on,  {e^t,  nie,  nimmer  stand 
generally  immediately  before  the  predicate  or  in  place  of  it  if 
there  is  none,    txt^  ^iltuig  ift  begaubemt  fdjbn  (Mozart's  3^uber^ 


358]  GENERAL   SYJ^TAX — WORD-ORDER.  15^ 

flute)  ^in  fe^r  ^eftiger  §uften  gretft  Un  ^xankn  flat!  an*  'Da^ 
]6^mvt  §era  mirD  ni6t  turd)  5Borte  leiAt  (Sch.).  ©c^on  ^iele  2:090 
fe^'  i(ft  e^  fd)meigenD  an  (id.).  ^&i  l)abe  eu^  noc^  nie  erfannt  (B.). 
^aj^  tu  i^n  noc^  nid}t  Befud^t  ?  (Notice  the  opposite  of  the  Eng- 
lish order  in  "  never  yet/'  "  not  yet.") 

355.  An  adverb  of  time  stands  before  one  of  place,  and 
both  before  one  of  manner.  Ex. :  2>ie(e  Sauern  tt>aren  geftern 
nac^  Ux  (BtaU  au  Wlaxttt  gefa^ren*  S3ir  fasten  morgen  per  (Sifenba^n 
nad)  3flul»olfta^t»   (E5  tanjt  pd)  auf  i^iefem  ^latkn  gupoDen  ni*t  fe^r  gut* 

1.  Of  several  adverbs  of  time  or  place  the  more  general  precede  the 
more  specific.  255ir  reifen  morgen  frii^  urn  6  U^r  59  9)?tnuten  ab*  2)er  5^olijtft 
fanb  hm  SSetntnfenen  auf  ber  ^^a^rj^rape  im  2)rec!e  liegen. 

2.  Adverbs  of  time  precede  objects  when  these  are  nouns,  but  pro- 
nouns precede  all  adverbs.  2Btr  fetcrn  halh  ben  4ten  Suit,  ben  Slag  ber  nnab^ 
l^dnsigfeitaerflarung.    2Bir  l^ofen  i|n  morgen  auf  bent  ^a^n^ofe  ju  trefen* 

356.  Only  ahtx,  namlic^,  iet)0(^,  and  a  few  others,  can  sepa- 
rate subject  and  verb.  Ex. :  £)er  9li(^ter  abtx  fpra(%  (Le.).  Xit 
^ac^tigall  jetoA  ftngt  tt>unt)erf^i3n* 

357.  As  to  the  position  of  the  prepositions,  they,  with  very 
few  exceptions,  precede  the  noun  ;  when  they  follow  the  noun 
has  been  stated  under  Prepositions.  See,  for  instance,  303, 
7,  8,  10. 

Position  of  Clauses. 

358.  Dependent  clauses  have,  in  general,  the  positions  of 
those  parts  of  speech  and  of  the  sentence  which  they  repre- 
sent, i,  e,,  the  substantive  clause  standing  for  the  subject  or 
object  has  the  position  of  the  subject  or  the  object  in  the  sen- 
tence, etc.  No  special  rules  are  needed  for  them.  When 
there  are  several  dependent  clauses,  the  last  often  takes  for 
variety  the  normal  order  introduced  by  unt>» 

The  following  examples  show  well-placed  dependent  clauses  :  ^ettt 
^atfer  fann,  m^  unfer  ijl,  »erf(^enfen  (Sch.).    SJerftegelt  ^nV  W^  unb  »er^rieft, 


154  GEJ^EBAL  SYNTAX — WOKD-OKDER.  [359- 

ba§  er  nieht  guter  ©rtgcl  x\t  (id.),  ^ie  S^rV  bie  i^m  gelJurtr  geb^  i(^  i|>m  gern;  ba^ 
9le(^t  ba<3  er  ftc^  tiimmt,  ijcweigrMc^  i^m  (id.).  $lia  id^  iiinger  tvar,  Uebte  id)  ni^t^ 
fo  fe^r,  dU  0loma'ne  (novels)  (G.).  9iic^etieu  ttuite  fid)  baburd)  ju  klfen,  bag  er 
ben  geinbfeltgfeiten  jtcifi^en  beiben  ein  fd>Ie«ni9e^  £nbe  mad>te  (Scli.).  ISRdn  guter 
©etjl  ktta^rte  mid)  baijor/  bie  flatter  an  ben  ©ufen  nur  ju  legcn  (mir  before  bie 
SiJatter  in  prose)  (id.).  2)er  9J?enf(^  bege^rt,  aGe^  an  ftc^  ju  reigen  (G.).  2Bie 
glucfUc^  tjl  ber,  ber,  urn  ftc^  niit  bent  Sc^idfal  in  ©inigfeit  ju  fe^en,  nid)t  fein  ganje^ 
»or|erge^enbca  i?eben  megjitwerfen  IJrand)t  (id.). 

359.  The  rules  given  can  hardly  be  abstracted  from  poetry.  Even  in  prose  they 
will  be  found  frequently  infringed.  Rhythm,  rhyme,  and,  in  prose,  emphasis  control  the 
order  of  words  and  allow  of  much  choice.  But  students  translating  into  German  should 
adhere  to  the  rales  very  strictly.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  German  word-order  coin- 
cides very  nearly  with  the  old  English,  and  does  not  differ  after  all  so  much  from  the 
modem  English  word-order.  The  chief  points  of  difference  are  the  dependent  order, 
the  position  of  adverbs  of  time,  which  in  English  stand  generally  at  the  end,  and  the 
position  of  the  adjuncts  of  adjectives,  participles,  and  infinitives,  wliich  precede  the 
latter  instead  of  following  them  as  in  English. 

1.  The  word-order  required  by  certain  conjunctions  has  been  frequently  mentioned 
in  the  General  Syntax.    See,  for  instance,  320. 


LIST    OF   ABBEEVIATIONS    AND    SYMBOLS    THAT 
REQUIRE  EXPLANATIONS. 


Ags.  =  Anglo-Saxon. 

(B.)  =  Bible. 

(Bo.)  =  Bodenstedt. 

(Bii.)  =  Burger. 

(Ch.)  =  Cliamisso. 

D.  =  Butch  or  Dative. 

(F.)  =  Hart's  Edition  of  Goethe's 

Faust,  Part  I. 
Fr.  =  French. 
(G.)  -^  Goethe. 
Go.  =  Gothic. 
Gr.  —  Greek. 
G.  T.  =  General  Teutonic. 
(H.  and    D.)   =  Hart's   edition  of 

Goethe's  Hermann  and  Dorothea. 
(He.)  =  Herder. 
H.  G.  =  High  German. 
(Hu.)  =  A.  von  Humboldt. 
I.-E.  =  Indo-European. 
L.  =  Latin. 
(Le.)  =  Leasing. 


L.  G.  =  Low  German. 

(Lu.)  =  Luther's  works  excepting 
his  translation  of  the  Bible. 

M.  G.  =  Middle  German. 

M.  H.  G.  =  Middle  High  German. 

N.  G.  =  North  German  or  North 
Germany. 

N.  H.  G.  =  New  High  German. 

O.  Fr.  =  Old  French. 

O.  H.  G.  =  Old  High  German. 

(Prov.)  =  Proverb. 

(R.)  =  Riickert. 

Rules  =  the  oflBcial  rules  for  spell- 
ing, see  37. 

(Sch.)  =  Schiller. 

S.  G.  =  South  German. 

(Sh.)  =  Shakespere  translated  x>y 
Schlegel  and  Tieck. 

(Uh.)  =  Uhland. 

V.  L.  =  Vulgar  Latin. 


<  means  "  derived  from,"  "  sprang  from,"  '*  taken  from." 

>  means  **  passed  or  developed  into,"  **  taken  into." 

+  between  a  German  and  non- German  word  denotes  common  origin 
or  **  cognates."  In  other  positions  it  means  "  accompanied  or  followed 
by." 

*  before  a  word  means  that  that  form  of  the  word  does  not  actually 
occur,  but  is  conjectured  or  reconstructed. 

:  =  :,  or  :  as  :,  means  a  relation  as  in  a  mathematical  proportion. 

I,  II,  III  after  verbs  indicates  the  strong  verb-classes. 

—  between  letters  means  "  interchanges  with,"  e.g.,^  —  d)  as  in  ^o^er  — 
^od)  or  e  —  i  as  in  ne^men  —  nimmjl* 


SUBJECT-INDEX. 


The  numbers  refer  to  the  paragraphs.    The  umlauts  have  a  separate  place,  h  after 
a,  b  after  o,  u  after  u. 


Ablaut :  nature  of,  393 ;  four  grades, 
394,463,2;  496;  497. 

Ablaut  series :  and  verb-classes,  132- 
139  ;  I.-E.,  394,  1 ;  G.  T.,  >  O.  H.  G.  > 
N.  H.  G.,  395-400;  459-467  ;  group- 
ing of,  459. 

Abstract  nouns  :  article  before,  149  ;  no 
article,  145  ;  155,  2;  plural  of,  171 ; 
62,  Rem. 

Accent:  417,418;  degrees  of,  419; 
chief  on  stem-syllable,  420  •  420,  2; 
478,  4;  Eng.  in  Norman-Fr.  words, 
420,  3  ;  in  compounds,  421-423  ;  sec- 
ondary, 424;  rhetorical,  426;  "free" 
in  I.-E.,  420,  2 ;  in  foreign  words,  42  7, 
420,  1;  424,  4;  493,2;  63,  2;  charac- 
teristic of  Germanic  Lang.,  478, 4;  =in- 
tonation,  392,  1. 

Accidence :  38-138  ;  Historical  Commen- 
tary on,  428-476. 

Accusative:  office  of,  198;  after  verbs, 
198-206;  two  A.  after  verbs,  199; 
predicate  in  passive,  202,  2;  cognate, 
203 ;  logical  subject  in,  205  ;  after  re- 
flexive verbs,  206  ;  adverbial,  207 ;  dif- 
ference between  A.  and  G.  of  time,  208, 
1  ;  after  adjectives,  207, 1 ;  183  ;  abso- 
lute, 209  ;  297,  1 ;  by  attraction  in  the 
pred.  after  laffen,  202,  1 ;  after  prepos., 
304-306;  with  Inf.,  292. 

Adjective:  decl.  of,  69-72  ;  436  ;  origin 
of  strong  decl.,  437;  comparison  of, 
73-76,  see  comparison,  compar.  and 
superlat. ;  438,  439  ;  used  as  nouns, 
820,  221,  181 ;  gender  of  same,  160, 
3  ;  169  ;  162,  3 ;  G.  after,  182,  183  ; 
D.  after,  194  ;  A.  after,  183 ;  207,  1. 

Attributive  use  of,  211-217  ;  only 
used  attributively,  211  ;  uninflected 
used  attributively,  212  ;  in  the  predi- 
cate, 218,  220 ;  as  nouns  declined 
strong,  214  ;  G.  sg.  m.  and  n.,  216,  1; 
declined  weak,  213;  217,1;  as  nouns, 
221, 1 ;  origin  of  double  decl.,  215  ;  un- 
settled usage  as  to  strong  and  weak 
decl.,  216,  221  ;  after  indef.  pron., 
214  ;  216,  4;  181  ;  after  person,  pron., 
216,2;  two  or  more  adj.,  212,3;  217. 
In  the  predicate,  218,  219  ;  only  used 
in  pred.,  219;  position  of  adjuncts  of, 
353 ;    accent   in    certain   compounds, 


422,    1-7 ;    derivation    of,    522-528 ; 
used  as  adverb,  554. 
Adjective  Clauses :  nature  of,  323  ;  326- 
328  ;  339. 

Adverbial  Clauses :  nature  of,  323,  329  ; 
various  kinds  of,  330-340  ;  see  tempo- 
ral, local,  clauses  of  manner  and  cause 
(332-340),  final  (338).  conditional, 
(340),  etc. 

Adverbs :  origin  of,  551-555  ;  <  G.  of 
nouns,  187,  552  ;  +prepos.  supplanting 
the  person,  pron.,  234  ;  syntax  of,  299, 
300;  after  prepos.  +  noun,  300;  ad- 
verbs which  are  only  adverbs,  300, 1 ; 
554,  2 ;  adjective  as,  300,  2  ;  554  ; 
comparison  by,  223,  224  ;  relative  and 
absolute  superl.  of,  300,  2 ;  nature  of, 
301, 1  ;  interrogative,  251,  5;  relative, 
258,  326,  331  ;  demonstrative,  327, 
3;  in  local  clauses,  331,  a-  position  in 
a  sentence,  354 ;  order  of  adverbs  of 
time,  place,  manner,  355 ;  accent  in 
compound,  423. 

Adversative  Sentences  :  coordinate,  320. 

Affricate  :  413,  5 ;  408, 1. 

Alemanic :  483,  1. 

Alphabet :  printed  and  script,  1,  2  ;  ori- 
gin of  the  G.  letters,  360  ;  Latin  letters 
in  G.,  360,  2 ;  relation  to  G.  sounds, 
361. 

Anglo-Saxon,  see  English. 

Apposition;  <  G.  of  nouns,  181  ;  179, 
1;  317. 

Articles:  inflect,  of,  38;  accent  of,  39; 
contraction  with  prepositions, 40 ;  spell- 
ing of,  39 ;  41  ;  syntax  of,  140-158  ; 
nature  of  140  ;  general  cases  of  absence 
of,  141-146 ;  before  proper  nouns, 
147  ;  before  abstract  nouns,  149;  be- 
fore names  of  materials,  150 ;  before 
collective  nouns,  151 ;  repetition  of, 
158.    See  A.,  def.  and  indef. 

Article,  Def. :  infl.  of,  38 ;  attraction  to 
preceding  words  not  prepositions,  41  ; 
contraction  with  preceding  prepos.,  40  ; 
relation  to  Eng.  possessive  pron.,  154, 
243,3;  distributive  for  Eng.  "a,"  156. 

Article,  Indef. :  infl.  of.  38  ;  aphaeresis  of, 
41;  after  certain  pronouns,  144,  252; 
before  certain  pronouns,  157. 

Austrian:  483. 


SUBJECT-INDEX. 


267 


Auxiliaries:  of  tense:  infl.  of,  110  ;  use 
of,  365,  366  ;  383,  2 ;  omission  of, 
346;  in  passive  voice,  373. 

Modal :  see  pret.  pres.  verbs  ;  special 
uses  of,  367;  verbs  of  motion  omitted 
after,  367,  Rem. ;  imperative  force  of, 
387,  4 ;  +  perf.  and  pres.  inf.,  388, 1 ; 
390.;  in  future,  3  79,  3,  a. 


Bavarian-Austrian :  483,  2 ;  488,  5,  a. 
Bible:  486;  487. 
Brecfiung :  405,  Rem. 


Capitals :  initial,  364 ;  in  pronouns  of 
address,  330;  in  article,  39. 

Cardinals,  see  Numerals. 

Cases :  see  individual  cases,  N.,  G.,  etc.  ; 
order  of  cases  in  the  sentence,  353. 

Causal  Sentences  :  coordinate,  331 ;  sub- 
ordinate, 337. 

Comparative  :  see  comparison  ;  use  of, 
3*/«3  ;  by  adverbs,  333,  334  ;  conjunc- 
tions after,  333. 

Comparative  Clauses  :  333,  1-3  ;  with 
nid)t,  333,  2. 

Comparison:  of  adjectives,  73-76;  438; 
439;  irregular,  76,  1;  defective  and 
redundant,  76,  2;  the  suflixes,  73, 438 ; 
by  adverbs,  333,  334,  333,  1 ;  of  two 
qualities  of  the  same  object,  334. 

Compound  words  :  accent  of,  431-434  ; 
irregular  accent  of  certain  nouns,  adjec- 
tives, and  prefixes,  433  ;  secondary  ac- 
cent in,  434  ;  531 :  see  nouns,  adj., 
etc. ;  516 ;  compared  with  Eng.,  531, 

Compound  tenses  :  109-115  ;  383. 

Concessive  Clauses :  339. 

Conditionals :  formation  of,  115,  383,  5  ; 
force  of,  380,  381,  384,  5. 

Conditional  Clauses  :  tenses  in,  380,  384, 
5 ;  nature  of,  340 ;  several  forms  of, 
340,  1 5  word-order  in,  343,  c. 

Conjugation :  strong  and  weak,  101-103 ; 
446,476  ;  weak,  117,  118,  447,  454, 
455  ;  strong,  130-133,  446,456-469. 

Conjunctions  :  classification  of,  307  ;  ori- 
gin of,  301,  558. 

Coordinating:  copulative,  319;  adver- 
sative, 330 ;  concessive,  330,  2  ;  causal, 
331  ;  illative,  333. 

Subordinating  :  in  temporal  clauses, 
330  ;  in  comparative  clauses,  333 ; 
334  -J  in  consecutive  clauses,  336  ;  in 
restnctive  clauses,  336;  causal,  337; 
final,  338  ;  concessive,  339  ;  condi- 
tional, 340. 

Consecutive  Clauses :  335. 

Consonant-declension,  see  n-declension. 

Consonant-stems :  become  i-steme,  54  ; 
438,  2  ;  433,  1 ;  433-435. 

Consonants:  description  of,  374-389; 
open,  374-381 ;  shut,  383-385  ;  na- 
sals, 386-388^;  compound,  389  ;  long, 
389,  5 ;  cous.-table,  p.  1G7 ;  see  Grimnvs 


and  Vemer's  Laws;  doubling  or  length- 
ening of,  389,  5;  413,  5;  488,  2,  c; 
535,  1,  R.  2. 

Coordinate  Sentences:  318;  various  kinds 
of,  319-333. 

Copulative  Sentences :  319. 


Dauisli:  479,  n. 

Dative:  oflice  of,  189;  as  nearer  object 
after  intrans.  and  certain  compound 
verbs,  190  ;  as  indirect  object  after 
trans,  verbs,  191;  ethical,  193  ;  after 
impers.  verbs,  193  ;  after  adj.,  194 ; 
190;  supplanted  by  prepos.  +  case, 
195;  after  prepos.,  303,  305,  306. 

Declension  :  of  articles,  38;  of  nouns,  43- 
68 ;  438-435  ;  of  foreign  nouns,  64, 
63,3;  of  proper  nouns,  65-68;  ofthe  ad- 
jective, 69-73;  of  pronouns,  81-100. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns :  88-91 ;  use  of, 
344-350 ;  origin  of,  443  ;  supplanted 
by  l)ier  and  ba  +  prepos.,  351,  2. 

Dependent  Clauses,  see  Subordinate. 

Dependent  order  of  words :  341,  344  ; 
in  main  clauses,  347,349;  the  oldest 
order,  349,  2. 

Dialect :  and  written  lansruage,  390 ;  in 
M.  H.  G.,  485,  2  ;  in  N.  H.  G.,  486, 
487;  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  edu- 
cated, 390  ;  and  the  public  school,  393, 
5. 

Diphthongs:  pronunc.  of,  33  ;  analysis  of, 
373  ;  become  single  vowels,  488,  4  •  < 
long  vowels,  488,  5. 

Dutch :  481,  3  ;  493,  3. 


East  Prankish  :  483,  3  ;  486. 

Elliptical  clauses  and  phrases :  310  ;  384, 

5,  Rem.;  387;  343,  of,  2. 
English:    479,  III.  ;  493,4;   umlaut  in, 

403,  2. 
Euphony:  418,1. 
Exclamation :  G.  in,  188,  309,  3 ;  order 

of  words  in,  343,  e  ;  see  interjections. 


Final  clauses :  338. 

Flemish  :  481,  3. 

Foreign  nouns  :  decl.  of,  64  ;  gender  of, 
163;  verbs,  538. 

Foreign  wordls  :  spelling  of,  365  ;  ac- 
cent, 437,  430,  1 ;  434,  4 ;  in  G.  word- 
stock,  493-494. 

Fractions :   633,  2. 

Frisian :  481, 1. 

Future :  formation  of,  114  ;  force  of, 
378  ;  imperative  force  of,  378,  3 ; 
387,  3 ;  present  with  future  force,  374, 
5  ;  condit.  for  subj.  of,  381 ;  origin  of, 
383,4;  379,  3. 

Gender  :  of  nouns  and  their  distribution 
among  the  declensions  according  to, 
43;  syntax  of,  159-169;  grammati- 
c.il  and  sex,  159,  IGO ;  concord  ofthe 


268 


SUBJECT-INDEX. 


same,  165-168  ;  according  to  meaning, 
160;  according  to  endings,  161;  doubt- 
ful and  double,  163  ;  change  of,  161, 
Eera.,  163;  of  compound  nouns,  164; 
concord  of,  165-168;  between  subject 
and  predicate,  313,  316. 

Genitive:  office  of,  180;  various  kinds  of 
G.,  180,  1-7;  partitive  G.  passed  into 
apposition,  181,  351;  supplanted  by 
piepos.,  181 ;  dependent  upon  adj., 
83,  183 ;  dependent  upon  verbs  as 
nearer  object,  184;  as  remoter  object, 
185;  after  impersonal  verbs,  186;  ad- 
verbial G.  of  place,  time,  etc.,  187;  sup- 
planted by  A.,  307,  Rem.;  difference  be- 
tween A.  and  G.,  308;  after  prepos., 
303;  in  exclamations,  188. 

German  Dialects  :  classification  of,  480- 
483;  484. 

Gsrman  Language :  see  Sdiriftsprache  ; 
history  of,  478-494  ;  relation  to  other 
Germanic  languages,  480-486. 

German  Sounds :  analysis  of,  366-389. 

Germanic  Languages :  relation  to  other 
I.-E.  languages,  477;  characteristics  of , 
478  ;  classification  of,  479-484. 

Gerundive:  107  ;  389,  Rem. ;  398  ;  453. 

Gothic:  letters,  360;  language,  479,  1. 

Grimm's  Law  :  407-415  ;  G.  T.  shifting, 
407-410;  G.  shifting,  413-415;  mod- 
ifications of,  413  ;  in  dialects,  480  ;  in 
derivative  verbs,  535,  1,  R.  2. 

Hessian  :   483,  2. 

High  German  :  explanation  of  terms,  480, 

3,  a.    See  South  German. 
Hildebrantslied  :  485, 1. 

Icelandic :  479,  IT ;  339. 1 ;  530. 

Ilkitive  Sentences  :  co-ordinate,  333. 

Imperative :  105,  450  ;  in  strong  verbs. 
131  ;  personal  pron.  in,  386,  1 ;  future 
with  imperative  force,  378,  3  ;  387,  3 ; 
force  of,  386  ;  other  verbal  forms  with 
the  force  of,  387  ;  conditional  and  con- 
cessive force  of  339, 1 ;  word-order  in, 
343,  b. 

Indefinite  Pronouns :  94-100,  445  ;  use 
of,  359-363. 

Indirect  Speech :  tenses  in,  383;  mood  in, 
385;  335,3;  338. 

Indo-European:  477. 

Infiuitive:    106,  451;    nature  of,  388; 

390,  3,  b  ;  perfect,  388, 1  ;  imper.  force 
of,  387,  1 ;  without  and  with  ,11.  389- 
391;  391,3-5;  without  v.t,  389,Rem.; 
after  certain  groups  of  verbs,  390  ;  with 
ju,  do.,  391,  1  ;   as  object  and  subject, 

391,  2,  3 ;  A.  with,  393  ;  as  a  noun, 
393  ;  governed  by  prepos.  +  ^u,  391, 1 ; 
inf.  clause,  335,  2,  Rem.  3  ;  333, 1;  335, 
1 ;  position  of  two,  in  dependent  clause, 
345,  1 ;  position  of  adjuncts  of,  353. 

Insfumental:  194. 

Interiections:  .559,  5G0. 

IntCxi-ogative  Pronouns:  93,444;  use  of, 

351-353  ;    D.  supplanted  by  lue(i)    + 

prepos.,  351,  2. 


Interrogative  Sentences :  309, 2 ;  indirect, 
335,  2 ;  disjunctive,  335,  2,  c ;  word- 
order,  343,  a. 

Inverted  order  of  words:  341,  343;  in 
inserted  main  clause,  343,  1 ;  origin  of, 
in  conditional  and  in  main  clauses,  348, 
1 ;  after  certain  co-ordinating  conjimc-. 
tions,  319 ;  in  a  clause  instead  of  obs 
0lei(^,  etc.,  339. 

I-stems:  53-55;  439. 

Iteratives:  531,2. 


Jo-stems:  46,2;   438;   in  adj.,  437,  3: 
496,2;  533. 


Kanzleisprache :  486,487. 


Labialization,  367, 1 ;  370,  4,  Rem. 
Language :  written.    See  Schriftsprache, 
Law  of  Finals:  478,3. 
Levelling :  nature  of,  491, 1 ;  in  the  strong 

pret.,  460 ;   in  the  weak  verbs.  454, 

455. 
Low  Frankish :  481,  3. 
Low    German    Dialects:    480,   1;    481; 

>  H.  G.,  493,  3 ;  their  relation  to  the 

written  language,  393, 1-3 ;  391. 
Low  Saxon:  481,2. 
Luther:  486,487. 


Middle  Frankish:  483, 1. 

Middle  German  Dialects:    480,2;    483; 

488,  3,  a  ;  488,  4. 
Middle  High  German  :  485,  2 ;  transition 

of  sounds  to  N.  H.  G.,  488-491. 
Mi-verbs:  136;  449,1,2;  473-476. 
Modal  Clauses :  333. 
Modal  Auxiliaries.    See  Auxiliaries. 
Mood :   see    subj.,  imper. ;    in   adjective 

clauses,  338. 
Multiplicatives :  531, 1. 


N-decleneion :  of  nouns,  47,  61,  62, 
433-435  ;  of  adjectives,  69,  313,  315. 

Narrowness  of  vowels :  367,2. 

Negatives  :  309, 1 ;  double  negative,  309, 
1 ;  in  comparative  clauses,  333,  2. 

New  High  German  :  485,  486. 

Nominative:  178,179;  absolute,  397; 
predicate.  179;  A.  for,  in  pred.,  303,  1. 

Normal  order  of  words :  341,  343  ;  in 
subordinate  clauses,  345,  2 ;  after  co- 
ordinating conjunctions,  343,  2  ;  when 
the  subordinate  clause  precedes,  343,  3; 
348,  2  ;  343,  c  ;  358. 

North  German  :  see  Low  G. 

Norwegian:  479,11. 

Nouns:  decl.  of,  43-68  ;  systems  of  noun* 
decl.,  43  ;  distribution  of  nouns  among 
the  three  declensions  according  to  gen- 
der, 43,  433  ;  cfeneral  rules  for  noun- 
decL,  43  ;  strong  decl.  of,  44-60,  438- 
431 ;  weak  decl.  of,   Gl,  63,  438,  2  ; 


SUBJECT-INDEX, 


269 


432 ;  mixed  decl.  of,  63,  435, 1 ;  use 

of  cases,  see  individaal  cases  ;  deriva- 
tion of,  496-51G;  composition,  517- 
581.  gender  of  compound,  1G4;  ac- 
cent of,  431,  423.  See  Number,  Proper 
N.,  Foreign  N..  Abstract  N.,  Compound. 

Number :  Singular  and  plural  of  nouns  : 
pi.  the  basis  of  classification  of  strong 
nouns,  44 ;  no  sign,  45,  a ;  umlaut, 
45,*;  -e,  49-55;  -er,  56-60,  431; 
(e)n,  61-63 ;  pi.  in  -3,  60 ;  irregular, 
51,  173,  173 ;  double  forms,  58,  163, 
4;  431,  2;  of  abstract  nouns,  171; 
nouns  only  in  pi.,  174. 

Sing,  or  pi.  after  nouns  of  quantity, 
etc.,  175  ;  why  sing.,  176  ;  sing,  where 
Eng.  pi.,  177;  sing.  neut.  of  pronouns 
refer  to  masc,  fern.,  and  plural  nouns, 
168,  313. 

Sin<,^  and  pi.  of  verbs :  311 ;  pi.  after 
a  collective  noun,  313  ;  "pi.  of  majes- 
ty," 311,  2. 

Numerals  :  77 ;  infl.  of,  78 :  when  in- 
flected, 336,  337;  cardinals,  77-79; 
pi.  in  -e,  337  ;  in  -cr,  338,  2  ;  ordinals, 
80,  311,  530,  533  ;  infinitive,  100; 
derivation  of,  5^9-^33. 


Old  High  German  :  485. 

Ordinals :  see  Numerals. 

Orthography  :  division  into  syllables,  36; 
regulated  by  government,  37,  36i,  2; 
historical  notes  on,  360-365;  umlaut- 
eigns,  363 ;  on  the  marks  to  show 
length,  363  ;  on  use  of  capitals,  364  ;  of 
foreign  words,  365  ;  government  rules, 
37. 

O-stems  ;  lose  sign  of  the  pi.,  47,  51, 
438. 


Participial  Clauses  :  394,  4 ;  333, 1. 

Participles  :  103,  107,  453  ;  use  of,  394 
-397  ;  position  of  adjuncts  of,  353. 

Past  part,  without  gc-,  108,  113, 
453,  2;  470,  538;  isolated,  139, 
Rem.;  131, Rem.;  534, 4  ;  imper.  force 
of,  387,  2;  passive  force  of,  395  ;  act- 
ive force  of,  395,  2 ;  396 ;  dependent 
upon  fommen.  l^eiFii,  etc ,  396 ;  of 
verbs  of  motion,  396;  absolute  con- 
struction, 397. 

Pres.part.,374,6;  383,3,4;  394,453; 
in  compound  tenses,  383,1,  2;  351. 

Passive  :   see  Voice. 

Perfect:  formation  of,  113;  force  of. 
376;  with  future  perf  force,  379,2; 
Eng.  perf.  —  G.  pres.,  374,4;  impera- 
tive, 386,  1 ;  infinitive,  388. 

Personal  Pronouns  :  81,  83,  440 ;  syn- 
tax of,  330-335  ;  gender  of,  81  ;  use 
of,  in  address,  330-33,3  ;  repetition  of, 
33.3,  2 ;  omission  of,  333,  1  ;  sup- 
planted by  other  pronouns  and  preposi- 
tions, 334  ;  in  the  imper.,  386,  1. 

Phonology  :  360-437  ;  orthography,  360 
-365  ;    analysis  of  sounds,  366-389 ; 


as  standard  of  pronunc,  300-393  ;  pho- 
netic laws.  393-417  ;  accent,  418-437. 

Plaitdeutvsch  :  481,  2.  a  ;  484, 

Pluperfect:  formation  of,  113;  force  of, 
377;  relation  to  Condit.,  380,  381, 
384,  5, 

Plural :  see  Number. 

Popular  Etymology  ;  494,  S,  3. 

Possessive  Pronouns  :  85-87  ;  sjTitax  Oi, 
339-343  ;  origin  of,  441 ;  compounds 
with,  87;  used  substantively,  340; 
repetition  of,  341,  343,  2 ;  relation  to 
def.  article,  154,  343,3 ;  supplanted  by 
demonstr.  pron.,  343,  1 ;  uninliected, 
339,  343,  1;  after  G.,  180,  4, 

Predicate,  308 ;  concord  of  subj.  and 
pred.,  311-317  ;  number  of  verb  after 
collective  noun,  313 ;  when  subjects  are 
connected  by  conjunctions,  311,  314; 
person  of  verb  when  subjects  are  of  dif- 
ferent persons,  315  ;  position  of,  350, 
351. 

Prepositions:  syntax  of,  301-306  ;  nat- 
ure of,  301,  1,2;  556;  classification 
of,  according  to  cases,  and  treatment  of, 
in  alphabetical  order,  303-306  •  gov- 
ei-niug  the  G.,  303  ;  governing  the  D., 
303  ;  governing  the  A.,  304  ;  govern- 
ing D.  and  A.,  305 ;  general  position  of, 
357. 

Present:  infl.  of,  103:  of  weak  verbs, 
118.  447 ;  of  strong  verbs,  131,  456 ; 
O.  H.  G.,  446  ;  of  pret.-pres.  verbs, 
134  ;  uses  of,  374  ;  periphrastic,  374, 
6;  impcr.  force,  387,  3;  formation  of 
present-stem,  457. 

Preterit:  infl.  of,  103;  weak,  454; 
strong,  458  ;  levelling  in.  460  ;  double 
subj.,  135,  136.  464,3  ;  139  ;  of  pret.- 
pres,  verbs,  134.  470;  force  of,  375  ; 
relation  to  condit.,  380,381,384,5; 
ind.  for  unreal  subj.,  340,  3. 

Pret.  pres.  verbs  :  134  ;  135  ;  108,  2 ; 
367;  470-473 

Pronouns:  inflection  of,  81-100,  440- 
445;  syntax  of,  330-363;  concord 
with  noun,  165-168,  335;  origin  of, 
496;  position  of,  in  the  sentence,  353, 
e ;  neut.  pron.  refers  to  masc.  or  fom. 
noims,  168  ;  neut.  pron.  one  of  two 
accusatives,  199,  1,  2.  See  reciprocal, 
possessive,  etc.,  separately. 

Pronunciation:  of  letters.  1-37,  366; 
standard  of,  390-393 ;  disputed  points 
in  standard,  391 ;  Hanoveiian  and  N. 
G.,  390,  4  ;  393,  1-3  ;  dialect  in,  390, 
1-3. 

Proper  Nouns  :  decl-  of,  65-68 ;  article 
before,  147,  155, 1  ;  gender  of,  160,  2, 
with  Rem. ;  164. 


Question :  see  Interrogative  Sentences. 


Reciprocal    Pronouns:    84,    197,    306, 

338. 
Reduplication :  nature  of,  458 ;  in  VII.  CI. 


270 


SUBJECT-IKDEX. 


of  verbs,  130,  131;  in  the  present, 

457,3. 
Reflexive  Pronouns:    83,337;  personal 

for,  33  7,  1. 
Relative  Clauses :  see  Adjective  CI. 
Relative  Prononns :    93 ;   use    of,    354- 

358 ;    origin  of,  354  ;    supplanted  by 

adverbs  and  conjunctions,  357,   358, 

336,  337. 
Restrictive  Clauses  :  336. 
Roundness  of  vowels;  367,  1:  in  S.  G., 

391,  5. 
Runes,  493,  2. 
BUckmnlaut :  403,  2  ;  455. 


Scandinavian,  479, 11. 

Schriftsprache :  390;  485,  2f  486,  487. 

Sentence  :  structure  of  simple,  308 ;  con- 
stituents o^  308  ;  arrangement  of,  see 
word-order:  various  kinds  of  main, 
3Q9  ;  384,  2  ;  386 :  compound,  see  co- 
ordinate and  subordinate. 

Shifting  of  mutes :  see  Grimm's  Law. 

Shifting  of  spirants :  see  Vemer's  Law. 

Silesian  :  483,  6. 

Singular :  see  Number. 

Slavic  :  477  ;  481,  2,  Rem. ;  483,  4-6. 

Souancy:  376. 

South  Frankisn  :  483,  2. 

South  German  Dialects :  480,  3 ;  483  ; 
488,  5,  a  ;  489 ;  490,  1,  a  ;  relation  to 
the  written  language,  391,  393,  4. 

Suabian :  483,  2. 

Subject  r  308 ;  concord  of,  and  predicate, 
311-317  ;  position  of  subject  and  verb, 
341,  356. 

Subjunctive  :  kinds  of,  384  ;  potential, 
384,  3;  335,  2.  Rem.  1 ;  335,  2 ;  338  ; 
in  conditional  clauses,  340,  448. 

Subordinate  Sentences  :  318,  333,  334- 
340;  word-order  in,  343,  c;  344- 
346  ;  350,  Rem.  ;  omission  of  auxil., 
346  ;  position  of,  358. 

Substantive  Clauses :  333-335  ;  nature 
of,  333 ;  various  kinds  of,  335  ;  nor- 
mal order  in,  345. 

Superlative:  see  Comparison ;  use  of, 333 
-335  ;  never  uninfiected.  333 ;  absolute 
and  relative,  333 ;  applied  to  two  ob- 
jects, 335;  of  adverbs,  300,  2. 

Siirdness  :  376. 

Swedish  :  479,  IL 

Swiss  :  483, 1,  a. 


Temporal  Clauses  :  330. 

Tenses  :  simple,  101,  103,  448 ;  use  of, 
374,  375,  383. 

Compound:  109,  113-116,  376- 
381 ;  origin  of,  383  ;  position  of  sepa- 
rable prefix,  351.  See  the  separate 
tenses. 

Thuringian  :  483,  4. 

Time  :   modes  of  expressing  time,  336 ; 
G.  of,  187  ;  A.  of,  308. 


Umlaut :  signs  of,  31,  363  ;  as  a  sign  oi 
the  pi.,  45,  b\  48 ;  in  comparis(m  oi 
adj.,  74;  in  pret.  subj.  of  strong  verbs, 
131 ;  in  the  pres.  of  strong  verbs,  137, 
Rem.  ;  139,  Rem.  ;  130,  Rem.  ;  131, 
Rem. :  404  ;  nature  of,  ^01  ;  in  Eng., 
403,  2 ;  spread  of,  488,  1 ;  in  derived 
verbs,  535. 

Upper  Saxon  :  483,  5. 

Variatives:  533. 

Verb  :  principal  parts  of,  103 ;  infl.  of, 
\i)6  ;  personal  suffixes  of  104,  118, 
121,  449;  classification  of,  364  ;  ir- 
regular weak,  119,  454,  455;  weak 
vebs  are  derivative,  117, 1. 

Reduplicating:  130,  131,458;  non- 
thematic,  see  mi- verbs ;  anomalous, 
134-136. 

Compound  :    137 ;  D.  after,  190 ;  A. 
after,  198,  547-550;  accent  in,  421. 
Reflexive,  138  ;  197;  306;  336,2: 
364. 

Impersonal :  subject  of,  336, 1,  2,  5; 
cases  after,  186,  193,  305  ;  G.  after, 
184-180  ;  D.  after,  189-193  ;  D.  or  A. 
after,  196,  300  ;  A.  after.  198  ;  two  A., 
199,  301 ;  neuter,  179  ;  trans.,  191, 
364 ;  intrans.,  364. 

V.  of  motion :  comp.  tense  of,  365,  4; 
366  ;  383,  3  ;  390,  2  ;  past  part,  of, 
396;  see  Number,  Predicate,  auxil., 
pret.  pres.  verbs  ;  person  of,  in  relative 
clauses,  336  ;  position  of,  341,  350^ 
Rem.  ;  derivation  of,  534-550. 

Verner's  Law  :  411,  413,  416. 

Voice  :  passive,  infl.  of,  116  ;  constmc- 
tion  in,  179,2;  303,  2;  368-373; 
replaced  by  reflexive  construction,  3  73  ; 
origin  of,  373  ;  in  Go.,  383, 1. 

Vowel-declension :  see  Noun,  strong ; 
438-431. 

Vowels  :  quantity  of,  33-35,  488,  2,  b ; 
analysis  and  description  of,  367-373; 
vowel-table,  p.  162 ;  general  remarks 
upon,  373;  doubling  of.  33,363,4; 
connecting  v.  in  conjugation,  118; 
449,  2  ;  454,  2,  3  ;  in  ablaut,  393- 
400  ;  in  umlaut,  401,  403,  404 ;  in- 
terchanges of,  403-406  ;  lengthening 
of,  in  W.  H.  G.,  488,  2  ;  ^hortening  o^ 
488,  3 ;  diphthongization  of  long  v., 
488,  5. 

Vowel- stems  :  see  Vowel-Declension. 


Wordformation  :  495  -  559  ;  substan- 
tives, 495-531 ;  pronouns,  496  ;  ad- 
jectives, 533-533;  verbs,  534-550; 
adverbs,  prepositions,  conjunctions, 
551-558 ;  interjections,  559. 

Word-order  :  341-350  ;  normal,  343  ; 
inverted,  343 ;  dependent,  344.  See 
these  separate  heads;    in  poetry  and 

W arose,  359, 
ord-stock:  493-494. 


WORD-INDEX  AND   GERMAN-ENGLISH 
VOCABULARY. 


The  first  contains  a  list  of  the  German  and  English  words,  prefixes  and  suffixes 
specially  treated  in  the  grammar.  Also  the  strong  and  irregular  verbs  with  the  princi- 
pal parts,  and  the  second  or  third  pers.  sing,  of  the  pres.  ind.  and  the  imperative  sing,, 
if  they  are  at  all  peculiar. 

The  umlauts  have  a  separate  place,  a  after  a,  o  after  o,  vi  after  u. 

The  numbers  refer  to  the  paragraphs.  I.,  II.,  III.,  etc.,  mean  the  strong  verb-classes 
and  ablaut  series. 

After  the  substantives  the  gender  {m.,  n.,f.)  and  the  plural  ending  are  always  indi- 
cated of  the  strong  nouns,  the  gender  and  w.  (=  weak)  are  given  after  the  weak  nouns. 
When  there  is  no  pi.  sign  at  all,  it  is  indicated  by  -.  When  the  cognate  Eng.  word  is 
rare,  or  when  its  meaning  differs  quite  widely  from  the  German  word,  it  is  placed  after 
the  common  Eng.  meaning. 

The  vocabulary  is  meant  to  cover  all  untranslated  single  words  and  illustrative  sen- 
tences as  far  as  §  147,  except  the  foreign  words  63,  3;  63,  2;  64. 
.    If  weak  verbs  must  have  the  connecting  vowel  this  is  indicated  by  the  preterit. 
-  after  a  word  means  a  prefix  in  composition,  before  a  word  it  means  a  suflax. 


a. 

a,  pronnnc.  of,  3;  description  of,  371,  4; 

quantity  of,  before  r,  it,  xt,  33,  488,  2 ; 

in  ablauts.,  VI.,  459,  4 ;  in  ablauts.  I.- 

V.,  459. 
a,  in  Engl,  phrase  "  so  much  a  pound,'' 

156. 
9lag,  n.^pl.  Stfcr,  carrion. 
ah,  from,  303,1;  516,  1. 
aljer,  but,  60,  +  word-order,  343,  2;  356; 

comt)ared  with  fenbevn,  330,  2  R 
H&cr-,  516,  1. 
ab^anben,  lost,  439, 1. 
aO'fc^rclben,  to  copy,  see  f(i>rei6cn. 
9l6t,  m.,  !le,  + abbot, 
a  A,  alas,  60;  559,  1. 
a^ten,  with  G.,  to  attend  to,  in  83;  (ad^s 

tete). 
oc,  as  sign  of  umlaut  of  a,  363,  2. 
oeu  as  sign  of  umlaut,  363,  2. 
Sifter-,  516.  2. 
-age,  noun-sufHx  ;    fern,  gender,  161,  2; 

163,5. 
at,  pronnnc.  of,  33,  373.  1. 
att.+all,  100;  dc'f.  art.  after.  144;  neuter, 

168;  use  of,  361;  accent^  433,5. 
attcin,  conj.^  but;    +  word-order,  343,  c. 
attcv-,+8uperl.,  333;  accent,  433,  1,  5. 


ollcrbincj?,  certainly,  553,  1. 
aUerlie'bft,    charming,  very  lovely,   333  ; 
433,  +  Shakspere^s  cUderliefest. 

allma^ltd),  gradually,  536,  3,  c. 

al^,  before  a  predicate  noun,  179  ;  in  ap- 
position, 3 17;  before  a  relative  pronoun, 
33  7,  3  ;  in  temporal  clauses,  330,  1; 
in  comparative  clauses,  333,  343,  c; 
after  comparative,  333,  2 ;  after  adjec- 
tives, nid)io,  anoer-,  333,  2,  a,  3 ;  +  baft, 
333,  3. 

alt,  +  old,  etym.,  453,  1. 

5lUev,  n.,  -,  age,  old  age. 

am  <  an  bent,  +  on  the,  40. 

-am,  noun-suf.,  501. 

3tmt,  w.,  -er,  etym.,  516,  3. 

an,  +  on,  305,  3;  306,1,2;  compared  with 
auf,  300,  2. 

ail  <  an  ben,  40. 

an'Oinbcn,  to  tie,  see  6inben. 

-anb,  noun-suflix,  505. 

onbcr-,  + other,  94  ;  accent  in  comp.,433, 
1;  etym.,  445,  3;  in  comp.,  530. 

anbevt()al()  =  1',  530.    ' 

3lnnuit,/.,  «oi?^.,  grace;  gender.  164,  a. 

an'i:I;rei6en,  to  write  down,  charge,  see 
^d)reiIJen. 


272      WORD-IN^DEX   Ai^D    GERMAIT-EKGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


anjlatt,  + instead  of,  303,  1;  +  ju  and  inf., 

291,1,  R.:  333,  1. 
Hnt-,  616,3. 
-ant,  505. 

2tntn)Drt, /.,  •z^.,  +  answer;  gender,  164,  e. 
Strm,  m.,  -o,  +  arm. 

9lrmut,  /.,  no  pi.,  poverty;  gender,  164,  a. 
-at,  511,  2,  d\   in  neut.  foreign  nouns, 

163,  1. 
SItem,  m.,  -§>,  no  pi.,  breath,  47,  1;  501. 
atmen,  to  breathe,  118,  1;  (atmete). 
au,  proniinc.  of,  32  ;  analysis  of,  372,  2; 

origin  of,  488,  5;  490,  6. 
auc^,  also,  +  eke  ;   in  relat.  clause,  93,  4; 

with  trenn,  ob,  339. 
auf,  +  upon,  305,  3  ;  compared  with  an, 

300,  2;  +ba^,  in  order  that  338. 
au'ferfte^^en,  to  rise  again,  546,  2. 
au'frid}ten,  to  erect,  (-ri^tete). 
9tuge,  n„  -%,  -u,  +  eye, 
a-umlaut,  see  a,  c. 
au§,  +  outof,  303,2. 
au^er,  besides,  303,  3;  +ba^,  336. 
§t5t,  /.,  -,  +  axe,  491,  2;  512,  2. 
ft,  pronunc.  of,  31  ;  362  ;    371,  2,  R.  3  ; 

see  umlaut, 
ft^en,  to  bait,  corrode,  +  etch,  535,  1,  R.  2. 
ftu,  pronunc.  of,   32;  372,  3;  origin  of, 

488,  5. 
au^er-,  +  outer,  7G,  2. 


B,  pronnnc.  of,  4;  description  of,  385,  2; 

final,  385,  3;   „l)arteg"  l\  383,  1,  R.; 

392,  2;  Eng.  correspondents  of,  408,  2; 

413,  2;  490,  6. 
1-,  see  be-;  557, 1;  414,3. 
Ba(fen,  buf,  geba(fen,  +  bake,VI.,l  29 ;  (badft, 

Bute) ;  in  comp.,  528. 
5Bab,  n..  -eg,  -cr, +bath. 
33al!e(n),  rti.,  -,  beam,  46,  4. 
33anb,  /?.,  58;  m.,  162,4;  496. 
58anbe,  /.,  w.,  +  band  (of  robbers,  etc.). 
-bar,  adj.suffix,  526,  1 ;    accent,    424, 

1,6. 
barmfie'rjig,  merciful;  accent,  422,  3. 
ba^,  more,  very,  +  better,  76;  etym.^  439. 
Sauer,  m.,  w.,  farmer,  62,  3  ;  63;  strong, 

-  builder;  n.,  -,  cage. 
33au,  m.,  -e,  see  also  51. 
33aum,  m.,  — c,  tree, +beam. 
33 ar,  m.,  w.,+bear. 

be-,  +  be-,  by,  108,  3;  540,  1;  Bee  bei. 
beben,  tremble,  etym.^  457,  3. 
bebarf,  see  bcburfen. 
beberfen,  to  cover,  +  deck, 
bebient,  etijm.,  295,  2. 
bebingt,  past  part.,  conditioned,  125, 1. 
bebftrfen,  +  G.,  to  need;  for  infl.  see  135,  2. 
befeljlen,  befall,  befo^Ien,  to  command,  IV., 

127;  (beftc^Ifl,  befiebt,  be^ol^le). 
SBefeftigung,  /.,  w.,  fortification. 
betleii3en,  befits,  beftiftcn,  I.,  122, 1;  refl.,  to 

apply  oneself  to ;  (bu  bcftei^eft,  bu  or  et 

be[lcipt). 
befreunben,  +  befriend;  (befveunbete). 


begeben,  refl.,  +  G.,  to  give  up,  540,4;  see 

geben. 
beginiieit,   begann,  begonnen,  +  begin.  III., 

125,  2  ;  454,  3  ;  457,  2  ;  (begbnne). 
bef)aupten,  to  assert,  540,  4 ;  (bel^auptetc). 
bet,  +  by,  near,  303,  4;  in  comp.,  516,4. 
beib-, -h  both,  100;  use  of,  228. 
Sein,  w.,  -e,  leg,  +  bone, 
beifammen,  together,  in  the  presence  of. 
bcipen,  btj3r  gebifien,  +  bite,  I.,  122,  1 ;  (bu 

beipeft,  bu  or  er  beipt). 
beijen,  +  to  bait,  cauterize;  eiym.^  535, 1, 

belejen,  past  part.,  well  read,  540,  3. 
beUen,  bott,  gebDUen,+  to  bark,  VIII.,  133; 

{w.  and  bittft). 
benc^mcu,  take  away,  540,  4;  see  ne:^men. 
bequcm,  convenient,  comfortable,  +  becom- 
ing; 409,3. 
bergeii,  barg,  geborgen,  hide.  III.,  125,  3 ; 

397;  (birgft,  birg,  barge  and  bitrge). 
berittcn,  past  part.,  mounted;  524,  4. 
bevflen,  barft,  gebDrften,  +  burst,  III.,  125,3; 
(bu  birfteft,  bu  or  er  btrft,  bh'ft  or  berftc ; 
borfte  or  barfte). 
^cfagt(er),  the  afore  +  said  146, 1. 
beid^eibeu,  modest,  past  part.,  524,  4. 
beffer,  bcft,  +  better,  best,   76,  1 ;   439  ; 

300,  2. 
beyud)t,  frequented,  74. 
bcten,  to  pray;  (betete). 
^etrubniS,/.  or  n..  -ifte,  sadness,  grief. 
93ctt,  n.,  -e§,   -en,  +bed;  3U—  +to  —  or 

in  — . 
beuvgen,  +bow  488,  5. 
beircgen,  beioog,  bewogen,  to  induce,  VEII., 

133 ;  (bcroegft,  beirege). 
bid,  Eng.,  396. 
bicgen,  bog,  gebogcn,  bend,  11.,  124,  2;  (bu 

beugft,  rare). 
U^Hene,  /".,  lu.,  +bee,  455,  2. 
bietcn,'bDt,  geboten,  offer,  IL,  124,  2;  396; 

408,  2;  (er  bictet  and  bent), 
binben,  banb,  gebunbcn, +bind.  III.,  125,1; 

496;  (er  binbet). 
btnnen,  within,  303,  5;  557,  1. 
5Binfe,  /.,  w.,  +  bentgrass,  490,  2. 
3?irne,  /.,  -z^?.,  +pear,  435,  3. 
hi^,  till,  until,  prepos.,  304,  1 ;  conj.,  330, 

3;  etym..  557,  1. 
bitten,  bat,  gcbeten,  ask,  +  bid;  V.,  128,  2; 

199;  233,  1;  457,1;  466;  (er  bittet). 
blanf,  shining,  74. 
blafen,  blte§,  geblafen,  blow,  VIL,  130,  1; 

(bu  btafeft,  bu  or  er  blaft). 
blap,  pale,  74. 

Slatt,  w.,  -eS,  -i^-er,  leaf,+blade. 
blau,+blue,  74. 

blattern,  to  turn  the  leaves  of  a  book. 
33Ict,  71.,  no  pi.,  lead, 
bleiben,  bitcb,  geblicben,  remain,  I.,  122,2; 

+  inf.,  290,  3. 
blei(^en,  btidv  geblicben,  +  bleach,  I.,  122,  1. 
9?iate,  +  blowth,  blossom  ;  etym.,  430,  1. 
'^^it,  in,,  w.,  messenger. 
93oct,  n.,pl.  5Bbte,+boat. 
^oyen)i(^t,  m.,  pi.  -e  ov  -er,  rascal,  57,  3  ; 
59. 


WOKD-IKDEX  AiTD   GEEMA]S"-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY.      273 


S3ranntwein,  m.,  -e, +brandy. 

Braten,  briet,  gebraten,  roast,  fry,  VII.,  130, 

1;  (bratft,  brat), 
braudjen,    need,    compared  with    miiffen, 

867,  4. 
33raut,  /.,  -c,+ bride. 
SBrdutigam,  m.,  -c,  +bride^room,  439, 1. 
brec^en,  bracf>,  gcbrod;eu,  +  oreak,  IV,  137; 

(bu  bri(i)[t,  brid)). 
bvennen,  brannte,  cjebvannt,  +  burn,  119, 1; 

455;  (bvennte). 
bringen,  bradjte,  gcbrad^t,  +  bring,  119,1; 

454,  2;  (bra(^tc). 
SSvDttn,  m.^  for  SSronnen,    ^J5runnen,  well, 

spring,  +  bourn,  489,  4;  46,  4. 
aSrofam,  m.,  -e,  crumb;   23rcjame, /.,  w., 

47,1;  601. 
5BrDt,  w.,  -e,  sometimes  —e,+ bread. 
a3ruber,  m.,   —,  +  brother,  46,  48,  411, 

415. 
93runnen,  see  33ronn. 
23u(^,  n.,  — cr,  +  book. 
5BuUe,+  bul],  see  163,3. 
bunt,  variegated,  74,  5. 
58urg,/.,  w.,  castle,  397;  in  comp.,  164,  c. 
SBurjdE^,  m.,  -e,  and  w.^  fellow. 


c,  pronuEC.  of,  5;  in  foreign  words,389,  3. 

6afu§IeI)re,  /.,  w.,  theory  of  the  cases  (of 
nouns). 

causeway,  causey,  +(S^auftce,  494,  3. 

d)  pronunc.  of,  6;  375,4;  378,3;  383, 
1;  description  of,  375;  quantity  of  vowel 
before,  35;  Eng.  correspondents  of,  410, 
3  ;  414,  3  ;  415,  1,  3  ;  490,  8  ;  d)—  g, 
416;  d)  —  T,  493,4;  d)  -  f,  535,  1,  R.  2. 

ch,  Ger.  correspond,  of,  414,  3;  535,  1, 
R.  2. 

-dyjn,  +  -kin,  46, 1;  493,  4;  510;  neuter 
gend.,  161,  3;  pronunc.  of,  6;  375,2. 

-d)e(u),  in  verbs,  536,  a. 

6()Vt[t,  m.,  w.,+Cliristian,  435,  3. 

choose, +  ficicii,  416, 1. 

*)",  d^g,  pronunc.  of,  39,  383, 1;  490,  3,  a. 

tt,  14  ;  383,  1 ;  Eng.  correspondents  of, 
413,  4;  414,  3;  cf  —  c^,  535,  1,  R.  2. 


b,  pronunc.  of,  7,  385,  3:  description  of, 
384,  2.  Eng.  correspondents  of,  410, 1; 
413,  1,  a;  415;  b  —  t,  416. 

-b,  511, 1. 

ba,  +  there,  adv.\  before  a  prepos.  begin- 
ning with  a  vowel,  bar;  in  relat.  clause, 
358,  33  7,  2  ;  in  local  clauses,  331,  a  ; 
=  because,  since  in  causal  clauses,  3.37; 
=  as,  when  in  temporal  clauses,  330, 1, 
2;  etym.^  551,  1;  after  demoustr.  pron., 
345,  3. 

®ad?,  71.,  -er,  roof,  +  thatch. 

bactjtc,  see  benfen,  also  417,  1. 

1)ame,  /.,  w,^  lady,  +dame. 

banii't,  coTv'.,  in  order  that,  338. 


ba'mit, +  ba9  =  by  +  part.  clause,  337 

®anf,  m.,  -e§  ;  -pL  of,  see  173. 

barf,  see  biirfen. 

bag,  +  that ;  see  ber;  peculiar  use  of,  168; 

for  G.,  183. 
\)0,^,  +  that,  comj. ;  in  substantive  clauses, 

335  ;  +  nid)t  =  without  +  part,  clause, 

333  ;   in  other  adverbial  clauses,  335, 

336,  338. 
bduc^t,  see  beiK^t. 
-be,  noun-suffix,  511,  2. 
®e^nung^34),  363,  2.  3. 
bein,  G.  of  bu,  81 ;   possessive  pronoun, 

85. 
beinev,  G.,  see  bem. 
bemungead;tet,  notwithstanding,  wrez?.,  303, 

10. 
benfen,ba(^te,geba(^t,  + think,  119,2;  403, 

2;  454,  3;   (bdd)te).    Inf.  as  noun,  baS 

®enfen. 
CDenfmat,  ?i.,  monument;  iox -pi.  see  58. 
benn,  +  then,  for,  301,  1 ;  causal  conjunc- 
tion, 331,337;  after  comparative,  333, 

2;  in  restrictive  clauses,  336;  origin  of, 

551,  1. 
bev,  +  the,   def.   art.,   38-40  ;    demoustr. 

pronoun   88,  443;  lengthened  forms  in 

en,  ev,  344,  2;  relat.  pronoun,  93. 
berart  ba^,  so  that,  335. 
beren  (G.  pL),  88,  93. 1;  use  of.  344, 1. 
berent-,  87,  89. 

be'rgeftalt  \i<x%,  in  such  a  manner  that,  335. 
berer,  see  bcren. 

berienige,  he,  that  one,  91,  1;  347. 
bevc,  89,  443. 

berfclbc,  -felbtge,  the  same,  91. 
beriuetl,  +  while,  330. 
be§,  be^,  beffen,  89. 
befjent-,  89, 
befto,  +  the,    443,  a;   correlative   of   ie, 

334. 
beud)t  <  biinten,  119,  2  ;  454,  3. 
beutf(^,  German  (+ Dutch),  413,  1,  a. 
©eutfd^lanb,  w.,  Germany, 
-dge,  Ger.  correspondents  of,  413,  4. 
®td)ter,  m..  -,  poet, 
btc^, +  thee.  Ace.  of  bu,  q,  v. 
tic, +  the,  fern.  def.  art.,  see  ber. 
bieS,  biefCer),  +  this,  90 ;  etym.^  443  ;  use 

of,  345,  346;  bie§  unb  bag,  jene§,  345,2; 

supiplanted  by  adverb +  prepos.,  346. 
btcu?cil,  + while,  330;  because,  337,  1. 
®ing,  W..  + thing;  iov pi.  see  58. 
bingen,  bang  or  bung,  gebungen,  III.,  135,1. 
bir,  +thee,  D.  of  bu,  q.  v. 
boci>,  adv.,  yet,  after  all,  +  though,  343,  e. 
^ottov,  m.,  -§,  pi.  -o'ren,  63,  2. 
bDppet-,+ double,  531, 1. 
Tsrangfal,  /.,  -c,  distress. 
brcf(J^en,  braic^  or  bvofd)/  gebrofc^en,  +  thresh, 

III.,   135,  3.    133;  (brafc^e  or  brDfd)e, 

brifd^eft,  bu  and  er  bvtfi^t,  bvtfd^,  also  weak, 

brefd)cft,  bref<^e). 
bringcn,  brang,  gcbrungen,  to  penetrate,  III., 

135,  1;  (brange). 
brttt-+ third,  410,  1;  530. 


bvudcn,  to  print  Ir-tr  o 
bracEcu,  to  press  i"^'*^'^- 


274      WORD-ITS^DEX    AN"D   GERMAN-EKGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


bumpf,  hollow  (sound),  +  damp,    musty 

(air),  74,  5. 
buntel,  dark,  compar.  bunfler. 
fcurc^,  +  throui^h,  304,  2  ;   compar.  with 

ijen,  369;  with  inittel5  and  mit,  302,  7  ; 

separable  and   insep.  prefix  in   comp. 

verbs,  549,  1. 
©urcblauc^t,  /.,  w..  Serene  Highness, 
fcitnfen,    fciiinfte,    gebunft,    impers.   verb,    it 

seems,  +  (me)  thinks,  119,  2;  454,  3. 
tUifen,  fciirftc,  gebuvft,  to  be  permitted;  infl., 

135,  2;  past  part,  108,  2;  use  of,  367, 

2;  etym.,  416. 


c,  pronnnc.  of,  8  ;  description  of,  371, 1- 
3;  unaccented,  371,  3;  485,2;  sign  of 
length,  33,  363. 1;  sign  of  umlaut,  363; 
before  r,  rt,  rb,  33,  488,  2;  sign  of  plu- 
ral, 47,  49,  51,  53;  in  cardinals,  33  7; 
in  the  adj.-sufiixes  -cl,  -cr,  -en,  71;  con- 
necting vowels  in  conjugation,  118  ; 
in  case-suffix,  43,  46  ;  derivative  e  in 
verbs,  535,  536  ;  secondary  before  r, 
491,  2;  e  -  i,  ic,  137,  138,  403;  c  —  h, 
489,1. 

-e  in  imperative,  105;  118,  3. 

-e  in  nouns  <  adj.,  498, 1;  gender  of  such 
nouns,  161,  2. 

-c  in  jo-stems.  46,  47,  51,  437,  3  ;  498, 
2 ;  gender  of  such  nouns,  161,  3. 

-e  in  adverbs,  554,  1. 

ed^t,  genuine,  etym.^  488,  3,  a. 

G(fe,/.,  w.,  comer, +edge,  413,  4. 

ebel,  noble,  404,  71. 

el^e,  before,  +  ere,  7G,  2,  h  ;  439,  2  ;  coiij.^ 
330,  3. 

Ci,  prouunc.  of,  33  ;  analysis  of,  373,  3; 
origin  of,  488,  5. 

-ci,  noun-suffix,  498,  3 ;  gender  of  such 
nouns,  161,  2. 

Gibam,  m.,  -c,  son-in-law,  47, 1 ;  501. 

-eien,  verb-suffix  <  French  verbs  in  -ier, 
538. 

civ3en, +  own,  adj.,  470;  471,  6;  534,  4. 

eigentumli(^,  accent  and  meaning,  433,  2. 

cilen,  to  hasten. 

cim  <  cincm,  D.  of  ein,  q,  v.,  41,  1. 

(5imcr,  pail,  etym.,  398. 

cin,  +a,  one,  indef.  art.,  38, 41;  after  wddj, 
wa§  fiir,  93,  2,  3 ;  indef.  pronoun,  73, 
95,  359,  300;  ein  par,  ein  iDenicj,  a  few, 
a  httle,  100. 

cin,  adv.y  +  in;  —  unb  au§,  +  in  and  out; 
538,  7. 

einanber,  + one  another;  uninflected,  84. 

eingeSoren,  for  two  meanings  see  538,  5, 7. 

einig-,  indef.  pron.,  some,  95  ;  at?/.,  + 
united. 

einmal, +once,  39,  41. 

ei'nncbmen,  take  possession  of,  see  nelimen. 
In  85  gcncmmen  ein  for  eingenommcn  by 
poetic  license. 

(Sinobe,/.,  w.,  solitude,  desert,  511,  a. 

einS,  +  one,  531,  2;  for  cognate  Ace, 
304. 


einfl,+once,  531,  2;  555,2. 

ei'nfiubie^rcn,  to  study  well,  commit  to 
memory. 

ein^eln,  adv.,  singly,  555,  3. 

eitet,  vain  ;  uninflected  "  nothing  but," 
313,1. 

-el,  noun-suffix,  46,  438,  5  ;  499;  gender 
of  such  nouns,  161,  1:  161,  3;  adj. -suf- 
fix, 71,  533,  1;  verb-suffix.  106.' 

elenb,  wretched  ;  etym.,  401,  among  Ex- 
amples. 

clf,+ eleven,  77;  539. 

elk,+(SIc^,  Lyientier,  490,  3. 

-ein,  in  verbs,  536 ;  connecting  vowel 
in  -,  118,3. 

Gltern,  parents,  +  elders,  174,  404. 

-em  in  nouns,  501,  533,  2. 

emp-<  ent-  541. 

emtnef>Icn,  cinpiaftl,  empfctitcn,  recommend. 
IV.,  137;  464,3;  (empf el;tc,  bu empfie^lft, 
empfiel)!). 

-en,  noun-suffix,  46;  438,  5  ;  501;  503  ; 
indicates  masc.  gend.,  160,  1 ;  in  the 
n-declcDsion,  61,  63  ;  in  the  pi.  of  for- 
eign nouns,  64,  2,  3  ;  in  D.  and  A.  of 
proper  nonns.  66;  in  G  sg.  of  adj.  for 
e§,  73;  91,  3;  316,  1;  in  pronouns, 
344,  2  ;  440,  2  ;  in  mixed  declension, 
63;  in  comp.  nouns,  518,  1,  2. 

Adj.-stiffix,  71;  311;  534.  In  the 
past  part.,  107;  453;  503;  534.  In 
the  inf.,  106;  451.     In  adverbs,  551. 

-enb  (nb),  in  the  pres.  part.,  107;  in  nouns, 
505;  in  the  gerund,  107. 

(Snbe,  «.,  -§,  -n,  +  end. 

enge,  narrow,  408,  4. 

Gngel,  m.,  -,  + angel. 

-en-^,  adv.-suffix,  555,  2 

ent-,  541. 

Gnte,  duck,  430,  1. 

entgegen,  +  against,  *'to  meet,"  303,  G; 
557,  1;  see  gegen. 

entfagen,  to  renounce. 

enta^ebcr  (—  cbcr),  + either  —  or,  343,  d,  2; 
558. 

er,  he,  81. 

ev  for  §err,  gentleman,  Mr.,  330,  3. 

-er,  noim-suffix,  438,  5;  65,  507;  indi- 
cates masc.  gend.,  161,  1;  163,3;  as 
sign  of  plural,  56,  431. 

Adj.-suffix,  71,  533,  3;  507,  2  ;  in  ad- 
verbs, 551;  556;  compar.  suffix,  79; 
438  ;  in  the  G.  of  pronouns,  83,  88, 
344,  2 ;  440,  2  ;  in  verbs,  see  -em. 

er-,  543. 

Grbe,  double  gender,  163,  3;  neut.  pl.Grtc 
is  rare. 

(Srbe,/.,  w.,  + earth,  63,  R. 

-erei,  noun -suffix,  497,  3,  R. 
erbaten,  lofty,  139.  R.;  534,  4. 

ertalten,  to  grow  cold  (.535  2 

crtalicn,  refl.,  to  caich  cold  j         ' 

-erlic^,  adj.-suffix,  536,  3,  c. 
evloic^en,  evlof*,  cvIoj(f>en,  to  go  out  (candle, 
fire),  VIII.,  133;  (crli)d;c[t,  bu  and  cv  cr-^ 
U';cl)t,  orliicl}). 
-cm,  adj.-suffix,  534,  3;  adj.  in  — ,  iniin- 
fleeted,  311. 


WORD-IKDEX   AKD   GERMAN-El^GLISH   VOCABULARY.      275 


-cr(n),  verb-suffix,  537,  2  ;  connecting 
vowel  in,  118,  3. 

erieic^en,  + reach,  attain. 

er)d)allen,  erii^oU,  erj^oUen,  resound,  VIIL, 
133  ;  (eg  erfc^aUt). 

cricl)vecfeu,  erfdjraf,  cvidjrotfen,  to  be  fright- 
ened, IV.,  13  7;  (evfcljrtdft,  erjc^rid);  when 
trans,  generally  weak. 

ev[t,  first,  +  erst,  76,  2,  6;  439,  2. 

eriDa^eu,  eriDog,  criuogen,  consider,  VIIL, 
133  ;  (erra&gft). 

crira^nen,  to  mention  ;  etym.y  457,  2. 

(Sr3-  +  arch-,  516,6. 

Co,  +  it,  N.  and  A.  sg  neut.,  81;  peculiar 
uses  of,  236  ;  gender,  168  ;  replacing 
cognate  A.,  304  ;  336,  6  ;  G.  of  masc. 
and  neuter,  83  ;  183;  A.  supplanted  by 
prepos.,  334, 1;  indefinite  subject,  336, 
1,2,4,  5;  grammatical  subject  and  exple- 
tive =  there,  336,  3;  313;  position  of 
eg  (A.),  353,  e ;  eg  (N.)  and  inversion, 
336,  3,  a. 

eg  [ei  benn,  bail,  unless,  339;  340,  2. 

effen,  ap,  gecjeffen  +  eat,  V.,  138,  1;  (bu  iffefl 
or  i^t,  er  i^t,  i^) ;  pres.  part.,  394,  1 ; 
etym.,  409, 1;  466. 

(Sffig,  vinegar,  +  acid,  509. 

ettid)-  some,  96. 

ctiuao,  something,  anything,  somewhat, 
96;   199,  1;   360. 

eu,  pronunc.  of,  33  ;  analys.  of,  373,  3  ; 
origin  of,  488,  5;  eu  —  ie,  406. 

eucl;  +  you,  D.  and  A.  of  i^r,  q.  t;.,  81;  refl., 
83;  reciprocal,  84;  338. 

euer+your,  possessive  pron.,  85. 

curev  for  euer  (G.),  S3. 

(S«3.+your,  86;  311,2. 


T,  pronunc.  of,  9 ;  description  of,  380 ; 
Eng.  correspondents  of,  410,  2;  414,  2: 
415,  1 ;  493,  4;  f  —  b,  416. 

-fad), -fold,  531,  1. 

%a^,n.^  -er  (and-e);  compartment,  pigeon- 
hole; 
i^aben,  m.,  pi.  and  meanings,  Bee  48, 1. 
faben,  archaic  for  fangeu,  g.v.x   417,  1: 

458,  2. 
fa^ven,   ful)r,   gefatjrcn,  drive,  +  fare,  VI , 

139  ;  400  ;  467  ;  +fpajteren,  390,  2  ; 

(fa^rft). 
ga^rt,/.,  w.,  journey,  ride,  430, 1,  a. 
taUen,  ftet,  gefatten,  +  fall,  VII.,   130,  1 ; 

458,2;  (fallft). 
fatlg,  adverbial  G.  in  comp.,  =  case,  91, 3; 

conj.,  340. 
falfd)  +  false,  74,  5. 
fangen,  fing,  gefangcn,  to  catch,  VII.,  130, 

1;  (tangft). 
far  +  fern,  76,2. 

faff  en,  to  seize,  (bu  faff  eft  or  fa^t),  118,  4. 
faft,  almost,  300,  1;  554,  1. 
foutenjen,  to  be  lazy,  539,  3,  a. 
^o^)xi^,f.,  W;  trade,  430,  1,  a. 
fatten,  to  fell,  535,  1,  a. 
-faltig  +  -fold,  531,  L 


fec^ten,  fod^t,  gefoc^ten  +  fight,  VIIL,  133  ; 

(bu  fid^tft,  fi^t,  also  weak), 
geber,/.,  z^., +feather,  pen. 
fe{)Ieu  +  fail,  lack,  494. 
geinb,  fn.,  -e,  enemy,  +  fiend,  505;  partial 

ac0.,  319. 
Aclb,  n.^  -er,  field. 

feft,  firm,  554,  1. 

geuer,  w.,  +  fire;  pi.  of,  173. 

gi(^telgebirge,  n.,  a  mountain  range  in  N.  E. 

Bavaria,  <  bie  %id)tc,  fir. 
finben,  fanb,  gefunben  +  find.  III.,  135,1; 

464;  (finbcft). 
ginf,  m.,  w.,+ finch. 

fifd;en  +  fish  (bu  fifc^eft  or  ftf(^t,  erfif^t),  118. 
gtnfternig,  /.,  -ntffe,  darkness. 
fUi(^,  shallow,  level,  74, 5. 
flcc^ten,  flodjt,  geflDd)ten,  to  braid,  Vin.,  133; 

(bu  fti(^tft  or  flid;ft,  er  fUdn,  fUd>t  or  fle(^te). 
i5te5iongIel)re,  /.,  w.,  accidence. 
Piegen,  flog,   geflogcn,  +  fly,  11.,  134,   2 ; 

(^cugft,  fleug  are  archaic). 
flief)en,  flob,   geflD{)en,  +  flee,  IL,  134,  2 ; 

490,  3,  b;  (fteud)[t.  fleud)  are  archaic), 
ftiepcn,  flofj,  geftDJ3en,  IL,  134, 1    535,  1,  a; 

(bu,  er  flcu^t,  archaic), 
glo^,  n.,  -e,+raft,  54  ;  439, 1. 
p[5^en  +  to  float,  trans.,  535,  1,  a. 
goIgenb(e'^)  -hthe  following,  146,  1. 
forlorn,  416,  1. 
fort  +  forth,  on,  76, 1. 
fv-,  545;  see  »er-. 

fvagen,  frug,  toask,  139;  457,2;  construc- 
tion after,  199. 
^rau,  /.,  w.,  woman,  wife,  Mrs. 
^•rauenjimuier,  n.,  -,  lady;  166. 
grftulein,  n.^  -,  young  lady.  Miss,  166. 
fret  +  free, 
fretlid),  to  be  sure,  300,  1 ;   339 ;   554, 

2,6. 
freffen,  frajj,  gefreffen,  +  eat,  V.,  see  effcn  ; 

108,  3;  138, 1. 
greunb,  m.,  -c,  + friend,  505. 
ber  ^rtebe(n),  m.,  no  pi,  peace,  46,  4; 

47,2. 
frieren,  fror,  gefroren,  to  freeze,  IL,  134,  2. 
fro^,  cheerful,  74,  5. 
fromm,  pious;  harmless, 
frug,  pret.  of  fragen,  139,  461. 
fru^,  early.  300,  1;  554,  1. 

f^-aSr-'""'  [breakfast,  137,1;  431,t 

funben,  past  part,  of  finben,  453,  3. 

5unfe(n),  m.,  spark;  see  46,  4. 

?vurc^e,   /".,  2^;.,  + furrow,  430, 1. 

further,' 76,  2. 

^n^,  m.,  -eg,  -e,-i-foot,  430, 1. 

3;Ud^ftn,  /.,  pi.  -iunen,  + vixen,  504, 

fut)ren,  to  guide,  535,  1,  a. 

ptten,  colt,  +  foal,  503,  2. 

far  +  for,   76,  2,  b ;    304,  3 ;    306,  9 : 

516,  5. 
fiirbaf3,  onward,  76,  1. 
farc^ten,  to  fear;  (fiird)tete);  454,  3. 
fiivlic'6  ne^mcn,  to  put  up  with,  538,  7. 
gilrft,  m.,  w.,  prince,  76,  2,  b\  439,  2. 


276      WOKD-Iiq-DEX   Aiq"D    GERMAiq"-E:N'GLISH   VOCABULARY. 


g,  pronunc.  of,  10;  375,  3,  4;  391,  2  ;  in 
foreign  words,  378,  4;  383,  1,  Rem.; 
after  u  in  N.  G.,  383,  1,  a;  Eng.  corre- 
spondents of,  408,  3,  4;  gcj,  41>3,  4;  de- 
scriptioti  of,  383,  2;  see  gc-. 

gan  —  gunnen  >  gounen,  4  71,  5. 

ganj,  whole. 

gar,  adj.^  done  ;  adv.^  even,  very  ;  +  nid)t, 
not  at  all. 

©arberobe,  /.,  2^.,  + wardrobe, 

g&ren,  gor,  gegoren,  to  ferment,  VIII.,  133; 
(garft,  rarely  gierft,  often  weak  through- 
out). 

ge-,  g-,  516,  7  ;  543  ;  in  the  past  part., 
107,  108  ;  453,  2  ;  538  ;  in  nouns  of 
neuter  gend,,  161,  3 ;  in  p.  p.  of  com- 
pound verbs,  546,  2. 

gebaren,  gebar,  geboren,  to  bring  forth, 
+  bear;  IV.,  137,398  ;  (pret.  subj.  ge^ 
bare,  bu  gebierft,  gebier). 

gebcn,  gab,  gegeben,  +  give,V.,  138, 1;  (gicbfi, 
gieb);  466;  impersonal,  305;  336,4; 
399. 

©e(f,  m.^  w.,  coxcomb. 

@eba^t(er),  the  above  mentioned,  146,  1 ; 
<  gebenfcn,  q.  v. 

@eban!e(n),  m.,  +  thought,  see  46,  4  ; 
47,  2. 

gebentcn,  gebac^te,  gcbad)t,  +  think  of,  men- 
tion; see  benfen. 

gebci^en,  gebict),  geticr^en,  thrive,  I.,  133,  2. 

&ebi(^t,  n.,  -c,  poem. 

gebtegen,  ac^.^  solid,  pure,  past  part,  of  ge- 
bei|en,  according  to  Verners  Law,  411; 
534,  4. 

©efalle(n),  m.,  pleasure  (in),  favor,  see  46, 
4;  47,2. 

gegen  +  against,  304,  4 ;  see  entgegen,  ju, 
nad^,  um. 

gcgeniiber,  opposite,  303,  7 

ge^en,  gtng,  gegangen,  +  go,  Vn.,  130,  1; 
136,1;  457,  2;  474;  +inf.,  390,2; 
I)astpart.,  396;  (bu  ge^fl,  gel;e). 

SeiM  i'^^''  meaning,  etc.,  see  163,  3. 

©eifl,  m.,  -er, +ghost;  wit. 

getjen,  to  be  stingy,  etym.,  539. 

©elb  unb  ®ut,  lit.  money  and  property = all 

one's  possessions, 
gelegen,  convenient,  534,  4. 
getingen,  gelang,  gelungen,  to  be  successfnl 

(in),  m.,  135,  1. 
gelten,  gait,  gegctten,  to  be  worth,  valid,  m., 

131,  135,3;  impersonal,  305;  (golte  — 

gaite,  bu  gittfl,  cv  gilt,  imper.  gelte  as  a 

nile). 
©emac^,  w.,  "  cr,  apartment, 
gema^,  according  to,  303  8. 
©emut,  /I.,  -er,  soul,  disposition. 
gen,  towards,  304,  4. 
©euera'l,  m.,  -e  or  — e,+general. 
genefen,  gena§,  gene^en,  to  recover,  V.,  138, 

1;  (bu  gene^eft,  er  genefl,  genefe). 
gcuteBen,  genoB,  genoffen,  to  enjoy,  IL,  134, 

1;  (bu  genie^eft  or  genie^t). 
gering,  small,  compar.  of,  76, 1. 


gcfc^aftig,  busy. 

gefd^e^en,  gei(^a^,  gef^e^en,  to  happen,  V., 

138,  i;  (eS  geid)icl>t). 
©ef^tcd^t,  n.,  -er,  race,  generation. 
©cfd^mciDe,  n.,  -,  set  of  jewelry, 
gefd)U)eige,  conj.,=saj  nothing  of,  333. 
©efelle,  m.^-w.,  journeyman,  fellow,  com- 
panion. 
©efeUji^aft,  /.,  w.,  company,  party. 
©cnd)t,  71.,  see  57,  58. 
©efpenft,  w.,  -er,  spook,  ghost. 
gcifen,  past  part,  of  eijen,  138,  R. 
geftalt,  shaped,  past  part.  <  ftclten,  455, 3. 
gefunb  +  sound,  wholesome,  74,  5. 
©etreibe,  /i.,  -,  grain,  etym.,  511. 
getroft,  confident,  419;  past  part.  <  trcften, 

455,  3. 
©evatter,  m.,  -,  +  god- father, 
©ercanb,  7i.,-c,  ^er,  garment,  58. 
geicanbt,  active,  clever,  74,  5 ;  past  part,  of 

wenben,  455,  3. 
©ewerbe,  n.,  -,  trade. 
©eiDimmel,  ti.,  -,  swarming, 
gewinnen,  geiuann,  geiconnen,  win,  m.,  135, 

2;  (geiDLMine  —  geicanne). 
gh,  G.  correspondents  of,  415, 1. 
geiuip,  certain,  etym.,  413,  2 ;  past  part., 

453,  L 
giepen,  gop,  gcgc||en, +to  pour,  11.,  134,  1; 

(seu^t,  geu^  rare,  gie^eft  or  gie^t). 
©ift,  n.^  -e,  poison,  +  gift ;   etym.^  399 ; 

403,1;  gender  of,  163,3. 
©lag,  n.^  -I'eo,  -fer, +glas8,  493,  3. 
glauben  +  to  believe. 
©laube(n),  m.,  + belief,  see  46,4. 
gleid)  +  like;  for  fcgleid)=immediately;  +in- 

verted  order,  339. 
-gleii^en,  in  comp.  with  pron.,  +  the  like  of, 

87. 
glei(^en,    glid),    geglidjen,  to    be    like,   I., 

133,  1. 
gleii'en,  w.  v.j  deceive,  133,  1. 
glei^en,  gU9,   geglijien,  +  glitter,  I.,  133, 1; 

bu  gletpeft  or  glei^t,  er  gleifet), 
gleiten,  glitt,  geglitten,  +  glide,  L,  133,  1; 

(er  gleitet). 
glimmen,  glomm,  geglDmmen,  +  to  glimmer, 

Vm.,  133. 
©nabe,  /.,  w.,  grace, 
©olb,  w.,  nopL,  gold. 
©ott,  m.,  -eg,  ^er,  +God,  408,  3. 
gonnen,  not  to  grudge;  etym.^  471,  5. 
graben,  grub,  gegraben,  to  dig,  VL,  139;  (bu 

grabft). 
gretfen,  griff,  gegriffen,  to  seize,  L,  133,  1. 
greinen,  gricn,  gcgrienen,  +  grin  (generally 

weak,  rare),  1.,  133, 1. 
©raf,  m.,  w.,  count, 
©rtffet,  m.,  -,  style  (slate-pencil). 
grinfen,  +  grin<  greinen,  133, 1. 
grDp  + great;  compar.  of,  73. 
©ro^mutter,  /.,  -,  + grandmother. 
grilpen  + greet;  (bu  gritficft). 
gut  +  good  ;  compar.  of,  76,  1 ;  compared 

with  roc^I,  399,  2,  a;  439. 
giWben+ golden,  534,  2. 


WOED-INDEX  AND   GERMAN-EKGLISH   VOCABULARY.      2?7 


'^,  pronnnc.  of,  11  ;  description  of,  374; 
Eug.  correspondents  of,  410, 3;  415, 1; 
silence  of,  33;  363,  2 ;  491,  2;  loss  of, 
415,  3;  sign  of  length,  33,  363,  2,  3; 
}^  —  6),13;  490,3,6;  I;  —  g,  134, Rem.; 
416. 

J)ahcn  +  have,  infl.  of,  110;  contracted 
forms,  111,  1;  impersonal,  305;  in 
comp.  tenses,  365  ;  383, 1,  2  ;  +  inf., 
390,  1. 

-t)aft,  adj.-suffix,  546,  2. 

ibageftcl;;,  m.,  w.,  bachelor;  pi.  also  -e. 

^aib,  before  cardinals,  336,  2;  after  ordi- 
nals, 339, 1. 

-I)alben,  f or  .  . .  sake  (of),  comp.  with  pro- 
nouns, 87,  89;  prep.,  303,  4. 

Bat6er  +  half,  prep.,  303,  4. 

fatten,  I)ielt,  ge^aUen,+ hold,  VII.,  130,1; 
(bu  f}altft,  er  f;alt). 

^anb,  /.  ^e,  +hand,  53;  439, 1. 

-:^anben,  in  comp.,  439,  1. 

l^anbeln,  to  act,  trade. 

l^anbgcmein  (reerbeu),  to  come  to  blows, 
319. 

^aiibic^u^,  m.,  -e,  glove. 

:^<xugen,  t)ing,  ge^^augcn,  +  hang  (intr-WU., 
130,  1;  (bu^angft). 

^affen+tohate,  414, 1  Ex.;  bu  ^feftor^a^t. 

^att+ hast,  see  l)aben. 

^a^,  +  hate,  414,  lEx. 

feat  +  has,  see  ^aben. 

gauen,  ^kh,  gefyauen,  +  hew,  strike,  Vn., 
131;  (bu^au[t). 

^aufe(n),  m.,  +  heap,  crowd,  troop,  46,  4. 

§au§,  7i.,  -fe§,  -^er,  +  house ;  —  unb  ^of, 
house  and  farm,  —  and  home. 

feau^  + out  here  <:^ie  +  auS,  41,  1. 

^dupten,  D.  pi.,  see  59. 

4e6et,  7/1.,  -,  lever. 

:^eben,  ^o6  (^ub),  ge:^oBen,  VI.,  139;  VHI., 
133  ;  457,  1 ;  467  ;  (^6&e  —  I)a6e,  bu 
^ebft). 

§e^I,  71.  and  m.,  no  pi.,  concealment;  m  83 
he  makes  no  secret  of  it ,  .  . 

^eibe,  m.,  w.,+heathen,  163,  3;  435,  3. 

^eimUid^unjV/.,  w.,  visitation. 

letnt  +  this  night,  443,  2. 

^eirat,  /".,  w.,  marriage,  511,  a. 

6eifer  + hoarse. 

:$ei^en,  f)ie^,  ge^ei^en,  command,  be  called, 
+hight,  vn.,  108,  1;  131,  458.  2  ;  in- 
trans.,  179,  1;  trans.  301;  +inf..  390, 
2,  4 ;  +pa8t  part.,  396,  2 ;  (bu  ^ei^eft  or 
^eipt,  er  ^et^t). 

-^eit  +  -head,  515,  1 ;  indicates  fem.  gen- 
der, 161,  2;  431,  2. 

Inciter,  serene,  71. 

^elb,  m.,  w.,  hero. 

:^clfen,  ^atf,  ge^olfen,  +  help,  m.,  135,3; 
past  part,  of,  108,  1;  464;  +inf.,  390, 
2 ;  (bu  l}tlfft,  ^itf). 

§emb,  n.,  -e^,  -en,  shirt. 

l^er+ hither,  +  here,  443,  2. 

§err,  m.,  w.,  lord,  master,  Mr.;  reduced  to 
er,  330,  3  ;  short  c,  488,  3. 

'^evxli^,  splendid. 


]^cr»o'rt^un,  refl.,  to  distinguish  one's  self ; 

see  t^un. 
§er3,  n.,  +heart,  infl.  of,  63,  1  ;  435, 1. 
^er^og,  m.,  -e, +duke,  416,  1. 
4^'^5'^9^win,  n.f  — er, +dukedom. 
fee^en,  Incite,  hunt,  535,  1,  b,  R.  2. 
beuer  +  this  year,  443,  2. 
^eute  + to-day,  443, 2. 
^ier  +  here,  after  pron.,  345,  3 ;  etym., 

443,  2. 
^tmmel,  m.,  -,  heaven. 
bin,  thither,  away,  443,  2. 
:^inter  +  behind,  prep.y  306,  4 ;  in  comp. 

verbs,  549,  2;  ac0.,  76,  2. 
§irte,  m.,  «f;.,+ herdsman, 
his  —  its,  343,  2. 
f)od}  +  high,   73  ;  490,  3,  5.    Infl.  ^o^er, 

^^cffart,/.,  no.  pi.,  pride,  538,  2,  h. 

^"offen  +  hope. 

^ 01)1  + hollow,  compar.  74. 

^olb,  gi-acious,  compar.  74,  405. 

^oten,  fetch,  +  hale,  haul. 

^opfen,  m.,  -  +  hops. 

^ofe,/..  -2^;.,  trousers, + hose. 

|>6ren  +  Dear,  instead  of  ge^iirt,  108,1;  113; 

+inf.,  390,  3. 
^ulb,  /.,  no  pl.^  favor,  grace,  405 
^unb,  /w.,  -e,  dog,  +  hound. 
§unbert,  n.,  -e,+hundred,  336  ;  539,  2. 
§ufte,  /.,  «;.,+hip,  430,  1 ;  513,2. 
^ilnbc^en,  «.,  -,  little  dog, 


3. 

i,  pronunc.  of,  13  ;  description  of,  369,1, 

2 ;    <  ie.  488,  4 ;    <  u,   489,  2 ;    <  c, 

489,  5. 
t(^  +  I,  81. 
-id},  509  ;   indicates  masc.  gend.,  161,1; 

489,  5. 
-ic^t,  509,1;  535,3. 

ie,  pronunc.  of,  33,  3;   sect;  in  redupli- 
cating verbs,  CI.  VII.,  458,  2;  488,  3,  a. 
ie—  eu,  134,  406. 
-ie,  noun-suffix,  489,  4;  493,  2;  indicates 

fem.  gender,  161,  2. 
-teren,  verbs  in,  108, 4;  493,  2;  538. 
-ig^  +  -y,  adj.-suffix,  535^  1-3 ;  489,  5  ; 

for  -id),  509;  536,  3,  c 
-igen,  verb-suf.,  539,  4. 
-tgfcit;  515,  2. 
-igtic^,  adj.-Puf.,  535,  2. 
tl)m,  i:^n,  i^nen,  see  er,  fie,  eS,  pers.  pron. 
tf)r,  poss.  pron.,  her,  their,  with  cap.  your, 

85;  origin  of,  343,2. 
ti^rer,  G.  of  pers.  and  poss.  pron.,  see  fie, 

it)r. 
3^10,  your,  86  ;  441,  8. 
in  +  in,  306,  5  ;  for  in  ben,  40. 
-in,  noun-sufflx,  504  ;  fem.  gender,  161, 

2;  167;  430,3. 
tnbem,  a»y.,  while,  330,1;  333;  because, 

337. 
-tng,  noun-sufflx,  506. 
inner + inner,  76,  2. 
inner^oIS,  within,  prep.^  303. 


278    WORD-INDEX  AKD  german-e:n^glish  vocabulary. 


in  fofern,  in  n?iefern,  +m  so  far  as,  33G. 

trbif(|+ earthly. 

irjenti,  any,  ^\  ith  proii.  and  adv.,  2  GO. 

Srrtum,  m.,  --er,  + error,  56. 

-ifc^  +-ish,  adj. -suffix,  811;  514;  525,4. 

its,  343,2. 


3. 

j,  pronunc.  of,  13;  378, 4;  description  of, 
375,  4;  disappeared,  491,  2. 

iagen,  hunt,  chase;  strong  pret.,  VI.,  129. 

Sa^v,  w.,  -e,  +  year;  after  numerals,  175. 

Sdger,  m.,  -,  hunter. 

je  +  ever ;  oo/y.  334  ;  before  cardinals  with 
distributive  force  =  "at  a  time";  je 
nad^rcm  =  "that  depends*' ;  +aye. 

jefc(er),  every,  each,  infl.  of,  97  ;  216, 1 ; 
445,  1 ;  in  comp.,  97  ;  pi.  of,  261,  3  ; 
+  either. 

jebeo,  each,  168. 

lebraeber,  every  one,  each,  97 ;  261,  3 ; 
445,  2. 

jcglic^,  every, +each,  97,  445, 1. 

jemanb,  some  one,  97;  260;  445, 1. 

len(er),  that,  +  yon,  90  ;  443, 1 ;  G.  sing, 
of,  216, 1;  use  of,  245,  246. 

jug,  see  jagen. 

lung  +  young. 

3unge,  m.,  w.^  boy;  n.,  w.^  +  young  of  ani- 
mals. 

3ungfer,/.,  «;.,  maiden  ;  eiym.^  516, 12,  a. 

3unter,  young  nobleman, +younker,  516, 
12,  a. 

?iun)e'l,  n.,  -§,  -<n,  +  jewel. 

jilngjl,  lately;  etym.^  555,  2. 


a. 

t,  pronunc.  of,  14,  383,.l;  Eng.  corre- 
spondents of,  409,  3 ;  description  of, 
383,  1. 

ta^f,  bald, + callow;  com  par.  of,  74. 

.^aifer,  tw.,  -,  emperor,  +  Cesar,  Czar. 

!aU+ cold,  etym.,  409,  3. 

fann,  see  fonncn. 

lannte,  see  Jennen. 

^ar-,  in  comp., '42 2,  3. 

.Qa|en!oniv3in,  f.^pl.  -inncn,  + queen  of  cats. 

faum,  hardly;  word-order,  330,  2. 

^Me  + cheese,  46,  3  ;  etym.,  428, 5. 

fed,  bold,  +  quick,  403,  Ex. 

leiren,  fiff,  geliffcn,  +  scold  (like  an  old 
woman),  I.,  122, 1. 

fein,  no,  none,  72  ;  95  ;  445,  2. 

-!ott,  noun-suffix,  515,  2;  fem.  gend.,  161, 
2;  430,  2. 

fcnnen,  fauntc,  ge!annt,  to  be  acquainted 
with,  119,  1 :  267,  1 ;  (fenntc). 

^ette,  /.,  M?.,4-chain.  435,  4. 

fiefen,  see  furcn;  bit  fiefeft  or  tiz% 

^inb,  w.,  -es,  -cr,  child,  60. 

.^Tiinblein,  n.,  -,  little  child. 

5lirf(^e,  f.^w.,  +  cherry. 

nar  + clear,  74. 


^leiuob,  w.,  -e,  also  -ien  as  if  a  foreign 

word  ;  jewel,  511,  «. 
nicben,   Hob,   geWobcu,  split,  +  cleave,  11., 

124,  2. 

flimmen,  flomm,  geHommen,  +  climb,  VIIT., 

133. 
ttmgen,  Hang,  geKungen,  to  sound,  ring,  III., 

125,  1. 

^nabe,  m.,  w.,  boy,+knave,  413,  3. 
fnarren,  creak. 

fncifen,  tm]],  gcfniffcn,  pinch,  I.,  122,  1. 
fcmmcn,  tain,  gefcmmen,  +  come,  IV.,  127  ; 

465;  489,  1 ;  umlaut  in  pres.,  127,  R.; 

+  past  part.,  296  ;  409,  3. 
fonnte,  see  fennen. 
^opf,  m.^  -c§,  — e,  head, 
foften+cost;   constr.  with,  207,  1,  R. ; 

(tcfleft,  toftet). 
£eniv3,  m.^  -c+king. 
!onnen,  !cnntc,  v3c£cniit,  +  can,  135,  3;  108. 

2;  267,  1. 
£raft,  /.,  -e,  strength,  +craft ;  prep.,  302, 

5,  6. 
^reb»,  m.,  -e,  +  crayfish,  512. 
freif(^en,  trlfcw,  v3efrif(^en,  scream,  I.,  122, 1. 
freipen,  see  freiic^en. 
£i-iccl)en,  frocT),  gefroi^en,  +  creep,  crawl,  n., 

122,  2;  (freuc^ft,  trend;  are  archaic), 
^ul), /.,  •-c,  +  cow,kine. 
tunb  +  known,  +  (un)couth  ;   constr.  with 

219. 
funnt  for  fonnte,  q.  v.;  in  347. 
fureu,  for,  geforen,  +  choose,  II.,  124,  2; 

132  ;  411  ;  416,  1 ;  463  ;  (bu  far[t). 
Stiffen,  72.,  710 2?^.,+ kissing. 


I,  pronunc.  of,  15  ;  description  of,  381  ; 
385,  4. 

-t,  see  -ci. 

laben,  tub,  gelaben,  +  load,  summon,  VI., 
129;  also  weak;  (bu  labjl,  er  labt). 

lal^m -I- lame,  74. 

Sanb,  yz., +  land,  pi.  see  58. 

Sanbomann,  m.,  pi.  -leute,  fellow  country- 
man, 172. 

lang  +  long. 

Sangeicei'le,/.,  ennui;  accent  422,1. 

laffen,  lie^,  gctanen,  +  let,  vn.,  130, 1;  past 
part,  without  gc-,  108, 1;  constr.  after, 
199,  202,  1;  267,  7;  +  reflexive,  272  ; 
in  the  imper.,  287,4;  +inf.,  290,2,3, 
b ;  266,  4  ;  (bu  lan'cft  or  Id^t,  cr  la^lt). 

la^,  weary,  74  ;   76,  2  ;  439,  2  ;  +late. 

Uiu,  tepid,  +  luke,  +  lew%  74. 

laufcu,  Itcf,  gclaufen,  run,  Vn.,  131 ;  212, 
1;  458,  2"^;  (bu  laufft). 

laut  +  loud  ;  etym.,  396 ;  415  ;  prep., 
302,  6. 

lauter,  nothing  but,  100. 

lac^eln,  smile. 

langft,  long  ago,  555,  3. 

leben  +  live. 

Icbe'ubig  +  living ;  accent  420, 1. 

Icgen  +  lay,  535,  1.  a. 

le^ren,  teach  ;   instead  of  gele^vt,  108, 1 ; 


WORD-INDEX   AKD  GERMAK-EKGLISH  VOCABULARY.      279 


constr.  after,  199 ;  in  passive,  303,  2 ; 

+  inf.,  390,  2  ;   395. 
-lei,  533. 

getb,  m.,  -e§,  -er,  body, 
leiben,  litt,  getitteu,  suffer,  I.,  133, 1;  411; 

416,  1;  (bu  leibeft). 
Seiben,  7i.,  -,  suffering, 
letber,  unfortunately,  335,  2. 
leiben,  ltc6,  geliel)en,  +  lend,  I.,  133,  2. 
-lein,  noun-sufflx,  46,  1  ;  500,  2 ;   neut. 

gend.,  161,  3  ;  493,  4. 
fiettftcm  +  lode-star,  530, 4,  a. 
-ler,  noun-suflax,  500,  4 ;  indicates  masc. 

gender,  161, 1. 
lerncn  +  learn  ;  instead  of  gclcrnt,  108, 1 ; 

for  le^ren,  199,  2 ;  +inf.,  390,  2  ;  395. 
lefen,  lai,  getefen,  read,  V.,  138, 1  ;  395 ; 

(bu  Itefeft  or  Ueft,  er  lieft,  Iteo). 
leferltdj,  legible^  536,  3,  c. 
let,  in  imperative,  387,4. 
le^t-  +  last,  439, 2 ;  76,  2  ;  after  ordinals, 

533,  2. 
fieummii),  m.,  no  pl.<,  repute  ;  etym.^  396  ; 

494,3, 
-leute,  in  comp,,  173. 
4td^  +  -like,  +  -ly,  311;  535,4;  536,  3 ; 

adverbial  suffix,  544,  2. 
8iAt,  /i.,  + light,  pt.  see  58. 
lieoen+love,  496. 

giefieSOrtef,  m.,  -e,+ love-letter,  518,  3. 
Uegen,  lag,  getegen,  +  to  lie,  V.,  138,  2; 

457,  1  ;  II.,  133  ;    +inf.,  390,  3. 
-tig,  536,  3,  c, 

-ling  +  -ling,  noun-suffix,    500,  3;   indi- 
cates masc.  gender,  161,  1. 
-Itugen,  in  names  of  places,  500,  3,  a. 
-lingo,  553. 
linf-,  left   (hand),  only  used  attributively 

like  adjectives  in  311. 
lofeen,  praise,  496. 
Sorber,  m.,  -i,  -(e)n,  + laurel. 
lore  +  2e^re,  395. 
8d^,  /i.,  -c§,  -e,  +  lot. 
log  +  loose,  +  -less  in  adj.,  536,  R. 
lofc^/cn,  trans,  and  weak,  to  extinguish,  un- 
load:  intra7is.^  io  hQ  extinguished,  see 

erloi^en- 
Subwig  + Louis +  Chlodwic,  396. 
eutl)er  + Luther,  396. 
Suft. /.,  — e,  pleasure,  +  lusts, 
lugen,  log,  gelogen,  +lie,  II.,  134,  2 ;   133. 
itugen  ftrafen,  to  give  the  lie,  199,  2. 


m,  pronunc.  of,  16  ;  description  of,  388 ; 

Eng.  correspondents  of,  490,  4,  5. 
-m,  see  cm. 
mac^cn  +  raake,  +  inf.,  390,  2-  366,4;  bao 

(Ace.)  mac^t  =  the  reason  is  .  .  . 
mug,  see  inogen. 

SiJZagb, /.,  —e,  +  maid-servant,  513,  3. 
tnager  + meager,  71 ;  no  umlaut  in  compar., 

SDf^agi'fter,  tw.,  -,  +  master  (of  arts). 
tna^len  + grind,  originally  of  VI.,  see  400  ; 
past  part,  gemaljlen  still  common. 


400; 


100; 


SDJdb +maid,  513,3;  (poetic  form). 

SU^ajeftat,  /.,  'm;.,  + majesty, 

mal,  once,  probably  =  emmal,  41,  1 ;   in 

comp.,  531,  3. 
man,  one,  98. 
maud)  +  many  a,  100;  363;  535,1 ;  +ein, 

144. 
9)2ann,  m.,+man ;  pi,  58,  59;  in  comp., 

173. 
a)?arf(^,  m.,  -e,  +  inarch  ;  /.,  w.,  +  marsh, 

163,  4. 
marf(i)ieren  +  march,  108,  4. 
Wla\i,  m.,  -€§,  -en,  +mast ;  /.,  w.,  fattening, 

stall-feeding, 
ma^cn,  because,  337, 1. 
matt,  faint, + mate  in  check-mate;  compar., 

74. 
ajiaulrouvf,  m.,  M,  +  mole,  et 

494,  3. 
9J?auoletn,  w.,  -,  little  +  mouse. 
SDieer,  n.,  -e,  ocean, +  mere. 
nief)r  +  more,  compar.  of,  76,  1 ; 

439  ;  used  in  comparative,  334. 
mebrer-,  several,  76,  1 ;  100. 
me^rft-, +most,  100. 
meiben,  mieb,  gcmicben,  avoid,  L,  133,  2; 

(meibeft). 
mcin,  G.  of  id),  see  metncr ;  mein-,  possess. 

pron.,  85  ;  in  mein  2:ag,  Sebtag,  343, 1. 
mciner,  comparat.,  +  more  mine,  335,  2  ; 

G.  of  id),  86. 
meinig-,  poss.  jpro7i.,  +  mine,  85. 
meift-hmost,  compar.  of,  76, 1;  100. 
9)2ei9cl,  ?7i.,-,  chisel, 
meiben,  announce,  (metbcte). 
melten,  molf,  gemotfcn,+milk,  VIII,  133  ; 

(bu  melfft  and  milfft,  mclfe  and  milf). 
5melobet,  /.,  w.,  +  melody,  493,  2. 
9D?enfd),  m.,  ^6;., +  man  ;  n.,  see  59,  514. 
meften,  ma^,  gemefieit,  + measure,  V.,  138, 

1;  (bu  mijieft  or  mi^t,  er  mi^t). 
SSKeffer,  n.,  -,  knife  ;  m.,  -,  measures  ;  see 

163,  3. 

9)?ette,  /.,  w.,  + matins,  435,  4. 

mt(^  +  me,  Ace.  of  ic^,  81. 

minber,  less,  comparison  of,  76, 1 ;  439  ; 

used  in  compar.,  334. 
mines,  in  comp.,  87. 
mir+me,  to  me,  D.  of  i^,  81. 
9J?ip-  +  mis-,  453, 1 ;  516,  8 ;  544. 
m\!\\i-,  see  Wir^-. 
mit,  with,  303,  9. 

9J2tttag§]'tunbc,  /.,  w.,  hour  of  noon, 
mittel-  +  middle,  76,  2,  b. 
mittelfl,  see  mittel-,  prep.,  303,  7. 
0)2itterna^t,  / ,  -^^6,  + midnight,  519,  2. 
aJZittn)D(^,    m.,   also  /.,   w.,   Wednesday, 

164,  d. 

mm  <  mb,  +Eng.  mb,  490,  4. 

3Kd^v,  m.,  Id;.,  +  Moor. 

9J2orb,  m.,  -e§,  pL  see  51. 

morf(^,  rotten,  74. 

mouse  —  mice,  439, 1. 

mogen,  mod)te,  gemoc^t+may,  135,  4;  108, 

2';  367,  3  ;  413,  2 ;  (cv  mag,  pret.  subj. 

moc^te). 
SfKunb,  m.,  -e6,  -c,  older  -e,+mouth. 
DJhK^fet,  m.,  -a,  also/.,  w.,  + muscle. 


280      WORD-IKDEX  AITD   GERMAK-EI^GLISH   VOCABULARY. 


-mut,  in  comp.,  164,  a ;  +mood 

ajiutter,  /.,  — ,  +motlier  ;  see  Verner's  Law, 

411. 
9)M(ie,  /.,  M>.,  +  midge,  413,  4. 
itjube,  tired. 
niujien;    mu^te,    gemu^t,  +  must,   135,  6 ; 

108,  2;  307,  3;  471,3;  (bu  mu^t,  er 

mup,  mupte). 


91. 

n,  pronuTic.  of,  17;  nature  of,  386,  387, 

final  n  in  foreign  words,  386,  1,  Rem. ; 

short  before  sonant  stops,  385,  4 ;  n  = 

q.y  i.  e.,  "•  guttural  "  nasal,  386,  and  see 

nt,  ncj;   before  labial,   388,  1;   lost  in 

Eng.,  417,  1 ;  entered  the  N.  of  nouns 

of  the  n-decl.,  435,3;  loss  of,  435,3,4; 

503  ;  506,  1 ;  Eng.  correspondents  of, 

490,  5.    See  -en. 
na&j,  after,  303,  10;  see  311  and  gei^en, 
9?a^6ar,  m.,  -3,  -n,  +  neighbor.  63,  1. 
nac^bem,  corij.,  after,  330,  2 ;  according  as, 

334. 
^a*t,  /.,  ^e,+night,  53,  2;  439,  1. 
nal)e+n ear,  +  nigh,  73. 
92arr,  m.,  M'.,  +  fool. 
5)Jatu^v  /.,  w;.,+nature. 
nat^ft  +  next,  73  ;  303,  11. 
-nb,  part.-suffix,  505. 
*nefor  etne+a,  41, 1. 
ncben,  by  the  side  of,  306,  6  ;  557. 
nebfl,  besides,   together  with,    303,  12; 

555,  2. 
needs,  553, 1. 
ncl^men,  na^m,  genommen,  take,  IV.,  137  ; 

35unber  — ,  199, 1.  2  ;  (bu  ntmmft,  nimm). 
-ne(n),  verb-suf.,  537,  1;  118,  1,  2. 
*nenfor  einen  +  ,  41, 1 
nennen,  119,  1 ;  455  ;  constr.  with,  301 ; 

390,  2;  396,8;  303,  4. 
-ncr,   noun-suf.,    503,   1;    masc.   gend., 

161,  1. 
neu  +  new. 

ng,  pronunc.  of,  17,  383,  1,  a ;  386,  1. 
nic^t,  nid)t-3,  +  not, + naught,  99  ;  199, 1,  2 ; 

309,  1 ;   position  of,  354  ;   in  compar. 

clauses,  333,2;  490,  3 ;  after  verbs  of 

hindering,  309,  2. 
SPd6)i<i,  /.,  w,^  +  niece. 
nicl)t3  iceniger  al5,  anything  but .  .  .,  333, 

2,  a. 
nib  +  beneath,  551,  3. 
nieber-,  a6^'.,+ nether,  76,  2. 
niemalS,  never. 

ttiemanb,  no  one,  97,  445,  1. 
-nisi  +  -ness,  50 ;    indicates   neuter   and 

fem.  nouns,  161,  2,  3  ;   438,  6  ;    origin 

of,  503. 
nf,  pronunc.  of,  17;  386,  1. 
nDbeI  + noble,  74. 
noc^,  still ;  =  nor  with  correlative  xoi\iZx  ; 

nod)  ni*t,  not  yet,  354. 
S'Jorben,  m..+North. 
9(0teu,  old  D.  pi.,  439, 1. 
nun  +  now;  —  because,  337, 1. 
nur,  only;  +bap,  336;  336,1. 


o. 

D,  pronunc.  of,  18  ;  description  of,  370, 
1,  2  ;  in  ablauts,  VI.,  459,  4  ;  <  u,  405. 
489,  4  ;  <  a,  489,  3. 

ob,  ;?7'e/?.,  + above,  303,  8;  conj.,  whether, 
335,  2;  although,  339. 

ober-  in  comp.,  chief,  +  upper ;  accent, 
433,  7.  yf     ^  ^ 

oBcr-,  a6^'.,  + upper,  76,2. 

oBgleic^,  Dbfdjon,  obioo^I,  although,  339. 

£)bige§  +  the  above,  146,  1. 

Dc^^,  m.,w.,+ox,  63,  2. 

Dbem,  ??i.,  no  pL,  breath,  see  3ltem. 

oe  as  sign  of  umlaut,  363,  2. 

Dl^nmac^t,  fainting,  489,  3 ;  516,  10. 

D^ne,  without,  391,  1,  R.;  304,  5;  in 
comp.,  489,  3  ;  +516,  10 ;  +ba^  =  with- 
out +  part,  clause,  333. 

D^nebetii,  without  that,  304,  5. 

O^r,  w.,  -e^3,  -en, +ear. 

on  +  an,  306,  2. 

once  +  einft,  555,  2,  a. 

-or,  noun-end.,  63,  2. 

Drt,  m.^pL  see  57,  58. 

Dften,  m.,  -5,  no  pl.,  +  east. 

ou,  Eng.  —  G.  an,  488, 5. 

D-umlaut,  see  5. 

5,  pronunc.  of,  31  ;  description  of,  370, 
3,  4  ;  0  —  e   489,  1 ;  <  a,  489,  4. 


p,  pronunc.  of,  19  ;   description  of,  385, 

1 ;    Eng.    correspondents    of,  413,    3 ; 

414,  2,  a;  493,3. 
^ala'ft,  m.,  pL  ^alafte,  163,  1;   493,1; 

494. 
^antoffel,  m.,  -3,  -n,  slipper. 
pf,  pronunc.  of,  19  ;   description  of,  389, 

1 ;    Eng.    correspondents    of,    409.    2 ; 

414,  2. 
'^[o-Ui  /',  w^M  castle,  +  Palatinate. 
$tau,  m.,  w.,  +  peacock,  414,  2. 
pfeifen,  pfiff,  gepfiffen,  whistle,  I.,  133, 1. 
$ferb,  w.,  -e6,  -e,  horse,  +  palfrey, 
pflegen,    pfteg,    gepflogen,  carry  on,  VIIL, 

133  ;   469  :   (bu  pflegft,  pflege) ;  always 

weak  =  to  cherish. 
33funb,  n..  -e§,  -e,  +  pound ;  after  numerals, 

175. 
pB,  pronunc.  of,  19. 
platt,  flat,  74. 

plump,  awkward,  +  plump.  74. 
prcifen,  prie§,  gcprtefen,  + praise,  I.,  133,  2  ; 

(bu  preifeft,  er  preift). 
^rinv  m.,  w.,  +  prince  (of  a  royal  family), 
probteren,  try,  108,  4. 
pufeen,    dress    up,    burnish,    (bu   pufeefl), 

118,4. 


q,  pronunc,  of,  30 ;   409,  3 ;  as  symbol, 

see  u  and  386. 
queUeu,  quoll,  gequotlen,  to  gush  forth,  well 


WORD-IKDEX   Al^D   GERMAi^T-EKGLISH  VOCABULARY.      281 


up,  (quiUft,  quittt,  quid ;  also  weak  quel* 
lejl,  quelle), 
qmman^  see  Jomraeiu 


9i. 

X,  pronimc.  of,  31;  391,3;  description  of, 
374,2;  377;  <  8,411,416, 

$fia6e,  crow,  +  raveiL,  413,  3;  435,  3;  503. 

9iab,  n.,-e§,  "eiv'wheel,  56. 

Hiant,  m.,  -e§,  — er,  edge,  brim, 

tai<i),  quick,  +  rash,  74. 

raien,  rage,  118,  4;  (fcu,  er  raft). 

9iat,  m.,  -e§,  ^.  see  173. 

raten,  riet,  gerateti,  advise,  Vn.,  130, 1;  (bu 
x'at]t,  er  rat). 

9fatf(!^lag,  ratfc^tagen,  advice,  to  advise, 
137,  1. 

rauc^,  rau:^,+rongh,  490,  3,  b. 

racljen,  ract^tc,  gcradjt  or  geroi^cn,  +  wreak 
vengeance,  VIII.,  133;  generally  weak; 
(bu  rad)ft). 

dlat)d,  71.,  -,+ riddle. 

rccf;t,+ right. 

dtQd}t,  w.,  -c,  +  right,  pi.  jurisprudence; 
321,  4,  o. 

rccl)nen,  +  reckon,  118,  2;  537, 1 ;  (rc^s 
uete). 

rcbeu,  to  speak  (rcbetc),  118  ;  537,  1. 

rcgncn  +  rain,  118,2;  537,1;  (regnetc). 

reiben,  rieb,  gerteben,  rub,  +  rive,  I.,  133,  2. 

rci^  +  rich. 

9Jct(^,  /I.,  -e,  empire. 

-reid)  +  -rich,  4-  ric,  515,  3,  a. 

9iei'(^§frei()eit,  /.,  -?/;.,+ freedom  of  the  em- 
pire, immediate  dependence  upon  the 
empire. 

9Jetd)tum,  m.,  — cr,  wealth. 

reif3en,  rif},  geriHcu,  tear,  I.,  133,  1 ;  (bu 
rei^eft  or  reiyt,  +  write). 

telfcn,  travel,  118  ;  (bu  reifeft  or  reif^). 

reiten,  ritt,  geritteu^  +  ride,  L,  133, 1;  +fpa= 
jieren,  ride  for  pleasure,  390  ;  (bu  reiteft, 
er  reitet). 

rcnuen,  raunte,  gerannt,  rush,  +  run,  119, 1. 

retteu,  save  (rettete). 

-xi^,  +  -ric,  515,  3. 

ried)eu,  ro^,  gerod^en,  smell,  11.,  134,  1. 

ringen,  rang,  gerungeu,  wrestle,  +  wring,  III., 
135, 1 ;  ringeu,  umringen,  etc.,  are  of  dif- 
ferent origin  and  weak,  though  umruus 
gen,  surrounded,  is  not  uncommon. 

tinnen,  rann,  geronnen,  drip,  III,  135,  2 ; 
457,2  ;  ronn,  roune  also  occur. 

SWitter,  m.,  -,  knight. 

dlod,  m.,  — e,  coat. 

rc^  +  raw,  74;  415,3. 

9io^r,  w.,  -e,  reed,  55. 

rot  +  red. 

9i6^re,  /.,  w.,  pipe. 

3i53tetn,  ti.,  -,  little  rose. 

rufen,  rief,  gerufen,  call,  VII.,  131;  constr. 
after,  196  ;  (bu  rufft,  in  classics  some- 
times rufte). 

runb  + round. 

9iudon,  m.,  -,+ ridge,  413,  4. 


S,  §,  pronunc.  of,  33-34;  391,  4;  descrip- 
tion of,  378,  1,  2,  3  ;  in  G.  sg.  of  m.  and 
n.  nouns,  43  ;  of/,  nouns,  66,  518,  3 ; 
in  G.  s.  of  Eng.  adverbs  (needs),  553, 1 ; 
in  the  pi.,  60;  67  ;  in  composition  with 
poss.  pron,,  87;  in  compound  nouns, 
518,  2,  3. 

W  <  ft,  413,  2;  f  in  Verner's  Law,  411, 
416  ;  Eng.  correspondents  of,  414,  1 ; 
417,5;  490,  2. 

-§,  noun-suffix,  513  ;  in  adverbs,  553. 

*§  for  ba^o,  41 ;  for  e§,  g.  v. 

©ac^fe,  m.,  •2/;.,  + Saxon. 

fac^t,  gently,  +  softly,  417, 1 ;  mostly  ad- 
verb. 

©ad,  m.,  — e,  +  sack, 

jageu  +  say. 

-fat,  noun-suffix,  50,  51  ;  500,  1;  nouns 
of  doubtful  gender,  161,  2,  3. 

-fam  4-  -some,  536,  4. 

famt,  with,  303, 13. 

©ame(n),  m.,  +  seed  ;  infl.,  46,  4. 

fauft-hsoft,  gentle,  74  ;  417,  1, 

fatt  + satisfied  (+sad),  74, 

Ba^,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  sentence. 

faufen,  foff,  gefoffen,  drink  (of  animals),  IT., 
134,1;  463;  (bu  faufft, +sup  and  +  sip). 

faugcu,  fog,  gefogen,  +  suck,  11.,  134,  2;  (bu 
faugft,  not  faugft  <  faugeu). 

©au6  unb  ^rau§  (uninflec),  revel  and  riot. 

©abel,  m.,  -,  +  sabre. 

©anger,  m.,  -,  + singer. 

©auie,  /.,  w.,  column,  430, 1. 

fc^,  pronunc.  of,  33;  description  of,  378, 
3;  389,4;  Eng.  correspondents  of,  413, 
1;  490,  1;  ori<^in  of,  490,  1 ;  514. 

-f(^,  514  ;  see  -ifi^. 

©d)abe(n),f?2.,harm,  damage,  46,4;  48, 1. 

fc^affen,  fd)uf,  gefdjaffeu,  to  create,  +  shape, 
VT.,  139;  (bu  fdjaffft,  weak  =  work, 
procure). 

-f(^aft  +  -ship,  515,  4;  fem.  gender,  161, 
2;  430,2. 

fd;atten,  f^oll,  gefdjoffen,  to  sound,  generally 
weak,  133;  (bu  f^attft). 

©c^ar,  f.,w.,  troop,  host. 

fc^auen,  to  look. 

-fd)e,  suffix  of  surnames,  514,  o. 

fci^eiben,  fd)teb,  gefci^teben,  to  separate,  de- 
part, L,  133, 2 ;  vn.,  131 ;  (bu  fd^eibeft, 
er  fc^eibet). 

fc^eineu,  fd;ien,  gef^tenen,  +  shine,  seem,  I., 

133,  2. 

fd^et^en,  \Am,  gcf(^iffen,  cacare,  I.,  133, 1. 
fc^ellen,  fc^olt,  gefc^oKen,  to  ring  (the  bell), 

Vni.,    133  ;    (bu  fc^iUft,    fd)ia  are  very 

rare,  also  weak), 
fdjelten,  S^aM,  geft^olten,  +  scold,  HI.,  135, 3; 

491, 2  ;  (bu  \^i\i%  er  W\i,  f^ilt  or  f^elte, 

fc^oltc). 
-f(^en,  suf.  in  verbs,  539,  2. 
fd)eren,  fc^or,  gefc^oren, -h  shear,  Vm.,  133  ; 

(bu  fd;ierft,  fc^ier,  also  weak. 
fd)euen,  avoid  ;  refl.,  to  fear. 
fc^ieben,  f(^ob,  gefc^oben,  push,  +  shove,  IE., 

134,  2. 


282      WORD-INDEX   AND   GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


^^ier,  oc?/.,  brilliant,  pure ;  adv.^  almost, 

(quick,  comp.  bold  +  bait), 
jt^te-pen,  \^Mi  Qcfd^ofjen,  +  shoot,  II.,  124, 

1 ;  (bu  jd)ici5e|"t  or  f^ievt). 
©c^Ub,  n.  and  w.,  + shield.,  see  58;  163, 4. 
f*inben,  fc^unb  (j^anb),  gej^unben,  to  skin, 

ni.,  125, 1;  (bu  fe^inbeft). 
fc^Iafen,  \^\\t\,  sefc^Iaf en,  +  sleep,  VII.,  130, 

1 ;  pres.  part.,  394, 1 ;  (Du  f^ldtft). 
f^Iaff,  slack,  74. 
f(3^Iav3en,  W«g,  gefc^Iagen,  strike,  +  slay, VI., 

129 ;  rfapr.,=to  fight ;  (bu  fd^logft). 
f(^Ian!,  slender,  74. 

f*lci^cn,id)Uci2,3ef{^lid)cn,to  sneak,!.,  122,1. 
f(^Icifen,    f(i>Ii[f,   gei»^Iiffcn,   to   sharpen  by 

grinding,  I.,  122,  1  ;  weak  =  to  raze, 
fii^lei^en,  \^\\%  gef(^Iifien,  wear  off,  +  slit, 

I.,  122, 1 ;  (bu  jdjleiyefl  or  jcMet^t). 
f^Uicien,  f(i^Icff,  gcj(^Ioffeu,  to  slip,  II.,  124, 

2  ;  (bu  fc^Ieufft,  f(J^Ieu_f  very  rare), 
jc^llcpen,  fc^lo^,  gefc^loffen,  close,  conclude, 

II.,  124, 2 ;  (bu  j^lie|eft  or  jc^lie^t;  f^leu^t 

etc.,  rare). 
id)Unben,  see  f^tingen. 
fd^Ungen,    fdjlang,     gefe^Iungen,    to    twine, 

+  sling,  devour.  III.,  125,  1. 
Scbtucf,  m.,  -e,  swallow ;  pi.,  51. 
fc^Iilpfen  +  slip  <  jdjUefen  according  to  535, 

1,  R.  2. 
(£(i^mac^,  /.,  novl.^  disgrace,  490,  3,  h. 
^d)ma(^ten,  to  pine  (,fd)inad)tete). 
fc^nieid}eln,  flatter,  536,  2,  Ex. 
fd^metBen,  j(^m!i?,  gcfd)mi»Kn,  throw,  +  smite, 

1.,  122, 1 ;  (tu  fd^mei^cft  or  fd^mei^t). 
yc^mcl^^en,  ji^melj,  gefc^mclscn, +melt.  Vni., 

133;  (bu  jd^mtlsjl  or  jd)mil5t,  ei*  Ic^mitit, 

trans,  is  weak). 
(Sdjnicra,  m.,  -eS,  -en,  pain,  +  smart,  63. 
jd;nauben,   fd^no^,    gefd^noben,    snort,    puff, 

+  snuff,   II.,    124,  2,  also  weak;   (Du 

fc^naubft). 
Sd)neeu)ittd)cn,-i- Snow-white  (witt  is  L.  G. 

for  weiB). 
fd)neiben,  (d^nttt,  gcfd)n'ttcn,  +  cut,  L,  122,1; 

416,  462  ;  (bu  fd)noibo[t). 
f^nie&en,  see  j^naubcn. 
fd)nl(5en,  carve,  535,  1,  E.  2. 
ji^on,  already,    339 ;    position  of,   354  ; 

form  of,  5*54. 
fd)on,  beautiful,  522. 
fi^rauben,   ft^rob,  gcf(!^rDben,  +  screw,    II., 

124,  2;  (bu  f(^ranbft)  ;  also  weak. 
^i^reden,  \^x<xl,  geid>rcden,  to  be  frightened, 

see  crfd>rcden. 
S(^red(en),  w.,  fright ;  infl.,  46,  4. 
fc^reiben,  fj^rieb,  gefc^rieben,  write,  I.,  122, 2. 
fc^reien,  fc^rie,  gefdjrieeu,  cry,  +  scream,  1., 

122,  2. 
fd)vciten,  S^xxii,   gc?d)rittcn,  to  stride,  walk, 

I.,  122, 1 ;  (bu  fc^i-citeft,  er  fc^reitet). 
Su^ritt,  m.,   -e§,    -e,    stride,    step ;    after 

numerals,  175. 
f(^roff,  rugged,  uncouth,  74. 
fd)iDeigen,  ^(^ir*eg,  gcfdranc^.-:,  to  be  silent, 

L,  122,2 
edjirein,  n.,  -e,  pig,  +  sow,  +  swine,  502,2. 
fd)icelten,  fd)tDoII,  gefAnjoUen,  +  swell,  ■snil., 

133;  (bu  ^dyicittil,  fd)m!I). 


f(^njinben,  f^wanb,  ge^d^iuunben,  disappear, 

III.,  125,  1;   (bu  f(^mnbe)'t,  jc^iranbe — 

fc^wiinbe). 
j(^tt)ingen,    fd^wang,    gefc^mungen,  +  swing, 

III.,  125,  1 ;  (idjiuiinge  and  j(^u>iinge). 
fd)tcinimen,  jd^njamm,  gef(^n)ommen,  +  6wim, 

III.,    125,    2  ;    464  ;    (j^ironune   and 

fc^icamme). 
fd^Mi^oren,   f($»3ur  and   fdjtcor,  gc^cfetroren,  + 

swear,  VI.,  129  ;   VOI.,  132  ;   457,  1 ; 

(bu  f(^irorft). 
®e.  <  ecine,  His,  311,  2. 
(See,  m.,  -§,  -en,  lake ;  /.,  w.,  +  sea,  63. 
fcr)en,  ^ai),  ge^eben.  +  see,V.,  128,1 ;  instead 

of  gc"cl;cn,  108, 1 ;  +inf.,  290,  3  ;  410, 

3;  411,  Ex;  (bu  fie^,  fie^). 
^ein,  G.  s.  of  ev,  e§  :  see  feiner. 
fein,  his,  its,  85  ;  not  referring  to  subject, 

242,  1 ;    243,  2 ;   referring  to  indefinite 

subj.,  98 ;    seemingly  for  i^r  in  „ieincr 

3ett,'^  343,  2. 
fein,  to  be,  110  ;  473,  l ;  in  comp.  tenses, 

266,  283,1-3;  in  passive,  273  ;  +inf., 

290,  3,  a  ;  +past  part,  296,  2  ;  +pres. 

part.,  2  74,  6. 
feiner,  G.  s.  of  er,  e§,  of  him,  of  it,  81. 
fctt  + since,  mep..  303,  14;  +  since,  cc??/, 

330,2. 
feitbem,  see  fett. 

fetten-o,  on  the  part  of,  prep.^  302. 
-feito,  in  comp.  with  poss.  pron.,  87,  552. 
-fet,  noun-suf.,  46,  1 ;    500,  1  ;    mostly 

ncut.  gend.,  16,  13. 
fclb-,  icibcr,  +  self ,  91,  2;  before  numerals, 

229,  1 ;    530  ;   strengthens  refl.  pron., 

237,2;  use  of,  249. 
felbanber,  two  of  them,  of  us  (according  to 

the  person  of  the  verb),  229, 1. 
felbig-,  same,  248,  2. 
felbfl,  see  feib- 
-feltg,  adj.-suf.,  528,  2,  a. 
-fen  +  -se,  verb-suf ,  539,  1. 
fenben,  fanbte,  gefanbt,  +  send,  119, 1 ;  455, 

1;  pret.  subj.,  fenbete. 
fenfen,  fenftc,  gefenft,  trans.,  +  sink,  535, 

1,  a. 
©effel,  m.,  -,  (easy,  large)  chair, 
©cu^e,  /.,  w..,  epidemic  disease,  396. 
sh  —  f(^,  490, 1,  d. 
shall  +  follcn,  266,  5  ;  in  ftit.,  266, 6 ;  2  79, 

3  ;  283,  4. 
\i&j,  A.  and  D.,  sing,  and  pi.  of  refl.  pron., 

him-  and  herself,  themselves,   83;   re- 
ciprocal pron.,  84,  each,  one  another  ; 

supplants  pers.  pron.,  237,1;   243,3, 

R.J  position  of,  353,  e. 
fie,  N.  and  A.,  fem.  smg.,  and  pi.  of  all  gen- 
ders, +  she,  her,  they,  them,  81. 
©ic,  yon  in  address,  230,  2;  233. 
fied),  infirm,  +  sickly,  396. 
fieben,  fctt,  gcfotrcn,  boD,  + seethe,  11.,  124, 

1 ;    416,    1 ;    463 ;  (bu    ficbcft) ;    figur. 

weak. 
©in-,  in  comp.,  494,  3. 
fingen,  fang,  gefungen, +  sing,  m.,  125, 1. 
finten,  fanf,  gcfunfen, +  sink,  m.,  125,  1. 
©inn  nnb  95evftanb  ~  all  reason,  lit.  sense 

and  reason. 


WORD-INDEX  AND   GERM  AX-ENGLISH  YOCABULARY. 


^83 


fmuen,  fann,  gcfonncn,  meditate,  in.,  135, 

2;  (ffinue  and  fomie). 
fint+ since,  prep.,  303,  14. 
fintemal,  because,  337,  1. 
figen,  fajj,  9eiei7en,+sit,  V.,  1S8,  2;  457, 1; 

[bu  fi^eft,  er  W,  \Mt)\  -,  ^  ^    ^ 

fo+so:  in  main  clauses  preceded  by  de- 
pend, claus.,    329;    333;   330,  3,    a; 

348,  2;   in  consecutive  clauses,  335; 

in  compar.  clauses,  333,  3;  in  conces- 
sive cl.,  339;  relative  adv.,  257;  =iyeun, 

340;  +^1X1^  350,2, 
©o^n,  m., -c, +son,  405. 
fDl(^  +  snch,  91,  3 ;  443, 1 ;  force  of,  350; 

+  ein,  91,3;  144;  157  ;  333,3. 
fofern,  conj.^  +in  so  far  as,  340, 
©olba't,  m.^  w.,  +  soldier, 
foUen,  joUte,  geiottt,  +  shall,  ought,  135,  5 ; 

108,  2;   471,  2,  4;   force  of,  367,  5; 

379,  3;  383,2,5. 
fonber,  without,  304,  6 ;  489,  4. 
fonbern,  but,  330,  2,  R.;  word-order  after, 

343,  c. 
fonft,  at  other  times,  330  ;  551,  3, 
fp,  pronunc.  of,   34;    378,  3;    389,  4; 

391,  1 ;  Eng.  correspondents  of,  413, 1. 
©pa^,  m.^  -c§,  -e,  joke,  fun. 
fpapen,  to  joke,  118,  2;  (fpa^eft,  fpa^te). 
fpat,  adv.^  late,  300,  1 ;  554. 1. 
©paten,  m.,  -,  +  spade. 
©pa^,  wj.,  w.,  also  -e§,  -c,  + sparrow, 
fpajieren,  walk  about,  with  veibs  of  motion, 

390,  2. 
fpa^en  +  spy,  494, 1. 
fpat,  late,  see  also  fpat. 
fpeieit,  fpie,  gejpieen,  +  spit,  +  spew,  I., 

133,  2. 
©peife,  /.,  w.,  food. 
fptnnen,  ipann,  gefponuen, +  spin,  in.,  135, 

2;  (fpanne  and  fpornte). 
©pion,  m.,  -e,  +  spy,  494,  1. 
fplei^en,  iptlil,  geipUifeu,  +  split,  I,  133, 1 ; 

(bu  fplei^eft  or  fpleiiit,  er  jpletpt). 
©peril,  m.,  +  spur,  for  infl.  see  03,  1. 
fpred)cn,   fprac^,    gefprod^en,  +  speak,   IV., 

137  ;   (ou  fprt(^ft,  fpric^ ;  with  A.,  to  see, 

in  §  60. 
fprtefjcn,  fpro^,  gefprof^en,  + sprout,  11.,  134, 

1 ;  (bu  fptie^eft  or  fprte^t,  er  fprte^t ;  old, 

fpreu^t,  fpreu^). 
fpttngen,  fprang,  geforungen,  +  spring,  run, 

ni.,  135, 1 ;  (fprange), 
©pro^,  m.,  -ffeg,  -Re,  +  8prout,  scion, 
[t,  pronunc.  of,  34 ;  378,3;  389,4;  391, 

1 ;  Eng.  correspondents  of,  413. 
~\i,  super! .  suffix,  73;  438,  1;  in  ordinals, 

80  ;  530  ;  in  nouns,  513,  3. 
©taat,  m„  -e5,  -en,  +  state,  government, 
©tad^el,  m.,  -,  sting, 
©tabt,  /.,  %  city,  430, 1,  a ;  490,  1,  b. 
©tamm,  «z.,  -,  +  stem. 
ftarr,  stiff,  +  staring,  74. 
flatt  +  instead  of,  303,  1;  490, 1,  b. 
©tatt,  /.,  no  pl.^  place,  4- stead,  see  ©tabt. 
©tatte,  /.,  w,,  spot,  see  above, 
ftec^cn,  [tac^,  gcfto(^en,  siing,  puncture,  + 

stick,  IV.,  137;   457,2;   405,1;  (bu 

Mm.  m). 


[teden  +  to  stick  (not  flaf,  but  weak), 
ftct)ea,  ftaiib  (ftunb),  gc[tanben,  + stand,  139; 
136,  2;  457,2;  475  ;  (bu  fte^ft,  [tet)e,  ic^ 
[tunce  or  [tanbe). 
ftet;len,  [ta^l,   gcfto^ien,  +  steal,  IV.,  137; 
398 ;  465 ;  (Cu  ftie^Ift,  jnelyl  or  [tel;te, 
ftoi^le  or  ftaf^le). 
fteigen,  jtteg,  geftiegen,  to  ascend,  mount,  I., 

133,  2. 
©teiu,  m.,-c,  + stone. 

©teimnc^,  m.,  w.,  also  strong,  stone-cutter, 
fteinreicV  + stony,  very  rich,  4:^3,  4. 
fterben,  [tavb,  geftovbcn,  +  to  die,  IV.,  135,  *3: 

(  + starve,  [tirbi't,  ftur&c,  rarely  ftarbe). 
ftieben,  ftob,  geftobcn,  fly,  scatter  like  d:;st, 

I.,  134,  2  ;  (bu  ftiebit,  older  fteubft). 
^ii^i,  gender  and  meaning  see  58. 
ftinfen,  ftan!,  geftunfen,  +  stink,  HI.,  135,1; 

(I'tanfe,  rarely  ftutife). 
ftoJ^,  proud,  74. 
fto^en,  ftiep,   geflo^cn,  push,  thrust,  VII., 

131 ;  458,  2 ;  (bu  fto^t,  er  fto^t). 
flraff,  stretched,  tight,  74. 
©traud},  771.,  -e  and  — er,  shnib. 
ftre(feu  + stretch,  in  §  79  to  die. 
[treii^en,   ftvii^,    geftrid^en,  -i-  strike  out,  + 

stroke,  L,  133  1. 
ftreiten,  ftvitt,  geftrttten,  contend,  I.,  133, 1 ; 

(bu  ftrcitcft)  •  "strong,"  438,  3. 
©tiiBc, /.,  sitting-room  (  + stove). 
©tu^I,  m.,  — e,  chair,  +  stool,  throne, 
flunb,  pret.  of  fte:^en,  q.  v. 
-ftunb  in  comp.,  531,  2. 
©tute,  mare,  +  stud,  430, 1. 
ftufeen,  be  startled,  clip,  <  same  root  as 

flD^cn;  see  535;  bu  [tu^eft,  118,  2. 
\vi^t\\  +  seek,  454^  3. 
©utfet,  /.,  w.,  passion,  mania,  396  ;  orig.^ 

lingering  disease ;  +  sick. 
-fti(^ttg  in  comp.,  538,  2,  b. 
©ftben,  m.,  -i-,  +  south. 
©ftnbflut,  /.,  ^y.,  Deluge,  494,  3. 
\^,  +  sweet. 
I,  pronunc.  of,  33,  35- 


t,  pronunc.  of,  35  ;  see  t^  ;  Eng.  corre- 
spondents of,  408.  1 ;  413  :  413,  1  ; 
414,  1;  description  of,  384,  1;  in  , 
389,  3,  4  ;  excrescent,  87  \  89 ;  91,  2  ; 
491,2;  513,2,3;  stops  mto  spirantis 
before,  413  ;  tv,  414,  1. 

-t,  noun -suffix,  513  ;  fem.  gend,,  161,  2  ; 
163,5, 

-t,  in  the  participle  of  weak  verbs, 
453. 

A,  2.  pers.    sg.    in   pret^-pres,  verbs, 
470,  2. 

^afel,/.,  «;.,  formal  meal ;  Get  — ,  at  +  table. 

Stag,  m.,  -c  +  day, 

taugen,  to  be  fit,  +  do,  471,  5. 

Staufenb,  w., -e,+ thousand,  336. 

tch,  G.  correspondents  of,  414,  3. 

-te,  suf.  in  ordinals,  80,  530. 

-te,  in  pret.,  117;  454,  1. 

teil^,  in  part ;  in  comp.  with  poss.  pron.,  87. 


284      WORD-IN^DEX  AN^D   GERMAN-EIfGLISH   VOCABULABY. 


-tel,  in  comp.,  533,  2. 

-ter,  nonn-sufl,  508. 

teta,  see  t^at. 

Teutones,  493,  3. 

t^,  pronunc.  of,  35  ;  origin  of,  363,  3 ; 

384,  1. 
t^at  +  did,  374,6;  390;  476,2. 
Silver,  gend.  and  meaning,  163,  4 ;  408, 1. 
St^rane,  tear,  430, 1. 
St^ron,  m.,  -c  and  -€n,  +  throne,  63, 1. 
t^un,  t^ot,  9et^an,  +  do,  136,  3;   454,1; 

476;   as   an  auxU.,    394,  6;   394,  1; 

(tl^ate). 
SEBur,  /.,  «r.,  +  door,  408,  1 ;  430, 1. 
SEpr^cn,  w.,  -,  little  door. 
SEier,  w.,  -e,  animal  (deer). 
%\S^,  m.y  -e,  table  (  + disk,  +  dish). 
StDc^ter,/.,  ^,+dauo:hter,  46,  48,  408,  1. 
SEob,  w.,  -eg,  joZ.  of,  173. 
toU,  mad,  +  dull,  74. 
tragen,  tvug,  getragen,  carry,  VI.,  139 ;  (bu 

trcicift). 
SErant,  w.,  -e,  +  drmk. 
trauen  (with  D.),  to  trust, 
treffen,   trof,   getroffen,  hit,  IV.,  137;  (bu 

triffft,  triff). 
treiben,  trieb,  getrteben,  +  drive,  I.,  133,  2. 
treten,  trot,  getreten,  +  tread,  step,  V.,  138, 

1 ;  (bu  trittfl,  er  tritt,  tritt  or  trcte). 
triefen,  troff,  getroffen,  +  to  drip,  drop,  II., 

134, 1 ;  463  ;  (bu  trietft,  rarely  treufi'!). 
triegen,  see  tvugen. 
trinfen,  tranf,  getrunfen,  +  drink,  m.,  135, 

1 ;  (trcinfe,  older  txunfe). 
trocEen  +  dry,  534,  4. 
SErcpfCen)  m.,  - +drop,  46,  4. 
SErcpf,  m.,  -e,   fool,    orig.  "struck  with 

paralysis.*' 
tro^,  in  defiance,  in  spite  of,  303,  9. 
tro^en,  to  comfort,  535, 1,  a ;  (troftete). 
-trunfen,  intoxicated,  538. 
SErtibfal,  /.,  -e,  sorrow. 
SErummcr,  a  pi.,  ruins,  59. 
trugen,  trog,  getrcgen,  to  cheat,  11.,  134,  2 : 

133  ;  (bu  triigft,  older  trciigft). 
%yx^,  «.,  -€§,  — er,  cloth,  shawl,  58,  85. 
-turn,  +  -dom,  57,  4 ;  mostly  neut.  gend., 

161,  8  ;  origin  of,  501  ;  515,  5. 
%,  pronunc  of,  389,  3  ;   414, 1 ;   §  —  J,  f, 

535,1,5.2;  see  J. 


tt. 

u,  pronunc.  of,  36  ;  description  of,  368, 1, 
2 ;  <  uo,  488,  4  ;  u  —  c,  405  ;  +nascUis 
and  liquida  sonans^  459,  8,  a. 

ue,  as  sign  of  umlaut,  363,  2. 

urn  +  SU,  in  order  to,  391, 1,  4,  R. ;  335, 1 ; 
338,  1 ;  304,  7 ;  in  comp.  verbs,  549, 
4;  +jo,  334. 

untrungen,  suiTounded,  see  rtngen. 

un-  4-  -un,  accent,  433,  6  ;  516,  10. 

unb  +  and,  319;  +  inversion,  339,  1. 

-ung  +  -ing,  506,  2;  gend.,  161,  2. 

un§,  D.  and  A.  of  wir, +  us,  to  us,  81  ;  also 
refl.,  83  ;  and  reciprocal  pron.,  84. 

unfer,  G.  of  luir,  81. 


unfer,  poss.  pron.,  +  onr,  85. 

unirer,  for  unfer,  83. 

unter-,  adj.^  lower,  +  under,  76,  2. 

unter,  i>rep.,  +  under,  306,  8, 10 ;  in  comp. 
verbs,  549,  5. 

Unterfd)icb,  m.,  -e§,  -e,  difference,  458,  3. 

Untertl)an,  m„  w.,  subject  (of  a  ruler),  63, 1. 

Uv-  +  or-,  516,  9. 

Urol^ne,  great  grandmother  in  §  143. 

urbar,  arable,  536, 1. 

iX,  pronunc.  of,  31  ;  sign  of  umlaut,  363, 
2  ;  368,  4  ;  description  of,  367  ;  368, 
3,  4 ;  <  ue,  488,  4  ;  u  —  i,  489,  2. 

uber + over,  306, 7:  in  comp.  verbs,  549, 3. 

u'berfal)ten,  to  cross. 

aber^au'pt,  in  general,  433  ;  553,  3. 


»,  pronunc.  of,  37;   380,  1,  2 ;   see   f; 

415,1. 
SSater,  m..  -,  +  father,  46,  48,  2  ;   411  ; 

478.4. 
SSaterlanb,  n.,  -€§,  -e,+ fatherland. 
Ber-  +  for-,  516, 11 ;  545  ;  in  certain  par- 
ticiples, 395,  2  ;  545,  5. 
perberben,  serbarb,  uerbcrben,  to  spoil  (intr.), 

ni.,  135,3;  (bu  »erbirb[t;  verbirb,  terbiirbe, 

rarely  tcrbarbe). 
SSerbicnft,  gend.  and  meaning,  163,  3. 
perbient,  deserving,  meritorious,  395,  2. 
perbrie^en,  i-^erbro^,   perbroffen,  to  vex,  II., 

134,  1 ;  (bu   t>erbrie^eft  or  »erbvic^t,  old 

»erbreu§t). 
pergeffeu,  werga^,  tergefyen,  +  to  forget,  V., 

138,  1 ;  past  part,  in  comp.,  395,  2,  a  ; 

(bu  pergifjeft  or  rergi^t,  er  tergipt,  J>ergi^). 
ter^altni^m&|ig,  comparatively, 
terfauren,  to  sell. 
Berlaffen,  to  forsake,  see  laffen. 
petlegen,  embarrassed,  past  part.,  395,  2,  a; 

534,  4. 
perrernen,  to  forget  how  to  .  .  .,  + unlearn, 
perlieren,  perlor,  pcrloren,  +  lose,  11.,  134, 2; 

416. 
ttermoge,  by  virtue  of,  303,  11. 
»ertt»irren,  to  confuse,  strong  past  part.,  uets 

n)Drren=compIicated,  VIII.,  133. 
SSetter,  m.,  w.  or  mixed  decl.,  cousin,  63, 1. 
9Sie^,  n.,  -c§,  -e,  cattle  (+fee),  410,  3. 
»iet,  much,  compar.  of,  76, 1  ;  100  ;  199, 

1,  2;   363. 
vixen  +  >vuc()fin,  504. 
poll-  +  fuU,  74,  549,  6. 
PcHcr  +  full,  319, 1. 
PDHfonimcn,  perfect,  431, 1. 
SScIf,  n.y  — er,  people,  +  folk. 
3SD'If§etpmDlogie^  + folk-etymology,  494,  2. 
pom  <  pon  bcm,  from  the,  40. 
pon,  from,  by,  303, 15;  compar.  with  bur(^, 

369  ;  304,  2  ;  306,  7,  i?. ;  +felbft,  of . . . 
self,  349,  2. 
Por  +  before,  in  point  of,  306,  9  ;  516,  5 ; 

compar.  with  filr,  304,  3. 
porau'ywerfunbigcn,  announce  beforehand, 

546,  2. 
Porbcr-,  the  front  one,  76,  2  (short  o). 


WOED-IKDEX  AKD   GEEMAN-EKGLISH  YOCABULARY.      285 


SSorfa^r,  m.^  w.,  ancestor, 
wor'^afcenb,  intended,  394, 1. 
SSormunb,  m.,  -eS,  "-er,  guardian. 


XO,  pronnnc.  of,  38  ;  description  of,  379  ; 
380,  2:  loss  of,  417,  2;  Eng.  corre- 
spondents of,  410,  3  ;  415,  2  ;  490.  6. 

wadjfen,  \v\x^^,  geroad.})en,  grow,  +  wax,  VI., 
139 ;  417,  5,  a  ;  (bu,  cr  load^ft). 

SBagcn,  m.,+ wagon,  +  wain,  494,1;  48,2. 

SBaggo'n,  m.,  pi.  in  -§,  car,  494, 1. 

wain  +  2Bagen,  494,1. 

voai)X,  true,  74. 

SBa^r^eit,  /.,  w.,  truth. 

SSalb,  m.,  -e§,  -er,  forest,  +wold. 

icatten,  rule  (roaltete). 

tcanbein,  walk,  change,  118,  3. 

wanbern  + wander,  118,  3. 

wonn+when  ;  for  relat.  pron.,  358  ;  cwy., 
330, 1;  etym.,  551,2. 

war,  pret.  of  fein,  q.  v. ;  also  wesan. 

warb,  pret.  sing,  of  racroen.  111,  2  j  460. 

ttarum  +  why,  +  wherefore,  351,  4  ;  551, 2. 

tt>a§,  interrog.  pron.,  93  ;  444  ;  use  of, 
351;  +  G.,  351,  1;  preceded  by  p., 
tnit,  351,  3 ;  with  fiir  and  etn,  144, 
353;  force  of  luarum,  351,  4;  relat. 
pron.,  93  ;  356  ;  356,  2  ;  indef.  pron., 
96;  304;  360. 

tt)a§,  archaic  of  wesan^  466, 1. 

wafc^en,  luufd),  geiuajj^en,  +  wash,  VI.,  139  ; 
413  ;  (bu  njaf(^e[t  or  waf<^t). 

SBaffer,  /i.,  -,  + water,  414,  1,  Ex. 

ttjigen,  see  wiegen. 

wafrenb,  during,  303,  11;  conj.,  330, 1. 

-wdrto,  +  -ward,  553,  2. 

"weak,"  438,3. 

weben,  moh,  gen)D6ett,  + weave,  VIII.,  133  ; 
(bu  webft) ;  weak  =  to  move. 

weber  —  no^  +  neither  —  nor  ;  +  whether, 
444,  3 ;  in  compar.  clauses,  333,  Ex. 

-njegen,  on  account  of,  in  comp.  with  pron., 
87,  89  ;  prepos.,  303,  13. 

tt)e^  t:^un  +  D.,  to  pain,  see  if)mx. 

SBei6,  n.,  -c§,  -cr,  +  woman, + wife,  166. 

weic&,  soft  ( +  weak). 

tt3Ct(^en,  miX),  geanc^cn,  to  yield,  I.,  133, 1 ; 
weak  =  to  soften. 

2]3ei^nacf)teu,  Christmas,  439,  1. 

weit,  because,  337;   +  while,  330, 1. 

-weife,  -wise,  553,  3. 

weifen,  wteS,  gciuiefen,  show,  I.,  133,  2. 

ttei^fagen,  prophecy,  547,  3  ;  (p.  p.  gemeiSs 

wet^,  see  wtffen. 

aeld^,  interrog.  pron.,  93,  2 ;  444,  2 ;  with 

ein,  144;    353;   relat.   pron.,   93,  2; 

355,    356;    indef.    pron.,    96,    360; 

etym.,  415,  2. 
njeiti,  D.  of  tuer,  q.  v. ;  93, 1. 
wenben,  wanbte,  gewanbt,    turn   (  +  wend), 

119, 1 ;   397  ;   453  ;  (bu  wenbeft,  pret. 

subj.  ttjenbete). 
jrenig,  Uttle,  few ;  comparison  regular  or 

as  m  76, 1. 


wenn,   conj.,  +  when,  =  if  in    temporal 

cl.,    330,  1  ;     =   if  in    concessive  cl., 

339  ;  =  if  in  condit.  cl.,  340 ;  etym.^ 

551,  2. 
wer  +  who,  interrog.    pron.,   93  ;    351 ; 

410,  3;    444;    relat.    pron.,    93,    3; 

354;    356;    indef.  pron.,  96;   354; 

360;  339. 
werben,  tcarB,  geworben,  recruit,  sue  for, 

in.,  135,  3 ;  (bu  \axxl%  mxh,  wiirbe  or 

vabxm), 
werben,  warb  or  wurbe,  gcworben,  become 

(  + worth).  III.,  135,  3;   infl.  of,  110; 

111,  2;   460,  1;  in  passive,  373  ;  in 

comp.  tenses,  383,  2-5  ;  +  gu,  303,16; 

(bu  wirft,  er  vcirb,  njerbe,  iriirbe). 
werfen,  trarf,  geworfen,  throw.  III.,  135,  3 ; 

(bu  wirtft,  »irf,  wxlrfe  or  xo^x\^). 
SSerf,  72,.,  -e§,  -e,  +  work,  60. 
nje§,  tceffen,  rce^,  93, 1 ;  356,  4. 
toefen,  wesan,  V.,  138,  5 ;  411 ;  466. 
ireg^atb,  wherefore,  93,  1. 
weffent-,  in  comp.,  93, 1. 
SBi^t,  W2.,  -e,  + wight,  +  whit, 
iriber,   against,  304,  8;  in  comp.  verbs, 

549,  7. 
wibmen,  dedicate  (wibmete),  118,  2. 
m^,  +how,  as,  444,  1 ;  in  tempor.  clauses, 

330,  1,  2 ;   in  compar.  cl.,  333  ;  after 

comparative,  333,  2. 
trieber,  a(^?;.,again,  in  comp.  verbs,  549,8. 
iriegen,  lucg,  geiDDgen,  + weigh,  VIII.,  133; 

(also  irdgen,  bu  tciegft). 
icilb  +  wild. 

wtU,  see  iroHen  ;  367,  6. 
willen,  for  the  sake  of,  in  comp.  with  pron., 

87,  89  ;  prepos.,  303,  14. 
irinben,  tcanb,  gei»unben,  + wind,  III.,  135, 

1 ;  (bu  tt)inbeft). 
ttJtffen,  tou^te,  getcup,  for  infl.  see  135, 1 ; 

413,  2 ;  471, 1 ;  473,  1 ;  compar.  with 

fennen,  fonnen,  367, 1. 
with+t»iber;  306,8. 

SGBittum,  fi.,  -e,  jointure,  allowance,  501. 
n)D(r)  + where,  supplants  cases  of  interrog., 

and  relat.  pron.,  351,  2  ;  358  ;  in  local 

clauses,    331 ;    in  tempor.  cl.,  330,  1  ; 

in  condit.  cl.,  340,  340,  4 ;   origm  of, 

551,2. 
irofern,  coTij.,  in  so  far  as,  336;    340; 

340,  2. 
WD^t  +  well,  pronunc.  of,  381;  339;  489, 

1;  position  of,  354;  399,  2,  a. 
njoMgeboren,  (Your)  Honor,  lit.  +  well  bom. 
WDUen,  wottte,  gerooUt,  +  will,  be  willing, 

for  infl.  see  135,  7,  and  108,  2 ;  473, 

2;  special  force  of,  367,  6;  379,  3; 

383,  5. 
Womogtic^,  if  possible,  340,  4. 
tcorben,  past  part,  of  toerben,  108,  5. 
2Bort,  w.,  -e  and  -er, +word,  58. 
SBunber,  n.,  -,  + wonder,  see  ne^^mcn. 
wurbe,  pret.  of  irerben.  111,  2. 
SBurm,  m.,  -cr,  and  -e, +worm. 
iDU^te,  see  wifjcn. 
SSiirbe,  /.,  w.,  dignity, + worth. 


286      WOHD-I^sTDEX   AJS^D   GERMAN-EKGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


^,  pronraic.  of,  29  ;    389,  2 ;   417,  5,  a  ; 

Engl.  X  as  symbol,  395. 


X),  pronunc.  of,  31. 


3,  pronunc.  of,  30  ;  389, 3,  4  ;  Eng.  corre- 
spondents of,  409,  1 ;  414, 1 ;  490,  2  ; 
535,  l,i?.  2. 

5a:^m  +  tame,  74,  398. 

2a^n,  m.,  -e,  +  tooth,  409, 1 ;  417, 1. 

3art,  tender,  74. 

gasmen  +  to  tame,  535, 1,  a, 

Q'aljxe,  /.,  w.,  +  tear,  430, 1. 

ge^n  +  ten,  77,  539. 

3eid)en,  n.^  -,  + token. 

jeic^ncn,  draw,  delineate,  118, 1. 

jeiljen,  jicf),  gejie^en,  accuse,  L,  132,  2; 
395;  463. 

-3en,  verb-guf.,  539,  3. 

ger-  +  dis-,  verb-pref.,  546. 

5eu'ci^en,  to  tear  to  pieces,  see  rei^en. 

3euge,  m.^  w.^  witness. 


jie^en,  jog,  gcjogen,  draw,  II.,  134, 2  ;  416; 

(bu  geucJjft,  jeud)  are  archaic). 
-jig  +  -tyin  numerals,  539,  1. 
jtttern,  tremble,  eiym.,  457,  3. 
ju  +  to,  303,  16;  before  inf.,  391;  before 

adj.,  391,  4  ;     333,  3 ;   see  gegen  and 

3uber,  tub,  etym.^  398. 

3uc!er,  m.,  no  j??;.,  +  sugar. 

jufolge,  in  accordance  with,  303, 15. 

gum  <  5U  betn  +  to  the,  40. 

3unft,  /.,  -e,  guild,  398. 

^utigc,  /.,  w.,  + tongue,  414,  1,  Ex. 

5ur<  ^u  ber  +  to  the,/(gm.,  40. 

§urii'clbringen  + bring  back,  see  tringen. 

jufammcn,  together. 

jirav,  to  be  sure,  339 ;  555,  3  ;  position 

of,  354. 
jireen  +  twain,  +  two,  79;  539. 
Awet  +  two;    infl.  of,  78;  form  and  gend. 

of,  79  ;  539. 
3WeIt  + twelve,  77  ;  539  ;  489, 1. 
3n?ie-+  two-   530,1. 
5n)ier  + twice,  531,  2. 
jwingen,  jtrang,   gejiuungen,  to  force,  III., 

135,1. 
Att)ifc^en+ between,  306,  10;  compar.  with 

unter,  306,  8;  305,  1,2. 
gnjD  +  two, /em.,  79;  539. 
z,  Grimm's  sign  for  the  sound  between 

z  and  6,  414 ;  >  s,  490,  2. 


THE    STUDENT'S 


Manual  of  Exercises 


FOR   TRANSLATING   INTO   GERMAN 


WITH      FULL     VOCABULARY,      NOTES,      REFERENCES,      AND 
GENERAL     SUGGESTIONS 


Prepared  and  Arranged  to  Accompany 

BRANDT'S    GERMAN    GRAMMAR 

BY 

A.    LODEMAN,    A.M. 

PROFESSOR    OF    GERMAN    AND    FRENCH    IN    THE    MICHIGAN    STATE    NORMAL    SCHOOL 


Boston 

ALLYN     AND    BACON 

1888 


Copyright,  1885,  by  G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons. 


REMAEKS  AND  EXPLANATIONS. 


The  following  Exercises  have  been  prepared  with  the 
twofold  purpose  of  furnishing  to  the  student  material  for 
translating  into  German,  and  of  assisting  him  in  the  analysis 
and  translation  of  the  more  difficult  illustrations  in  Brandfs 
German  Grammar, 

That  examples  from  the  German  classics  are  the  proper 
kind  of  illustrations  for  a  text-book  of  such  high  order  and 
merit  as  Professor  Brandt's,  cannot  be  doubted.  Had  the 
author  illustrated  his  rules  by  means  of  sentences  especially 
adapted  to  the  understanding  of  the  young  student,  the  latter, 
upon  completing  the  course  in  grammar,  would  not  be  well 
prepared  to  read  and  enjoy  the  works  of  the  great  German 
authors.  If  the  examples  found  in  Brandt's  Grammar,  in 
some  instances,  force  the  student  to  greater  application,  he 
will  feel  amply  repaid  for  his  extra  labor  when  he  takes  up  the 
study  of  the  masterpieces  of  German  literature. 

At  all  events,  the  present  Exercises  will,  it  is  hoped,  enable 
even  the  beginner  to  derive  the  full  benefit  from  the  large 
number  of  excellent  illustrations  drawn  from  the  acknowledged 
masters  of  German  style  and  embodied  in  Brandt's  Grammar. 
Should  he  find  any  difficulty  in  translating  any  one  of  them. 


4  REMARKS  AND   EXPLANATIONS. 

he  has  only  to  refer,  by  means  of  the  table  given  below,  to  the 
corresponding  English  Exercise,  and  he  will  find  that  one  or 
more  of  the  English  sentences  will  greatly  aid  him  in  the 
understanding  of  the  German  example. 

The  Grammar  referred  to  throughout  the  book  (including 
the  Vocabulary)  is  BrancWs  Grammar  of  the  German  Lan- 
guage,   Paragraphs  to  be  read  over  merely  are  put  in  (     ). 

In  the  Exercises,  words  in  [  ]  should  not  be  translated, 
while  those  in  (    )  are  required  by  the  German  idiom. 

The  cognate  mark  (  +  )  is  put,  as  a  rule,  only  where  even 
the  beginner  can  recognize  the  common  origin  of  English  and 
German  words  after  having  had  his  attention  called  to  it. 
When  the  German  word  is  preceded  by  the  article,  the  +  is 
placed  before  the  latter. 

Figures  at  the  end  of  sentences  refer  to  those  sections  in 
the  Grammar  in  which  more  or  less  of  the  material  required, 
for  the  German  sentence  may  be  found. 

The  Vocabulary  contains  all  words  not  explained  in  the 
notes,  except  such  grammatical  words  (pronouns,  prepositions, 
3tc. )  as  are  easily  found  in  the  very  paragraphs  to  which  the 
student  is  referred  for  each  exercise.  The  notes  under  the 
first  twenty  exercises  are  so  full  as  to  do  away  with  the  use  of 
the  Vocabulary. 


TABLE 

SHOWING     IN     WHICH     EXERCISES     ILLUSTRATIONS     OF     THE    VARIOUS 
PARAGRAPHS     OF    THE    GRAMMAR    MAY    BE    FOUND. 


Para. 

Ex, 

Page 

Para. 

Ex. 

Page 

Para. 

Ex. 

Page 

38 

1 

7 

110 

5 

9 

226-29     .. 

17 

.     33 

39 

1 

.     60 

tt 

.      31 

.     45 

230 

18 

.      34 

40 

2 

.      61 

111 

.       5 

.     63 

«( 

7 

.      11 

41 

1 

.      60 

112 

.       3 

.       8 

231-32     .. 

7 

.     65 

42 

1 

7 

113 

6 

.     64 

233-34     .. 

18 

.     34 

43 

.       2 

.       7 

114 

4 

.       9 

235-36     .. 

19 

.      35 

44-5 

1 

7 

(( 

.       5 

.      10 

237^1     .. 

20 

.      36 

46 

.       2 

7 

115 

.       2 

.      22 

242-43     .. 

7 

.      65 

48 

1 

..        9 

116 

.       4 

.        9 

244-18     .. 

21 

..      36 

49-50       . 

.       3 

.       8 

" 

6 

.      11 

<( 

8 

..      65 

51 

1 

..      60 

117 

2    ' 

..       7 

249-54     .. 

22 

..      37 

52-3 

4 

9 

118 

7 

.      65 

(( 

8 

..      65 

56-8 

.       5 

.      10 

119 

.       6 

.      11 

255-63     !. 

23 

..      38 

59-60 

1 

..      60 

120-3 

.      18 

..      19 

" 

8 

..      65 

61-2 

.       6 

.      11 

124-8 

.      19 

..      20 

264-66     . 

24 

..      39 

63-4 

7 

.      11 

129-33 

.      20 

..      20 

267 

25 

..      39 

65 

.       8 

..      12 

134 

.      11 

..      15 

" 

26 

..      40 

QQ 

1 

.      60 

135 

.      11 

..      15 

268-73     ".. 

27 

..      41 

67 

.       8 

.      12 

(( 

.      12 

..      15 

274:-15     . 

38 

..      42 

68 

1 

..      60 

" 

.      13 

..      16 

276-79     . 

29 

..      43 

69-72 

9 

..      13 

(( 

.      14 

..      16 

280-83     . 

cO 

..      44 

73-5 

.      10 

..      14 

136 

.      15 

..      17 

284-85     . 

31 

..      45 

76 

.      11 

..      15 

137 

.      16 

..      18 

286-90     . 

32 

..      46 

77-8 

.      12 

..      15 

(( 

3 

..      61 

291-93     . 

33 

..      47 

79 

.      17 

..      33 

138 

.      14 

..      lf> 

294-300  . 

34 

..      47 

80-2 

.      13 

..      16 

139-46 

1 

..      21 

301-3 

35 

..      48 

83-5 

.      14 

..      16 

147-50 

.       2 

7 

304 

36 

..      49 

86-7 

.       7 

..      65 

151-58 

.       3 

..      23 

305-7       . 

37 

..      50 

88 

.      15 

..      17 

159-63 

.       4 

..      24 

308-17     . 

1 

..      51 

89 

7 

..      65 

164-69 

5 

..      24 

318-22     . 

2 

..      52 

90-1 

.      15 

..      17 

170-77 

..        6 

..      25 

323-28     . 

.        3 

..      52 

92-3 

.      16 

..      18 

178-79 

..        7 

..      26 

329-32     . 

4 

..      53 

94-100 

.      17 

..      18 

180-83 

8 

..      27 

333-35     . 

5 

..      54 

101-2 

.       2 

..       7 

184-88 

..       9 

..      27 

336-40     . 

6 

..      55 

(( 

.       3 

..       8 

189 

..      10 

..      28 

341 

16 

..      18 

{{ 

.       5 

..      10 

190 

..      10 

..      28 

(( 

16 

..      32 

103 

1 

..       7 

(( 

3 

..      61 

u 

7 

..      56 

** 

..       2 

..       7 

191-97 

..      11 

..      29 

342-43     .' 

16 

..      32 

(( 

..       5 

..      10 

198 

..      11 

..      29 

kfr 

7 

..     56 

" 

..      31 

..     45 

(( 

..       3 

..      61 

344 

.      16 

..      32 

104-5 

7 

..      11 

199-202 

..      11 

..      29 

(( 

8 

..      57 

106-7 

8 

..      12 

203-9 

..      12 

..      29 

345-49     . 

8 

..      57 

108 

..       8 

..      12 

210-12 

..      13 

..      30 

350 

.       3 

..       8 

'» 

..      10 

..      14 

213-17 

..      14 

..      31 

4( 

5 

..      10 

109 

..        3 

8 

218-21 

..      15 

..      32 

'* 

9 

..     57 

110 

1 

..       7 

222 

..      16 

..      32 

(( 

.       3 

..      61 

(( 

..        2 

..       7 

(( 

..      10 

..      14 

351-53     .' 

.       9 

..      57 

u 

..        4 

9 

223-25 

..      16 

..      32 

354-59     . 

.      10 

..      58 

ABBEEVIATIONS. 


acc. 

=  accusative. 

part. 

=  participle. 

adj. 

=  adjective. 

perf. 

=  perfect  tense. 

aux. 

=  auxiliary  verb. 

pers. 

=  personal. 

B.  T. 

=  Bayard  Taylor. 

plup. 

=  pluperfect  tense. 

conj. 

=  conjunction. 

plur. 

=  plural. 

dat. 

=  dative. 

poet. 

=  poetical. 

def.  art. 

=  definite  article. 

p.p. 

=  past  participle. 

Ex. 

=  Exercise. 

prep. 

=  preposition. 

F. 

=  Faust,  Hart's  Edition. 

pret. 

=  preterite. 

f.  and  ff. 

=  following. 

pron. 

=  pronoun. 

gen. 

=  genitive. 

pr.  pts. 

=  principal  parts. 

Ha. 

=  James  Morgan  Hart. 

sep. 

=  separable. 

imp. 

=  impersonal. 

str. 

=  strong  verb  or  noun. 

indef.  art 

=  indefinite  article. 

subj. 

=  subjunctive. 

inf. 

:=  infinitive. 

subord. 

=  subordinating. 

insep. 

=  inseparable. 

trans. 

=  transitive. 

intrans. 

=  intransitive. 

V.  tr. 

=  transitive  verb. 

irr. 

=  irregular. 

w. 

=  with. 

lit. 

=  literally. 

wk.  V. 

=  weak  verb.  * 

n. 

=  noun. 

+ 

=  of  common  origin  with, 

nom. 

—  nominative. 

or  cognate. 

I.,  II.  .  .  .  denote  classes  of  strong  nouns  or  verbs. 
In  the  Vck:!Abulary  separable  and  strong  verbs  are  marked  i 
str,  respectively  ;  inseparable  and  weak  verbs  are  not  marked. 


9.  and 


FIEST    SEEIES. 


Exercise  I. 


38,  42,  44,  45 — 103,  110,  Present  Indicative  of  loBen,  ^altn^ 
fein — {The  first  sentence  of  each  of  the  following  para- 
graphs :  178,  180,  189,  198). 

1.  The  father  praises  the  son.    2.  The  brother  has  a  house. 

3.  The  bath  is  in  the  house.  4.  The  strength  of  the  sons  is 
great.  5.  Have  you  a  trade  ?  6.  The  angels  perform  miracles. 
7.  The  days  are  short.  8.  Is  the  thread  long  or  short  ?  9. 
Where  is  the  gardener's  spade  ?  10.  The  gardener  has  the 
spade. 

Remark.— Most  of  the  nouns  in  these  Exercises  will  be  easily  found  in  the  §§  above 
referred  to. 

1.  Father  +  ber  ^odtx.  To  praise,  loBen*  Son  +  ber  ©o^n;  ace.  ben  ©o|n. 
2.  Brother ■^-'iitx  SBruber.  Tohme  +  ^^^tn.  House  +  ba^  ^au^;  gen.  -e^,  dat. 
-e,  acc.=:nom.    3.  Bath  +  ^a^  Bab.    To  he,  fein.    In,  in  (prep,  here  w.  dat.). 

4.  Strength,  bie  ^raft.  Of  the  sons,  ber  ©o^ne.  Great  +  grog.  5.  Trade, 
ba^  ©ewerbe.  6.  Angel +^tx  ©ngeU  Toperform=do  +  t|un  (3d  pers.  plur. 
the  same).  Miracle,  ba^  2Bunber.  7.  Bay  +  ber  Slag.  Short,  furj.  8. 
Thread, htx  ^ahtn.  Long  +  lan^*  Or  +  ober.  9.  Where?  roo^.  Gardener  + 
ber  ©artner.  Spade  +  ber  ©paten.  10.  Sentences  9  and  10  suggest  an  easy 
method  of  introducing  conversation  in  connection  with  these  Exercises. 

Exercise  II. 

43,  46 — 103,  110,  Preterite  Indicative  of  loBeit,  l!:jCiltn,  fein — 
(117—275,  2,  101,  102). 

1.  The  grain  was  on  the  floor.  2.  The  daughter  loved 
the  father  more  than  the  mother.      3.  The  little  child  was 


8  GERMAN  EXERCISES  IN  GRAMMAR.  [I.  Series. 

playing  with  the  little  dog.  4.  The  knight  presented  a  set 
of  jewelry  to  the  daughter.  5,  On  the  rock  [there]  was  a 
well.  6.  I  had  a  thought.  7.  The  floor  rests  on  the  beams. 
8.  The  father  and  the  brother-in-law  rested  in  peace. 

1.  Grain,  \>(X^  ©etreibe.  On,  auf  (prep,  here  w.  dat.).  Floor,  ber  Soben. 
2.  Daughter  +  bte  2:od)tcr.  To  love  +  Uekn  (inflected  like  lob  en).  More  + 
mc^r,  TMn,  al^.  Mother  +  bie  9Kutter.  3.  Little  child,  ba^  ^inbc^en.  To 
play,  fpielen  (inflected  like  loben).  The  German  has  but  one  form  for  the 
English  simple,  emphatic,  and  progressive  forms  ;  hence,  was  playing  = 
fpielte.  Little  dog,  ba^  ^itnbc^cn.  With,  mtt  (prep.  w.  dat.).  4.  Knight^  ber 
IRitter.  To  present,  fc^enfen  (inflected  like  loben).  Set  of  jewelry,  ba^  ®e»* 
f^meibe.  5.  Rock,  ber  %t\\txi*  Well,  n.,  ber  33rmmen.  6.  Thought,  n.,  +  ber 
©ebanfe.  7.  To  rest,  ru§en  (inflected  like  loben).  Beam,  ber  S3alfe.  8. 
Brother 4n-laiJ0,  ber  (Sc^maaer.    Peace^  ber  ^riebe* 

Exercise  III, 
49,  50—101,  102—109,  112--265,  1—350. 

Remaek.— It  is  not  intended  that  the  rules  on  the  Declension  of  Nouns,  as  pre- 
sented in  the  Grammar,  should  be  committed  to  memory.  The  student,  by  carefully 
perusing  them,  in  connection  with  the  written  exercises,  will  learn  to  observe  closely 
the  various  forms ;  and,  in  the  future,  he  should  learn,  as  far  as  possible,  the  Nam. 
SiJig.,  Gen.  Sing.,  and  Nbm.  Plur.  of  each  noun,  as  all  the  other  cases  can  be  given 
when  these  are  known. 

1.  The  dog  has  caught  a  badger.  2.  My  friend  has  seen 
two  hawks.  3.  The  youth  has  been  in  (the)  prison.  4.  We 
have  made  many  attempts.  5.  A  year  has  twelve  months,  a 
month  has  thirty  days.  6.  What  have  you  heard  ?  7.  I 
have  not  heard  a  sound.  8.  The  kings  on  the  thrones  are 
not  free  from  tribulations.  9.  (The)  salmons  are  larger 
than  (the)  herrings.  10.  The  smith  can  carry  the  anvil 
with  one  hand. 

1.  Dog,  ber  ^unb.  To  catch,  fangeit,  str.  v.  (pr.  pts.,  fanciett,  fteng,  gefangen). 
Badger,  ber  2)a(^^.  2.  My  +  metn  (declined  like  the  indefinite  article 
eln,  see  38)     Friend  -f  ber  greunb.     To  see  +  fe^en,  str.  v.  (pr.  pts.,  fe^en, 


I.  Series.  ]  GERMA2!f   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  9 

fa^,  gefcl^en).  Two  +  %xoiu  Hawk  +  ber  ^aMc^t.  3.  Youth  (young  man)  + 
ber  Sitngling.  To  he,  fein,  ivar,  gemefen*  The  compound  tenses  of  [ein  are 
formed  with  [eittf  not  with  l^akn  ;  hence,  I  have  been  =  tc^  Mn  getDcfen 
(see  266,  3).  Prison,  \>0i^  ©efangnif — in  bem  may  be  contracted  into  tm 
(see  40).  4.  To  Tnake  +  ntac^en*  mac^te,  gemad^t*  Many,  »tete.  Attempt,  ber 
S3crfuc^»  5.  Tisar  +  ba^  Sal^r*  r^re/'oe  +  jmolf,  if(9?i^^  +  ber  ^onat. 
Thirty  +  brct^ig.  Da^  +  ber  %<x%.  6.  TFAa^.?  +  2Ba^?  r<9  A^^r  +  pren, 
l^orte,  ge^ort*  7.  Bender  :  I  have  heard  no  sound.  No,  fcin  (declined  like 
ein)*  Sound,  ber  Saut,  8.  jS'tw.^  +  ber  ^onig*  On,  auf  (here  w.  dat.). 
Throne  +  ber  2;^ron,  Free  from  +  fret  i?on  (w.  dat.).  Tribulation,  bie  Xritb^ 
fat.  9.  Salmon,  ber  Cad)^.  Large,  larger,  largest,  0ro§,  grofer,  gro^t.  T^a/z,, 
als^.  Herring  +  ber  Bering  ♦  10.  /S?7ii^^  +  ber  <S(^mieb,  str.  II.  Ote/i  +  fann* 
To  carry,  tragen,  str.  v.  (pr.  pts.,  tragen,  trug,  getragen).  Anvil,  ber  S(mbo§« 
With,  mit  (w.  dat.).  One  +  ein  (declined  like  the  indefinite  article).  Hand 
+  bie  ^anb,  str.  III. 

Exercise  IV. 

52,  53 — 110,  Present    and  Preterite  Indicative  of  werten — 
(114,  116). 

1.  The  maid  will  kill  the  goose.  2.  The  cow  is  [being] 
killed.  3.  Kafts  are  made  out  of  the  trunks  of  (the)  trees. 
4.  You  will  hear  the  mice  in  the  night.  5.  The  guests  were 
at  the  ball  in  the  city.  6.  The  son's  betrothed  will  come  to- 
morrow. 7.  The  song  of  the  choir  was  heard  in  the  garden. 
8.  They  will  seek  excuses.  9.  Do  you  see  the  eagle  in  the  air  ? 
10.  The  fruit  of  the  tree  will  soon  be  ripe. 

1.  Maid  +  bie  SRagb.  To  kill  (of  animals),  fc^Iad^ten,  wk.  v.  Ooose  + 
bie  ®an^.  2.  Cow  -i-  bie  ^u^.  Note  that  is  killed  is  the  passive  voice.  3. 
Baft,  ba^  glo^.  To  make  +  mac^en,  wk.  v.  Out  of  i)on  (prep.  w.  dat.). 
Trunk,  ber  <Stamm.  Tree,  ber  23aum»  4.  To  hear  (see  Ex.  Ill,  6).  Mouse 
+  bie  SDZau^*  Mght  +  bie  5?a(^t.  3n,  here  with  the  dat.  5.  Guest  +  ber 
®a|l*  At,  here  auf  (w.  dat.).  Ball  +  ber  SBaK.  City,  bie  Stabt  Sn,  here  w. 
dat.  6.  Betrothed,  n.,bie  SSraut  (bride).  To  come  +  fommen,  str.  v.  (pr.  pts., 
fommen,  f am,  gefommen).  To-morrow  +  m^x<sixi,  7.  )8(?r^^  4- ber®efang.  Choir 
+  ber  (S^or,    Garden  +  ber  ©arten,  str.  I.    3n,  here  w.  dat.     8.  To  seek  -I- 


10  GERMAN   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  [I.  Sbbies. 

fuc^en,  wk.  v.  E^-cuse  (subterfuge),  bie  5lu^fluc^t,  9.  Do  you  see  f  (Bel}en 
©ie  ?  Eagle,  ber  5lar,  str.  II.  Air,  bte  Sitft.  3n,  here  w.  dat.  10.  Fruit 
+  bie  %x\x^i.    Soon,  balb*    Bipe  +  reif. 


Exercise  V. 

56  to  6S-^Eeview   101  to  103,   110,  114,  116,  350.— 103, 

Present  and  Preterite  Indicative  of  fingen* 

1.  The  men  turn  the  wheels.  2.  Do  you  believe  in  ghosts 
and  spectres  ?  3.  Our  mind  is  not  free  from  errors.  4.  He 
read  all  [the]  words  on  this  leaf.  5.  The  villain  did  not  listen 
to  the  words  of  his  friend.  6.  The  girls  wear  shawls  and 
ribbons.  7.  The  ties  of  (the)  blood  are  strong.  8.  The 
foxes  live  in  the  forest.  9.  The  scholars  write  with  pencils. 
10.  I  have  forgotten  the  word.  11.  We  found  the  leaves 
under  the  shrubs.     12.  His  friends  are  under  shelter. 

1.  Man  +  ber  3)?ann.  To  turn,  bre^en,  bre^te,  gebre^t.  Wheel,  ba^  0lab.  2. 
To  believe,  %\<LuUn,  glauMe,  geglaubt.  In,  here  an  (w.  ace).  Ghost  +  ber  ®ei|i* 
^^c^r^,  ba^  ©efpenfl.  3.  Oz^r+itnfer.  Jfm<?,  ber  ®eift.  Free  from,  ^qg^k, 
III.,  8.  Error  +  ber  Srrtum.  4.  To  read,  lefen,  la$,  gelefen.  All,  plur.,  + 
aKe.  Word  +  ba^  2Bort.  On,  auf,  here  w.  dat.  Leaf,  bda  SBlatt.  5.  Villain, 
ber  23Dfen)t(^t.  To  listen  to,  ^oren  auf  (w.  ace.)  ;  did  not  listen  (see  Ex.  II.,  3). 
His,  fein  (declined  like  ein).  Friend,  see  Ex.  III.,  2.  6.  6^i>^,  ba^  5)?abd^en 
(46,  1) ;  notice  that  in  German  all  diminutives  are  of  the  neut&r  gender, 
no  matter  what  they  signify  (161,  3).  To  wear,  tragen,  trug,  (^etragen.  Shawl, 
ba^  %u^.  RibUn,  ba^  ^anb.  7.  Tie,  \)(i^  33anb.  Blood  +  ba^  «8Iut,  gen.  -e^. 
Strong,  flarf.  8.  i^i^ic  +  ber  f^ud)^,  gen.  -es3,  plur.  i^u^fe.  To  live  +  leben/ 
lebte,  gelebt.  Forest,  ber  SBalb.  9.  Scholar  ^+  ber  Sd^iiler  (46, 1).  2(9  ^nY^, 
[ci^reikn,  fc^rteb,  gefc^rieben.  PencU,  ber  S3leifltft  (ba^  33Iei,  lead ;  ber  8ttft, 
"  small  pointed  object " ;  see  164).  With,  ntit  (w.  dat.).  10.  To  fm^get  + 
ijergeffen,  yerga^f  ^ergeffen.  11.  To  find  +  ftnben,  fanb,  gefunben  (inflected  like 
fingeHf  fang,  gefungen;  see,  however,  104,  118,  121  first  sentence).  Shrub, 
ber  <Bixau^.  Under  +  unter,  here  w.  dat.  12.  Under  shelter  =  unter  Dad^ 
Uttb  %a^  (ba^  T)a^,  roof ;  bae  %ad),  compartment). 


I.  Series.]  GEEMAi^   EXEECI8ES   IN   GRAMMAE.  11 

Exercise  VI. 

61,  ^2—119— Eevietv  116,  350. 

1.  The  messengers  were  sent  to  the  prince.  2.  The  stu- 
dents sent  a  present  to  the  poet.  3.  The  finches  sing  beauti- 
fully. 4.  The  democrats  hate  monarchs,  kings,  princes, 
counts  ;  they  honor  the  peasants.  5.  The  architects  have 
built  a  house  for  the  Hungarian.  6.  The  lights  were  burn- 
ing. 7.  The  astronomer  thinks  of  the  stars.  8.  The  fellow 
brought  a  bear  out  of  the  woods.  9.  Not  all  kings  are  heroes. 
10.  (The)  Men  believe  in  God. 

1.  Messenger,  ber  S3ote.  To  send+\tnhm,  fanbte,  j^efanbt.  To,  when  denot- 
ing motion  toward  a  person,  is  usually  translated  by  ju,  w.  dat.  Prince, 
ber  Siirjl,  +  ber  ^nnj.  2.  Student  +  ber  (Stube'ttt.  Present,  n.,  ha^  ®e[d)enf 
(50,  4).  Poet  +  ber  ^ot't  (62,  3),  or  ber  2)ic^ter  (46,  1).  3.  Finch  +  ber 
^inf.  2o  sing  +  jtngen,  fang,  Qcfungen.  Beautifully,  fc^on.  4.  Democrat  + 
ber  ^emofra't.  To  hate  +  ^affen,  '^agte,  9e:^aft»  monarch  +  ber  3)lona'rc^. 
JSTm^r  (see  Ex.  III.,  8).  Count,  ber  (^raf.  T(9  honor,  e^ren,  e^^rte,  gee^^rt.  Peasant y 
ber  S3auer.  5.  Architect  -f  ber  5lr(^ite'ct.  J<9  6m7d,  ^auett,  ^aute,  gebaut.  i^(?r 
+  fur  (w.  ace).  Hungarian  +  ber  Uttgar.  6.  Z^^^^  +  \iCk^  !Bt(^t  (58).  2^(? 
hum  +  Brennen,  Brannte,  ge^rannt  (see  Ex.  II.,  3).  7.  Astronomer  +  ber 
5Iflrono'm.  To  think  of  +  benfen  an  (w.  ace.) ;  benfen,  bad^te,  gebac^t.  Star  + 
ber  8tern,  str.  II.  8.  Fellow,  ber  S3urf(^e.  To  bring  '+  hingen,  &rad)te/  geha^t. 
Bear  +  ber  S3ar.  Out  of  +  an5  (w.  dat.).  Wooos  =  forest,  ber  S©alb.  9. 
Not  +  ni(^t.  ^ero,  ber  ^elb.  10,  Man  :=  liuman  being,  +  ber  2)?enf(i^.  To 
believe  in  (see  Ex.  V.,  2).     Ood  +  ®ott. 

Exercise  VII. 
63,  64—104,  105—230,  1,  2. 

1.  Thou  hast  eyes  and  seest  not;  and  thou  hast  ears  and 
hearest  not.  2.  You  are  losing  your  slippers.  3.  Do  you 
know  the  doctors  and  professors  of  the  university  ?  4.  Mary 
was  the  mother  of  Jesus  Christ.    5.  I  feel  a  pain  in  my  heart. 


12  GEEMAN   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  [I.  Series. 

6.  Go,  and  take  this  atlas  to  tlie  director  of  the  seminary.  7. 
My  cousin's  neighbor  has  written  dramas.  8.  Canst  thou  find 
the  minerals  ?  9.  Tell  me  the  cases  of  the  singular  and  plural. 
10.  The  insect  has  lost  its  sting. 

1.  Eye  +  ba^  Sluge*  Seest  +  fte^ft  (128, 1).  Ear  +  ba^  D^r.  To  hear  (see 
Ex.  III.,  6).  2.  To  lose  +  »erlieren,  verier,  ijerloren.  Slipper,  ber  ^Janto'jfeL 
3.  Do  you  know  ?  ^ennen  (Bie  ?  Doctor ,  ber  ©oftor.  Professor,  ber  9)rofeffor. 
University^  bie  Unwerfttd't  (43,  1).  4  Mary,  9J?ari'a.  Jesus  Christ,  3efu^ 
(S^rijlu^.  5.  To  feel  +  fu^Iettf  fii^ltef  gefiip.  Pain,  ber  (Sc^merj*  Jlf?/,  see 
154.  Heart  +  bas3  ^erj.  6.  7^(?  ^<?  +  ge^en,  Qteng,  gegangen.  Ja^6,  liere  to 
be  rendered  hj  ^ringen*  Atlas + ber  5ltla^ .  Director,  ber  ^Director .  Seminary 
+  ba^  (Bemina'r.  7.  Cousin,  ber  SDetter.  Neighbor  +  ber  S'Jac^bar.  T(?  «/?n^e 
(seeEx.  v.,  9).  i>r«ma  +  ba^  ^rama,  8.  Ca?^  (see  135,  3).  i^^;^(^  (see  Ex. 
v.,  11).  Mineral  +  ba^  SJ^inera'L  9.  To  ^e^^,  fagen,  fagte,  gefagt.  if(g  +  mtr 
(dat.  of  i^).  Case  +  berSafu^.  Singular  +  ber  ©tngular  (gen.  -^).  Plural 
+  ber  plural  (gen.  -^).  10.  Insect  +  ba^  Snfe^ct.  Its,  here  feinen,  /S^w^,  ber 
etad^el. 

Exercise  VIII. 
65,  67—106,  107,  108,  3. 

1.  The  Prussians  have  a  king,  the  Americans  a  president. 
2.  Many  Englishmen  wander  through  Switzerland.  3.  The 
students  have  sung  a  song  on  the  Ehine.  4.  Alsace  used  to 
belong  to  France.  5.  The  palace  of  (the)  emperor  Charles 
stood  in  Aix-la-Chapelle.  6.  The  generals  of  the  great 
Frederic  were  heroes.  7.  Anna's  sister  has  leffc  England. 
8.  The  Fichtel-mountains  are  covered  with  snow.  9.  The 
pupils  have  read  of  the  two  Marys.  10.  Goethe's  works  are 
instructive. 

1.  Prussian  +  ber  ^reufe.  American  +  ber  Slmerifa'ner,  President  + 
ber  ^rcijibe'nt  (62,  3).  2.  Many  (see  Ex.  III.,  4).  Englishman  +  ber 
Snglanber.  To  wander  +  njanbern,  tt)anberte,  gewanbcrt.  Through  +  burc^  (w. 
ace).  Switzerland  +  bie  (Scfiweij  (see  147,  2).  3.  Student  (see  Ex.  VI.,  2). 
C  (see  Ex.  VI.,  3).    Song,  ba^  IHeb.     On,  auf  (here  w.  dat.).    Rhine  + 


I.  Series.]  GERMAN"   EXERCISES   1^   GRAMMAR.  13 

ber  fH^dn — (^Tn  bent  9f?^ettt  would  mean  on  the  bank  of  the  Rh.).  4.  Alsace 
+  ba^  (£lfa^.  To  helong  to,  ge^oren  ju  (w.  dat.) ;  used  to  belong,  here  to  be 
rendered  by  tbe  (present)  perfect  of  ge^oreit*  France  +  i^ranfreic^*  5. 
Palace  +  ber  ^oXcL'\t*  Emperor,  ber  ^aifer*  Charles  +  Raxh  To  stand  + 
fle^en,  jlanb,  gej^anben*  Aix-la-Chapelle  +  5lad)en.  6.  Oeneral  +  ber  ®enera'L 
Of  the  great  Frederic  (see  65,  3,  last  example).  Hero  (see  Ex.  VI.,  9). 
7.  Anna  +  ^nna*  Sister +  WB6^xoi^tx.  To  leave,  i)erlaffen,  ijerlieg,  ijerlaffcn. 
England  +  (£nglanb,  8.  Fichtel-mountains,  ^o,^  i^tc^telgeMrge*  I^o  c<???er, 
kbec!en,  Bebeifte,  bebecft.  With,  mit  (w.  dat.).  Snow  +  ber  8d)nee*  9.  Pupil, 
ber  ©(fitter  (46,  1).  To  read  (see  Ex.  V.,  4).  Of  ijon  (w.  dat.).  Two  +  itotu 
Mary  +  3)Zari'e»  10.  TF'(?7'/fc  +  ba^  Serf,  str.  II.  Instructive,  bek^renb 
(originally  tlie  pres.  part,  of  Bele^rettf  to  instruct,  see  274,  6). 

Remark.— In  the  following  pages,  any  new  nouns  that  are  given  will  be  followed 
by  the  terminations  of  the  genitive  singular  and  of  the  nominative  plural^  if  there  is 
any  ;  if  the  vowel  is  modified  it  will  be  indicated  thus,  -. 

The  other  cases  may  then  be  found  as  follows  : 

1.  Singular  :  Dative  =  nominative,  but  1)  when  the  genitive  ends  in  e§,  the  e  is  usu- 
ally retained  in  the  dat, ;  2)  when  the  gen.  ends  in  en,  the  same  ending  is  found  in  the 
dative. 

Accusative  =  nominative,  but  when  the  genitive  ends  in  en,  the  same  ending  is 
found  in  the  accusative.  The  words  under  46,  4,  end  in  en  in  the  dative  and  accusa- 
tive. 

Rule  :  Feminine  nouns  do  not  vary  in  the  singular. 

2.  Plural  :   Genitive  and  accusative  =  nominative  ;  the  dative  always  ends  in  n. 


Exercise  IX. 

69,  70,  (71),  72. 

1.  Good  men  are  loved.  2.  Dear  friend  !  write  me  often. 
3.  Cold  water  is  wholesome.  4.  The  young  poet  has  made  a 
very  fine  poem.  5.  I  shall  never  forget  the  wise  words  of  my 
dear  mother.  6.  William  has  written  his  little  letter  with  a 
poor  pencil.  7.  A  red  cherry  is  a  nice  fruit.  8.  In  the  cities 
on  the  Rhine  [there]  live  many  pretty  girls.  9.  The  good  old 
man  has  lost  his  only  son.  10.  The  late  president  Lincoln 
was  a  noble  man. 

1.  Man  (see  Ex.  VI.,  10).  To  love  +  Ilekn  (see  116).  2.  Bear  +  teuer, 
lieb.   Friend -hhix  %xmn\>,  e^,  e.    Write,  fc^rcibcn,  str.  v.  (122, 2).    Me  +  mtr 


14  GEIlMA]!f   EXERCISES  IN  GRAMMAR.  [I.  Series. 

(dat.  of  id)).  Often  +  oft.  3.  Gold  +  fait.  Water  +  ba^  2Baffer,  ^,  - 
Wholesome y  gefunb.  4.  To^mg  +  iung.  P<?6^  (see  Ex.  VI.,  2).  To  make 
+  mac^en,  wk.  v.  Very  fine,  ^errli^.  Poem,  bai3  ®ebic^t,  e^,  e.  5.  Never 
+  nie.  i^^^r^^e^  +  ^ergeffeit,  i^erga^,  ^ergeffen.  Wise  +  tceife.  TFbr^Z  +  ba^  Sort, 
e^,  e.  6.  William  +  SBil^elm.  JKs,  fetn  (declined  like  ein).  Little,  flein. 
Letter,  ber  33rief,  e^,  e.  With,  mit  (w.  dat.).  P^c>r =bad,  fc^Ied)t.  Pencil  (see 
Ex.  v.,  9).  Bear  in  mind  350.  7.  Red  +  rot.  Cherry  +  bie  ^trl'd)c. 
7iwj«,  ^v&\^*  Fruit  +  bie  ^5ru(^t,  -,  -c.  8.  City,  bie  ©tabt,  -,  -e.  On  +  an, 
here  w.  dat.  To  live  +  leben^  wk.  v.  Pretty,  Mbfd^,  fc^on.  Oirl,  ba^  9)?db^ 
(^en,  ^,  -.  9.  O^cZ  +  alt.  Note  that  two  or  more  adjectives,  limiting 
one  noun,  follow  the  same  declension.  To  lose  +  'OixXmiU,  str.  v.  (124,  2). 
HiSy  [ein  (declined  like  ein).  Only,  adj.,  +  einjig.  Son  +  ber  (Sot)n,  e^,  -e. 
10.  Late  =  deceased,  sjcrjlorkn.  President  (see  Ex.  VIII.,  1).  Nohle, 
ebel. 

Exercise  X. 

73,  (74),  75—108,  1.— 222  {five  lines). 

1.  Henry  is  younger  than  Edward.  2.  I  have  bidden  the 
elder  brother  go.  3.  The  well  has  the  clearest  water.  4.  He 
has  sent  for  the  finest  dress.  5.  We  have  never  had  (a)  greater 
fun.  6.  The  flower  is  lovely.  7.  This  tree  is  the  highest.  8. 
Is  the  doctor  richer  than  the  merchant  ?  9.  I  have  heard  it 
said.  10.  The  straight  way  is  the  shortest.  11.  Mary  has  the 
sweetest  voice  of  the  three  sisters.  12.  We  shall  come  next 
week. 

1.  Henry  ■¥  ^tm'x^*  Young -{- lyxno^^  Than,aU*  Edward  +  (Ehmxh.  2. 
To  bid,  ^ei^en,  ^ie§,  ge^ei^en.  G^^^  +  ge^en,  gieng,  gegangen.  O^^  +  alt.  3.  Well, 
n.  (see  Ex.  II. ,  5).  Clear  +  Har.  Water  +  ba^  SBaffer,  ^,  -.  4.  To  send 
for =let  {or  cause  to)  come,  !ommen  laffen.  Fine,  fc^on.  Dress,  n.,  ba^  ^leib, 
e^,  er.  5.  Never  +  nie.  Had  {p.  p.),9e^aM.  Great  +  grop.  Fun,  ber  8pa§, 
e^,  ©paffe.  6.  Flower,  bie  33Iume,  -,  n.  Lovely,  aGerliebfl.  7.  Tree  (see  Ex. 
IV.,  3).  High  +  ^o^.  8.  i)oc^<?7'(see  Ex.  VII.,  3).  i?^c^  +  rei(^.  Merchant, 
ber  ^aufmann.  9.  See  290,  3,  b,  and  108, 1.  10.  Straight,  gerabe.  Way 
+  ber  2Beg,  e^,  e.  Short  +  (?)!urj.  11.  Sweet  +  fii§.  Voice,  bie  ©timme, 
-,  em  Of,  ijon  (w.  dat.).  Three  +  brei  (see  226,  first  line).  Sister  +  bie 
ed^mefler,  -,  n.    12.  Next  +  nad^j^.     TTeeA;  +  bie  Sod^e,  -,  n. 


I.SBRIBS.]  GERMAN  EXERCISES  IN   GRAMMAR.  16 

Exercise  XI. 

76,  1,  2— (134)— 135, 1. 

1.  Thou  knowest  more  than  I.  2.  To-day  is  better  than  to- 
morrow. 3.  (The)  most  people  are  poor.  4.  Nobody  knew 
it.  5.  The  man  at  the  left  provoked  him.  6.  To-morrow  [I 
will  write]  more.  7.  The  inner  circle  is  smaller  than  the 
outer  [one].  8.  The  middle  position  is  the  safest.  9.  The 
poor  [man]  has  fewer  cares  than  the  rich  [man].  10.  He  was 
seen  no  more. 

1.  To  know,  n)t|Ten  (135, 1).  2,  To-day  +  ^eute.  To-morrow  +  mo r gen. 
3.  People  =  men  +  9J?enf(^en,  £eute.  Poor,  arm.  4.  Nohody,  nicmanb.  It  + 
e^.  5.  Render:  The  left  man;  left,  Itn!.  To  prowke,  here  ^c^en.  wk.  v. 
Him,  i()n.  7.  Inner -{-xrmix^  Gircle,  ber  ^xti^,  t^,  e.  Bmall^  flein.  Outer 
+  du^er.  8.  Middle  +  mtttler.  Position,  bie  ©tcttutt^f  -,  ctt.  xSia/^,  jtc^er.  9. 
See  220,  first  two  lines.  Fewer,  njeniger  (see  263,  first  four  lines).  Care, 
tie  ^orfte,  -;  n.    10.  No  more,  nic^t  me^r.    To  see  +  fel^eu/  fa^,  gefe^en. 

Exercise  XII. 

77,  78—136,  2,  3. 

1.  Canst  thou  count  in  German  ?  2.  I  can  count  from  one 
to  one  hundred.  3.  You  may  take  three  apples.  4.  How 
many  millions  has  Rothschild  ?  5.  I  do  not  know  (it).  6. 
We  write  now  eighteen  hundred  eighty-four.  7.  There  (=it) 
was  one  who  took  it  to  heart.  8.  You  can  choose  one  of  two 
things.  9.  The  boy  knows  the  multiplication-table.  10. 
Thirty  times  twenty  is  six  hundred. 

1.  To  count,  i^ci^len,  wk.  v.  In  Oerman,  auf  !^cutf(^.  2.  From  —  to, 
ijon  —  Bid.  3.  Render  may  by  biirfen  or  !onnctt.  To  take,  ne'^mcn,  m\)m, 
genommen.  Apple  -i-  ber  5lpfcl,  ^,  -.  4.  How  many,  xok  »tel,  »telc  (see 
263,  first  four  lines).  Million  +  bie  S^ittio'n,  -,  n.  5.  To  know,  wiffen 
(136, 1).    It,  ed  (see  Ex.  III.,  3).    6.  To  write,  fd^reiben,  \^x\il,  gefi^rieBem 


16  GERMAN   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  [I.  Series. 

Now,  \t%i.  7.  Render :  who  took  it  to  heart,  by  to  whom  it  went  to  the  heart 
(see  78).  "'S  tt)ar  =  e^  n)ar.  8.  To  choose,  n^ci^kn,  wk.  v.  One  of  two 
things  (see  78).  9.  Boy,  ber  ^na^e,  %  n.  To  know,  in  the  sense  of  to  have 
mastered  =  Unmn*  Multiplication-table,  ha^  Sinmalein^.  10.  Times  (de- 
noting repetition),  mal  (175). 


Exercise  XIII. 

80,  81,  82  {first  hvo  lines)— 1S5,  4,  5. 

1.  He  may  be  the  fourth.  2.  YoU'  shall  have  the  twentieth 
part  of  the  whole  sum.  3.  They  shall  not  tease  you.  4.  The 
banker  sent  us  one  thousand  dollars.    5.  She  cannot  see  thee. 

6.  Thou  canst  not  see  her.  7.  Charles  may  be  in  his  twenty- 
fifth  year.  8.  We  are  not  permitted  to  speak  with  them.  9. 
Give  him  the  pencil.     10.  You  can  give  me  the  first  piece. 

1.  May  +  niagr  3d  sing,  of  mogeu.  2.  Party  ber  %dl,  t^,  e.  Whole,  gattj. 
Sum  +  bie  (Bumme,  -,  n.  3.  To  tease,  qucilen.  You,  8te,  cuc^.  4.  Banker 
+  ber  33anfter  (pronounce  ier  =  Eng.  ia).  To  send  +  fenbeti  (119,  1). 
Dollar  +  ber  ^oKa'r,  plur.  -^  (silent).  5.  To  see  +  fe^en^  fa:^,  gefe^cn.  6. 
In  this  sentence,  and  the  preceding  one,  place  nid)t  after  the  pronouns. 

7.  Charles  +  ^arL  In  his,  render  in  the  by  in  bem,  or  im  (154).  8.  2o 
be  permitted,  biirfen.  To  speak  +  fprec^en^  fprac^,  gefproc^en.  With,  mit  (w. 
dat.).  9.  To  give  +  geben  ;  imperative,  gie^,  geku  Sie,  ge^t.  Pencil  (see 
Ex.  v.,  9).     10.  Piece,  ta^  <BtM,  t^,  e. 


Exercise  XIV, 

83  to  86—135,  6,  7—138. 

1.  lam  ^lad  to  see  you.  2.  He  is  afraid  of  ghosts.  3.  The 
brothers  and  sisters  love  one  another.  4.  We  will  not  quarrel. 
5.  You  must  not  be  surprised.  6.  The  student  must  not  be 
afraid  of  work.  7.  Give  me  my  shawl.  8.  I  have  given  it  to 
thy  niece.    9.    Your  house  is  new;   mine  is  old.     10.    His 


I.  Series.]  GEEMAK   EXERCISES   12^   GRAMMAR.  17 

father  and  mine  are  cousins.     11.  I  have  seen  it  with  my  own 
eyes.    12.   She  has  lost  her  money. 

1.  To  he  glad  =  rejoice,  ftc^  freuctt*  2.  To  be  afraid  of,  flc^  fur(|ten  ijor 
(w.  dat.).  Ghost  (see  Ex.  V.,  2).  3.  Brothers  and  sisters,  bie  ®ef(^tvtjler. 
One  another  +  einanber  (preceded  by  the  reciprocal  pronoun  ;  here  ft(^)»  4. 
To  quarrely  \\^  j^anfen  (wk.  v.).  The  reflexive  pronoun,  in  this  case,  is,  of 
course,  Htt^.  5.  To  be  surprised,  fi(|  n)itnbern  (wk.  v.).  Bear  in  mind  that 
the  reflexive  pronoun  must  correspond  with  the  subject ;  thus,  we  may 
use  in  this  sentence  :  ©u  —  bid),  or  <Sie  —  ftc^,  or  i^r  —  eu(^.  6.  Student 
(see  Ex.  VI.,  2).  To  be  afraid  of  fid)  fi^euen  ^or  (w.  dat.),  ft^  fiirc^ten  ijor 
(w.  dat.).  Work,  bie  Arbeit,  -,  en.  7.  Shawl,  bae  Stu^,  c^,  -er.  8.  It,  here, 
of  course,  e^,  since  S^uc^  is  neuter.  Niece  +  bie  SSlx&^it,  -,  n.  9.  New  + 
neu.  Mine,  here  +  ba^  meintge,  since  ^au^  is  neuter.  Old  +  alt*  10. 
Cousin  (see  Ex.  VII.,  7).  11.  Own,  adj.,  +  eigen  (dat.  plur.  eigenen).  Eye 
(Ex.  VII.,  1).     12.  To  lose  (see  Ex.  VII.,  2).    Mmey,  \iOi^  ®elb,  e^,  ex. 

Exercise  XV. 

88,  90,  91—136,  1,  2,  3. 

1.  This  astronomer  is  ^ery  famous.  2.  1  cannot  walk  in 
these  shoes.  3.  Are  you  going  this  way  or  that  way  ?  4. 
The  roDf  of  this  house  is  steeper  than  that  of  the  church.  5. 
My  uncle  lives  in  that  city.  6.  Those  trees  stand  before  his 
door.  7.  What  is  your  friend  doing?  8.  Such  beautiful 
flowers  are  rare.  9.  I  cannot  forget  such  an  insult.  10.  My 
sister  and  I  are  using  the  same  inkstand. 

1.  Astronomer  (see  Ex.  VI.,  7).  Very,  fe:^r.  Famous,  I6crfi^mt.  2. 
To  walk,  go,  ge^en*  In,  here  w.  dat.  Shoe  +  ber  (Sd)u:^,  e^,  c.  3. 
Way  +  ber  Seg,  c^,  e.  This  (that)  way,  ace.  4  Roof  ba*^  Dac^,  e^,  -er. 
Steep,  fleil.  Church  +  bie  ^ird^e,  -,  n.  5.  Uncle  +  ber  Dnfel,  d,  -.  To 
live  =  reside,  njo^nen  (wk.  v.).  City,  bie  ©tabt,  -,  -e.  6.  Tree,  ber  93aum, 
e^,  -e.  Before,  i)or,  here  w.  dat.  Boor  +  bie  %1)m,  -,  en*  7.  What  ?  + 
SSa^  ?  8.  Flower,  bie  SBIume,  -,  n.  Rare,  felten.  9.  Insult,  bie  33eleibigung» 
-,  en.  10.  Sister  +  bie  <B^)XOi^tx,  -,  n.  To  use,  gebrauc^en  (wk.  v.).  Injc- 
stand,  ba^  2;intenfap,  -foffeig,  -faffcr* 


18  GEEMAN^   EXEECISES   IK   GRAMMAR.  [I.  Series. 

Exercise  XVI. 
92,  93—137—341,  344  {first  four  lines), 

L  Who  is  this  boy  ?  2.  Whose  pen  is  this  ?  3.  To  whom 
shall  I  give  the  jlowers  ?  4.  What  a  tumult  along  the  streets  ! 
5.  What  mountains,  what  deserts  do  still  separate  us  ?  6.  The 
letter  which  I  have  copied  is  very  short.  7.  Whoever  does 
not  understand  a  language  cannot  speak  it.  8.  Nobody  has 
ever  conquered  without  fighting.  9.  We  will  write  down  all 
the  words  which  you  have  learned.  10.  Send  him  to  prison, 
no  matter  what  he  says. 

1.  Boy,  ber  ^nabe,  w,  n.  2.  Pen,  bie  %i^tx,  -,  n.  3.  Shall  +  foU.  To 
give  +  gebcn,  str.  v.  4.  Tumult  +  ha^  ©etiimmel,  ^,  -.  Along  the  streets, 
(Stra^ett  auf  (poet.) ;  bie  —  ^inauf  or  entlang  (prose).  5.  Mountain,  ber  S3erg, 
e^,  e.  Desert,  bie  2Bit|le,  -,  n.  To  separate,  trennettr  wk.  v.  Still,  nod^.  6. 
Letter,  ber  33riefr  e^,  e.  To  copy,  abfc^reiben  (see  Ex.  XII.,  6).  Very,  fe^r. 
Short -{-lux^.  7.  Whoever,  mx.  To  understand, 'otx^t^tn  {137,136,  2).  It, 
here  fte,  since  (Sprad^e  is  feminine.  To  speak  +  fpred^en,  fprac^,  gefpro(^en. 
8.  Nobody,  fetner.  Ever,  \t,  nod^.  To  conquer,  fiegen,  wk.  v.  Without 
fighting,  render :  that  has  not  fought.  To  fight,  jlreiten,  flritt,  gejlritten  (see 
93, 1).  9.  To  write  down,  auffd^reikn  (see  137).  Word  +  bas^  2Bort,  e^,  -er 
(see  58),  To  learn  +  lemen,  wk.  v.  10.  To  send  (see  119,  1).  Prison, 
\>a^  ©efdngniff  \\t^,  ffe.  To,  here  \xC^  (contracted  from  in  ba^).  No  matter, 
etc.  (see  93,  4). 

Exercise  XVII. 

94  to  100. 

1.  The  one  is  going,  the  other  is  coming.  2.  Some  ladies 
are  dancing  in  the  other  room.  3.  Nobody  is  born  (as)  a 
master.  4.  Everybody  ought  to  know  what  is  best  for  him. 
5.  Have  you  seen  anybody  in  the  garden  ?  6.  People  say  that 
you  are  studying  too  much.  7.  They  do  not  believe  him.  8. 
It  is  better  to  do  something  than  nothing  at  all.     9.  Thou 


1.  SiSBiEs.]  GEKMAiq"   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  19 

must  have  a  little  patience.  10.  There  were  many  stones  and 
little  bread.  11.  All  Germany  lay  in  shame  and  woe.  12. 
The  whole  of  Germany  shall  be  our  fatherland. 

1.  See  Ex.  II.,  3.  2.  Lady,  tie  ^ame,  -,  n.  To  dance  +  tanjett,  wk.  v. 
Room,  ba^  Btmmer,  ^,  -.  3.  To  he  horn  +  geboren  t»erben  (see  95).  4. 
Ought  to  TcnoWy  foUte  njiffen.  For  +  fur  (w.  ace).  Best  +  am  beften.  5. 
Anyhody,  iemanb.  Garden  +  ber  ©arten,  ^,  -.  6.  People  say  =  one  says, 
man  fagt.  T7iat,  conj.,  ba^  (bear  in  n)ind  344).  To  study  +  jlubi'eren, 
wk.  V.  (see  108,  4).  7.  They  =  one,  man  (see  98).  8.  Somethingy  etroas^* 
Nothing  at  all,  gar  nic^t<3.  9.  Patience,  bie  ©ebulb.  10.  There  were,  t^ 
gab,  or,  in  the  inverted  order,  gab  i^f  and  with  elision,  gab''<3  (see  100). 
Stone  +  ber  <Stetn,  e^,  e.  Bread  +  \)0.^  S3  rot,  e^,  c  or  -c»  11.  To  lie,  lay, 
lain,  +  Ucgen,  lag,  gelegen.  Germany,  2)eutf(^lanb.  Shame,  bie  (3(^ma(^. 
TF<?e,  ber  ©c^merj  (see  100  and  63,  1).  12.  The  whole  ofG.  =  all  Germany 
(see  100).     Fatherland  +  ba^  SJaterlanb. 

Exercise  XVIII. 

Remark. — The  following  three  Exercises  are  intended  to  make  the  student  ac- 
quainted with  the  various  changes  of  the  strong  verbs,  as  presented  in  paragraphs 
120-133  of  the  Grammar.  The  mastery  of  these  verbs  will  be  most  easily  and  con- 
veniently obtained  in  connection  with  the  reading  and  future  grammar  lessons. 

The  figures  accompanying  the  verbs  refer  to  the  classes  and  divisions  in  the  Gram- 
mar, pp.  38-4:5. 

120  to   123 — The  nouns  occurring  in  this  exercise   will  he 
found  hy  turning  hach  to  Ex.  1-5. 

1.  The  dog  has  bitten  (I.,  1)  my  brother.  2.  We  suffered 
(I.,  1)  much  while  we  were  not  under  shelter.  3.  The  king 
rode  (I.,  1)  through  the  city.  4.  (The)  Night  will  yield  (I.,  1) 
to  (the)  day.  5.  The  villain  stole  into  the  daughter's  roomc 
6.  The  eagle  has  torn  the  mouse.  7.  Our  guests  have  fought, 
bravely.  8.  The  maid  is  cutting  (L,  1)  the  fruit.  9.  The 
youth  threw  (I.,  1)  the  salmon  into  the  water.  10.  The  man 
screamed  (I.,  2)  like  a  child. 

3.  Whi^e,  wci^renb  (conj.,  requires  the  verb  to  stand  at  tlie  end  of  the 
sentence  [344]).    3.  Through  +  burc^  (w.  ace).     5.  To  steal  —  sneak, 


20  GERMA:Nr  EXERCISES   IX   GRAMMAR.  [I.  Series. 

fd^leid^en  (I.,  1).  6.  To  tear  (to  pieces),  serreipen,  jern§,  s^erriffcn  (I.,  1).  7. 
To  fight  =  strive,  ftreiten  (I.,  1).  9.  Into,  in  (here  w.  ace).  10.  Child,  iia^ 
^xnt,  e^,  er. 

Exercise  XIX. 

124  to  128 — For  the  nouns  in  this  exercise  see  Ex,  1-10. 

1.  The  leaves  are  sprouting  (II.,  1)  on  the  trees.  2.  The 
Ehine  was  flowing  (II.,  1)"  gently.  3.  Charles  has  jumped 
(III.,  1)  into  the  cold  water.  4.  The  scholars  found  (III.,  1) 
this  mineral  in  the  Fichtel-moun tains.  5.  Your  general  has 
won  (III.,  2)  the  battle.  6.  Who  will  help  (III,  3)  me  ?  7. 
Eecommend  (IV.)  me  to  the  doctor,  8.  Do  not  speak  (IV.) 
so  loud.  9.  The  cows  have  eaten  (V.,  1)  the  flowers.  10. 
The  king  was  sitting  (V.,  2)  on  the  throne. 

1.  Oti,  auf  (w.  dat.).  2.  Gently,  xvi):)XQ,,  3.  ©pringen,  ^o  ji^m^^,  takes  fein 
for  its  auxiliary  (266,  1).  5.  Battle,  bie  ©c^lad^t,  -,  en.  6.  -^elfen  +  to 
help,  governs  the  dative.     8.  Loud  +  laut.     /S?  +  fo. 

Exercise  XX. 

129  to  133 — For  the  nouns  in  this  exercise  see  Ex,  1-15. 

1.  My  niece  has  driven  (VI.)  home.  2.  They  have  not  in- 
vited (VI.)  us.  3.  The  student  caught  (VII.,'l)  a  fish.  4. 
Will  you  hold  (VIL,  1)  my  shawl  ?  5.  Why  did  the  people 
run  (VII.,  2)  out  of  the  church  ?  6.  Your  teacher  has  called 
(VII.,  2)  you.  7.  The  smith  lifted  (VIII.)  the  anvil  with  one 
hand.  8.  The  snow  melts  (§  133)  in  the  sun.  9.  Has  the 
maid  milked  (§  133)  the  cows?  10.  The  peasants  have 
thrashed  (VIII.)  the  grain. 

1.  To  drvoe  =  ride  in  a  carriage,  fa^ren  (VI.).  Home,  m^  |)aufe,  4-  ^e:m. 
2.  To  invite,  ctnlaben,  lub  ein,  eingelaben  (VI.).  3.  Fish,  n.,  +  ber  ^tfd^,  e^,  e. 
5.  People,  ^te  s^enfc^en.  Out  of,  avi^,  w.  dat.  6.  Teacher,  ber  ^i^xzx,  ^,  -. 
Q.  S'l.ow  ^   ber  <S(|nee,  ^»    Bun  ^-  bie  (Sonne^ 


SECOND    SERIES. 


Exercise  I. 

Remark.— In  the  Exercises  of  the  Second  Series  frequent  reference  is  made  to  Ger- 
man illustrations  in  the  Grammar,  which  may  serve  the  student  as  an  aid  in  translat- 
ing the  English  sentences  into  German.  In  such  cases  the  paragraph  containing  such 
German  illustrations  is  given  in  (  ),  at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  or  referred  to  in  the 
foot-notes. 

Words  not  explained  in  the  foot-notes  will  be  found  in  the  Vocabulary,  at  the  end 
of  the  volume. 

Syntax  of  the  Article— IZ^,  141  to  146. 

1.  Humboldt  and  Goethe  lived  to  an  advanced  age,  but 
Schiller  died  comparatively  young  (141).  2.  Gold  is  more 
precious  than  silver  (141).  3.  Will  you  give  me  a  pound  of 
tea  ?  4.  The  thread  of  thought  is  broken  (142).  5.  The 
mixed  throng  of  the  ancient  gods  has  vanished  (142).  6. 
Students  often  lead  a  jolly  life.  7.  I  am  ah^ady  losing  reason 
and  sense  (143).  8.  Xo  earthly  meat  or  drink  suffices  the 
fool  (143).  9.  You  may  write  with  a  style,  chisel,  or  quill 
(143).  10.  We  saw  the  great-grandmother,  grandmother, 
mother,  and  child  together  in  the  close  room  (143).  11. 
AVhat  is  ^that  for  ?  (267,  5).  12.  Of  what  use  is  all  joy  and 
sorrow!  (144),  13.  What  a  busy  company  you  are!  (144). 
14.  Of  what  nationality  is  he?  (144).  15.  Philoktetes,  who 
is  all  nature,  leads  Keoptolemus  also  back  to  nature  (145). 
16.  Faust  was  called  Magister,  yea.  Doctor  (145). 

1.  Render  limd  to  by  erre^eit/  fol.  by  ace,  to  attain,  +  reach.  Ad- 
vanced, here  ^oc^;  see  71.  last  line.     3  and  4.  For  the  construction,  see 


22  GERMAN   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  [II.  Series. 

350.  5.  Mixed,  here  bunt.  6.  To  lead  a  jolly  life,  in  (Bau^  unh  SBrau^ 
libtn.  7.  See  Series  I.,  Ex.  II.,  3.  8.  Translate  :  Not  earthly  is  the 
fool's  meat  or  drink.  9.  May,  use  fonnen/  135,  3.  10.  In,  in,  here  w. 
dat.  11.  Use  the  verb  foUen  ;  see  267,  5.  12.  Translate  :  of  what  use  is, 
by  »a^  fott,  etc.  13.  What  a,  weldb  ein.  14.  Render:  of  what  nationality, 
by  n)a^  fiir  ein  £anb(3mann.  15.  For  the  word-order,  see  344.  Lead,  here 
bringen  (119,  2).  16.  To  he  called,  ^eipen,  str.  VIL,  2.  SSJlagi'jler,  !Do'ctor, 
the  same  as  in  English. 


Exercise  II. 

Syntax  of  the  Article  continued — 147  to  150—110,  115. 

1.  The  Guelfs  lost  the  throne  of  Hanover.  2.  The  bust 
of  Schiller  is  more  beautiful  than  the  bust  of  Socrates.  3.  If 
you  had  been  to  Henry,  what  Henry  was  to  you,  you  would 
now  be  the  best  [of]  friends  (147,  1).  4.  He  allows  himself 
to  be  called  Wallenstein  (147,  1  ;  201).  5.  This  evening 
they  play  Minna  von  Barnhelm ;  Mr.  S.  plays  [the  part  of] 
Tellheim.     6.  The  [statue  of]  Hercules  is  damaged  (147,  1). 

7.  Moldavia  and  Wallachia  are  the  Danubian  Principalities. 

8.  The  source  of  the  Danube  is  in  the  Black-Forest.  -9. 
^'Winter  is  a  man  of  honor"  (147,  4).  10.  In  January  we 
move  into  Kaiser-street  (147,  4).  11.  "  My  tears  gush  forth ; 
the  earth  takes  back  her  child"  (148).  12.  Even  the  Mame- 
luke exhibits  courage ;  but  obedience  is  the  ornament  of  the 
Christian  (149).  13.  The  message  I  hear,  but  faith  is  want- 
ing (me)  (149).  14.  Blood  has  been  shed.  15.  Let  [them] 
reach  me  a  cup  of  the  best  wine  in  [a  vessel  of]  pure  gold 
(150). 

1.  Q-uelf,  pi.  Guelfs  (a  princely  family),  ber  SBelf,  en,  en.  Hanover, 
^anno'^er.  2.  The  gen.  of  (Sc^iUer  is  (Sd)iIIer$,  used  without  the  article ; 
while  ©cerate^,  which  has  the  gen.  like  the  nom.,  should  be  preceded  by 
the  article  (see  147, 1,  fourth  line).  3.  To  Henry  is  here  best  translated 
by  bcm  ^cinric^r  as|)einric^,  without  the  article,  would  be  ambiguous  (147. 1). 


II.  Series.]  GERMAK  EXERCISES  IN   GRAMMAR.  23 

4.  Allows,  translate  by  lajTen,  str.  VII.,  1.     To  be  called,  see  290,  3,  b. 

5.  This  evening,  use  the  ace.  They,  here  man;  see  341,  2,  and  343,  d. 
M.  V.  B.,  title  of  a  comedy  by  Leasing.  8.  To  be,  here  jtc^  kfinben,  str. 
III.,  1.  10.  Move^  when  meaning  to  change  one's  residence,  is  jte^en,  str. 
II.,  2;  see  341,  2,  and  343,  d.  11.  From  B.  Taylor's  translation  of 
Faust.  Say :  The  tear  gushes  forth,  the  eoHh  has  me  again.  13.  To  be 
wanting,  fe^len,  with  dat.  of  person.    14.  Has  been  shed  =  has  flowed. 


Exercise  III. 

Syntax  of  the  Article  continued — 151  to  158. 

1.  Why  are  the  people  running  through  the  streets?  (151). 
2.  The  cavalry  had  reached  the  river,  but  the  infantry  was 
far  behind  (151).  3.  "The  little  god  o'  the  world  sticks  to 
the  same  old  way"  (152).  4.  The  God  who  made  the  iron 
grow  created  no  slaves  (152).  5.  Their  language  was  full  of 
noble  sentiments.  6.  There  were  better  times.  7.  Old  Bar- 
barossa  keeps  himself  concealed  in  the  mountain.  8.  The 
cheeks  of  the  marble  [statue]  are  cold  (153).  9.  His  head 
aches  (154).  10.  They  have  taken  my  coat.  11.  She  gently 
touched  his  shoulder  (154).  12.  Eggs  cost  one  mark  a  dozen 
(156).  13.  We  see  each  other  four  times  a  year  (156).  14. 
You  have  been  the  teacher  and  friend  of  my  son.  15.  The 
uncle  and  the  god-father  of  the  child  were  [present]  at  the 
baptism  (158). 

2.  Far  behind,  njeit  ba^inten.  3.  Sticks,  etc..  =  remains  ever  of  the 
same  kind.  Same,  gleic^.  4.  Render  made  by  (iejj  (from  lajTen).  For  the 
order,  see  341,  3,  and  344.  5.  Full  of  +  »olI,  followed  by  gen.  (182). 
6.  Tliere  was,  there  were,  ed  gab,  followed  by  ace.  (236,  4).  7.  Barba- 
rossa  +  SRotbart,  surname  of  Emperor  Frederic  I.  (1152-1190).  Himself, 
jt(^.  Concealed,  ijerborgen.  Sn,  here  w.  dat.  9.  Render :  the  head  aches 
to  him.     11.  Similar  to  the  preceding  sentence.    15.  At,  bet,  w.  dat. 


24  GERMAIN   EXERCISES   12^   GRAMMAR.  [U.  Series. 

Exercise  IV. 

Syntax  of  the  Gender— 159  to  163. 

Remaek.— The  gender  of  nouns  has  to  be  learned  mainly  by  practice,  and  the  stu- 
dent should  therefore  endeavor  to  learn  with  each  German  noun  the  article  (ber,  t>ie,  or 
ta5)  belonging  to  it.  The  rules  in  the  Grammar  (169,  fF.)i  however,  will  be  of  great 
service ;  some  in  a  practical  way  ie,g.,  159,  161,  3,  164),  and  others,  because  they 
will  help  the  student  in  getting  an  insight  into  the  "genius  of  the  language." 

Wherever  a  large  number  of  examples  are  given,  as  in  these  paragraphs,  it  will 
hardly  repay  the  beginner  to  learn  the  meanings  of  all  of  them  ;  the  nouns  under  160 
might  be  mentioned,  with  their  meanings,  by  the  teacher,  letting  the  pupil  state  the 
gender  ;  while  the  gender  of  those  under  161  may  be  determined  by  their  form  alone, 
without  reference  to  their  meaning. 

1,  (The)  Queen  Louisa  was  a  noble  woman.  2.  The  Danube, 
the  Oder,  the  Elbe,  the  Weser,  and  the  Ehine  are  the  largest 
rivers  of  Germany.  3.  Many  prefer  beautiful  Spain  to  colder 
France.  4.  The  little  boy  lies  in  the  cradle.  5.  Thou  art  a 
heathen.  6.  The  witches  were  dancing  on  the  heath.  7.  The 
workman  has  placed  his  earnings  in  the  bank.  8.  The  merit 
of  the  minister  is  great.  9.  The  boy  has  again  lost  his  knife. 
10.  Bring  me  the  third  volume  of  Bancroft's  history.  11.  Is 
not  this  blue  ribbon  too  dark  ?  12.  The  knighfc  has  a  shield, 
the  merchant  a  sign-board.  13.  What  a  fool  you  are !  14. 
In  the  gate  [there]  is  a  small  door.  15.  The  marble  of 
Carrara  is  white.     16.  "Bands  of  robbers  move  about. ^' 

3.  Prefer,  ^te^en  —  vor  (see  137 ;  350).  4.  Little  lay,  \ia^  iTnabletn 
(lei,  3).  5.  Heathen,  see  162,  3  (435,  3),  where  also  some  of  the  nouns 
in  the  following  sentences  are  to  be  found.  7.  Placed,  here  gebrac^t. 
Earnings,  p.  59.  In,  here  auf,  w.  ace.  13.  What  a,  see  92,  2,  3.  For 
word-order,  see  3.  sentence. 

Exercise  V. 

Syntax  of  the  Gender  continued — 164  to  169. 

1.  Humility  and  geatleness  are  Christian  virtues ;  yet  pride 
is  also  found  even  among  Christians.  2.  On  Wednesday  the 
city  was  illuminated.     3.  What  is  your  answer?     4.  The  girl 


II.  Series.]  GERMAK    EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  25 

has  taken  leave ;  all  trace  of  her  is  lost.  5.  Hermann  has 
chosen  the  exiled  maiden  (166).  6.  The  angel  said  to  Mary: 
Blessed  [art]  thou  among  women  (166).  7.  The  young  lady, 
as  a  guest,  was  treated  with  especial  esteem.  8.  Mary  Stuart 
said  to  Elizabeth:  I  am  your  hing ;  and  the  Hungarian 
nobility  exclaimed :  We  will  die  for  our  king,  Maria  Theresa  ! 
9.  They  step  forward,  a  lady  here,  a  gentleman  there ;  they 
wish  to  dance.  10.  All  are  running,  saving,  rescuing  (168). 
11.  '^Then  may  delight  and  distress,  and  worry  and  success, 
alternately  follow,  as  best  they  can.''  12.  He  spoke  while 
leaving  the  room.  13.  The  bishop  was  preaching ;  all  list- 
ened in  silence,  each  returning  to  his  own  thoughts.  14. 
The  fair  one  descended  from  her  stately  castle.  1 5,  Bismarck 
has  accomplished  great  things  for  Germany. 

1.  Is  also  found,  translate  :  one  finds  also,  using  the  inverted  order 
(after  bennod)).  Among,  here  I)ei.  2.  On  Wednesday,  am  SiJiittJDod^*  The 
adverbial  phrase  introducing  the  sentence,  the  inverted  order  is  required 
(343,  d)  4.  AU  trace  of  her,  translate  :  her  trace.  6.  Blessed,  gekne^ 
beiet;  the  k-,  in  the  obsolete  verb  benebeien,  to  Uess,  is  of  course  no  prefix, 
but  the  first  syllable  of  the  Latin  5e?ie  (benedicere) ;  hence  the  prefix 
ge-  in  the  p.  p.  (see  168).    7.   Touiig  lady,  ba^  junge  2Kabd)en  (see  167). 

8.  Mary,  as  a  historical  name,  9)Zari'a;   in  other  cases    usually  SJJari'e. 

9.  8tep  forward  may  be  rendered  by  ^crijorfommen  (see  168 ;  137). 
11.  B.  T.'s  version  of  F.,  1756-8  (see  168).  To  follow  alternately,  ntU  ein^ 
anber  wec^feln  (lit.  to  exchange  with  each  other).  12.  While  leaving=wh.i\e 
(tnbem)  he  left.  Bear  in  mind  that  inbent  introduces  a  dependent  clause 
(341,  3,  and  344).  12  and  13.  See  168,  last  sentence.  In  silence,  fttIl-= 
fd^tvetgenb.  Uac7i  returning  =  while  each  returned.  To  his  own  thoughts 
=  into  himself.  14.  The  words  ^olbe  ©(^one  (gracious  fair  one)  in  169 
are  perhaps  best  rendered  hj  fair  one  alone.  15.  Great  things,  ®roge^ 
(169). 

Exercise  VI. 

Syntax  of  Singular  and  Plural — 170  to  177. 

1.  We  are  reading  the  history  of  Germany  under  the 
Henrys  and  Ottos.     2.  Will  your  grace  be  present   at  the 


26  GERMAIN  EXERCISES  IN   GRAMMAR.  [n.  Series. 

representation  of  "  Wallenstein  ^'  ?  3.  Most  of  the  gentry 
were  in  the  country.  4.  Here  is  a  list  of  the  conflagrations 
and  deaths  during  the  week.  5.  We  have  our  vacation  about 
Easter.  6.  Nearly  three  hundred  thousand  men  were  besieg- 
ing tbe  city  .(175).  7.  His  father  is  bent  with  old  age  ;  he 
is  over  ninety  years  old.  8.  Germany  lies  between  the  forty- 
seventh  and  fifty-fifth  degrees,  north  latitude.  9.  The  third 
and  fourth  verses  are  usually  omitted.  10.  Why  do  these 
pupils  hold  their  hands  before  their  mouths?  11.  Three 
hundred  miners  have  lost  their  lives.  12.  All  raised  their 
hands. 

1.  Under  +  wnter,  here  w.  dat.  ©te  |)etnrt(^e,  Me  Dttonen.  2.  Your 
grace,  (Euer  ®naben,  usually  abbreviated  into  (Sw.  ®naben.  To  he  'present 
at,  beiwo^nen  (sep.  comp.),  w.  dat.  In  regard  to  tbe  number  of  the  verb, 
see  311,  2.     3.  In  the  country,  auf  bem  I' ante  (as  opposed  to  in  the  city). 

7.  Bent  with  old  age,  ijor  '^Iter  o^iHdi  (175,  353).  8.  Between,  jn)ifc|en, 
here  w.  dat.  (see  177).  9.  See  177.  Are  omitted,  translate  are  not  sung 
(njerben,  etc.).  10.  Do  —  hold  =  hold  (see  I.  Series,  Ex.  II..  3).  See 
177,  343,  a. 

Exercise  VII. 

Syntax  of  the  Cases,  Nominative— -11%,  179,  270. 

1.  The  ages  of  the  past  are  to  us  a  book  [closed]  with  seven 
seals.  2.  To  stroll  with  you,  (Sir)  Doctor,  is  honor  and  profit 
[uuto  me].  3.  The  decrees  of  Heaven  are  the  best  for  man. 
4.  Henry  will  become  [a]  soldier.  5.  Everybody  imagines 
himself  to  be  a  wise  man ;  but  this  fancy  does  not  make  one 
wise.  6.  I  come  as  [a]  messenger  of  the  court.  7.  Which 
prince  is  called  the  ''  silent"  ?   And  which  the  **  conqueror"  ? 

8.  He  is  looked  upon  as  a  good-for-nothing  fellow.  9.  I  dare 
not  call  myself  a  favorite  of  Fortune.  10.  It  is  better  to  be 
called  a  thief  than  to  be  one. 

1  and  2.  See  178.  3-6.  See  179,  1.  3.  For  man,  fiir  ben  3)?enf{i^cn. 
4.  /  shall  become,  \^  tuerbe  tverben.    IwiU  become,  t(^  will  wcrben.    5.   Wise 


11.  SERras.]  GERMAN   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  27 

marly  to  be  rendered  by  the  adjective  used  substantively.  Translate :  does 
not  make  one  wise  =  makes  not  the  wise  [man]  (162,  3).  7.  I7ie  "  silent" 
ber  ©(^ttjeiger  (see  179,  2).  9  and  10.  To  call,  in  a  bad  sense,  may  be  ren- 
dered by  fc^elten,  str.  III.,  3.     To  be  one,  einer  ju  fein. 

Exercise  VIII. 

Syntax  of  the  Cases  continued,  Genitive — 180  to  183. 

1.  The  love  of  God  surpasses  all  understanding.  2.  The 
poets  speak  frequently  of  the  invisible  hand  of  Fate.  3. 
Leasing  admired  the  taste  of  the  ancient  artists.  4.  You  are 
a  dead  man !  5.  Humboldt  found  that  a  certain  height  of 
the  water  was  of  the  same  age  as  certain  rude  monuments  of 
human  industry.  6.  The  maiden  offered  them  the  best  of  all 
gifts,  the  most  beautiful  of  all  flowers.  7.  Five  [members]  of 
the  order  had  fallen  the  victims  of  their  teraerity.  8.  Three 
Prussians  fought  their  way  through  a  hundred  of  the  enemy. 
9.  I  will  show  you  something  beautiful.  10.  Does  not  this 
forged  paper  show  that  they  wish  to  pledge  us  to  no  good 
[purpose]  ?  11.  Are  you  not  tired  of  the  long  quarrel  ?  12. 
The  dead  are  freed  from  their  bodies.  13.  Our  horses  are 
impatient  for  the  stable. 

1.  Surpasses,  \\t  l^o^er  al^  (or  benn).  2.  Of,  ijott;  w.  dat.  Fate  +  baa 
%aium  (180,  4).  3.  The  use  of  the  possessive  pronoun,  as  in  the  last 
sentence,  180,  4,  is  not  to  be  imitated.  4.  A  dead  man,  in  this  phrase, 
bee  2;obea  (180,5).  5.  Height  of  the  water,  htx  SBalTerjlanb  (see  180,  5). 
The  same,  here  ein*  6.  Offer,  here  barMeten,  str.  II.,  2  (see  180,  7).  8. 
Fight  one's  way  through,  jt(^  bur(^fd)lac;en/  sep. ,  str.  VI.  Enemy,  use  the 
plural.  9.  Something  beautiful,  see  181,  (230).  10.  See  p.  66,  second 
line.    .^^0  good  (purpose),  ni^t^  ©ute^.     11-13.  See  181  and  183. 

Exercise  IX, 

Syntax  of  the  Cases  ;  Genitive  continued — 184  to  188. 

1.  Not  all  those  who  scoff  at  their  chains  are  free.  2. 
Eelease  me  from  a  proof  of  my  nobility.    3.  In  1848  many 


28  GERMAN   EXERCISES   IK   GRAMMAR.  [H.  Series. 

Germans  were  exiled.  4.  One  cannot  always  banish  gloomy 
thoughts.  5.  The  shepherd  pitied  the  old  nobleman.  6.  ''  A 
righteous  man  regardeth  the  life  of  his  beast."  7.  Early  in 
the  morning  the  birds  sing  the  most  sweetly.  8.  In  the  after- 
noon we  usually  go  out  for  a  walk.  9.  '^  Oh  the  Frenchman/' 
exclaims  Lessing,  ^^who  had  no  understanding  to  consider 
this,  and  no  heart  to  feel  this!"  10.  Oh  the  unfortunate 
prisoner,  to  whom  it  is  not  granted  to  breathe  the  fresh  air  ! 

2.  Belease  from,  entlajTen,  w.  gen.  (str.  VIL,  1).  Proof  of  nobility,  bie 
5l^nenprok.  3.  In  I84S  (see  226,  1).  4.  Banish,  here  jtd^  entfc^Iagen,  w. 
gen.  (str.  VI.  ;  see  185).  5.  Nobleman,  ber  ©belmanttf  or  (poetically)  ber 
^o'^e  ^err  (see  186;.  6.  ''Regardeth  the  life  of"  =  pities,  ftd^  erbarmeitr  w. 
gen.  7.  Early  in  the  morning,  see  187  (under  Time).  The  most  sweetly, 
see  300,  2.  Sweet,  here  fd)on.  8.  Go  out  for  a  i^a^A;,  fpajteren  ge^en;  ic^  gel^e 
f»ajteren,  etc.  (290,  2).     9  and  10.  See  188. 


Exercise  X. 

Syntax  of  the  Cases;  Dative — 189,  190. 

1.  Life's  unmixed  joy  has  fallen  to  the  share  of  no  mortal. 
2.  License,  exempt  from  punishment,  mocks  at  morals.  3. 
He  defends  them,  instead  of  accusing  them.  4.  One  can 
wrench  nothing  from  Nature  with  levers  and  screws.  5. 
Faust  cursed  everything  that  ensnares  the  soul  with  enticing 
visions.  6.  The  governor  bore  Tell  a  grudge.  7.  Shall  we 
yield  to  this  impulse  ?  8.  The  images  of  the  night  receded 
before  the  dawning  day.  9.  Do  not  defy  the  king's  com- 
mands. 10.  Take  care  whom  you  trust !  11.  The  minister 
gives  place  to  the  prince.  12.  The  mother  watched  the  play 
of  her  children. 

1.  Compare  with  these  sentences  the  German  examples  under  190, 
p.  69  (see  also  350).  Exempt  from  punishment,  jlraflo^.  5.  Enticing 
visions  (B.  T.),  Sod^  unb  ©aufelmer!.    6    To  hear  a  grudge,  groUen,  w.  dat. 


II.  Series.]  GEEMAN   EXERCISES  IK   GRAMMAR.  29 

10.  Proverb :  Zxam,  fd^aue  mm*  (The  verbs  are  in  the  imperative : 
Trust,  (but)  look  whom  (you  trust).  11.  Give  place  to,  m<^^i^n,  str.  VI., 
w.  dat. 

Exercise  XI. 

Syntax  of  the  Cases  ;  Dative  continued — 191  to  197 — Accusa- 
tive—!^^ to  202. 

1.  Hide  from  me  the  surging  crowd.  2.  Nobody  should 
forfeit  the  right  which  Nature  has  given  him.  3.  The  Turks 
have  their  swords  set  with  diamonds.  4.  It  was  hard  for  the 
emperor  in  hot  and  in  cold  weather.  5.  Fortune  favored  their 
wishes  in  the  beginning.  6.  The  black  suit  is  not  becoming 
to  him.  7.  Will  you  pay  me  now  ?  8.  I  have  paid  the  money 
to  your  father.  9.  How  often  do  we  imagine  life  [to  be]  other 
than  it  is!  10.  "You  see  a  man,  as  others  be"  (198).  11. 
Teach  me  to  do  what  is  right.  12.  You  must  send  for  the 
physician.  13.  He  will  give  you  the  lie.  14.  I  feel  as  though 
I  were  born  an  avenger  of  my  kinsman.  15.  The  ridicule  of 
the  foreigners  grieves  me  to  the  very  heart. 

2.  Should,  pret.  of  foUen,  135,  5.  GweUy  here  ttergonnt.  3.  Sword,  ber 
<Sabel,  ^,  -  ;  the  plural  ^BdhtU,  which  occurs  in  Lessing,  is  colloquial  and 
incorrect  (60).  The  ethical  dative,  bit,  in  this  example  (192),  has  very 
much  the  force  of  the  English  I  tell  you,  4.  It  is  hard  for,  e^  tDirb  fauer, 
w.  dat.  In,  here  bet.  5.  In  the  heginning,  anfang^.  6.  Becoming,  pafTenb 
(see  195).  7  and  8.  See  196.  9.  Imagine,  benfen  (see  197).  Other, 
translate  by  the  adv.  anber^.  13.  To  give  the  lie,  iGugen  jlrafen.  14.  Born 
+  geborcn  (see  127).  Translate  :  I  feel  myself  born  as  the  a.  of  my  k. 
15.  To  the  very  heart,  in  tiefffer  <Seele. 

Exercise  XII. 

Syntax  of  the  Cases  ;  Accusative  continued — 203  to  209. 

1.  Her  jealousy  proved  stronger  than  her  sympathy.  2. 
The  Saxons  sided  with  the  French.     3.  The  boy  told  you  a 


30  GERMAN   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  [11.  Sk 

lie  on  his  own  account.  4.  Your  honor  and  his  happiness  ar 
at  stake  (207).^  5.  I  shall  not  retreat  one  step.  6.  We  saw 
a  few  wanderers  travel  along  this  road  ;  but  the  main  body 
marched  down  the  upper  valley.  7.  The  messenger  may  be 
here  at  any  moment.  8.  Alexander  von  Humboldt  travelled 
for  years.  9.  The  general  made  [the  soldiers]  attend  prayers 
early  in  the  morning.  10.  You  must  leave  town  this  very 
night.  11.  Mceros,  with  a  dagger  concealed  under  his  gar- 
ment, stole  up  to  Dionysius,  the  tyrant.  12.  The  culprit 
knelt  upon  his  cloak,  his  neck  already  bared. 

1.  To  prove  stronger  than^  e^  gewinncn  iiber  (w.  ace).  2.  To  side  with, 
e^  fatten  mtt  (see  236,  6).  3.  I'o  tell  one  a  lie,  ©ittem  etwa^  ijorlittjen.  On 
one's  own  account,  auf  eigene  ^lec^nung.  5.  Not  —  one,  fetn.  6.  Travel,  when 
speaking  of  a  number  of  persons,  may  be  rendered  by  jie^en  (str.  II.,  2). 
Along  this  road  (see  207,  2.  Main  body,  ber  ^aufe.  7.  At  any  moment 
—  eyevj  moment  (ace).  8.  Travel,  here  retfen;  not,  as  in  6,  jie^en.  For 
years,  ^a^xt  lang.  9.  Made,  here  to  be  translated  by  laffeit.  To  attend 
prayers,  SSetflunbe  ^alten.  Early,  here  gleicl  (immediately).  10.  This  very 
night,  no(^  biefe  5'?ad)t.  11.  Moeros  =  5)^oro^,  a  proper  name.  With  a 
dagger,  etc.,  use  the  absolute  ace.  (see  209).  Stole  up  to,  pret.  of  f(i)lei(|en 
(str.  I.,  1),  followed  by  ju. 

Exercise  XIII. 

Syntax  of  the  Adjective — 210  to  212. 

1.  The  delivery  at  the  post-office  of  this  city  takes  place 
every  hour.  2.  He  has  fed  us  on  dainties  and  cooling  froth. 
3.  Doctor  Faust's  dog  was  a  very  droll  animal.  4.  The  marks- 
man fired  at  random.  5.  Three  Ehenish  feet  are  somewhat 
more  than  three  English  feet ;  and  ten  Flemish  pounds  are 
equal  to  ten  kilograms.  6.  The  Dutch  were  a  good-natured, 
orderly,  commercial  people  ;  they  enjoyed  the  luxurious  fruits 
of  their  hlessed  industry  and  were  watchful  over  the  laws, 
which  were  their  benefactors.      7.   The  government  of  the 


II.  Series.]  GEEMAK   EXERCISES   li^  GRAMMAR.  31 

grand-ducliy  of  Baden  is  very  liberal.  8.  Woe  to  you,  if  you 
touch  his  worthy  ancestral  lumber.  9.  They  talk  nothing 
but  nonsense. 

1.  Of  this  city,  to  be  rendered  by  the  adj.  ^teftg*  Takes  place  every 
hour  =  is  an  hourly  one  (see  211,  1).  2.  Oriy  here  mit  (after  na^ren). 
3.  Very  droll,  ^ubelncirrifd^;  "t)ubel  is  occasionally  used  as  an  intensive" 
(Ha.).  5.  Rhenish  feet,  etc  (see  p.  75,  second  line).  Somewhat  more, 
etwa^  me§r  (see  175).     7.   The  government  of  the  g.-d.  of  B.  (see  212,  3). 

8.  Ancestral  lumber  ;  this  is  B.  T.'s  translation  of  ^au^rat,  in  the  sense 
of  old  furniture.     9.  Nothing  'but,  lauter  (indeclinable). 

Exercise  XIV. 

Syntax  of  the  Adjective  continued — 213  to  217. 

1.  One  fine  day  the  cage  was  empty.  2.  The  Egyptian 
pyramids  have  been  called  [the]  silent  keepers  of  lifeless 
treasures.  3.  Such  an  excellent  monarch,  as  (the)  Emperor 
William,  is  dear  to  his  people.  4.  In  the  army,  there  is  many 
an  ofi&cer  of  great  courage  and  bloody  fame.  5.  He  who  never 
ate  his  bread  in  sorrow  does  not  know  you,  ye  heavenly 
powers.  6.  I  salute  you,  noble  lords,  and  you,  fair  ladies  ! 
7.  You  lazy  fellows  are  now  kept  on  short  allowance.  8.  Since 
the  acquisition  of  the  two  large  houses  we  have  room  for  one 
hundred  guests.  9.  The  count  treated  us  to  good  white  wine. 
10.  [The]  following  pretty  song  is  by  Heine. 

1.  One  fine  day,  may  be  expressed  by  the  adverbial  genitive  (followed, 
of  course,  by  the  inverted  order).  2.  Have  been  called  =  one  has  called, 
etc.  3.  Su^h,  see  91,  3.  Bear  to  his  people,  M  t>em  S5olfc  Beliebt.  4.  ITiere 
is,  gieM  e^  (followed  by  the  ace;  see  205,  Rem.).  Many  a  +  mand^  cin» 
Great  =  high.  5.  He  who  =  whoever,  93,  3.  In  sorrow  =  with  tears. 
To  know,  fennen  (119).  6.  I  salute  you  =  be  saluted  {hj"]  me  (dat.).  Lord, 
tcr  ^err,  it/  en.  And  you,  fair  ladies,  repeat  the  p.  p.  gegrit^t  (=  saluted, 
you,  fair  ladies !).  7.  To  keep  on  s.  a.,  (Stnem  ben  33rotforb  '^o^cr  ^arigen  (see 
216,  2,  last  sentence),  lit.  to  hang  the  bread-basket  higher  for  any  one, 

9.  To  treat  to  +  traftieren  mit  (w.  dat.).  10.  By,  ijon*  Heine,  the  German 
lyric  poet. 


32  GERMAN   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  [H.  Series 

Exercise  XV. 

Syntax  of  the  Adjective  continued — 218  to  221. 

1.  My  desire  is  great,  but  my  power  is  weak.  2.  Your 
faith  will  save  you.  3.  Who  could  hate  this  kind  old  man? 
4.  If  I  am  fortunate  enough  to  get  possession  of  them,  I  shall 
send  them  to  you.  5.  The  soldiers  fought  hand  to  hand. 
6.  Her  life  was  full  of  sorrows  and  sickness.  7.  People  begin 
with  little  things  and  end  with  great  ones.  8.  Korners 
Sword-song  begins  with  the  words  :  "  Thou  sword  at  my 
left  [side]."  9.  Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together.  10.  She 
has  spoken  English  from  her  childhood.  11.  How  is  this  in 
French  ?  12.  High  officials  have  been  discharged.  13.  The 
new  servant  has  an  agreeable  appearance.  14.  He  translated 
the  verse  into  his  beloved  German  (220). 

3.  'Who  could  .  . .  ,  tt)er  fonnte  .  ♦  .  Hate  =  be  enemy  to,  fetnb  fetn  (w. 
dat.).  4.  See  219.  To  get  possession  of,  ^ab^aft  tverben  (w.  gen.),  5.  To 
fight  hand  to  hand^f^anh^trndn  tDerben.  6.  Full  of,  see  219, 1.  7.  People, 
man  (one).  Little  things,  great  ones,  to  be  rendered  by  the  adjective- 
substantive  in  the  singular  (see  220).  9.  Birds,  etc.  =  like  loves  like  = 
like  and  like  associate  gladly  (see  220).  10.  From  childhood,  i)on  flein  an, 
9cn  Sugenb  auf,  ijon  ^inb  auf»  11.  In,  auf.  12.  High  —  in  a  high  position, 
^0(|9e|iellt  (see  221,  4). 

Exercise  XVI. 

Syntax  of  Comparative  and  Superlative — 222  to  225 — (341 
to  345,  tlie  largest  type). 

1.  When  was  the  theatre  the  most  crowded  ? — When  Booth 
played  Richelieu.  2.  This  fact  points  to  a  highly  interesting 
natural  phenomenon.  3.  The  German  word  "Fiirst"  is 
originally  a  superlative,  and,  like  the  English  "first/'  signifies 
the  foremost.      4.    The   noun    '^Eltern'^  is  a  comparative. 


n.  Semes.]  GERMAN   EXERCISES  IX   GRAMMAR.  33 

5.  We  study  the  modern  languages.  6.  I  am  more  to  blame 
than  he.     7.  The  peasant  was  more  stupid  than  malicious. 

8.  The  larger  of  these  two  houses  belongs  to  my  parents. 

9.  The  mill  is  running.  10.  If  the  wind  is  blowing,  the  mill 
runs.  11.  Yesterday  the  mill  was  not  running,  because  the 
wind  did  not  blow  the  whole  day.  12.  If  I  were  not 
Alexander,  I  should  like  to  be  Diogenes. 

1.  When?  (interrogative  adv.)  +  tt>ann?  When  (subord.  conj.)  =  al^. 
2.  To  point  to,  beuten  auf  (w.  ace).  Natural  phenomenon,  ba^  9'^atur*' 
ereignti3,  -\\t^,  -ffe.  3.  Order  :  and  signifies,  like  the  E.  '*  first"  the  foremost. 
Like,  n)te.  6.  To  he  to  blame,  f^ulb  fein.  8.  Use  the  superlative  (225). 
Two,u^Q^ix\)i*  9.  7b  rwTi,  here  ge^en.  11.  The  whole  day,  ben  ganjen  3:ag. 
13.  I  should  like  to  be,  t(^  mijc^te  fein  (but  in  what  order  ?). 

Exercise  XVII. 

Syntax  of  the  JVumerals-'22Q  to  228— 79— (229,  three  lines). 

1.  The  testimony  of  two  witnesses  always  establishes  the 
truth.  2.  Goethe  was  born  on  August  28,  1749.  3.  What 
time  is  it  ?  It  is  a  quarter  past  five.  4.  We  will  meet  at  a 
quarter  of  six,  ten  minutes  before  the  train  leaves.  5.  There 
were  twelve  of  them,  when  they  arrived  (227).  6.  One  says 
jokingly:  Eleven  means  (the)  sin,  because  it  transgresses  the 
ten  commandments.  7.  It  belongs  to  [the  character  of]  a 
gi-eat  man,  both  to  treat  trifles  as  trifles,  and  important  mat- 
ters as  important  matters.  8.  Give  me  eight  yards  and  a  half 
of  this  cloth.    9.  This  package  weighs  two  pounds  and  a  half. 

10.  The  transatlantic  cable  was  laid  between  1860  and  1870. 

11.  My  friend  is  a  man  about  fifty  years  old.  12.  Bring  me  a 
bottle  of  the  wine  of  the  year  1852. 

1.  Testimony,  ber  ^m\),  ca>  (This  term  occurs  in  the  proverb  under 
236.)  Translate  always  by  the  adjective  all,  with  the  German  equivalent 
of  truth.  To  establish,  here  funb  t^un  (or  mad)en).  3.  What  time  is  it  f  2Btc 
Jotel  ijl  bic  Vi)^x  ?    4.  Before  (subord.  conj.),  e^e.     To  leave  (of  a  train,  etc.). 


34  GEKMAiq-   EXERCISES   11^    GRAMMAR.  [H.  Series. 

abfa^ren^  str.  VI.,  sep.  6.  Means  —  is,  i)l.  7.  Both  —  and,  beibe^,  see 
228, 1.  8.  Eight  and  a  half,  see  229  and  175.  9.  Two  and  a  half,  see 
229  and  175.  10.  Between  1860  and  1870,  in  ben  \i^mtx  Sa^ven.  11.  A 
man  about  fifty  years  old,  ein  ^iinfjiger.  12.  Wine  of  the  year  1852,  %^i* 
je^n^unbcrtjnjeiunbfunfjiger* 


Exercise  XVIII. 

Remark. — The  following  Exercises  on  the  pronouns  involve  mainly  what  is  printed 
In  the  largest  type  in  the  Grammar  ;  whenever  other  topics  are  involved,  special  atten- 
tion is  called  to  it  in  the  foot-notes. 

Exercises  to  he  written  in  connection  with  the  paragraphs  in  smaller  type  will  he 
found  in  the  Fourth  Series. 

Syntax  of  the  Fronou7is— 230,  1,  2,  233,  234,  (231). 

1.  "  Spirit  sublime,  thou  gay'st  me,  gav'st  me  all  for  which 
I  prayed."  2.  How  old  are  you,  if  I  may  ask?  3.  Please, 
tell  me  where  you  are  living  at  present.  4.  I  have  heard 
nothing  of  him.  5.  No  greeting  to  my  sweetheart !  I  won't 
consent  to  it.  6.  When  you  go  to  school,  be  well  prepared. 
7.  What  do  you  think  of  the  matter  ?  8.  I  do  not  think  much 
of  it.  9.  This  pen  is  poor ;  I  cannot  write  with  it.  10.  Do 
not  open  the  cage ;  there  is  a  bird  in  it.  11.  This  is  a  useful 
book  ;  you  can  learn  a  great  deal  from  it.  12.  Yonder  is  his 
house ;  an  oak-tree  stands  near  it. 

1.  For  which,  voamm  (lit.  wherefore).  2.  May,  barf;  use  <Bit  for  the 
subject.  3.  Translate  please  by  the  adverb  gefaHtgjl  (after  the  indirect 
object  itttr);  use  'Bit  for  the  subject.  4.  While  of  him  is  to  be  translated 
literally,  by  the  prep,  with  the  pers.  pron.,  to  it,  in  the  following-  sen- 
tence, of  it,  with  it,  etc,  in  8,  9,  and  ff.  examples,  should  be  rendered  by 
ba^on,  bamitf  etc.  (234).  5.  No  greeting  is  in  the  ace,  a  transitive  verb 
(such  as  brtngen)  being  understood.  I  won't  consent  to  it  =  I  won't  listen 
to  it,  t(^  Witt  ba^ott  md^tiS  ^oren.  B.  T.  has :  I'll  resent  it.  6.  When  = 
whenever  +  ttJenn  (subord.  conj.).  To,  in,  w.  ace.  Be  well  prepared  = 
have  yourself  well  prepared ;  use  i|r  for  the  subject.  7.  To  think  of, 
l^atten  »on  ;    use  bu  for  the  subject.     8.  Of  it  =  thereof.    9.  Poor,  here 


11.  Series.]  GEKMAi^   EXERCISES   11^   GRAMMAR.  35 

f(^le(^t»  With  it  =  therewith  (of  course  to  be  placed  before  the  infinitive  ; 
350).  10.  Do  not  open  —  open  not.  In  it  =  therein.  11.  This  +  bte^r 
or  ba^.    A  great  deal  =  much.    From  it  =  there  —  out.     12.  ]}iear,  bei. 

Exercise  XIX. 

Syntax  of  the  Pronouns  continued— 2S5,  236,  including  the 
small  type  under  4. 

1.  It  had  been  raining  and  freezing,  so  that  the  roads  were 
[very]  slippery ;  but  now  it  is  thawing.  2.  We  had  company 
yesterday ;  there  was  dancing,  singing,  and  playing.  3.  "  Now, 
whither  shall  we  go  ? ''  4.  Three  students  went  across  the 
Ehine.  5.  His  youthful  companion  walked  briskly  at  his 
side.  6.  There  are  wheels  that  are  made  of  paper.  7.  There 
were  many  ladies  who  did  not  dance.  8.  "  Hey,  there  we 
(they)  had  Westphalian  ham."  9.  He  is  afraid,  and  he 
repents  having  been  so  wicked.  10.  In  this  sense,  you  may 
venture  it.  11.  She  thinks  you  are  gone;  and  half  and  half 
you  are  so.     12.  He  wished  to  be  a  senator,  and  now  he  is  one. 

1.  It  had  been  raining  =  it  had  rained.  So  that,  fo  ha^*  The  roads 
are  slippery  may  be  rendered  by  the  imp.  verb  e^  glattetjl  (see  547,  1,  2). 
Notice  that  the  second  clause  is  dependent,  and  that  the  order  in  the 
third  clause  should  be  inverted,  on  account  of  now.  2.  There  was,  etc., 
to  be  rendered  by  the  passive  voice  with  the  imp.  subject  e^  (236,  2). 
3.  In  place  of  we  use  the  imp.  e^.  4.  Students,  here  33urf(^e.  Went, 
translated  by  jie^en  (str.  II.,  2).  Across,  iiber,  here  w.  ace.  5.  Youthful, 
here  blit^enb.  At  his  side,  i^m  jur  ©ette.  6.  There  are,  236,  4.  In  the 
relative  clause  the  verb  stands,  of  course,  at  the  end.  7.  Bid  not  dance, 
see  274,  6.  (What  is  said  of  the  Present  applies  to  the  Preterite  as 
vrell.)  8.  We  (they)  had  =  there  was.  9.  /  am  afraid,  c^  ijl  mir  bange. 
I  repent,  e^  reut  mid^.  Saving  been  .  .  .  =  that  he  has  been  ...  11.  You 
are,  use  the  subjunctive.  Gone  may  be  rendered  by  the  p.  p.  of  cntfliel^en» 
str.  II.,  2,  to  escape.    So,  see  236,  6.     12,  Translate  one  by  e^. 


36  GERMAN^   EXERCISES   IK   GRAMMAR.  II.  Series. 


Exercise  XX. 

Syntax  of  the  Pronouns  continued— 2S7,  238,  239  {including 
1  and  2),  240,  241. 

1.  The  humble  [person]  conquers  himself.  2.  Humility 
does  not  boast.  3.  He  is  taking  liberties.  4.  Hermann  and 
Dorothea  nodded  to  each  other  and  greeted  each  other  in  the 
mirror  of  the  water.  5.  The  king  and  the  emperor  made  war 
upon  each  other.  6.  Mine  and  thine  are  the  causes  of  all 
contention.  7.  Did  you  see  your  father  ?  8.  Whither  will 
your  presumption  lead  you  ?  9.  Behold  the  arrogance  of  the 
man  whom  you  have  led  through  your  bridal  room  to  the 
throne !    10.  You  have  done  your  duty;  I  shall  do  mine  (240). 

3.  To  take  liberties  =  to  permit  one's  self  liberties.  5.  To  make  war 
upon,  ^efe^beit;  befriegen^  w.  ace.     6.  Put  the  verb  in  tlie  singular  (239). 

7.  Tour  father,  S^r  ^err  ®ater  (polite).  Especial  attention  is  called  to  the 
caution  in  239,  2.  Sentences  8-10  may  each  be  given  in  three  different 
ways,  with  h\x,  ®ie,  i^r. 

Exercise  XXI. 

Syntax  of  the  Pronouns  continued — 244,  245  {including  1 ), 

246-248. 

1.  [Much]  as  I  yearn  to  see  you,  I  have  a  secret  horror  of 
that  man.  2.  Voltaire's  works  are  written  in  a  skeptical 
spirit ;  woe  to  him  who  does  not  read  them  with  a  skeptical 
spirit !  3.  The  voice  of  this  young  woman  is  much  admired. 
4.  William  and  Charles  do  not  agree  about  the  weather  ;  the 
latter  desires  it  dry,  the  former  damp.  5.  He  urges  the 
validity  of  this  paper,  6.  Is  that  your  neighbor  ?  7.  Mephis- 
topheles  said  to  Faust  :  That  is  the  way  to  deal  with  witches. 

8.  Who  else,  but  you  in  Vienna,  is  to  blame  for  that  ?    9.  The 


[II.  Series.  GERMAN^   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  37 

minstrel  is  silent  with  regard  to  that ;  politeness  compels  him 
to  be  so.  10.  According  to  this  you  are  right;  but  I  have  an 
entirely  different  reading.  11.  Those  who  have  got  their 
lessons  may  go  to  the  theatre.  12.  She  spent  the  alms  with 
the  same  fidelity  as  before ;  the  poor  enjoyed  them. 

1.  Ofy  t)or.  (For  the  attributive  adjective,  see  212,  1.)  2.  Notice  that 
are  written  denotes  a  state  or  condition,  not  action  ;  hence,  fein  (and  not 
tt)erben)  should  be  used  (273,  1  and  2).  3.  Young  woman,  basJ  junge 
f^rauenjimmer  (see  159,  1).  Is  admired ;  in  this  case  an  action  is  ex- 
pressed (=  people  admire),  and  not  a  state  or  condition  ;  hence,  the 
passive  voice  (werben,  not  fein)  is  required.  4.  Bo  not  agree  about,  jtttb 
nic^t  berfelkn  §{nft(^t  iiber  (w.  ace).  5.  To  urge  the  ^oalidity  of,  geltenb  madden 
(245).  8.  Buty  m.  For  that,  see  246.  9.  With  regard  to  that  =  of 
that.  To  he  so  =  to  be  that.  10.  To  be  right  +  rec^t  ^aktt.  11.  Those 
who,  see  247,     Got,  Qimad)U    Mag,  use  fonnen*     To,  in  (w.  ace). 


Exercise  XXII. 

Syntax  of  the  Pronouns  continued — 249  {including  1  and  2), 
250  to  253. 

1.  Nathan  was  generosity  itself.  2.  He  who  digs  a  pit  for 
others  falls  into  [it]  himself.  3.  Even  the  friends  did  not 
approve  of  the  union,  because  the  young  people  were  too 
unequal.  4.  Eefl.ection  tells  me  that  I  am  not  able  to  pursue 
this  course ;  benevolent  powers !  show  me  the  right  way ! 
5.  What  do  I  care  in  whose  forest  we  are  ?  6.  Who  has 
robbed  the  lioness  of  her  young?  7.  What  is  the  meaning  of 
your  speech  ?  8.  What  monstrous  deed  do  you  demand  from 
me  ?  9.  What  kind  of  paper  is  that  ^  10.  What  a  beautiful 
painting !  11.  See,  what  beautiful  cloth  I  have  bought  for 
you. 

1.  Use  the  article  before  generosity  (149,  page  54).  4.  Reflection,  use 
the  article.  To  be  able,  ijermogen  (compound  of  tnogen,  135,  4).  To  pursue 
a  course,  einen  SScg  verfolgen*    5.   What  do  I  care,  wa^  fiimmert  i^  mic^. 


38  GERMAN  EXERCISES  IN   GRAMMAR.  [U.  Series. 

6.  To  rob  one  of  something,  ©inem  et»a^  rauben,  or  (Sinen  einer  ®ac^e  berauben^ 
8.  Monstrous  deed,  ba^  Unge^eure*  11.  Cloth,  here  ber  ©tojf  (e^/  e).  i^(?r 
yow,  eitlier  fiir  bic^f  or  the  dat.  without  preposition. 


Exercise  XXIII. 

Syntax  of  the  Pronouns  continued — 255,  256  {including  ^), 
257  to  263. 

1.  A  person  who  puts  on  rouge  is  disgusting  to  me  (255). 
2.  He  who  will  not  listen  [to  advice]  must  suffer.  3.  A 
splendid  word  is  at  [your]  command  for  what  enters,  or  does 
not  enter,  the  human  brain.  4.  You  must  earn  [anew]  what 
you  have  inherited  from  your  ancestors,  in  order  [really]  to 
possess  it.  5.  Pitch  defileth.  6.  Whoever  wants  to  become 
a  master  must  practise  while  young.  7.  A  thing,  whose  design 
is  so  obvious,  cannot  be  called  accidental.  8.  Wallenstein 
speaks  of  moments  when  man  is  nearer  the  soul  of  the  world 
than  usual.  9.  There  was  a  time  when  the  land  of  the  Swiss 
was  not  free.  10.  Tell  me  something  else.  11.  He  earns  at 
least  something.  12.  I  have  bought  a  pound  of  cherries.  Do 
you  want  some?  13.  Did  he  say  anything?  14.  Many  are 
called,  but  few  are  chosen.     15.  I  have  much  to  tell  you. 

1.  To  jmt  on  rouge,  W  fc^nttnfen.  2.  He  icho  —  whoever  (93,  3). 
Translate  suffer  by  ful)lett»  3.  To  be  at  —  command,  ju  1)ien)len  fle^en 
(256).  Notice  that  breingebcn  (=  bareinge^en)  means  to  enter  it ;  hence,  if 
a  prepositional  phrase  is  used,  brein  must  be  omitted.  5.  Render  :  He 
who  touches  pitch  soils  himself.  To  touch,  angieifen;  str.  I.,  1.  6.  See 
256,  8.  Must  practise  =  practises.  WJtlle  young  —  early.  7.  A  thing— 
that  +  ba^  (257).  To  be  obvious,  in  bie  ^Tugen  leud^ten.  8.  When,  see  258. 
Man,  man.  8oul  of  the  world  (God\  bcr  SSeltoiei)!.  Usual  =  at  other 
times,  fonjl.  9.  There  is,  e5  oielu  (205).  When,  see  258.  10.  Sorns- 
thing  else,  etwa^  (ma^)  anber(e)^  (260).  11.  At  least  something,  ttjenigj^en^ 
etwa^,  or  bed)  tmmer  h?a^.  12.  Some,  referring  to  a  noun  mentioned, 
ml^tx,  t,  e^  (260).     15.  Use  1^<kUx[  with  the  infinitive  preceded  by  ju. 


II.  Semes.]  GERMA:N^   EXERCISES   II!^   GRAMMAR.  39 

Exercise  XXIV. 

Syntax  of  the  FerZ>— 264  to  266.    S^^yltn  and  ^tin. 

1.  The  groom  rode  up  and  down  [for]  an  hour.  2.  The 
pedestrian  has  been  in  the  city  ;  he  went  there  and  back  in 
one   hour.      3.    The   watch    went   once,    but   now   it   stops. 

4.  The  children  have  gone  to  school ;  school  has  commenced. 

5.  That  has  pleased  him  very  much.  6.  The  carpenter  fell 
from  the  roof ;  his  assistant  probably  fell  too.  7.  The  horse 
has  drawn  the  wagon  into  the  barn,  8.  The  cranes  have  gone 
south.  9.  We  moved  yesterday  (266).  10.  The  travellers 
have  not  yet  arrived.  11.  The  rope  broke,  and  the  light  went 
out.  12.  The  apprentice  fell  asleep  and  slept  [for]  three 
hours.  13.  If  the  fellow  had  not  drunk  so  much,  he  would 
not  have  fallen  into  the  lake  and  been  drowned.  14.  All  this 
has  happened  before.     15.  No  consolation  has  been  left  me. 

1.  The  compound  tenses  (perf.  or  pluperf.)  should  be  used  in  this  and 
the  following  sentences.  Up  and  dowrij  "^tn  unb  I)cr/  lit.  anf  unb  niebcr. 
2.  There  and  hack,  \}\\\  itnb  t)er,  or  ^in  unb  juriicf ♦  4  To  school,  in,  w.  ace.  and 
def.  art.  5.  Very  much,  fe^r.  6.  Prohably  fell  too,  to  be  expressed  by  the 
future  perfect  (279  ;  266).  8.  Have  gone,  perf.  tense  of  jte^en  (str.  II., 
2).  South  +  nad^  ©iiben  (266).  13.  If,  etc.,  tt>enn,  w.  plup.  subj.  To  he 
drowned,  ertrtnfen  (266,  2).  14.  Has  happened  hefore  =  has  already 
been  there  (266,  3).    15.  To  he  left  =  to  remain  (266,  3). 

Exercise  XXV. 

Syntax  of  the  Verb— 267,   1,   2,   3,  135.     ^bnnert— IDurfen— 

1.  He  conld  not  [do]  otherwise.  2.  They  might  draw  yon 
into  their  toils.  3.  Do  you  know  Italian  ?  4.  Do  you  know 
this  gentleman?     5.  Do  you  know  who  this  gentleman  is? 


40  GERMAN  EXERCISES   IK   GRAMMAR.  [II.  Series. 

6.  Then,    too,  you    may    show    yourself  without  restraint. 

7.  JSTobody  is  allowed  to  hunt  without  [a]  license.  8.  Posterity 
very  likely  will  hesitate  to  subscribe  to  this  judgment.  9.  The 
sighfc  of  the  works  of  God  gives  strength  to  the  angels,  though 
nobody  can  comprehend  them  (267,  3).  10.  You  may  keep 
the  goblet.     11.  Who  may  that  fellow  in  a  green  coat  be  ? 

12.  I  like  to  grant  her  whatever  is  consistent  with  my  duty. 

13.  I  should  not  like  to  have  him  hear  of  it.  14.  The  child 
is  not  fond  of  soup. 

2.  Mighty  pret.  subj.  of  fonnen.  To  draw  into  one's  toils,  in  fetn  ®artt 
jte^en*  3,  4,  5.  To  know,  when  practical  ability  is  implied  (such  as  to 
speak  a  language)  =  fonnen  ;  to  know,  in  the  sense  of  he  acquainted  with 
—  fennen  ;  to  know,  meaning  to  have  learned  hy  heart  =  njiffen.  Ex. :  3c^ 
fenne  bav  ®cb{d)t,  I  am  acquainted  with  the  poem  ;  t(^  mx^  ha^  ®»,  I  have 
memorized  the  poem  ;  id)  !ann  ha^  ®.,  I  can  recite  the  poem  (the  latter 
two  being,  in  this  case,  equivalent).  SBiffen  usually  takes  a  clause  or  its 
equivalent  for  its  object :  3($  tod^f  too  er  JDO^nt  ;  id)  n)et§  fein  |)au^  (know 
vrhere  it  is) ;  ic^  f  :nne  fein  |)aua  (am  acquainted  with  it,  can  tell  it).  6.  This 
is  a  free  version  of  the  example  under  267,  2,  1.  Without  restraint, 
fret*  7.  License  (to  hunt),  ber  Sagbfc^ein,  ^,  e,  8.  See  267,  2,  4.  11.  Fel- 
low in  a  green  coat,  ber  ©runrocf,  ^,  -e»  13.  To  hear  (?/(what  has  been 
said),  wieber  erfa^ren  (str.  VI.).  To  hxive  him  hear  of  it  =  that  he  should 
hear  of  it  (267,  3).     14.  To  lefond  of  =  to  ]ike,  moQtn. 


Exercise  XXVI. 

Syntax    of  the  Verb  continued  —  267,  4,  5,  6,  7.     ^Jlujfen  — 
©oKen — SCoHen — '^a^m. 

Special  attention  is  called  to  the  important  idiomatic  phrases  under  267,  6 

{small  type). 

1.  You  must  not  let  the  dog  run  into  the  street  without  a 
muzzle.  2.  No  sound  shall  strike  upon  my  ear  a  second 
time,  unless  ifc  should  convey  a  special  meaning.  3.  A  miller, 
who  never  thought  of  wandering,  must  be  a  poor  miller.  4.  A 
metre  of  this  velvet  is  to  cost  eight  thaler,     5.  The  treasure 


II.  Series.]  GEBMAI^   EXERCISES   11^^  GRAMMAR.  41 

of  the  Xibelungen  is  said  to  lie  [buried]  in  the  Ehine. 
6.  Should  you  see  him,  tell  him  we  could  not  wait  any 
longer.     7.    What    are   you  going  to    do  mth  the  dagger? 

8.  Jhe  prince  was   about  to  die  when  the    news  arrived. 

9.  The  witness  claims  to  have  seen  the  defendant.  10.  The 
witness  is  said  to  have  seen  the  defendant.  11.  He  claims  to 
have  deceived  me  for  a  good  purpose.  12.  The  poor  woman 
did  not  utter  a  complaint. 

1.  Bemark. — Of  two  infinitives  the  one  dependent  upon  the  other, 
stands  first,  hence :  laufen  laffen.  2.  Strike  upon  my  ear  =  resound, 
erfc^atten  (w.  dat.  of  pers.  pron.).  Meaning,  here  Sinn.  Convey,  here 
Ibegriinben.  3.  Wlio  never  thought  of  =  to  whom  .  .  .  never  occurred, 
etnfalten  (w.  dat.).  See  267, 4.  According  to  the  regular  order  ftel  would 
stand  last.  5.  JSfibelungen,  the  people,  or  family,  in  possession  of  the 
Nibelungen  hoard.  6.  We  could  not  wait  any  longer  =  we  had  (subj.) 
not  been  able  to  wait  [any]  longer  ;  see  the  remark  under  1,  in  this 
exercise.  7.  Are  you  going  to  do,  to  be  rendered  by  the  present  tense  of 
iDoHen.  8.  Was  about  to,  see  267,  6.  When,  al^.  9,  10.  (See  267,  5, 6.) 
11.  For  a  good  purpose,  ju  einem  guten  3tt)e(fe^  12.  Did  not  utter  =  let 
resound  no,  etc. 

Exercise  XXVII. 

Syntax  of  the  Verb  continued — 268  to  273.     Tlie  Passive. 

Special  attention  is  caMed  to  the  use  of  the  reflexive  in  272,  and  to  tTie 
examples  under  273,  2, 

1.  If  assistance  is  rendered  them,  they  can  carry  on  the 
business.  2.  All  were  happy ;  there  was  much  laughing  and 
singing.  3.  Yesterday  they  did  not  play.  4.  The  letter  was 
delivered  through  a  porter ;  it  was  read  by  the  whole  family 
(269).  6.  We  were  early  taught  to  respect  old  age.  6.  The 
girls  were  taught  dancing.  7.  Of  what  was  he  accused,  of 
theft  or  of  high-treason  ?  8.  The  poor  should  always  be 
remembered  (271).  9.  That  is  easily  said,  but  not  so  easily 
done.    10.  ^^Keleased  from  ice  are  brook  and  river."    11.  The 


42  germa:n^  exekcises  i:iir  gkammab.       [n.  series. 

basin  is  bordered  by  mountains.  12.  A  contrast  of  perfections 
and  imperfections  is  required  to  [produce]  the  ridiculous. 
13.  This  point  has  been  much  contested.  14.  Homer  was 
without  doubt  diligently  read  in  olden  times.  15.  The  spy 
was  without  ceremony  fastened  to  a  branch  and  hanged. 

1.  To  render  assistance  =  to  help  +  l^elfen,  str.  III.,  3  (w.  dat.).  2.  There 
was,  etc.,  to  be  expressed  by  the  passive.  3.  Use  the  passive  with  the 
subject  e^r  or,  placing  the  adverb  first,  withoat  subject.  5.  To  teach, 
It^nn  ;  use  the  passive  with  e^  for  subject  and  the  dat.  of  person.  (The 
construction  in  the  example  under  270,  1,  is  not  to  be  imitated.)  6.  T'o 
teach  something,  unterrid)ten  in  ctncr  Sac^e.  7.  Of  what,  gen.  of  toa^.  9.  Use 
lafTen.  See  272.  10.  See  273,  2.  Released,  l^efrett.  In  10  and  11  no 
action,  but  a  state  or  condition,  is  expressed.  14.  In  this  sentence  fein  or 
tperben  may  be  used,  with  scarcely  any  difference  of  meaning,  but  present 
usage  would  favor  n)arb.  Without  doubt,  unftretttg  ;  but  no  doubt,  o^ne 
Bweifel.  In  olden  times,  ijOT  Sitter^.  (In  other  instances,  the  substitution 
of  fein  for  werben  may  essentially  change  the  meaning  of  the  sentence, 
e,  g.,  bte  (Btabt  »>  n  r  b  e  ijerbrannt  =  people  were  burning  it,  it  was  on  fire ; 
bie  ©tabt  mar  »erbrannt  =  lay  in  ashes.)  15.  Without  ceremony,  o^ne 
tt>eiterei3.    To,  an,  w.  ace. 


Exercise  XXVIII. 

Syntax  of  the  Verb  continued — 274,  275.     Tenses. 

1.  How  bright  is  the  sun,  how  smiling  the  field !  2.  He 
that  goes  borrowing,  goes  sorrowing.  3.  They  imitate  the 
example  set  at  Linz  ;  the  armies  desert  him ;  they  curse  the 
memory  of  the  traitor.  4.  I  have  (already)  been  here  seven 
days.  5.  I  have  only  been  here  seven  days.  6.  Who  knows 
who  will  command  iis  to-morrow  ?  (274,  5.)  7.  He  does  no 
longer  rummage  in  empty  words.  8.  Our  friends  were  for- 
merly living  in  the  country,  but  at  present  they  are  working 
in  the  city.  9.  The  doctor  went  out  to  the  steward^s  and 
found  the  young  man  on  the  floor  among  Charlotte's  children ; 


11.  Series.]  GERMAJS"   EXEECISES  IK   GRAMMAE.  43 

some  of  them  were  crawling  over  him,  others  were  teasing 
him.     10.  That  was  a  bold  word  ! 

2.  Say :  To  borrow  makes  sorrows  (274,  2  ;  288).  3.  Set,  gegekn. 
Linz,  a  city  in  Austria.  The  example  set  at  Linz  ;  gegebeit,  being  used 
attributively,  must  precede  the  noun  and  be  declined ;  ju  )Btnj  depends 
upon  gegekn,  and  therefore  must  precede  it  (353).  Hence,  we  have  to 
render  tlie  phrase  ;  '*  The  at  Linz  given  example."  4  and  5.  See  274, 4. 
This  use  of  the  present  tense  is  one  to  which  most  students  find  it  diffi- 
cult to  accustom  themselves.  The  adverb  fc^on,  in  such  cases,  implies 
that  the  time  mentioned  seems  long^  while  the  adverb  erj^  conveys  the 
opposite  idea.  Analogous  to  this  use  of  the  present  tense  is  the  use  of 
the  preterite  (in  German)  for  the  pluperfect  (in  English) ;  e,  g.,  We  had 
already  been  there  three  days,  tuir  )[i?aren  fc^on  brei  Sra(]e  \)a,  7.  Exception- 
ally, the  English  emphatic  form  (with  do)  may  be  retained  in  German 
(see  274,  6).  8.  Were  living,  are  working,  see  274,  6.  In  the  cmmtryy 
auf  bem  :Banbe,  9.  Doctor,  physician,  ber  ^Irjt,  ber  X)oftor  (ber  SP^ebicu^)*  To 
crawl  over,  ^erumfra^^eln  auf^  here  with  dat. 

Exercise  XXIX. 

Syntax  of  the  Verb  continued — 276  to  279.     Tenses. 

1.  I  have  enjoyed  the  happiness  of  this  earth.  2.  Schiller 
has  written  a  history  of  the  Eevolt  of  the  United  Netherlands. 
3.  The  king  raised  his  camp  at  Schwedt  and  marched  toward 
Frankfurt  on  the  Oder,  when  Tilly  had  scarcely  commenced 
his  retreat.  4.  What  will  become  of  you  ?  5.  Who  is  knock- 
ing ?  It  is  probably  the  servant.  6.  You  shall  not  go  to-day 
(278,  3).  7.  The  soldiers  will  in  vain  have  sacrificed  them- 
selves for  their  general.  8.  I  shall  make  use  of  this  paper 
when  a  deed  shall  have  been  done  that  bears  incontestable 
evidence  of  high-treason.  9.  What  are  they  going  to  elicit  by 
their  questions,  if  the  man  is  innocent  ?  10.  It  is  to  be  hoped 
that  the  imperial  diet  at  Augsburg  will  mature  our  projects. 

1.  Of  this  earth  =  earthly.  2.  BewU  of  the  U.  N.,  ber  Slbfall  ber  »er=^ 
einigten  S'lteberlanbe.    3.  To  commence,  antreten  (str.  V.,  1),  sep.,  lit.  to  enter 


44  GERMAN   EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  [II.  Series. 

on.  4  Of,  au^  (w.  dat.),  5.  Probably y  see  278,  2.  8.  To  make  use  of, 
brauc^en,  SliaU  ham  been  done  may  be  expressed  by  the  perfect  (see  279, 
2).  To  bear  evidence  of,  bejeugen*  Incontestable,  use  the  adverb.  9.  See 
279,  3.  To  elicit  by  questions,  l^erau^ijer^oren*  10.  For  a  free  translation 
of  this  sentence,  see  279,  3.  The  German  adverb  l^offentUc^  has  to  be 
rendered  by  the  phrase  it  is  to  be  hoped.    Imperial  diety  ber  fUti^^ia^,  t^,  c» 

Exercise  XXX. 

Syntax  of  the  Verb — 280,  281,  282.     Te7ises  continued. 

Bxplanation. — In  the  sentences  of  this  Exercise,  the  figures  at  the  end 
of  the  clauses  indicate  whether  one  or  two  forms  of  the  verb  are  possi- 
ble ;  the  reason,  in  each  case,  should  be  assigned  by  reference  to  g§  280, 
281  (for  sentences  1-5)  and  to  §  282  (for  the  remaining  sentences). 

Aside  from  these  variations,  the  conditional  clauses  (with  if)  may  be 
rendered  in  two  ways,  either  with  mm  expressed,  or  by  indicating  its 
omission  by  the  inverted  order  (see  343,  c). 

1.  If  you  had  not  advised  me  so  (1),  I  should  not  have  done 
it  (2).  2.  What  would  you  do  in  my  place  (2)  ?  3.  If  you 
had  been  here  (1),  my  brother  would  not  have  died  (2).  4.  The 
fever  would  from  now  on  gradually  disappear  (1),  if  the  patient 
would  take  his  medicine  regularly  (1).  5.  Nobody  would  be- 
lieve him  upon  oath  (1).  6.  The  herdsman  says  the  trees  are 
charmed  (1).  7.  People  believe  that  the  hand  of  him  who 
injures  trees  will  grow  out  of  the  grave  (1).  8.  The  herds- 
man said  the  trees  were  charmed  (2).  9.  Egmont  affirmed 
that  the  whole  matter  was  nothing  but  a  jest  made  at  the 
dinner-table  (2).  10.  The  boy  says  he  has  not  done  it  (1). 
11.  The  boy  said  he  would  not  have  done  it  (2),  if  he  had  not 
been  misled  by  his  comrades.  12.  If  they  forgave  him  (2),  he 
said,  he  would  not  do  it  again  (2).  13.  The  witness  swore 
that  he  had  seen  the  defendant  (2).  14.  The  guide  told  us, 
those  were  the  planets  (2)  which  control  destiny  (2).  15.  We 
thought  you  would  explain  the  mystery  (1). 

1.  Translate  so  by  the  pronoun  e^.  2.  In  my  place,  an  metner  ©telle* 
4    From  now  on,  von  biefer  <3tunbe  an.     5.    Upon  oath,  auf  etnen  Sib. 


11.  Series.]  GERMAN^   EXERCISES   11^  GRAMMAR.  45 

6.  Charmed,  geknnt*  7.  People,  bie  £eute*  That  the  hand,  etc.,  =  tliat 
whoever  (wer)  injures  .  .  .  his  (=  to  him  the)  hand,  etc.  Will  grow,  pres. 
subj.  8.  The  herdsman,  in  making  the  statement,  used  the  present 
tense  ;  hence,  in  this  indirect  speech,  the  present  subj.  is  correct  (282) ; 
but  also  the  preterit  subj.  (282,  1).  9.  The  whole  matter,  ba^  ®anje« 
Nothing  hut,  nic^ta  al^*  Jest  .  .  .  table,  ber  3:afelfc^erj,  e^^  e»  14.  Those 
were,  baig,  etc.  (245, 1).  If  the  pret.  subj.  **  controlled"  is  used,  the  rela- 
tive clause  expresses  the  guide's  opinion  only ;  **  control "  pres.  ind. 
denotes  a  general  statement  or  fact. 

Exercise  XXXI. 

Syntax  of  the  Yerl  contimied — 284,285 — 103,  110.     Moods. 

1.  Let  all  be  silent,  let  each  incline  his  ear  to  solemn  tones. 

2.  Let  each  one  take  care  how  he  acts  and  how  he  fares. 

3.  Will  the  gentleman  please  enter,  4.  May  a  gi^acious  fate 
lead  you  through  this  stormy  life  !  5.  "  0  full  [and  splendid] 
Moon  .  .  .  would  thy  glow  for  the  last  time  beheld  my  woe  ! " 
6.  0  harmless  staff,  would  that  I  never  had  exchanged  thee 
for  the  sword  !  7.  I  make  rhyme  tolerably  well,  I  should 
think,  what  belongs  together.  8.  How  is  it  possible  to  write 
everything  ?  9.  Whether  you  are  a  good  or  a  bad  fellow,  go 
to  bed.  10.  Everything  might  be  excellently  settled,  if  things 
could  be  done  over  again.     11.  You  would  be  a  dead  man. 

12.  Yes,  said  the  lantern  to  the  moon,  what  would  men  do  if 
we  were  not  [there]  ?     Thereupon  it  went  out. 

1.  All  +  SrHea  (see  168).  2.  To  take  care,  fe^en,  str.  V.,  1.  Translate  : 
"  Let  each  one  see  how  he  manages  it,  let  each  one  see  what  become  of 
him."  What  become  of  him  =  where  he  remain.  3.  Third  person  plur. 
pres.  subj.  of  eintreten,  str.  V.,  1.  Please,  gefdlligjl,  adv.  5.  Full  [and 
splendid]  moon,  cotter  3J?onbenf(^ein.  Thy  glow  =  thou.  To  behold,  fe^en 
auf  (w.  ace).  Would  is  to  be  expressed  by  the  pret.  subj.  of  the  principal 
verb.  7.  To  make  rhyme,  jufammenrcimeti,  sep.  1  should  think,  pret.  subj. 
of  to  think.  8.  Use  the  pret.  subj.  of  laffen,  with  the  reflexive  pronoun 
(see  Examples  under  284,  3).    9.    Whether,  to  be  omitted  (284,  4).     To 


46  GERMAN   EXERCISES  IK   GRAMMAR.  [II.  Series. 

go  to  bed,  here  colloquially,  ft(^  auf^  D^r  legen,  for  the  classical :  ju  S5ett(e) 
gel^cn.  10.  Might  be,  use  the  pret.  subj.  of  laijeu,  with  the  reflexive  pro- 
noun.    To  do  over  again,  jweimal  ijerric^ten*    11.     J.  cJeacZ  man,  be^  2^obc^» 


Exercise  XXXII. 

Syntax  of  the  Verb  continued — 286  to  290.     Moods — Lnpera- 

tive, 

1.  Beat  the  drum,  and  take  the  field !  2.  George,  you  stay 
with  me.  3.  No  man  ought  to  be  obliged  [to  do  a  thing]. 
4.  He  wanted  to  see  the  pedlar.  5.  He  must  have  seen  the 
pedlar.  6.  He  claims  to  have  seen  the  pedlar.  7.  He  was 
forced  to  call  the  police.  8.  One  must  not  count  the  chickens 
before  they  are  hatched.  9.  Then  they  separated.  10.  You 
do  nothing  but  complain.  11.  Shall  we  walk  out,  or  drive  ? 
12.  Bid  him  be  silent,  and  teach  him  to  do  what  is  pleasing  to 
God.  13.  They  saw  him  first  suspended  over  the  abyss,  and 
afterwards  the  guide  found  his  dead  body  lying  at  the  foot  of 
the  rock.  14.  What  has  the  Tyrolese  sticking  on  his  hat  ? 
15.  "Fve  often  heard  it  said,  a  preacher  might  learn,  with  a 
comedian  for  a  teacher.''     16.  That  would  be  tempting  God. 

1.  UsG  the  past  participle.  To  take  the  field,  \rC^  ^elb  jtejen,  str.  II.,  2. 
2.  With,  bei  (w.  dat.)  or  urn  (w.  ace).  3.  Use  muffen  twice  in  this  sen- 
tence. 4-7.  See  288,  1.  7.  To  be  forced,  muffen.  8.  The  German 
proverb  is  :  "  One  must  (foil  or  mup)  not  praise  the  day  before  the  even- 
ing," which  may  be  substituted  for  this  sentence.  9.  One  version  of 
this  sentence  is  found  in  290,  third  example.  11.  Walk  out  (for  exer- 
cise), fpajteren  9e"^en  ;  in  the  same  way,  fpajtercn  fa^rcn,  reiten  (290,  2). 
12.  What  is  pleasing  to  God  =  according  to  tlie  pleasure  (ba^  SSolIge^* 
fatteit)  of  God.  13.  To  be  suspended,  fc^n)eben.  15.  Say  :  A  comedian  could 
teach  a  preacher.  For  said  here  =  boasted.  16.  Would  be,  pret.  subj. 
of  ^ei§en,  VII.,  1. 


II.  Sbmes.]  GERMAN  EXERCISES   I:N^   GRAMMAR.  47 

Exercise  XXXIII. 

Syntax  of  the  Verb  continued — 291  to  293.    Moods — Infinitive. 

1.  That  cannot  be  helped.  2.  That  remains  still  to  be 
considered.  3.  The  youth  felt  impelled  to  win  the  prize. 
4.  We  have  dug  a  new  bed  in  order  to  turn  aside  the  current 
of  the  river.      5.    Instead  of  coming  nearer  he  ran  away. 

6.  They  did  not  delay,  but  began  to  hoe  and  dig.  7.  N^obody 
thinks  of  granting  him  the  favor.  8.  It  is  dangerous  to  play 
with  the  lion.  9.  Lessing  was  too  proud  to  reap  without 
having  sown.  10.  My  brother  is  ready  to  keep  you  company. 
11.  If  he  has  done  nothing  all  his  life,  one  can  hardly  say 
that  he  is  resting  from  his  work.  12.  The  countess  has 
diamonds  which  are  known  to  be  diamonds.  13.  No  smoking 
here.  14.  The  student  began  translating  the  poem ;  but  it 
was  almost  untranslatable  (291,  2).  15.  The  heirs  were 
weeping ;  but  their  weeping  was  a  secret  laughing. 

1.  Bear  in  mind  that  possibility  may  be  expressed  by  the  infinitive 
(291).  2.  Bemains,  in  this  connection,  may  be  rendered  by  fettlr  bleikttr 
or  fle^en.     3.    Felt   impelled  =  it   (some  power)  impelled  the  youth. 

7.  Thinks  of  granting  =  thinks  of  it,  to  grant  ;  of  it  to  be  rendered  by 
an  adverb.  10.  To  keep  one  company^  ©efellfc^aft  letjlen  (w.  dat.) ;  Sinem 
jur  ®efettf(^aft  ^ier  (ba)  bleiben.  11.  All  his  life,  fetnen  SeMag.  A  clause  with 
ba§  is  preferable  to  the  ace.  w.  the  inf.  (292).  12.  Which  are  known  = 
which  one  knows,  or,  of  (ijon)  which  one  knows  that  ...  13.  Smoking 
is  forbidden  here. 

Exercise  XXXIV. 

Syntax  of  the  Verb  continued — 294  to  300.     Participles. 

1.  From  the  gable  of  the  house,  which  commanded  an  ex- 
tensive view,  we  could  see  the  steeples  of  the  city.  2.  The 
matter  is  important,  but  if  you  are  in  ill-health  we  will  wait 


48  GERMAN  EXERCISES   IN   GRAMMAR.  [H.  Series. 

(294,  2).  3.  The  air  is  glowiog  as  though  [it  came]  from  the 
mouth  of  a  furnace.  4.  Give  me  some  boiling  water.  5.  The 
ships  under  sail,  with  their  masts  encircled  with  wreaths, 
vanished  in  the  distance.  6.  A  handsome  squire  came  riding 
along  the  way.  7.  I  call  that  lying  (296,  2).  8.  Well  begun 
is  half  done  (296,  2).  9.  Was  the  whole  family  present?  All, 
except  the  youngest  daughter.  10.  You  have  read  Lessing^s 
Laocoon ;  if  you  now  apply  those  principles  to  works  of  art 
you  will  become  a  better  critic.  11.  She  spoke  of  her  child, 
her  eyes  dim  with  tears.  12.  Faust  had  powerfully  attracted 
the  spirit.  13.  "The  lofty  works,  uncomprehended,  are 
bright  as  on  the  earliest  day."  14.  ^^To  Him  above  bow 
down.''     15.   ^^  The  Woman-soul  leadeth  us  upward  and  on.'' 

1.  Translate  the  relative  clause  by  the  pres.  part,  of  wettfd^auert  (294, 1). 
3.  Air,  the  German  equivalent  is  sometimes  used  in  the  plural.  A8 
thougJi,  rok.  5.  Under  sail  =  p.  p.  of  aBfe^eln  +  to  sail  off  (295,  1). 
Encircled  with  wreaths,  laubumfrcinjt.  10.  If  you  now  apply,  to  be  ren- 
dered by  the  p.  p.  absolute  (297).  11.  Dim,  etc.,  =  dimmed  from  weep- 
ing. 13-15.  See  299  ;  299,  1  and  3.  Uncomprehended  =  incompre- 
hensibly. Bow  down  =  stand  bowed  ;  use  flel^en.  15.  Woinan-soiUy 
B.  T.'s  version  of  ba^  Stt)ig=*2Beibli(^e.     To  lead  on  and  upward,  l^inanjtekn* 

Exercise  XXXV. 

Syntax  of  the  Preposition— {ZOl),  302,  303. 

1.  Instead  of  songs,  a  stream  of  blood  rose  from  his  breast. 
2.  The  son  became  head  of  the  family  by  virtue  of  the  ring 
[in  his  possession].  3.  The  grenadiers  wept  on  account  of 
the  doleful  intelligence.  4.  We  shall  start  in  spite  of  the  bad 
weather.  5.  For  his  sake  I  will  explain  myself  more  clearly 
(302,  14).  6.  In  company  with  you  1  defy  our  whole  genera- 
tion (303,  9).  7.  Next  to  life  we  implore  the  blessing  of  God. 
8.  The  count,  together  with  all  his  men,  offered  himself  to 
the  duke.     9.  Since  that  unhappy  day  every  mouth  is  silent 


II.  Series.]  GEEMAI^"   EXEKCISES   I]N^   GRAMMAB.  49 

(to  me).  10.  From  Easter  to  Pentecost  is  fifty  days.  11.  The 
general  saw  tj|at  he  was  deceived  by  his  officers.  12.  A  Ger- 
man song  begins  with  the  words  :  At  Strassburg,  on  the 
bulwark,  etc.  13.  They  said  they  would  make  him  presi- 
dent; but  they  made  only  a  fool  of  him.  14.  The  prisoner 
had  no  coffee  with  his  rye  bread  and  sausage.  15.  We  shall 
go  either  at  Easter  or  on  Trinity-Sunday. 

1.  To  rise,  here  :^oc^  auffpringen,  str.  III.,  1,  sep.  2.  (302,  5.)  3.  (302, 
8.)  6.  To  defy,  in  bie  (Sc^rattfcn  forbern  (lit.  to  challeage,  or  summon,  into 
the  lists).  Generation,  ba^  ©efc^tec^t,  here  ba^  3a^r^unbert  (in  this  sense  a 
poetical  and  hyperbolic  expression).  8.  To  offer  one's  self  =  to  bring 
one's  self.  12.  See  303, 16.  Etc.,  u.  f.  ii?.  =  unb  fo  tweitev.  13.  To  make 
a  fool  of  one,  ©inensum  bcilen  ^aben. 

Exercise  XXXVI. 

Syntax  of  the  Preposition  continued — 304. 

1.  The  Ii^dian  was  wounded  by  an  arrow.  2.  Scissors  are 
no  playthings  for  children.  3.<  Truth  does  not  exist  for  him. 
4.  In  the  war  no  substitute  will  take  the  soldier's  place.  5.  He 
did  not  wish  to  bind  himself  (toward  me).  6.  Against  stupid- 
ity even  the  gods  struggle  in  vain.  7.  In  comparison  with 
Eothschild  you  are  a  poor  man.  8.  The  lords  of  the  empire 
were  sitting  around  the  emperor.  9.  Several  portraits  of  kings 
surrounded  the  throne  in  a  semicircle.  10.  [According]  to 
you  everything  is  to  be  had  for  money.  11.  You  have  made  a 
mistake  of  six-pence.  12.  We  never  play  for  money.  13.  Do 
not  weep  for  the  fallen  heroes.  14.  The  loss  of  her  fine  hair 
would  be  a  pity.     15.  I  feel  sorry  for  your  aunt. 

4.  Translate  substitute  by  anbeterf  and  take  the  place  of  by  eintreten  fiir 

(str.  v.,  1).     5.  To  Und  one's  self  ftc^  ^erpfltc^ten.    8.  Lords  of  the  empire, 

bie  ®rD§en  ber  ^rone.    9.  Portraits  of  kings,  ^onig^MIber.     To  surround, 

urn  ♦  .  ♦  \jix  jle^en  (136).    10.  To  he  had  =  to  be  for  sale,  feil  feim    11.  To 

3 


50  GERMAIN   EXERCISES  ItsT   GRAMMAR.  [H.  Series. 

make  a  mistake  (in  accounts),  ft^  i^errec^nen.  14.  Say  :  It  would  be  a  pity 
about  her  fine  pair.  To  he  a  pity,  fc^abe  feim  15.  1  feel  sorry ^  e^  t^ut  mir 
leib. 

Exercise  XXXVII. 

Syntax  of  the  Preposition  continued — 305,  306;,  (307). 

1.  The  university  [of]  Strassburg  was  re-opened  in  1872. 
2.  Is  your  father  out  of  town  ?  Yes^,  he  has  gone  to  a  water- 
ing-place for  a  fortnight.  3.  Medicine  is  needed  for  the  emi- 
grant who  is  suffering  from  the  intermittent  fever.  4.  The 
bear  is  led  by  a  chain.  5.  Can  you  recall  the  circumstances? 
•6.  The  defendant  was  proud  of  his  innocence,  and  angry  with 
his  accuser.  7.  One  hundred  pence  make  one  mark  (306,  3). 
8.  The  hero's  name  is  living,  although  his  body  has  crumbled 
into  dust.  9.  I  was  going  to  put  on  the  belt,  when  it  tore 
into  two  pieces.  10.  The  heirs  were  astonished  at  the  large 
property  of  which  the  will  disposed.  11.  He  is  vexed  with 
me.  12.  Sometimes  a  whole  life  is  spent  over  a  fine  illusion. 
13.  Cambrai  will,  amid  rejoicing,  open  her  gates  to  the  arch- 
bishop. 14.  None  among  the  imperial  officers  came  up  to 
Friedland.  15.  She  would  like  to  guard  against  certain  re- 
membrances. 16.  The  boy  was  not  able  to  see  the  woods  for 
all  the  trees. 

1.  In  =  in  the  year.  2.  Out  of  town,  ijerretfl.  Gone,  use  retfett  (see 
266).  3.  Is  needed,  e^  fe^U  an  (306, 1).  6.  To  be  proud  of  tro^en  anf, 
ftolj  fetn  auU  9.  Was  going  to,  use  vooUtn*  12.  To  be  spent  =  pass  away. 
13.  Cambrai,  the  name  of  a  place.  14.  To  come  up  to  =  to  be  equal  to, 
reid^en  an.  Friedland  —  Wallenstein,  duke  of  F.  15.  Would  like  to,  use 
mogen.  16.  See  306,9.  All  the,  lauter  (see  Ex.  XIIL,  10).  Compare: 
Not  to  see  the  city  for  all  the  houses. 


THIRD    SERIES, 


Exercise  I. 

The  Simple  Sentence— ZO^  to  317. 

1.  Life  is  not  the  highest  of  goods.  2.  ^'  One  sees  that 
in  nothing  no  interest  he  has."  3.  You  have  advanced  the 
work  more  in  these  three  days,  than  it  has  formerly  thriven 
in  many  weeks.  4.  Child,  take  care  that  yoa  don't  spill  any- 
thing. 5.  Happiness  is  so  near ;  why  will  you  wander  farther 
and  farther  ?  6.  Such  is  the  fate  of  the  Beautiful  on  earth. 
7.  '^  Great  cry  and  little  wool."  8.  Ill-humor  and  desire  for 
combat  were  gnawing  his  mind.  9.  Eather  let  his  contempo- 
raries and  posterity  judge  him.  10.  His  majesty  has  been 
pleased  to  pension  the  privy  counselor.  11.  The  master  and 
mistress  are  gone  out.  12.  The  young  band  of  reapers  go 
into  the  field.  13.  Three  huntsmen  went  a-shooting  deer. 
14.  The  world's  history  is  the  world's  judgment.  15.  Neces- 
sity is  the  mother  of  invention.  16.  Mars,  the  star  of  ill- 
fortune,  has  often  severed  what  Venus,  the  bringer  of  good- 
fortune,  had  united. 

1.  Use  the  del  art.  3.  To  ham  interest  in,  5(nteit  nc^mcn  an.  3.  To  take 
care,  ftc^  in  $[(^t  ne^men.  4.  Not  .  .  .  anything  —  nothing.  6.  Translate 
such  by  that.  7.  Great  —  much.  9.  Let,  use  the  pres.  subj.  of  the 
principal  verb.  10.  To  he  pleased  (in  this  connection),  geru^en.  Pri'Gy 
counselor,  ber  ge'^etme  (|>oO  9^at.  11.  Master  and  mistress,  tie  |)errf(i)aft. 
13.  To  go  a-shooiing  deer,  auf  tie  S3irf(^  jie^en.    16.  Bringer^  see  317. 


52  GERMAN  EXERCISES  IN   GRAMMAR.  [HI.  Series. 


Exercise  II. 

The  Compound  Sentence — Co-ordinate  Sentences — 318  to  322. 

1.  In  part  they  drew  him,  in  part  he  sank  down.  2.  We 
will  neither  deny  nor  palliate  the  deed.  3.  In  the  first  place, 
they  wish  it;  and  secondly,  it  is  the  custom.  4.  I  will  either 
act  with  absolute  freedom,  or  not  command  at  all.  5.  The 
fleet  did  not  dare  to  attack  the  enemy,  but  returned  without 
having  effected  its  purpose.  6.  Lessing  would  like  to  call 
Corneille  "the  gigantic"  or  "the  prodigious,"  but  not  "the 
great "  (320,  2).  7.  He  is  not  a  millionaire,  but  he  is  rich. 
8.  He  is  not  rich,  but  poor.  9.  The  matter  seems  so  plain, 
and  yet  it  is  a  mystery.  10.  It  was  difficult  to  enlist  more 
soldiers ;  for  fortune  had  forsaken  the  army.  11.  Wallenstein 
had  assumed  the  title  of  "  Highness  " ;  therefore  it  was  neces- 
sary for  him  to  keep  soldiers.  12.  Goetz  yon  Berlichingen  had 
one  iron  hand ;  thus  it  was  insensible  to  a  kind  pressure. 

3.   In  the  first  place y  erjlen^.    4.  Absolute,  here  »ofl!ommen  (complete). 

5.  Without  hamng  effected  its  purpose,  unijcrri(^teter  (Sad^e  (adverbial  gen.). 

6.  Would  like,  use  pret.  subj.  of  mogen.  11.  Had  assumed  the  title  of  = 
had  himself  called  (321).  It  was  necesary  for  him  =  he  must.  To  keep, 
here  ^alten,  str.  VII.,  1.  12.  Kind  pressure,  ^rucf  ter  ^kU  (322).  To, 
ge^en,  w.  ace. 

Exercise  III. 

The  Compound  Sentence  continued — Subordinate  Sentences — 
Substantive  and  Adjective  Clauses — 323  to  328. 

1.  The  curse  of  an  evil  deed  is  that  it  brings  forth  evil 
(324).  2.  The  student  cheerfully  carries  home  what  he  has 
in  black  and  white  in  his  note-book.  3.  ''  Out  of  the  abun- 
dance of  the  heart  the  mouth  speaketh  "  (324).  4.  Can  you 
not  understand  that  it  is  far  more  diffiicult  to  do  right  than 


in.SEEiES.]  GERMAK   EXERCISES   IN^   GRAMMAR.  53 

to  indulge  in  pious  dreams  ?  (325,  2).  5.  Have  you  [received] 
information  [of]  what  has  happened  in  Schwyz  ?  (325,  2). 

6.  The  day  is  almost  spent,  and  you  must  explain  yourself, 
whether  you  will   do  without    me   or  without  your  friend. 

7.  Has  the  ship  sunk?  Yes,  but  they  still  hope  to  raise  it 
again  (325,  3).  8.  Sweet  peace,  that  art  from  heaven,  come 
into  my  heart !  9.  The  church  we  visited  last  week  has  not 
yet  been  dedicated  (326,  327).  10.  ''  See  that  you  most  pro- 
foundly gain  what  does  not  suit  (in)  the  human  brain  "  (327, 
2).  11.  (The)  European  governments  have  sometimes  sent 
to  the  United  States  people  unable  to  support  themselves. 
12.  The  government,  a  year  or  two  ago,  complained  of  the 
landing  of  paupers  who  were  sent  over. 

2.  In  black  and  white,  f(^tt)arj  auf  weip*  3.  Say:  Of  what  the  heart  is 
full,  of  that  the  mouth  flows  over.  To  flow  over,  here  ukrge^en  (sep.). 
4.  To  do  rights  gut  ^anbeln.  To  indulge  in  pious  dreams,  anbac^ttg  fc^warmen. 
6.  /«  .  .  .  spent,  use  ftd^  neigen.  10.  Translate  most  profoundly  by  tief^ 
jtnnigr  and  gain  by  faffen^    12.  Ago,  see  306,  9. 

Exercise  IV. 

The  Compound  Sentence  continued — Adverbial  Glauses  —  329 

to  332. 

1.  When  the  weak  [man]  succumbs  to  his  fate,  the  strong 
conquers  it.  2.  ^^  Man,  while  he  strive th,  is  prone  to  err " 
(330).  3.  As  the  king  gave  a  sign  with  his  hand,  the  [gate  of 
the]  prison  opened.  4.  After  the  king  had  left  the  city,  it 
was  found  that  he  had  taken  the  precaution  of  providing  it 
with  a  sufficient  garrison  (330,  2).  5.  The  beU-founder, 
before  letting  the  metal  flow,  spoke  a  short  prayer ;  then  the 
workmen  rested  from  their  hard  work  till  the  bell  was  cooled. 
6.  Often,  where  ideas  fail,  (there)  words  [will]  offer  themselves 
[as  substitutes]  (331).    7.  The  lawyer,  casting  a  furious  glance 


54  GERMAN  EXERCISES  IN  GRAMMAR.  [IH.  Series. 

at  his  opponent,  left  the  room  (332).  8.  We  never  go  to 
town  without  visiting  our  old  aunt  (332,  1).  9.  Henry 
studied  German  for  two  years  without  ever  understanding 
the  principles  of  the  language.  10.  Instead  of  paying  what 
he  owed,  he  contracted  more  debts. 

1.  Conquer^  here  jnjtngcn,  str.  III.,  1.  %  Is  prone  to  err  =  errs.  3.  To 
give  a  sign  with  one's  hand,  mit  bem  i^inger  n)infen.  4.  It  was  found,  see 
272.  Taken  —  had.  Of  providing,  see  291,  4.  5.  Say  :  Before  tlie  b. 
let  the  metal  flow,  he  .  .  .  Short  prayer,  bcr  fromme  ©j)rud^.  Rested 
from  .  .  .  =  let  the  .  .  .  work  rest.  6.  To  offer  one's  self  here  |t(^  ein*= 
jleUen.  7.  Casting  =  while  (intern)  he  cast.  Aty  auf  (w.  ace).  10.  To 
contract  debts,  ©d^ulben  ma(^en. 

Exercise  V. 

The    Compound  Sentence  —  Adverbial  Clauses  continued  — 
333  to  335. 

1.  The  slow  progress  of  the  war  had  been  as  advantageous 
to  the  rebels  as  it  had  been  injurious  to  the  king  (333).  2.  He 
had  grown  as  fleshy  as  Doctor  Luther.  3.  Goliath  was  by 
one  head  taller  than  all  the  rest.  4.  His  hair  stood  on  end  as 
if  the  hand  of  Death  had  seized  him.  5.  The  scholar  seeks 
knowledge  as  if  he  were  for  ever  to  live  on  this  earth.  6.  There 
was  a  hissing  as  when  water  comes  in  contact  with  fire  (333, 
1).  7.  We  lived  a  more  retired  life  than  we  had  lived  in 
Philadelphia.  8.  You  are  too  good  to  expect  such  things  of 
us  (333,  3).  9.  The  peace  was  concluded  too  hurriedly  to  be 
of  long  duration.  10.  Our  provisions  diminished  more  and 
more  ;  and,  of  course,  the  less  we  had  to  eat,  the  more  terrible 
grew  our  hunger  (334).  11.  The  tyrant  was  so  detested  by 
the  Swiss  people,  that  he  could  no  longer  find  any  tool. 
12.  I  would  gladly  bear  the  trouble,  so  important  is  the  matter 
to  me  (335,  1).  13.  Do  you  consider  him  so  unprincipled 
that  he  should  cheat  a  poor  widow  ? 


m.  Series.]  GERMAK   EXERCISES   11^   GRAMMAR.  55 

1.  To  be  advantageous  =  to  bring  advantage.  To  be  injurious  =  to  do 
harm.  2.  Translate  literally ;  a  version  of  tliis  sentence,  in  students' 
slang,  is  found  in  F.  2129-30  (see  333).  3.  AU  the  rest  =  all  people. 
4  and  5.  The  subordinate  clauses  may  be  given  in  two  ways  (see  343,  <? ; 
333,  1).  For  ever^  ett)ig.  On  this  earth  =  here.  6.  To  corm  in  contact 
with,  jt(^  ntengen  mit*  8.  To  expect^  use  al^  ba^  with  subj.  (333,  3).  9.  Of 
long  duration  +  bauer^aft^  adj.,  or  »ott  +  dat.,  or  genit.  of  characteristic. 

Exercise  VI. 

The    Compound  Sentence  —  Adverbial  Clauses   continued — 
336  to  340. 

1.  Poetry  describes  beings,  and,  in  as  far  as  these  beings  are 
corporeal,  it  describes  bodies.  2.  I  shall  not  go  away,  unless 
you  pay  me  what  you  owe  me  (336).  3.  With  the  best  inten- 
tion 'I  cannot  accomplish  much,  because  a  thousand  obstacles 
stand  in  my  way.  4.  The  minister  will  only  be  able  to  save 
himself  by  speedily  concluding  peace.  5.  (The)  Man  has  been 
endowed  with  understanding  (for  this),  that  he  may  reflect 
upon  that  which  he  does.  6.  Though  the  night  is  dark,  our 
right  is  as  clear  as  the  light  of  day  (339).  7.  However  [much] 
the  human  will  may  waver,  the  will  of  God  is  immutable. 
8.  Whatever  position  you  may  take,  you  will  get  talked  about 
(339).  9.  Be  ever  so  good,  there  will  be  somebody  to  slander 
you  (339,  1).  10.  If  (the)  nations  rebel  against  rightful 
authority,  prosperity  will  not  be  theirs  (340).  11.  Why 
should  I  not  avoid  the  utmost  if  I  can   escape  it  ?  (340). 

12.  Bring  me  a  few  lilies  if  you  find  them   on  your  way. 

13.  If  the  judge  had  been  there,  matters  would  never  have 
come  so  far.  14.  As  long  as  the  deed  is  merely  planned,  it  is 
a  crime ;  if  [once]  carried  out,  it  will  be  a  grand  enterprise. 


1.  Are  corporeal  =  are  bodies.  3.  In  any  way,  see  154.  4. 
help.  5.  Has  been  endowed  with,  use  the  verb  ttjerben  with  the  dat.  of  the 
person  (338).  6.  Use  no  conjunction  in  the  first  clause.  Is  .  ,  ,  day, 
to  be  expressed  simply  by  the  verb  leuc^ten.    8.  Say  :  However  you  may 


56  GERMAIN   EXERCISES  11^  GRAMMAR.  [ni.SBMBS.I 

place  (jletten)  yourself.     To  get  talked  about,  m^^  ®erebe  fommen*    9.  There  - 
wUl  .  .  .  be,  see  236,  4.     10.  Eebel  .  .  .  c^uthority  —  free  themselves. 
Will  not  be  theirs  =  cannot  thrive.     12,  13.   Use  no  conjunction  (340, 1). 
Your,  see  154.     13.  Matters  =  it.     To  come  so  far,  ba^infommeu  (str.  IV., 
Sep.),  impersonal.    14.  As  long  as;  if,  see  340,  4. 

Exercise  VII. 

Word- Order— 3^1  to  343. 

1.  Once,  warlike  'lordes  were  raging  through  this  valley ; 
may  that  day  never  return  !  2.  "  If  you  would  know  exactly 
what  is  proper,  you  have  only  to  inquire  of  noble  women." 
3.  He  pocketed  the  bracelets  and  rings  as  if  they  were  toad- 
stools.     4.    Stand  still,   and  the  dog  will  leap  up  on  you. 

5.  Where  I  feel  a  breath  of  thy  spirit,  there  I  am  happy. 

6.  That  Caylus  should  have  read  this  passage,  is  impossible. 

7.  "Whatever  brings  [us]  nearer  to  heaven,"  he  said,  ^^is  no 
delay."  8.  "  You  are  all  very  intelhgent,"  he  began  full  [of] 
cunning.  9.  It  is  true,  the  limits  of  art  are  now  incomparably 
wider  than  they  formerly  were,  but  they  do  not  comprise  such 
works.  10.  The  ward  of  the  key  is  deftly  wrought,  but  it 
does  not  open  the  lock.  11.  If  it  were  not  a  universal  super- 
stition, nobody  would  admire  the  beauty  of  these  paintings. 
12.  I  cannot  help  you  any  more ;  have  I  not  given  you  my  last 
dollar!  13.  The  queen,  indeed!  is  no  better  than  a  woman 
of  the  middle  class.  14.  Why  are  you  so  modest,  since  he  has 
no  advantage  over  you  ? 

2.  KnoiD  =  learn,  find  out,  erfa^ren,  str.  VI.  If  not  to  be  translated. 
Tou  hate  .  .  .  to  inquire,  use  the  imperative.  4.  Stand  still,  use  the 
pres.  ind.  (343,  3,  small  type).  6.  Caylus,  the  name  of  a  French  critic. 
The  sentence  should  be  translated  by  a  single  clause,  beginning  with  the 
perf.inf.  (343,  d).  8.  To  begin,  here  an^ekn,  str.  VI.,  VIII.  9.  It  is  true, 
Itoox  (343,  d,  2).  10.  Deftly  wrought,  here  frau^,  lit.  curly,  complicated. 
11.  For  the  order  in  the  principal  clause,  see  343,  d,  3.     12.  Have  1  not, 


m.  Sbkibs.]  GERMAIN   EXERCISES   IIsT   GRAMMAR.  57 

eta,  use  boc^r  and  no  negation  (343,  e).  13.  Translate  indeed  by  bo^* 
A  woman  .  .  .  class,  ta^  ^ux^txmiK  14.  The  force  of  since  may  be  ren- 
dered by  boc^^ 

Exercise  VIII. 

Word' Order  continued — 344  to  349. 

1.  Proud  as  she  is,  she  had  to  confess  never  having  seen  the 
like  (344).  2.  How  deeply  the  picture  is  imprinted  on  my 
mind  !  and  yet  I  was  not  conscious  of  it,  until  the  sound  of 
your  voice  called  it  up  (344).  3.  The  teacher  greatly  con- 
fused the  girl ;  [it  is  vstrange]  that  a  well-meaning  person 
should  he  able  to  make  one  so  confused!  (345).  4.  The  presi- 
dent declared  he  had  been  obliged  to  make  the  appointment 
at  once  (345,  2,  1).  5.  Everybody  knows  [that]  you  are  to 
blame  for  it.  6.  We  have  learned  from  your  letter  how 
strangely  you  have  been  misunderstood  and  misjudged  (346). 
7.  [It  is]  impossible  that  he  was  present.  8.  Perhaps  (that) 
he  did  not  wish  to  suffer  the  tyranny.  9.  Were  I  rich,  how 
glad  would  I  be  to  assist  the  poor  woman !  10.  How  fortunate 
that  they  remained  in  the  country ! 

1.  As,  fo  (at  tlie  beginning  of  the  sentence).  Having  seen,  to  be  ren- 
dered by  a  clause  ;  see  325,  1  and  4.  2.  To  call  up,  here  t»e(!en.  3.  One, 
see  98,  5.  For  if,  see  234,  lines  5  and  6.  6.  In  this  and  some  of  the 
following  sentences,  the  auxiliary  may  be  dropped.  7,  8.  Use  the  (pres.) 
perf.     Wish,  tt)otten. 

Exercise  IX. 

Word- Order  continued — 350  to  353. 

1.  ]^o  shield  intercepted  the  murderous  blow  dealt  by  his 
adversary  (350,  353).  2.  The  Wagner-concert,  [which  was] 
announced  yesterday,  did  not  take  place.  3.  The  cholera 
[which  was]  spreading  drove  us  from  the  village  (351,  353). 


58  GEEMAiq"   EXERCISES   IK   GRAMMAR.  [III.  Seribs. 

4.  Finally,  the  emperor  ceased  to  delude  the  estates  by  a 
promise  of  a  long-wished-for  peace  (352,  353).  5.  The  two 
prisoners  were  fixed  upon  to  be  the  victims  of  the  general 
discontent.  6.  The  count  has  at  all  times  devoted  his  services 
to  the  imperial  house.  7.  We  have  told  him  so,  but  he  has 
not  taken  it  to  heart  (352,  e).  8.  How  can  one  imagine  such 
a  thing  ?  9.  The  armies  occupied  all  [the]  passes,  in  order  to 
close  to  them  (viz.,  the  enemy)  the  way  to  the  Bohemian 
capital.  10.  The  increased  power  of  the  government  left 
them  (viz.,  the  estates)  no  independence  (352,  e),  11.  The 
compulsion  is  disgraceful  to  him,  -but  we  cannot  release  him 
from  it.  12.  Shakspere's  works  are  no  maxims  of  virtue, 
arranged  in  chapters  and  explained  by  speaking  examples. 

1.  Bear  in  mind  that  participles,  used  attributively,  are  declined  like 
adjectives  (294, 295).  2,  3.  The  modifiers  of  the  subject  should  precede 
the  latter.  4.  To  delude  by  a  promise  of  peace,  ben  ^^rieben  jetgen  (w.  dat.). 
Long-wished-for  J  lang  ern^itnf^t.  5.  Transl. :  to  the  general  discontent  for 
(ju)  the  sacrifice.  6.  At  all  times,  ftet^.  7.  8o^  see  236,  6.  Use  the 
reflexive  pronoun  in  the  second  clause.  9.  In  order  tOy  see  291. 
11.  Release  Mm  from  it  —  remit  it  to  him.  12.  See  353.  Place  the 
predicative  nominative  last,  so  that  all  its  modifiers  precede  it.  To 
arrange^  here  hingen  (119). 


Exercise  X. 

Word-Order  corhtimied — Position  of  Clauses — 354  to  359. 

1.  My  brother  is  still  coughing  a  little ;  his  sickness  has 
exhausted  him  very  much.  2.  We  listened  to  her  in  silence 
[for]  many  minutes^  but  we  do  not  yet  know  what  she  really 
wants.  3.  To-day  it  is  not  pleasant  to  dance  on  this  floor ;  it 
is  too  slippery.  4.  The  policeman  left  on  the  train  yesterday 
afternoon  at  fiNQ  o'clock ;  at  seven,  he  was  found  drunk  in  the 
mud  on  the  road.     5.  We  shall  soon  celebrate  in  a  splendid 


I 


m.  Series.]  GERMA]^   EXERCISES   I]^   GRAMMAR.  59 

manner  the  day  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence.  6.  What 
you  have  in  writing,  and  confirmed  by  a  seal,  is  certainly  secure. 

7.  I  shall  never  refuse  him  the  honor  which  is  due  to  him. 

8.  When  Antony  had  killed  himself,  Cleopatra,  who  saw  that 
Octavianus  only  spared  her  to  make  her  appear  at  Kome  in 
his  triumphal  procession,  took  poison,  or,  according  to  other 
reports,  placed  an  asp  on  her  bosom.  9.  After  casting  away 
his  whole  previous  life,  he  put  himself  in  harmony  with 
fate. 

3.  Use  the  reflexive  form  with  e^*  Pleasant,  here  gut,  6.  In  writ- 
ing .  .  .  seal,  ijert)rteft  unb  ijerjtegelt.  8.  For  the  order,  see  343,  d ;  put 
the  relative  clause  immediately  after  its  antecedent.  According  to  other 
reports  =  as  others  report,  should  follow  the  verb.  To  make  appear  = 
to  show.     Her,  see  154.     9.  Fate,  see  149  (page  54,  line  4). 


FOURTH    SERIES. 

Additional  Exercises,  involving  Topics  of  especial 
Difficulty,  and  Forms  and  Constructions  of  rare 
Occurrence, 


Exercise  I. 


Use  of  the  Cases— 11^  to  20^— {also:  39,  41,  48,  61,  69,  60, 

66,  68). 

1.  On  Saturdays  I  have  to  give  but  one  lesson,  but  next 
Saturday  I  shall  give  two  (39).  2.  He  has  broken  his  leg,  and 
has  to  stay  in  bed  the  whole  month  (41).  3.  Our  gardens 
and  fields  are  situated  an  hour's  walk  from  the  city  (48). 
4.  So  many  murders  have  been  committed  this  year,  that  one 
feels  no  longer  secure  (61).  5.  The  erection  of  these  build- 
ings cannot  reasonably  be  approved  (61).  6.  A  company  of 
one  hundred  men  was  sent  in  pursuit  of  the  rujBSans  (59). 
7.  His  children  and  children's  children  will  remember  this 
noble  deed  (60).  8.  Tell  Mary  that  I  am  sorry  not  to  be  able 
to  agree  with  her  (66).  9.  I  am  vexed  that  we  ever  called  on 
the  Millers  (68).  10.  If  anybody  inquires  after  me,  tell  him 
that  I  went  down  the  avenue,  and  am  coming  back  the  same 
way.  11.  We  will  ask  father  for  (191,  1)  the  knife  he  uses 
for  pruning  trees.     12.  Banish  all  gloomy  thoughts. 

4.  Secure  =  sure  of  one's  life  (98).  8.  See  353  ;  whicli  of  the  two 
infinitives  in  this  sentence  depends  upon  the  other?  11.  For ;  the 
German  prep,  ju,  after  certain  verbs  and  adjectives,  denotes  purpose, 
use,  etc. 


IV.  Series.]  GERMAN^   EXERCISES  IN   GRAMMAR.  61 

Exercise  II. 

Use  of  the  Prepositions — 301  to  306 — {also  40). 

Remark.— The  correct  use  of  the  prepositions,  in  any  language,  can  only  be  acquired 
by  long  observation  and  practice.  The  student,  to  perfect  his  knowledge  of  this  diffi- 
cult portion  of  the  German  language,  should  observe  and  learn  many  prepositional 
phrases  which  he  finds  in  his  reading-lessons.  The  same  is  tvue  of  the  topic  treated  in 
the  following  Exercises  (III.  and  IV.).    No  grammar  can  exhaust  these  subjects. 

1.  The  lawyer  has  robbed  the  widow  of  her  entire  property. 

2.  When  we  play  cards,  we  never  play  for  money  (304,  7). 

3.  We  are  going  to  Paris;  come  with  [us].  4.  A  year  from 
to-day  you  will  meet  again  (306,  7).  5.  The  colonel  ranks 
above  the  captain.  6.  The  count  took  him  from  pity  into  his 
house  (303,  2).  7.  N"ot  far  from  the  river  a  church  has  been 
standing  for  many  years  (303  ;  274,  4).  8.  This  wine  has  a 
taste  of  metal.  9.  We  knew  you  by  the  feather  upon  your 
hat.  10.  Mark  well  what  I  have  told  you  (306,  4).  11.  This 
young  man  wants  to  become  a  soldier  (306,  8).  12.  In  the 
reign  of  Louis  XIV.  the  French  court  was  a  model  for  all 
other  European  courts. 

3.  The  object  of  the  prep,  mit  is  frequently  dropped  when  easily 
understood  from  the  context. 

Exercise  III. 

SeparaUe  and  Inseparable  Compound  Verbs — 137,  360,  547, 
648,  (190,  198). 

1.  The  conference  took  place  as  soon  as  the  ambassadors 
had  breakfasted.  2.  The  king  consulted  with  his  minister 
[for]  two  hours.  3.  If  we  kept  house,  we  should  welcome  our 
friends  in  our  own  home.  4.  It  has  been  lightening  all  night 
(274,  6).  5.  I  do  not  like  to  expose  you  to  the  laughter  of 
the   company.      6.    WilUam  has   beaten   the   dog  to  death. 


62  GEKMAN   EXERCISES   liT   GRAMMAR.  [IV.  Series. 

7.  Show  me  how  to  do  ifc,  and  I  will  do  it  after  you.  8.  Many 
prophecies  were  given  to  the  Jews.  9.  We  always  take  a  great 
interest  in  your  welfare.  10.  The  estates  will  assemble  next 
month  (274,  5).  11.  If  you  stay  here,  I  will  bring  the  chest 
here ;  if  you  go  home,  I  will  send  it  there.  12.  The  cashier 
was  a  man  forgetful  of  his  duty. 

5.  Use  the  adv.  gem  {e,  g.,  I  like  to  read,  i(^  lefe  gem).  7.  Use  Jjo'rmac^en 
and  na'd^mac^enr  both  w.  dat.  8.  Say  :  Among  the  Jews  there  was  much 
prophesying  (Passive  ;  see  236,  2).  9.  Whenever  the  idea  expressed  in 
English  by  a  substantive  is  implied  in  the  German  verb,  the  modifying 
adj.  is,  of  course,  changed  into  an  adv.  (here  greatly). 

Exercise  IV. 

Separable  and  Inseparable  Compound  Verbs  continued — 649. 

Remark. — As  the  verbs  occurring  in  this  Exercise  are  all  translated  in  the  Grammar 
(549),  they  are  not  given  in  the  Vocabulary.  The  figures,  at  the  end  of  the  sentences, 
refer  to  the  sections  of  §  549. 

1.  I  have  looked  the  book  through,  but  I  must  have  over- 
looked that  passage  (1,  3).  2.  After  the  teacher  had  repeated 
the  verse  several  times,  without  skipping  a  word,  he  found 
that  the  child  had  not  heard  a  considerable  portion  of  it 
(3,  8).  3.  If  you  dare  (=  make  bold)  to  go  out  without 
putting  on  your  cloak,  your  father  will  tell  you  to  turn  back 
immediately  (4,  5).  4.  As  we  had  taken  a  roundabout 
course,  it  was  so  late  that  we  had  to  spend  the  night  in  the 
village  (3,  4).  5.  The  ferry-man  took  the  priest  over  [the 
river]  ;  he  will  bring  (=  fetch)  him  back  to-morrow  (3,  8). 
6.  Fifty  miners  perished  last  week  (4).  7.  The  boy  has 
deceived  his  mother,  but  he  is  now  penetrated  with  the  feel- 
ing of  his  guilt  (1,  2).  8.  It  was  so  easy  to  see  through  his 
designs,  that  we  could  frustrate  (=  prevent)  them  before  he 
undertook  to  execute  them  (1,  2,  5,  6).  9.  The  two  sisters 
were  seen  in  the  water,  as  they  embraced  each  other,  and  went 


IV.  Sbioes.]  GEKMA]^    exercises   IK   GRAMMAIL  63 

down  together  (4,  5).  10.  The  soldier  contradicted  and 
resisted  the  officer,  without  considering  that  it  was  entirely 
useless. 

2.  Notice  that  ii^erp'ren  does  not  have  the  meaning  of  the  Eng.  (/oer- 
hear.  Without,  see  291  (p.  115).  3.  Da/re  to  go  out,  ft(|  ^inau'^wagen  = 
to  venture  out.    7.   With,  »on. 

Exercise  V. 

Use  of^Bdn  mid  SSerben  {Passive  Voice),  and  certain  German 
equivalents  for  the  English  Passive — 268  to  273  {also  111, 
631,  632,  633). 

1.  The  city  was  built  upon  a  rock;  nevertheless,  it  was 
taken  by  the  enemy  (273).  2.  Yesterday  our  whole  family 
drove  into  the  country  ;  you  were  mentioned  in  our  conversa- 
tion more  than  once.  3.  The  poor  fellow  was  made  to  believe 
that  he  was  the  heir.  4.  No  stopping  here !  5.  The  animals 
will  be  fed  at  noon.  6.  An  answer  is  requested.  7.  These 
difficulties  are  easily  overcome  (291,  1).  8.  It  is  to  be  hoped 
that  at  least  one-fourth  of  the  company  will  remain  (291,  1). 

9.  The  paper  is  wound  up  by  means  of  a  spring  (272,  302,  7). 

10.  Authors  are  often  praised  by  those  who  have  not  read 
their  works  (269,  88).  11.  An  author  once  said:  We  wish  to 
be  less  praised  and  more  read.  12.  To  him  wiio  hath  shall 
be  given.  13.  You  shall  be  helped  if  you  will  follow  us  (271). 
14.  The  forefathers  of  fche  French  were  conquered  twice;  first 
by  the  Eomans,  and  afterwards  by  the  Germans.  15.  When 
nearly  all  Europe  was  conquered  by  Napoleon,  the  emperor 
was  almost  idolized  by  his  nation. 

2.  Subject  in  the  second  clause  :  ®^.  3.  Subject :  ^Wan.  4.  Passive. 
Begin  the  sentence  with  here  (see  236,  3,  a,  fourth  line).  5.  Subject : 
5?lan  (see  304,  7).  6.  Subject:  (£^.  11.  Did  the  author  wish  for  a 
changed  condition  of  things,  or  was  the  object  of  his  wish  an  action  f 
Or  may  either  be  maintained  ? 


64  GEKMAi^   EXERCISES  IK   GRAMMAR.  IV.  Series. 

Exercise  VI. 

Various  Ways  of  rendering  the  English  Participle  (see  113). 

1.  Giving  is  better  than  receiving  (291,  3).  2.  Having 
made  the  necessary  arrangements  for  the  journey,  he  counted 
upon  leaving  the    next  morning  ( 330,   2 ;    291,  2 ;    234 ). 

3.  This  boy  likes  fishing,  and   dislikes   studying   (291,   2). 

4.  The  Dutch  are  living  in  Holland  (274,  6).  5.  The  chil- 
dren came  running  to  the  spot  where  the  knight  lay  bleeding 
(296  ;  294,  3).  6.  The  senator  kept  us  waiting  a  long  time 
(290,  2).  7.  The  royal  palace  is  now  building  (274,  6). 
8.  The  policeman  saw  the  thief  climbing  through  the  win- 
dow (330,  1 ;  290,  3).  9.  The  danger  of  the  merchant  losing 
his  way  was  great  (325,  1).  10.  The  Judge  being  ill,  the  ses- 
sion did  not  take  place  (337).  11.  This  said,  they  left  the 
room  (330,  2).  12.  The  living  and  the  dead  will  be  judged 
(107).  13.  You  will  gain  nothing  by  waiting.  14.  The  pupil 
went  out,  without  saying  a  word.  15.  The  boy  went  out,  with- 
out the  teacher  noticing  it.  16.  They  spoke  of  his  owing  them 
a  large  sum.  17.  Many  a  man  is  proud  of  having  defeated  his 
opponent.  18.  In  spite  of  your  boasting  [so]  much,  people 
do  not  respect  you. 

1.  Meceimng  —  taking.  2.  Remark. — The  Eng.  pres.  part.,  preceded 
by  a  prep.,  must  always  be  rendered  by  an  infinitive  or  conjunctive 
clause,  preceded  by  such  adverbs,  as :  baiJOH/  baran^  bamit,  etc.  (according  to 
the  prep,  required  by  the  principal  verb).  A  conjunctive  clause  must  be 
used  whenever  the  subject  of  the  participle  is  not  the  same  as  that  of  the 
principal  verb.  6.  Kept  =  made.  8.  To  be  translated  in  two  ways. 
11.  Use  the  passive,  or  the  active  with  man.  13.  See  note,  under  2.  5D'?it 
with  the  infin.  may  also  be  used  here.  18.  Whenever  the  Eng.  participle 
is  translated  by  a  verbal  noun  (infinitive,  288),  the  accompanying  adverb 
is,  of  course,  changed  into  the  corresponding  adjective. 


IV.  SEMES.]  GERMAN  EXERCISES  IH   GRAMMAR.  65 


Exercise  VII. 

Additional  Sentences  on  the  Pronouns — 230  to  2^3,  small  type 
—{also  86,  87,  89,  118). 

1.  You  will  excuse  my  importunity,  sir !  2.  It  was  amus- 
ing to  see  how  his  Excellency  was  catechised  by  her  Majesty. 

3.  I  pray  you,  interest  yourself  for  the  poor  orphan  (232). 

4.  Show  me  the  city  of  Paris  upon  this  map  ;  put  your  finger 
upon  it  (234).  5.  Call  yourself  godlike,  for  aught  I  care; 
but  I  am  afraid  it  will  not  last  long.  6.  My  friend  is  willing ; 
so  am  I  (236).  7.  On  a  sudden,  he  resolved  to  live  no  longer 
for  himself.  8.  They  loved  themselves,  and  hated  each  other 
(238).  9.  The  teacher  spoke  with  his  pupil  of  his  (viz.,  the 
pupil's)  future  (242).  10.  The  teacher's  words  were  so  im- 
pressive, that  the  boy  will  think  of  them  all  his  life  (243). 
11.  Clara  Schumann  was  once  a  great  pianist.  12.  My  poor 
head  is  crazed,  my  poor  mind  disturbed. 

4.  City  of  Paris.  Remark.  — Proper  names  of  countries,  places,  and 
montlis,  modifying  a  common  noun,  are  in  apposition  with  the  latter. 
Ex. :  The  kingdom  of  Prussia,  ba^  ^ontgreid)  9)reu§en.  7.  For  himself, 
dat.  without  prep.     12.  For  the  translation,  see  243,  3. 

Exercise  VIII. 

Pronouns  continued — 244  to  263,  small  type. 

1.  The  fate  of  those  who  fell  before  Troy  was  sad ;  but  still 
more  sad  was  the  end  of  those  who  returned  (244,  1,  c). 
2.  We  took  a  walk,  and  talked  of  this  thing  and  that  thing 
(245,  2).  3.  The  artist  is  painting  on  these  two  pictures ;  he 
will  soon  have  this  [one]  done,  but  that  [one]  takes  more 
time.  4.  It  is  difficult  to  comprehend  how  all  this  can  be 
worked  into  a  novel.     5.  This  emigrant  has  been  cheated  by 


66  GERMAlsr   EXERCISES   i:^   GRAMMAR.  [IV.  Series. 

the  porter  ;  the  same  porter  has  cheated  me  (248,  1).  6.  Such 
a  braggadocio,  who  is  constantly  talking  of  virtue,  gets  warm 
over  his  own  thoughts  (250, 2).  7.  Would  you  not  like  to  live 
in  such  a  hut  overgrown  with  moss  ?  How  gaily  w^e  might 
adorn  it !  8.  What  a  hero  !  No  wonder  that  everybody 
honors  him!  (252).  9.  One  could  not  determine  the  child  of 
which  mother  it  was  (255,  1).  10.  The  old  gentleman  gave 
his  son  and  daughter  instruction  in  dancing,  which  cannot 
have  been  very  becoming  to  him  (256,  2).  11.  "  I  stand  up 
for  the  party  in  whose  service  I  am."  12.  Mephistopheles 
gave  the  student  various  precepts ;  the  latter  felt  quite  stupid 
from  all  he  said. 

3.  To  have  done,  fertig  werbcn  mtt.  4.  Work  into  =  knead  into.  6.  Who 
.  .  .  virtue  =  3:ugenbf(^tt)a^er*  7.  Would  you  not  like,  267,  3.  Might, 
267,  1.  8.  JVo  wonder,  xoa^  SCBunber^  (251, 1).  10.  In  dancing,  see  288  ; 
293.  11.  Meaning  of  the  German  proverb,  in  256,  4.  12.  Felt,  use 
iDerbeitf  with  the  dat.  of  the  person,  and  t^  as  subject.  See  263,  1  ; 
261,  1.  All  he  said.  Remakk. — The  relative  pronoun  can  never  be 
omitted  in  German  (256). 


YOCABULARY. 


A,  an,  cin^  indef.  art.  (38). 

about,  untf 

abyss,  ber  3lbgrunb,  -t^t  -e» 

accidental,  pfdllt(^» 

accomplish,   ijoll^ringen,  irr.  (119, 

2);  Iei|!en, 
according  to,  nad),  w.  dat. 
accuse,  annagen,  sep. 
accuser,  ber  Stnftdger,  -^,  -♦ 
ache,  v.y  n?e^  t{)un  (136,  3). 
acquisition  (by  purchase),  ber  5(n^ 

fauf,  -^f  -e. 
admire,  ktijunbern. 
adorn,  aw^fc^murfenf  sep. 
advance,  v,  trans.,  forbern. 
advantage,  ber  S^orteil,  -^,  -e  ;  to 

have  an  —  over  one,  ettwa^  ijor  einem 

ijorau^  ^akn, 
adversary,  ber  ©egner,  -^,  -♦ 
advise,  raten,  str.  F//.,  1. 
affirm,  beteuern* 
afraid,  I  am  — ,  mir  i|l  l&ange. 
afternoon,  ber  S'Jac^mtttagf  -^,  -e. 
afterwards,  nac^^er;  fpdter. 
again,  wieber* 
age,  baa  5lUer,  -^,  -  ;  bie  Beit,  pi. 

-en  ;  old  — ,  ba^  filter,  -^. 
agree,  ^eiftimmenr  sep.,  w.  dat, 
agreeable,  angene^m* 
air,  bie  iCuft,  pi.  -e» 
all  +  all   (100)  ;  =  the  whole  of, 

gan^ 
almost,  fafl,  fd^ier* 


alms,  bie  ®abett,  n,  pi. 

already,  f^on* 

also,  au(^» 

although,  ob9let($. 

always,  immer, 

ambassador,  ber  ©efafibte,  -n,  -n* 

among,  itnter,  kt, 

amusing  +  amiifa'nt. 

ancestors,  bie  ^dter* 

ancient,  alt* 

and  +  unb* 

angel  +  ber  ©nget,  -^,  -♦ 

angry  (with),  erbofl  (auf,  w.  ace.)* 

animal,  \)ii^  %m,  -t^,  -e* 

announce,  anfiinbtgen/  sep. 

answer  +  bie  5tntn)ort,  pi,  -en» 

Antony  +  ^tnto^niu^. 

anybody,  jemanb* 

anything,  etmasg;  n?aa;  trgenb  cttt)a«, 

trgenb  n)a§* 
appearance  (=:exterior),  bas^  ^u§ere» 
apply,  annjenben,  irr.  (119,  1),  sep. 
appointment,  bie  ©rnennung,  pi.  -en. 
apprentice,  ber  ;Be6rling,  -^,  -e. 
approve  (of),  billigen,  w.  ace. 
archbishop  +  ber  (£ri\6if(|of,  -^,  -e» 
army  +  bie  ^xmt't,  pi.  -n;  bas^  ^eer, 

-e^f  -e. 
arrangement,  to  make  — s,  5lnjlalten 

trefen,  str.  IV. 
arrive,  anfommen,  str.  IV.,  sep. ;  tin'* 

trejfen,  str.  IV. y  sep. 
arrogance,  ber  ttkrmutr  -^* 


68 


VOCABULARY. 


arrow,  ber  ^^fetl,  -^,  -t* 

art,  bie  ^unft,  pi.  -e, 

artist,  ber  tunftler,  -^,  -;  (ber  toi'jl, 

-en,  -en)» 
as  +  al^ ;  tnbem ;  tok ;  as  —  as,  fo — aU ; 

fo  —  mie;  as  if,  aU  ob;  al^  t»enn;  as 

when,  aU  tvenn;  n)te  mm* 
ask,  fragen  ;    —  for,  bitten  (urn,  w. 

ace),  sir.  V.,  2. 
asp,  bie  ^'^atter,  pi.  -n, 
assemble,  jufammen!ommenr  str.  iF., 

sep. 
assist,  l)elfen,  str.  III.,  3,  w.  dat. 
assistant,  ber  ®e^ulfe,  -n,  -n* 
associate,  ^.,  fi^  gefeHen. 
astonish,  to  be  — ed,  ftu|en  (306, 7). 
attack,  v.,  angretfen,  str.  Z ,  1 ;  sep. 
attract,  anjte^en,  str.  11. ,  2  ;  sep. 
aught,  for  —  I  care,  meinettDegen* 
August  +  ber  5lugu'|l. 
aunt  +  bie  Slante,  pi.  -n. 
author,  ber  (Sc^riftjleller,  -^,  -♦ 
avenue,  bie  StUe'e,  pi.  -n» 
avoid,  meibett/  str.  I.,  2. 

back,  adv.,  juritd. 

bad,  fc^Iimm* 

band  (=  troop),  bie  ^^adx,  pi.  -en; 
poetical :  ba^  S5olf,  -e<^ ;  —  of  rob- 
bers +  bie  9flaukrbanbe,  pi.  -n. 

banish  (=  cast  away),  ftd)  entfd^tagen, 
str.  VII.,  w.  gen. 

bank  +  bie  S3an!,  pi.  -en. 

baptism,  bie  S^aufe,  pL  -n* 

bare,  v.,  entMo§en* 

barn,  bie  Sc^eune,  pi.  -n* 

basin,  topograph.,  ber  ^effel,  -^,  -♦ 

bear,  n.,  +  ber  S3dr,  -en,  -en. 

bear,  ^.,  tragen,  str.  VI. ;  iiberne^^'men, 
str.  IV. 

beast  (=  cattle),  baig  S^ie^,  -e^. 

beat  to  death,  totf(^ta9en,«^r.  VI,  sep. 


beautiful,  Win* 

beauty,  bie  ©c^iJn^eit,  pi.  -en. 

because,  mW  {sudor d.  conj.). 

become,  tDerben  (110). 

bed,  n.,  +  ha^  S3ett(e),  -(e)a,  -en. 

before,  adv.^  jui?or;  conj.f^fQcx,  efie; 
prepos.  +  ijor* 

begin,  anfangen,  str.  VII.,  sep, 

behold  !  fteje ! 

being,  n.,  ba§  SBefen,  -^,  ~* 

believe,  glau^en  {w.  dat.  of  person), 
to  make  one  — ,  einen  glaukn 
tttac^en. 

bell,  bie  ®Io(!e,  pi.  -n* 

bell-founder,  ber  ©locfengieper,  -^,  -♦ 

belong,  gepren,  w.  dat. 

beloved,  gellebt. 

belt,  n.,  ber  ®iirtel,  -^,  -♦ 

benefactor,  ber  S[Bo|lt^ater,  -^,  -* 

benevolent,  |ilfrei(^. 

besiege,  fcelagern. 

better,  best  +  ^effer,  beft. 

between  +  pifc^en  (306, 10). 

bid,  'd.,  \)Z\^tn,  str,  VII,  2. 

bind  +  binben,  str.  Ill,  1 ;  refl.,  |t(^ 
»erj)fli(^ten  gegen,  w.  ace. 

bird,  ber  SJogel,  -^,  -. 

bishop  +  ber  S3iWof,  -^,  -e. 

black,  fc^warj. 

Black-Forest,  ber  (5^tt)ar^alb,  -i^* 

blame,  to  be  to  —  for,  fd)ulb  fein  an 
{w.  dat.). 

bleed  +  Muten. 

bless,  fegnen. 

blessing,  berfSegen,-^. 

blood  +  baa  S5lut,  -e^. 

bloody  +  blutig. 

blow,  n.,  ber  ©treic^,  -e^,  -e;  mur- 
derous — ,  ber  2)?orbflreid^. 

blow,  v.,  t^epn. 

blue  +  blan. 

boast,  ^.,  (ftd))  rii^men;  ^jra^Ien* 


VOCABULARY. 


69 


body,  ber  ^orper,  -^,  -;  (the  human), 

ber  Sei^r  -e^,  -er ;  dead  — ,  ber  Setc^^ 

nam,  -^,  -e. 
Bohemian,  adj.,  +  Ibij^mifc^* 
boil,  v.,  !o(|en. 
bold,  fit^n* 

book  +  ha^  ^u^,  -ea,  -er, 
border,  ^.,  Begrenjen* 
born  +  geboren,  p,  p.  of  geMretir  str. 

IV. 
bosom  +  ber  SBufeit,  -^,  -♦ 
bottle,  n.,  bie  ^5laf(^e,  pi.  -n* 
bow,  to  —  down,  biitfen* 
boy,  ber  ^nabt,  -n,  -n* 
bracelet,  bie  (Bpange,  pi.  -n* 
braggadocio,    ber    ©ort^elb,    -en, 

-en* 
brain,  ba^  ®e^irn,  -^,  -u 
branch,   7^.,  ber  ^%  -e^,  -e ;    ber 

BtDcig,  -ee,  -e* 
bread  +  ba^  23rotf  -t^,  -t. 
break,  v.,  +  Brec^en,  str,   7F.,  (= 

tear),  jerrei^en,  str.  /.,  1. 
breakfast,  v. ,  frii^jlucfen* 
breast  +  bie  ^xu%  pi.  -u 
breath,  ber  ^an^,  -e^» 
breathe,  atmen* 
bridal,  —  room,  ba^  S5rautgema(^,  -e^, 

-er* 
bright,  l^errlic^ ;  to  be  — ,  glcinjen* 
bring  +  t)ritt9en,  irr.  (119,  2) ;  — 

forth,  gebaren,  str.  IV.;  —  here, 

l^er^olen,  sep. 
brook,  ber  ^a^,  -t^,  -t. 
brother  +  ber  S3rnber,  -^,  -♦ 
build,  kuen» 
building,  ber  S3au  (51). 
bulwark,  bie  (Sd^anj(e),  pi.  -(e)n* 
business,  ba^  ©efd^aft,  -e^,  -e* 
bust  +  bie  S3itfief  pi.  -n* 
busy,  Qefc^aftig* 
but,    conj.y    a^er  ;    attein  ;    fonbern 


(320,  2,  Remark);    {—  only), 

nur. 
buy,  laufen* 

cable,  n.,  +  ba^  ^aM,  -^,  -♦ 

cage  +  ber  ^ciftgr  -^,  -e, 

call,  x).y  rufen;  berufen,  str.  VII.  y  2; 

nennen,  irr.  (119) :  to  —  upon  (= 

pay  a  visit),  I)efud)en. 
camp,  "iiCi^  Sager,  -^,  -♦ 
can,  v.  (=  am  able),  +  !i)nnen  (135, 

3). 
capital,  bie  |)au^t|labt,  pi.  -e. 
captain,  ber  ^auptmann,  -^  (172). 
card  +  bie  ^arte,  pi.  -n* 
carpenter,  ber  Bintmermanttf  -^(172). 
cashier  +  ber  ^afft'rer,  -^,  -. 
carry  on,  fo'rtfnjren;  sep.  ;  —  out, 

ijoEfii'^ren* 
cast,  «.,  n)erfen,   str.  Ill,   3  ;   — 

away,  n)egtr>erfenf  sep. 
castle,  ba^  (Sc^lo§,  @(^loffe^,  ©(^lolTer* 
catechise  +  !ated)ifteren* 
cause,  7^.,  bie  Urfad)e,  _29^.  -n;  ber  Va^ 

fprung,  -^,  -e  (origin), 
cavalry,  bie  9ieiterei\ 
cease,  aufboren,  sep. 
celebrate,  feiern* 
certain,  — ly,  gett>t§» 
chain,  n.,  +  bie  ^ctte,^?.  -n* 
chapter  +  ba^  ta^ji'tel  -^,  -♦ 
Charles  +  ^arL 
Charlotte  +  d^arlo'tte,  -n^  ;   Sotte, 

-na* 
charm,    tJ.,  bannen  in  II.  S.,   Ex. 

XXX. 
cheat,  «.,  Betrtigen,  «^r.  //.,  2. 
cheek,  bie  SEBange,  p^.  -n;  bie  a3adfef 

^?.  -n. 
cheerfully,  getrofl,  455,  3. 
cherry  +  bie  ^irfc^e,  pi.  -n» 
chest  +  bie  ^ifte,  pi.  -tt> 


70 


VOCABULARY. 


child  +  bae  ^inb,  -e^,  -er. 
chisel,  n. ,  ber  5DZet^eI,  -^,  -♦ 
cholera  +  bie  S^olera. 
choose,  JDa^lettf  emciMen. 
Christian,  ti.,  +  ber  Sferijl,  -en,  -en; 

church  +  bie  ^trc^^e,  pi.  -n* 

circumstance,  ber  Umftanb;  -e^,  -e* 

city,  bie  ©tabt,  jpl.  -e. 

Cleopatra  +  ^leo'patra* 

clear,  — ly,  +  Har;  beutltd^, 

climb,  jleigen,  str.  Z,  2. 

cloak,  ber  SD'JanteU  -^i  -♦ 

close,  adj.y  bumpf* 

close,  «.,   fc^liefen,  str.  II.,  1;   ijer^ 

[(^liegen. 
cloth,  baa  ^itd),  -e^,  e» 
coat,  ber  9fto(!,  -e^,  -e» 
coffee  +  ber  ^affee,  -a* 
cold  +  !alt,  comp.  falter;  —  weather, 

bie  ^dlte. 
colonel,  ber  Dberjl,  -en,  -en* 
come  +  fommen,  str.  IV. 
comedian,  ber  ilommobia'nt,  -en,  -en» 
command,  n.,  ber  S3efe^l,  -a,  -e. 
command,  «.,  kfel)len,  str.  IV.  y  w. 

dot. 
commandment,  \i^^  ®e^ot,  -eS,  -e. 
commence,  anfangen,  str.  VII.,  1, 

Sep. 
commercial,  —  people,  \>0i^  |)anbcla^ 

ijolf,  -e^,  -er. 
commit,  I^ege^en  (136) ;  to  be  com^ 

mitted  (=  to  happen),  gefc^el^en, 

str.  v.,  1. 
companion,  ber  ®eno§,  ©enoffen,  ®e^ 

noffen* 
company,  bie  ®efellf(^aft,  pi.  -en;  (of 

soldiers)  +  bie  ^ompanie',  pi.  -en. 
comparative,  ber  ©o'mparatiijf  -a,  -e* 
comparatively,  ioer^dltnipmafiG* 
compel,  jtDingett,  str.  Ill,  1, 


complain,  flagen  ;  to  —  of,  ftc^  ^e^ 

fd^raeren  iiber  iv).  ace). 
complaint,  bie  ^lage,  pi.  -n. 
comprehend,  faffen;  =  fathom,  er*= 

gritnben. 
comprise,    einfd^liepen,    str.    II. ,   1, 

sep. 
compulsion,  ber  BttJang,  -e^* 
comrade,  ber  ®efd^rte,  -n,  -n. 
concert  +  ba^  donce'rt,  -e^,  -e* 
conclude,  fd)lie§en,  str.  II.,  1. 
conference  ^-  bie  ^onfere'nj,  pi.  -en* 
confess,  geftetjen,  str.  VI. 
conflagration,  bie  ^euer^brunfi  (173). 
confuse,    make    confused,    verlegen 

madden* 
conquer,  Bejn>inc|en,  str.  Ill,  1 ;  (a 

land),  erobern;  (a  people),  kftegen. 
conqueror,  ber  ©roberer,  -a,  -. 
conscious,  ben?u§t  {w.  gen.). 
consider,   iikriegen  ;   {—  estimate), 

|)alten  fitr  {w.  ace.),  str.  VII.,  1; 

yermeinen  (rare). 
considerable,  bebeutenb. 
consistent,  to  be  —  with,  jtc^  Jjer^* 

tragen  ntit,  str.  VL 
consolation,  ber  %xt^^,  -e^* 
consult,  I)era'tf(^lagen  (547,  2). 
contemporaries,  bie  (9)iit)  SSelt* 
contention,  ber  Ban!,  -e^* 
contest,  -y.,  Beftreiten,  str.  Z,  1. 
contrast,  n.,  +  ber  Sontra'fl,  -e^,  -e* 
control,  «.,  regieren* 
cool,  v.  intr. ,  +  |i($  aMii^Ien,  sep.  ; 

jtc^  ijerfit^len. 
cooling-,  adj.  part.,  +  fii^Ienb;  frifd). 
cost,  ^.,  4-  fofien* 
cough,  -y.,  ^ujlen* 
count,  n.,  ber  ®raf,  -en,  -en. 
count,   ^.,   (upon),   rec^nen  (auf,   w, 

a/x.). 
countess,  bie  ®rdftn,  pi.  -nen. 


VOCABULARY. 


71 


country,  ba^  Sanb,  -c^^  -cr ;  in  the  — , 

auf  bent  2. ;  into  the  — ,  auf  ba^  C. 
courage,  ber  WlnU  -(e)^* 
course,  of  — ,  natMid^* 
court  (of  justice),  ba^  ©ertd^t,  -esg, 

-e;  (of  a  prince),  ber  |)of,  -e^,  -e* 
cradle,  n.,  bie  SBtege^  pL  -m 
crane  +  ber  ^rani^,  -^,  -t* 
create,  (er)f(^affenf  str.  VI. 
crime,  bci^  3)er^re($en,  -^,  -♦ 
critic  +  ber  ^ritifer,  -^,  -;  ber  Seur^ 

t^eiler,  -^,  -♦ 
crowd  (in  motion),  ha^  ©ebrdngef  -^. 
crowded,  ijoH, 

crumble,  jerfaHen,  s^r.  Fii!  (w.  fern). 
cry,  7^.,  ba^  ©efd^ret,  -e^» 
culprit,  ber  ©c^ulbige,  -tt,  -n, 
cunning,  n.j  bie  5lrgU)l. 
cup,  n.,  ber  SSec^er,  -^,  -♦ 
current  (of  a  river),  bie  Stxmun^, 

pi.  -en. 
curse,  71.,  ber  f5iu<i)f  -c^f  -^• 
curse,  v.,  fluc^en,  w.  dat.  of  person; 

i)erflu(^en#  w.  ace. 
custom,  ber  SBrauc^,  -t^,  -e. 

dagger,  ber  t)ti\6),  -i^,  -e. 

dainties,  fiige  ^oj!^ 

damage,  i).,  :6efc^abtgett. 

damp,  adj.y  feuc^t. 

dance,  -y.,  +  tanjem 

danger,  bie  ®efa^r,  pi.  -en. 

Danube  +  bie  2)onau. 

Danubian  Principalities,  bie  !Do* 

nau^f^itrjlentitmer. 
dare  +  bitrfen  (135,  2). 
dark,  bunfel. 

daughter  +  bie  Zo^Xix,  pi.  -. 
dawn,  -y.,  +  tagen. 
day  +  ber  %<xo,,  -e^, -e;  to-day,  t)eute. 
dead,  n.y  +  ber  STote,  -n,  -n. 
dead,  adj.,  +  tot. 


deal,  10.,  (a  blow),  ftt^i^en;  —  with, 

nntge^en  mit,  sep. 
dear  +  teuer. 

death  +  ber  %\ih,  -ea  (173). 
deceive,  ktriigen,  str.  II.,  2  ;  ^inter^ 

ge^en,  str.  VIL,  in  II.  S,  Ex.  35. 
Declaration  of  Independence,  bie 

Unab^angtgfett^erllarung. 
declare  +  erfldren. 
decree,  n.,  bie  i^UQUng,  pi.  -en  (dis- 
pensation), 
deed  +  bie  %^at,  pi.  -en. 
deep,  -^ly,  +  ttef. 
dedicate,  etntt)et^en,  sep. 
defeat,  v.,  ibeftegen. 
defend,  ba^  Sort  reben  {w.  dat.). 
defendant,  ber  ^IngeHagte,  -n,  -n. 
defy,  tro^en. 

delay,  n.y  ber  Stufent^alt,  -eg. 
delay,  v.  fdumen. 
delight,  n.,  ber  ®en«g^  ©enuffe^,  @e^ 

nitffe. 
deliver  (a  letter,  etc.),  I^eforgen. 
delivery  +  bte  iQteferung,  pi.  -en;  bie 

5IugUeferung. 
demand,   v.,   to  —  something   of 

(from)  one,  (£tnem  etwag  anftnnen, 

str.  III.,  2;  sep. 
deny,  leugnen. 

descend,  !^eraHontnten,  str.  IV.,  sep. 
describe,  fd^ilbern. 
desert,  v.,  abfaHen  (»on),  str.  VII.,  1. 
design,  n.,  bie  Slbfic^t,  pi.  -en;  ber 

9)Ian,  -eg,  -e. 
desire,  n.,  ber  SBunfc^,  -eg,  -e;  bie 

;8ufl;  —  for  combat,  bie  ^ampf* 

kgier. 
desire,  v.,  kge^ren. 
destiny,  bag  ®efc^i(f,  -eg,  -e* 
determine,  bejlimmen. 
detest,  ijerabfc^euen. 
devote,  n)ibnten. 


72 


VOCABULAKY. 


diamond  +  ber  T)iama'ntf  -en,  -en^ 
die,  v.,  jlerkitr  str.  III.,  3. 
different,  ijerfd^teben;  anber^ 
difficult,  [c^tper. 

difficulty,  bie  <B^xom\^h\h  pi.  -en* 
dig,  grakn,  str.  VI. 
diligently,  peiiig. 
dim,  v.y  trubem 

diminish,  [d)meljenf  str.  VIII. 
disappear,  i?erfc^n)ittben,  str.  III.,  1. 
discharge,  -».,  entlaffen,  str.  VII ,  1. 
discontent,  ber  UntDtlle,  -n^. 
disgraceful  (to),  fc^im^fltd^  {w.  dat.). 
disgusting,  efltg;  efeL 
dislike  {strongly),  l^affen* 
dispose  (of),  ijerfitgen  (iiber), 
distance,  n.,  bie  ^^erne* 
distress,  n.,  ber  ©c^merj,  -e^,  -en» 
do  +  t^un;  —  without,  entbe^ren, 
dog,  ber  ^unb,  -e^,  -e, 
doleful,  flaglic^* 

dollar  +  ber  2)otta'r,  -^,  -^  {sUent). 
door  +  bie  %^\ix,  pi.  -en* 
down,  ^r^p.,  entlang* 
dozen  +  ba^  Du^enb,  -t^,  -c. 
draw,  jie^en,  s^r.  II,  2. 
drink,  Ti.,  +  ber  Slranf,  -e^,  -e. 
drink,  «.,  +  trinfen,  «^r.  ZC,  1. 
drive,  v.,  +  XxtxltXi,  str.  7.,  2 ;  (=ride), 

fa|ren,  str,  VI. 
drunk  +  ktrun!en» 
dry,  adj.,  +  trodett* 
due,  to  be  — ,  ge^u^ren,  w.  dat. 
duke  +  ber  |)erjog,  -^,  -e* 
duration  +  bie  !l)auer* 
during,  tt)d|renb  (302,  12). 
dust,  ber  ©taub,  -e^* 
Dutch,  n.y  ber  ^liebcrlanber,  -^» 

each  other,  einanber* 

early,  frii^» 

earn,  crtt>er0enr  str.  III,  3  ;  i>erbteitetu 


earnings,  ber  S^erbienfl,  -e^,  -e» 

earth  +  bie  Srbe,  pi,  -n* 

earthly  +  irbifd^, 

easily,  leic^t* 

Easter  +  Djlern  (174,  &). 

easy,  Iei(^t, 

eat  +  effen,  str.  V.,  1. 

egg  +  ha^  (£t,  -^,  -er* 

Egyptian,  adj.,  +  ag^ptifd^. 

eight  +  ac^t* 

either  —  or,  entnjeber  —  ober. 

Elbe  +  bie  (£lk* 

else,  fonjl* 

emigrant,  ber  STu^njanberer,  -^,  -♦ 

emperor,  ber  ^aifer,  -^,  -. 

empty,  adj.,  leer* 

end,  n..  +  ba^  ©nbe,  pi.  -n* 

end,  v.,  aufloren,  sep. 

enemy,  ber  i^eiub,  -e^,  -e» 

English,  adj.,  +  englifd^* 

enjoy,  geniepen,  str.  II.,  1 ;  ftd^  er^^ 

freuen,  ^.  ^67i. ;  fcl)n)el9en  in,  w.  dat. 
enlist,  njerben,  str.  III.,  3. 
ensnare,  umfpannen* 
enterprise,  basg  Unterne^'men,  -^,  -. 
entire,  — ly,  ganj* 
equal  (to),  gleic^,  w.  dat. 
erection  +  bie  ©rrtc^tung,  -en* 
err  +  irren* 

escape,  itmge'^en  (136). 
especial,  kfonber  {only  used  attribttr 

tively  [211]). 
estates,  bie  <Stanbe  (pi.). 
esteem,  7^.,  bie  ^Id^tung* 
Europe  +  Suro'pa* 
European  +  europa'ifc^* 
even,  felbjl  (249,  1)  ;  foga'r* 
evening  +  ber  5(knb,  -ed,  -e. 
ever,  ie ;  —  so,  ttO(^  fo* 
everybody,  jeber,  jebermann* 
everything,  atte^* 
evil,  n,y  S3ofe^,  H^  Sofc. 


VOCABULAKY. 


73 


evil,  adj.,  Bfe, 

exactly,  genau* 

example,  ba^  Seifptel,  -<§,  -e« 

Excellency,  bie  ©xcelle'nj,  pi.  -en» 

excellent,  — ly,  treflid)* 

except,  v.,  au^nc^men,  s^r.  /F.,  sep. 

exchange,  ^.,  ijertaufd^en;  to  —  for, 

i)ertauf(^en  mit« 
exclaim,  rufen;  au^rufett,5^r.  F/Z,3; 

Sep. 
excuse,  ^.,  entfc^ulbigen* 
exhaust,  angreifen,  s^r.  /.,  1 ;  56j?. 
exhibit,  ^.,  jetgen* 
exile,  -y.,  ijerbannen;  be^  Sanbe^  ijer^* 

tunfen,  s^r.  /.,  2;  »ertreikn,  str.  Z,  2. 
exist,  ijorljanben  fein, 
expect,  ermartem 
explain,  erflaren,  erlautern, 
expose,  prei^geben,  str.  F.,  1 ;  sep. 

fact,  bte  21^atfa(|e,  pi.  -n. 

fail  +  fe^len, 

fair,  fc^on;  the  —  one,  bte  Sd)one. 

faith,  ber  ®lau^e(n);  see  46,  4. 

fall,  -y.,  4-  faHen,  str.  VII.,  1  ;  —  to 

the  share  of,  ju  tetl  merben  (190) ; 

—  into,  ^ineinfaHenf  sep. 
fall  asleep,  einfc^lafen,  str.  VII.,  1, 

sep. 
fame,  bcr  diul^m,  -t^* 
family  +  bie  ^ami'Ue,  pi.  -n* 
fancy,  ber  T)mtd,  -5* 
farther  and  farther,  immer  iretter. 
far,  not  —  from,  unmeit  (302,  10). 
fasten,  !nuj)fen» 
fate,  ba^  ©efcbicf,  -e^,  -c;  ba^  <B^[d^ 

\aU  -^,  -e;   +  ba^  f^atunt,  -^. 
favor,  ?i.,  bie  (S)un|l, 
favor,  «.,  l^olb  fein,  «<).  dat. 
favorite,  ber  ©itnjllingf  -^,  -u 
feather  +  bie  ^eber,  pi.  -n* 
feed,  v.,  na^rett;  +  fiittern, 
4 


feel  +  fit^Ien;  fpitren;  ijerfpiiren. 
feeling  +  ba^  ®efit^l,  -^,  -c» 
fellow,  ber  SBurfc^e,  -tt,  -n,  also  str. 

II.  ;  ber  (55efeEe,  -n,  -n» 
ferry-man  +  ber  i^ci^rmann,  -^,  jp?. 

i^a^rleute* 
fever  +  ha^  ^ie^er,  -^,  -♦ 
few,  a  — ,  einigef  tvenige* 
fidelity,  bie  2^reue« 
field,  bie  ^lur,  pi  -en  (poetical);  ber 

Mtx,  -^,  -;  +  bae  i^elb,  -e^,  -er» 
fight,  v.,  +  fec^ten,  «^r.  FZZT. 
finally,  enblid^. 

fine,  adj.,  +  \mx,  fd>on  in  II.  S.  Ex.  36. 
find  +  finben,  str.  HI,  1. 
finger  +  ber  i^inger,  -^,  -. 
fire,  n.,  +  ba^  ^euer,  -$,  -♦ 
fire,  V.  {=  shoot),  fd)iepen,  str,  ZZi,  1, 
first,  see  532,  1. 
fix  upon,  kftimmem 
fish,  v.,  +  fifc^en* 
fleet,  +  bte  ^^totte,  pi.  -n^ 
Flemish  +  flamif(^« 
fleshy,  bi(f. 
floor,  ber  S3obett,  -^,  - ;  ber  ijuPobcnj 

(bie  (£rbe)« 
flow,  v.,  flte^en,  s^r.  iZ,  1;   (^aA^« 

aux.  feinX 
flower,  bie  25lume,  pi.  -n* 
following  +  folgenb, 
fool,  ber  ^f)or,  -en,  -en;  ber  5^arr,  -en, 

-en* 
foot  +  ber  %u^,  -e^,  -e. 
for,  conj.  benn;  prep.  +  fitr  (304,  3). 
forbid  +  »erMeten,  str.  II,  2. 
forefathers,  bie  35orfa^ren. 
foreigner,  ber  trembling.  -<3,  -e, 
foremost,  ber  erfle» 
forfeit,  v.,  »erf(^erjen* 
/orge,  -y.,  falf^en;  ijerfdlfd^en. 
Icrgetful  of  one's  duty,  pflfd^t^et*' 

GclTen  (548,  2,  a). 


74 


VOCABULARY. 


forgive  +  'otx^tUn,  str.  V.,  1. 
former,  the  —  the  latter,  biefer  — 

formerly,  frii^er, 

forsake,  ^erlaffen,  str.  VIL 

fortnight,  ^ierje^n  Slage, 

fortunate,  glucflid)* 

fortune,  bas^  ©IM,  -e^, 

four  +  ijier;  —  times,  ijiermaU 

fourth,    n,y    +   \iCi^  fQ'mitX,   -^,  - 

(532). 
France  +  %x(inixd6^,  -^* 
free,  adj,y  +  frei. 
free,  «.,  +  Befreien* 
freed  (from),  lebtg  {w.  gen.). 
freeze  +  frieren,  str.  II.,  2. 
French,  n. ,  see  Frenchman. 
French,  adj.,  +  franjoftfc^. 
Frenchman  +  ber  ^ranjofe,  -n,  -xu 
frequently,  oft. 
fresh  +  frifd). 

friend  +  ber  i^reunb,  -e^,  -e. 
from,  ^oit  (303,  15). 
froth,  ber  ©c^auntr  -e^. 
fruit  +  bie  ?^ruc^t,  pi.  -e. 
full  +  iJOtt* 
furious,  tDutenb. 
furnace,  ber  Dfen,  -^,  -♦ 
future,  bic  3ufunft. 

gable  +  ber  ©ie^el,  -^,  -♦ 

gaily,  lujltg. 

gain,  v.,  gewtnnen,  str,  iJJ.,  3. 

garment,  ba^  ®ett>anb,  -e^,  -er. 

garrison,  bie  SBefa^uttg,  pi.  -en. 

gate,  ba^  Ztir>x,  -t^,  -e. 

general,  n.,  ber  ©eneral,  -^,  -e;  ber 

f^elb^err,  -n,  -eit. 
general,  adj.,  aUgemein. 
generosity,  bie  ®ro§muU 
gentleman,  ber  ^err,  -it,  -en* 
gentleness,  bie  (Sanftmut. 


gently,  leife* 

gentry,  bie  (Sbelleute  (172). 

George  +  ©eorg. 

German,  n.y  ber  Deutf(^e,  -n,  -n. 

German,  adj.,  beutfc^* 

Germany,  i)eutfc^lanb,  -^* 

gift  +  bie  (3aU,  pi.  -n. 

gigantic  +  gigantifd^* 

give  +  gekn,  str.  F.,  1. 

glad,  fro§. 

gladly,  germ 

glance,  n.,  ber  S3U(f,  -e^,  -t* 

gloomy,  f(|tt)arj. 

glow,  v.,  +  gluten. 

gnav7  +  nagen;  to  —  one's  mind, 
(Sinem  am  ^erjen  nagen* 

go  +  ge^en  (136);  to  —  out,  au^^ 
ge^en/  sep. ;  (out  of  the  room,  etc.) 
Itnau^ge^^en,  sep.;  (of  light,  fire, 
etc.)  erlof^en,  str.  VIII  (133). 

goblet,  ber  S3e(^er,  -^,  -♦ 

godfather,  ber  9)at(^)e,  -n,  -n. 

godlike,  gotta^nlic^* 

gold  +  ba^  ®olb,  -ei3. 

Goliath  +  ©o'Uat^. 

good,  n.,  +  ba^  ®ut,  -e^,  -er. 

good,  adj.,  +  gut. 

good-for-nothing  (fellow),  ber 
Zan^m^t^,  -,  -e. 

good-natured,  ptarttg. 

government,  bie  Olegierungf  pi.  -en. 

governor,  ber  Canbijogt,  -e^,  -e. 

gracious,  gnabtg. 

gradually,  aEnta()Ug. 

grand,  gro§,  gro^artig. 

grandmother,  bie  ®ro§mwtterf  pi.  -♦ 

grant,  v.,  gewci^ren;  5?ergonnen. 

grave,  n.,  +  ba^  ®xa^,  -t^,  -er. 

great-grandmother,  bie  Urgrop* 
mutter*  pi.  -. 

greatly,  fe^r. 

greet  +  griipen. 


VOCABULARY. 


75 


greeting  +  bcr  ®Tm§,  -e^,  -e, 
grenadier  +  ber  ©rmabier,  -^,  -e* 
grieve,  [corner jen» 
groom,  n.,  htx  ^BtaUfnt^t,  -t^f  -e. 
grow,  njad^fettf  str.  VI. ;  (=  become), 

tverben* 
guard,  V,  (against),  fi(^  pteit  VOX,  w, 

dat. 
guest  +  ber  ®af!,  -zi,  -€♦ 
guide,  M.,  ber  ^ii^rcr,  -^,  -♦ 
guilt,  bie  (5(^ulb,  pi.  -en  =  debts, 
gush  forth,  (^ueUen,  str.  VIII.  (133). 

hair  +  basJ  ^aar,  -e^,  -e^ 

half  +  i^alb;  «ee  229* 

ham,  ber  'B^mkx^,  -^p  -• 

hand  +  bie  -^anb,  ^^.  - c. 

handsome,  fc^muc!. 

hang  +  er^^angen  (of  persons). 

happen,  gefc^e^en,  str.  F.,  1. 

happiness,  ba^  ®iM,  -e^. 

hard  +  ^art;  jlreng  (of  work). 

hardly,  fautn* 

harm,  ber  (B^ahtn,  -$,  " . 

harmless,  uttfc^ulbig;  fromm. 

harmony,  bie  (^inigfett. 

hat  +  ber  ^ut,  -e^,  -♦ 

hate  +  ^ajfett* 

head,  ber  ^o^f,  -e«,  -e;  {=  chief)  ba^ 

hear  +  pren* 

heart  -f  baa  ^erj,  -en^,  ctt;  bie  ©ruft* 
heath  4-  bie  ^eibe,  pL  -n. 
heathen  +  ber  |)etbe,  -tt,  -n. 
heaven,  ber  ^immel,  -^,  -. 
heavenly,  ^immlifc^* 
heir,  ber  <SrBe,-n,-n  (162,  3d  group), 
help  +  ^elfen,  sir.  III.,  3. 
Henry  +  ^einrid^, 
herdsman  +  ber  |>irte,  -n,  -n. 
here  +  ^ier;  here  —  there,  §ier  — 
i>a  (bort)« 


hero,  ber  ^elb,  -en,  -en, 
hesitate,  S3ebenfen  tragen,  str.  VI. 
hey  !  +  ei ! 
hide,  V.  ^erptten* 
high-treason,  ber  |)0(^venat,  -$. 
Highness,  bie  2)urci^kud^t ;  bie  'Bnxi^^ 

himself,  felbfl  (249),  preceded  by  a 
case  of  er^ 

hiss,  V.J  jifc^en;  there  was  a  hiss- 
ing, ea  stf(^te» 

history,  bie  ®tf(^tc^te,  pi.  -en» 

hoe,  ^atfen* 

hold  +  l^dten,  str.  VII,  1. 

Holland  +  ^ollanb,  -^. 

home,  n.,  +  ba^  ^eim,  -e^,  -c;  \)ci^ 
|)aua,  -ea,  -er^ 

home,  adv.,  nad)  |)aufc. 

Homer  +  |)ome'r, 

honor,  n.,  bie  ^^v.\ 

honor,  ■??.,  e^ren, 

honorable,  e^rcn^otf^ 

hope  +  l^offen* 

horde  +  bie  |)orbe,  pl.y  -n, 

horror,  baa  ®rauen,  -a. 

horse,  baa  9!>ferb,  -^a,  -e, 

hot  +  |ei§ ;  —  weather,  bie  ^i^c» 

hour,  bie  Stunbe,  pi.  -n;  an  — 's 
walk,  eine  ^tunbe  SBegea^ 

house  +  ta^  ^aua,  -ea,  -er» 

how?  +  tt>ie? 

however,  t»ie  auc^;  J»ie  tmmn;  — 
much,  n)ie  an(^, 

human,  ntenfd^Ud^* 

humble,  bcmitttg^ 

humility,  bie  2)emut» 

humor,  ill  — ,  ber  ttnmut,  -a, 

hundred  +  ^unbert 

Hungarian,  adj.,  +  ungarifc^* 

hunger  +  ber  ^Junger,  -a. 

hunt,  v.,  jagen;  auf  bie  Sagb  gc^cn^ 

huntsman,  ber  S^gcr,  -a,  -♦ 


76 


VOCABULARY, 


hurriedly,  fc^nell;  ciUg, 
hut  +  tie  ^iitte,  pi.,  -n, 

ice  +  ba^  Si^,  -c^. 

idea,  ber  S^egrif,  -e^,  -e» 

idolize,  ijergottern. 

if,  tt>mn. 

ill  (=  sick),  franf* 

ill-fortune,  ba^  Ungliiif,  -^» 

ill-humor,  ber  Itmnut,  -^* 

illuminate,  erleu(|ten. 

illusion,  ber  ^<x\xi,  -^^* 

imag-e,  'iSk^  ®ebtlbe,  -^,  -♦ 

imagine,  jic^  benfcn  (119),  w.  dot,;  to 

—  one's  self,  jtc^  biinfen* 
imitate,  Xii!i6:^a1:}mtti,  sep. 
immediately,  fofo'rt,  fogtei'^, 
immutable,  imtt>anbclBar» 
impatient  (for),  begierig  (na^). 
impel,  treiben,  «^r.  Z,  2. 
imperfection,    bie  Uuijollfommeti^eitf 

pi  -en, 
imperial,  !ai[erU(|. 
implore,  erfle^en, 
important,  tpid^tig. 
importunity,  bie  3u'bnngli(|!eit. 
impossible,  unmogltc^, 
impressive,  einbr«(f^sjott, 
imprint  (on),  eii^jragen  (w.  dat.),  sep. 
impulse,  ber  !Drang,  -e^* 
in  +  tit  (305,  1,  5). 
incline,  iteigeiu 
incomparably,  itngletd^. 
incomprehensibly,  itnbegreiflid^. 
incontestably,  unwiberfprec^Uc^, 
increase,  !oergro§ern, 
independence,  bie  UnaBl^angigfett, 
Indian  +  ber  3nbia'ner,  -^,  -♦ 
industry,  ber  ^leifr-e^^  ber  Stm^i^ 

fletp;  -e^. 
infantry,  ba^  i^u^ijotf,  -e^. 
information,  bie  ^uitbe^ 


inherit,  erBen;  ererkn, 
innocence,  bie  Unf^ulb. 
innocent,  unf^ulbig, 
inquire  (of),  attfragen  (6ei);  —  after, 

frogeu  uac^, 
insensible,  itnem^ftttblic^. 
in  spite  of,  see  302,  9. 
instead  +  anfiatt. 
instruction,  ber  Hnterrid)!,  -C, 
intelligence  (=  news),  bie  ^unbe. 
intelligent,  !lug,  inteKtge^nt. 
intention,    bie   §{^ji(|t,  pi.   -n;    ber 

SBitte,  -n^,  -n, 
intercept,  auffangen,  sir.  VII.,  1;  sep. 
interest,  to  take  an  —  in,  teilttel^men 

att,  Sftr.  IV.,  Sep. 
interest,  to  —  one's  self  for  one,  jic^ 

jemanbc^  anne^mem  str.  IV.,  sep. 
interesting,  intereffa'm, 
intermittent,  —  fever,  ba^  SBed^fel*' 

fiet>er,  -^,  -♦ 
into,  in,  w.  ace. 

invention,  bie  Srftnbung,  pi.  -en* 
invisible,  itn|i(^tkr» 
iron,  n.,  +  ba^  ©ifen,  -^,  -♦ 
iron,  adj.y  +  eifern, 
itself,  felbfi  (249). 

January  +  ber  Sanuar,  -4* 
jealousy,  bie  ©iferfui^t, 
Jew  +  ber  3ube,  -n,  -n. 
jokingly,  im  Od^erj* 
journey,  bie  9fteife,  pi.  -n, 
joy,  bie  2u|i;  bie  i^reube,^^.  -n. 
judge,  71.,  ber  IRx6^tix,  -^,  -. 
judge,  -p.,  rid)tem 

judgment,  ha^  Xixttxl,  -t^,  -e;   ha^ 
®eri(^t,  -e^,  -e» 

keep,  fatten,  str.  VII.,  1 ;  to — house 

+  lau^^alten,  sep. 
keeper,  ber  fitter,  -^,  -♦ 


VOCABULARY. 


77 


key,  ber  ©^luffeX/  -^r  -♦ 

kill,  toten^ 

kilogram  +  ba^  ^ilogramm,  -(3,  -e. 

kind,  n,t  bie  ^xi,  pi,  -en;  ber  ©c^Iag, 

-e^,  -e* 
kind,  adj.y  gut;  freunblid). 
king  +  ber  ^onig,  -^,  -e, 
knead  +  fneten* 
kneel  +  fnieem 
knife,  ha^  9)ieffer,  -^r  -♦ 
knight,  ber  Skitter,  -^f  -♦ 
knock,  flopfen* 
know,  tr>tffen  (135) ;  (=  to  recognize 

by),  erfennen  (an)» 
knowledge,  bie  3Biffenfd)aft. 

landing  +  bie  !2anbung. 

language,  bie  ©prad^e,  pi,  -n. 

lantern  +  bie  Caterne,  pi.  -n, 

large,  gro§. 

last,  nd;.,  +  le^t* 

last,  -p.,  bauern. 

late,  fpaU 

latter  +  ber  le^tere;  tlie  former  — 

the  latter,  biefer  —  jener. 
laugh  +  tac^en* 

laughter  +  ba^  ©elac^ter,  -^,  -, 
law,  ha^  ®efe|r  -c^,  -e* 
lawyer,  ber  5lbi?oca't/  -en,  -en» 
lay  +  legen* 
lazy,  fauL 
lead,  ^.,  fu^ren* 
leap  up,  l^inauffpringen  (an),  str.  III., 

1 ;  sep. 
learn  +  lernen;  erfa^ren,  str.  VL 
least,  at  — ,  tDenigften^* 
leave,  n.,  ber  ^bfc^ieb,  -^;  to  take 

— ,  ^^fd^ieb  ne^men. 
leave,  v.y  Iciffen,  str.  YILy  1 ;  to  — 

over,  iibrtg  laffen;  (a  place),   »er=^ 

laffen,  ^m^i^.;  abfa^ren,  str.  VI. t  sep., 

intrans. 


less,  weniger^ 

lesson,  bie  ^(ufgabe,  p^.  -n;  to  give  a 
— ,  eine  <Stunbe  geben. 

let  +  laffen,  str.  VII. ,  1. 

lever,  ber  ^ebel,  -^,  -♦ 

liberal,  adj.,  liberal. 

liberty,  bie  ^rei^eit,  pi.  -en. 

license,  w,,  'ti'xi  ^rei^ett,  p?.  -en;  bie 
Srlaubni^. 

lie  (lay,  lain)  +  Uegen,  str,  V.,  2. 

life  +  ba^  ^tbtxif  -^. 

lifeless  +  leblo^;  toU 

light,  n.,  +  ta^  2id)tf  -e^,  -er. 

lighten,  j»etterleud^ten» 

like,  the  — ,  bergleic^en* 

like, «?.,  Iteben,  mogen. 

lily  +  bie  ;2tlie,  pi.  -n. 

limit,  n.y  bie  ®renje,  pi.  -n» 

lion  +  ber  £ott>e,  -n,  -n;  ber  Seu  (poeti- 
cal). 

list  +  bie  Sifie,  pi.  -n. 

listen,  i^oren;  p^oren,  sep.,  to,  dat.; 
an'^oren,  sep.,  w.  ace. 

little,  fletn;  a  — ,  ein  mnig* 

lock,  n.,  ha^  ©c^log,  e^loffe^,  ^c^lof*' 
fer. 

lofty,  ^0(^* 

long  +  lang;  no  longer,  nlc^t  me^r; 
no  longer  any  (w,  substantive),  fein 
. . .  nte^r;  a  —  time,  lange. 

look,  to  —  upon,  betrac^ten. 

lose,  «.,  +  ijerlteren,  str,  11,2. 

Louis  +  2ubtt)ig,  -^* 

luxurious,  uppig* 

maiden  +  ba^  SWabc^en,  -^,  -. 

Majesty  +  bie  Mait\id^t,  pi.  -en. 

make  +  madden. 

malicious,  :§cimtu(ftfd). 

man  +  ber  Mam,  -e^,  -er;  abstract: 
ber  ?Dlen[c^,  -en,  -en. 

manage,  treiben,  str,  I.,  2. 

many  a,  see  262. 


78 


VOCABULARY. 


map,  bte  ^arte,  pi.  -n, 

marble  +  ber  5!?iarmor,  -^, 

march,  -y.,   +  ntarfc^ie'ren,   riiden  in 

II.  S.  Ex.  29. 
mark  (coin  =  24  cents)  +  bte  9)^ar!» 
mark  well,  see  306,  4. 
marksman,  ber  ^&)\x^i,  -n,  -n* 
mast  +  ber  5Wajl,  -e^,  -en  (for  -e)» 
master  +  ber  3)?eij!er,  -^,  -♦ 
matter  (=  thing),  n.,  bte  (Sad^e,  pi. 

-n;  ba^  2>tn5,  -e^,  -e^ 
mature,  v.,  m  9leife  bringen  (119, 2), 
maxim  of  virtue,  bie  2^ugenble'^re,  pi. 

-n. 
may  +  mag  {inf,  mogen,  135.  4). 
me  +  mir,  m\6)  (81j. 
meaning,  ber  ©inn;  -e^. 
meat  (food),  bie  ©peife,  pi.  -n. 
meet,  i).  (o/  persons),  jtc^  treffen,  s^r. 

/F. ;  to  —  again,  jt(^  wieberfe^en, 

str.  IV.j  1;  sep. 
medicine  +  bie  3}Zebiji^tt,  pi.  -en, 
memory,  ba^  5litbenfcn,  -^,  -♦ 
mention    in  one's   conversation, 

fpred^en  (str.  IV.)  »on;  erwa^nen  (w. 

gen.). 
merchant,    ber    i?aufmamt,    -^,   pi. 

(172). 
merely,  Mo^;  \\m\ 
merit,  n.y  ba^  S^erbtenjl,  -e^,  -e. 
message,  bie  SBotfc^aft,  pi.  -en. 
messenger,  ber  ©efanbte,  ein  ©efanb^^ 

ter  {see  220) ;  ber  33Dte,  -n,  -n. 
metal  +  ba$  mtta'U,  -i^,  -e. 
metre  +  ba^  3)Jeter,  -€^,  -♦ 
mill  +  bie  5Witp,  ^^.  -n. 
miller  +  ber  SJJitHer,  -^,  -♦ 
millionaire  +  ber  53?iIItonar,  -^,  -e. 
mind,  ha^  ®cmiit(&),  -e^,  -er. 
miner,  ber  SBergmann,  -^,  pi.  (172). 
minister  +  ber  9)iini^fler,  -^,  -♦ 
minstrel,  ber  danger,  -^,  -• 


minute  +  bie  3)?inu'te,  pi.  -n. 
mirror,  t^.,  ber  Spiegel,  -^,  -. 
mislead,  ijerleiten* 
misjudge,  ijerfennen  (119). 
misunderstand,    mi§^erjle:^en,     str. 

Vl.y  546,  2,  i?i56;?. 
mock  at,  ^o^n  fprei^en,  w.  dat. 
model,  n.y  ba^  S)orbilb,  -t^,  -er, 
modest,  befc^eiben. 
modern  +  mobe^rn ;  the — languages, 

bte  ncueren  (Bprad^en. 
Moldavia  +  bie  3)'?oIbau. 
moment,  ber  ^ugenBUcf,  -^,  -e. 
monarch  +  ber  9)Jona'r(^,  -en,  -en. 
money,  ha^  ®elb,  -e^,  -er» 
month  4-  ber  3)?onat,  -e^,  -e. 
monument,  ba^  T)tntmai,  -§,  -er, 
moon  +  ber  2Jlonb,  -e^,  -c. 
morals,  bie  Sitten  (pi.). 
more  +  nte^r;  — and — ,  tmmerme^r. 
morning,  +  ber  WloxQ^n,  -5,  -♦ 
mortal,  jlerMic^. 
moss  +  ba^  SWoo^,  -e^,  -e» 
most  +  bie  meijlen  (pL). 
mother  +  bie  3)?utter,  pi.  -. 
mountain,  ber  33erg,  -e^,  -e. 
mouth,  ber  2)?unb,  -e^,  pi.  9J?iinbe, 

9}?vtnbe,  ?D^itnber;  ber  Slacken,  -^,  -. 
move  (change  one's  residence),  um^ 

jie'^en,  str.  Il.y  sep. ;  —  about,  um== 

le'rjte^en,  sep. 
much,  many,  ijtel,  »iele» 
mud,  ber  ^xtd,  -e^. 
murder,  n.,  +  ber  !Korb,  -e^  (51). 
murderous  +  ntorberif(^;  —  blow, 

ber  3}^orbftreic^,  -e^,  -e. 
muzzle,  n.,  ber  2JZaul!orb,  -e^,  -e. 
my  +  mein  (85). 
mystery,  ba^  0idtfel,  -a,  -. 

nation  +  bie  5?atio'n,  pi.  -en. 
nature  +  bie  9?atu'r,  pi.  -en. 


VOCABULAKY. 


79 


near,  na^c  {comp.  na|er,  aup,  nac^fl)* 

w.  dat 
nearly,  fajl;  Beina^c. 
necessary,  nottg. 
necessity,  bte  9Zot,  pi.  -e  (rare). 
neck,  ber  ^oX^f  -e^,  -e» 
neighbor  —  ber  9Za(^barf  -^,  -n» 
neither  —  nor,  tceber  —  noc^» 
never,  nie, 

nevertheless,  benno(^« 
new  +  neu,  frtfi^. 
news,  bie  S'^ac^rtclt,  ^?.  -en. 
next  +  na(^j^» 
night  +  bte  S^lad^t,  p?.  -e, 
nine  +  neun, 

no,  indef.  numeral,  fein  (95). 
nobility,  ber  5lbel,  -^. 
noble,  ebel  (71). 
nobody,  niemanb  (97). 
nod,  to  —  to  one,  jutt)in!ettf  w.  dat., 

Sep,;  jumden;  w.  dat.,  sep.  (Ex. 

XX.,  II.  Series). 
none,  fetner  (95). 
nonsense,  ber  Unftnn,  -a. 
noon,  ber  Mitta^,  -^,  -e. 
not,  nic^t;  not  at  all,  gar  ntc^t* 
note-book,  ba^  |)eft,  -e^,  -e. 
nothing,  ni^t^* 
nothing  but,  lauter. 
notice,  v.,  kmerfen* 
noun,  ha^  ^auptivort,  -e^,  -er» 
novel,  n.y  ber  Oioma'n,  -^,  -e» 
now,  ie^t ;  +  nun* 

oak-tree  +  bie  (£t($e,  pi.  -n* 
obedience,  ber  ©e^orfam,  -(3. 
obliged,  to  be  — ,  mitffen  (135,  6). 
obstacle,  ha^  ^inbernt(3,  -niffe^,  -niffe. 
occupy,  kfe^en* 
o'clock,  at . . .  ~,  urn  ♦  ♦  ♦  U|r, 
Oder  4-  bte  Dber* 
of,  ijon  (303,  15). 


officer  +  ber  Dfftji'er,  -^,  -e. 
official,  n.,  ber  S3eanite,  -n,  -n;  ein 

^tartiitx,  pi.  S3eamte. 
often  +  oft. 
old  +  alt* 
once,  einmal;  +einfl  (formerly);  feiner 

Beit (443, 2);  at—,  foglei'c^;  fofo'rt. 
one,  indef.  pron.y  man. 
only,  nur* 

open,  v.,  +  offnen;  ft(^  ijffnen* 
opponent,  ber  ©egner,  -^,  -♦ 
order  (=  fraternity)  +  ber  Drben,  -^f 

-;  in  —  to,  urn  lu,  w.  inf. 
orderly,  geftttet. 
originally,  itrfpritngttcf). 
ornament,  ber  ©c^muc!,  -e^. 
orphan,  ber  (bie)  SBaife,  -n*  -n. 
other  +  anber;  +  anber^  (adv.). 
otherwise  +  anber^. 
over  +  iikr  (306,  7). 
overcome,  itberminben,  str.  III.,  1. 
overgrown    with    moss,    moo^U^ 

tDad^fen. 
owe,  fc^ulben;  fc^ulbig  fein. 
own,  adj.,  +  eigen* 

package  +  ha^  ^adt't,  -t^,  -e, 

paint,  v.,  ntalen* 

painting,  bas^  ©emalbe,  -^,  -♦ 

palace  +  ber  ^aia'%  -c^/  -c. 

palliate,  ^efd^omgen. 

paper  +  ba^  ^a\}x'tx,  -^,  -e;  sheet 

of  — ,  baa  a3Iatt;  -e^,  -er» 
parents,  bie  ©Item. 
Paris  +  3)ari'a* 
part,  in  — ,  teil^,  l^alb» 
patient,  n.,  ber  ^ranfe  (220). 
pass,  n.,  +  ber  9)a§,  9)affea,  mfK 
pass  away,  v.,  ba^in  ge^en. 
passage  (in  a  book),  bte  (BttUt,  pi.  -n. 
pauper,  ber  5lrme  (220). 
pay,  v.,  besa^Icn. 


80 


VOCABULARY. 


peace,  bcr  ^riebe  (46,  4). 
peasant,  ber  33auer,  -n  or  -^,  -n. 
pedestrian,  ber  i^u^ganger,  -^r-;  ber 

©c^nelllaufer,  -^,  -♦ 
pedlar,  ber  ^aufi^-er,  -4,  -♦ 
pen,  bie  ^eber,  pi.  -n. 
pence,  see  penny, 
penny  +  ber  S^fennig,  -^,  -e. 
pension,  v,,  +  penftonieren, 
Pentecost  +  ^^ftngjlen, 
people,  t»a^  2^olf,-e^»  -er;  bie  iCeute; 

the  young  — ,  bie  jungen  Seute* 
perfection,   bie   SJoUfommen^eit,   pi. 

-en* 
perhaps,  »iellei'c^t, 
permit,  v.,  erlauku. 
person  +  bie   9)erfo'nr   pi.  -en;    ber 

^m\^,  -en,  -en. 
physician,  ber  5(rjt,  -t^,  "e. 
pianist,  ber  ^latjt'erfpieler,  -^,  -;  bie 

^kijierfpieleritt,  pL  -ncn» 
picture,  ba^  23ilb,  -e^,  -er. 
piece,  n.,  ha^  ^tM,  -e^,  -e. 
pit,  71.,  bie  <?3ruBe,  _p?.,  -n. 
pity,  n.,  ha^  WxtUib,  -a. 
pity,  V,,  erkrmen;  ftd)  erbarmen. 
place,  to  take  — ,  flattftnben,  sir.  Ill.y 

1 ;  Sep. 
place,  -p.,  fe^en  (upright) ;  legen. 
plain  {=  clear),  flar. 
plan,  v.,  entwerfen,  str.  III.,  3. 
planet,  ber  ^Jlane't,  -en,  -en. 
play,  n.y  ba^  <Spiel,  -e^,  -e. 
play,  v.,  fpielen. 

plaything,  ba^  Spieljeug,  -e^,  -e. 
please,  gefatten,  str.  VIZ,  1 ;  w.  dat. 
pledge,  i).,  verlnnben.  str.  III.,  1. 
pocket,  V. ,  ein)lrei(^en,  str.  /.,  1 ;  sep. 
poet,  ber  Dic^ter,  -^,  -. 
poetry,  bie  ^oefte',  pi.  -n. 
point,  71.,  ber  9)unft,  -e^,  -e» 
poison,  ba^  (^ift,  -e^,  -c. 


police,  n.,  bie  ^olijci'. 
policeman,  ber  ^JoUsi'fi,  ~<Xi,  -en* 
politeness,  bie  ^oflit^feit,  pi.  -en. 
poor,  arm;  biirftig. 
porter,  ber  2)ien|lmannf  -^,  -er. 
portion,  ber  Sleil,  -e^,  -e. 
possess,  kfi^en,  str.  V.,  2. 
posterity,  bie  ^la^^mlu 
post-office  +  bie  ^o^,  pi.  -en. 
pound  +  ha^  3>funb,  -e^,  e  (175). 
power,  bie  ilraft,  pi.  -e;  bie  2)iad^t, 

pi.  -e. 
powerful,  — ly,  mdc^tig. 
practise,  fic^  iiben. 
praise,  loben. 
pray,  Mtten,  str.  F.,2. 
preach  +  prebigen. 
preacher  +  ber  5>rebiger,  -^ ;  S^farrer, 

-(3. 
precaution,  bie  f^iirforge. 
precept,  bie  lOe^re,  pi.  -n. 
precious,  foflbar. 
prepare  +  praparieren. 
present,  at — ,  je^t;  to  be — ,  babei^ 

fein,  Sep. 
president  +  ber  ^Jrafibe'nt,  -en,  -en. 
presumption,  bie  S^ermeffen^it. 
pretty,  p^fc6;  niebUd^. 
previous,  ijor^e'rge^enb. 
pride,  ber  ^oc^mut,  -a. 
priest  +  ber  ^^nefler,  -a,  -. 
principle  +  baa  ^^rinji'p,  -a,  -ien;  ber 

©runbfa^r  -ea,  -e. 
prison,  ber  Btt?tnger,  -a,  -. 
prisoner,  ber  ©efangene,  -n,  -n. 
prize,  n.,  ber  9)reta,  -ea,  -e. 
prodigious,  unge^euer. 
profit,  ber  ®ett)inn,  -ea,  -c. 
progress,  n,,  ber  ^ortfi^ritt,  -ea,  -e; 

ber  ®ang,  -t^,  -e. 
project,  n.,  +  baa  5)roje'ct,  -ea, -e. 
proper,  to  be  — ,  ftd)  jiemen. 


VOCABULAEY. 


81 


property,  M  SJermogen,  -^,  -. 

prophesy,  tpetffagen* 

prosperity,  tie  SBo^lfa^rt 

proud,  fiolj* 

provide,  i?erfe^ettf  sir.  V.,  1. 

provisions,  ber  S^orrat,  -^,  -t* 

prune,  «.,  Befd^neiben,  str.  Z,  1. 

Prussian  +  ber  9)reuper  -n,  -n* 

pupil,  ber  (B^ixkx,  -^,  ~. 

pure,  rein,  +  1)ur* 

put,  fe|en  (upriglit) ;  legen ;  —  on, 

am^un,  sep.  (136,  3). 
pursuit,  to  send  in  —  of,  nad^fenben 

(119),  w.  daL 
pyramid  +  bie  ^^rami'be,  pL  -n. 

quarrel,  ber  ^aber,  -^;  ba^  ^aberm  -<3. 
queen,  bie  ^onigittf  pi.  -nen^ 
quill,  bie  ^eber,  pi,  -n. 
quite,  gait^ 

rage,  tokn. 

rain,  v.,  +  regncn. 

raise,  l^eben;  auf^eBen,  str.  YIIL,  f^ep. 

random,  at  — ,  auf  gut  ®lu(f . 

rank,  to  —  above,  fte^en  (136)  iibcr* 

rather,  e^er* 

reach,  i?.,  +  retc^en,  erretd^en* 

read,  lefcn,  str.  V.,1. 

reading  {e.  g  ,  various  readings  in 

several  editions),   bie  Se^artr  pi. 

-en* 
ready  +  Bereit* 
really,  eigentUc^* 
reap,  ernten;  einernten,  Bep* 
reaper,  ber  ©d^nitter,  -^,  -♦ 
reason,  n.,  ber  Berftanb,  -e^» 
reasonably,  see  187. 
recall,  t?.,  |t(^  bejinnen  (auf),  str.IIT.,  2. 
rebel,  ti.,  ber  OieBc'IIr  -eur  -en* 
recede  (before),  »et(^ettr  «^r.  Z,  1; 


reflect,  nac^benfen  (119,  sep.)  iiber,  ^c. 

reflection,  bie  UeBerle'gung* 

refuse,  ijertweigern* 

regularly,  regelntci^ig* 

reign,  n.,  bie  9?egicrung,  pi  -en;  in 

the  — ,  see  306,  8. 
rejoicing,  ber  Subel,  -^ ;  ber  freubige 

Buruf, 
remain,  Bleikn,  str,  Z,  2. 
remember,  gebenfen  (119,  2),  w.  gen. ; 

ftd^  ertnnern,  w.  gen. 
'remembrance,  bie  Srinnerungr^?.-en» 
remit,  erlaffen,  str.  VIL 
re-open,  mteber  erofnen. 
repent,  reuen* 
report,  -y.,  beric^ten* 
representation,  bie  S^orjleEung,  j)^- 

-en* 
request,  to  —  something,  urn  etwa^ 

Bitten,  str,  F.,  2. 
require,  erforbern* 
resolve,  ft(^  entfc^Iiefen,  str.  11. ,  1. 
resound,  fc^alten;  erft^alten,  wk.,  also 

str.  vni. 

respect,  v,,  ac^ten. 

rest,  «.,  ru^en. 

retired,  to  live  a  —  life,  juriitf gejogen 

leBen* 
retreat,  n.,  ber  9?iitfmarf(^,  -e^,  -e* 
retreat,  «.,  jurucftreten,  str.  F.,  1  ; 

sep. 
return,  «. ,  juriicf fe^ren,  sep. ;  wieber" 

fe^reUf  sep,\  fe^ren  (poetical), 
Rhenish  +  r^etnifd), 
Rhine  +  ber  SfJ^ein,  -c^* 
ribbon,  ba(3  S3anb,  -e^,  -er. 
ride,  v.,  +  reiten,  st7\  Z,  1. 
ridicule,  n.,  ber  ©pott,  -e^. 
ridiculous,  lad^erlic^* 
right,  n.y  +  ba^  fRt^t,  -e^,  -e» 
right,  adj.,  +  rec^t* 


82 


VOCABULAEY. 


righteous  +  gerec^t;  the  —  (man), 
t)er  ©erec^te  (220). 

ring  +  ber  S^tng,  -t^,  -e* 

river,  ber  gluf,  %Mt^,  dim* 

road,  hit  ©tra§e,  pi.  -n. 

rob,  to  —  one  of  something,  Sineit 
urn  tttoa^  Brtttgcn  (119). 

rock,  ber  gelfen,  -«3,  -. 

Roman  +  ber  fRmtx,  -^,  -♦ 

Rome  +  9iom. 

room  (=  space)  +  ber  fftaum,  -e^,  -e; 
ber  9)la^,  -e^,  -e;  (=  dwelling- 
room),  bie  <Stu^er  ^^.  -n;  ha^  3xm^ 
Mter,  -^,  -. 

royal,  !omgIt(^» 

rude,  ro^» 

ruffian,  ber  S5ofett)i(^t,  -e^,  -e  (-er)» 

rummage,  framen. 

run,  «.,  laufeUf  str.  VII.,  2;  to  — 
away,  weglaufen,  str,  VII.,  2. ; 
sep. 

rye-bread,  ta^  (Sc^warjbrot,  -e^,  lit. 
black-bread. 

sacrifice,  v.,  o^)fern» 

sacrifice,  n.^  ba^  Opfer,  -^,  -• 

sad,  traurig. 

salute,  D.,  grii^em 

same,  the  — ,  berfetbc  (91). 

Saturday,  ber  ©onnabenb,  -^, -e;  ber 
(Samjlag,  -^,  -e» 

sausage,  bie  SSurjl,  p^.  -. 

save,  feltg  madjtn* 

Saxon  +  ber  (Bac^fe,  -n,  -n. 

say  +  fagen* 

scholar,  ber  (SJeleBrte,  -n,  -n» 

school  -f  bie  @(^ule,  p?.  -n. 

Schwyz  -t-  ©c^nj^j  (one  of  the  can- 
tons of  Switzerland), 

scissors  +  bie  (Bc^eere,  pi.  -n, 

scoff  at,  fpotten,  w.  gen. 

screw  +  bie  <B^xauht,  pi.  -n. 


seal  4-  bag  (Siegel,  -g,  -♦ 

secondly,  jn)eiteng, 

secret,  ge^eim;  Jeimlid^, 

secure  +  ft(^er, 

see  +  fe^eti,    str.  F.,  1 ;  fc^auerif  in 

II.   S.,  Ex.  21. 
seek  +  fu(^en, 

seize,  |alten,  str.  Vll.y  1 ;  fa|]en. 
semicircle,  ber  ^albfrei^,  -<^,  -e. 
senator  +  ber  ©enator,  -g,  -en  {see 

63,  2). 
send  +  fenben  (119)  ;  fc^icfen;  to  — 

there,  ^infc^icf en^  sep. ;  to  —  over, 

^^eriikrfci^icfen,  sep. ;  to  —  for,  fom^ 

men  laffen, 
sense,  ber  ©inn,  -eg,  -e, 
sentiment,  bag  ©efu^I,  -g,  -e. 
separate,  trennen, 
servant,  ber  2)iener,  -g,  -;  ber  S3e** 

biente,  -tt,  -n» 
service,  ber  !Dienft,  -eg,  -e. 
session,  bie  ©i^ung,  pi.  -en, 
set  (to  —  with  gems,  etc.),  befe^en, 
settle,  fc^li^ten, 
sever,  jerrei^en,  str.  J,  1. 
several,  me^rere;  ■—  times,  me^rmalg, 
shepherd,  ber  ^trte,  -n,  -n, 
shield  +  ber  <S(^tlb,  -eg,  -e, 
shoulder  +  bie  ©d^ulter,  pi.  -n* 
show,  v.y  jeigen, 
sickness,  bie  ^ranf^eit,  pi.  -en* 
sight,  ber  5lnbli(f,  -g,  -e» 
sign-board,  bag  vBc^ilb,  -eg,  -er. 
signify,  bebeuten. 
silence,  in  — ,  fdjwetgenb* 
silent,  fiumm;  to  be—,  fd^tpctgen,  str. 

1,2. 
silver  +  bag  (Stiber,  -g, 
since  +  feit  (303,  14). 
sink  -f-  ftnfen,  str.  Ill,  1 ;  untergc^en 

(136,    1),    Sep.;    I^inftnfen    (sink 

down),  sep. 


VOCABULARY. 


83 


Sir!  3)^cttt|)err;  ber  ^crr  (230,  8); 

(£tD.  SBo^lQe^oren  (86). 
sister  +  bie  ^6^m^tx,  pi.  -n, 
sit  +  fi^ettr  str.  F.,  2. 
situated,  to  be  — ,  liegen,  str.  F.,  2. 
skeptical  +  ffepttfc^* 
slander,  v.,  »erlewmbett» 
slave  +  ber  <S!la»e,  -n,  -n* 
sleep  +  fc^Iafen,  str.  VILA  {266, 2). 
slippery,  glatt, 
slow,  langfam  ;  trage. 
smiling,  to  be  —  {=  lovely),  kd^ett* 
smoke,  -y.,  rauc^en,  +  fc^mauc^en. 
soil,  v.,  kfubeltt* 
soldier  +  ber  Solbat,  -en,  -en ;   ber 

^nec^t,  -e^,  -e  (rare), 
solemn,  ernjl* 
somebody,  jemanb* 
something,  etwa^. 
sometimes,  jun)eUen ;  ^t^njeilen. 
son  +  ber  ©o^n,  -e^,  -e* 
song,  ha^  £ieb,  -t^,  -er^ 
soon,  ^alb  ;  as  —  as,  fobatb  a(^. 
sorrow,  n.,  ber  (Sc^merj,  -e^,  -en. 
sorry,  to  be  — ,  I)ebauern  ;  leib  t^un 

(imp.),  w.  dat. 
soul  4-  bie  (Secle,  pi.  -n. 
sound,  n.,  ber  ^lang,  -e^,  -e. 
soup  +  bie  ©up^e,  pi.  -n. 
source,  bie  DueUe,  pi.  -n. 
sow,  «.,  +  fden* 
spare,  ^.,  [(^onem 
speak  +  fprec^en,  str.  IV. ;  reben. 
special,  Befonber* 
speech,  bie  9?ebe,  pi.,  -n. 
speedily,  [(^leunigft* 
spend,  ijerwenben  (119). 
spill,  ijergiegen,  str.  II,  1. 
spirit,  ber  ®eijl,  -ee,  -er, 
splendid,  ^jrcic^tig  ;  in  a  —  manner, 

gropartig* 
spot,  n.,  bie  ©tette,  pi.  -n. 


spread,  iJ.  (of  epidemics,  etc.),  iiber** 

^anb  ne^mett^  5^r.  /F. 
spring,  n.,  bie  i^eber,  _p^.  -tt* 
spy  +  ber  <Spton,  -^,  -e. 
squire,  ber  ©belfnec^t,  -e^,  -e*  ■-. 

stable,  ber  <3taII,  -e^,  -e. 
staff  +  ber  ©tab,  -e^,  -e» 
stake,  to  be  at  — ,  e^  gilt. 
stand  +  jle^en,  str.  VI. ;  to  —  on 

end  (of  the  hair),  ftc^  jlraukn. 
star  +  ber  ©tern,  -i^,  -e. 
start,  'G.y  abfa^reit/  str.  VI. 
stately  +  jlattUc^  ;  jlolj. 
stay,  v.,  Utxbm,  str.  Z,  2. 
steeple,  ber  ^irc^turm,  -e^,  -€♦ 
step,  7z.,  ber  ©c^rttt,  -e^,  -e. 
steward,  ber  totntann,  -^,  -er» 
stick,  v.,  +  jletfen. 
still,  adv.,  no(^. 

stop  {intrans.),  piU  fte:^en  (136,  2). 
stormy  +  fturmifc^  ;  t»ilb  ktoegt  (of 

life). 
strangely,  feltfant/  fonberbar. 
stream  of  blood,  ber  33lutftra^Ir  -^» 
street  +  bie  ©trage,  pi.  -m 
strength,  bie  <Starfe^ 
strive  +  ftre^en. 
stroll,  v.,  fpajieren. 
strong,  ftarf. 
struggle,  v.,  fam^)fen. 
student  +  ber  ©tube'nt,  -en,  -en. 
study  +  ftubieren. 
stupid,  bumm* 

stupidity,  bie  ©umm^eit,  pi.  -en. 
style  (writing-instrument),  ber  ©rif** 

fel,  -^,  -. 
sublime,  er'&aben. 
subscribe  to,  unterfc^reiben,  str.  I,  2 

{w.  ace). 
success,  ber  (Srfctgr  -e^;  -e  ;  ha^  ®e^ 

Ungen,  -sJ. 
succumb,  unterltegen,  str.  V.,  2. 


84 


VOCABULARY. 


such  +  fold^  ;    such  things,  fo  et=* 

sudden,  on  a  — ,  ^nall  nv^  %<iU. 

suffer,  leiben,  str.  I.,  1 ;  bulben, 

sufficient,  l^intdngltc^. 

suit  (of  clothes),  ber  ^njug,  -e^,  -e. 

suit,  v.,  paffen^ 

sum,  bie  (Bumme,  pL  -«♦ 

superlative  +  ber   <Bu'ptxlati^,  -^, 

-e» 
superstition,  ber  SlbetglauBe,  -n^, 
support,  v.,  ernd^rem 
sure  +  |id)cr,  w.  gen. 
surge,  v.,  vooo^m* 
swear  +  fc^moren. 
sweet  H-  fug, 

sweetheart,  ha^  iQteSc^en,  -^,  -♦ 
Swiss,  n.,+  ber  ^(^tr>eijer,  -^,  -  ;  the 

—  people,  ba^  fSolt  ber  ©c^tDeijer* 
sword  +  ba^  (Bi^xotxt,  -e^,  -er* 
sword-song,  ba^  <Sc^tt)ertIieb. 
sympathy  +  bie  ©i^mpat^tef  pi.  -en, 

take,  ne^mett,  str,  IV,  ;  to  —  a  city, 
eU. ,  einne^men,  sep. ;  to  —  place, 
ftattjtnben,  str.  III.,  1 ;  sep.;  to  — 
to  heart,  ju  ^erjen  ne^men. 

talk,  ^.,  reben  ;  fprec^en,  sir.  IV. ; 
f(^ma^en^ 

tall,  grop  ;  lang, 

taste,  7i.,  ber  ©efc^macfr  -^,  -e ;  to 
have  a  —  of,  fc^mecfen  nac^. 

tea  +  ber  St^ee,  -^,  -a. 

teach,  Ie|ren. 

teacher,  ber  £e|rer,  -^,  -♦ 

tear,  «.,  jerret§en,  str.  1, 1. 

tear,  n.y  bie  S^'^rdtie,  2^?.  -n* 

tease,  «.,  neden. 

tell,  fagen;  (=  relate),  erja^Ien. 

temerity,  fii^ner  3)?ut(^)» 

tempt,  i)erfud^em 

terrible,  f iirc^terUci& ;  fd^rctfltd^. 


testimony,  ba$  Beugni^,  -ffe^,  -ffc* 

thaw,  i).,  +  tauen. 

the  —  the,  je  —  bejlo. 

theatre  +  ba^  Sl^ea'ter,  -^,  -. 

theft,  ber  2)tebfia^U  -^,  -e, 

their,  i^r  (85). 

then  +  banm 

there  +  ba;  expletive  :  e^. 

therefore,  barum;  brunts 

Theresa  +  St^erefta. 

thereupon  +  barauf;  \>(i\  bann. 

thief  +  ber  ^teb,  -e^,  -e. 

think  +  benfen  (119,  2);  meinen* 

this  +  biefer  (90). 

thought,  n.,  ber  ®ebattfe,-n^,  -n» 

thread,  n.y  ber  f^abett,  -^,  -;  (with- 
out umlaut)  =  fathoms. 

three  +  brei* 

thrive,  gebei^en,  str.  J.,  3. 

throne  +  ber  %'^xm,  -t^,  -t. 

through  +  bur(^  (304,  2). 

thus,  fo,  ba^er, 

till,  adv.,  V\^^ 

time,  bie  Beit,  pi.  -en;  several l;imes, 
nte^rmal^. 

tired,  miibe,    * 

to  +  ivi,  w.  dot. 

toadstool,  ber  9)ftfferUn9,  -^,  -e. 

together,  beifammen. 

to-morrow  +  morgen. 

tone  +  ber  2:on,  -ii,  -e» 

too  +  JU. 

tool,  ba^  SSerfjeug,  -ea,  e, 

touch,  ^.,  ^erii|ren  (^.  ace.) ;  rit^ren 
an  («^.  ace). 

toward,  gegen  (304,  4). 

town,  bie  ©tabt,  pi.  -e» 

trace,  t^.,  bie  ©pur,  ^^.  -en. 

train  (railway  — ),  ber  Bug^  -c^r  -^  ; 
on  the  — ,  per  Sifenba^n. 

traitor,  ber  S5errdter,  -^,  -. 

transatlantic  +  tran^atknttfd^. 


VOCABULAEY. 


85 


transgress,  itberfc^reitett,  &tr.  Z,  1. 
translate,  uberfe^en. 
traveller,  ber  0leifenbe  (220). 
treason,  high  — ,  ber  ^o(^»errat,  -^. 
treasure,  7i.,  ber  ©(|a^,  -e^,  ^e, 
treat,  v.,  ^e^anbelm 
trifle,  n.,  bie  ^leiniglett,  pi,  -en, 
Trinity-Sunday,    'iio.^    S^rtnita^t^fejl 

{in  a  popular  song  :  ^^rinitat). 
triumphal  procession,  ber  Slriumpl^^ 

pg,  -e^,  -e. 
trouble,  n.,  bie  ^vi^t,  pi.  -n ;  bie 

^\a^i,  pi.  -n, 
Troy  +  %xii\Ci,  -^, 
truth,  bie  2Ba:^r|eit,  pi.  -en. 
Turk  +  ber  Sitrfe,  -n,  -n» 
turn  aside,  trans,  v.,  aWittn,  sep. 
twice,  see  531,  2. 
tyranny  +  bie  3^^rannei\ 
tyrant  +  ber  Sl^ra'nn,  -en,  -en, 
Tyrolese  +  ber  Sl^ro'ler,  -^,  -• 

unable,  unfd^ig* 

uncle  +  ber  Dnfel,  -^,  -  ;  ber  D^txm, 

-^f  -e. 
under  +  unter  (306,  8). 
understand,  i)er|le|ett  (136,  2);  be*' 

greifen,  str.  Z,  1. 
understanding,  ber  SJerfianb,  -e^  ; 

bie  SDernunft  (reason), 
unequal,  unglei(^* 
unfortunate,  unglitcfUc^. 
union,  bie  S^erMnbung,  pi.  -en, 
unite,  ijerbinben,  str.  III.,  1 ;  Binben, 

inlll.  S.,  Ex.  1. 
United  States,  bie  SJeretnigten  <Btaa^ 

ten, 
universal,  aUgemein, 
university  +  bie  Uniijerfttci't,  pi.  -en, 
unmixed  4-  ungemifd^t, 
unprincipled  (ojne  ©runbfa^e) ;  fc^led^t, 
until,  bi^. 


untranslatable,  unitberfe^bar  (422, 

6). 
upper  +  okr, 
use,  -».,  ftc^  bebienen,  w.  gen. 
useful,  nii^Iic^, 
useless,  nnnu^, 
usually,  getDo^nlic^, 
utmost,  auferj^, 

vacation,  bie  i^erien  (pi;  see  174, 

6). 
vain,  in  — ,  ijergeben^, 
valley,  ba^  %^al,  -t^,  -er, 
vanish,  »erf^tt)inben,  str.  III.,  1  {aux. 

fein), 
velvet,  ber  8ammt,  -e^,  -e, 
venture,  v.y  n>a9en, 
verse  +  ber  S^er^,  -e^,  -e, 
very,  fe|r ;  —  much,  adv.,  fe^r, 
vexed,  to  be  — ,  t)erbrte§en  (imp.,  w. 

ace.) ;  ji^  argern  iikr,  w.  ace. 
victim,  \)ix^  Opfer,  -^/  -, 
Vienna  +  SBien, 
village,  ba^  2)orf,  -e^,  -er. 
virtue,  bie  Slugenb,  pi.  -en, 
visit,  v.,  befuci^en, 
voice,  n.,  bie  (Stimnte,  pi.  -n. 
volume,  ber  S3anb»  -e^,  -e. 
wagon  +  ber  SGDagen,  -^,  -♦ 
wait,  tvarten, 
walk,  to  take  a  — ,  fpajieren  ge^en 

a36). 

walk,  «.,  ge^ctt  (136) ;  fc^reiten,  str, 
/.,  1. 

Wallachia  +  bie  SSattad^ct'. 
wander  +  wanbern;  fd^tt)etfen. 
wanderer  +  ber  S©anberer,  -^,  -, 
want,  «.  (=  wish),  motten  (135,  7) ; 

tt)iinfc^en, 
war,  ber  ^rieg,  -ed;  -e, 
warlike,  friegerifd^, 
ward  (of  a  key),  ?  er  SBart,  -c3,  -e* 


se 


VOCABULAEY. 


warm,  to  get  —  over,  ftd)  mormen  an 

(w.  dat.). 
watch,  n.  (time-piece),  bie  U^r,  pi. 

-en. 
watch,  «.  (=  look  on),  jufe^en,  sir. 

F.,  1 ;  Sep.  (w.  dat.). 
watchful,  tt)a(^fam  (auf,  w.  ace.). 
water  +  ba^  SSaffer,  -^,  -♦ 
watering-place,  ba^  33ab,  -e^,  "er. 
waver,  toanhxL 
way  +  ber  SSeg,  -e^,  -e ;   bie  ^xt, 

-en. 
weak  +  fc^wad^ ;  —  man,  ber  (B^m6)^ 

ling,  -^,  -e. 
weather  +  ba^  SKetter,  -^. 
week  +  bie  SBoc^e,  pZ,  -n. 
weep,  tpeinen. 
weigh  +  iDiegen,  sir.  11.,  2  {see  133 

and  124). 
welcome,  ^.,  +  Bemi^IIfommen. 
welfare,  ba^  2Bo|lerge^enr  -^. 
well-meaning  +  tt)o^lmeinenb. 
Weser  +  bie  SBefer. 
Westphalian  +  njejlfoiUfc^. 
what  ?  +  n)a^  ? 
whatever,  xool^* 
when  ?  +  njann  ?  {conj.),  al^. 
wheel,  n.y  ba^  9lab,  -es^,  ^r. 
where  +  IDO. 
which  +  m\^  (92,  2). 
while,  C6>7y.,  tr>a^renb;  fo  lange  al^. 
white  +  n)ei§. 
whither  ?  njo^in  ? 
who  (r^^f.  pron.),  ber;  toelc^er  (93). 
whole,  ganj. 
why  ?  tt)arum  ?  n>a^  ? 
vricked,  bofe. 
wide  +  weiU 

widow  4-  bie  SSittroe,  p?.  -n. 
will,   the    last    — ,  ba^  Sleflante'nt, 

-  e^,  -e. 
will,  u,  4-  WoUen  (135,  7). 


William  +  Sil^etm. 

willing  +  njillig. 

win,  erttjerkn,  str.  III.,  3. 

wind  +  ber  2Binb,  -e^,  -e. 

wind  up,    aufwinben,  str.  III.,  1 ; 

Sep. 
window,  ha^  ^enjler;  -^,  -♦ 
wine  +  ber  SBein,  -e^,  -e. 
winter  +  ber  SBinter,  -^,  -. 
wise  +  ttjetfe ;  —  man,  ber  SBeife 

(220). 
wish,  n.,  +  ber  2Bunfc^,  -e^^  "e;  bie 

wish,  v.,  n)oIIen  (135,  7);  +  wiin^ 

fd^en. 
witch,  bie  |)ere,  pi.  -n. 
without,  o^ne  (304,  5). 
witness,  n.,  ber  Beuge,  -n,  -n. 
woe,    n.,    +    baa    2Be^,    -e^  ;    bie 

^ein. 
woe  1  +  tr>e^e  I  (w.  dat.). 
woman,  ha^  SBeib,  -e^,  -cr;  bie  grau, 

pi.  -en. 
wool  +  bie  SBoHe. 
work,  n.,  +  ba^  2Ber!, -ee,  -e;  — of 

art,  baa  ^unflwerf. 
work,  v.,  arbeiten* 
workman,  ber  5(rbeiter,  -a,  -♦ 
V70rks  (the  —  of  an  author),  +  bie 

SBerfe;  bie  (Sc^riften. 
world  +  bie  SBelt,  pi.  -en  ;  the  — 's 

history,  bie  SBeltgefc^i^te;  the  — 's 

judgment,  ha^  SSeltgerid^t. 
worry,  n.,  ber  SJerbru^,  S^erbruffea^ 
worthy  +  tvurbig. 
wound,  v.,  +  ijermunben, 
wrench  (from),  abjmingen,  str.  III., 

w.  dat. 
write,  f(^reiben,  str.  Z,  2. 

yard,  bie  ©He,  pi.  -tt» 
ye  +  i^r. 


VOCABULARY. 


87 


yea,  ^ar. 

year  +  ba^  5a^r,  -<^,  -c»  • 

yearn,  ftd^  fe^nen* 

yesterday  +  geftern, 

yet,  bo^,  bennod) ;  of  time :  nod^;  not 

yet,  nod)  nic^t* 
yield  (=  obey),  ge^orc^en;  w.  dat. 


yonder,  borU 

you,  ©ie,  4-  ibr, 

young  +  iung  ;  the  —  people,  bie 
iungen  !2eute ;  —  of  an  animal,  ba^ 
Sunge,  cin  Sunge^,  see  220. 

youth  (=  young  man),  +  ber  Siing^ 
ling,  -^f  -e» 


x00w-7,'39(402.s) 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


iip 


^^        ^   'l   >\'     \'    V     I 


f!^mm 


;><•:■• 


